JP2019208524A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of maintaining game interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes start pockets capable of receiving a game ball shot into a game area 5a. When a game ball enters a start pocket, determination processing for winning is performed. Then, variation display corresponding to the determination processing result is started, and a winning game is played when a winning pattern is displayed in the variation display. In this respect, the Pachinko machine 1 can perform special display as a performance relating to operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “slot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as can be seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, a gaming machine is known in which a special game that allows a large amount of prizes to be obtained when winning is won.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning game ball at the starting port. Then, when a game ball is won at the start opening, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a winning combination is made. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined display for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating that the winning combination is won, and the opening / closing member of the big prize opening is operated, so that it is more for the player. A special game that can be awarded a prize is offered.

JP 2017-006393 A

  In such a conventional gaming machine, an effect by the operation means is often executed, but it is required to further improve the game entertainment when the effect by the operation means is performed.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of a game entertainment attraction.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination;
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means;
An accepting means for accepting an action by a player so as to be used for production;
摸 image display means capable of displaying 摸 image display related to the reception object;
It is possible to generate a specific reception period in which the reception by the reception unit is allowed, and when an operation by the player is received within the specific reception period, a process of causing the presentation to proceed based on the reception is executed. Possible reception production execution means,
Prior to the occurrence of the specific reception period, a sign production execution means capable of displaying a specific sign production display,
The specific precursor effect display can be executed in a manner straddling the timing at which the specific reception period occurs, and an action by the player can be accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed. Yes,
The accepting means is
A first reception means for receiving a predetermined action by a player so that it can be used for production, and a second reception that is different from the first reception means for receiving a specific action by a player for use in production. Means at least,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light during the specific reception period in which the player is allowed to accept an operation;
further,
The reception effect execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that a process for advancing an effect can be executed in any of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation based on the determination result of the determining means.

In the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the reception period, it is possible to display a specific precursor effect display, and the specific precursor effect display can be executed in a manner straddling the timing at which the reception period occurs, The player's action can be accepted while the specific sign effect display is displayed (see, for example, paragraphs 3740 and 3776, and FIGS. 264 and 265).
That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to accept the player's action while making it possible to confirm which mode is displayed as the indication effect display, the game by forgetting to check the indication effect display mode Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in Fig.51 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from before. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the game panel of the form different from FIG. 63 from the front with the front structural member, the board | substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 90 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a LOCKN signal log | history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection malfunction determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 2nd starting port passage process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about jackpot determination processing (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a jackpot determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a gate part passage process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) referred by the said effect symbol variation start process when it is in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished according to the kind of alerting | reporting sound illustrated in FIG. 128 other than alerting | reporting content, alerting | reporting aspect, alerting | reporting time. (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (B) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (C) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (D) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining according to the notice state of the pachinko machine 1 about the contents of notice processing under production progress. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when an operation sound output process under suppression is performed. It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform a sword production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition production according to the classification of a fluctuation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword book effect. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in a sword part (blade part) itself, (A) A sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd Indicates the extracted state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword ornament in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, (A) Sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd sword state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous production. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. Like the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the second suggestion pattern being performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword ornament is not activated and the operation button is activated once, then the sword ornament is activated It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related effect. It is a figure explaining the example about an effect when "the specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of a timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of production for every production about a production when a plurality of types (prediction production A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a production of indication. It is a figure which shows those production examples about the production content when the precursor production which is not a specific operation relevant production is performed, and the production content when the precursor production as a specific operation related production is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the content of the effect when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific effect aspect) to which the princess character was added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when a 1st sign production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when the 1st sign production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol fluctuation | variation starts comes in the condition where a specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special production pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode when new restoration operation time (symbol change start timing, end timing, etc.) comes during execution of restoration operation. It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode when new restoration operation time (symbol change start timing, end timing, etc.) comes during execution of restoration operation. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process until a sword ornament 5001 returns to an original position. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when changing a state between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows a display example when the expectation effect that a princess character is largely displayed as a background image is performed during execution of a specific effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a help image is displayed in the state in which the expectation effect shown in FIG. 200 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when generating a production | presentation limitation period in a non-game state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the example about the process when a production | presentation limitation period is terminated at an early stage. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process concerning a special period (opening exclusive period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the process when a game is started when it is set to the opening special period (special period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the example about special operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data containing a reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of production when a low expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of production when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of production when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about a modification when a high expectation suppression reception effect is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example of the production in which the 1st permissible sound is outputted in the specific mode at the time of the occurrence of “non-suppression operation reception production (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception production)”. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the production according to the high expectation variation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the production according to the high expectation variation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the production according to the high expectation variation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears in "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target" in the suppression / automatic reception effect (suppressed movement reception effect). It is a time chart which shows the production content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 1 is selected by fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the production content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 2 is selected by fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the production content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 3 is selected by fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the content of the effect which appears when the "internal reception effect" produces | generates while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is made into the "non-suppression mode". It is a time chart which shows the example as a concept about the process sequence when implement | achieving various display effects using scenario data or a block. It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process when there is no operation detection before and after an effect reception period (effective period). 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where an operation is started at the “m + 1” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where an operation is started in the “m−2” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where an operation is started in the “m−2” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where an operation is started from the “m−3” frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. About the stage of accepting the presentation (effective period) when the timing of the “operation (setting) process to set the operation state flag to the on state” in the frame is performed after the “determination process for the stage of accepting the presentation” It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows the example about an integrated haze image. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about an integrated haze image until it is complete | finished after an effective period is started. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about an integrated haze image until it is complete | finished after an effective period is started. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect progress when a 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about effect progress when the 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about effect progress when the 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about effect progress when the 1st effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect progress when the 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about effect progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about effect progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about effect progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the modification about effect progress when a 2nd effective period generate | occur | produces. It is a figure explaining the modification about the production | presentation which suggests the expectation degree concerning an integrated haze image in steps. It is a figure which shows the example about an integrated haze image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect progress in the effective period when an integrated haze image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect progress in the effective period when an integrated haze image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect progress in the effective period when an integrated haze image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 2nd acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 1st acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of production when a 2nd reception permission state generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example about the production | presentation content when a 1st reception permission state generate | occur | produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 4th acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 5th acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 1st condition is satisfied as a result of judgment, and the 1st reception period (1st reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of production when the 2nd condition is satisfied as a result of judgment, and the 2nd reception period (2nd reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the production | presentation content when 3rd conditions are satisfy | filled as a result of determination, and the 3rd reception period (3rd reception production | generation) generate | occur | produces. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of production when the 4th condition is satisfied as a result of judgment, and the 4th reception period (4th reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 5th condition is satisfied as a result of judgment, and the 5th reception period (5th reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 6th condition is satisfied as a result of judgment, and the 6th reception period (sixth reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of production when the 7th condition is satisfied as a result of judgment, and the 7th reception period (seventh reception production) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st reception period (1st reception effect) generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st reception period (1st reception effect) generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception effect) generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception effect) generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th reception period (4th reception effect) generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th reception period (4th reception effect) generate | occur | produces. It is the modification of the production | presentation regarding a reception period. It is the modification of the production | presentation regarding a reception period. It is the modification of the production | presentation regarding a reception period. It is the modification of the production | presentation regarding a reception period. It is the modification of the production | presentation regarding a reception period.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for low sound inside attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is accommodated, and a payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. A payout control board box 950 There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement cutout portion 11, an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right fixing member 87 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a symmetrical shape in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow space are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the upper fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from an end side from the left end of the front extension portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B, etc.).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-plate-like lock body 66a that extends in the front and rear directions with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion that projects rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and then diagonally left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending plate-like horizontal portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 vertically so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state in the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being pinched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 being open with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the right side unit 550 of the door frame. It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is upper and lower from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and forward through the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and the left and right sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right upper reinforcing metal plate 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left and right middle reinforcing member attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending up and down attached along the front left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement extending up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement part 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that engages the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers from the outside.

[3-1c. Hinge member on door frame side]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A column-shaped door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of protruding pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame And a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat extending piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side in front view of the through-hole 111. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of a position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and projects from the base portion 171 in a bar shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, so that the gravity center position of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened and closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are opened and closed.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side in front view attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 on the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side in front view in Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34A, and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 39A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 39B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back after being broken down as every main member. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side from the first button decoration part 411a A plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a is formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and is arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the game. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, so that when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 is difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player is relatively easy to press (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player who presses the operation button 410 is operated. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the production operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross hatched portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative part 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative part 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective upright wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that is erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, an inner side surface that is formed to be flat and faces the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. This reflective surface can be provided by providing the inner side surface of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner side surface. Is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective upright wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion that bears a part (left side portion) of the reflective upright wall portion 33 described above.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and is formed in a triangular shape with a mountain portion between the grooves sharpened backward, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. Thereby, the multi-face decoration part ahead of the square lens part 532b in the left unit decoration lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative part forward from the square lens part 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light emitted from the circular decorative part 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the center in the vertical direction at the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 51C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 55A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51A. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes the right diffuser and the right unit left diffusing lens in front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 when viewed from the front. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape in which the center portion in the front-rear direction is closed, extending in a rectangular tube shape short in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, an inner side surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. In addition, this reflective surface is provided with a reflective material such as metal or resin, as well as the inner side surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, as well as the inner side surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the reflection standing wall portion 33 described above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole moves to the right from the rear end side toward the front, so that the main body 553a is moved to the right in the front view with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the input lens portion 553e is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 556a moves to the left from the front as it goes from the rear end side to the front, and the whole body portion 556a is entirely perpendicular to the front vertical line of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern including a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends rightward from the right surface and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can decorate the light emission.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four parts by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located at the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration is provided. Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides in the vicinity of the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By causing the member 561 and the like to be decorated with light emission in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of the malfunction to the staff of the game hall, and to respond quickly to the malfunction. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, each of the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) has an internal space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space, the above-mentioned outer-peripheral light-emitting part 34 (left outer-periphery light-emitting part 34a, right-outer outer-periphery light-emitting part 34b) provided to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the outer periphery of the opening window The outer-periphery light detector 35 (the left-hand outer light detector 35a and the right-hand outer light detector 35b) that detects the light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and LEDs are respectively mounted at portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271 pass therethrough. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors which are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and have a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right and a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the left and right directions and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely forward from the front portion of the trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c squarely cut from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d cut from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a front surface behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state where the front middle decorative board 577 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be decorated by emitting light by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevennesses formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the light guide members 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. In addition, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a, 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 that is positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the top main decorative lens member 579 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. Can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the right front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with light emission.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the opened part is closed by the unit main body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are bent backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating the door frame base unit 100 at the front and rear of the door frame base 110 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to bend backward (the plate unit). 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320 and bulging out in a forward direction, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Moreover, since the operation button 410 having a large diameter and bulging forward is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation buttons 410 can be operated well from the front or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, vibration due to heavy bass from the lower speaker 921 outputted forward from the lower speaker port 326e can be felt tactilely by the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  The door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, Recessed shape so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. Accordingly, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Each projecting greatly at the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can show a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and by the sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a part of the function display unit from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows game balls to be received either in accordance with the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning ports 2001, and a side unit that is attached to the upper left end of the side unit bottom 2200 in front view. A top 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004, which are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The movable effect unit 3400 and the rear lower movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left side in front view, and the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower end, a lower side of the out guiding part 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 are inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, whereby the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 that is formed to be slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and made of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if a fault nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 that are round holes that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extend in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. It is equipped with. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Moreover, the panel board 1110 is provided with the step-shaped engagement step part 1115 which the front side became depressed in the both ends of an upper side, and the both ends of a lower side, respectively. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a, like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 includes a holding step 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 5a inside the holding step 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front surface. The holding step 1121 is formed such that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a predetermined clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A plurality of protruding pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper portion of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side. By engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and between the front component member 1000, the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The insertion hole 1129 is inserted through the rear end of the function display unit 1400.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1150 according to an embodiment different from the gaming panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front component member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board such as a veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The gaming panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

  The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 includes an out-port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower rear side of the out port 1151 has the same width as the out port 1151 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view of the lower end and is opened downward. The notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component member 1000 and the up-down direction above the notch portion 1152 And a square insertion hole 1153 into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front and rear directions in which the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. The game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the game panel can be connected to the front component member 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating forward and backward for attaching the front unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above. ing.

  The gaming panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  Note that the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. Yes. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various functions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402 made up of, the normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate 2003, and the game ball received at the first starting port 2002 are selected by lottery. The first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and the first special reservation composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 2002 Number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or second It is mainly provided with a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (rounds) of the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the special lottery result is “big hit” or the like.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface when viewed from the front in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that enables the reception of game balls in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning ports 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first start opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the out port 1126, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning holes 2001, and a side unit that is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 in front view. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004, which are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

  In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the big winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and can be opened and closed according to the gaming state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

  In the game area 5a, the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the effect unit provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has its entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that releases the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases the game ball into the game area 5a. The start opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530. When a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received at the first start opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is open at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the left-right direction and accommodates the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b, and two fixed grooves 3010c into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the left side in the rear view of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal attachment 3030b.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-like fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions for mounting each movable effect unit and the like.

  The back unit 3000 is appropriately used using a rear-behind movable effect unit 3100, a rear-upper left movable effect unit 3200, a rear-left movable effect unit 3300, a rear-upper movable effect unit 3400, a lower-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is obtained by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be struck harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, that is, A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow velocity of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open to the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game ball is positioned immediately above the first start port 2002, and is therefore received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn to the center side in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200 There is a possibility that it will be received in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided flows down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery result of the normal lottery is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it is in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal variation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R big hit "," perpendicular change (probability change) per "," shorter time (shorter time) per "," shorter per probability change "," short per chance at the time of probable change ", etc.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where it can accept the game ball with a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special prize opening 2005 when the special prize opening 2005 is in an open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) of gaming balls from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the winning prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the winning prize opening 2005 to accept game balls, it is possible to pay out a large number of game balls and entertain the player.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept game balls, or the winning prize opening 2005 When one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeat the number of times (the number of predetermined rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 15 rounds for “15R big hit”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn from the start of the special lottery is suggested. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and thus the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence varies) The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of the center accessory 2500, various ornaments of the back unit 3000, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, and the back left movable effect The unit 3300, the back / upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back / under front movable effect unit 3500, and the like can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. The player can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided in the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are provided in the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  Further, the decorative member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention. The second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention. .

  Furthermore, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. LED 477a of 477 is a light emitter of the present invention, door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, unit base 431 of base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the rendering operation unit 400 (or the second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button internal decoration portion 432g of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Of the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective that is not perspective and can attract the player's attention strongly. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  Further, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. As a result, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate from each other. The first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) due to the change in the distance from the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc. , Etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration) The decoration (cross mode) by the member 478, etc. can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button internal decorative member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will vary greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be satisfactorily viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be seen through. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the operation button, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame are passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed toward the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 includes the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g stand out can be surely exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that is visible in the center of the operation button internal decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Furthermore, each LED (or sub-screen decoration board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 is provided. When the LED 477a) is caused to emit light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button internal decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner area by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, the second button inner decoration section 432g has an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper part. While the inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a has the second button inner decoration. The light is decorated with indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button inner decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly luminescent decorated, whereas the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly luminescent decorated. In the state where each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 emits light, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration section 411a When the two-button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is viewed, it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized perspective, and appealing power that strongly attracts the player's interest. A high pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame) The side second effect display device 460A) can be widened to the outside and made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device can be enlarged). 460A) can stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 is disposed outside the button lens 411, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 is arranged. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can enhance the decorativeness, enhance the appearance, and attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is made flat. Compared with the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be hardly broken (hard to break). Therefore, the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, so that the game is interrupted, and it can be avoided that the player feels frustrated and deteriorates the interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, the bottom of the through hole 111 is provided. On the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, the outer diameter is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing and retreating) by a player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ˜30 cm, and an operation button interior that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. The frame-shaped frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage ball of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (the second Since the production operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize that the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 includes a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are provided on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. The first button 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. Inside the frame body 416 that partitions the decoration portion 411b Since the cylindrical portion 416d, the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that partitions the second button decoration portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. Illumination can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated to emit light. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a light emission effect with good appearance can be performed. Moreover, various patterns of light-emitting effects can be performed by appropriately combining the turn-off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the first LED 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by emitting light are decorated as one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared to the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LED 422a, 423a can be moved away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LED 422a, 423a is sufficiently The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. . Accordingly, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's attention is strongly attracted. In addition, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved forward and backward. In addition, the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Accordingly, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b The player can entertain the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 are provided. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached to the second button decoration part 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light appropriately so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. Since the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 decorating the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated with various patterns as described above, the player's interest is controlled by the operation buttons 410 and The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). It is possible to entertain an effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be displayed to the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By making it operate, it is possible to entertain the player to operate the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Then, when performing the player participation type effect, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation buttons 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 and to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with a light-transmitting main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411f of the operation button 410 is provided. A portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged at the rear side by becoming brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being difficult to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect are provided) through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b is received at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d from the diffusion range is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. Never do. Accordingly, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  Since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a. Since the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive through the rear end of the main body 413a, light penetration into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. Can do. Therefore, the first LED 422a and 423a can be used to decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a favorable state, and the rear operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can fully enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is located in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second) is formed from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect is produced with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) difficult to see. Accordingly, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved. Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since the player can show the player such as a lighting effect or a light emitting effect in which the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, the player can make the player less tired by various light emitting effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is obtained by placing the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and a predetermined installation space is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 in the lower plate body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from the portion. A part corresponding to the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 is extended inside, and a lower dish 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower plate 322 looks small, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's interest strongly. it can.

  In addition, at the portion of the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from contacting the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 abut or press against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and to reduce the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  Also, lower plate covers 340 and 340A that restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall 325b and the mounting space 326j in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. Therefore, the game ball can be prevented from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling injured or uncomfortable by intruding the game ball into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 jumps in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion of the lower plate main body 325). 326d), when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips or the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Can prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Can do.

  Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate cover 340, 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is reliably damaged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the lower dish ball hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A is provided as described above, the game ball of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is provided. Since it can be prevented from coming into contact with the rear side, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be prevented from being damaged, and the interruption of the game is reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be reduced, the lower tray cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower plate cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower plate cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate cover 340, 340A. The increase in the burden on the side of the game hall in which 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface swells most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game that allows a game ball to be received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. The tray unit 320 is provided with the tray unit cover 326 and attached to the most swelled portion of the stage operation unit 400 and the second stage operation unit 400A, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322 that can store a game ball, the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) on the outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) in front view. Lower space 1st area | region A1 located and the space of the rear part of the installation space 326j used as the back of the production operation unit 400 (2nd production operation unit 400A) in front view The second stage operation area 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be made conspicuous when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper dish 321). And the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it less noticeable. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that is conspicuous can be seen in the portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible on the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine that is different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power capable of attracting the player's interest can be obtained.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, a portion of the surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is open is provided. The first lower pan body 325 having a lower pan second region A2 located in the rear space of the attachment space 326j that is behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range (the lower plate second region A2) that cannot be seen from the front in the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured against the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate body 325 and the main body 325A having the lower plate first area A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second area A2, the first extension part 325B and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, a first extension portion 325B, a second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension unit 325B, and the second extension unit 325C of a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size of the installation space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be rearranged (replaced), so that the space of the rear part of the attachment space 326j can be accommodated. Since the size of the rear space depends on the rearward projecting amount of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), various rendering operation units 400 (second second) having different rearward projecting amounts. It can be set as the lower plate 322 which can respond to production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape that is depressed downward, and a game ball Can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, it is possible to cope with various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

  In the lower plate 322 constituted by the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the lower plate cover 340, 340A is combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, the part on which the game ball is placed in the lower plate 322 is the lower plate body 325. Therefore, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where a lot of game balls are loaded due to storage. The boundary (joint, dividing line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if many game balls are stored. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from being detached from the lower plate body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate that can store the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the front plate (player) is difficult to see from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be refreshed to improve the appearance of the player. Can be made a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power. In addition, since it is difficult for the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to visually recognize the game ball from the lower dish ball supply port 323c toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a game in the lower dish 322 is made to the player. This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guide hole 322a, the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is smaller than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 compared to the appearance.

  Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating so as to go around in the lower tray 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 can be surely made difficult to see from the front (player). Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are immediately noticed by the ball guiding unit 322c and the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Can do. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to view more than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in a plan view of the lower dish 322 from the front, the lower dish visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than double the size that can be seen with respect to the size of 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured in the same manner as the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Due to the shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a. But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, On the other hand, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be obtained. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the dish unit base 323), the lower dish cover 340, and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 is difficult to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity for a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, and to make the player feel at ease and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), even if the front side is small, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. In comparison, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the side and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player is placed in the lower plate 322. When a hand is put in, it can be prevented that a fingertip or the like touches the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of attracting the player's interest more strongly, and to easily see the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball opening hole 322a that can be opened and closed vertically, a conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a simple feeling, and to entertain the player by dedicating the player to the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball opening hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 bulging forward under the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the player. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached and the outer operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded so as to surround the outer periphery. The diameter is about 15cm and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. It is possible to reduce the appearance of the outer edge, the rear side (rear side), and the like of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit) are increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be satisfactorily concealed. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body part 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an oblique direction, the inner wall of the button base 413 can block the objects outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) so as to be invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 Therefore, the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame disposed in the operation button 410 are increased. The side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or movable, and the door frame side effect display device that can entertain the player through the operation buttons 410. 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining can be realized.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, design (decoration) is imparted to the operation button 410. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made conspicuous and the player is interested. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  In the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411, and in cooperation with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b, Since the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be hardly seen from the side, the main body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to move. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directivity compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 can be surely enjoyed and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since the player can touch the operation button 410 to facilitate the pressing operation, the player can easily participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained and the entertainment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making players actively participate in the player-participation-type production and having fun. In addition, it is possible to think that there is something good for some players by performing the production in the operation button 410, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation buttons 410 are enhanced. And a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) is arranged so that the operation button 410 surrounds the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are provided. At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a sticker or a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a bottom plate that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around the rear. You may make it.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the shape of the lower dish 322 in the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the dish front lower decoration portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) is curved backward. Although the example which was dented in the shape was shown, it is not limited to this, It is good also as a front surface dented in polygonal column surface shape or polyhedron shape.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on the surface "," equipped with a decoration having a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration "," game " Characters, items, logos in accordance with the machine concept, and decorations with a three-dimensional appearance of the scene (diorama) etc. "," Characters, items, logos in accordance with the gaming machine concept A member such as a unit or a panel provided with a decoration or the like that is decorated by sticker or printing or the like may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) is not necessarily one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

  In the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is formed with the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a that opens to the front for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not limited thereto. A space corresponding to the attachment space 326j (or the remaining space of the attachment space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined bag-like shapes, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine may be applied to the front surface of such dish unit covers by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. desirable.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect that are arranged on the rear side. Although the display device 460A and the like such that the rear member is always visible is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is a predetermined condition. It is good also as a structure which has the variable light transmission means which a rear side becomes visible by satisfying. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, “the rear side can be visually recognized due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, like a magic mirror”, “transparent by turning the power ON / OFF like a liquid crystal film Or the like so that the rear side can be visually recognized. " Note that the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By having the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state. The player can show the decoration of the visible member to the player. And in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can be overlapped. Therefore, various decorations (decoration effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, so that the player can be made less tired and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interests.

  Specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member is made by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. When the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear is passed through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and a decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

  Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. It is possible to show the player the decoration with the surface. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the rear member of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The player can show the decoration with the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED (or the light between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED. ) And the satisfying conditions of the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting a portion that is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. You can show the glittering decorations to the players.

  In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is described as a magic mirror. However, even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when a variable light transmission means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (having translucency), so that it can be provided between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or light-decorated) by the light of the light-emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player various effects such as light-emitting effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is the payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays an electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a control power source (for example, +5 V). And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game proceeded by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The controller SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a command, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage, Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this nonvolatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 1310an ”). The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value as the initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, again, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured such that the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  60, a first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Further, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects a fraudulent act using a magnet attached thereto is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information about the game (game information) to the board 951, or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020 use contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switch are used for the general winning award opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like connects the bus 1310ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .) BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of a payout control board 951 (described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this occurs, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., as shown in FIG. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls relating to payout, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like, a payout control MPU952a that is a microprocessor, and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout are respectively received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Create 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send the error occurrence command and error cancellation navigation command respectively to the payer serial data As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed to the various signals. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Payout control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function includes the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like, and is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information is output. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  Out-of-game detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-game balls in the supply passage of the in-use ball guide unit 820 of the out-of-payout unit 800, and out-of-game detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from the out-feed outlets 831b and 832b of the out-feed device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 for the purpose of explanation.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 952b. Via the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or an operation signal (detection of the operation switch 954). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Also, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, thereby providing the payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, output a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port as an error LED indicator. By outputting a drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

Also, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, error contents related to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and is transferred from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 that advances the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the lending device connection terminal plate such as a game ball. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the sphere rental return display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display section 330. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and in addition to the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected to each other by wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are supplied to the frequency display plate 365. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit 330 that is a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is sequentially driven by a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting up, are connected from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball rental device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and a ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are inputted, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation is started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the card, PRDY, which is a signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental device connecting terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a single payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility. Power factor correction circuit 935b, smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (firing) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and to output it to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, the display control drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, while controlling the drawing of the frame side effect display device 460, calendar information specifying the date and time, and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the second, and a lower speaker 92. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time that power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can't hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is ramped from a serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be transmitted to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Transmission from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 or the like. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door side emission data for transmitting the lighting signal, the flashing signal, or the gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs away using both peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e. It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I, and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written through the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag and a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. -It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab reads / writes from / to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to transfer data independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af within a predetermined period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count, and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the 1024 stage values are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. Can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraud due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or copied to various control program copy areas in the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of various control programs that are copied, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b, etc. Various control data copy area 1511ce for storing copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing various information updated by executing various control programs, which are not backup targets And a work area 1511cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. Is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 This is a storage area in which the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. In a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the presentation display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when a peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is added to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the production backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), whenever the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) The information is stored in a bank 0 (SRAM) exclusively for backup. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. The production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the production backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display controller]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a for performing control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various data such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the serialized drawing data to the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that is arranged near the lower portion of the device 460 and transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e And a signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is inputted, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not inputted, the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various kinds of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae and has a built-in sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is output from the channel CH2 through a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 as described above, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short by being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the built-in sound source VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to the setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value, thereby flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually obtained from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used; Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used The maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to control the flow of the notification sound so as to notify the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal action against the pachinko machine 1. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the subvolume value set for the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually It amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs audio. And outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute until now The volume of the effect sound that is progressing according to the schedule data for use is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to rotate (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 is dialed). When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to adjust to the setting mode, the sub volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are used. It comes to flow.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to inform the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal action against the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, and thus the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period. Then, when it stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it has progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b draws the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and as differential serial data using the left audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. The frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The signal and the three synchronization signals, the clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential one-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, and this differential one-pair cable is composed of two wires. Is not a parallel line provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is employ | adopted as a differential 1 pair cable which electrically connects between a transmitter and a receiver is demonstrated easily. For the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if it is a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of the corporation, it is only due to electrostatic discharge of a game ball with such a hardware configuration. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., an effect display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the shiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data to be received is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being disturbed different from the normal one. In the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm-like image is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In the transmitter IC1512d for production, the differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make it difficult to be affected by noise, and in addition to such hardware configuration Even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when receiving by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After connecting the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the receiver cancels (removes) the noise. The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 by separating them from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver spans a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is used. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, it is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the power supply wiring is red and the other plural wirings are gray. . Note that the power supply wiring may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data that is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  When receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, generates an image for notifying the fact by controlling sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputs it to game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal to be described later is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Via the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. 320, it can be determined that there is no malfunction in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320. On the other hand, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a problem has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. ”) Is controlled by the VDP1512a with built-in sound source. In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thus, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and time and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. Yes. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as the date, time, hour, minute, and second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to do.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. If the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and December has already passed, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage section and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control section power-on process. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is more likely to be changed to a more advantageous game state) Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraud due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. Yes. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not in a state where a game is not performed continues for a predetermined period of time and becomes a customer waiting state, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the sound volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feed unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and performs control to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launcher 650 side.

  The power generation circuit 935d is supplied with the smoothing circuit 935c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system supplied with + 5V is a + 5V power supply line, a power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with a + 12V power supply line, and a power supply system supplied with + 24V is a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. A current flows toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951 and again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Can be done. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When the charge is lost, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral voltage is supplied. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are shown in FIG. 76A. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates 3.3V DC (+ 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the like.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x produces + 12V to + 3.3V. + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the + 5V power line generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V power failure or signs of instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board or the like of the door frame.

  In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  69 and 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and a main control board 1310g. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz )) Mainly.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Is smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is not a power failure or a momentary power failure at the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end thereof is a capacitor MC4 grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. The positive terminal is applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and + 5V is generated. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value. The attached main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V inputted to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input thereto. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, if the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control board 1310 receives a logic from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) without inverting it). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, it is higher than the control reference voltage + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning a prize opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 inputted through the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failures or momentary power outages, and detects a power outage notice signal as a power outage notice in addition to the main control MPU 1310a when detecting a power outage or momentary power outage sign. This is output to the payout control MPU 952a 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of a + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitor voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V is blacked out or momentarily stopped, and the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal having the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 78, the positive terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied, one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and one end as shown in FIG. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR25 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above, so one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal having the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal having the logic HI is output from the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is the negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively. The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, and a power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal PR terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A) without inversion). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20 The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 as its logic becomes HI. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. As a result, the power failure warning signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous-stage transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And is electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 72, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function for outputting a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal has one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is paid out to the payout control board 951. Main system without reset function to output as a power failure warning signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a wiring Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is outputted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information about the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to output the main with reset function. Various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the control output circuit 1310ca.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured.)

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and thus the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting + 12V that is higher than + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has a storage capacity of 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (No. 3 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is used as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal as a serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. To the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When power or instantaneous power failure occurs, + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by turning off the MTR50, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all configured as main peripheral serial data, including a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without missing them. It is possible to receive without fail.

[10. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of a payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, followed by the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, to which + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply substrate 931 is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component folded on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed and smoothed from +5 V outputted from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the discharge control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V inputted to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the blackout monitor circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. The full detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is substantially the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, one end of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, one end of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuation from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and having logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal having logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 1310 is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. It is input to 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 4 does not occur during a normal game, and the outer frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer edge is designed to be entered The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer frame door opening information output signal. Or, although it cannot be determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and this signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of the condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the payout power failure notice signal. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. In some cases, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The full-tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. The terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to the first terminal, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thus, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is inputted to the payout control board 951, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and becomes logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full-tank signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-described transistor PTR41, whereby the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration has been adopted, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball breakage detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes very long and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. If it is determined based on the detection signal from 279 that the storage space is full of the game balls stored, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop paying out the game balls by the payout rotating body. Control is to be performed. That is, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not filled with a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 834 There is a case where the driving control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls stored. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-described prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotator to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is rotated. The dispensing motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signal from operation switch]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 through the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inverting it). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the front-stage and rear-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43, and the signal changes as an RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input.

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeats the ON / OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuation from the operation switch 954.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is a transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned off, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If it is determined that the command is not instructed and the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power is turned on), error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal in which the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal which are output terminals of the operation switch 954 to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. The voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation that the logic becomes LOW by pulling the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is an instruction to perform RAM clear that erases information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. 3 is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 using + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal and supplied to the dispensing motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63, A drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60 as a protection. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one payout operation start request signal BRQ via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. An EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a ball is possible or impossible via the terminal board 869. And are output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, one end of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line in the power supply substrate 931. Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inversion). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR78 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inversion). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  A PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via a resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 has one end electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a has the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) For example, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. 70, and detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the voltage switch signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or a payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and a payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to , A payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is main controlled from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. And so on.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, the payout control board 951 has a main winning ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, Games such as jackpot information output signal such as 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal that is output every time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability changing information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed through) the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). ) And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, so the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. For example, a big hit of 15 rounds may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of jackpots and the number of rounds of big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of rounds of big hits of 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming states, which may increase the player's gambling feeling more than necessary. Absent.

  In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until the round-end jackpot is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot information output occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 15 round jackpot information are output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot is generated. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, and the two round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the short time medium information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A signal indicating that a state has occurred. The prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize-ball number information output signal is a signal indicating the effect, and the various prize-winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls that entered the ball, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal generates a 15 round jackpot In a state 2 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that reports that 2 round jackpots are occurring, and the probability changing information output signal is in a state where probability fluctuations are occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that there is a change, and the special symbol change display is ended by the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the award ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 as the prize ball for the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the award ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls are paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls paid out.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is opened.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is completed (stopped) from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and then the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted to count the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start opening winning information output signal is a signal to notify that every time a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first start port 2002 or second of the pachinko machine 1 every time the start port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the start port 2004 and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of game balls entered can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 15 round jackpot has been generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15 round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates 15 round jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15 round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal has been input and to grasp the total number of times that the 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 when the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal and then the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol has been finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. As described above, the time reduction / medium information output signal is a signal that informs that the time reduction state has occurred, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time reduction state is occurring. ing. When the time and medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time and short state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 when the time and medium information output signal is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-short state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color and outputs a probability changing information output signal. As described above, the probability variation in-progress information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the probability variation information output signal is output while the probability variation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability change from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state in which the probability change occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability change is input. It is possible to grasp that there is a certain number of times, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball is scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball, and to determine the total number of game balls that the pachinko machine 1 will pay out by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As with one continuous signal, it is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 have the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a line from the center left side to the right side, also in this point, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs output on the main control board 1310 side. Wiring for transmitting signals to hall computers And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island facility. When a 15-round big hit happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when there is a little remaining, the number of game balls stored in the award ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as award ball is insufficient, so it is paid out (In addition, for example, when a ball clog or a ball is generated in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless it can be resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since this is a signal that informs the player every time, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the Pachinko Island facilities to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the ball clogging (for example, in the payout device 830) In this case, the game ball is returned to a state where the game ball is paid out by identifying and eliminating the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball bowl.

  However, even if the hall clerk is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and the game ball is paid out by the hall clerk after the 15 round round hit. Returning to the state, the payout control board 951 pays out unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15th round big hit ends and the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Outputs an award ball number information output signal indicating that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, in spite of the fact that 15 rounds have not occurred, a very large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as award balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to notify that, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of communicating to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (troubles such as ball clogging in the replenishing nozzle, ball clogging or ball smearing in the dispensing device 830) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Stage display drive board circuit]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is accommodated in the dish unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 mainly includes a door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and minus signal from which the noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from reflecting at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 includes three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, It is restored to three synchronizing signals, that is, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits each of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that are output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals obtained by differentiating a certain LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forcible switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. The serial signal (serial data) by the differential method “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0 and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a request to output the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Note that the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, as described above. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display In order to check whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the signal, the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is intentionally transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1511. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has a VDD terminal, a VDDO terminal, an LVDSVDD terminal, a PLLVDD terminal, and a PDWN terminal supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is a ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as a ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSGND terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V through the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, on the rising edge. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, a rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal instructs whether to allow the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, the output is always enabled by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 through the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and enters a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door It may be directly electrically connected via the relay terminal plate 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This terminal outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the effect display driving board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, ie, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 terminal to D17 terminal are provided with three video signals (18, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input from the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected, and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from main control board to payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage dishes. When the game ball as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H. In the example, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), a payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general diagram synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special figure 1 tuning production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning production termination, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. Note that the probability and short-time state include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a short-time state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the short time state is, for example, a normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared with the non-short-time state (normal game state), the time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. In addition to increasing the number of stop displays compared to the non-short-time state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is made longer than that of the non-time-short state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained without reducing the number of possessed balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, a non-short-time state) In addition, the number of times of determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is lengthened. The game ball acceptance rate (entrance rate) to the mouth 2004 is increased).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect is started. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands with names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the jackpot-related category is a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closed display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a big hit ending, a big hit symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and commands having names of small hitting endings. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the big winning opening 1 is started while the big winning opening 1 is being opened for the 1st to 16th rounds (the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). The winning prize mouth 2005 is closed during the round or the closing start is instructed, and the 1 prize display command for the big prize opening counts the number of 0 to 10 game balls (shown in FIG. 69). The number of gaming balls that have entered the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command is used when a small hit middle / large prize winning prize winning effect (when a game ball that has entered the big prize winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005. The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (in the start opening unit 2100). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100). The grand prize winning 1 count display command is a game ball that has entered the big prize winning opening 2005 when the big winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count to the big winning prize opening 1 is changed (when the big winning prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of a small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands at the time of power-on and the name of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. When the power is turned on, the power-on status command is used when the power supply is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure )), The information indicating which state (probability and short-time state) to recover from among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, what kind of game is copyrighted, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to specify the series code for identifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability change with a limited number of special symbol changes) And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The power-on main control return destination command indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start-port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also included.) Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and, as shown in FIG. The command 1402 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (normally As the gaming state, a low probability non-short-time state is set).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), and the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. It consists of commands named hit opening, public power open display, and ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base figure instructs the start of opening per base figure, and the open command display command starts during the opening of the general power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2107). State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start-up solenoid 2107) The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display section includes commands having the names of winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating) (a game ball is entered into the big winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit) When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification, the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical signal on a path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, and a count sensor. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005, etc. occurs. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Further, the door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state that has been made, the door opening notification end is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, an instruction to end the body frame opening notification is given.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Inspects various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned “9 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002. , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and informs the number of balls that have not been used yet for the variation display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 Reservation 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is used to instruct the start of the pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol indicator 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold. Before using the second special symbol display 1405 to display the variation of the special symbol, pre-read and instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is transmitted. , Sent at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the off-stop period) after confirming the fluctuation that digested the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times”, the special symbol 1 storage command When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 and there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol change display in the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the first special symbol display unit 1403 to display the variation of the special symbols) The special symbol 2 storage command is sent to the special symbol 2 when the number of the special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400). In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the variable display, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, the special number display unit 1405 displays a special number from the number of reserves. Design The normal symbol storage command is used when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is transmitted). In the state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display in the symbol display 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, the normal symbol indicator is displayed from the reserved number. 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and when the number of reserved symbols decreases), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is received when the number of special symbol 1 actuated reserved balls increases (game ball at the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number). But Sent when it increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are transmitted mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify the voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, each command from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), a ball breakage, full tank, connection abnormality and CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) is prepared with a ball seeing, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error, and in the ball seeing, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and the payout detecting sensor In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated The random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for display pattern, a big hit symbol for use in determining the big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the big hit gaming state is generated, and the big hit The first special symbol display 1 for generating the big hit symbol initial value random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the small hit gaming state 03 and a small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol indicator 1405, and an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random symbol for the small hit symbol A random number for determination is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine a normal random number per symbol for use in determining whether or not to move the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 and an initial value of the random number for normal symbol determination. For determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (when the power is turned off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the check sum value (sum value) does not match, the initial random number for determining the normal value per symbol is determined by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and normally updates the random number for determination per symbol based on the extracted ID code. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. When the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing an initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value on the basis of the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the counter value that is obtained illegally and updates the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are attached, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is not useful at all on the other game board 5 ', that is, the other pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the start port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  The main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and time counting is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this electric power clear process, first, the output of the power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clear process, first, output of a power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, thereby starting output of the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input as a power failure notification from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilize after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state where the logic is LOW and is input to the preset terminal PR, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the output terminal 1Q.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 being operated to the main control MPU 1310a. Depending on whether or not Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that an instruction to perform RAM clearing is given, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information relating to games such as probability fluctuation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when game information is erased and a value of 0 when game information is not erased. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, a system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until. In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for the inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which the power is turned on after the power is turned off, a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and an improper means (for example, a fraudulent person at the base of the arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when erasing game information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates a random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the above-described normal symbol per-symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial per-symbol determination random number. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state by hardware And setting the acquisition of the random number by latching, and setting the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 5, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program executes an error canceling navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input as the operation switch 954 is operated over the predetermined time from the power-on as described above. In response to the input, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error release unit) that should have been originally used to release an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program reads the start port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG, as described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure, and performs a main control-side power-on process when power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally terminated. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power supply from the Pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island facility is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power is shut off until about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Just before the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots), the time waiting (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) is started, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. Thus, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control side timer interruption process described below is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process may not be completed. . Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of power recovery this time, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the content of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication of the clearing of the RAM by the hall clerk. ).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input (that is, step S22). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination of step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and stored immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine Even when the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information due to the progress of this game by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main system constituted by the processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing at the time of the side power cut-off, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the checksum calculation result of step S28 And the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in step S64) match, so the instantaneous stop stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. The game information just before a power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, the main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the power supply VDD terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after that, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to clear the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the set value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to start the time measurement again. . The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT 1310af, so that the step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to avoid updating the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM by setting the interrupt permission and preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing (to be described later). The system is adopted. In this way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the main control-side power The contents of the main control built-in RAM (the contents of the main control built-in RAM are divided into two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start-port solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on at the time of power-on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. Starting to drive the solenoid 2108 and shifting from the state in which the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the opened state. That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned based on the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the big hit gaming state. In other words, for example, a winning prize 1 count display command is transmitted to inform the number of gaming balls that are detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. The main prize-winning port 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, closing start of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100) from the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 starts five rounds (fifth round) in the big hit gaming state, the attack solenoid 2108 starts to be driven and the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. To shift from the state to the open state (that is, 5 of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the fifth round of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time-saving state and displays it on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  Further, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece is expanded) that indicates that the gaming state where the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is in an advantageous gaming state for the player. 8 is displayed when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to drive the start port solenoid 2107. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Thereafter, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that it is present in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot understand what kind of game he / she plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, and then the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310 and the big prize opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, A screen (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game is played in the big prize opening is started.) The driving of the casoleole 2108 is started and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. “Please play the game to make the ball enter.” Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored. Later, a game can be instructed to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 2005. For example, in the above-described example, a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is entered. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a gaming state advantageous to the user and then power is restored, the start port solenoid 2107 is used as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction after starting driving (for example, “The movable piece has been expanded. After the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine. The game can be instructed to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 at. Thereby, when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, and then the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared in step S38. Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Will be stored in For these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by a power-on main control return destination command in a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  Incidentally, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether to do so, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the game will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbols variation (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line can select the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among a plurality of types of works is lost or it is not known whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), although the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, an operator of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which copyright of the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs when probability fluctuation occurs). Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, an operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is changed to the second register bank. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that has entered the first start opening 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has entered the second starter 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, a magnetic detection sensor that detects fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. 69, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has successfully received a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. And stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening command shown in FIG. 90 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And a corresponding start opening command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the gaming balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005. , A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 And the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are respectively read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether or not there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that do not have the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are displayed. Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the big random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are stored in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is the routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of the routine is uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out a game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area, The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to notify that, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls In order to notify that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command received normally as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified into the status display in FIG. 90). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game state is not a big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and storing it in the main control built-in ROM in advance It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) set higher than normal (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is performed based on whether or not is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is set so that the indicator 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified into jackpot relations shown in FIG. 89 (jacket opening command, winning prize opening 1 open Nth display command, winning prize opening 1 Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times, 2 to turn on the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. When the output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1407a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be lit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence / absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as the gate information by extracting the value of the counter for updating the normal random number for determination per symbol described above. To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is to be opened and closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1402 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and output information described above. Store in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When the extracted random number for normal symbol determination does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The transmission information described above as transmission information is determined by determining the display pattern and creating various commands classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. In addition to storing in the storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacking solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning prize opening 2005, or a driving signal is output to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to output, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game such as time and medium information output information, starting entry prize information output signal, etc. And outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process which is this routine and shown in FIG. Commands and various commands categorized as jackpots (for example, when a game ball that has entered a big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, a big prize is awarded based on detection signals from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). 90 winning command 1 count display command corresponding to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands related to ordinary drawing synchronized effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric character effects, FIG. The various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) categorized into notification display and status display shown in Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least a command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Furthermore, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Constituting the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data, transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently configuring the main control return destination command at power-on, The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM reads out the game information from the game backup information in accordance with the game information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Also, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. 89. When the power-on main control return destination command in FIG. Can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 performs main setting in the work area setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery), the power-on status command and the main power-on time are shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 to indicate the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, so-called freeze Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the failure due to the appearance of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, thereby providing two commands: a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and thumb value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. Thus, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr) that is the content that is backed up at the same time is compared, and the production backup information that is the content that is backed up to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) ( ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms), which are the contents stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms), are copied back to make a hot start. When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the effect backup information that is backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db is also obtained for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and comparison of effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511 dc. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Subsequent to such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 and cleared to zero. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  Specifically, in the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information, and the luminance stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side for 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  Each time the peripheral interrupt DMA controller 1511ac generates a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board, this is triggered (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by this every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O 1 byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration driving amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is determined as appropriate whether or not to reflect the above.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and a sound data output process described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects tailored to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, in addition to music and sound effects adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update processing, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number of light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, from the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various kinds of information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The production control program is based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of a start opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, A winning prize 1 count display command output every time a game ball is received (a winning prize count command), or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating the content of full as shown in FIG. (Command for generating full error) is analyzed (command analyzing means) to recognize which gaming state is currently in effect. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that a command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. In the reception command analysis processing, The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning processing, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priorities registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transferred. It is supposed to do. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred because another anomaly has occurred after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal rendering mode accompanying the rendering operation, for example, on the game board side Visually warn the outside using an effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device), or audibly warn the outside using a speaker ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month which is calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data to be played, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the gaming board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board, and various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the built-in sound source VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby producing a game board side effect display device. 1600 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and audio data is transmitted as audio data that is serialized sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in the program from the mute level to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraud due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb up to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as a request factor of the A controller 1511ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and Bank0 from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank 3 (1 fr) of backup second area 1511cc The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in sequence by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy to the Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and Bank 0 (SRAM) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) from the content stored at the head address of the bank) (SRAM), the bank 3 (SRAM) head address of the second area 1511 dc in the backup second area 1511 dc continuously. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. P2 is specified, and the backup second area 1511dc is continuously stored in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received as shown in FIG. 72 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control part steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The value is set to 0 when the part steady process is not executed.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling on the way, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 95 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady process cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called process failure.

  Thus, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in a time of about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is calculated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times until. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is used as the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MP1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. 72. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral I / O port continuous transmission for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is first set. In order to output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 1511caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). 1 byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the serial I / O port for motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c is externally configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from the various detection switches. , The movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, thereby determining history information (for example, operation signals) from the various detection switches. Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. The control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c attached externally are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450; , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. Further, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 1511 cc, Bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the peripheral control unit is started again at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process by the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control is performed when the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts main transmission of main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a when various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data. The board serial I / O port captures 1 byte (8 bits) of information into the reception buffer. When this capture is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are considered as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for main control board incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data is set. When the value is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, after the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value as the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the received command storage area 1511cac in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. This reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral ring reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive at least the period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb Then, from the contents stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified content are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the received command storage areas included in the bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc are copied in order starting from the start address of the backup second area 1511cc.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this manner, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by the drawing data received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are provided. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creating process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data) No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined.

  If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, the same process as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift process in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST includes the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

  Thus, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72. In this embodiment, it is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the display and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected, that is, there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. The communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the value immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This flag indicates whether or not a failure has occurred. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. A failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, with a value of 0 being set. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored at the time.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, it is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Output a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 95 in the peripheral control unit steady process as illustrated in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is When the presentation is completed along with the data and the updating of all the pointers is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. It is possible to determine whether or not the current period is based on the screen generation schedule data, and displays a start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board is in a waiting state or a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. The period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the waiting state for the customer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540, the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the presentation is completed and all the pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. To do (count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred is even once.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when the number of times determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not one, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. This flag indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is surely defective. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective. Between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is used to notify that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Perform the process of drawing. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk” is displayed. Further, in the communication error display process, a period during which the startup screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or a demonstration in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period of being performed, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred, as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is set to LOCKN. As a response signal for the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460. A notification image (for example, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, a process in which a notification sound (for example, “a problem has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device”) repeatedly flows from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 is performed. At this time, you may make it perform the process which lights all the various LEDs mounted in the various decoration board | substrates with which the LED for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are equipped.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. Peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The decorative symbol variation display is executed by a part steady process or the like, and the main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control side timer interruption process shown in FIG. 94 or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls at the starting port 2004 is “big hit”, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation of the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is one round. A total of 15 rounds, up to 15 rounds. In each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is digested, and every time one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second start port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative graphic is in the center. On the right side, the change display of the right decorative design is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed variably, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible. From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stop decorative display. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball at the second start port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. When the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit stationary process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set in cae, a pointer is used to indicate the number of screen data from the top screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Because it has been updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production progresses along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 102 in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT of the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver) is one, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process The communication error display process of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC SDIC0 by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the presentation is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not started and the screen generation schedule data is not started, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Warning in step S1024 in the peripheral processing routine processing of time processing The determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process proceeds to the process in step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter When it is determined that there is no failure in the connection with the receiver, the routine is terminated as it is, but when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is determined to be in a state where there is a failure is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0. When the connection between the transmitter and receiver is faulty. If the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the communication abnormality flag CC- When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the process, and the communication error display described above is performed. Processing is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even when there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed, so that the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 are connected. This means that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is restored, while the transmitter is When the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk. LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner and stopped. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. Since the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the interval period until the game is started, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect transmitter are used. There is a problem with the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective has not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, By performing the pattern output process without fail, while performing the process of restoring the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is a fault in the connection between the two has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the fault between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred) For example, by performing the communication error display process, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative design and the central decorative design are activated. And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in connection recovery processing is performed The process for recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate LCD device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side transmitter transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The door frame side effect display device 460 invalidates the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the fact that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has received the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display an image based on.

  As described above, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. In the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is informed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the transmitter for the door frame side effect is transmitted. Door frame side effect receiver ICSD that informs that drawing data received from IC1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the combination result in which the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed is the information most interesting to the player, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the big hit gaming state to which the game is given occurs, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the rendering is not interrupted in the middle and the process of recovering the drawing correctly is performed. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a waiting state. Thus, during the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, it is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a waiting state. In the period of time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to a circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, so that the two signals are transmitted. One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, the rendering display drive board 4450 has malfunctioned as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted to the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600 and a notification sound to that effect (for example, “top plate side Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thus, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame-side production receiver ICSDIC0 that has received the LOCKN signal output request data outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame-side production receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN The signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. Hall clerk and the like can very easily check whether there is a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays a game, and the check is not time-consuming. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without taking time and effort.

  In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output in order to convey the fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal that is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The receiver ICSDIC0 is a door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When the image transmitted from the terminal cannot be normally received, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. For this purpose, the LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for notifying that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure between image communications at an early stage, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the failure. It is like that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by discovering and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception is impossible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511 can output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and communication failure occurs. Telling you The message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is generated, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. Can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can tell the hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the hall clerk who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk etc. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by early finding and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. Even if there is a failure in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for the side effect, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state of being not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication problems between image communications From the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is to be started to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be continuously output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and stopping, it is possible to move toward a direction in which communication problems are eliminated.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. This is a case where there is a failure in the connection between the production receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication malfunction between image communications is displayed. Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door When the connection confirmation signal informing the start of transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the connection confirmation When the signal output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and no connection confirmation signal is input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame. Controlling liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 for side effects The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not started by displaying the start and stop, the communication failure can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 and stops and displays it. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if ten main control MPUs 1310a start changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start executing the game again, the door frame When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the game again and ends (period of timing K1 to timing K2), the distortion of the image (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460. Every time (interval period), it can be made to go away.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 or a second start which is a start area in which a game ball fired by the ball striking device 650 is directed toward the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball 2004 entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 88A and 88B that are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. If the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. Period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or the power supply) 82 is used as an error canceling signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after a period of time during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of entry. The game control microprocessor uses the RWMCLR signal of FIG. And an error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed, The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; The determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed 82 (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after power-on) has passed, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error cancel signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830. It also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is a game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, ie, an error canceling function. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning port sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

  In a gaming machine, try to obtain an unfair advantage by manipulating the flow-down state of the game ball as desired by bringing a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) closer to the game ball that is driven into the game area. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by sound. Yes.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and effects will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) The display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the rendering operation unit 400 and the movable member) contributing to the rendering are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second start opening winning processes are performed. In this first and second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the start opening. Done.

  If the processing flag is 0 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, after the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested and executed on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 1 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the stored jackpot determination result or the current gaming state ( The processing flag is updated to “2” after determining and setting a stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) after the special symbol variable display is started and stopped.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second start opening winning processes are completed, the changing process is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time-out. Stop. After that, when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit (losing) The processing selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 3 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the big hit game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game is operated, and the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of winning jackpot is set. Based on this, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, processing to stop the operation of the condition device is performed, or when the winning big hit type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a short time state or a probable change state. As shown, after the game state flag is updated, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as variation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts until it ends, and when the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into jackpot variation variation patterns, outlier reach variation variation patterns, and outlier variation variation patterns. The big hit fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after reaching the reach effect, the decorative symbol change display is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed in a fixed stop state. Production is performed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is lost and it is determined that the reach determination is performed based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 performs the decoration through the reach effect. An effect is developed in which the change display of the symbols is finally lost and the symbols are displayed in a definite stop display. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number is not determined to reach, and the effect display device 1600 does not pass the reach effect. Then, the effect is developed that the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally deviated and the symbol is confirmed and stopped. The variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the game information such as the result of the big hit determination is obtained from the main control board 1310 and is referred to so that the decorative pattern variation pattern can appear. In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 causes the decorative symbol variation pattern to appear based on the acquired game information, and the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control for changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the back-bottom movable effect unit 3100 is executed.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly, as shown in FIG. On condition that the detection signal from one start port sensor 4002 is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is acquired from the random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in an on state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number (second special symbol) A second start-port passing process is performed, such as acquiring the second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" or "8R normal big hit", the big prize opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (round game) which is closed when the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 or not, and is controlled to a 16R big hit game state that repeats 16 times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is detected by the count sensor 4005 after 9 game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to an 8R big hit game state that is repeated eight times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled to a 2R big hit game state that is repeated twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-shortening control is executed, the right-handed strike is advantageous to the player over the left-handed, and in the situation where the time-shortening control is not executed, the right-handed is preferred. As described above, left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a big win is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a maximum of 8 rounds of long-open big hit game Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, if the big hit is won, the probability (allocation rate of the winning species) is approximately 50%. ) Is a 16-round long-open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained), etc., and the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained when winning a big hit Therefore, when the shift control is performed to the right-handed state, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the left-handed state is selected.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, first, a process for starting the operation of the condition device, a process for resetting a later-described variation number counter, and the like are performed.

  Also, in the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, according to the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, a high probability Each set process of a flag and a time reduction flag is executed.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. 114 is set when the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is terminated, and when the next jackpot is reached, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. To reset.

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time reduction control (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. 114. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B) is terminated. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated. Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a big hit after a low probability short-time state occurs, a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated.

  The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol since the variation counter is reset, and is used in a first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. It is updated when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes (for example, counts up), and at least a specific type of big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B) When the jackpot gaming state based on is started, it is reset.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as a process in step S5236, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set. Is determined. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a short time flag, a short time Each set process such as a count counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the big hit determination is not won.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is “0” (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, if the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), The second special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is performed so that the lottery for the second special symbol placed on hold is not lost (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is “0”), the first special symbol Regardless of the lottery hold status, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number is continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can maintain the game ball shot (right strike) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the short time state (high probability short time state). Only the lottery (determination process) for the big hit determination random number can be performed continuously without interruption.

  Note that the special game (design variation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to a game executed in preference to the special game using the first special figure (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass through) the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are specified is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It suffices if it can be determined.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S5232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random hit determination random number, reach determination random number, jackpot design random number, variation display pattern random number ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in step S5242 that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the first special symbol change display (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the processing of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S5244, the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S5241 To store.

  Next, the first special figure prefetch process for executing the prefetch effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the contents of the effect, etc. Information, information relating to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information related to the special symbol stop symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information before the final decision such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group in the variation pattern, and the latent hit group and the small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5242 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5243 to S5245, the first special symbol variation display is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S5234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol use) in step S5251. A random number and a random number for the second variation display pattern) are obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” (step S5252). If it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold number is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S5254, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S5251. To store.

  Then, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining the presence / absence of prefetching production and the contents of the production on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information before the final decision such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group in the variation pattern, and the latent hit group and the small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command for instructing the number of reserved first symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the number of retained symbols of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002 (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of the second special symbol hold changes based on the game ball having entered the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) indicates the number of the second special symbol hold. A command to be performed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). The first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. A lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for jackpot determination based on the read random number for jackpot determination stored in the main control built-in RAM First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which, for example, the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop. )

  3. The variation pattern of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 corresponding to the special symbol The first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

  4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5). The first special symbol display unit 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302 next. The first storage of random numbers (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in first-out (First-In, First-In) random numbers (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped First, the shift operation is performed.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is shown. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process which is a determination process for the big hit is based on the read first big hit determination random number. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. 110 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 110A is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the game state is low in probability for each type of special random numbers (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). (Low probability non-short state, low probability short state) The low probability jackpot determination table and high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers have won the jackpot, 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the first big hit determination random number of the type matches the loss determination value indicating that it is the loss (a big hit probability at a low probability; “1/321”). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big special determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process In the jackpot determination table that is referenced at the time of low probability, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned lost. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a loss determination value indicating that (a jackpot probability at a low probability; approximately “1/321”).

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at high probability referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value, and 63634 types of first jackpot determination The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random number matches the loss determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 63396 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (a jackpot probability at a high probability; approximately “1/32”). Note that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) The number of jackpot judgment values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the jackpot determination table at the low probability and the jackpot determination table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that it is a jackpot (step S5315). ), A big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the player has lost the jackpot, based on the selected jackpot determination table, the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. Is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit is not won (judgment is determined).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-short-time state and when the gaming state is in the high-probability short-time state And a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-time short state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state, a reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number is reached, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers are not reached, is reached. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match. However, the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach in order to maximize the game progress speed in the short-time state. Thus, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short time state are reached. The reach determination random numbers are associated with the reach determination values indicating that the 67 reach determination random numbers do not reach the reach determination values. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is higher than that in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random number for reach coincides with the reach determination value indicating that reach and the 67 reach reach random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach in the high probability non-time-short state is the same as the low probability non-time-short state.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and determines that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). Then, a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B) and reads the first big hit symbol random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. Are compared with the selected symbol determination table to determine the big hit symbol as the mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, a random number for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) Of the first big hit symbol) is stored in an associated manner. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side includes a random number for the second big hit symbol (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the probable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the regular jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot design random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of the specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 8 is repeated 8 times to control the game ball to the 8R big hit game state that can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state Controls the high probability time-short state until the next big hit game state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) that a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state. Are controlled to the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a low-probability short-time state until the special symbol fluctuation display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state An effect display device that performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated and is relatively unfavorable in a low-probability short-time state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. When the opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 16 is repeated 16 times, the game ball is controlled to the 16R big hit gaming state that can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it will be 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (successful production) Is a relatively advantageous state after a certain period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high probability short-time state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4). The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 8 is repeated 8 times to control the game ball to the 8R big hit game state that can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds eight (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state (failure effect) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the control was performed in a high-probability time-short state, this is a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5). The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit gaming state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit gaming state, Controls to a low probability short-time state until the symbol change display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until 100 times it is digested) and a specific character during the 2R jackpot gaming state execution period In the production display device 1600, a battle production (battle defeat production) is defeated. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 is executed, and the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and big hits (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol are generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) and the opening / closing pattern is repeated eight times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hits related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 winning balls 2103 can be paid out by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 8R probability variable big hit A is determined, the 8R probability variable big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R normal big hit is determined, the 8R normal big hit symbol is changed to the 8R normal big hit symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is decided, the 8R probability variation big hit is decided as the big hit symbol. When the symbol B is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the processing of step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small special symbol ( After the specific symbol stop mode is determined (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Still further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is lost as the mode when the change of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. To do.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 as one of the lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach lost, or lost). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may instruct a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and left decorative symbols → right decorative symbols → Stop display in the order of middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle and right decorative symbols may be synchronized and displayed in the same symbol, and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols when a type other than 2R normal big hit is won as a big hit. On the other hand, when 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined as a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols with left and right decorative symbols “0” to “9” and different middle decorative designs; reach lose When the symbol is determined to be out of order, the symbol is determined to be a symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change time specified from the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends).

  In any case, when the winning is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the winning effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the game is started, the effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S5346). If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation display pattern random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of this fact is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), the processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 1403 performs the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variable symbol variable display. Will be done.

  In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a big hit determination random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and a big hit symbol random number (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result. The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The first variation display pattern random numbers are stored in association with each other. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process in step S5302 among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number. The above-mentioned special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the variable display pattern random number with the random number for variable display pattern read out and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Determine the variation pattern. Thereby, the determination process about the fluctuation pattern of the said special symbol (a 1st special symbol, a 2nd special symbol) comes to be performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, in this example, since a small hit is not won, a variation pattern table at the time of a small hit is not used. In this example, the small win is not won, but the small win may be won.

  In addition, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variable display pattern. Has been. For example, in the non-short-time state, 164 kinds of random display pattern random numbers among 241 kinds of random display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the random numbers for the variable display pattern is to execute one of the super-reaching effects having a low jackpot expectation level. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

  The super reach production (SP production) is higher in the expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production, and for the player who wants to generate the big hit gaming state, the player for the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. The expectation of is increasing. That is, such a super reach production has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of big hit, and even if a losing is finally displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state Can be increased. However, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state, a highly anticipated notice effect that is a lottery separate from the variation pattern appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-short-time state and the short-time state And 12 seconds of variation time are set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds to The variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short-time state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-time-short state, and in the short-time state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is performed during the variation of the first special symbol. In addition to prompting, a time for the player to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004 is secured.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the variation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) It is possible to suppress the discharge without being subjected to the lottery process.

  In other words, the right-handed game ball is supplied to an area directly above the gate unit 2003. When the game ball is received from this area into the gate unit 2003 when in a short time state (such as a high probability short time state), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a state where it can be successively received one after another at the second starting port 2004 (a short time state in which almost all of the game balls thrown to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if these game balls are accepted, a control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of “approximately 1/32”. It becomes possible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) Game balls are often received at the start port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely variable as the variation time of the short time state (high probability short time state etc.). It can be set to a short 0.1 second. In other words, in this case, when the losing is obtained, the symbol variation will be completed only in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are successively received by the second start port 2004, it is suppressed that these game balls are discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5371. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variation pattern is set. As a result, if it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, that the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), the process is terminated.

  When the variation timer is not 0 even though the variation timer is decremented by 1 (step S5371), until the variation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes in steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display unit 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S5387), The waiting time until the start of the big hit gaming state (the time for displaying to the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, When the time-short flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is further reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5389). In step S5394), the process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control processing (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R probability big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit A, 8R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit). Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, the jackpot gaming state effect (battle effect or extra challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is set (step S5390). And when it is in the low probability short-time state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability short-time state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability short-time state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability short-time state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short game state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time reduction function is performed in this manner, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S5394). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When updated to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hitting execution flag is set in the processing of step S5236, and in the above-described small hitting control processing (step S5240b). The small hit gaming state is executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the gaming state is not changed when the small hit gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing relating to the big hit or the small hit as being lost. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag or the small hit execution flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is determined according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as obtaining a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process to control the process (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S5402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and there is a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S5421. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal control stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S5422. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbols of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal control MPU 1310a in the storage area are stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the hold of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the variable display control hold can be canceled in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal time hit table determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S5426) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( In step S5427, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the common figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure determination table used when the gaming state is short time (high probability short state) and the gaming state is non-short time. And a non-time / short-time ordinary figure determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, the 255 common kinds of random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment values indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003, the winning ball is always won by the time of drawing, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. The acceptance is controlled. Instead of all 255 types, a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time-short state may be matched with the per-normal determination value indicating that the per-normal is won.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that the usual figure is wrong. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won per hit, so the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second start port is opened. It is not possible to control the acceptance of game balls to 2004. However, as described above, the normal symbol hit may be obtained even in the non-short-time state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the short-time state, and the normal symbol lottery result is the win. When the movable piece of the second start port 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the time-shortening state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004, the movable piece is moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball in the second starting port 2004.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol is per unit (step S5429). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (ordinary symbol stop symbol) The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected normal symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined that they are out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

  While the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby obtaining the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation in process, effect symbol variation stop process, jackpot display process , One of the big hit game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process: It takes effect (demonstration effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the fluctuation state and control related to the big hit is not performed until the fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a. When the control is performed and the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process.

  Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decoration symbol change is started based on the determined effect contents. To control. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process. Of the variation patterns (effect patterns), many of the “variation patterns stopped with jackpot symbols (effect patterns)” are prepared in pairs with “variation patterns stopped with loss symbols (effect patterns)”. Since they function as the same variation pattern (effect pattern), it is possible to provide an effect as to whether a big win symbol or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, hereinafter, when describing the variation pattern (effect pattern), when “predetermined variation pattern”, “specific variation pattern”, etc. are described, unless otherwise noted, “stops at the big hit symbol” It means both “predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)” and “predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) stopped by losing symbol”, and as a result of the development of the production in the same manner It will arrive at the branch point where either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Production symbol variation processing: Various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start processing are controlled at each timing during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends, the process flag value is designated. Update to a value corresponding to the change stop process.
Production symbol variation stop processing: Control of deriving and displaying a display result (stop symbol) by stopping the variation of the decorative symbol based on reception of a command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped. If the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing. Update to a value corresponding to.

  Big hit display process: Controls effects during a period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started (such as a display effect that informs the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of the big hit). Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing.

  Big hit game processing: Control related to various effects during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

  Big hit end effect process: In the effect display device 1600, an effect (such as a display effect that notifies the player that the big hit game state has ended) is controlled in the period from the end of the big hit game state to the variation allowed state. . Then, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an effect pattern (variation effect) determination table T1 referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern Based on (variation effect), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative design is started.

  Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may make it do. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  Further, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a notice lottery (a notice effect determination process) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern after determining the effect pattern (change effect) in this way. By performing the control (process during effect symbol variation) for causing the notice effect won in the notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variable effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. As the possible combination, the expectation degree of the jackpot symbol is suggested by the appearance mode thereof.

  Conventionally, in such a combined effect, there are cases where a plurality of appearances are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed while the same specific notice effect (for example, a timer effect), As a result, it is expected to maintain amusement interests. However, since the announcement effect can be combined only when the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. Therefore, it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the game entertainment.

  As will be described later, “timer effect” refers to a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of an effect pattern (variable effect), and a first predetermined numerical value is displayed for the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed. (E.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (e.g., "0 seconds") or a count effect display, or a standby display (such as in preparation) before starting the count display It is. That is, in this case, when a count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or cut-in A) that causes either a relatively unfavorable effect mode (a low-expectation effect mode) or an advantageous effect mode (a high-expectation effect mode) to appear to the player. , B, etc.) are targeted for timer production, it is guaranteed that an advantageous production result will surely occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the notice timer effect performed as a result of the notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the effect at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. In addition, the “timer effect target” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing when the effect object is generated.

  In the “timer effect” according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect. If it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to be accurate.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning in the notice lottery, the effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the change effect. In other words, in this case, only the notice timer effect that executes the count effect display as “the effect content of the notice effect that functions so that the expected degree of jackpot is added to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command”. First, it is also executed as “the production contents of the production pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command”, so that the expectation degree from the jackpot expectation level indicated by the production pattern determined based on the variation pattern command Count effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without wastefully accumulating (the expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in advance notice lottery”). For example, when the jackpot expectation level when a specific performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is “20%”, if the notice side timer effect is further executed, the jackpot expectation level is increased by the function of the composite performance. For example, it becomes “40%” and the appearance frequency is inevitably lowered. On the other hand, when the variable timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit expectation is expected. The timer effect can be executed with the degree being “20%” (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

  Note that the degree of jackpot expectation when an effect pattern (variation effect) appears in the determination table T1 varies depending on the variation number (and also the effect pattern), and basically the jackpot expectation as the variation number increases. There is a tendency to become higher. For example, in the production pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variation timer production in which “conversation notice” is the production target is executed as the production content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), while the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table that is referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail. However, in the determination table that is referred to in the low-probability short-time state or the high-probability short-time state, the effect contents of the effect pattern itself As described above, an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the variable timer effect can be executed is included, and can appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can be performed on the variable side timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice. This is different from the variation numbers 3 and 4. The variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. However, the variable numbers 9 and 10 execute the variable timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice, 12, the variable side timer effect with cut-in A as the production target is executed, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in A and the variable side timer effect with these as the production target is executed. It is different in that it can be done. Further, the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 are performed on the variation side timer production with the conversation notice as the production target. 20, the variable timer effect for cut-in B is executed, and the variable numbers 21 and 22 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in B, and the variable timer effect for them is executed. It is different in that it can be done. It should be noted that the big hit expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A and B as the effect target is executed than when the variable timer effect with the conversation notice as the effect target is executed. Is set so that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  Note that “conversation notice” is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after an effect pattern (decorative effect of decoration pattern) is executed, and often has a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, the cut-in A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (decorative production of the decorative design) is executed, and the expectation level is relatively high. This is often an effect (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always made). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than other productions (cut-in A and B, and the later-described accessory A action, B, etc.) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be. In addition, “cut-in” that appears as the content of the fluctuating effect is executed so as to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as production contents of the production.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect content (effect pattern) is applied to a plurality of change patterns (change numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as the variable timer production. On this basis, when the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (such as variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a low-expected normal reach effect”, a count effect display as a notice timer effect is displayed. While the effect is not selected (higher premium level) and the expected level UP when the notice timer effect appears is suitably secured, the change pattern is “change pattern (execution of change side timer effect ( Variation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) ”, the variation pattern is the above-described predetermined type (for example, variation). The ratio corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) is made low.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is executed, but two of them (0) Since only the variation pattern (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to the number corresponds to the predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation timer presentation is not executed, and four variation patterns (variations) Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (variable numbers 1 to 6 etc.), the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the variation pattern effect is a count effect display (variable side timer effect) that can be performed (count variation pattern effect), it is more noticeable than a variation pattern that does not perform the variable side timer effect. The ratio at which the count effect display (notice timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect contents is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) without unnecessarily accumulating expectations and reducing the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ), The proportion of occurrence of the notice side timer effect varies depending on which count variation pattern is the count variation pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

  Note that when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. Even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the notice timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, it is actually a bigger hit than in the case of a loss. The notice pattern timer effect is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern that is won, and the variable number 22 is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is displayed in advance according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the production contents (notice timer production) is different. Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type thereof Depending on the situation, it becomes possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if it is an effect pattern in which the effect content of the same reach type appears (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation timer effect is not included as the effect content. The ratio of the appearance of the effect (the ratio determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the notice lottery) is increased. In other words, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation-side timer effect, notice-side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern, just by requiring a big hit expectation level to win the one notice-side timer effect in the notice lottery. As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasting a big hit expectation.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in this case, the variable timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “conversation notice” is the effect target and the variable timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “cut-in” is the effect target Then, the mode of count display (the form and color of count numbers) is made different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. In combination with the fact that “the ratio of occurrence of the notice timer presentation is different depending on which count variation pattern,” the ease of appearance of the notice timer presentation is recognized. You can expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), regardless of whether the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side) It may be different from (or at least different from) the count display mode (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display), or the same (or at least the same as) the same mode. .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (notice side count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be produced. This is useful for improving the sense of expectation by allowing the player to recognize that the notice timer effect that is set to a high degree appears. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable timer effect (variable side count effect display). For the common aspect as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different expectations are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

  Moreover, in order to make it possible to more suitably recognize that the notice timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice timer effect is executed, and a count display when the variable timer effect is executed, It is desirable to make the count speeds different (for example, the speed at which the number changes in the count-up or count-down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the timer display is kept in focus even during the period in which the count display is in progress, and the relative timer effect is relatively low. It becomes possible to give an interest in which of the high-expectation notice-side timer effects is being executed, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

  At this time, in the variation timer production, the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer production according to the production target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count display is performed in the form (cut-in) and the display mode (conversation advance notice) at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer presentation, whether or not the notice timer presentation is being executed. It is possible to add interest by changing the difficulty of the determination. In addition, in the variable timer effect (or notice side timer effect), the count number is displayed by repeating appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count display may be performed by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect occur simultaneously, it is easily grasped whether or not the notice side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is provided for the change patterns (count change patterns such as change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) corresponding to the change-side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total count or time required for all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. When the variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is obtained, the count display of the variation timer effect and the notice timer are determined so as to determine one of the plurality of effect patterns based on a random number for the effect. By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the performance different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap) Let ’s add some fun

  In this embodiment, the count display start timing or end timing (total count or time required for all counts) differing from one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effects and reach The content of the production is the same), but there are multiple production patterns (however, the production of the timer production is different) with different count display start timing or end timing (total number of counts, or time required for all counts). A plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and corresponded one-on-one with the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern.

  Moreover, even if the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing between the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different for the side timer effect, it becomes possible to add interest by making it difficult to determine whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed. .

  Also, if the notice timer performance is executed in the countdown display, the variable timer effect is executed in the count up display. It is expected that it will be possible to greatly improve the fun of gaming. In addition, the timer side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, while the variable side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice) is executed in a count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for cut-in) is executed in a countdown display, the difficulty of determining whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed will vary depending on the effect, making it interesting. Can be granted.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there may be a case where the same effect is targeted for the effect on the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and a case where a different effect is targeted for the effect. To control. And, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, compared to the case where the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are different. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the big hit expectation is lowered is high, and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is the first predetermined value. However, at this point in time, a different effect is targeted (the timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation). Looks like). After that, since the other count display that has been continued reaches a predetermined value in a manner that it is clear that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the effect, it is ended first. Even if it is made clear that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for production by the timer production on the end side, a different production that can appear afterwards is targeted for production ( It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved while maintaining a sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a mode with relatively high expectations.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice timer effect is determined in advance. It is desirable that a separate count end correspondence display (for example, “count success!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) appears at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect for the effect of “conversation notice” executed as the effect on the variable side or the notice side are caused to appear in one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect are simultaneously performed. In the variable timer effect, the variable side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production that occurs (such as “count success!” And effects that match the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice side timer production is related to the “conversation notice” A count display is displayed in accordance with a notice side specific effect ("chance UP!") That occurs as a notice side effect, or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of a conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect). By proceeding, separate count end corresponding displays appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the conversation announcement and cut-in effects are always executed when they are targeted for the effect of the variable timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different expectation levels, when the count display reaches a predetermined value when the target is the effect of the variable timer effect, Therefore, it is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effects to be effected by the variable timer effect are incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable timer effect and the effect object are simply executed by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable that each of the produced effects (a mode with relatively high expectation) can appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to perform control so that an effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) targeted for the effect is selected in the notice lottery. .

  In addition, if the announcement of the conversation notice and the cut-in are not targeted for the effect of the variable timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the notice contents of the notice side in the notice lottery described later. A determination is made as to what aspect (a relatively high expectation aspect or a low expectation aspect) is to appear as the production content of the side, and control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination .

Hereinafter, the effect pattern determination process using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variation pattern command or a symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation when a specific effect pattern appears or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. become.

  Next, as the production pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of production patterns (a plurality of production patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the variation timer production) can be selected. If it is determined, one of a plurality of effect patterns with different count display start timings or end timings is selected based on the success of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit determination is won, the production pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed is increased, and thereby the start timing or end timing of the count display The slower the is, the higher the probability that a jackpot symbol will appear.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, and 17-22) is acquired when a special performance condition is established. Even in this case, an effect pattern that is set so that the variable-side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) is selected in this way, what kind of notice effect is performed within the execution period of the effect pattern. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute additionally (composite) (notice lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Thus, next, automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background is briefly explained.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the player's expectations, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel including the respective reach is assigned in advance to each sound to be output in each scene. It is played back using the channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment, and the sound to be played is played back. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound productions.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds) for the purpose of realizing a variety of sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. Output means) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while dynamically assigning and managing each channel to each sound to be output, the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . This will be specifically described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIG. 119 (A) and FIG. 119 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 119A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction channel” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, whereas one sound is required when outputting in monaural.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started playback until the end of playback. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and a sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so as not to suffer the reproduction timing.

  In sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that would interfere with overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound category and sound name. Yes. Since the playback channel number has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and when “0x80” is set, for example, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers formed by a combination of these Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) It represents whether or not. The output type setting represents whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) cannot be reproduced when attempting to reproduce each sound. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 122A to 122C, the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 122 (A), the game state along the horizontal axis is “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “big hit” It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be “medium”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 in FIG. 122 (C), a new sound is given as a new sound during the playback time of “first notice A” (“hold” shown in the figure). 119 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”, as shown in FIG. "Is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the" first half notice A "sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 122 (C), a new sound is generated during the playback time of “Full Screen Notice” (“Pending” shown in the figure). 119 (B), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”. "" Is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound stops (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 123A and FIG. 123B each show an example of sound control by an automatic channel method as this embodiment.

  FIG. 123A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel classification as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the drawing). Is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to “sound control by automatic channel method”).

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 123B shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned a priority. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  If there is no empty channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the production control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound Manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds are reproduced. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the sound that should be played with priority, while the lower the numerical value, the sound that should be played without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sounds with priority “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”) , A sound effect with a priority of “20” (“big hit fixed sound” and “button press sound”), a BGM with a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10” Sound effects (such as “full-screen notice sound effects”), sound effects with a priority of “05” (“first half notice sound effects” to “second half notice sound effects”), hold winning sounds with a priority of “01” It is said. As a result, in the state where there is no empty channel, for example, when the notification sound is to be reproduced, it is not necessary to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the reserved winning sound) The notification sound is preferentially played back using the channel that is playing back.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and setting “0x80”, for example, causes the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L. The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Further, as described above, the initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the upper and lower pans of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . The initial value of the upper and lower pans is managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers formed by a combination of these Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. In addition, “1” is set in the third byte (0x1FF if 0xFF). ) Is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided on the gaming machine, and is always played at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect”. “1” is set for each “sound”. When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source by such a seek point is exceeded, the maximum number of sounds that can be registered can be registered.

  The playback type setting is loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) It represents whether or not. The output type setting represents whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In FIG. 126 (A) and FIG. 126 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), the game state is sequentially changed along the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the sound of “normal BGM playback” is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range A). Here, if there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “holding winning” shown in the figure) and an attempt is made to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM playback” is played all the time on playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start winning (corresponding to “holding winning” shown in the figure) and the player tries to play the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of the change” shown in FIG. 126 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 generation” shown in the figure) is generated. 126 (equivalent to “notification 2” in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, for each channel, a setting reservation flag, a request sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic assignment group, a priority at the time of automatic assignment, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control. And a piece of information corresponding to these.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that a setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”. The sound number during playback indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played back when “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic assignment group, when “0”, the channel is fixedly assigned, while when “1”, the channel is automatically assigned (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is “1”, it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is “2”, it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of sounds being played when trying to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of the automatic assignment are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the top and bottom pans described above.

  FIG. 128 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) of a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method using various types of notification sounds excluding effect sounds (payout notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds). An example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above-mentioned manner is shown. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting definition are managed. doing. Here, for the convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of other notification sounds, effect sounds, and the like is omitted. In addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the production sound is defined based on the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the assignment state of the notification sound having the low priority order to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is finished, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. Will be.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and when “0x80” is set, for example, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers formed by a combination of these Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) It represents whether or not. The output type setting represents whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 129 is a table showing notification conditions, notification modes, notification times, and conditions for terminating notification (release conditions) for each notification sound exemplified in FIG. 128 for each type of notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is used as much as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. This is a measure for maintaining in the state and forcing a subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which an illegal act using a magnet is highly likely). This is to notify that there is. As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet has been detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed. As the notification time, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is 60 seconds from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions). On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are continued until the release condition “re-power on” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of a fraudulent act due to a dodging action is high). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) for notifying that the player is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (first big prize port sensor or second big size) despite not being in the big hit gaming state (state where the big prize port is opened) Notification sound for notifying that a state in which detection by a winning prize sensor) has been performed (a state where there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening a large winning opening in a closed state and winning a game ball) is performed. 3 (big prize anomaly) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been performed, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “boost vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as a notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of the occurrence, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps The execution of the lighting by is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as a notification mode thereof, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “A boo-boo prize abnormality has been detected” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. A display (for example, “A big prize abnormality has been detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time when the detection by the count sensor 4005 is detected, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. About lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). Moreover, about the notification sound used as the object of a loop process, the notification sound 1 called "boo boo" which plays the role which alert | reports that it belongs to the 1st notification group (state with the high possibility that the fraudulent act was performed). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the notification contents is adopted. The warning sound is a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a severe unfair situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to do so.

  In other words, when reporting information belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed), rather than identifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to fraud It is important to speed up the initial action. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (the fraudulent act is It is expected that the initial response for the hall side response to the fraudulent act will be accelerated. In addition, a message sound for informing which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of “boo-boo”, or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side will be performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility of fraudulent acts due to door opening). However, there is a possibility that the door may be opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side). As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” )) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds after the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three repetitions of the notification sound). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release condition “door closing detection (door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until “detection that the door frame 3 is closed)” is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( An alarm sound 5 (frame opening) for notifying that there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed due to the opening of the main body frame, but there is a possibility that the main body frame is open due to an abnormality handling measure on the hall side) It is considered as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium possibility that some sort of fraud has been performed and this cannot be denied, and for notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notifications The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to a common one.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, “the frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the body frame release switch is used as the notification time. While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to three repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of detection by 619 is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 For lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619. Until the detection of it) "I am satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. About the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (injustice) A combination of sequential output with alarm sounds used in either of the notification sounds 4 and 5, such as “ping-pong ping-pong”, which plays a role of notifying that the possibility of the occurrence of the error is moderate) Yes.

  In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility of fraudulent acts) It is important to be able to perform abnormality handling on the hall side to a certain degree of speed. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for informing which notification type is output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing appropriate games will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as “ping-pong ping-pong” follows the message sound, although it is an alarm sound different from the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. In the case of belonging to the third notification group, the lighting mode is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so as to make it difficult for the person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. By performing notification by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hall side will be accelerated to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a in spite of the non-time-short state. Passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate manner (left-handed)) This is reported. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “please return to left-handed” )) Are executed. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to the left” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time-saving state. The detection is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) after the detection by the gate sensor 4003.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state where the lower tray 322 is detected to be full of game balls by the full-tank detection sensor 279 (lower pan) The notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) for notifying that the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the ball is to be removed is provided to guide the game in order to properly advance the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is assumed that it belongs to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set in common. It is said.

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please remove the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, “please remove the ball on the lower plate”) and a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as “please remove the ball on the lower plate” as a notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to repeated notification sounds for two times) from when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), when the detection is performed by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279, the sensor 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to channel X, and the sound corresponding to it is output (silent output), and the loop processing is repeated to repeat the notification sound for 10 seconds with these message sound and silence data as a set. It has become. And, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are all configured to output silence data for the same time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the portion of the silent data, not the portion of the message sound that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10-second sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop processing while assigning it to the channel X.

  By the way, although there can be silence in the notification sounds (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these are very short in order to have a “between”. It is clear that it is a time thing and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent part (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” or “ping-pong ping-pong” is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. Thus, it is possible to make a notification regarding the game guidance without feeling disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 128 and FIG. 129, for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do it. In addition, loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played is adopted as the playback type setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, “boo-boo” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are connected with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound is created at the time of output. After that, it may be assigned to a channel.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), when there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that there has been a magnetic detection. Next, information indicating the presence of magnetic detection is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. Is detected, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the “loop of magnet detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control is performed. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. On this basis, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X so that the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again as a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “We detected boo-boo magnetism” is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from the timing tα1, and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Detect magnetism”). And lighting by various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), at timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop playback, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). I won't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already in the assigned state is preferentially executed and continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is output (reproduction state), when the timer (60 seconds) has not expired, a sound corresponding to vibration detection is set. Set the schedule data for generation, and assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in that notification mode (here, “boob vibration detected” loop) Playback is to be executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. The light emission mode generation schedule data according to the above is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-described in-liquid crystal display and lamp These are executed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same, The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is variously changed. It is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents. Even in the case of reflecting, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  After this, at timing tα3 when 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) being timed up. The loop process to be executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) At the timing tα3 that has been increased, the loop processing is terminated at a time when the notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and when the notification sound is good.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and the rest By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boobo vibration” is assigned. ”Is detected” loop), the notification sound reproduction is executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) expires, “Boo-boo vibration is detected. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “boobing vibration”) in the notification sound such as “Done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied (FIG. 130 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here, “boo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have finished playing, the seventh alarm sound (here) Then, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if “boo-boo”) was reproduced. As a result, “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” and “Boo-boo vibration has been detected” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with “Boo-boo magnet” and the notification sound 2 starts with “Motion detected”, an unknown notification such as “Boo-boo magnet detected” Occurrence of content that may confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up at the “boo-boo” alarm sound and ends and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing and the reproduction is stopped. If it is a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at halfway timing, it will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will show “Magnetic detected” and “Vibration detected” respectively. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

  FIG. 130 (b) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above-described processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the body frame opening switch 619 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. When it is determined that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification is made. Initiates notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) and sets a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

  When the notification sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, sound generation schedule data corresponding to frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the release condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from timing tβ1, and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “ And “lighting by the various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group)” are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), at time tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tβ1 and a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the door opening detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that has already been assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) in a state where the channel X is not assigned is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, the door open detection is detected. Set the schedule data for sound generation, and assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the loop “door is open ping-pong ping-pong”) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and The schedule data for light emission mode generation corresponding to the detection of door opening is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the door opening appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. When the lamp is lit, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection have the same data contents. In any case, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After this, at timing tβ3 when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is issued based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the time tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, By assigning the notification sound 4 (door opening) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Will open the notification sound in the “Ping-Pong” loop.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) times out, “the door is open It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “door is open”) of the notification sound such as “Ping Pong”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 130 (b)) When the third message sound (here “the frame is open”) and the third warning sound (here “ping-pong ping-pong”) have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( In this case, smooth notification sound switching can be realized as if "door is open") is reproduced. As a result, “Frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and “Door is open ping-pong ping-pong” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize the notification contents in a tense situation. Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed suitably.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at a halfway point, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 130 (c) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-time-short state in the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right-handed detection in a non-short-time state), In the control MPU 1310a, information indicating that a right-handed detection has been detected in a non-time-short state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the short time state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It becomes like this. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analyzing process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95) (see FIG. 129). A timer for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop “return to left-handed”) 20 seconds).

  Regarding right-handed detection in a non-time-short state, in this embodiment, information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate portion 2003 in the game. Only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-short-time state. And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-short state.

  When the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state is copied to various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to right-handed detection in the non-time-short state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-described display in the liquid crystal is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up), which is a release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will never be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, “please return to the left”) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (c), at the timing tγ2 when the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in a state where the loop sound is being played back after 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tγ1. It is assumed that the full-bottom detection sensor 279 detects that the lower pan is full in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower pan full has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the information (lower pan full tank detection) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information about the detection of the full-bottom tray is included, the alarm sound 7 (ball guidance) shown in FIG. 129 is displayed in the channel in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or just after that), a timer (20 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not been set yet) Second) is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, when the timer (20 seconds) has not timed up, the lower pan is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, and assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (in this case, “Pull the ball on the lower plate. The notification sound reproduction is executed in the “loop”.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), but for the screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is executed. Yes.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is issued based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being up. The loop process to be repeatedly executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Return to left-handed” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the time tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the full lower tray. Then, by assigning the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here) Then, the notification sound reproduction in the “please pull out the ball of the lower plate” loop is executed.

  In other words, at timing tγ2, while setting the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tray is not set, but is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound “please remove the ball in the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head and the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , So that the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing of the notification sound such as “Please remove the ball from the lower plate” (for example, “Please remove the ball from the lower plate”) and will not be played back. Can be encouraged.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 130 (c)) When the second message sound (in this case, “Return to the left-handed”) has finished playing, the third message sound (here, “Remove the ball in the lower plate”) Smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced can be realized. As a result, “please return to the left” and “please pull out the ball on the lower plate” are connected at a strange place, and the occurrence of a situation where the notification content cannot be recognized is suitably suppressed. Will be able to.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied, silence data of 5 seconds is sandwiched. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected by the absence of an alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized is preferable. It will be possible to avoid.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), when there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, With respect to processing according to magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), processing similar to that described with reference to FIG. Accordingly, at timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (a), the timing t-2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop playback. , It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 128). ) Even if door opening detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continued.

  In general, the lower priority processing is similar to the case where the same priority processing described with reference to FIGS. 130A to 130C is overlapped. Only the timer is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has occurred. It can be said that it is hard to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group with a medium possibility of fraud”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (a), at timing t-2, neither the alarm sound 4 (door open) timer corresponding to the door open detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. Only set the flag according to the detection of door opening. Then, at timing t-3, based on the flag being set, a notification sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection and a sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are respectively obtained. As well as setting, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . Note that the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting in response to the detection of the door opening are started from the timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, while the alarm sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” was detected during the loop playback, the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening, but “Boo-boo magnet was detected. "From the timing t-3 when the alarm sound loop playback ends, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is played back for 30 seconds, and the" door is open ping-pong ping-pong " That is, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound is reproduced three times. As described above, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group. Although it is a content (here, a “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop), it is expected to promote recognition that the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound “Boo-boo magnet detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation The notification to which it belongs can be recognized at an early stage that it has been terminated. On the other hand, the alarm sound “ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 131 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. Is called. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing is detected as the door opening cancellation condition.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), at the timing tδ2 where 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback. It is assumed that the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 is detected in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. For this reason (see FIG. 128), even when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state occurs, the process of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as the case where the processing of the same priority level described with reference to FIGS. Only the timer is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), at the timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), sound generation corresponding to right-handed detection in a non-time-short state is performed. No schedule data is set. At time tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the “return left-handed” loop).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “The door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the notification sound that does not include the warning sound “Please return to the left” at a good timing. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, even with such silence data, the type of notification sound that has been reproduced so far has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It becomes like this.

  FIG. 131 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (c), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. Is called. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door opening) has timed up Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing is detected as the door opening cancellation condition.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), at time tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S112. It is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of FIG. In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 128), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in either sound or lamp lighting. The output contents are not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or the lamp lighting, it has been set so far at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data in accordance with the detection of the door opening from the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection at the timing tε2. Are kept in a set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has a higher priority than the respective data are respectively set. Put it in a state. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) corresponding to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), at timing tε 2, without performing any operation on the processing on the lower priority side in the execution state (processing when the door is opened) The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is started, and a timer for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is completed at a good timing when the notification sound “Boo-boost magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of magnetic detection that is highly likely to be fraudulent, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense situation is quickly transmitted to the hall side. That is expected.

  FIG. 131 (d) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ1 at which no notification sound is output, right-handed detection in the non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If there is, the processing corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is continued.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ2 where 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tζ1 and a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is in the state of loop playback, step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opening) according to the door opening detection. For this reason (see FIG. 128), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of door opening, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. It will not be done. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), as a technique for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state that has been set so far is performed at the timing tζ2. Processing for canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state but also the sound-generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. The screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection as well as the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection having higher priority than this are maintained. Set the generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Thus, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is made so that the output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), at timing tζ2, the low-priority processing (left-handed guidance processing) in the execution state does not perform any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between two different processes (left-hand guidance process and door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) As the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as the detection of door opening that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound is first played from the message sound (the door is open), the person who is playing the appropriate game will not feel disgust, Notifications belonging to the second notification group are made by the alarm sound of “Ping-Pong”, and it is expected to promptly notify the hall side that it has been switched to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the luminance setting value even in a situation where such anomaly notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected by some of the plurality of effect lamps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 128 are to be output, various processes are performed by performing the above-described processes according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, the notification sound belonging to the second notification group having a medium fraud possibility may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraud but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraud. is there. In other words, if there is an abnormality detection that is likely to have been fraudulent, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIG. 132 to FIG. 137, in addition to the control based on the above-described priority order, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further improve the state of the gaming machine. Notification in a manner that enables appropriate expression is realized. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 132 to 137.

  In the example shown in FIG. 132, door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also included. Set state. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 is reached.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening is completed and the channel X is in an empty state, the magnetic detection whose priority order for notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door started from timing tα11, although the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, regarding allocation to various lamp operations. At timing tα13, the lamp emission mode is switched according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, sound generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X, and screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection are also included. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is set for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. To be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the alarm sound reproduction according to the door opening detection has been completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening to end. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious Therefore, there is a concern that it is insufficient as a countermeasure only to perform the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, even if any countermeasure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is finished at the timing tα14, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening” in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. Special processing to reassign to is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is played back in a form linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that “when the magnetic alarm is over, all of the alarm sound playback has been completed, and it is finally possible to make it inconspicuous that fraudulent acts have been made.” Because the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that should have ended is played, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected to recognize that further fraudulent activities are too risky It becomes like this.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, A process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound and the other game sounds (process for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound that is assigned to other channels and the other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period for which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal It is a period in which the conditions of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) are satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. A process of suppressing the volume of the production sound and the other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the period during which the process is being performed, a process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period, the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the volume of the other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both notification processes by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of reducing the value to a value lower than that during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be further accelerated.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is ended, the processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the detection of door opening that was already in the finished state was played back in a form linked to “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, there was a possibility that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing of opening the door is terminated, tα16, the volume of the effect sound during the fluctuation of the symbol and the other game sounds may not be suppressed, and this may be continued.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 132, as is apparent from the processing according to the door opening detection, the in-liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The start period and the end period of the lamp light emission in a mode corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door are all different, although the start period is the same. As described above, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds by operating them so as to have different roles for the notification sound, display in liquid crystal, and lamp emission. However, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormal content and game guidance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 133, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed, right-handed detection in the non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. Assume the case. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 132, since there is a low possibility that an extremely malicious act is performed, the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening is finished, it is extremely malicious even when the frame sensor detects that the gate sensor 4003 does not detect right-handed in a non-short-time state. Therefore, when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection already in the end state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 134, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door opening detection is ended, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is ended at the timing tα34 during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. Yes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 134, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. It is never played back in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 132, a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then detects the door opening. In response to the end of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is momentarily within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when attempting to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. The possibility of being in the situation entered is assumed. However, after timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is in a non-illegal state where the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection occurs, the magnetic detection is performed in spite of being in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound is played sufficiently until the timing tα35 arrives, and it is considered that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is freed when further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 134, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 135, FIG. 132 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door opening detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα44 during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 135, after the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. Sometimes, a magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in response to this, a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced, but without falling into such a situation, it is within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. It is assumed that the magnet is going to be placed again, and there is a possibility that a more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, the notification sound 1 A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed until 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed. Can be played continuously. In this case, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is continuously reproduced over a period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And finally, the loop processing is not finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is completed, for example, the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boo magnet is detected” As a result, it is expected that everyone will be attracted attention by creating a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was made, the notification sound reproduction has already been reported for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, and the midway such as “detecting the boo-boo magnetism”. It is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback according to magnetism detection” in which the loop processing is terminated at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 136, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 136, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at timing tα54 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 136, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, when an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. Although the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without being depressed. It is assumed that there is a possibility of more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is finished, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been finished is reproduced in a manner further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60 for notifying the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Second), and at a timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Boo-boo vibration has been detected” is not terminated at a good timing, for example, the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boo vibration is detected”. Since the process will be terminated, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted by creating a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to the door open detection” A special process is performed in which “schedule data” is set again and the notification sound is reassigned to channel X. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection” connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. In addition to being played back at the same time, it is played back in a form linked to “playback of notification sound in response to vibration detection” at which the loop processing is terminated at an abrupt timing such as “detecting booby vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the detection of the opening of the frame is completed, not the detection of the door opening. Assumed.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 137, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the detection of the frame opening is a situation where there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraud, the door frame 3 should be opened. Even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnets. Thus, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected by mistake when the hole side uses a magnet to eliminate the clogging of a ball in a ball tank or a payout passage.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 137, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By playing in a form linked to “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hole and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also according to the magnetic detection. Each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) is also subjected to a special process for ending them.

  According to such a configuration, while performing a function against fraud appropriately, in the event of erroneous detection on the hall side, only the body frame 4 is closed, and notification processing corresponding to frame opening detection and magnetic detection ( Notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp) can all be terminated, so that it is expected to quickly maintain the atmosphere in the hall by speeding up the response on the hole side to false detection. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 137, even when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended when the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. Not only for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to detection of frame opening, but also for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetism detection You may make it perform the special process which complete | finishes.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated in the process of step S1108, and determines that the effect selection left button 331 is operated. Processing for lowering the setting value (player setting value) by the player with respect to the volume of the speaker is performed, and if it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the setting value (player setting value by the player) with respect to the volume of the speaker ) Is raised. In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is output at the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. It is possible to grasp how much the volume has been changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is lowered and when it is raised. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20” which is the same as the button press sound) referred to when there is no empty channel, and the output volume of the production sound ( The change of the audible sound volume) can be transmitted more reliably.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period before the game is started (the demo display etc. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is executed, the player is allowed to accept, and more important effects appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value flexibly at times, the game entertainment is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation in which channel assignments of various effect sounds are made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic anomaly or door opening, a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. At this time, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound is assigned to a channel among a plurality of types of notification sounds, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Thus, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately returning the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described effect progress notification process, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, so that only a specific notification sound is assigned to the channel at the normal time ( More channels are used than in the non-informing state, and there are no free channels to which no sound data is assigned before the end of channel assignment (notifying state) of a specific notification sound. Risk tends to be high. If there is no free channel to which no sound data is assigned before the end of the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, after that, even if the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, the discarded sound data cannot be assigned to the channel and reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Concerning the concerns about the vacant channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production, so as to the notification process under the progress of production even if any channel method is adopted It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to ensure cost reduction and improvement in reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the operation is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“Pi!” Or “Pi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin and the risk of vacant channels being lost is promoted.

  However, while the pachinko machine 1 is capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the notification process under the progress of the performance is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the notification process under the effect progress caused by the error detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) is executed, the sound volume is appropriately set according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the period in which the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being performed, the output volume (possible) After changing the setting of the volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the sound volume to an appropriate value. However, in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Thus, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that the effect sound cannot be output properly because there are not enough empty channels even though the notification process under the effect progress is finally finished.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player can accept the change of the set value (player set value) of the sound itself. When the effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is finished, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

  According to such a configuration, if the player accepts a change in the set value (player set value) in accordance with the progress of the presentation while the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being executed, a new operation can be performed. Even when the notification progressing process is finished, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be changed at once. As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and a situation occurs in which the empty channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, according to the said structure, when performing the batch change of the output volume to a player setting value, when the notification progress under effect progress is complete | finished, the game in the period when the notification progress under effect progress was performed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, etc., the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of the special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably resolve the shortage of empty channels when the notification progress under the effect progress is completed, the number of changes in the player setting value during the period during which the notification progress under the effect progress is being executed, or by the player Regardless of the number of operations, etc., it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump as the notification process under the production progress is terminated. . According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that notification processing under the progress of production due to false detection or notification due to convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate performance is due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  In the above explanation example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is ended while maintaining the door open state, when the magnetic abnormality occurs and the notification sound corresponding to this is ended, the door opening detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 132). However, if a magnetic anomaly occurs when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is in the output state and the notification sound corresponding to this is terminated, the door opening detection is performed even if the door opening state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the remaining time as the output time of the interrupted “notification sound according to door opening detection”).

  When the door is opened, lamp emission is performed according to the detection of door opening. This lamp emission continues even when the notification sound according to detection of door opening ends and when the door is open. It is desirable to make it. Furthermore, it is desirable to continue for a predetermined time after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is ended.

  Even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and when the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while maintaining the door open state, the specific error It is desirable that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is output again based on the occurrence of this. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound according to the door opening detection.

  Or, even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and when the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is terminated while maintaining the door open state, The notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening may not be output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, and the state in which the notification can be performed again may be maintained.

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the luminance setting value even in a situation where such anomaly notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected by some of the plurality of effect lamps.

  Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) will be described.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the notification progressing notification process according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to explaining the processing from when the effect progress notification process is executed until the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. Is briefly described. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 128 are shown, and description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in this example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the production sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) for the volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanation example, although the process relating to the output itself is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, special prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any of them is executed, a process for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode that is the higher suppression level. Moreover, when the notification process regarding any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, The output volume (the volume of the audible sound) of the production sound in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression level until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected. ) Is not terminated and this is continued.

  In this example, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period of time during which the process of suppressing the sound volume is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) according to abnormality detection is played to when it is terminated. Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having the medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode on the lower side. However, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, when the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is ended in the first volume suppression mode that is the low suppression level.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed. Therefore, no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound).

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. However, the output volume of the production sound may be reduced in one case when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (volume of an audible sound). However, the end condition of the process to be suppressed is different in a case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed more strictly than the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make it.

  FIG. 139 shows the contents of the processing related to volume adjustment when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while no abnormality detection has occurred and the process related to the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player set value can be varied by “1” within the range of “1” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the player setting when the above-described suppression mode (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanation example, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the player set value is “3” out of “1” to “5” with respect to the volume of the production sound, and no notification flag is set. Assume that the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “60”, which is 20 times that volume. Further, if the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the big hit determination has not been made and the player is waiting for a start winning prize, the effect selection left button 331 is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a with the effect selection right button 332 displayed are displayed, and a volume adjustment guidance display OAH is displayed to indicate that the volume can be adjusted through these operations. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a first volume value display OH1 that enables recognition of which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. The The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect that is a reach effect that is executed when the background image is changed. In the case of the above, at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a later-described second volume value display OH2 may appear when the player performs an operation without displaying. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 139 (A), when an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player set value is incremented by “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20”. Also, whenever the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the current set values is “1” to “5” that is the range of the player set values is indicated by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 139C) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume (audible sound volume) is reduced. The person set value remains “1” (the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if assigned to the channel, the volume is set to “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to “0”. The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 139 (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed), but also the variation of symbols corresponding to the jackpot determination after the game is started. Even during the period of execution, the player is allowed to accept. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration allows the setting change to be made possible.

  That is, FIG. 139 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 139 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60”, which is 20 times the volume. While the setting has been changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at “80” which is the volume after the change. When the value is changed from “4” to “5” and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed from “80” to “100”, which is 20 times the value, Volume adjustment is completed at “100”, which is the volume after the change. There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the range of the player setting value is “1” to “5”. Thus, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by gauge display is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify the current set value for the player set value range of “1” to “5”, and even under a tense situation where a more important performance appears. The purpose is to prevent operation mistakes such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical value range of “1” to “5” is regularly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to changes in the player setting value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

  Note that the second volume value display OH2 is displayed when an operation is performed on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 139C, as shown in FIG. 139D. The display is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is an operation in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 is selected. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”). When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Accordingly, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation to be repeatedly performed on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is “5” which is the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 140 shows that the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is detected during the symbol variation execution period and the process related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 140 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 139 (A). In this situation, when a start win occurs and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 139 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol change execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ And “lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5” are executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is used. An effect progress notification process for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 140 (A). The sound output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value). The contents of the performance are developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such an effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume of the production sound that is lowered to the value (here, “10”) (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the volume Accept the change of itself, and output to the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations up to that time are reflected when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed It is as described above that they are collectively changed.

  That is, FIG. 140 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 140 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the apparatus 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current set value is “4” among the player set value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of the player setting value “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state in which it is executed again, and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the effect progress notification process (the output volume is reduced to a specific value). 140 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that time is completed in accordance with the completion of the process, as shown in FIG. 140 (D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Since it is changing, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation. However, the first specific value (here, “10”) should be changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production is finished, and there is a shortage of empty channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time, or there is no room for it. The occurrence of such a situation is also preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump (“10” → “100”) in accordance with the completion of the notification process under the effect progress, the output volume changes. Regardless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that notification processing under the progress of production due to false detection or notification due to convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate performance is due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are exemplified as the specific state. The end condition may be made different for the effect progress notification process in the performed state.

  For example, first, with respect to the presentation progress notification process in a state where the door has been opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opened (the door has been opened) ). However, in any case, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed at once (for example, “10” → “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment completion sound is generated despite the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to make the assignment itself.

  On the other hand, the notification progress notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred is not terminated only by the completion of the magnetic abnormality state, but is continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible sound volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10” → “100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is turned off. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound itself.

  In addition, in the progress notification process in the state where the door has been opened, a display indicating that is made when the player setting value is changed, whereas in the progress process in the notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred, When the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that may be omitted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end conditions are different between the effect progress notification process when the door is opened and the effect progress notification process when the magnetic abnormality occurs. become.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hall side, the output of the volume adjustment completion sound (channel assignment) cannot be performed when the volume adjustment by the knob is triggered. It is more desirable to make room for an empty channel.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). Lamps (for example, lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and are used for production, and game lamps such as special-purpose LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting targets. ) Brightness adjustment buttons (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and if it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the player determines the brightness applied to various effect lamps. A process for changing the set value (player set value) can be executed. Further, when the player setting value related to the brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the setting value related to the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the brightness of such an effect lamp can be set and changed by a player's operation in both a state where the symbol is not changing and a state where the symbol is changing.

  In addition, it is desirable that the luminance adjustment completion sound be assigned to the channel under the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. There will be situations where the sound channel assignment itself is not performed, or where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (for example, whether or not the above-described performance progress notification process is being executed) when the setting value related to the brightness, not the volume, is changed. Will be possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time elapses after being controlled by the demo screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without any operation by the player, a display indicating the current setting value (the first volume value display OH1 or the second volume) It is to the third party that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where neither the value display OH2) nor the output (channel assignment) applied to the volume adjustment completion sound is performed. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

  In addition, when the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is in the output state, and a new volume adjustment is performed, the volume adjustment sound in the output state is output even if there is an empty channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel and outputting it (overwriting output) in such a way that it is terminated halfway is more effective in making room for the number of empty channels. desirable.

  Further, when the player is further operated to increase the sound volume even if the player setting value is at the maximum value, or to the sound volume decreasing side even if the player setting value is at the minimum value. When the operation is further performed, even if there is an empty channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and it is not output, so that the number of empty channels is increased. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but a display (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) indicating which of the current set values is displayed is displayed. Also good.

  Volume adjustment by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is allowed, but it may be possible to generate a period during which the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation is not allowed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 141 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection when the state detection generated in FIG. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 141 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 140 (A). When a start winning is generated in such a situation and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 140 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to this is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the detection is performed, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. A notification process under the progress of production for suppressing the output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 141 (A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The production contents are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process according to such magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”). ") The output volume of the production sound that has been reduced to the level (audible sound volume (silenced here)) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) regarding the volume itself Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-described production progress notification process (process for reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is finished. As described above, the change is made in a lump.

  That is, FIG. 141 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 141 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that the second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) that is lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation of the player, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the value (here “0”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the apparatus 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current set value is “4” among the player set value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of the player setting value “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this illustrative example, in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detected state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection is detected. The effect progress notification process that suppresses this is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of magnetism with the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH being returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), according to the completion of the process, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) reflecting all the operations up to that time is reflected. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), and the second operation. However, the second specific value (here “0”) is changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  Note that when the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. The display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. Yes. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and the player setting value is determined. However, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, the production sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued in the notification process according to the door opening. It is supposed to be.

  In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest until the notification progressing process is finished. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production is finished, and there is a shortage of empty channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time, or there is no room for it. The occurrence of such a situation is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, in this example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is also changed collectively (“0” → “100”) in accordance with the termination of the notification process under the effect progress due to the magnetic abnormality. In spite of the change in volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which it is impossible to enjoy an appropriate effect due to a lack of empty channels, even though the notification process under the effect progress due to notification due to erroneous detection has finally ended. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 128, the initial sound of the volume is set for the alarm sound according to the door opening, such as "door is open ping-pong ping-pong", and the alarm sound according to magnetic anomaly such as "Boo-boo magnet was detected". Since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification process under the effect progress is not executed. Both the value and the output sound volume (audible sound volume) can be appropriately varied. However, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, as shown in FIG. 128, since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the volume initial value, regardless of the player set value, Playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the object of the volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, for each process described in FIG. 140 and FIG. 141, not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also the state before the symbol variation is started, and the state detection is performed over the timing of the start and end of the symbol variation. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  In each process described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the process demonstrated in FIG. 140 and the process demonstrated in FIG. 141 changed the production | generation sound suppression mode in the period when the production progress under notification process is performed, about this suppression mode, it does not necessarily exist. The output sound volume (audible sound) of the production sound is suppressed in one mode between when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the sound volume may be performed.

  Further, in the notification progressing process, the output volume of various game sounds (audible sound volume) is suppressed. Among these game sounds, a game ball is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as sounds played in response to winning (winning sounds), may be played with the initial value set volume without being affected by volume control. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) that is played in response to the winning of a game ball in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable to play the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the notification process under the effect progress is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 128 to 141, there is no channel space by adopting the channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) It was proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make this difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation in which there is no vacancy in the channel to which the production effect sound (production sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the channel assignment of the production sound, various technical techniques are used at a stage before the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to give some ingenuity. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel with respect to various notification sounds is not necessarily employed. You don't have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel method is adopted, the above-described control based on the priority order may not necessarily be adopted, and a process for discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Each example described below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol variation is started and ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of “BGM playback” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. To perform the process. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, a state where the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to a predetermined channel and is output in a suppression mode or silence ( When the volume of “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output, and an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected in this state, A special effect sound suggesting an expectation degree in which a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, although the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, it is set to a state of being output in a suppression mode or silence. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which the channel usage is likely to be afforded. Therefore, providing an opportunity for the player to output special performance sound without anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output special performance sound”. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("BGM playback" sound) is assigned to a channel and is output in a suppressed manner or silence, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM playback”) (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving the player an opportunity to operate (generating a valid period for the production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if an operation (production reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the “BGM playback” sound in advance so as to start playback of the sound in accordance with this indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback exclusively for special effect sound playback”. It is also conceivable to perform the process of reproducing. However, the “BGM playback” sound is played in accordance with the contents of various effects, the timing of symbol stop, etc. until the specific effect pattern is stopped after being stopped. When the operation (production reception) is performed indefinitely (depending on the player), when the operation (production reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. There is a concern that so-called sound misalignment may occur between the various effects and the symbol stop timing after that, resulting in a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific performance pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data (BGM playback) sound corresponding to the specific performance pattern ( For example, normal fluctuation sound data, sound data of the first half of the super reach production, sound data of the second half of the super reach production, etc.) are predetermined according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the “BGM playback” sound corresponding to such a specific performance pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When assigned to a predetermined channel in accordance with the time series, the playback is started by assigning to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of effect reception within the specific effect pattern is generated, and the effective period ends. Thus, playback is performed while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel over a long period until the timing after the above.

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, it is suppressed in comparison with other sections, or processing for sound output with no sound. When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Time period) within a time series in which the valid period of the production reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over the two periods in the specific sound data with the period (other sections) after the (partial section) ends. Reproduction is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in order according to the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppressed state or state (special period) output in silence”. In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, special processing is performed in a non-suppressed manner by processing with high immediacy triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being suppressed or silenced (special period) regardless of the production reception”. Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after the special effect sound is being reproduced, it is inserted into this, and a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed. Since the data content of other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is played back, it becomes possible to return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in a non-suppressed mode secretly. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. In other words, in this case, when a player's operation is accepted in a state where a sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence or silence, a special effect sound is not inhibited by highly immediate processing triggered by this. In this case, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound misalignment between various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 142 is a time chart showing an example of an assignment state of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 142, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the timing at which the presentation is progressed on the game board side presentation display device 1600 at the timing ts11. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the effect pattern is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback). The sound of “BGM playback” is, for example, one sound data (one piece of data over the entire period of symbol variation from the start to the end of symbol variation when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is to be executed. (Sound material) may be reproduced based on sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and individual sound data prepared for each period may be used. May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 142, one sound data (one sound material) as a sound of “BGM playback” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), one sound data assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state ("BGM playback" sound) Silent data content is set at timing ts12 before the timing ts13 at which the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) that gives an opportunity to generate the production sound occurs. The playback state is set for a part of the section. As a result, without adjusting the volume from the initial value for the “BGM playback” sound, the sound can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content, and there seems to be room in channel usage. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of production reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides an opportunity for the player to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and the special performance sound may not be output” is removed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interests.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is ended even when there is no operation by the player. At the timing ts15 before the arrival of, the period is terminated so that the player's operation is not accepted. Therefore, even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by the player can be generated while an atmosphere is provided in which the use situation of the channel is likely to be sufficient. It should be noted that the operation valid period is ended not only when the player does not perform an operation but at the timing ts15, but also when the player receives an operation. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case of the operation by the player at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound “BGM playback” is assigned based on the acceptance of the effect. , 03 is assigned to a special effect sound for reproduction on channels 08, 09 different from the above.

  In this respect, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period is ended at this maximum time. When the time from the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” to the end (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF” Even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the above, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a predetermined time of “SY + α (> BF)” and played back.

  According to such a configuration, even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is possible to output the “BGM playback” sound as a non-suppressed form in the form of being mixed into the special effect sound. In other words, in this case, the time from when the special effect sound is started to be output as a non-suppressed sound after the start of the special effect sound is changed according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. The output period of the special effect sound is a buffer period for returning the sound of “BGM playback” in a non-suppressing manner (the sound of “BGM playback” is restored in a non-suppressing manner by intermingling with the special effect sound) The period of time when it is difficult for the player to notice that the “BGM playback” sound is not restored as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted, and the user feels uncomfortable by returning after a predetermined time. It becomes difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound “BGM playback” is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the production sound for BGM playback, the sound “BGM playback” is played back in the non-suppressed mode when the timing ts17 arrives. While in the state, the reproduction of the special performance sound comes to an end.

  In the example described above, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 142 (b). Although it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow according to the timing accepted, the timing ts16 arrives when the special performance sound is in the playback state, regardless of which timing it falls into. It is obvious that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM playback effect sound is set as the “BGM playback” sound is started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning after a predetermined time without returning the“ BGM playback ”sound as an unsuppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section while paying attention to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, when a player's operation is accepted, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception. However, a specific effect corresponding to the result of the variation pattern or jackpot determination is used. The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. Even if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when an operation is received by the player within the operation valid period, the performance is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section in a state where the playback of the sound or the like is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the playback state in the normal section is the playback of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending. According to such a configuration, there is a silent period (in accordance with the operation timing) from when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) ends to when the BGM playback sound returns to the normal state playback state. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if it is set so that a revival effect with a high degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during the silent period, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.), the BGM playback sound is not restored to the playback state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a losing manner. Also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM playback sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM playback by performing a movable effect that operates a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect. It is desirable to secretly shift the playback sound to the playback state in the normal section.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound of “BGM playback” is output silently in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as it is output at. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode in which the volume of the speaker cone is reduced per unit time in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, the “BGM playback” sound data assigned to the predetermined channel is set to the “BGM playback” sound data itself by setting a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state of being output in a suppressed manner or silence (special period) simply by playing it. However, the “BGM playback” sound data allocated to a predetermined channel may not necessarily have a time-series period set to be suppressed or silence in the sound data itself. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of “BGM playback” You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, a process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from a specific value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) is triggered by the acceptance of the effect. Do not. When the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.) (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, a restriction process is made to make it difficult to assign a new sound to an empty channel over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16 at least. It is desirable to make it. Note that such a restriction process has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation being executed, such as a block winning tone, a pending winning tone, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment tone, etc. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and that the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. So that it is not a music effect sound or a speech sound effect such as speech, so that it does not blur the sound of the sound, and while the specific effect sound is being played, the timing ts12 arrives and BGM playback It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is ended before timing ts14 (or before timing ts14) at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate anxiety that the special performance sound is not output.

  Here, the specific effect sound played on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not necessarily start to be played at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and after the timing ts12. The reproduction may be started before the timing ts13. Even in such a configuration, when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or a silent state, if a specific performance sound is output in a non-inhibition mode (normal mode), “ Since the sound of BGM playback that is set to “suppressed mode or silent state” can appear to have been returned to the playback mode in the normal mode, the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or silent. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that

  Further, “for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before timing ts14 (or before timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output”. "The output of a specific effect sound is terminated based on the fact that the player's operation is accepted within the operation valid period, or is automatically terminated at a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)." It means that. That is, if the player does not receive an effect before the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically ended.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the BGM playback sound is output from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the BGM playback sound into the effect sound, and the BGM playback sound is usually set to be normal. It becomes possible to shift to the reproduction state in the mode secretly.

  For the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, even if there is no operation, an effect reception is always generated within the effective period (automatic reception) and the post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do it.

  In addition, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 occurs, the stage reception is permitted while the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppressed manner or silence. (Or “acceptance acceptable sound” that suggests that the reception of the production is permitted) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The “acceptable sound” is configured as a partial section in the “specific sound data” for outputting the “specific effect sound”, and the “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel before the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific performance sound corresponding to the channel is output in a non-suppressing manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as a sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” is output from before the timing ts13 to after that so as to straddle the timing ts13. Note that the specific effect sound can be output, for example, as a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect (an effect suggesting that the effective period will occur soon) before the operation effective period occurs. In this case, “a reproduction section of a prelude effect sound” and “a reproduction section of an acceptable sound” are provided in one sound data allocated to a channel so as to straddle before and after the timing ts13. The “acceptable sound” may be a non-output state during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at timing ts15. However, it is desirable that when an effect is received when in the output state, this is used as a trigger for a non-output state.

  That is, “acceptable sound is output” means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing ts13 and is already allocated to the channel. This is a concept that also includes the “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data that has arrived at the timing ts13. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data is a concept that includes a transition to a period in which a subsequent sound (including silence data) is reproduced after being ended.

  Further, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, the time elapsed since the reception of the effect was made even if the effect was received at any timing within the effective period. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound “BGM reproduction” is assigned.

  In this regard, when an effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), a special effect display corresponding to the effect acceptance also appears as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, for the special effect display corresponding to the reception of the effect, “the execution state (viewable state) is continued until the elapsed time from the reception of the effect reaches the predetermined time value”. Instead, it is desirable to perform the operation so that “even if the presentation is accepted at any timing within the effective period, it is not displayed when a predetermined timing in the presentation pattern arrives”. As the “predetermined timing in the production pattern”, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after the timing ts15 and before the timing ts17 can be adopted. There is a timing that arrives before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound ends even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, for the processing related to the special effect sound, the output state is not continued until the timing at which the “BGM playback” sound comes after the timing ts16 at which the sound is returned in an unsuppressed manner. However, since the special effect display can be finished before the special effect sound, the effect after the post-operation effect can be advanced at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such effects, the specific timing at which the special effect display is not displayed is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of “BGM playback” is restored or the timing before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), an elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received is determined in advance based on the reception of the effect. "Processing for special effect sound that continues the output state until the time value is reached" and "Processing for special effect display that is displayed until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" in parallel Will start each.

  For example, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed over a relatively long period. Among the post-operation effects, the “process related to the special effect sound” ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the reception of the effect. On the other hand, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing within the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “processing related to the special effect display” of the post-operation effects is executed only for a relatively short time. However, the “process related to the special effect sound” among the effects after the operation is executed from the time when the effect is accepted until the timing at which a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  That is, in this case, the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 is that a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the content of the effect as the specific effect pattern is the specific timing. When an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), “the output state is changed until the elapsed time from the time when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It will function as a process for executing “a process relating to the special effect sound to be continued” and “a process relating to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives”.

  According to such an operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), if an operation is performed immediately after the effective period is generated, the execution state of the “processing related to special effect display” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation, the end timing of the “processing related to special effect sound” of the post-operation effects comes at a relatively early stage. That said, if you do not operate for a while after the effective period occurs and operate at a later time, the end timing of the “processing related to special effects sound” of the post-operation effects will be a relatively late stage. However, there is a disadvantage that the execution state of the “process for displaying special effects” in the post-operation effects cannot be maintained for a long time.

That is, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting the production,
・ Why do you enjoy the process by extending the execution state of “Process for special effect display” in exchange for accelerating the timing of completion of “Process for special effect sound”? Or)
・ In addition to shortening the execution state of “Processing related to special effects display”, whether to enjoy this process by extending the time until “Processing related to special effects sound” ends (at a later stage within the effective period) Operation), or
・ Simultaneously sacrifice the time that “process related to special effect display” is maintained in the execution state and the time until “process related to special effect sound” is finished, so that the overall balance is achieved. (Do you operate at an early or late timing within the validity period?)
It is possible to provide a strategic operation performance such as that for the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception performance that is difficult to get bored of, which allows the operation timing to be selected according to the player's mood. Will be able to.

  Here, in the example described above, “processing for special effect sound” and “processing for display of special effect” are performed as post-operation effects when an effect is received during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15). However, instead of the “process for the special effect display”, the “process for operating the predetermined effect movable body” may be executed. May be executed. However, as for the “process for operating the predetermined effect movable body”, as in the case of the “process related to the special effect display” described above, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period It is desirable that the operation state be terminated when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Here, in the case where “the operation state is ended” is an effect that moves the predetermined effect movable body to the specific position, the predetermined effect movable body that is in the operation state at the specific position is returned to the original position. It means starting the process of operating to return.

  In the example described above, when an effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body), and a “process for special effect sound” that is continued until an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It was. However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined performance condition is not satisfied (for example, when the big hit determination is lost or the predetermined performance determination is lost) In other words, even if an effect is received within the operation reception effect, the “process for displaying the special effect (or the process for operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition The “process for the special effect sound” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short compared to the case where the condition is satisfied (FIG. 142) may be performed as a different effect sound. More desirable.

  However, this may not be detected well (detection error) even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the production reception may not be performed. As a result, the production reception is not performed. When the period ends, there is a game entertainment effect of the player who saw that the “process for the special effect display (or the process for operating the predetermined effect movable body)” was not performed even though it was operated. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the rendering pattern arrives. (Or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and a" process for a special effect sound "that is continued until an elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value, respectively. It is desirable to do so. As a method for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) and a production mode related thereto, any of the examples described above or later, or an appropriate combination can be used.

  As described above, during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in an output state in a non-suppressed manner. Then, based on the effect reception, the post-operation effect is executed, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is canceled at this point. In this regard, even when a normal effective period that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is not suppressed, the acceptance allowable sound is set to an output state in a non-suppressed manner with the generation. However, it is desirable that the permissible reception sound be continued without canceling the output state even if the presentation is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. In addition, with respect to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated, the effect sound that can be continuously reproduced for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound that is output when the normal effective period occurs. It is desirable to use it as a game entertainment device even when the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed.

  Moreover, it is an effective period (or second reception period among a plurality of reception periods with different post-operation effects, which is generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppression mode or a silent state, and the sound of a specific BGM is a suppression mode Or those that occur when there is no sound), there are N types (modes) of allowable reception sounds that indicate that the effective period occurs (or the effective period has occurred), and these types Be sure to output (output in a non-suppressed manner). On the other hand, the effective period (or the first reception period among a plurality of reception periods with different post-operation effects, which is generated when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner, As an acceptable sound that indicates that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred), the sound is generated when the sound of the specific BGM is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner. Only M types (modes) smaller than N are prepared, and “when output is performed in any of those types (output in a non-suppressed mode)” and “accepted without being output by any of those types” It is desirable that there is a case where sound data including sound itself is not assigned to a channel and generates a valid period. It is desirable to suggest that “the expectation level at which the jackpot symbol appears is different” depending on the type of allowable reception sound. It should be noted that the reception acceptable sound prepared in correspondence with the effective period (first reception period) generated when the sound of BGM reproduction (specific BGM) is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner The number M may be one type (one aspect). In this case, when the first reception period occurs, the same mode is always output as the reception allowable sound. On the other hand, when the second reception period is generated, any one of the N acceptable reception sounds having N modes is selectively output (based on the result of the big hit determination or the effect determination).

  Alternatively, either an effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or a silence state, or an effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a normal output state in a non-suppression mode There are a plurality of types (modes) as acceptable reception sounds, but the proportion of acceptable reception sounds with a high expectation level for big hits occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppressed state or in a silent state. It is desirable for the effective period to be relatively high and to be relatively low for the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a non-suppressed manner as usual. . In this case as well, in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, an acceptable sound that indicates that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred) While it is always output (output in a non-suppressed manner), in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner, the effective period occurs ( Or “acceptable sound is output in a non-suppressed manner” and “when the sound data including the acceptable sound is not assigned to a channel and is not output”. It is desirable to have it.

  According to these configurations, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in a non-suppressed manner, the degree of expectation suggested by the acceptable reception sound is too detailed (M types less than N). May not be able to be recognized, or may not be expected (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of BGM playback is being output normally in an unsuppressed manner, there is a possibility that the acceptable sound will be missed by the sound of BGM playback. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the acceptable sound has not been output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM playback is in a state of being output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in a non-suppression mode stand out, Since the output is always performed in a non-suppressed manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes is employed, the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the “effective period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silent state” are generated. , At least one of the types of acceptable reception sounds that can be output upon occurrence of the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is normally output in a non-suppressed manner” (for example, Among them, the type with the lowest expectation degree of jackpot) may be included. However, the acceptable sound that can be output when the “valid period generated when the BGM playback sound is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner” is included in the acceptable reception sound. Included are types that cannot be output as acceptable reception sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the state is in the state” (for example, types with the highest jackpot expectation among acceptable reception sounds). Is desirable. Also, the number of types of effects that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner” is “BGM playback It is desirable that there be more than the number of production types that can appear as post-operation production in response to the production acceptance in the “effective period that occurs when the sound is in the suppression mode or silence”. Among the types of effects that can appear as post-operation effects in response to an effect reception in the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner”, “BGM playback sound is At least one of the types of effects that may appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the “effective period generated when in the suppression mode or silence” may be included. In addition, the plurality of reception periods with different post-operation effects performed when an effect is received include a third reception period in addition to the first reception period, and the third reception period also includes: The sound may be generated when the sound of BGM playback (specific BGM) is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner. However, in this third reception period, it is more difficult to perform the operation than when the first reception period occurs by preventing the reception allowable sound from being output at the time of occurrence, and thereby, It is desirable to make improvements.

  Also, in the normal gaming state where neither the time-shortening function nor the probability variation function is activated, the effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppression mode or the silence state, and the BGM playback sound is in the non-inhibition mode. When multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations are prepared as acceptable reception sounds in any of the effective periods that are generated when they are in a normal output state, they are output in any of these effective periods Then, a special acceptance permissible sound that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%” may be output. It should be noted that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as special reception permission sounds.

  That is, in this case, when the “acceptable period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silence state” is generated, if the special acceptance allowable sound is output (non-inhibited mode), the production is performed within the effective period. Even when the post-operation effect is performed based on the reception, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%”. If the production is accepted in a state where the special acceptance permissible sound is output, the output of the special permissible acceptance sound is interrupted. It is desirable to output a production sound.

  However, when a special acceptance allowable sound is output (non-suppression mode) when the “effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in a non-suppression mode”, the effective period As a post-operation effect that is performed based on the reception of the effect in the case, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode that “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%”, and executed in the special mode It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special acceptance permission sound that is output when the “valid period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppression mode or silence” is generated, and “the sound of BGM playback is output in a non-suppression mode as usual. The special acceptable sound that is output during the “valid period that occurs when the sound is in the state of being in the state” may be different types of acceptable sound. In addition, there are a plurality of types of allowable special acceptance sounds that are output when the “valid period generated when the sound of BGM playback is normally output in a non-suppressed manner”, and among these types, , May be the same as the type of the special acceptable sound that is output when the “effective period generated when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silence state” is generated, and may be different from the type . If an acceptance is made in a state where an acceptable reception sound (including a special acceptable sound) is being output, the output of the acceptable reception sound is interrupted, and an effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect (the post-operation effect is special) When it is performed in a manner, it is desirable to output a special effect sound “when the ratio is stopped at the jackpot symbol is 100%”.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppression mode or in a silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in hearing), if a special acceptance allowable sound is output, As a post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect has been received in step 1, when it appears, it is always executed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%”. On the other hand, in a state in which the BGM playback sound is output in a normal manner in a non-suppressed manner (when it is easy to make a mistake in hearing due to competition with the BGM playback sound) However, as a post-operation effect performed based on the reception of the effect within the effective period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%” From the above, it is possible to give a suspicion (a suspicion of a mistake in hearing) whether the acceptable reception sound was output as a “special reception acceptable sound”, so that the tension can be suitably maintained. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM playback is being output normally in a non-suppressed manner, the emphasis is placed on “how to miss the acceptable reception sound” and the tension until the acceptable reception sound is output. This can be suitably maintained. In order to increase such a feeling of tension, in the operation reception effect that “the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a manner that the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100% when it appears” Compared to the case of the operation reception effect “executed in a manner in which a special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation effect is“ performed to be 100% when it appears, the ratio is stopped by the big hit symbol ” It is desirable that the effective period is suddenly generated by performing the presentation (pre-permissible operation-related display or pre-permissible operation-related sound) in a relatively short time.

  In a state where the BGM playback sound is output in a non-suppressed manner as usual (when there is a tendency to make a mistake in hearing due to competition with the BGM playback sound), the “special reception permission sound is output and the operation The post-production is “not executed in a mode where the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol when it appears is 100%”. The operation reception production (effective period) and “the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-production production is“ When it appears, the special reception allowable sound is output as a different type of allowable reception sound in the operation reception effect (valid period) that is executed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is 100%”. Alternatively, it may be output as an acceptable sound of the same type. Further, in a state in which the BGM playback sound is output in a non-suppressed manner as usual (when it is easy to make a mistake in the allowable reception sound due to competition with the BGM playback sound), the “special reception allowable sound is output In addition, the operation reception effect (valid period) that is “executed in a mode in which the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% when it appears” may not necessarily be generated. In addition, in the case of an operation reception effect (valid period) when a special reception permission sound is output and a post-operation effect is not executed in a manner that “the ratio of being stopped by a big hit symbol is 100% when it appears” Regardless of which type of sound is output, the post-operation effect is not executed in the form of “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot symbol when it appears is 100%”, and this aspect is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

  In addition, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed and the normal effective period, an image display in which the operation means used as the operation target is deceived and effective A gauge display indicating how much time remains is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is provided to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this respect, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs at least while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, when the presentation is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and “ A process related to special effect display in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body), and “elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted” It is desirable to start each of “a process relating to a special effect sound that is continued until the time reaches a predetermined time value”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period the stage in which the production is accepted is recognized after the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body) will end immediately. In addition, as a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, use any of the above-described or each of the examples described later, or an appropriate combination, and further the content described in the written description. Is possible.

  In the example described above, for the number of production patterns prepared (stored) as a “specific type production pattern” for outputting “BGM reproduction” sound in silence or silence, the sound for “BGM reproduction” is inhibited. Alternatively, setting the number to be less than the number of production patterns prepared (stored) as “other production patterns” that are not output without sound is desirable in order to improve the game entertainment when the production occurs. .

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as “effect patterns” for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in silence or silence, the sounds of “BGM playback” are suppressed in the effect patterns over the first set time. Alternatively, an effect pattern that is output without sound and an effect pattern that outputs the sound of “BGM playback” over a second set time longer than the first set time are included in the suppression pattern or silence. It is desirable to have different expectations. According to such a configuration, when the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, it is possible to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation depending on how long the state continues. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the sound volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the sound volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed sound volume setting value. (Processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process for changing the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is being executed. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 that can select “an effect pattern that outputs the sound of BGM playback in a suppressed manner or silence”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during symbol variation regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, since the player who has seen the state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. become. Note that in this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 displays that the volume setting value has been changed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable for the user to recognize (aware of the possibility that “volume suppression effect” is being executed). “No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but in addition to outputting it at the volume 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. .

  The special effect sound that is output based on the fact that the effect is accepted when the sound of BGM playback is in the suppression mode or in the silence state is over the time that is more than twice the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable that the output state be maintained. According to such a configuration, even when an operation is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed, It becomes possible to make it longer than the output time (special effect sound) until timing ts15.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, the description has been given of the gaming machine in which the plate unit 320 includes the effect operation unit 400 that can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 143 to 165, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's willingness to operate will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 143 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 144 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same components as those described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 houses a sword part 5010 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, a sword part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 is configured.

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword direction and the sword direction. The sword part 5010 is normally in a state where the sword part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020, and the sword part 5011 is in a sword state where the sword part 5011 can be visually recognized by the player in the sword production. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword state can function as an operation means for receiving a sword insertion operation by the player and returning to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, an opportunity to execute a sword effect with the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword effect can be performed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of an extracted book effect.

  The production pattern described here includes a pattern in which a sword book production is performed after execution of a sword preparation transition production, a pattern in which a sword book production is performed without performing a sword preparation migration production in advance, and a sword preparation migration production in advance. There is a pattern in which no sword book production is performed, there is a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no pattern in which the sword book production is performed. Two patterns of the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is selected in accordance with the type of variation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, multiple types of fluctuation patterns are classified into big hit fluctuation patterns for big hits, small hit fluctuation patterns for small hits, and extraordinary fluctuation patterns for outliers. The pattern is set so that the probability of executing the sword preparation transition effect is higher as the pattern is higher. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% when the variation pattern for big hit variation is executed, with a probability of 30% when the variation pattern for small hit variation, and when the variation pattern for outlier variation is used. It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the reach effect is performed or not. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), execution / non-execution of the extracted sword effect is selected in accordance with the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the extracted sword preparation transition effect. When the sword preparation transition effect is executed even if the types of variation patterns are the same, the probability that the sword main effect will be executed is set higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, the variation pattern that is advantageous to the player is set such that the probability that the extraction effect will be executed increases. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword preparation effect is executed is higher when the sword preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for deviation variation, the probability that the sword book effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed with the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of the big hit variation pattern, the sword book effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the sword book effect is executed, the sword preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the sword book effect in the form with the aura member is higher as the variation pattern is advantageous for the player. It is set to become. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the extracted sword effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of aura member by sword decoration operation)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149, the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect (the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself that can accept a sword insertion operation by a player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 146, 147), and the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integrated decorative body (FIGS. 148 and 149).

  FIG. 146 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword movement operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (sword body part 5011) itself. The sword state, (C) the second sword state. FIG. 147 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 147 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 so that the operation of the aura member 5030 can be easily understood.

  The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword preparation transition effect is visible from the player with only the portion of the blade 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011 being removed from the sheath part 5020. Becomes the first sword state. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword book production is a second sword that is largely visible from the player by further removing the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020. It becomes a state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state can function as an operation means that can accept a sword-paying operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade part 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade operation of the blade part 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade part 5011 is in the first sword state (FIG. 146 (B)) from the sword state (FIG. 146 (A)). The movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 147A) to the open state (FIG. 147B) inside the portion 5020, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the changing process in which the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 146 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on the blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. By emitting these LEDs, it is possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light emission.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) is changed from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state, the closed state is opened and the blade portion 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. Although the example in which the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state after being deformed is shown, it is not limited thereto. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extracted state functions as an operation means (not limited to the mode of maximum operation, but also includes the mode of stopping the operation on the way) ).

  FIG. 148 is a state transition diagram for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. The second sword state is shown. FIG. 149 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 149 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 so that the operation of the aura member 5035 can be easily understood. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 147 and 148 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) is the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) described above. While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword state (the state of the sword delivery). Operates according to the first sword state (second sword state). Accordingly, the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) can be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to be seen as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5035 is provided with a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the upper end of the aura member 5035 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully accommodated state. The right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the right rack 5036a, and the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b are respectively engaged with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) such that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both the pinions are engaged. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the surrounding aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade portion 5011 to form the second sword state. The aura member 5035 at this time is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, the blade part is maintained while maintaining a relative positional relationship in accordance with the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword insertion state ⇔ first sword state ⇔ second sword state) with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035. Although the example which unites 5011 was shown, it is not restricted to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state. Final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (not only the full appearance state that is fully operated, but the midway appearance that is stopped in the middle) It is only necessary to be able to include a state with an aura member in a state. Further, the aura member 5035 may be united with the blade part 5011 so that the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player in the first sword insertion state.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152. 150 to 152 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the sword decorative body 5001 described above. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It can operate up to the front center.

  When the changing pattern forms a reach state, the display of the decoration display device 1600 displays the change display of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (FIG. 150 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 150). 150 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the bag is stopped in a state (initial state) that is visible from the player above the display area. Yes. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in a sword state.

  In the princess reach production, after the image of the princess heading in the back of the kite is displayed (FIG. 150 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 150 (B1)). Then, the operation effect period for accepting the operation of the sword ornament 5001 starts when the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 is started, and the player is prompted to perform the sword ornament operation on the sword ornament 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 151 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also good. When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword extraction operation by the player refers to an operation in which the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in a sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, the sword operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel an operation different from his / her own sword operation through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012) moving up and down. That's fine. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even when the player removes his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) can be reduced, and failure and breakage of the movable body can be prevented. Can do.

  In the sword operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but according to the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs a sword operation. You may do it.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial State) and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 151 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 151 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the sword storage state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 151 (C2) is notified. You may do it.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is centered on the front surface overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). The drop display is movable so that only the hold display area is visible (all fall state) (FIG. 151 (D1)), and then the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. 5001 is maintaining the second extraction state (FIG. 151 (D2)) Note that a plurality of patterns of the princess's shadow displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time may be provided. You may make it suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (winning expectation, game profit when winning, etc.) by changing the shadow color, shadow size, and the comment displayed afterwards.

  Then, after the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword state by the player's sword operation, that is, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword state is displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the front left-right center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 151 (D3)). When the sword ornament 5001 reaches the center position of the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the completely dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has a good visibility is displayed. An image of a princess who is surprised when the bag is removed is displayed (FIG. 152 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 returns to the position where the original sword operation has been performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current variable display is a hit, the hit with the smiling princess is notified. An image is displayed (FIGS. 152 (E1) and (E2)), and an image that informs the user of the disengagement is displayed together with the princess who is sad when disengaged (FIGS. 152 (F1) and (F2)).

  When a player's sword operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. However, the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the display area of the display device 1600 in the left-right direction. When the player is unable to move because the player is grasping when executing, an announcement or display such as “Please release the sword” is performed. Even if the player does not stop holding the sword decorative body 5001, the performance itself proceeds. However, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player at the movable motion timing in the horizontal direction of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 151 (D3)). When held in the performed position, it causes a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 has been moved in the left-right direction, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) have progressed. Since it is comprised so that game progress may not stagnate. Note that the sword ornament 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword ornament 5001, or is configured not to perform a movable effect. May be.

  As described above, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that has suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is moved down by moving the sword decorative body 5001 by the player (upward and downward movement). At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (to the operation position) by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword operation has been performed, increasing the player's operation value and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means can be operated in a stepwise manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right after operation) depending on the player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  The left and right movable effects of the sword decorative body 5001 are effect display for the purpose of performing an integrated effect with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decorative body 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, a left-right direction movable effect that is displaced to the left (left end of the frame) may be performed. In addition, since the player's operation of the sword ornament 5001 of this example is an upward / downward motion (a sword operation that pulls the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword ornament 5001 is performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 operates in a direction (left and right direction as in this example) different from the operation direction (in this case, the vertical direction) at the time of the player's operation.

  In addition, when a player's sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player accurately determines the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period so that the player can visually confirm, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent movable performance of the sword ornament 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, when the movable effect cannot be executed by contact with the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation effective period. Even after the operation means has been detected and notified, even contact is prohibited, so that the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. FIGS. 153 to 155 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 that is used in many ways. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern (A (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that a variation during execution is a big hit and an operation of the operation button 410 are performed. The pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed will be described as the effect.

  In the reach effect here, when the three decorative symbols change display is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 153 (A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is started to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 153 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by a player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 153 (N1)), an image suggesting the big hit expectation is displayed (FIG. 154 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 154 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variation display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation (FIG. 154 (N2)), the display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 A character that changes the held display may be displayed.

  Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the player presses the operation button 410, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Shows an effect image indicating that an operation effect requesting the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed (FIG. 153 (M1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the message “Title chance to extract the sword” and the explanation of the operation “Take me a sword” message) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time has a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 155 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time elapses after entering the second sword state and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a knives operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 155 (M3)). When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

  In a case where the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 155 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is released. The image (decorative symbol stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 155 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decoration pattern stop state “767” of the decorative symbol) for notifying the deviation is displayed (FIG. 155 (M6)).

  As described above, the pressing operation of the operation button 410 enables various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effects of the other operation means (sword ornament 5001). The subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of operating. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and the decrease in the willingness to operate and the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

  In the series of reach effects, the first operation (press operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword operation of the sword ornament 5001) have different operation modes (press operation and sword operation). The player is requested based on the above operation (the pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest that is a concern due to the monotonous operation instead of being reflected.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword ornament 5001 rather than the operation button 410 having a lower expectation than the first sword ornament 5001. Is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 156 to 160 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not move based on the pressing operation, and is displayed in a deviating manner, the display is re-varied from the deviating manner and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1)-(P4) in the figure → R when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given or R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 156 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , The message “Move the movable body with a single button stroke” is displayed (FIG. 156 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. The prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 156 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one stroke (one time) but may be repeated (multiple times). In order to make it easier for the player to grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation effective period of the operation button 410. You may do it. Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is an operation target later, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed in state from the stowed state to the second extracted state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) moves and is a big hit, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is completely dropped from the initial state. Is moved so as to become (FIG. 157 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative symbol of the decorative symbol) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is released. Stop mode “777” and “Superb” message) are displayed (FIG. 157 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not move, if the player presses the operation button 410, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is stopped only by being stopped. Not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern with a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 158 (P1)). The decorative design is developed into a pattern (FIG. 158 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in an off mode (“767”) or a revived pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a revival start image (says “Madaja”) indicating that the variation display has not yet ended from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the off-state in FIG. 158 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 158 (P3)), the decorative design is again reached and reduced in the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed at the center of the screen. An operation effective suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a friendly samurai) is displayed (FIG. 158 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed eyes of the samurai are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 158 (P5)). Thereby, the player raises a sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the set production pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001. (Samurai character) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is an operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern for which the sword ornament 5001 is an operation target.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmed image) in which sweat is blotted on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 159 (R1)). The operation of the operation button 410 is started and the operation button 410 is pressed while the operation button 410 is light-decorated while the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) continues to move in small increments. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 159 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, if the operation button 410 is operated the required number of times, it is no longer decorated with light emission.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player presses the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 159 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbols displayed at the upper right of the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 155 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is restored from the all-dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is displayed on the screen. An image for notifying the jackpot is displayed in the center (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “special” message) (FIG. 159 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display is out of order, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, the decorative pattern of the shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (FIG. 159 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword decorative body) in which the samurai who has closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes. (Determined image) is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second sword state with the aura member (FIG. 160 (Q1)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective based on the image of the display area. At this time, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, etc. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments, when the predetermined period of time elapses after the second sword is drawn and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 160 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 159 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 160 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of order, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 159 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 160 (Q5)).

  As described above, the expectation level is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) that is executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is not dropped based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is again given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest that is concerned about the monotonous operation effect without being displayed instead.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned FIGS. 150 to 160, three examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 are given, but various effect modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects and to further enhance the game entertainment.

(Form of sword decoration)
With reference to FIG. 161, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example is demonstrated. The form of the sword decorative body 5001 up to the above has been provided with two types, the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member. Are provided.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating a form of a sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-continuous production. The sword decorative body 5001 here is provided in a two-stage form change by deformation of the handle portion 5012 and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3. It has an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above. 161 (A) to 161 (D) are diagrams showing types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword storage state, and sequentially show stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword decorative body 5001 takes any one of the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form according to the production.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (A), the stage 0 configuration is a configuration in a normal state similar to the above-described FIG. 146 (A) and FIG. 148 (A), and no operation is required for any of the constituent members. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath part 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 161 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 spreads and moves from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 161 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here can change the form without causing the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the second extracted state. Furthermore, since the sword portion 5010 capable of receiving an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can do.

(Indication before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 165, the pre-operation suggesting effect that is executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is effective in operation or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in operation among a plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). . Specifically, the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (the black object) is positioned at the initial position as an suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggesting effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the black object). There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position, and a sword ornament 5001 (from the operation button 410) In the case where the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) that generates the operation effective period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is positioned at the initial position even during the operation effective period. Is performed, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation | movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse) in the 1st suggestion pattern of a pre-operation suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion pattern is demonstrated.

(First suggestion pattern)
162 and 163 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach | attainment effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed when it determines that operation is effective. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 162 (A)), an operation button that is determined in advance to be enabled by a lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Displayed (FIG. 162 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. Further, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are not changed.

  Then, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is made effective at a higher rate than the sword decorative body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed with the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (holding object) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second sword state (form with the aura member), so that the player can perform the sword insertion operation.

  162 (C) or (D) described above, when an operation to an operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected, if the result of the current variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (strap) is moved so as to fall from the initial state to the full fall state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is released. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “Superb” message) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 164 shows the suggestion effect before operation of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is valid during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. Note that FIG. 165 shows that although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggesting effect, the operation button 410 is once enabled and the sword decoration 5001 is not enabled, and then the sword decoration is displayed. It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes operation effective.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is displayed together with the display of the operation effect suggestion image. It operates in a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

  Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is validated, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the suggested position, the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword ornament 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA3), the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is operating at the suggested position. Is generated. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (with aura), and the sword can be operated by the player. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, there is a case where the pre-operation suggesting effect is executed with the second suggestion pattern although the ratio is low. At that time, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA2), the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved from the state operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) may be moved from the state operating to the suggestion position without returning to the initial state to the entire fall state or the initial state.

  When an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected in FIG. 164 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-described FIG. 162 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is released. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “Superb” message) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  In addition, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the operation efficiency of the sword decorative body 5001 is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively, In addition to the basic pattern of tracing the effect transition of FIG. 164 (AA1) → (AA3) before the sword ornament 5001 becomes effective, the operation button 410 is once activated, and then the sword ornament 5001 A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to that in FIG. 164 (AA1) and the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) are performed (FIG. 165 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 165 (BB2)). Here, even if the player detects a pressing operation of the operation button 410 during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 163 described above is not performed, and the switching suggests switching of the operation means that is effective. The suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when a player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed into the second sword state (with aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation means that is effective for operation is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword decorative body 5001. A switching notification image (message of “scoring chance” and “having a sword”) is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB4)). In the meantime, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) has been moved to the suggested position. When the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) described above is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the above-described second suggestion pattern (FIG. 163).

  Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the above-described FIG. 165 (BB2). It suffices if the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword ornament 5001 can be operated. Further, the step-up pattern is not limited to the second suggestion pattern, but may be selectable when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of the present example, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation unit in which one of the plurality of operation units is enabled. ) Can be changed, and an operation means that is effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. In the second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 164 (AA1), the sword ornament 5001 is generated in a state in which the expected validity level is high and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, it is suggested before the operation. The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 163) after the operation of the operation means, a series of falling effects are made from the up and down movement of the suggestion effect before the operation. It can be shown in the production of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body is effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword decorative body 5001 to the second extraction state, but also the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is activated once (or after it is presumed that the operation is valid) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a faint accessory) is located at the suggested position, D) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Also, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it can be expected that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 may become effective after that. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is effective is displayed. (FIG. 162 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (glare) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to operate in a small fall state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move in small increments between the initial position and the suggested position. When the operation effective period is subsequently generated, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player provides an operation effect suggestion by the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggested position, the suggestion before the operation is performed. The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Produce with a pattern. In a production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for establishing a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. Then, based on the establishment of a specific performance execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time performance (such as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits). 100% or 0% may be expected for the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation time effect.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for providing a privilege when operated) In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operation means (such as a sword ornament 5001). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as a sword ornament 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is established when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), the pre-operation effect that the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation opportunity is not performed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (bonus expectation) for granting a privilege is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. 100% or 0% may be expected for giving a privilege suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001).

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the stage is in the previous stage where the performance has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired performance result (such as a performance result that suggests that the degree of expectation for the provision of a privilege is high) does not appear in an operation-time effect according to an operation on another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). So that even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), the game entertainment can be improved through such operation-related productions. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (such as the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) having such a stunning property. In the case where the operation opportunity is given, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception is possible),
The operation for the operation button 410 is enabled after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled (allowing for the reception of the effect). ) The first production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated without production of the “specific operation-related production” being started (production reception is possible). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period) are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (production) by executing one of the production modes. An effective period (production reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case in which a period in which an operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs. Regardless of the case in which a period during which an operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is allowed to receive an effect occurs, the common (specify ) Operation-related effects can be executed, so that it is possible to have fun about which one of the specific operation means and another operation means can be accepted. By performing the operation under the condition that the game is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Note that such a common (specific) operation-related effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time elapses after the effect starts. An effect reception period will be generated. At least when the effect is started, which operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. It is desirable to keep secret. In addition, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. (A display of the effect result display) may be performed, and a plurality of operations may be performed within the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs. A means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) may be indicated as to which an operation opportunity is given (displaying the effect result display), and the operation-related effect is executed until what timing. It can be changed as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, several production modes that can be adopted when such common (specific) operation-related productions will be described. In each of the following explanation examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and their other examples mainly show the content of the production when any production reception period occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed. ) If any production reception period occurs without the operation-related production being executed, the content of the production may be omitted. However, the content of the production in the case where any of the production acceptance periods occurs while the common (specific) operation-related production is not executed is as follows. A general effect such as an operation instruction image that prompts an operation or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is being executed, or common during the jackpot game execution period A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be executed in combination with each other, which will be described later, as appropriate, and can also be executed in combination with each effect described above. Is possible. The effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each of the effects described below, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Thus, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform effects of different examples described later. The same can be said between the productions of different examples described later.

[First production mode]
FIG. 166 and FIG. 167 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive an effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the example of a production (1st production aspect).

  FIG. 166 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 166 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect of the specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 166 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display that moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 166 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 166 (b) progress, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display prompting to operate any of these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) in a state where each area is stopped and displayed (in this case, a character display such as “operate”) and an effect reception An effect situation in which a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period appears.

  According to such a production mode, although operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). It is possible to make it unclear which of the productions can be accepted. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 166 (c)) is the same in both the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means before the operation can be accepted for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). 166 (b), (c) common (specific) operation related over the period until the operation for at least one of the (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted for production. The production is executed.

  Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). Middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the production. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for the production, the production reception period for the operation buttons 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration 5001 It is more desirable that the time required from the execution of a specific operation-related effect (production start) to the generation of the effect reception period is set to be the same when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction to be displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is not clear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any of the operation means (“operate” Etc.), or always operating a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means regardless of how each of the operation means can receive a production. A display prompting the user may be performed. In short, even if an operation instruction is given, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can receive the production.

  In addition, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 166 (c), it is concealed whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for production, and also when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not accepted for production (when in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side so that the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are provided. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect situation in which the image shown in FIG. 166 (c) appears is that only the operation on the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where it is possible to accept the production, whether it is in the second situation where only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Both are set to be in any one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. In addition, when the 2nd situation (situation where operation opportunity is provided with respect to the sword ornament 5001) among these multiple situations occurs, the first situation (operation opportunity is provided with respect to the operation button 410). The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  In this production example (first production mode), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any of the first situation (the operation button 410) and the third situation (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001). Is performed (whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or the second situation (sword ornament 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when “GG” in the figure is made progress), an effect is received and an effect at the time of operation corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 167 (d) and 167 (f)). Is to be done.

  In the operation effect, regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 167 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display effect. ("Chance!") Is executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation degree, and “hot heat!”, Which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation degree, for example. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of production modes, and to display one of these production modes in response to the production reception, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and causing any of these effect modes to appear in response to the effect reception In addition, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 167 (d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control for setting the operating means to the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167 (d), the operation is performed according to the reception of the effect even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword ornament 5001 on the side that is not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect is received as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and the operation effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the production reception is generated and the on-operation performance on the sword decorative body 5001 side is executed. ”Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword operation on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in the sword position according to the reception of the performance. Instead of returning to the (sword state), it is possible to execute control to maintain the blade position (sword state). As a result, the sword decorative body 5001 moves from the sword insertion position (sword insertion state) to the extraction sword position (extraction sword state) based on an operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword extraction state. Occasionally there will be a performance during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, the sword ornament at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to learn the actual feeling that the operation effect due to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is being executed.

  Then, after the operation-time effects (FIGS. 167 (d) and (f)) are performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 167 (e), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is selected. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is in a non-operating state (sword insertion position (sword insertion state)). Control to return to is performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the sword state) over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed to stop the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001). 5001) is the case where the production can be accepted and the case where the production cannot be accepted, the common (specific) operation-related production starts, and the common (specific) where the production is started. While an operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) cannot receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 can be receivable at the same time, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) respectively produce effects. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is allowed to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is an effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can be receivable without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related rendition is being performed, the operation button 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decorative body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decorative body 5001 can accept an effect, the sword decorative body 5001 can accept an effect. You will be able to be confused as if not. That is, in this case, when the production is accepted, it becomes possible to prompt the operation on the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decorative body 5001, which is the side where the production with a relatively high expectation is performed, When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to provide interest about which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, if an operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is consumed by the amount of such erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the production (the side where the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, Although the reception of the production required for the execution of the production (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is not established, the operation itself is detected and the operation on the side where the production can be accepted based on the detection You may make it perform control which ends the production | presentation reception period with respect to a means at the time. According to such a configuration, since there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, it is encouraged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the production and to perform the operation carefully. become able to.

  Also, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side. However, the operation effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If an effect on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the game entertainment can be improved more appropriately.

  Further, when preparing another production mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other production mode. When the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, an operation-time effect may be performed when there is an operation on the first operation means in the situation shown in FIG. 166 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the first operating means when the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, while a common (specific) operation-related production is performed, the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set (No. When an operation for the first operation means is performed during the time period for receiving the effect for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be performed. In short, when an effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another production | generation aspect appear as an operation time production, in addition to the production aspect performed with the operation time production | generation on the 2nd operation means side, it does not make the said other production aspect appear, but 2nd operation The operation-time effect may be performed as effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

  In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 It is supposed that the setting is made so as to correspond to any one of the third situations in which both the operations for and the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the presentation is accepted, the same operation-time effect appears. In the third situation, the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that an effect or another effect mode (different from the operation effects in the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the example of the production, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation means to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. Above, in the production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), the player does not perform an operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 167 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately. However, the control for operating the operation means on the side where the player has not performed the operation is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided in correspondence with these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory). Further, examples of the “movement” in the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) generated by such a drive source include modes such as “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, “vibration”, and the like. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Second production mode]
FIG. 168 to FIG. 171 are executed as effects indicating the progress of the effect until a specific operation-related effect appears in either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears as a result of this, it is suggested that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect (2nd effect aspect) suggested that the production | presentation reception period with respect to the sword ornament 5001 generate | occur | produces among them.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 168 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 168 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image of the lightning image IZ acting on the images BTG and SYG is depicted. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 168 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 168 (b) progress, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. There is an effect of pushing each other within the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, An effect is received for the operation button 410 when an effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and 168 (c) are “the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001”. This is equivalent to a “specific operation-related effect that can appear before the occurrence of these periods”.

  Note that the left figure in FIG. 168 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right figure shows the sword decoration image SYG displayed. Describes the prevailing situation of remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance situation changes with time.

  FIG. 169 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 168 (c), and the button image BTG remains in the display area. An effect depicting the above is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 169 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for the production (the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the operation means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (during the period for accepting the effect on the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, only the operation button 410 of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into a light-emitting state so as to prompt the operation on the operation button 410.

  In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is not progressed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effect. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 168 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher.

  In addition, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 169 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio that the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than the case where the operation is given to the operation button 410 without passing through (FIG. 169 (d)). It is desirable to increase the value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to a dramatic delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  In FIG. 169 (e), as a result of the operation performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e) is the same as that in FIG. 167 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the presentation even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. The same is true in that the control for reciprocating between the positions (control for setting the operation state) is executable. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation degree, and “hot heat!”, Which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation degree, for example. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of production modes, and to display one of these production modes in response to the production reception, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and any of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 169 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 169 (f). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, the reach effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed. Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-operating state (sword storage state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the sword state) over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed to stop the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  In contrast, in FIG. 170 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is within the display area. An effect depicting the remaining state is performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 170 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “Take out the sword” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (that is during the effect receiving period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 including the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword decorative body 5001 itself may be turned on) is set to the light emitting state. By doing so, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is not progressed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c), etc.), or without the specific operation-related effect. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 168 (a)). However, even when the same effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher. Still further, when the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed without performing the specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation required for granting the privilege is higher than the case, and the expectation required for granting the privilege is made lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 170 (h) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 170 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, although the production mode such as “Intense heat !!”, which indicates that the degree of expectation is relatively high, is displayed according to the production reception, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. “Chance!” May be displayed. Similarly to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, there is an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area, and any of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), based on the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the effect aspect of the sword ornament 5001 itself changes to any one of the above-described plural aspects ( 161, change from the stage 0 form to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible, and the degree of expectation required for granting a bonus such as a big hit depends on which of these forms appears The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 170 (i), even when the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) is terminated and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is maintained in the sword state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the sword state, and thereafter (for example, during the reach production period), the sword ornament 5001 is put into the sword state. An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation to the state of the sword can be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to two operation steps for one operation means (sword decoration body 5001), and the first operation (operation to the sword state) and the second operation are performed. Since the on-stage effects are performed according to each operation (operation to the sword state), not only when the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated, the first stage In the non-operation period from when the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed until the second stage operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected that the game entertainment for the operation is suitably maintained. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (in this case, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation have different contents.

  In addition, when the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) corresponding to the first-stage operation is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In this case, it is desirable not to be given the second stage operation opportunity. Whether the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained at a position where the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state) can be given (the sword state) in the operation stage production corresponding to the first-stage operation. You may make it perform as an effect which suggests the expectation degree of no. In other words, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the sword state but returned to the sword state, it is substantially impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state). It is clear that it will be said. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  As a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) corresponding to the first-stage operation, when the sword ornament 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect) Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-driven state (sword storage state)) at a stage prior to the start of). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) over a period of at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area until it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed to stop the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 171 (j), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 168 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 169 (d). Thus, an effect depicting the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) or FIG. 170 (g). Or the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) appears. Note that which content of the effect appears is determined in advance in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)). Here, the lightning image IZ is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “press” and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in FIG. Thereby, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is.

  FIG. 171 (k) shows that as a result of the development shown in FIG. 171 (j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in 靄 MY, and even its outline is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted as an effect are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, such an effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) appears. This makes it possible to give a suspicion that the production reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitely shown to which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  In FIG. 171 (i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 171 (k), the outer shape of the bag MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a performance that depicts the appearance.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur depending on the outer shape of the 靄 MY. Will be able to.

  Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (i), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) from FIG. 171 (k), and until which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is clearly indicated. This suggests that the remaining time is less.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (i) further progresses and 靄 MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 170 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 169 (d), FIG. 171 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 will be left. Will be able to.

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIG. 169 (d), FIG. 171 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword ornament 5001 It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by 靄 MY (FIG. 171 (k)), and further When the effect is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) So that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) may be performed. When such a production pattern can be performed, the production shown in FIGS. 171 (j) and (k) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can accept the production. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, in the production situation shown in FIG. 170 (h) in the production example (second production mode) with the operation button 410 provided as an operable operation means, FIG. 169 (e) As in the effect situation shown in FIG. 6, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided in correspondence with these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory). Further, examples of the “movement” in the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) generated by such a drive source include modes such as “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, “vibration”, and the like. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 172 to 175 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but show an example of the effect (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative design SZ shown in FIG. 172 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can soon receive the production.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are employed as such a predetermined movable member, and the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated. Thus, it is easy for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be ready to receive an effect soon after the effect display related to the operation has not yet been performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is supposed to be recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position toward the operation position. Each of them at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, it is an operating means that still has time left until the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left until the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the symbol change ends, It can be suitably maintained.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but by each operation (FIG. 172 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. After the start, basically, the same progress of the production as the second production mode is made.

  For example, first, of the effects shown in FIG. 172 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The production contents are as described with reference to FIG. 168 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from their initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state where a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and an operation opportunity is immediately given, When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation unit on the side where the effect can be accepted at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further extended for the time required for such operations, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced by such an extension.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (non-drive position) and the operation position during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (state which applied driving force) in a different position (for example, intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and an effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is operated to the operation position only in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur The operation means on the other side can be moved to the initial position only in a shorter period of time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the extension of operation-related effects. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as the operation state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operation state. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. Except for being displayed as corresponding to “410”, the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 168 (c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are moved to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. And an operation state (a state where a driving force is applied) at a position different from the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driven position). In contrast, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are different from each other, so that their matching will be soon. It can be suggested that the effect shown (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. Except for being displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 "at the time, the contents of the production are as described with reference to FIG. 169 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving), the extension of the operation-related effects is suitably suppressed. Become so.

  As an effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first performed. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (character display such as “press”) You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. In this way, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, so that the deviation of these modes is soon filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 169 (e). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

  After such an operation time effect (FIG. 173 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 173 (g), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 169 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. Except that the instruction content related to “Push in” is displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, the effect as described with reference to FIG. 170 (g) It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword ornament 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Will come to be.

  In addition, as the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), “the display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position)” After performing the display effect, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (characters such as “push”) Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  When the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 170 (h). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position).

  After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 174 (i)) is performed, a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 174 (j). Is as described with reference to FIG. 169 (f).

  On the other hand, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. Except for being displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 "at the time, the contents of the production are as described with reference to FIG. 171 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively in the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that there is still no possibility that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, and that an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 still occurs. Will be able to.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (k). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (l). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both. In the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the heel MY is closer to the sword ornament 5001 at the operation position than the sword ornament 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is set so that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) Is set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) may be performed. When such a production pattern can be performed, the production shown in FIGS. 175 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can accept the production. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In the example described above, when the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated and the effect is received during the effective period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is received. Accordingly, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (FIG. 167 (d), FIG. 169 (e), etc.). However, what is necessary is just to make the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed into an operating state. Examples of the operating state include a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to another place and a mode in which it vibrates. It is possible to adopt. In addition, even when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 during the effective period that is generated after the specific operation-related effect is executed, an effect is received according to the reception of the effect. It is desirable to set the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed to an operation state (vibration or the like).

  In addition, for such an effect that makes the “operation part on which the operation is not performed” in an operating state, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is “expectation (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears,“ 0 ”, Appears when the operation is performed in a “high aspect” (including “100”), and the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is “expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear, including“ 0 ”and“ 100 ”). It may not appear when executed in “low mode”.

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is performed by an operation on one of the two operation units (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001), the “operation unit on the other side where the operation is not performed” is also set in the operating state. When the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other side, the “one-side operation unit on which no operation is performed” may not be set in the operating state.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described production modes, and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG (first display mode) with the operation button 410 displayed” appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for production, the operation on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, when a “sword decoration image SYG with a sword ornament 5001 (second display mode)” appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001 of the body 5001 and an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received, an effect during operation on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination While either one of them is supposed to appear, even when the operation on the sword actor's side is performed, on the basis of the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, the production on success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the production on failure (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is caused to appear, and the contents of the effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

  It should be noted that the operation effect on the button side and the operation effect on the sword accessory side are the same effects on the display effect performed on the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it be contents.

  In addition, in each production example described above with respect to a specific operation-related production, it is assumed that the production operation is given to which of the plurality of operation means, and the operation means on the side according to the result is given. An operation opportunity was given to the system. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of the operation that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means, regardless of which effect results appear, such as pushing between the specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is in the sword state, or a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is in the sword state with respect to one operation means. The operation may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, while the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword state and the extracted state, and the operation is performed in any manner in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 be operated in the sword insertion state or the sword extraction state when an effect result indicating whether or not to perform the operation is shown.

  In addition, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the symbol variation execution period, when the symbol variation is in the hold state (the digested before this) You may make it perform the effect suggested from the execution period of a symbol fluctuation. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in a suspended state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable to operate each of a plurality of operating means provided.

  In the above-described second and third effect forms and other examples thereof, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images (button images BTG, corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001)) are provided. Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images are not necessarily displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while it is suggested that an effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret about which of the means the production reception period occurs. Therefore, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration image may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is ended. Either BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) or a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of a specific operation-related effect. When the specific image related to the operation (for example, lightning image IZ, etc.) is executed as the content of the effect, the specific operation-related effect is determined for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period is generated. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestion. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When the lightning bolt falls on the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock, so that it is possible to progress the production to the production shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 170 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on a rock, either a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, it is possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 170 (g). In short, it is desirable to make the effect progress as effect content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, there are specific cases in which a production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and a production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the time when the operation-related effects are executed (the effect start) to the time when the effect reception period occurs. In addition, it is desirable to set the production reception period to occur for the same time, even when an operation opportunity is given to any operation means after a specific operation-related production is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated according to which of the effect modes is performed. You may make it the ratio set with respect to the specific operation means among several operation means differ. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related production. When operating the operating means on the side (FIG. 169 (e), etc.), control is performed to return the operating means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation was performed. It may be. However, the time when the operation is performed is not used as a reference, and the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated until the operation is ended depending on at which timing in the production reception period the operation is performed. It is desirable to vary the length of time.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the remaining time of the effect reception period is short, and the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has struggled by operating the operating means on the side that is not shown in the specific operation-related effects. Therefore, depending on at which timing in the production reception period it is operated (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (“even if the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was received and the effect during the operation was executed” If the time length for appealing the player to the player is made different, the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  Also, during the period from the start of a specific operation-related effect until the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect that suggests the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed (here, It is possible to operate the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) more reliably to operate the specific movable body based on the presentation reception within the presentation reception period after the specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, it corresponds to any one of images that can appear in the effect result after the start of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding whether to generate an effect reception period related to a specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) using either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 While the related effects are being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. As a result, even though it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, the effect result is shown, and it is possible to create a special effect mode as if the effect was ended, and the effect is performed. During this time, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest. When a specific operation-related effect is being performed and an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received, a predetermined effect is performed based on the reception of the effect. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the high-expected effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player knows that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In addition, when the specific operation-related effects relating to a plurality of operation means are in the middle of being performed, when an effect reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means, When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a production result, the degree of expectation for the provision of a privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the stage performance as the specific operation-related stage until the stage result is shown after the stage start of the stage operation related stage. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the relatively low expectation side. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and more privilege is given than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  In each of the above-described production reception periods, usually, when an operation is performed by the player, an production is generated based on the operation. However, even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. Alternatively, an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation was performed before may be set. According to such an automatic button effect state, an operation-time effect will occur without an operation each time an effect acceptance period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming entertainment due to forgotten operation. Become. When the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even in such a case, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even in the case where the automatic button effect state described later is set, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while the specific operation-related effect is being performed. When the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period, it is desirable that the special operation production is not executed (the automatic button function does not function). After this, even if an effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of the specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. Even if it is not, it is desirable to perform the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated (the automatic button function should function). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  In addition, regarding the setting change related to on / off of the automatic button effect state, for example, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol variation is not performed by the operation of the operation button 410 but also during the period when the symbol variation is being performed. It is desirable that For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the automatic button effect state is in the off state and the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is not generated, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect reception period occurs for the operation button 410 when the effect state is on, and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, an operation effect according to the operation is performed, and an automatic button effect state is set. The setting can be changed from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an on-operation effect by an operation by the player while the on state of the automatic button effect state is maintained, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. In the production reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation is performed on the other operation means by enabling the operation on the operation means other than the operation button 410 as well as the operation button 410, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to cause a change in the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when the automatic button effect state is changed from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, the button image BTG or the sword decorative body 5001 with the operation button 410 worn is used as the production result of the specific operation-related production. While the displayed sword decoration image SYG is displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (production reception is received) for the operation button 410. Period) and when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as an operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword ornament 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 176 (a) instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 173 (e). Display mode) is displayed, and an effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 170 (g) and 174 (h). Also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 169 (d), 170 (g), 173 (e), and 174 (h), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is made using substantially the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background portion where the degree of expectation is suggested) is displayed. To be done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (a), the first image that has a shield (the button image BTG with the operation button 410 defaced) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design is held. Characters are displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) dressed as a sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it implicitly suggests which operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as an effect image in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself is deceived. It is desirable that the operation means be displayed as an effect image that incorporates aspects such as at least a partial shape and a partial design.

  In addition, with respect to the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG. You may make it perform also as the production | presentation which suggests a different expectation degree depending on which (2nd display mode) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Also, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared, and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. You may make it suggest an expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  In addition, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (desired to have a relatively high expectation), a specific When an operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after a later-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect) is displayed (it is desirable that the effect state is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is not executed (for example, after a prelude effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect) is not executed. When displayed, the operation reception period for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG as well as another operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) not corresponding to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give an interesting aspect of the operation different from the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively highly expected production situation, and to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a “specific operation-related effect is executed relatively It is desirable to suggest that there is a production situation with a higher expectation than when it is in a production situation where the sword decoration image SYG appears in a production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410). It is desirable that the effect during the operation is executed.

  On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related production is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the production reception period When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, the special operation effect is not executed when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied. Instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is not performed. Although the operation means different from the means is operated, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if a production reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation-time production as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the production reception period. It is desirable to make it so that the automatic button function works. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. The operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be obtained even if no operation is performed even when the production acceptance period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means. It is desirable to execute only the same operation effect as when the operation is performed, and not to execute the special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation time effect (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-described automatic button function before another timing. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and a specific timing has arrived. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the effect during operation (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) from appearing. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the production reception period, but the automatic button production state is continued in the ON state even after the production reception period ends. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and the above-described effects (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes, and other examples thereof, “the button image BTG (the first display mode) with the operation button 410 displayed” as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed, or If any one of the “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) with the sword decoration 5001 dressed” is displayed, and if the presentation is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation-time effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content that is suggested to have a relatively low expectation level. One of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first For the sword ornament 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, an effect image (a sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high expectation as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in the production result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the timer effect described above (FIG. 118), “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” can be set as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes set as the timer target). In other words, in the timer effect with “applying an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect object, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), an operation opportunity will be provided soon. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the performance during operation. In this case, in the “operation opportunity for the operation means” prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when an operation is performed on the operation means, an effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery One of the adverse performance results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as an effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result that is advantageous to the player is higher than when the timer effect effect is not given. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect with the effect of “granting an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001)” appears, the “target operation opportunity for the operation means” is selected. A specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment at the time.

  However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before the effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). However, it is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and there is a concern that the attention will be distracted and the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is set to an unexecuted state, and the count value It is desirable to start the “specific operation-related effect” after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). In addition, the following timer effects are equivalent to the above-mentioned notice side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  In FIG. 177 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 177 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (a). Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (b), the “specific operation-related effect” has not yet been executed, and it is not clear which effect the timer effect is for. Yes.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (with a unknown state as to which of the plurality of prepared timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count “0”) is reached and displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. Note that at the time when the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the count value is not “0” and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which of the two is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), the effects are sometimes Since overlapping in series is avoided, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

  However, if the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when a specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it may not be possible to recognize whether or not it was made as a game, and that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), until a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect suggesting an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001) that the timer effect is an effect object is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword storage”. Thus, it is suggested that it was a timer effect for the effect of “granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 (an operation opportunity by“ sword ”)”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword storage” ”Will be given the opportunity to operate”), the “specific operation-related effects” will begin to be produced in the production situation recognized by the player, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the “sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, it may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the sword ornament 5001 moves in a predetermined operation (here, (Reciprocating operation in the vertical direction) is performed, and this also indicates that “granting an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword ornament 5001” is a target of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is “granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001”, but also when another effect is the effect object. It may be performed when becomes 0. In other words, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect of, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become zero. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the production to be produced is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is made to be executed at the same time as or earlier than the timing at which the production suggesting the production type is started, and the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to do so.

FIG. 177 (d) shows the production situation where the production of the “specific operation-related production” is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to perform the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target and the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 before the production of the specific operation-related production starts. Even after the operation-related effect is started, the execution state may be continued.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effects” are started, the effects are developed in the order of FIGS. 177 (e) to (h). The contents of these effects are shown in FIG. ), FIGS. 170 (g) to (i), or 172 (d) and 174 (h) to (j), the details are omitted.

  In addition, as a timer effect performed in relation to a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 177 or a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that the specific operation-related effect starts after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 177, but the specific operation-related effect is the effect. The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly before this), and continues after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is granted ( The degree of expectation for the big hit is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, but at the time when the effect situation where the effect is developed simultaneously appears, Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect value thereof is the same (expectation required for granting a bonus (big hit)) The same). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, so even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, It is possible to avoid the situation where it is difficult to understand what should be watched, and distracting attention. However, in order to improve game entertainment, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, it is more rewarding than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177 appears. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, a display that suggests the type of effect target (in the effect display device 1600) "Sword") is performed, but such a display suggesting the effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific effect is selected as a timer object among a plurality of effects that can be targeted for a timer, a display that suggests which effect is the timer effect may not be performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, there is an operation opportunity for any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it was granted. However, prior to giving an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production reception period occurring), a first sign effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 Or before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 (before the production reception period occurs), it does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may appear. When performing these precursor effects (first predictor effect, second predictor effect), the time required for the effect (predictor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when an effect appears be low in order to enhance the gaming interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as a precursor effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) deceiving operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which an operation opportunity is given appears. A specific image is displayed, such as expressing the state of being trapped. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image) that is difficult to view by overlapping the specific image. Then, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It is possible to execute as an effect that makes it appear to be exposed. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectation levels related to privilege grant (big hit), While the sign effect that the button image BTG is gradually exposed is developed, it is possible to have an interest in which display mode of the button image BTG appears.

  It should be noted that a first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 Is important to be executed as different production contents. In addition to the contents of the effects, it is desirable that the time required for the effects is different.

  Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense of “what is performed as an effect related to the provision of an operation opportunity when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means”. It can be said that it is a superordinate concept that includes it. As for the indication effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and any of the effect modes is performed as described below with reference to FIG. 178. Depending on how it is received, it may be suggested how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the sign production is to improve the game entertainment when the sign production is performed. It is more desirable to make it.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart for explaining an example of the content of the production for each type of production when a plurality of types (prediction productions A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the indication production.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (a) (predictive effect A), the predecessor effect A is started when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect reception period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (a precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The production reception period (valid period) T1 that has been generated will occur.

  In the production reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production A (character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, the above-mentioned operation-time effects (for example, FIGS. 167 (d) and (f), 169 (e), FIG. 170 (h), FIG. 173 (f), FIG. 174 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (b) (prediction effect B1), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed. The sign effect B1 is started. This precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation) When an operation opportunity is given to the means, it is not executed), and when the indication effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as “Press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B1. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the sign effect B1 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (b). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). Thereby, it is suggested how long the production reception period generated corresponding to the precursor effect has a length depending on in which mode (the precursor effect A and the precursor effect B1). This makes it possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment at the time when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect B2) shown in FIG. 178 (c), the sign effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. This precursor effect B2 is also executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not a “specific operation-related effect”, like the precursor effect B1. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1). Production reception period) T3 is generated.

  It should be noted that in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B2 (character display such as “press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Display) is displayed. In addition, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T3, an operation-time effect different from the case where the sign effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the sign effect B2 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed in spite of the execution of the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation for granting a bonus (big hit). Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T3 having a length is generated, a production situation as if a specific operation-related production was performed is generated, and the sign production B2 is It is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode appears until the intermediate timing after the start of the effect, and the different effect modes appear after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance as to which of the production reception period (effective period) T2 and the production reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and the timing of the start of the indication effects B1 and B2 is to be started when a different time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Alternatively, the indication effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect C) shown in FIG. 178 (d), the sign effect C is started when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is to be given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (d) (precursor effect C), when the predictor effect C is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The held production reception period (valid period) T4 occurs.

  Even during the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production C (character display such as “press”) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 167 (d), (f), 169 (e), FIG. 170 (h), FIG. 173 (f), FIG. 174 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. To be done.

  In this respect, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the sign production C is the production reception period corresponding to the sign production A as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, even if the length of time required for the warning effect C itself is shorter than the warning effect A, if the warning effect is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect”. Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as in the case of the precursor effect A is generated, it is preferable to maintain the game entertainment when the precursor effect C is performed. Will be able to.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 178, the length of the production reception period (effective period) is associated with the types of the sign productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, thereby producing the production reception period. The length of (validity period) was suggested. However, the production reception period (effective period) can be set by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined time length for each type of sign production. ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) deceiving the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imply the same state as that at the time of the specific operation means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of operating at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as a state of operating in the operation position in accordance with this, FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state of being operated at the operating position (extracted sword state), but the sword decorative image SYG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operating position (extracted sword state). Has been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) that looks like the appearance. However, when the result of the performance is displayed in spite of the fact that the specific operation-related performance with a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, the width of the performance will be remarkably narrowed, and the gaming interest will be reduced. Concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180, an effect image (for example, a button image) that tricks a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Regarding BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, and is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effects of the effect contents when the precursor effect that is not the specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect contents when the predictor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (c) show the contents of effects when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect state, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect” but only the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 side. If the sign effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword ornament 5001. It should be noted that in the prelude effect (the predecessor effect in another example is also the same), if the predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is soon to be given is made, the effect image deceiving the operation means Is not necessarily displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001 since the sword decorative image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. It comes to be.

  In the precursor effect shown in FIG. 179 (a), the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectations and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectations. Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content about which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001, it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYGa has a low expectation as the sword decorative image SYG, or the degree of expectation. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows an effect result in which a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation effect. It will be suggested that the production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as a sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 179 (c) shows an effect example when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative object 5001 to be operated (“push in” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when the production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decoration image SYGb is also extracted from the sword state accordingly. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received within the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the state of a sword. Maintained. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) dressed as the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracted state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) deceiving an operation means on the operation object side, and an operation means on the operation object side (here, a sword decoration body 5001) Are stopped at a predetermined position.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 179 (d) to 179 (g) show the contents of the effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), if the sign production as “specific operation-related production” has started to be produced, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to this.

  FIG. 179 (e) shows an effect situation in which the sign effect as the “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 as the production result of the “specific operation-related production”. Has been. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (e), the final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

  FIG. 179 (f) shows an effect example when an effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompts the sword ornament 5001 to operate. "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the extracted state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 179 (f) and 179 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword removal state (sword decoration image SYG) during the effect reception period. In contrast, the sword decorative body 5001 is configured to continuously perform the upward displacement slowly over the period until the presentation reception period ends, and is in a different state. I try to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decorative body 5001, the production reception is performed when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the sword storage state. Based on the reception, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG continues to operate and is used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 179 (f) and 179 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated so that the sword decorative body 5001 is stopped.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are displayed in the effect receiving period (FIG. 179 (c)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 179 (f)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG is set in the stopped state. The other side is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned into a dynamic state is continued to be drawn, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the production when the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a predecessor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in a specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG that looks like the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that looks like the sword decoration body 5001 appear, When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation It is possible to provide further performance. About this technique, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each above-mentioned effect aspect other than the effect example of FIG. 179, and those other examples.

  And when giving such two performances with respect to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used. Whether it appears or is recognizable, and it is unknown whether or not the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image deceiving the operating means is outlined and only the outline is drawn. Display in a recognizable display state, etc.) so that it appears as the production progresses. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the side effect image that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white of the effect image that tricks the operation means) It is desirable that the state is released and the color can be confirmed, for example, to appear sequentially with further progress in production. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect development, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected under a predetermined condition (for example, the operation means is changed). The button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG can be recognized as appearing as a result of the specific operation-related effect. Whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high in expectation or not is unknown (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). Further, it may be possible to generate an effect pattern for further effect development. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) To make it possible to confirm the color. In this case, the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is a display mode with a higher expectation (for example, red) than when the display mode is a lower display mode (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

  180 (a) to 180 (e) are diagrams showing other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (d) to (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 180 (a), a prelude effect as a “specific operation-related effect” has started, but the prelude effect has a shield (button image BTG) that looks like the operation button 410. A second character (effect image corresponding to the sword ornament 5001) holding a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword (sword ornament image SYG) dressed as a sword ornament 5001 Is depicted, and suggests which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing so.

  FIG. 180 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this production situation, the first character (production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 180 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 176 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the sword ornament 5001 to be displayed is in a non-display state). While the operation-related effects are being performed, both the effect part (the confrontation between the characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 180 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  180 (c) to (e) show an example of an effect when an effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 180 (c). In addition, an instruction display that prompts the sword decorative body 5001 to perform an operation (a character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), when the production reception period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts to move from the sword state to the sword state, As shown in FIG. 180 (d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword state to the sword state only after a relatively short period of time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to do. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the sword state until at least the presentation reception period ends, and the player Will wait for the operation (operation from the sword state to the sword state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 180C to 180E, the movement of the sword ornament 5001 (the movement in the linear direction) is completely different from the movement (the rotation in the rotation direction). In the lowering operation), the second character draws the sword decoration image SYG down, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted state. The operation is to be performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)) within the production reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop process is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by this, and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 also enters the sword state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)). However, even if the loop process is performed, the operation is maintained without being affected by the loop process. In addition, when the operation to the operation object combination 141 is performed to the sword state during the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and the predetermined operation time production is performed based on the production reception. The loop processing is terminated, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The operation modes (operations responsible for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is completed. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues the operation without ending. Thereby, when the production reception period (FIGS. 180 (c) to (e)) that occurs through a specific operation-related production occurs, the production content of the specific operation-related production continues until after the production reception period occurs ( For example, the background can be continued and executed, and the range of the production can be widened.

  Also, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, the content of the effect (display where the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 180 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effects (FIGS. 180 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in a form that changes both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) are different from each other while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the performance during the presentation reception period. In this sense, also in the sign effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) that tricks the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to further improve the performance by providing a direct connection between them. In addition, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting a privilege, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  It should be noted that, for a prelude effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. You may make it suggest whether the aspect with a high expectation appears as an operation time production when the production reception is made in the period. You may make it suggest the expectation degree concerning privilege provision using the background image which appears when a precursor effect is performed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 180, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, an effect is received in a form in which both the effect content and the background image that have appeared in the predictor effect are changed. Although it was decided to execute an effect within the period, the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (with respect to a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means (or in a specific operation form among a plurality of operation forms) ) Dedicated signage when operation opportunity is given) When the reception period is in the form of changing both the content and the background image that appeared in the signage An effect may be executed. In short, “Operation-related effects (predictive effects) relating to operations on the operation means can be generated, and the operation-related effects (predictive effects) are the first ones that are accepted for effects related to the first effect by the player's operation. It is possible to generate at least one operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect is received for a second effect different from the first effect by an operation by the player, and is displayed as the first operation-related effect. The first operation promotion image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image has not been displayed yet is displayed. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with changing the background image when the second operation promotion image is not yet displayed to another background image. " As long as it was Tsu. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image may not be the same image. For example, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, the gauge display, or “press!” Or “put the sword! It is possible to appropriately adopt a comment display such as “”. The “first effect” and the “second effect” may also be different post-operation effects. For example, the “first operation-related effect for which an effect regarding the first effect is received” It is possible to exemplify as an effect as to which aspect appears as a conversation notice when a “sound is made”, and “the second operation-related effect in which the effect reception regarding the second effect is made” is performed. It can be illustrated as an effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY is operated. At this time, even if any aspect appears as a conversation notice, the production design is such that the ratio (including 100%) that the jackpot symbol appears is higher when the specific decorative member SDY is operated. It is desirable to do. As for “second operation-related effects for which the effect is received for the second effect”, refer to FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 215, 217 to 220, FIGS. 223, 250, and 253. It may be executed as one of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described later. On the other hand, the “first operation-related effect in which the effect regarding the first effect is received” is an operation reception effect (BGM non-suppressed) described later with reference to FIGS. 216, 222, 224, and 249. May be executed as one of the operation reception effects). Moreover, you may make it employ | adopt suitably about each other example of these operation reception effects mentioned later. In addition, the “continuous display” of the background image does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a video showing a river flowing or a battle between characters, Also included are those displayed in such a manner that the range in which such still images and moving images are projected is slid (displayed in such a manner that the coordinates move). That is, the background image can be said to be “continuously displayed” if it is displayed in a time-series or coordinated manner in the depicted description. On the other hand, “changing the background image to another background image” does not necessarily have to be displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself is a time series or coordinates. Also included are images that suddenly change or are replaced (switched) into “images with different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the production reception period)” that are not connected to each other. Also included are those that change to “black images” or that are replaced (switched). That is, it can be said that “the background image is changed to another background image” if there is no connection in terms of description contents in time series and coordinates before and after the change. In order to make it easier to recognize that the background image has changed in this way, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, etc.) that hides the background image that has been displayed until then is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is more desirable to display over an area (more preferably substantially the entire area) of at least half of the display area, and display the second operation promoting image together with a new background image after the display. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be sequentially displayed within one fluctuation pattern. As described above, the timing for changing the background image to another background image may be before the production reception period occurs, or the generation of the production reception period including the timing at which the production reception period occurs. The timing may be set after the timing (for example, the illustration may be omitted from FIG. 180 (b) and the presentation may be advanced from FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (c)).

  In the production example shown in FIG. 180, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs. However, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 started before the production reception period occurs may be completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). You may make it maintain the stop state after the operation which performed was completed before the production | presentation reception period generate | occur | produced).

  In addition, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001), when the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the background image is changed. There may be a case where the display is not performed. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the production reception period occurs. Is desirable.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When an effect is received, the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation-time effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 167 (d), 169 (e), and 170 (h), the sword decorative body 5001 (or the operation button) is provided as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. As a result, a state of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (the gaming machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the production situation at the time of failure where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the production-time production (for example, a specific production-related production) In the operation effect after the sign effect that is not an operation related effect), either a movable body provided on the game board 5 side or a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect If there is a successful production situation that only works, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described production effects and specific operation-related productions according to other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the production, the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the production. As a result, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the button is displayed in a mode (specific effect mode) in which a princess character is added. When the image BTG is displayed in some cases, and the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is greater than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of a specific operation-related effect. If it is made high, it will become possible to maintain suitably the game entertainment at the time of button image BTG being displayed as an effect result of specific operation related production.

  Further, the mode (specific production mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 181 (b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation related to the provision of privileges be higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 181 (a)) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 181 (b) shown in FIG. 181) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of a specific operation-related effect. )) May be prepared. In this case, when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect, the expectation level related to the privilege grant is set to be the same when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, not only can the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, but also the button image BTG and the sword can be provided. Regardless of which one of the decoration images SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific production mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, in order to allow such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) to appear, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 181 (c), the specific effect mode is in a stage where the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. From (for example, when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, a specific effect mode (a princess character is displayed) The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same expectation). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, so that the “princess character's predicate effect” may be used despite the fact that the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It is possible to provide a performance with a completely different purpose.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples of the sword decorative body 5001 is such that the sword part (the pattern portion 5012 and the blade portion 5011) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 151, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Accordingly, in each of the above-described production modes, and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit. You may make it perform the said specific operation related effect as an effect about. The sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are both supported by a single body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). Is formed.

  However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different only when any effect result appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error is likely to occur on the player side. In particular, even in the case where an operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image (and its image) showing a sword part of the sword ornament 5001 If an instruction prompting operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an error in operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode will occur on the player side. Become. In other words, in this case, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error while the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If the production reception period ends before the production is accepted even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. There is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline.

  The sword decorative body 5001 has a mode such as “moving in the vertical direction” by the sword part and a mode such as “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reverse relationship. In an operation unit that can provide a mode, if an incorrect operation is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an appropriate operation, and the production reception period ends. Thus, it can be said that the risk of losing operational opportunities is increased.

  Therefore, when the specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the production reception is properly performed and the production during operation corresponding to the production reception is executed.

  FIG. 182 and FIG. 183 show examples of effects when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  FIG. 182 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 displays the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 182 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 182 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b), the first effect that tricks the first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 is operated from the sword state to the sword state. Within the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image OX and the second effect image TX that deceives the second operation mode of operating the sheath part of the sword decorative body 5001 to move in the lateral direction. It is displayed at the same time, and it is suggested that an operation opportunity according to any of these operation modes will soon be accepted. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decorative body 5001 that looks like a sword part is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 182 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b) progresses, the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is made to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 182 (c), a display such as “push in” can be visually recognized if the first effect image OX remains dominant. Thus, when the situation becomes dominant while the second effect image TX is left, a display such as “slide” is made visible. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the state of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a possibility that the display is erroneously recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production reception period has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 182 (d) shows that, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 182 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is within the display area. There is an effect depicting the state left in (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, an effect is received, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect is generated.

  In other words, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 182 (d), an effect reception period related to a specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “push”) and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) is displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword state to the sword state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 183 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) in the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. The production situation when performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, even if the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is made effective. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the production reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received, assuming that there is an operation error by the player. (Here, “You can leave it as is”).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 183 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed over time (here, “settled and pushed in”) so that the player can regain calmness. It is like that. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it becomes possible to sequentially notify with a short word, so this is suitable even if the player side is in a panic state. It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if an operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player side will recognize that this is properly received. It will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 183 (g) shows that the appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (production acceptance period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 183 (e) and 183 (f). As a result, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect according to the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operating state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (operation error state), the production reception is properly performed, so that a decrease in the game entertainment when an operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, notification is made that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). In other words, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player is in a panic, so it may be counterproductive to report complex contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the reception period, the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the proper mode is received is not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to perform simple notifications such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player side does not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed such that a specific notification is made based on the operation being made and no effect during operation is made. Therefore, it can be expected that the operation is switched to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (especially an elderly player), it may be assumed that a situation in which an operation is erroneously performed before the production reception period occurs in a specific operation-related effect. For example, when there is no operation instruction related to the second operation part (for example, the sheath part), the first operation part is in a state where an operation (such as lateral movement of the sheath part) is performed on the second operation part. It is also assumed that there is a situation where an effect reception period related to a specific operation-time effect occurs only on the operation part (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case as well, how the player side operates There is a concern that it may become unrecognizable.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation part (sword part) or the second operation part (sheath part) is performed, Although the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not made on the operation unit 2 side (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 182 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit Even when an operation on is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted. This specific notification may be “message display indicating that it is only necessary to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state”. Alternatively, simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound may be used. In any case, by confirming a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and no effect during the operation is performed, the operation is performed on the appropriate side thereafter. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect to get a chance to go.

  In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved leftward) while the operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part). Even when the stage for receiving the performance related to the specific operation-time effect occurs only on the sword part) side, the state where the operation on the second operation part (for example, the scab part) is being performed (sword decoration body) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which 5001 is moved to the left), an effect is received and the above-mentioned operation effect is performed according to the operation. It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception is generated while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period, even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, the stage reception will be made properly, so the operation error will occur before the stage reception period occurs. When this happens, the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

  However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding whether the operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of information, information will be mixed with the information (indication indication, etc.) notified within the production reception period, and the player will be more confused There is a concern. Therefore, in the period until the production result is displayed when the production result that suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is the final production-related production that is displayed. The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. Even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, there is a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed, and the first period and the second period are sequentially followed by the first period. It is desirable to generate a production reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described production example, when performing specific notification, an expectation degree related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect forms and the sword ornament 5001 according to another example thereof, the effect aspect of the sword ornament 5001 itself changes to any of the above-described plural aspects (for example, FIG. 161). The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 1 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. In this regard, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is changed to one of the above-described plurality of modes, and an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it make it. Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described modes when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “push”, bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), or a sword decorative object 5001. The sword decoration image SYG is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 (step 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image SYG is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG can be given some interest. In other words, the performance is poor when there is a production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance when there is a production reception period.

  At this time, the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG is higher in the aspect than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the stage performance during the stage reception period is more enhanced. It is desirable to ensure it appropriately. For example, when the sword ornament 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Display it. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it can be grasped that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decorative image SYG. For this reason, the game entertainment at the time of the production reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such operational effects, it is only necessary that the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of effect modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Moreover, when preparing a several production | presentation aspect as the sword ornament 5001, the form does not necessarily need to change a form as these several production | generation aspects.

  However, if the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 and the mode of the sword decorative image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that a false display is made. There is concern about this, and this may reduce the entertainment interest. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161) prepared as the sword decoration body 5001. When the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special form instead of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decorative image SYG is changed by further deforming and merging, or the sword decorative body 5001 operates in a mode that does not appear, or in the sword decorative body 5001 It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since it is in the form of realizing a stylistic expression that is difficult on the structure of the sword decorative body 5001 by the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to suppress anxiety that a false display is provided. In addition to being able to do this, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by providing performance that exceeds the imagination of the player when viewing the structure of the sword ornament 5001.

  Even when the sword decorative image SYG is given a special mode in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is provided for each mode (here, shown in FIG. 161) prepared as the mode of the sword decorative body 5001. It is desirable to be able to perform display in stage 0 form to stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is only displayed when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, the technique for enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode may be applied to other effects in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 can be executed. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. The second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given is made executable. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third sign that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. An effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these sign effects are executed as different contents of the contents, but as the contents of the effects, for example,
-Before the effect image that deceives the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears,
-After that, display an effect image in which the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is deceived at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize the specific image,
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first sign effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image that tricks the operating means) is performed as the specific image, and in the second sign effect, “flame” is displayed as the specific image. Display effect by “effect” (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image that tricks the operation means, and in the third sign effect, the display effect by the “water effect” as the specific image (the effect image that tricks the operation means) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by changing the type of the specific image, such as performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the “water effect” When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the third sign effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed. Will come to be.

  And when performing a precursor effect (at least 1 of a 1st precursor effect, a 2nd precursor effect, and a 3rd precursor effect) with such an effect content, the effect image which tricked the operation means with the specific image It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to view. When such a configuration is applied to either the first sign effect or the second sign effect, the effect image that looks like the operation means has a high expectation display mode (for example, red) and a low expectation An operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the display mode (for example, blue) is not certain, so that the effect during the effect reception period is given. Can be improved. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot hold the performance, it is possible to improve the performance during the production reception period.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with such effect content, and FIG. 186 is an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 185 and FIG. 186, an example of an effect when the first sign effect is performed will be described. However, this effect example is not the first sign effect but the second sign effect or the third sign effect. It is also possible to apply to the sign production.

  In FIG. 185 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 185 (b) shows an effect situation in which the production of the first sign effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 185 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display after the start of the effect at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 186 (the specific image itself has a higher transmittance). Or the area where the specific image is displayed is reduced).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 186, at time t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is A button image BTG in which the operation button 410 is turned off and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively. FIG. 185 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. When the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the rate at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), there is a situation in which the button image BTG cannot be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is received. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a way that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG has the first display mode and the first display mode. It is possible to advance the production without having certainty about which of the two display modes is displayed.

  In addition, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), the button image BTG cannot be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Nevertheless, the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. Is completely hidden (FIG. 185 (d)). In such a situation, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. In other words, in this case, the operation time effect is executed in the form in which the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 185 (d).

  According to such a configuration, the period (timing t2 to t3) from when the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4). ), It is possible to provide performance by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the stage performance during the stage reception period (timing t2 to t4) throughout the period, the period during which the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform effect display that is not performed during the period from the timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as “press” is displayed, but for example, at a timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) is more preferably improved. Will be able to.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 185, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG deceiving the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG with the operation button 410 turned off may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize appears first, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until this time, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and an instruction display for prompting an operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state that is difficult to visually recognize before the effect reception period occurs, an effect pattern (third sign) that changes the display mode of the button image BTG to a more expected mode. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, as the button image BTG is in a production situation that is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to provide fun that makes the value of gazing at the button image BTG higher. It can be suitably maintained.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 185, the button image BTG is made difficult to visually recognize by the “cloud effect”. It was decided to display so that the visibility was maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 may be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, the player can have a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without having certainty of the display mode without being able to grasp the remaining time of the presentation reception period well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented performance.

  Also in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 185, the “acceptance sound” described above or described later may be output. In this case, the “acceptable sound” is output from the time when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the “cloud effect”.

  In addition, when such “acceptable sound” is output in any of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot symbol appears, including “0” and “100”), the button image BTG It will be possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation before the whole appears, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment interest.

  When the production acceptance (operation) is performed in a state where the “acceptable sound” is output, it is desirable that the “acceptable sound” in the output state is not output at that time. In addition, for the “acceptable sound”, the above-described or later-described configurations may be appropriately adopted.

  The “cloud effect” may be transparent, and in this case, the button image is slightly visible behind it, but even with such a configuration, the difficulty of visual recognition is maintained. .

  The “cloud effect” itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot symbol appears, including “0” and “100”). In this case, although it functions to make it difficult to visually recognize the operation button 410, when the high expectation level is suggested, the game entertainment is improved.

  Before the “cloud effect” is displayed and completely hidden, a specific production sound (BGM) is set to a suppression mode or silent output state, or a non-output state production method described later. You may make it employ | adopt. In this way, the specific production sound (BGM) that is set to the suppression mode or the silent output state or the non-output state is output to the non-suppressed state even when the operation by the player is performed. It will not be returned.

  In addition, in any of the first sign production, the second sign production, and the third sign production, when such production performance is applied, the production image in which the operation means is deceived after the sign production is started is clear. Even if the length of time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is not displayed) is different from each other, the effect image is clearly displayed after the effect image showing the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the image can be visually recognized (time until the specific image is not displayed) to the same time. In addition, when such a performance is applied to any one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, an effect that tricks the operation means after the sign effect is started. As for the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), a plurality of these are prepared so as to have a plurality of performances with different expectations. However, the time until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is not displayed) after the effect image that looks like the operating means is displayed is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  In addition, as a technique for making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image with a trick on the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, an effect image that looks like an operating device is caused to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. May be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image that looks like the operating means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, it appears in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a prelude effect, or a display image that deceives the operation means is displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing a different display as the predecessor effect. Also good.

  When a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 186 are described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state described later). ) May be executed only when it occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is concealed which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. Since an effect acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, if there is a case in which it is delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, it is more than operated by the player The production reception period may end before all the remaining time has been consumed. In this respect, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, the player's operation with respect to the operation means on the operation target side and the automatic effect function Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, Even if the operation by the player is not accepted for the production, the process (automatic production function) that causes the same change to the production as when the operation by the player is accepted during the production acceptance period can be executed. Yes. According to such an automatic button effect state, a post-operation effect is generated when an operation is performed, without being operated every time an effect acceptance period occurs, thereby suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate it. Will be able to. As for the automatic production function, when this function is activated, the same production reception is performed as when the operation was actually performed, so that processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed, or the production reception is generated. The same processing as when there was an acceptance of production may be performed.

  In the embodiment related to the “automatic rendering function” described below, the above-described operation-related techniques, renderings, settings, and the like may be used in appropriate combinations or replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during the period when the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. The production state can be set. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “automatic button effect state setting” is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or may be operated a plurality of times in combination with an operation on the operation button 410 and an operation on a different operation means.

  On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating once, and by simplifying such operation, It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the effect progress while the symbol is changing. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred. If there is a case where the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game entertainment may be lowered. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to be operated once in a mode (so-called “long press mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. As a result, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is actively performed regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred, the automatic button effect state is entered. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a mistaken setting. It should be noted that it is desirable not to set the automatic button effect state even if an operation is performed in a long press state when at least the effect acceptance period occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is used as a method of canceling the setting. Different operation modes are required between the displayed period and the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “cancel automatic button effect state” displayed in the button is selected, the automatic button effect state is canceled.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. By simplifying such an operation, It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during symbol variation. However, unlike the case of setting to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state without maintaining the operation state for the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not a long press). The automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that this has been done (just by operating in a single operation mode). That is, if any operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that there is a desire to perform an operation on the operation button 410. It is expected that the game entertainment will be favorably maintained by canceling the state setting and quickly returning to the normal performance state.

  Note that, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation buttons 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001 or the like) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 or the like is set). Even if an operation by the player (operation on the sword decorative body 5001) is not received within the presentation reception period, an operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received during the presentation reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect when the effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs, or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) regarding whether or not a period during which an operation on the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted is generated, the effect result Even if any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate, so that it is possible to enjoy such a specific operation-related effect with peace of mind. .

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs when being controlled in a specific production state (automatic button production state). When the operation on the first operation means is not performed within the first side production reception period, it is possible to execute automatic processing for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic production means)
A second-side effect acceptance period in which a second operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001 or the like) among a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When this occurs, an automatic process is performed to cause the same change to the effect when the operation to the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect acceptance period. Possible (second automatic production means)
Even if any of the first side production reception period and the second side production reception period occurs, the first specific time elapses after the period has occurred. Automatic processing by one automatic presentation means or automatic processing by second automatic presentation means can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation object, and the second operation means is the operation object. The automatic production function can function when the same specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of any of the second side production acceptance periods set as Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

  However, in the case where the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. When the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side effect receiving period, the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed. You may make it perform presentation progress within a design fluctuation so that there may be a case. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side effect acceptance period, a different timing from this is assumed. Since the production is accepted and the post-operation production is automatically generated, it can be functioned as a surprise production.

  In addition, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), an operation opportunity is given to the operating means within the symbol variation period compared to when not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) The ratio at which the effect reception period is generated may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period is increased, so that the frequency of forgetting operation within the production reception period is also increased. Since the post-operation production is executed by the function functioning, the production acceptance period can be generated at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the gaming interests due to frequent operation failure. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the generation ratio of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the generation ratio is different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production acceptance conditions are satisfied within the production acceptance period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means),
The processing for establishing the condition for receiving the presentation based on the operation performed by the player within the stage for receiving the presentation can be executed (player operation receiving means),
-When no operation is performed by the player within the production reception period, a process for establishing the production reception condition can be executed without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed since the start of the production reception period. To do. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player to operate himself / herself until the automatic performance function is functioned, and the option for causing the production reception by the operation by the player is left. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side production reception period has occurred. When the progress of the effect within the symbol variation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the time elapses, the “specific time” or the “specific time” All of the “time different from” is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side production reception period.

  Here, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and an operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect during the effect reception period. Then, a process of generating a post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, in this case, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may be performed.

  Similarly, during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect reception period for operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410 is generated, and the effect reception is performed. Even when an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received during the period, a process for generating a post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the effect and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are executed. Is desirable. In this case as well, for the “post-operation effect according to the effect reception”, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during a period in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration within the effect reception period. This is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when an operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire (specific effect) to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation. A desire to end the situation). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending a specific performance state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an operation button to which an operation opportunity is given within the effect reception period The process that ends the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the effect that can change the effect only by performing a single operation on 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (just in a single operation mode) (Processing for performing post-operation effects) is performed separately, so that the desire to advance the effect depending on the player's own operation after finishing the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the production state.

  However, regarding the setting change (setting change to the automatic button effect state or canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state) related to the automatic button effect state during the period when the demo screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decorative body 5001. That is, the sword ornament 5001 is less frequently given operation opportunities than the operation buttons 410 during the symbol variation execution period, and when the operation opportunities are given by that amount, the jackpot expectation is higher than the operation buttons 410. The degree will be increased. Therefore, the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), thereby giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at that time and maintain the entertainment interest. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which a demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, operation means other than the sword decorative body 5001 (operation buttons) among the plurality of operation means. 410 or other operation means) can be operated a plurality of times to set or cancel the automatic button effect state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the operation to the automatic button effect state is not required without requiring an operation on the sword ornament 5001. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For this purpose, the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 refers to the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to this is displayed. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword ornament 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It becomes like this.

  The plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment include “automatic operation that generates an operation-time effect without operation within the effect reception period” when in an automatic button effect state. In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be the target of the “production function”, the special operation means that is not the target of the “automatic production function that generates the production effect during operation without operation within the production reception period” May further be included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and when an operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, The degree of expectation for the big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted appears. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted does not appear, but if it is an effect different from that when the effect is accepted, it may be caused to appear.

  In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode), the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, an effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410 (an effect reception period in which an expectation is suggested when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, or an expectation is indicated when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable that this is not allowed even when a production reception period, etc.) occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated (operation in a long press mode) when the operation reception period for the operation means different from that of the operation button 410 is within an automatic reception effect period, the automatic button effect state is generated. In the middle of the production reception period, the “automatic production function that generates the production during operation without operating during the production reception period” is activated, so that the original production reception (operating means different from the operation button 410 is operated). If there is a player who is not familiar with the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, or the operation button 410 It may be confusing whether the production reception period for the operation means different from that has occurred, and this may reduce the entertainment interest This is because that is just in case.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the warning effect prior to the generation of the effect reception period, but control is performed in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when not being performed, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) It may be possible to execute as a different display mode. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic production function is in a production state that can function within the specific production reception period, and the production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image that suggests the remaining time (for example, “bar display” that indicates the remaining time) is displayed in the effect reception period. However, when the production reception period occurs, at least the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed until the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image where lightning falls toward the specific region) may be displayed (a sign effect) outside the region. In other words, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, the movement of the production image different from the specific image is confirmed, so that the “specific image suggesting the remaining time” in a non-display state will be watched. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific presentation acceptance period ends without the player's operation in time, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the results of the jackpot determination including the following explanation examples are included. Based on the progress of the game or effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which state setting and setting cancellation may be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or production, for example, “While being controlled in the normal gaming state, it is controlled as an automatic button presentation state, but the big hit gaming state Control mode such as “Auto button effect state is canceled when transitioned to high probability short-time state” or “Auto button effect state is generated within the symbol variation execution period, and symbol variation in the execution state is completed Control mode such as “Generate an effect pattern to be released when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence” or “Generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are performed” It is possible to adopt a mode such as a control mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 that is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled and the automatic button effect state is not set. Such a process itself disappears.

  In addition, the timing at which the above-described automatic performance function functions may be a predetermined timing after the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or the remaining time of the production reception period remains. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-described automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing thereafter, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a midway timing (specific timing) where the remaining time of the production reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions as in the case of actual operation. At the time (specific timing), the effect acceptance period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation production will occur even if no operation is performed when the automatic button production state is controlled, the period until the production reception period ends (production reception It is important to start the post-operation effect according to the above-described automatic effect function at a specific timing within a period). In other words, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function despite the arrival of a specific timing within the production reception period, a post-operation effect is generated by the player operating after the specific timing has arrived. Anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, “If the automatic button effect state is not controlled, it is erroneously controlled. It may be difficult to confirm the presentation after the operation ”or“ The automatic presentation function may not work due to some trouble and the presentation may not be confirmed after the operation ”). Will be able to.

  And the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment has the characteristic technique relevant to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use combining suitably.

  In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific production state (automatic button production state), normally, when the specific production state (automatic button production state) is not controlled. When an effect reception period that can occur is generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if no operation is performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to this occurs during the specific display effect, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (improvement of performance by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific production state (automatic button production state) occurs, the automatic production function may not function during another production reception period set when a specific display production is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, it is possible to experience the VIP feeling due to the fact that the operation effect is saved by the function of the automatic effect function. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably enhanced. Note that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and automatic production is performed at least in some production reception periods. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effect when the specific effective period occurs when the specific display effect is performed (when the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function always works) occurs. It is possible to expect Even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-described automatic performance function is caused to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation effect according to this.

Moreover, after preparing at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
If the first specific effective period occurs when the first specific display effect is being executed, the automatic effect described above at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific effective period has occurred. While the function is activated to end the first specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect according to this,
If a second specific effective period occurs when the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific effective period occurs The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing when the second specific effective period ends, and a post-operation production corresponding to this is generated.
When the third specific effective period occurs when the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is controlled despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the operation is finished, each processing such as preventing the same post-operation effect from appearing when the operation is performed may be performed in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first time from when the effect reception period occurs is the first. When the predetermined time elapses, the automatic production function described above functions, or when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has not elapsed, the automatic production function described above does not function, Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above cannot be performed in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs For example, when the above-described automatic rendering function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described need is satisfied when the second predetermined time has elapsed. It is possible to develop the production with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic production function is functioning or whether the automatic production function described above does not function in the first place. The first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operation state (so-called When a single operation is performed), an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

  Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. Thus, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) can be displayed. In such a case, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. Is not necessarily prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that occur when an effect is received during the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effects.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, at which timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function worked (when the effect is accepted, as the effect acceptance period The automatic presentation function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image as time passes (here, the area changes)) that indicates the remaining time of the production acceptance period so that it can be recognized. You may make it generate | occur | produce the post-operation production in the state which displayed this instead of making it non-display. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” continuously displayed when the automatic performance function is activated, the production reception period is set to the first specific effective period ( The period during which the automatic presentation function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs, and the second specific effective period (relative to the generation of the production reception period). It is possible to recognize the time period during which the automatic rendering function functions when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

  In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation acceptance period occurs) and the second specific effective period ( The degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on the occurrence of the automatic production function when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the production reception period has occurred (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. In this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. The functions are different in degree (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case of functioning, the “bar display” may not be hidden, and the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where this is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600. For example, it is executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. Also good.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation to be an operation target) suggesting an operation means to be an operation target within the effect reception period. Even if the above-described automatic rendering function is functioning, the post-operation rendering is generated in a state in which the manipulation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. It is desirable to make it. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic Similarly to the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. When the above-described automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described first specific effective period, or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed.

  Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the operation target suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode are displayed. Can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed, for example, as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

  For example, even in the pachinko machine 1 not equipped with the automatic performance function described above, it appears only when a big hit expectation degree (for example, a big hit is obtained) as an operation target suggestion image (such as a spear image with the operation means deceived). If there are multiple modes with different ratios of post-operation effects in a non-operating mode, and an operation is accepted by an operation by the player, the target of operation at the point when the post-operation effect is started based on the operation reception If the suggestion image (such as a spear image with the operation means tricked) is displayed in any of the plurality of modes having different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect Both of them can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, when generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which a strawberry image is displayed, the type of the effective period (effect reception period) (effective period generation conditions and post-operation effects generated when an operation is received) Display area is reduced according to the passage of time (first effective period generated by the establishment of the first condition), and the display area is reduced according to the passage of time. It is desirable that there is a case where the display is not performed (second effective period generated when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, in the effective period in which the display area is reduced as time elapses, it becomes difficult to recognize how much remaining time is allowed to accept operations, and the effective period The tension inside can be suitably maintained. Note that “not display in which the display area of the specific image is reduced with the passage of time” is, for example, normally (first effective period) in a manner in which the display area is reduced with the passage of time. When the image is displayed, it can be realized by adopting a method in which the gauge image itself is not displayed in the second effective period, or the gauge image is displayed but the display area is not reduced with time. is there.

  In this regard, when an operation is accepted in the second effective period (when the display whose display area is reduced with the passage of time is not performed), a change corresponding to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp emission, etc.) It is desirable that at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect) be displayed at the time when execution starts. This makes it possible to know that the operation has been accepted while the bag image is being displayed (before the expiration of the effective period), and anxiety such as “I missed the operation.” Can be removed.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color or color) before and after the occurrence of a change (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is generated. (Transmissivity, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image with other images, and the operation means that was the operation target is the operation reception. It is only necessary to be able to recognize even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain such an effect, at least when a change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp emission) is started to be executed. It is desirable that the display state of the haze image is maintained as it is displayed before the operation is accepted, and that the haze image is not made difficult to be visually recognized by other images. Therefore, if the bag image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which the operation reception is permitted, at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as a display change and a lamp light emission according to the operation reception. It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when the execution is started. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs due to an operation by the player within the first effective period, the change The haze image may be hidden in a state where (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) has occurred, or the haze image is displayed without being hidden as in the case of the second effective period described above. A change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation acceptance may be generated in the state.

  However, in this way, even during the effective period of “no display in which the display area of the specific image is reduced with the passage of time” is performed, the 摸 image showing the operation means to be operated is displayed. The image is desirably displayed as a moving image that is developed at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the heel image has advanced. It is possible, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) and the second operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation means, and the first operation means. There is a case where an effective period (production reception period) in which the operation reception for the second operation means is allowed and a case where an effective period (production reception period) in which the operation reception for the second operation means is allowed are generated. Among them, the first haze image showing the first operation means is displayed in the effective period in which the operation reception for the first operation means is permitted, and the second operation means is displayed in the effective period in which the operation reception for the second operation means is allowed. A hazy second habit image is displayed. In addition, a jackpot expectation degree (post-operation effect) suggested when an operation is accepted between an effective period in which an operation is accepted for the first operation means and an effective period in which an operation is accepted for the second operation means. As a result, the ratio of the mode that only appears at the time of big hit is executed). In addition, the effective period (production reception period) in which the operation reception with respect to the 1st operation means is permitted, the effective period (production reception period) in which the operation reception with respect to the 2nd operation means is permitted, and an effective period different from these are set. Further, it may be generated. In this regard, when an operation is accepted in an effective period (for example, an effective period in which operation acceptance for the second operation means is allowed) on the side where the big hit expectation is high, a change (display change or When the execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as lamp light emission is started, it is desirable that the haze image (second haze image) be displayed without being hidden.

  Thereby, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 183 (f) described above, for example, an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Nevertheless, the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) remains in the operation state (the operation is performed). Even if the second operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is operated and this operation is accepted, the player side is made aware that this is properly accepted. Will be able to.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color or color) before and after the occurrence of a change (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is generated. (Transmissivity, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image with other images, and the operation means that was the operation target is the operation reception. It is only necessary to be able to recognize even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) has occurred. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least when a change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as display change and lamp emission) is started, It is desirable that the display state of the eyelid image is maintained as it was displayed before reception, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to be visually recognized by other images. Therefore, if the bag image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which the operation reception is permitted, at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as a display change and a lamp light emission according to the operation reception. It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when the execution is started. Further, in order to make the player recognize that the presentation has been properly received, changes (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation reception by the player's operation within the first effective period. Even when the change occurs (display change, lamp light emission, etc.), the change in response to the operation acceptance (display change or It is desirable to generate lamp light emission.

  According to such a configuration, “based on a determination unit that performs determination, an effect unit that performs an effect based on a result of determination by the determination unit, and a predetermined result obtained by determination by the determination unit. Privilege granting means that can give a privilege to the player, and a specific operation receiving portion provided to be displaceable between the first position and the second position (the operation button 410 displaceable between the normal position and the pressed position) ), A first detection unit capable of detecting a specific action (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving unit to the second position, and a special operation receiving unit different from the specific operation receiving unit A second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, a sword operation) by a player with respect to (for example, a sword ornament 5001), and a post-operation effect that occurs when an effect is accepted. (Different types) A plurality of effect reception periods including a first effect reception period and a second effect reception period are prepared. In the first effect reception period, a specific habit image that looks like the specific operation receiving unit is displayed. An effect is received by detection by one detection unit, and during the second effect reception period, a special habit image that looks like the special operation receiving unit is displayed, and an effect is received by detection by the second detection unit In spite of the fact that a special spear image that looks like the special operation receiving part is displayed during the second effect receiving period, the specific operation receiving part is When the player moves from the first position to the second position, even if the player performs the special action while maintaining the specific operation receiving section at the second position, the second detection section performs the detection. Reception is performed, and thus with the arrangement such "effect after the operation on the basis of the accepted output 該演 can be performed.

  And, in such a configuration, “even if the player performs the special action while maintaining the specific operation receiving part in the second position, an effect is received by detection by the second detecting part, At the time when the post-operation production starts to be executed based on the production reception, it is not displayed on the side of the special operation image that hides the special operation receiving unit. The player can recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an appropriate operation on the side.

  When the special basket image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, the post-operation effect is started in the displayed mode. If an effect is received without such an erroneous operation being performed, the haze image may be kept hidden without being displayed at the time when the effect after the operation is started. The haze image may be hidden at the time when the performance starts to be executed.

  By the way, the second production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit may be less frequently generated than the first production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit. In many cases, this is considered to be a factor causing an operation error. Therefore, when the second stage reception period during which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiver is generated, it is suggested that the stage reception is allowed or the stage reception is allowed. It is desirable to output an acceptable reception sound. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect acceptance period has occurred, and it is expected that an operation error is less likely to occur. The “acceptable sound” means that when a sound starts to be output, an acceptable state of acceptance (valid period) always occurs while the sound is output (while sound data is assigned). A sound in a state where an allowable state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it is suggested that the output is started within the set time for which the production reception is permitted and that the production reception is permitted, or before the set time for which the production reception is permitted. It is suggested that the output is started and the reception of the effect is permitted, and is output as an effect sound such as “Pikkin”, for example.

  However, even when the first production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit is generated, it is suggested that the production reception is permitted or the production reception is permitted. An acceptable reception sound may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable that the acceptable sound for the reception (such as a timbre) be different between when the first effect reception period occurs and when the second effect reception period occurs. Alternatively, in the first effect acceptance period, even if the effect acceptance is made while the acceptable reception sound is being output, the acceptance acceptable sound in the output state is not ended, but this is continued. In this case, it is desirable that the reception permission sound in the output state is terminated in the middle when the presentation is received while the reception permission sound is being output. You may make it employ | adopt both of those structures. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp which one of the first production reception period and the second production reception period occurs, or an operation on the specific operation receiving unit and a special operation reception are received. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operations for the part has been accepted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, a display for reducing the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) as time passes is displayed. (For example, the display area is finally set to “0”) to generate a small gauge effective period (production reception period) that suggests the remaining time during which operation reception is allowed, and the display area is Display that displays a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image) and then reduces the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) over time (for example, the display area is finally set to “0”) There is a case where a large gauge effective period (direction reception period) is generated by suggesting the remaining time during which operation reception is permitted. And, the small gauge effective period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge effective period in which the large gauge image is displayed are the big hit expectation degree suggested when the operation is accepted (only when the big hit is the post-operation effect) The rate at which a mode that does not appear is executed) is different (for example, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the large gauge effective period). In addition to the small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period, an effective period different from these may be further generated. The small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period may give an operation opportunity to the same operation object, or may give an operation opportunity to different operation objects.

  In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge effective period, when a change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) is started. It is desirable that the large gauge image be displayed without being hidden. In addition, even when a change according to the operation reception (at least one change caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) starts to be executed, the large gauge image becomes smaller with time. It is desirable that the display is continued without being terminated. As a result, there was a sense of security that a lot of remaining time was left due to the display of the large gauge image, but after the operation was accepted, whether or not the operation was accepted properly Can feel a sense of anxiety, and can maintain a feeling of tension suitably.

  In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color or color) before and after the occurrence of the change (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as display change or lamp light emission) according to the operation acceptance is generated. The transmittance and the like are not necessarily the same, and the gauge image may be difficult to visually recognize with another image. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-described effect, at least when a change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp emission) is started, It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image is maintained as it was displayed before reception, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to be visually recognized by other images. On the other hand, if a change (at least one change caused by post-operation effects such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs due to an operation by the player during the small gauge effective period, the change The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when a display change or lamp emission occurs, or the gauge image (large gauge image) as in the case of the large gauge effective period described above. ) May not be hidden, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation acceptance may be generated in a state where this is displayed.

  In addition, when the large gauge valid period occurs, it is desirable to output an acceptable sound that indicates that the production acceptance is permitted or that the production acceptance is permitted. . As a result, the player can recognize that the large gauge valid period has occurred, and can further emphasize the sense of security until the operation is accepted. The “acceptable sound” means that when a sound starts to be output, an acceptable state of acceptance (valid period) always occurs while the sound is output (while sound data is assigned). A sound in a state where an allowable state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it is suggested that the output is started within the set time for which the production reception is permitted and that the production reception is permitted, or before the set time for which the production reception is permitted. It is suggested that the output is started and the reception of the effect is permitted, and is output as an effect sound such as “Pikkin”, for example.

  However, even when the small gauge valid period occurs, a reception permission sound may be output that suggests that the stage reception is allowed or the stage reception is allowed. However, in this case, it is desirable that the acceptable sound is different in the mode (tone color, etc.) between when the small gauge effective period occurs and when the large gauge effective period occurs. Or, in the small gauge effective period, even if the presentation reception is made while the reception allowable sound is being output, the reception allowable sound in the output state is not ended, but this is continued. When the production is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is being output, it is desirable that the acceptable reception sound in the output state is terminated halfway. You may make it employ | adopt both of those structures. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp whether a small gauge effective period or a large gauge effective period occurs, operation reception during the small gauge effective period, and large gauge effective It becomes possible to appropriately grasp which operation was accepted during the period.

  The large gauge image and the small gauge image are not only different in size, but may also be images having different forms themselves (such as images having no similar relationship).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period when the operation reception is allowed, the spear image is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving unit is displaced. It is to be displayed. In this respect, when a change in response to an operation reception (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) is started, the haze image is not displayed but remains displayed. In this case, the dynamic display of the haze image may be continued without being terminated.

  Further, the haze image and the gauge image may be displayed as an after-mentioned integrated haze image in which they are integrated.

  In each production example described above and each production example to be described later, “operation reception” means detection by a touch sensor in addition to detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button, by a touch sensor. An operation may be accepted, or an operation may be accepted by detecting a player's movement in a specific area in a non-contact manner.

  In addition, when an operation that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is an “operation system effect”, the operation system effect is related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, or the like) without an image. However, in this case, when “Operation system effect” is executed but “Other specific effect unrelated to this” is not executed, “Operation system effect” and “ It is desirable that the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be higher than when the “specific production” is in the production situation in parallel. In other words, when there is an effect situation in which “operation system effect” and “another specific effect unrelated to this” are in parallel, the “operation system effect” is not accepted and the post-operation effect is not executed. In addition, since “another specific effect unrelated to this” is in the execution state, the decline in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed, whereas the “operation system effect” is executed, but “another effect not related to this” When there is a production situation in which the “specific production” is not executed, if there is a case where the production operation is not accepted and the post-operation production is not executed, no production will be executed. Therefore, a decline in the entertainment interest is inevitable. Therefore, when there is a performance situation in which “operation-related effects” are executed but “other specific effects not related to this” are not executed, “operation-related effects” and “other specific effects not related to this” are specified. By making the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be higher than when the “production” is in a parallel production situation, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the operation system production occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the warning effect that is performed before the production reception period occurs, the production that the operation means to be operated is operated, etc. are executed as “operation system production” or production related thereto. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function will increase. Will be able to. In this case, it is desirable to be executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect) and is executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is high, and it is possible to provide the performance in a sense of tension. In this regard, if the “other specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the predicate effect), the “other specific effect” may be repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when “another specific production” is executed is high With this, it becomes possible to give a sense of tension as to whether the production reception period occurs.

  Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously, Until it reaches the 1000th change in loss), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the production reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the above-described automatic production function is made to function and a case where the above-mentioned automatic production function is not made to function. On the other hand, when there is a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously) In the case of reaching the 1000th loss fluctuation), when the symbol fluctuation (production pattern) reaches the specific value, the operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is operated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the reception period, the above-described automatic performance function is operated and there is an operation by the player within the reception period. You may make it perform the process which always produces | generates the same post-operation production as time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated each time an effect reception period occurs while the loss variation is continuously executed. Even though there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions as an automatic production function as if it had felt the responsibility so far. Since it is realized as an effect to be played, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest. At this time, in the production reception period that occurs when the loss variation is digested sequentially and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss variation), the loss variation is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, “operating”, etc.) that is different from a display image (for example, “operate”) that has appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 loss fluctuations) It would be desirable to make it appear, such as “If I am troublesome, I will act for you”. In addition, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit gaming state) is satisfied. Within the (effect pattern), an effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the big hit determination, and a special display image (for example, “ If it is troublesome, I will act on behalf of you, etc.)), and even if there is no operation by the player within the presentation reception period, the above automatic presentation function will function and respond to the reception It is desirable to execute a process that always generates a post-operation effect.

  It should be noted that the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is digested sequentially when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss change is executed continuously, You may make it display the remaining fluctuation | variation number until it reaches | attains the 1000th loss fluctuation | variation.

  Also, during the symbol variation, the first operation is performed during the symbol variation until the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value when in the specific rendering state (automatic button rendering state). Both the production reception period for the means and the production reception period for the second operation means can occur, but in the pattern fluctuation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value In addition, it is possible to cause the presentation to progress so that only one of the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is suitably suppressed that the production acceptance period has occurred and the expectation is given to itself. Become moist. However, this example of the performance is "Despite the fact that the player has been encouraged to operate every time the production acceptance period occurs, In view of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always makes the automatic effect function work even if there is no operation by the player, as if it felt the responsibility so far, In order to prevent further expectation, an effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001).

  In addition, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can be generated both when it is not performed and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means. The second production acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user cannot occur when not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state) and is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may be made possible to generate when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and when the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) is in effect. It is possible to suitably maintain the game interest of the game.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception period is generated based on the result of the big hit determination,
-Display a cocoon image (operation object suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) as an operation means (摸 image display means)
-After the production reception period has occurred, if an operation is performed by the player while the spear image is displayed, the post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・ After the period for the production reception, if a specific timing arrives without any operation by the player while the spear image is displayed, the post-operation production can be executed without receiving any operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the 摸 image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the proportion (expected degree) in which the post-operation effect is executed in the “mode advantageous to the player” when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do this. According to such a configuration, the expectation can be recognized whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. The post-operation effect can be generated.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, a spear image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even if the above-described automatic performance function is functioning, it is desirable that the post-operation effect be generated in a state where the haze image is not displayed but displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic Similarly to the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least a region different from the region in which the spear image is displayed in the effect display device 1600, or a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body It may be executed as an operation according to.

  At this time, when the cocoon image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the expectation level (摸 image) suggested within the effect acceptance period even in the state where the effect after the operation has occurred. Display mode) can be confirmed.

  The haze image that is continuously displayed in this manner is hidden after the post-operation effect has occurred. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a different time has elapsed, the time from when the post-effect effect is executed until the haze image is hidden is also made different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether a post-operation effect has occurred due to automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, or whether a post-operation effect has occurred due to automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is not, it is possible to recognize at which time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect until the haze image is hidden. .

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed and when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, You may make it differ in the expectation degree from which it is obtained.

  In addition, when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player is generated while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Either a mode (for example, a low-expected display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation level or a high-expected display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation level) can appear, and a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) Appears, even if no operation is performed within the period for receiving the production, the production is always accepted (the automatic production function is always functioning), and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when an operation is not performed within the effect reception period, an effect is received (the automatic effect function is functioned), and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. When and where Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. That is, if forgetting to operate when a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the user forgets to operate it, it is assumed that the game entertainment will not decrease so much, so a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. If forgetting to operate sometimes occurs, by making sure that the automatic production function is functioned within the production reception period, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate, but a low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation) If you forget to operate when an image) appears, play the game so that you do not forget to operate it by not allowing the automatic production function to function during the production reception period. And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. In addition, when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) It may be prevented from appearing. Further, any of three or more display modes may appear during the production reception period.

  And in each characteristic technique demonstrated below, you may make it implement by applying suitably also about the other example concerning these automatic button production | presentation states.

[Suggestion suggestion by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied), It is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the operation was performed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted An effect pattern in which a process (automatic effect function) for generating an effect is not executed can also be generated. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the symbol variation is larger than when the automatic effect function functions. , The process of producing the effect within the symbol variation can be executed so that the expectation (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the expectation degree (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period. By checking whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that can cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.). The above-mentioned effects (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 166 to 186) regarding whether a period occurs or whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted) occurs. ))). In this regard, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, these effects are compared to the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the rate at which the above-described automatic effect function functions is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the rate at which the automatic performance function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs itself also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-described automatic effect function is highly functional. As a result, it is possible to more suitably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in a specific operation-related effect, there is an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 as compared to a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 as a result of the effect. In the case where it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation in the execution state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 has a ratio that the above-described automatic effect function functions when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related effect. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set so that the ratio is the same in the case where the operation opportunity is indicated to be given and the case where the operation opportunity is indicated to be given to the sword decorative body 5001.

  According to such a configuration, an effect situation (which suggests that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic performance function to function It becomes possible to maintain suitably. In this way, the game entertainment can be enhanced by paralleling two different effects (specific operation-related effects and suggestion of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects.

  Hereinafter, specific examples of effects in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189.

  FIG. 187 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows the performance status being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  FIG. 187 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 187 (a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press” ”And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific production reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance. Etc.) and a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low degree of expectation or “hot heat!” With a relatively high degree of expectation). Either one will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect acceptance period is ended when the effect is accepted without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production state shown in FIG. 187 (b), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within a specific production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. Thus, the automatic production function described above does not function, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific performance reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was received within a specific effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (e), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time since the specific production reception period occurs.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the above-described automatic production function functions” or “the above-described automatic production function”. Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination when executing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% in the specific effect reception period. The above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the reception of the effect that the above-described automatic effect function functions” Period "or" the reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when the jackpot is determined to be lost as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 60% during a specific production reception period, and the automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the above-described automatic production function functions”, “ During which period, so that the percentage of appearance of jackpot symbols will be higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when it is generated as a “period of reception for production that does not function automatically” Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received, when an effect reception period in which it is determined that an aspect with high expectation (such as “Intense heat!”) Appears as an effect after operation is received, the automatic effect function functions. When the production reception period occurs, it is determined that a mode of low expectation (such as “chance!”) Will appear as a post-operation production. The rate at which functions work is relatively low. Therefore, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation button 410 is not intentionally operated within the effect reception period. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that can cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), even if the automatic presentation function functions when the operation button 410 is not operated during the presentation reception period, the post-operation presentation is expected. Low-level aspects (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, so even if the automatic performance function is functioning, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Such stunning expectations (implications due to the functioning of the automatic performance function, suggestions based on the post-operation effect) will achieve a stunning performance, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment Expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated during the production reception period, the production reception is still accepted. In this case, there is a possibility that an aspect with high expectation appears in the post-operation effect that should have appeared, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 187 (c) (the situation where the automatic production function does not function and the production after the operation does not appear) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 187 (d) (the automatic production function). However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation be lower than when a situation in which a mode with a low degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect appears.

  FIG. 188 and FIG. 189 show effects that the degree of expectation is suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A specific example is shown.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3, and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows the performance status being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, , “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously.

  FIG. 188 (b) shows a specific operation related effect illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171 (a specific operation related example illustrated separately from this) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 188 (a). The production status may be a production). That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 168 to 171, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is concealed which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity. . However, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 is in a state to be operated appears as a first effect result having relatively low expectation, As a second performance result having a relatively high degree of expectation, a production situation indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state to be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 having a relatively low degree of expectation and a relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity is shown.

  FIG. 188 (c) indicates that, as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b) being performed, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation. An effect state indicating that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press”). A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 188 (c), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is used as a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance. Any one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Having a relatively low expectation degree or “hot heat!” Having a relatively high expectation degree) having a different expectation degree in the display area while performing a production operation. Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect acceptance period is ended when the effect is accepted without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic performance function is not functioning, and the automatic performance function described above is functioning at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side becomes confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate effect is received within the effect reception period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 188 (c)), the effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Effects within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be functioned is higher when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period than the reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)). It is possible to execute processing that is advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as “appropriate operation cannot be performed within the effect reception period and an effect corresponding to the operation may not appear”. It is possible to provide the interest about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related effects. In order to obtain such effects, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic performance function is functioning.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until it is finished, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, “Auto button high accuracy”) indicating that the automatic performance function is functioning at a high rate continues. It comes to appear.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 188 (d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is not received in the production reception period. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), the above-described automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur). In the case of the production situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than the case where it is not.

  Further, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 188 (e), the operation is not performed on the operation button 410 within the performance reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed during the reception period and the effect was received is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, FIG. 189 (g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 is to be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b). An effect state indicating that the effect is received appears, and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 has occurred. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ A character display such as “Put the sword” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific production reception period) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in an operating state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410 and moves the sword ornament 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Is allowed to operate.

  Here, assuming that an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c). The same post-operation effect as that performed is executed. However, when an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 188 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 188 (c). A mode with a high degree of expectation among a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low degree of expectation, “hot heat!” With a relatively high degree of expectation, etc.) The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted during the production acceptance period, the automatic button production state is canceled and returned to the normal production state, and the specific production reception period also consumes the remaining time. It is the same as the case of the production reception period shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period in the effect state shown in FIG. 189 (g) (the effect reception did not occur). In the case), although the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c) is higher than the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), the production reception is generated in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c). As in the case of not doing so, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect state (FIG. 188) indicating that the operation button 410 is to be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation. Even if (see (c)) appears, the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to function is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance). The expectation that the function will function can be suitably maintained. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results in parallel, and an adverse effect result appears on the one side effect. It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment at the time. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above is performed. Expectation will be lower than when it works.

  When the above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 189 (h), it is assumed that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 has not been accepted within the production reception period. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. Even in the case where there is not, the above-described automatic performance function is performed when the operation button 410 is not operated within the performance reception period (when the performance reception is not generated) in the performance situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation be higher than when it did not function.

  Further, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 189 (i), even though no operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 within the performance reception period, The post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation was performed and the effect was received within the effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within the effect acceptance period In both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (j), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production occurs.

  It should be noted that an effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ As in the case of an effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being executed, whether or not it is generated as “the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function is not functioning” At the time of execution, the decision is made (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination, and as a result, the above-described automatic performance function is allowed to function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production. However, the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the reception of the effect that the above-described automatic effect function functions” Period "or" the reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when the jackpot is determined to be lost as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)), and 80% The automatic production function described above functions at the rate of.

  Similarly, an effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is also generated as an “effect reception period in which the automatic effect function described above functions”. In such a case, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the symbol variation is stopped as compared to the case where the above-described automatic reception function does not function. Which of these periods is to be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  The post-operation effects are generated in the case of an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)), and the specific operation-related effect is not executed. It may be executed as an effect different in the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)). However, even if it is executed as a different effect, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, the sword decorative body 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be the sword decorative body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 161. In addition, in FIGS. 188 and 189, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 will be described. The “effect using the function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 166 to 186.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted, the “setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted” state before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable that it be generated at least when it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (b) (the production situation in which the specific operation-related production is started), and this is continued until the production reception period. According to such a configuration, since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is confirmed after confirming that the specific operation-related effect is started, the automatic button effect state is not accepted. It is now possible to provide “directing using the automatic directing function” for only those who continue to play games while maintaining the game, and continue to play games while maintaining the automatic button directing state. It is possible to provide stunning value for what to do.

  Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )) In the first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG or blue sword decoration image SYG) or the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG or green sword decoration). The image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the “production reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function functions” occurs compared to when the first display mode appears It is desirable that a certain ratio be higher.

  Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the above-mentioned automatic performance is displayed. You may make it be in the state where the production | presentation reception period in which a function functions is generating.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In order to provide a judgment material as to whether or not to perform a stunning selection such as “do not perform an operation on the operation button 410 within the staging reception period” in a risk that a stunning disadvantage may occur. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Regardless of whether or not the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation-related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 166 to 186, and FIGS. 188 and 189. Is preferably generated as a period having a longer time than an effect reception period (such as FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side becomes confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate effect is received within the effect reception period. Although it may happen that the operation cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by providing a long time for the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production”. Is expected.

  In particular, in the example of FIGS. 188 and 189, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, it is considered that the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions is set to be relatively high. For example, whether or not the automatic production function functions so that the production reception period is set to have a longer time than the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. It can be said that it is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game by maintaining the performance of the game for a longer time. In this case, the timing at which the automatic production function is activated comes when the first time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period in the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. On the other hand, in the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production”, the automatic production function may be made to arrive when a second time longer than the first time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period. This is important for sustaining the performance of whether or not functions.

  Also, the period from the start of the period until the end of the period in which the stage is received without the execution of the “specific operation-related stage” and the stage of reception of the stage corresponding to the “specific operation-related stage” Even if it is made to differ, about the bar display which shows the remaining time of a production reception period, this is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is decreased. It is desirable to only vary the speed. That is, in this case, even if the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production” occurs, the duration continues for the same time as the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. As a result, it is possible to make it seem like it is, and in combination with “fuzziness” by continuing for a longer period of time than expected, it is possible to maintain the stunning performance of whether or not the automatic staging function works To be able to.

  According to the example shown in FIGS. 187 to 189, the first effect reception period (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Even if the operation to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not necessarily executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect is generated without being executed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first production reception period than the one production reception period (production reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this regard, in such an automatic button effect state, the ratio (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) at which the automatic effect function functions depends on the type of effect reception period, as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is the “first automatic button effect state”, the distribution ratio (“50% -50%”, “10” is different depending on the type of the effect reception period. % -90% "), which is set differently, and when the reception period occurs, the automatic direction function is always set to function regardless of the type of period. Further, a third automatic button effect state may be prepared so that any one of these effect states can be set, including a normal effect state where the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, a normal performance state in which the automatic performance function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always performed in an automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state). Or production may be executed.

  Note that the above-described “type of effect reception period” may mean that the type of post-operation effect that occurs when an operation is accepted. For example, in the first automatic button effect state, in the “first effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect of the conversation notice” and the “second effect reception period for generating the effect after the cut-in operation”, When the operation means is not received within the period of receiving the production, the same post-operation production as when the reception is made is not generated (although automatic reception is not made), but “after the operation to operate the movable body A” In the “third effect reception period for generating an effect”, the same post-operation effect is generated as when the operation is not accepted during the effect reception period when the operation is not accepted (automatic reception is performed). It will be. On the other hand, in the “second automatic button effect state (second effect state)” in which automatic reception is more likely to occur than the “first automatic button effect state (first effect state)”, “conversation notice” In the “first production reception period in which the post-operation production is generated”, the same post-operation production as in the case of the acceptance is not generated when the operation is not accepted for the operation means within the production reception period (automatic reception). However, in the “second effect reception period in which an effect after cut-in operation is generated” and the “third effect reception period in which an effect after operation for operating the movable body A is generated” are received. When the operation means is not received within the period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received is generated (automatic reception is performed). However, any of a plurality of effect reception periods including a first effect reception period (conversation notice type), a second effect reception period (cut-in type), and a third effect reception period (type of movable body A) occurs. Even when the operation means is not accepted, the “normal effect state” that does not cause the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not prepared and set. Will not be allowed.

  In other words, in this case, “the operation means that can be operated by the player, the determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the game based on the result obtained by the determination by the determination means. As an effect receiving period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means, including a privilege giving means that can give a privilege to a person and an effect state control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of effect states, A plurality of production reception periods with different types of post-operation production that occur when an operation is accepted are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of production reception periods occurs in the plurality of production states, In accordance with the type of the effect reception period that has occurred, when the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance was made when the operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, When any one of the first effect state and the plurality of effect acceptance periods occurs, both of when the attachment is made and when the same post-operation effect is not generated, the type of the effect reception period that has occurred Accordingly, when the post-operation effect is generated when the operation means is not received within the effect reception period and the same post-operation effect is generated as when the reception is made, and the same post-operation effect as when the reception is made. However, the ease of occurrence of the same post-operation effect includes at least a second effect state different from the first effect state, and any of the plurality of effect reception periods Even when the operation is not received, the operation state is not included when the operation means is not received and the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received is not included. Ikoto and thus provided as a game machine, "characterized by.

  Also, the distribution rate may be set to either 0% or 100% depending on the type of the production reception period and the type of the production state.

  In addition, the effects shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first effect acceptance period (first The above-mentioned automatic performance function functions at the timing within the production reception period) to end the first production reception period and generate a post-operation production corresponding to this. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the first production reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed after the first production reception period has occurred (the first production time). The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing of the first production reception period), and thereafter the first production reception period is ended without performing the post-operation production (after that, the post-operation production is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions in the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The automatic presentation function described above functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third presentation reception period, and the second presentation reception period or the third The production reception period ends, and a post-operation production corresponding to the production reception period is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic performance function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third performance reception period, and then the second performance reception period or the third time without performing the post-operation performance. The production reception period is terminated (after that, the post-operation production is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, the automatic production function can function at a relatively early stage in the first production reception period where the ratio of the automatic production function to function is low. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time to allow the player to accept the production by his own operation before the end of the first production acceptance period. You can play games with heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the higher side where the automatic production function functions, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage. Providing a game with a sense of tension even though the percentage of the automatic directing function is high, because there will be little time left for the player to operate when it does not function Will be able to.

  In addition, about the said modification, in the 1st production reception period, when the above-mentioned automatic production | generation function functions and does not function at the timing (timing in the 1st production reception period) when the 1st predetermined time passed. However, in the second presentation reception period and the third presentation reception period, the automatic presentation function described above always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second presentation reception period). You may do it. Even in such a configuration, if the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function does not function (by some trouble), it takes time for the player to operate it. Since it is considered that the player has a delusion that there is not much room left, a similar effect can be expected.

  Further, in addition to the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189, in other production examples, control to the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not necessarily performed by an operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). In addition, the automatic button effect state may not be set itself, and the automatic effect function may be provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined rate.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, after controlling to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation (I want to end the automatic button effect state) Desire) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception is performed. After an operation corresponding to the process of finishing the automatic button effect state and receiving the effect, the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to be given the operation opportunity within the period only needs to be operated once. Production (processing that can cause a change in production) is performed (operation unification control in the automatic button production state). As a result, even if a desire to end the automatic button effect state and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation occurs within the effect acceptance period, the loss of operation opportunity is avoided and the effect mode is switched. Can be performed smoothly.

  As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is in the execution state, only the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is allowed to be set. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. Only the button 410 is permitted to cancel the setting. On the other hand, in the state where the production reception period occurs, when an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) to which an operation opportunity is given during the production reception period. Then, a process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process that can cause a change in the effect) in accordance with the effect reception are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in a state where an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation is not received, and the process for ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, some players play games with their own game technique, such as "Provide the operation by operating the player only when you like while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode)" It can be envisaged that some people wish to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 further includes special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decorative body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the automatic button effect is displayed. A process for ending the state (a specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect are performed (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state), but control to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) When the operation for the special operation means is performed within the period for accepting the performance related to the specific performance, Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated during the effect reception period. If you want to operate rarely while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), you can operate the special operation means during the effect reception period. Thus, it is possible to realize a game desired by the player simply by properly using the operation means.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192. FIG.

  FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the change display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows a state in which an effect reception period for receiving a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred under the reach state being formed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  Also, as shown in the figure, during this presentation reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, the lower display) An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in actuality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also a special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 in which no change occurs is allowed to be operated.

  190 (b) to (d) show that the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), but the above-described automatic effect function functions, so that the effect reception period. It shows a state in which the post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was accepted is executed. When the above-described automatic performance function is activated, the production reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and special operation means (indicated as “PUSH” in the figure). Button) 1410 will be lost.

  In other words, in the post-operation production according to this production example, a staged production progress appears, and any production results in a plurality of modes (FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (d)) with different expectations are obtained. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of symbol variation (determined based on the result of jackpot determination), first, as shown in FIG. To display the smoke image. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), the specific production image shown in FIG. 190 (b) (here, explosion) As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Otokuji” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result is displayed, and the expectation is relatively high When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 190 (d), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 190 (b) gradually disappears. In the course of the course, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi's fortune”) indicating that the effect result is relatively high in expectation is displayed.

  190 (a) to 190 (d) as described above appear as basic production progress when the production reception period occurs in the automatic button production state, and the automatic production function described above. Even after the post-operation effects (FIGS. 190 (b) to 190 (d)) are executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being ended unless an operation is performed by the player. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation (the automatic button effect state is A desire to end) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position, a process for terminating the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in the button production state). It should be noted that when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the production acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic production function is disabled, and the special operation means ( An operation opportunity for a button 1410 (“PUSH” in the drawing) is also lost.

  Even when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the production reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), as shown in FIG. 191 (e), the operation is performed within the production reception period and the production reception is performed. As a post-operation effect in response to this, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 191 (f), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 191 (e). As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Otokuji” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result is displayed, and the expectation is relatively high When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 191 (g), the specific production image shown in FIG. 191 (e) (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) gradually disappears. In the course of the course, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi's fortune”) indicating that the effect result is relatively high in expectation is displayed.

  However, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), a process for ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 191 (e) to 191 (g), after the operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this example, “auto button is being set”) is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggestion display (here, “auto button release”) appears (see FIG. 191 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect receiving period generated in FIG. 190 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emission state but also special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure) in which no change has occurred is described. Button) 1410 is allowed to be operated. And this special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 “operates itself only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode to be switched). As described above, it is prepared in order to make possible a game technique such as “progressing the production in the future”.

  Accordingly, even when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), as shown in FIG. 192 (h). In addition, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is first displayed as an effect after operation in response to the operation being performed within the effect reception period. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 192 (h). As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Otokuji” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result is displayed, and the expectation is relatively high When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 192 (j), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 192 (h) gradually disappears. In the course of the course, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi's fortune”) indicating that the effect result is relatively high in expectation is displayed. It should be noted that when the operation on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is accepted, the effect reception period generated in FIG. The function cannot be performed, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

  However, when an operation is performed on special operation means (a button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. The process for ending is not performed at the same time. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 192 (h) to 192 (j), it is indicated that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 even after the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted. The display shown (here, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. Special cases that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic performance function functions (FIG. 190 (b)), or when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 191 (e)). The production can appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 192 (j), the above-described automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 190 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191 (e)), a sparkling effect display is additionally displayed. I try to do it. An effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be additionally performed instead of the sparkling effect display.

  According to such a configuration, the content of the effect change that occurs when the operation button 410 is operated during the effect reception period related to the fortune effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, an operation is performed on special operation means (a button labeled “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period related to the fortune effect. The content of the production change that occurs in the case is made different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a sparkling effect display) appears, “the operation for the operation means is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is It can be recognized while enjoying the post-operation effect that the setting is not canceled and this is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), even when an effect image (here, “Yomi” fortune) is displayed that suggests an effect result with relatively low expectation, A production (here, a sparkling effect display) can appear.

  In addition, such special effects (here, glittering effect display) are additionally made to appear in the post-operation effects described above at a predetermined rate based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effects are displayed. When an effect appears additionally, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of a big hit symbol due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to perform operations on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 instead of the operation buttons 410, and the operation buttons 410 There is a concern that the operation will not be performed. Accordingly, when the special operation means (button labeled “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is operated within the period of accepting the effect generated in FIG. 190 (a), the special effect (here, glitteringly shines). When the effect display) does not appear, any effect result appears by performing an operation on the operation button 410 within the effect receiving period generated in FIG. 190 (a) or by the function of the automatic effect function described above. It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than in the case of the above.

  According to such a configuration, “the operation for the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (the button indicated as“ PUSH ”in the drawing)” 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued ”, there is a dramatic demerit such as“ it can be suggested that the rate of jackpot symbols appearing significantly due to symbol variation ” Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained by causing the player to exercise such a stunning selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), the above-described production demerits have occurred in spite of the appearance of the same production mode as the example shown in FIG. 191 (f). Thus, it is possible to recognize that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol variation is lower than the examples shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 191 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), while making it possible to recognize that the degree of expectation is low, the presentation mode is shown in FIG. 190 (c) and FIG. 191 (f). By making it the same as the case, the third party who is not operating the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in the production situation where the production selection has failed. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the amusement interest.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if any production selection is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), FIG. 190 (b) and FIG. e) As shown in FIG. 192 (h) or the like, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to explosion) is displayed. You may make it display in either the ratio with which the production | generation aspect (here Nakamichi's fortune) with a high expectation degree appears, or the aspect with which the special production | presentation differs.

  In addition, even if any production selection is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific production image, and production modes with different expectations. (Here, “Kiyoshi” or “Nakakichi” fortune) may appear directly as post-operation effects. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 192 (i)) in which the production selection has failed appears, the production modes with different expectations ( Here, it is desirable to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when any of “Kichi” or “Nakakichi's fortune” appears as a post-operation effect.

  In addition, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation can be performed within the effect reception period that occurred in FIG. 190 (a), and this is used to determine whether or not to take the above-described effect risk. May be.

  Further, the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when the automatic button effect state is present. Alternatively, other operating means already prepared may be used.

  In addition, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190A is a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received for an effect occurs. Or, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) regarding whether or not a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted is generated is executed. May occur as a result.

  In addition, in the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means (button labeled “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is also given. A reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) and a second presentation reception period in which an operation opportunity for special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is not given are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 166 to 186 described above) are performed more than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the rate of appearance until the symbol variation is stopped is increased. According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appear depends on which of the first effect reception period and the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested performance.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if the operation is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. The production reception period can be generated. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, and any operation means is operated within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, for which of the plurality of operation means the automatic rendering function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change as when the rendering was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means can be accepted and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. If there is a production reception period of, “whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear” or “whether a production result with a lower expectation may appear” Based on the above, the process of enabling the automatic performance function for the operation means different from "the operation means on the side that can produce the production with the possibility that the production result with lower expectation may appear" (stable side automatic production Process).

  According to such a configuration, the production mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can be generated when the production reception is made for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period, Since it will not appear when the automatic production function is activated, the occurrence of a situation such as “the production mode with the lowest expectation appears by the automatic production function when you forget to operate” This can be avoided suitably.

  Hereinafter, the stable automatic production process in the automatic button production state will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 195.

  First, a description will be given of an effect example when a special effect reception period is generated when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the normal effect state occurs. In FIG. 193 (a), in the normal performance state, the number of holds is 3 and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific performance pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the production state being performed. An effect state in which an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period starts is shown. In this production situation, although both the production reception for the operation button 410 and the production reception for the sword decorative body 5001 are not yet activated, the operation button 410 and the sword have been used since that situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the extracted position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorative body 5001 should be operated. In the effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed.

  FIG. 193 (b) shows that the player receives either a special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 193 (a) (the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001). The production situation in which the production reception period (which can be selected by the user) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect situation shown in FIG. While the state of 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained, an instruction display for prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG is displayed). Correspondingly, a downward arrow and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period are displayed.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 193 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “disturbance” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the operation means are capable of receiving the effect. Further, the dedicated mark may not be displayed when both of the operation means are capable of receiving the production. For example, although both the operation with respect to the operation button 410 and the operation with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 are permitted, “the sword decorative body 5001 is not displayed without displaying the heel image of the operation button 410 being ridden. You may make it display the habit image which hesitated, or "display the habit image which tricked the operation button 410, and not display the habit image which tricked the sword ornament 5001".

  That is, in this effect example, when an effect is received for the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as an effect after the button operation. After the display of what has been done (FIG. 193 (c)), “50 defeats” as an effect result suggesting that the smaller the number of defeated, the lower the degree of expectation, and the higher the number of defeated, the higher the degree of expectation. And an effect (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e)) for causing either of “100 body defeats” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-button-side operation effect when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and in FIG. 193 (e) at a rate of “60%”. In the post-button side operation when the winning mode is shown and the jackpot is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) appears at the rate of “60%” and the rate of “40%” Thus, it is possible to make the production mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when an effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 within a special effect reception period, first, it is displayed that the effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 as an effect after the sword side operation ( As shown in FIG. 194 (f)), the smaller the number of defeated, the lower the degree of expectation, and the larger the number of defeated, the higher the degree of expectation. An effect (FIG. 194 (g) to FIG. 194 (i)) for causing any one of “777 body defeat” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-sword-side operation effect when winning a big hit, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g) appears at a rate of “10%” and the rate of “50%” is shown in FIG. 194 (h). 194 (i) appears at the rate of “40%”, and the rate of “40%” is the post-sword side operation when the player wins the jackpot. 194 (g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 194 (h) appears at the rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 194 (i) at the rate of “0%”. It is possible for an aspect to appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the production mode with a small number of defeats regardless of whether the production after the button side operation or the production after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower degree of expectation than a production mode with a large number of defeats. In addition, when the number of defeats is the same production mode (for example, the production mode shown in FIG. 193 (e), the production mode shown in FIG. 194 (h), or the production mode shown in FIG. 195 (e) described later). Expectation may be different, but it should be the same.

  In such a configuration, a special production reception period allowing production reception is generated for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means), and the special reception period is generated. Because it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) according to the type of operation means on the side operated during the production reception period of As a result, the monotonous performance can be improved, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In particular, the same expectation is not shown when any of the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means) is operated, but the sword ornament 5001 (first Only when the second operating means) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 194 (g) which indicates that it is difficult for the jackpot symbol to appear due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state). Since it was made possible to produce a “one-game defeat” production mode), we would like to see the production on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (the production after the sword-side operation) up to such a risk. It will be expected to maintain amusement interest by giving conflicts and stimuli.

  In this case, the button-side post-operation effect is the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation” among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. In this sense, the appearance risk of “one body defeat” shown in FIG. 194 (g) is eliminated, and it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. Further, the post-sword side operation is “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here) among the production modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within a special production reception period. Then, it will function as a post-operation effect relatively including disturbances in the sense that it has the appearance risk of “an effect mode of“ one body defeat ”” shown in FIG. 194 (g).

  Furthermore, in this production example, during the period from when the production situation shown in FIG. 193 (a) appears until the production situation shown in FIG. 193 (b) appears (in this special production reception period), The production mode shown in FIG. 193 (a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination. When the production mode appears, the production mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is performed, the ratio of occurrence of “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, a production mode of“ 1 body destruction ”shown in FIG. 194 (g)”) is low. The production progress can be executed in this way. This percentage may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, until the risk that the “specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (in this case, the production mode of“ 1 body destruction ”shown in FIG. 194 (g)”) may appear, Since it becomes possible to use an effect result indicating whether or not the effect mode shown in FIGS. 193 (a-b) has appeared as a material for determining whether to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. It will be expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b) occurs.

  In the normal performance state, when the special performance reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b) occurs but no special reception is made within the special performance reception period, the automatic production described above is performed. The function does not function, and the effect progresses without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 195 (a) to 195 (e) show examples of effects when such a special effect reception period occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (a), FIG. 195 (a-b), and FIG. 195 (b), even if it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. An effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started appears, except that a display indicating this (in this case, “auto button is being set”) appears continuously in the effect display device 1600. Until the end of the special production reception period until the end of the special production reception period (FIGS. 193 (a), 193 (ab), 193 (b)) Progress.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 195 (b), “the effect result with lower expectation (here, the figure) The automatic effect function is enabled for the operation button 410 different from the sword ornament 5001 on the side capable of generating the effect that the “one-body defeat” effect mode) shown in 194 (g) may appear. The process to be performed (stable side automatic production process) can be executed.

  That is, in this case, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 195 (b). Thus, the same change as that in the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the special effect reception period is caused to the effect. Accordingly, as the post-button side operation, first, after it is displayed that the operation has been accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 195 (c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect result that indicates that the degree of expectation is higher, an effect that causes either “50 defeats” or “100 defeats” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 195 (d) and 195 (e)) ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among a plurality of effects that can occur when an effect is received for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within a special effect reception period. The production mode (in this case, the production mode of “one body defeat” shown in FIG. 194 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function functions. Thus, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as “the rendering mode having the lowest expectation appears by the automatic rendering function”.

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic performance function, there is a concern that the player may not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to maintain the automatic button performance state. However, as described above, during the special production reception period, the production mode shown in FIGS. 195 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the production mode appears. , The sword-side post-operation effect while the ratio of occurrence of “the specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, the“ 1 body defeat ”effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g)”) is low. Since an opportunity to enjoy the game is given, it is expected that the sword decorative body 5001 is preferably urged to be operated.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, a special period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted and an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is simultaneously generated and simultaneously ended. Although control is performed as the production reception period, it is not always necessary to simultaneously generate these periods. For example, if the period during which the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for production and the period during which the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted for production are overlapped in those partial periods, the periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern is selected from among the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects depend on which operation means is operated. The above-mentioned special production reception period may be generated without fail. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation is started with a specific production pattern, “Which of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special production reception period, and further, a special production reception period will occur. You should be able to come up with a stunning strategy based on the premise that a special production reception period will occur, such as `` Do you need to set the automatic button production state before you do? '' . For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice effect was performed in what kind of effect (expected degree)" before the special effect acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a judgment material for “which of a plurality of operation means should be operated within a special production reception period”, and the game until the special production reception period occurs This also makes it possible to maintain this favorably.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within a special effect reception period, or when an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, an automatic effect function is further provided. Which direction of appearance will appear when the function is activated is determined by a lottery (determination) based on the result of the big hit determination at the start of symbol variation or when the reception of an effect occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, even if there is a production situation where a special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001. When there is an effect state in which an effect display (FIG. 193 (a), FIG. 195 (a)) suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started, setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to occur. According to such a configuration, “indicating that a special performance reception period is started in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001. Even if you try to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue to play games while maintaining the automatic button effect state It is now possible to provide “stable-side automatic performance processing when in an automatic button performance state” only for those who are presenting, and directing the game continuously while maintaining the automatic button performance state Will be able to provide value.

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 194 (g)” that can appear when the post-sword side operation is performed is displayed on the button side operation. Although it was decided to execute as a unique production mode different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production is performed, for the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation”, the post-button-side operation production is It may be executed in the same manner as the performance mode that can appear when it is performed (for example, “50 body defeat” shown in FIG. 193 (d)). Even if “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation” appears as a result of the action, the same mode as the production mode that can appear when the post-button operation is performed appears for the purpose of viewing. Operation buttons It becomes difficult for a third party who does not know which of 410 and sword decorative body 5001 is operated to recognize that the expectation level is extremely low. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect state such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” appears. Despite this, depending on whether the production status is caused by an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword ornament 5001, the design variation (the design variation in the execution state) ), The degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear will be different, so it will be even more interesting as an effect using multiple operating means. It becomes possible to.

  However, this is the case where the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-sword operation effect is executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear even when the post-button operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the “highest expectation special effect mode” in the post-sword operation, a unique effect mode (for example, different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post-button operation is performed) (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 194 (i)) It is desirable to execute this as such. Appears, it is difficult to recognize that the third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated is in a production situation where the degree of expectation is extremely low. However, when the “special performance mode with the highest expectation” appears in the post-sword operation, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 has been operated. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that there is a production situation where the degree of expectation is extremely high, so the player can take the above risks without worrying about the eyes of a third party. It will be possible to enjoy the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side effect (post-sword side operation effect), with regard to the “special effect mode with the highest expectation” by a third party. Anything can be used as long as it is recognizable. For example, uniqueness among other effects may be ensured by executing a movable body operation or lamp light emission.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, as a result of the post-sword side operation (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)), the “777 body defeat” production mode (FIG. 194 ( i)) can appear, and when the “777 body defeat” effect mode (FIG. 194 (i)) appears, any other effect mode (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e)) 194 (g) and FIG. 194 (h)), the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing in the symbol variation (design variation in the execution state) is higher. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary for the “777 body defeat” effect mode (FIG. 194 (i)) to appear. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. The appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 194 (h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) by the amount that the expectation level of the production mode shown in (g) is lowered. It becomes.

  In addition, in the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the effects after the button side operation (FIGS. 193 (c) to 193 (e)) and the effects after the sword side operation (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)). ) So that a common production mode (here, a “100 body defeat” production mode) can appear, but no common production mode appears. Also good. In addition, only the display change appears in the post-button-side operation, whereas in the post-sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, a movable body operation, lamp light emission, and the like may be executed. Further, the post-button-side operation and the sword-side post-operation may not be common as the content of the effect regarding the number of defeats, and the content itself may be executed as different effects.

  Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, when the production reception is received, including when the production is accepted by the function of the automatic production function, first, for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. The display (FIG. 193 (c), FIG. 194 (f), FIG. 195 (c)) that suggests whether or not the production has been accepted is assumed to appear here, but the expectation is suggested without causing the display to appear. An effect that causes the effect result to appear may be executed.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, as a result of the post-sword side operation (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)), the “777 body defeat” production mode (FIG. 194 ( When i)) appears, it is related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e), FIG. 194 (g), FIG. 194 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appear before the symbol variation is stopped, and further, when the specific operation-related effects appear, the operation means on the side with higher expectation (sword ornament) It is desirable to increase the rate at which an operation opportunity is given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, it is possible to preferably prompt the user to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the effect risk is high.

[Restoration processing for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a state where the specific state has not occurred) When the restoration operation time to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of the production, there is a concern that the game will be less fun.

For example, it is assumed that the “symbol fluctuation start time” described above is set as the “restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation”. Now, as shown in FIG. 196, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a at least performs the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol variation is started, an effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is subjected to the symbol variation. In particular, based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the processing to advance the effect / design variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation) To perform a predetermined restoration operation on a movable decorative object

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, it is assumed that “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the progress of the production concerning the “specific production pattern in which the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the design variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation in which the processing to be performed is performed in parallel will appear.

  Generally, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific performance pattern can be executed, the performance pattern (relatively expected) that is pairwise with the specific performance pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. And in the production pattern which is a paired relationship (production pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation (relatively high effect pattern)” is performed. The In this way, by providing two effect patterns (effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are paired in terms of effects, a specific timing tm2 is provided. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body is operated). Can be executed, and the game entertainment is suitably maintained by such performance.

  However, if the process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 comes after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing It becomes apparent that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it is not possible to perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 196, the progress of the effect relating to the “specific effect pattern in which the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2” among the effect patterns, and the predetermined movable decorative body with respect to the predetermined movable decorative object. When a situation in which a process for performing a restoration operation (a restoration process based on a restoration operation time corresponding to a design variation) is performed in parallel, a specific time tm2 is reached until a specific timing tm2 is reached regardless of the restoration situation. The process for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is ended. In addition, as "a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body", various methods can be adopted, but in the following description, "whether the abnormal state is resolved, A description will be given on the assumption that “a process in which a restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached” is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time required to be different will be different. For example, if the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) just by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, “predetermined restoration for a specific movable decorative body is performed. The timing tx at which the “process for performing the operation” is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored). As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is shifted to a later timing. At the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but if the restoration operation is executed once again, the timing tx will be exceeded, the specific movable decorative body will be recovered. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed before the specific timing tm is reached regardless of the restoration situation. It becomes like this.

  In addition, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is performed once, x time is required, so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is satisfied. The upper limit number n for repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended. By doing so, the processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation may be terminated before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. If a situation occurs, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable ornament is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable ornament is not restored, the specific movable ornament is not restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it is possible to favorably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, it may cause some behavior when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (if the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body), it is possible to give hope. .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined performance is being performed, there is a directing effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined production may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In addition, as the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as `` nothing '', it is possible to exemplify a `` display effect that appears in advance in a manner that inquires whether or not a specific display result appears '', and a specific movable decorative body is `` When it is provided as “acting based on the fact that an effect has been received by an operation by the player (or having been accepted but not acted)”, an “effect that causes a specific display that prompts the player to make an operation” appears Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, at a timing tx at which “a process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body returns (restores) from the abnormal state. It is assumed that the normal state has been achieved. In this way, even when there is an abnormal state at the start of the fluctuation (or the “restoration operation timing” such as when the previous symbol is stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation has arrived after the restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stop state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with movable decorative bodies that perform a multi-stage movement with a more complicated structure. In such a movable decorative body, it is longer until the restoration process is completed. Often time-consuming. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or in an effect pattern that is paired with this, when the effect pattern is started Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive after the pattern change is started (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It can also be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is started. When the special production pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, the specific production pattern can be moved while the special production pattern is produced (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special production pattern is performed). Control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of timing tm11 at which the design variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the production progress related to the special production pattern When a situation occurs in which a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation appears in parallel, at least a special effect pattern is being performed (period until the symbol is stopped) Does not end the restoration process, but continues it.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. Even if it is a case, the said restoration process will not be complete | finished at least while the special production pattern is performed, but the restoration process with respect to a specific movable decoration body will be performed over the whole period.

  According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed, a restoration process in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis after restoration is performed). This special function pattern will function as a reconstructed / diagnostic effect pattern, and as such, it will be carefully restored as a player. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special performance pattern that can be selected only when the winning combination is lost. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents in the effect display device 1600 appear a unique display mode such as “the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and (d), the timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, a restriction such as “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body” is eliminated. For this reason, it is possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 at which the special performance pattern is finished, if there is a case where the performance pattern according to the new symbol variation is performed without interruption, the next restoration operation time (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) will arrive. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not in the original position). Will be. If a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within a time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately deal with abnormalities can also accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 197A (b) and (d), the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated, and this is continued in a form that crosses the next restoration operation time. . According to such a configuration, even if there is any hold during the execution of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, “even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, Since the restriction of “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated, the restoration process can be performed in a more serious manner.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 197A (c) and (d), as a result of starting a new symbol variation when the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is being executed, the new symbol variation is started. As a case, a “specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) to (c), the game starts from the timing tm11 regardless of the state of the game and the effect after the special effect pattern is ended (and the situation of the restoration, etc.). As for the timing tx at which the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined performance is performed. Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digestion of the special performance pattern), the specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It becomes possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

  If a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is continuously executed after the special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is terminated, Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle three or more symbol variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in a form in which the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197A, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from an abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the situation has been reached. As described above, since one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol fluctuation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made returnable, and a specific movable decorative body can be effected at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, a specific movable decorative object is abnormal at timing tx even though one restoration process is continued in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time). When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained from the timing tx until the symbol variation is finished and the next restoration operation time comes further. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, each time the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) arrives, If the restoration process for the movable decorative body is started several times, if the specific movable decorative body has failed to the extent that it cannot be restored, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored. There is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced by the repeated restoration process on the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) has reached the predetermined upper limit number. In spite of this, when the abnormal state has not been restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable ornament even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, only a special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next effect pattern. In other words, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has not been restored from the abnormal state although the predetermined upper limit number has been reached. Even when the +1 ”-th restoration operation time comes, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is continued without being finished. As described above, with respect to an aspect in which one restoration process is continued in a manner across the restoration operation timing, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation timing comes while the one restoration processing is continued. It is desirable that the count for is handled as a restoration process for one time so that the restoration process is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

  By the way, with respect to such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the backside decoration unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the medium movable effect unit 3200 and the specific decorative member SDY (eg, a decorative object), the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner as described above. The However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 that are operatively provided) are used. In some cases, restoration (return) may be performed in a manner different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol variation is performed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177) is prepared. Also, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position with a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 177 (f))”, “Process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))”, “character display such as an operation prompt (“ press ””), and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) (See FIG. 177 (f)) ”. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, a push-in operation) and an effect is received, the “special decorative member SDY (a decorative object) ”) And the like (see FIG. 177 (g))” and “processing to change the display contents (see FIG. 177 (g))”. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is rendered in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 196 and 197A.

  However, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “the process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” is not executed when the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. The “sword decoration body 5001 is in a normal state with respect to“ a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 ”and“ a process for performing a display for prompting an operation ”. It can be executed either at a certain time or in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player views the “display for prompting operation” and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated, “Processing for effecting a board-side movable decorative body such as a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” and “processing for causing a change in display contents on the effect display device 1600” are performed. In addition, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state in the production pattern of the movable operation system, the abnormal state is caused by the operation of the operation site by receiving the external force of the sword decorative body 5001 by such an operation by the player. It may occur when the problem is resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 that is operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means. In the state described with reference to FIG. 196 and FIG. 197A, in the case of an abnormal state, the frame side movable decorative body (operation means) is applied with a driving force for returning to the original position. Restoration processing) at each timing of “the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of symbol variation)” and “after the production is accepted by the player's operation within the production pattern of the movable operation system” It can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body is aimed at the timing such as when the symbol variation starts or stops (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing such as the start or stop of the symbol variation, but also a different independent timing (during the variation period) Among them, aiming at the frame side movable decorative body (operation), the external force (operation by the player) is applied and the abnormal state may be resolved) Since the process of restoring (returning) means) is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. .

  FIG. 198 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword ornament 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable ornament (operating means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 198, an effect pattern of a movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during a period in which symbol variation is performed) is executed. At timing tm21, it is assumed that “a process for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed. When the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, “characteristic display such as“ processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 ””, “display for prompting operation (“ push ””), and an effect reception period If the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 and receives an effect (timing tm22) while the display of the remaining time is being executed), the “specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) etc. “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body” and “processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 198, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 196 and FIG. 197A is operated as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 at the timing tm22 when the presentation is accepted in this way, and the sword decoration 5001 cannot be returned to the original position, and the specific movable decoration that has been staged based on the presentation acceptance. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and this cannot be restored to the original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are made, respectively, but an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. Regarding the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications is performed. This means that the sword decorative body 5001 is “placed by the player's hand (the door frame 3)”, and if the sword decorative body 5001 is informed of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state is performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is "placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply highlighting the fact that the movable performance is not executed may promote a decline in the gaming interest. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process for performing the specific movable decorative body” based on the reception of the presentation at timing tm22. However, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing this process as usual with respect to the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600”. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, when the timing tm23 is reached, the symbol variation that has already been put on hold is immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 196 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time). The timing tx at which “the process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” started at) is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status) As described above, the process ends until the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the restoration operation timing (here, when the symbol variation starts) has arrived for the sword ornament 5001 as well. It is possible to execute a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the body and an operation (applying a driving force) so that at least a part of the operation is returned to the original position in parallel. In addition, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it is started).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated, and the moving effect is produced by the specific movable decorative body at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rush when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started / finished is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started / terminated. However, only one of these timings may be the same, or any of these timings may be different.

  As for “a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, as described with reference to FIG. 197A, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue after the end of the special effect pattern, the symbol variation that is in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately consumed (for example, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) is not finished but can be executed in such a way that it can be continued. It is desirable that “the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 197A). In other words, in this case, regarding the “process for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it will be ended regardless of the restoration situation between the time when the next symbol variation is started and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  Also, after the sword decorative body 5001 is made in an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed appears, it straddles a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern. One restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are finished at timing tx, respectively, but the restoration fails. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the moving effect by the specific movable ornament is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed with the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state. Thus, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (a driving force by a motor or the like is not applied) within a period of timing tx to tm2 within a specific performance pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position by (it is made to be in a normal state), the rendering operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that this is an abnormal situation in which an external force (not applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2. Even if there is a performance operation with a specific movable ornament in such a low reliability situation, it is highly possible that this will fail. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the state again becomes abnormal, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated therewith be performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the notification is made whenever an abnormal state occurs again, a misunderstanding as if the player is responsible for the abnormal state not being resolved is given. Therefore, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by a restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body has returned from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again. As shown in FIG. 198, the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is displayed. If an effect is received by an operation by the player, it is possible to expect a possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is thereafter used as the original. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the position (remain in the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that a movable effect by a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the reception of the performance, a period (one time) in which a process of applying a driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed. Is generated after the start of the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position). It is desirable that the process be terminated before the return process is performed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being performed. However, in view of the few chances that the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 that could not be recovered by such external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the state (returning operation with respect to the sword decorative body 5001) has failed, the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the original for a period after the end of the movable performance by the specific movable decorative body. By making it easier for the player to recognize the abnormal situation by continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return it to the position (returning the sword decoration body 5001 is performed again), It is desirable to encourage help. However, even when this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification accompanying this be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful. The sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 198, the frame side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) used also as the operation means is set with respect to the panel side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after reception of the effect) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operation means is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities for position return and various modes (a mode for returning only by applying driving force, a mode for returning using at least external force) are used as the return method, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility of playing is increased and the decline in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted by the player's operation, the symbol variation start is started. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with different contents (different operation modes) from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. In other words, since the sword decorative body 5001 is restored using external force (operation by the player) for the process, it is possible to perform the process with a different content from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is executed in a simple manner such that the return process is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, it is more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable to perform a proper return process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. However, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and it is movable when the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is not newly started even when a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword ornament 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to remain at the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the presentation is accepted is performed when the return possibility of the sword decorative body 5001 that could not be recovered by external force (operation by the player) is increasing. It can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even if the situation described above is given up that the return without external force is given up. Therefore, “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))” and “display for prompting operation (“ push ””) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period It is important that the processing (see Fig. 177 (f)) "is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.

  Further, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in the state where the sword decorative body 5001 is located (operated to a specific detection position), and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position (to the specific detection position) If the operation means is provided so that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given to be operated), even if the production reception is generated at the second operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state A driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect is received at the first operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state without applying a driving force for returning to the original position. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the presentation is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the operation amount of the operation part is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

  In addition, after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted as an effect by the player's operation, the process of providing the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily accepted as an effect. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been done. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

  The restoration operation timing may be a predetermined timing that arrives at least on the condition that the symbol variation is executed. For example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. . When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The restored processing is terminated until the timing tm2 in the specific production pattern that has been reserved is reached, or is executed so as to be straddled until after the end of the special production pattern that has been reserved. Each process described above is performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may vary depending on the game state. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable that the game can be made so that the frequency of appearance of a special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the game.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is sometimes performed, as shown in FIG. 197A, the abnormal state is observed over a period until the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation. It is possible to continue to execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed again. It is not started, and one restoration process that is already in the running state is continued without being terminated. Therefore, the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is movable. It becomes a problem at which timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 197A, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends, after the new restoration operation timing (next This is continuously executed without ending even when straddling the symbol variation start time). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body after the timing tm11 has elapsed and before a new restoration operation time (the next symbol variation start time) has arrived. In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both method 1 and method 2”, or “both method 1 and method 3” is employed to restore the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to perform.

  Method 1: If at least “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body” When a new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) ) Has arrived, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as an effective one, and triggered by this timing (new restoration operation timing) The restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, there will be a situation in which a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are performed simultaneously. There is no concern of interference between these movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the next symbol change start time) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, After waiting for the completion of one restoration process for the movable decorative body, another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative element) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the next symbol change start time). Body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective. In this regard, since the restoration process for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) is started, it waits for one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body to be completed. There is no concern that interference may occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 3: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation). The restoration process is not executed, but after waiting for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body, another movable decorative body (panel-side movable The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is the same as the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state and another movable ornament that is not yet in the execution state. As long as one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is not completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, it will be treated as invalid. No processing for the abnormal state is executed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body becomes abnormal when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected to suppress the rate of progress of deterioration as these movable decorative bodies.

  Next, referring to FIG. 197B and FIG. 197C for aspects (such as method 1 to method 3 above) when a new restoration operation timing (such as the start timing and end timing of symbol variation) arrives during the restoration operation. It explains in detail.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the convenience of explanation, as a movable decorative body capable of performing an effect, a first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned “specific movable decorative body”), a second movable decorative body, 3 movable decorative bodies, a fourth movable decorative body, and a fifth movable decorative body. When only one of the movable decorative bodies is not in the normal state, the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state are “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third In any of the “movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decorative body that is not in the normal state has a restoration operation timing (design) corresponding to the symbol variation. The restoration operation (restoration process) is started when the fluctuation start timing, end timing, etc. arrive.

  However, if there are multiple movable ornaments that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation arrives, all of the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state are restored all at once with the restoration operation time as a trigger. If (restoration processing) is started, there is a concern that it will not be possible to concentrate on the production according to the symbol variation and will be awakening.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived, some of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state Only when the restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration operation can be started, thereby avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in a normal state start the restoration operation all at once. The restoration operation in a manner according to the situation is realized.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 197B, the timing tm32 at which the symbol variation (first time) ends (loses stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts (restoration corresponding to symbol variation) has arrived. When the operation time has come), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. Suppose that The “abnormality” here means that the “abnormality” is detected by the detection means, but the “abnormality” is not necessarily detected. It may simply mean that “abnormality” is occurring (undetected state).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the fourth movable decorative body are started so that the respective restoring operations are performed in parallel. For the movable decorative body of, the restoration operation is not started and a standby state remains in an abnormal state. As a result, it is avoided that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation at the same time, and the restoration operation in a manner according to the situation is realized.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the third movable decorative body that is left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) is awaited. First, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to return all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state in a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoring operation all at once. become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth movable decorative body that has been left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32 is the time when the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) has arrived. However, the restoration operation is not started, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. Thereby, it is suitably avoided that the plurality of movable decorative bodies perform the restoring operation in parallel in a combination that inhibits concentration on the performance.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the second movable decorative body is finished before the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is finished. When the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, the “third movable decorative body” and the “fifth movable decorative body” do not start the restoration operation. In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is completed after the timing tm34 when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is completed. Until the restoration process for the body is completed, the third movable decorative body does not start the restoration operation and does not maintain the standby state. When the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is finished, The movable decorative body "does not start the restoration operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament) The restoration processing (restoration operation) is started after the restoration processing (restoration operation) of the movable movable body 1 is completed.

  In addition, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 comes unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of (restoration operation).

  As described above, the restoration process is not performed in parallel with respect to the movable decoration body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that interferes with the concentration in the production) among the plurality of movable decoration bodies, so that it is possible to respond to the design variation. Restoration processing can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment where the user can concentrate on the performance.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the “first movable decorative body” is in spite of the fact that the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state earlier than the “third movable decorative body”. When the restoration process for “3” ends, the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started first. In this way, by not performing restoration processing in the order of the abnormal state, it becomes possible to preferentially return to normal from a movable decoration body with high production importance, and it is suitable for amusement entertainment It is expected to be maintained.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, in a situation in which the third movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (loses stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that timing tm35 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) starts is reached. Such a restoring operation time functions to newly start the restoring operation on the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is continuously performed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing (timing tm35). ing. As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decorative body, “movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time)”. The probability that the third movable decorative body can be “returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the operation starts is increased. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the pattern change, the movable decorative body has returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. By doing so, it is possible to perform a staging operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the third movable decorative body has a timing tm32 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loses stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at timing tm31 before the restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) arrives. Then, as a result of the arrival of timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started with a delay (timing tm34) from the timing tm32.

  However, with respect to the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) and within the period during which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if a normal state is maintained until “timing tm33”, which is the timing of the above, and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, the restoration process (restoring operation) of the first movable decorative body is performed as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which) is terminated. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state where the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived since the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at timing tm33, but the other movable decorative body (first The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 arrived before the timing tm33) triggered by the restoration process (restoration operation) for one movable decorative body). Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. Details of the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at timing tm32” will be described later.

  At this time, when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable that the restoration process is continuously executed so as to straddle the timing tm35. Further, at the timing tm35, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, and the restoration process for the first movable decorative body executed so as to straddle the timing tm35 is completed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body.

  In this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrives, but becomes abnormal when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that has not been made can be started before the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decoration with high production importance is provided. It will be able to return to normal with priority from the body. The “fifth movable ornament” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable ornament” that was in a normal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrives. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 is started. “Restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at timing tm32” refers to a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of timing tm32. And a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body and a restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, and a mode in which each of these restoring processes is executed sequentially It means that For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, The restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for “5 movable ornaments” is started. If the “third movable decorative body” is not in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is not performed. It is determined whether the “movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable decorative body” is in the normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the “restoration processing for the first movable decorative body” started with the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) as “design variation (1 Is not completed yet and is still in progress. And when the timing tm42 arrives, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body” Is assumed to be in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is not performed again from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, and the timing tm42 ( It is continuously executed so as to cross the restoration operation time). Accordingly, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than the case where the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed again based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, when the symbol variation (second time) is to execute a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, “movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the symbol variation (second time)”. The probability that the first movable decorative body can be “returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the operation starts is increased. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the pattern change, the movable decorative body has returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. By doing so, it is possible to perform a staging operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, for the fourth movable decorative body, the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution and each restoration operation are started in parallel, but the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, For the movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body, the restoration operation is not started, and the mobile phone stands by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is avoided that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation at the same time, and the restoration operation in a manner according to the situation is realized.

  In particular, for the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 197B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state of “not in a normal state and not performing a restoration process (restoration operation)”, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) when the first movable decorative body is in a state of “not in a normal state and executing restoration processing (restoration operation)”. When the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started.

  In other words, the situation in which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoring operation) across the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is that the first movable decorative body returns to normal (return to the original position). Therefore, it can be said that the player side is in the state of being focused on the “first movable decorative body” in such a state. And if many movable decorative bodies start a restoration process (restoration operation) anew in such a situation, the player can't concentrate on the production according to the symbol variation, and is aroused. There are concerns.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fourth movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 197B) that can execute the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body. In the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution. On the other hand, for the second movable decorative body, in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the first movable decorative body is not started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution. The standby state is maintained until the restoration process for the decorative body is completed. Then, after the restoration process for the first movable decorative body has been completed, the restoration operation timing (timing tm45 in FIG. 197C) is awaited and the timing tm45 is reached based on the arrival of the timing tm45. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started. As a result, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal, it is suppressed that many movable decorative bodies newly start the restoration process (restoration operation). Will be resolved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the third movable decorative body that is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is the same as the example shown in FIG. 197B. Without waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to return all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state in a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoring operation all at once. become.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the fifth movable decorative body that is left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is the same as the example shown in FIG. 197B. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm45) has arrived, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm46 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. Like that. Thereby, it is preferably avoided that the plurality of movable decorative bodies perform the restoring operation in parallel in a manner that inhibits concentration on the performance.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is finished before the timing tm44 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is finished. When the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body” do not start the restoring operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 comes unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) The restoration processing (restoration operation) is started after the restoration processing (restoration operation) of the movable movable body 1 is completed.

  In addition, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 comes unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of (restoration operation).

  As described above, the restoration process is not performed in parallel with respect to the movable decoration body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that interferes with the concentration in the production) among the plurality of movable decoration bodies, so that it is possible to respond to the design variation. Restoration processing can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment where the user can concentrate on the performance.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, in a situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (loses stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that timing tm45 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) starts is reached. Such a restoring operation time functions to newly start the restoring operation on the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is continuously performed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing (timing tm45). ing. As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decorative body, “movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time)”. The probability that the third movable decorative body can be “returned to the normal state” before the timing at which the operation starts is increased. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the pattern change, the movable decorative body has returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. By doing so, it is possible to perform a staging operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the third movable decorative body has a timing tm42 ( A case is assumed in which an abnormality occurs at timing tm41 before the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation). Then, as a result of the arrival of timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is started with a delay (timing tm44) from the timing tm42.

  However, for the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) and within the period during which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even when a normal state is maintained until “timing tm43”, which is the timing of the above, and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm43, the restoration process (restoring operation) of the first movable decorative body is performed as in the example shown in FIG. 197C. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which) is finished. In other words, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state where the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after becoming an abnormal state at timing tm43, but other movable decorative bodies (first The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrived before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for one movable decorative body). Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. Details regarding the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42” are as described in the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32”.

  In this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrives, but becomes abnormal when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that has not been made can be started before the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration with high production importance is provided. It will be able to return to normal with priority from the body. The “fifth movable ornament” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable ornament” that was in a normal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) has arrived. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 is started. “Restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at timing tm42” is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of timing tm42. And a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body and a restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, and a mode in which each of these restoring processes is executed sequentially. It means that For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, The restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for “5 movable ornaments” is started. If the “third movable decorative body” is not in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is not performed. It is determined whether the “movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable decorative body” is in a normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. It becomes.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) has arrived, the movable decorative body (first state) that is not in a normal state (is not in a movable state but is not in its original position). Among the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation time (design fluctuation ( For the movable decorative body (first movable decorative body) that is executing the restoration operation with the start timing of the first time) as a trigger, the restoration operation time is ignored and the execution is continued without redoing the restoration operation. However, for the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that has not been restored, the restoring operation (timing tm42) is not ignored and the restoring operation can be started as a trigger. That is, in this case, a plurality of movable decorative bodies in an abnormal state may be ignored or not ignored as a function of restoration operation, depending on the situation where each is placed. As a result, restoration processing suitable for the situation can be realized.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 197C, the “first movable decorative body” performs the restoring operation when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation (the timing of starting the symbol fluctuation (first time)) has arrived. When the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation (start timing of the symbol variation (second time) arrives again during the execution, the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration operation comes again. This restoration operation timing (design variation (second time) start timing) can be continuously executed without redoing the restoration operation. That is, in this case, it takes time to return to normal, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while performing the restoration operation, it will be ignored, so it is in the middle of execution The restoration operation can be continued without interruption, thereby prompting the early return of the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed on the first movable decorative body over a plurality of variations, another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) is used. When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decorative body does not start the return operation when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived, and the third movable decorative body is in the middle of execution. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is not redone when the restoration operation time comes (timing tm42), and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body is restored. When the time (timing tm42) is not started, the restoration process (restore operation for the first movable decorative body (restoration operation)) that has been continuously executed is completed immediately after the completion of the restoration process (restore operation for the third movable decorative body ( (Restoration operation) is started, so that the restoration process is not performed in parallel for a movable combination of a specific combination (for example, a combination that disturbs concentration in the production) among the plurality of movable decorations. However, the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be returned to normal relatively early.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal at the timing tm43, the restoration operation timing has not yet arrived after the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 (the end timing of the “restoration process (restoration operation for the first movable decorative body) executed so as to cross the restoration operation time)”. ing. In other words, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state where the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after becoming an abnormal state at timing tm43, but other movable decorative bodies (first The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrived before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for one movable decorative body). Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable ornament body can be moved within the symbol variation in which the movable ornament body has returned to normal. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, the movable effect can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to normal. In such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decorative body can be returned to normal early by the time the movable effect is started.

  In addition, during the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes multiple times, all of them are ignored and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body is performed. It is desirable to continue.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relationship of paralleling the restoration process (restoration operation) as shown in FIG. 197B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 197C, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration operation, the second movable operation is performed at the timing tm42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the decorative object was not started, and the restoration operations were not performed in parallel. As a result, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal, it is possible to prevent many movable decorative bodies from newly starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

  When a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decorative body ends and returns to normal, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration body is performed at the timing tm45. I'm trying to get started. According to such a configuration, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started immediately after the situation where the first movable decorative body is troublesome for normal recovery is resolved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45), it is possible to concentrate on the production. The environment can be suitably adjusted.

  At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is terminated due to a failure, a new restoration operation time ( When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it becomes impossible to provide a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, only the second movable decorative body can be returned to normal and a movable effect using the second movable decorative body can be provided. It is desirable to make it executable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197 (C), after the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends and returns to normal, until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives. When the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again, when the new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are restored. It is desirable to start processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

  In the above-described example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is ended due to failure (not returning to the original position), the first movable decorative body is not processed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Further, even when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is terminated due to failure (not returning to the original position), the restoration process (restoration) for the third movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the operation.

  In the above-described example, when the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state at the time (timing tm34, tm44) when the restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed, the first movable decorative body. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decorative body is newly in an abnormal state within the execution period of the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” started in this manner, the fifth movable decorative body is subjected to When the restoration process (restoration operation) is completed, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not performed on the third movable decorative body, and a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived. In addition, it is desirable to perform a restoration process (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body has not yet been completed when the new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived, the restoration operation time has arrived. When the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” is not started, and the restoration operation time comes after the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the fifth movable ornament body” ends. It is desirable to start “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) has arrived, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) in response to the restoration operation time corresponding to the first time, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. However, the fourth moving decorative body that has not been subjected to the restoration process (restoration operation) does not ignore the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), and the restoration operation is triggered by this. I'm trying to get started. In this regard, even in the fourth movable decorative body that has started the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), a new one can be obtained during the restoration process (restoration operation). When the restoration operation timing (timing tm43) has arrived, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation timing (timing tm43) and continue the restoration operation so as to straddle the restoration operation timing.

  When there is a movable decorative object that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoring operation) and a movable decorative object that is waiting for the execution of the restoration process (restoring operation), there is an effect display related to symbol variation. Even if a specific abnormal state (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormality due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs that is not visible, while the above notification according to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state is being executed, The restoration process (restoration operation) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed without being canceled, and the restoration process is also performed for the movable decorative object that is waiting to be restored (restoration operation). It is desirable to newly start (restoration operation).

  When there are movable ornaments that are in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation) or movable ornaments that are in the waiting state for restoration processing (restoration operation), those movable ornaments are used within the design variation. When the execution timing of the moving effect that has been received has arrived, the driving force for performing the effect is given to the movable decorative body, even if the driving force for the restoration process (restoration operation) is given. In order to realize early return to the normal state, it is desirable that there is no display (no production operation). However, although the driving force for performing the effect is not given to those movable decorative bodies, the light emission provided in each movable decorative body so that the light emission mode corresponding to the movable effects appears. It is desirable to make the part emit light as usual. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect (light emission effect) constituting the movable effect is appropriately executed. , Including “0” and “100”), a different light emission mode also appears in the “movable decorative body that is not in a normal state”, so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, for a movable decorative body that has been restored due to a failure in the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration process (restoration operation) will not be performed even if the restoration operation time comes again, so at least power-on is continued. As long as it is, it can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated in a movable effect. However, even in the case of a movable decorative body in such a state, when the timing for executing a movable effect using the movable decorative body has arrived, the movable effect itself is not executed, and the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect to be performed (light emission effect) is appropriately executed. In other words, in this case, the light emitting mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including “0” and “100”) is “the movable decorative body in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended due to failure. ”And the game entertainment interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, movable decorations that are in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation), movable decorations that are waiting to execute restoration processing (restoration operation), and state where restoration processing (restoration operation) has ended due to failure The movable decorative body may be configured so that the light emitting unit can emit light as usual even when other effects are executed.

  The restoration operation time may include not only the arrival time corresponding to the symbol variation but also the arrival time due to a different condition. And when starting restoration processing (restoration operation) at a specific time that arrives under conditions different from symbol variation, while performing specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration processing (restoration operation), When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started (executed) in a non-notification state without performing specific notification (movable body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) has arrived, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) in response to the restoration operation time corresponding to the first time, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. However, the fourth moving decorative body that has not been subjected to the restoration process (restoration operation) does not ignore the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), and the restoration operation is triggered by this. I'm trying to get started. Even when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to the normal state, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not ignored. The “fourth movable ornament” that will be started is used for important effects such as when the winning result is derived by symbol variation, or when the big hit game starts or runs. It is desirable to be.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, for the third movable decorative body, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” succeeds in normal recovery (reference position detection) and fails (reference position). The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” regardless of whether it is completed (completed) or not. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, based on the fact that the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” ends with a failure to return to normal, and the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament body” ends. When the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" is completed successfully after normal recovery, the third movable decorative body is abnormal again within the symbol variation that has succeeded in normal recovery. When the state becomes the state, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation has arrived, the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body (restoration operation)” is not performed and the “restoration process for the third movable decorative body ( It is desirable to perform “restoration operation”.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol fluctuation has arrived, the “fifth movable movable” started on the basis of the completion of the “restoration process (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body”. When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the decorative body is in the execution state, “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament body” and “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament body” None of the above is performed, and the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body” is triggered by the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation” that comes after the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” ends. It is desirable to perform “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” without performing “(restoration operation)”.

  It should be noted that after the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” has been successfully completed to the normal state, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body” is being executed. Even if an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable not to start the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” at the restoration operation timing. That is, in this case, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is performed at the restoration operation time that comes after the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament body” is completed successfully or failed to return to normal. Will be started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) has arrived, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) in response to the restoration operation time corresponding to the first time, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. Ignore and continue to run this. For the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is ignored, and the completion of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is completed. Based on this, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started. In this regard, when the first movable decorative body is again in an abnormal state while the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” thus started is being executed, the “third movable decorative body is displayed. When the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the body" is completed, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is not started based on the completion, but the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation is It is desirable to start the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” based on a new arrival.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has newly arrived, the “restoration processing for the third movable decorative body (restoration operation)” has not been completed, and the situation in the middle of execution (crossing the restoration operation time) It is desirable to ignore the restoration operation timing and wait for the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” to end. Then, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is started at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation that has arrived after the completion of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament body”. It is desirable to make it.

  In other words, in this case, the “first movable decorative body” and the “third movable decorative body” are both restored so that the “first movable decorative body” is restored to the normal state when both are in an abnormal state. When the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives when the third movable decorative body is not in a normal state, the first movable decorative body has the relationship to be processed, and the first movable decorative body When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decorative body is in a state where the restoration process is not executed) and when the restoration operation is not started (when the third movable decorative body is If there is a situation where the restoration process is being executed, the restoration process according to the situation can be realized.

  About the pachinko machine 1, you may make it provide the setting change means which can change the selection probability concerning the winning probability concerning a hit determination, and an effect pattern. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable to use the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation as the same timing (for example, when the symbol variation starts).

  The first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body are provided with movable decorations at positions where the player can contact them. The body may be included. In this case, the movable decorative body provided at the position where the player can contact is most likely to be in an abnormal state, so the restoration operation time has arrived regardless of the situation of other movable decorative bodies. Then, it is desirable to be provided as a “fourth movable decorative body” for starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

  Without providing a light guide plate that displays the light guide pattern in front of the movable decorative body, and without limiting the effect of displaying the light guide pattern during the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body Making it executable is desirable in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

  The “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” shown in FIGS. 197B and 197C are prepared as having a production relationship in which both are in an operating state with a specific movable production. It is desirable to do. For example, the “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” may be provided with decorations that are related to each other, or may be operated at the same time as a movable effect based on a pattern variation (effect pattern). The decorations (such as completion of characters and character strings) are prepared as shapes. The third movable decorative body is prepared not to be used when a specific movable effect or one decoration is formed. According to such a configuration, when a restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is avoided that one decoration is formed in the same manner (operation in the same period) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  For the “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body”, the game board You may make it arrange | position by dividing into what is provided in 5 side, and what is provided in the door frame 3 side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “first movable decorative body”. The “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body” are provided. May not necessarily include all of these movable decorative bodies, and may include “one” of these movable decorative bodies, or “two” or “three” as appropriate. Even with such a configuration, the technical features described with reference to FIGS. 197B and 197C (how the restoration process is performed in relation to the “first movable decorative body”) are provided. It becomes.

[Operational penalties for operation units that can produce effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, there is a tendency for the number of operation units to be operated by a player to increase. If one of them breaks down, the operability and performance will be remarkably reduced.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
A sword decorative body provided so that the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the heel part 5013) can be moved (variably) by a predetermined operation between the sword position and the sword position. 5001 (see FIG. 146, FIG. 161, etc.)
Although the operation opportunity is not given, the “operation to extract the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011, handle portion 5012, collar portion 5013) from the sheath portion 5020 (extraction operation)” or “sword If the “operation” is repeatedly performed, it may cause a failure.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an effect light-emitting unit (not shown) is provided for each of the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the collar part 5013, and the sword part 5010 (the blade part). 5011, handle part 5012, collar part 5013) has a special detection part (not shown) that can detect whether or not the sheath part 5020 is in a specific position (original position) where the blade is in a state of cutting. When at least “during the period during which the demo screen is displayed (non-game state in which game effect or symbol variation according to jackpot determination has not been executed)”, the sword portion 5010 is identified as a result of detection by the special detection unit. If it is determined that it is not at the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an effect restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least in a non-game state in which no symbol variation is performed, the sword portion 5010 is used together with the effect light emitting portions (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) by a predetermined operation. As a result of the displacement, if it is detected that the position is not located at a specific position, an effect restriction period can occur, so that the handling of the operation unit can be suitably suppressed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the above-described “change in the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound” and the “set value (luminance set value) related to the light emission luminance” described above. All of the “changes” are allowed to be accepted by the player's operation, and the production restriction period is generated. However, as will be described later,
・ Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-Regarding the effect lamp, when the setting value (luminance setting value) related to the light emission luminance is changed, the effect light emission unit included in the sword unit 5010 as the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 The blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the collar part 5013 are not emitted at a luminance corresponding to the luminance setting value, but are provided in different parts from the sword part 5010 that is the detection target. For the effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), a process such that the effect light emission with the brightness corresponding to the set value is made executable is performed. Can be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the production restriction period occurs, the setting value change related to the sound volume and the setting value change related to the brightness can be accepted, but the sound volume setting is related. The degree of restriction differs between the process and the process related to the brightness setting.

  That is, for the production sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the production sound is not output in the form of reflecting the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound. Is also output so that the player is given a sense of tension (maybe he has done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the luminance, even if the luminance setting value is changed for the effect light emitting unit (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the heel portion 5013) included in the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in the form of reflecting the changed brightness setting value, but the effect lamp provided in a part different from the “sword part 5010” operated by the player is changed Due to the fact that it is possible to perform effect light emission (for example, light emission in accordance with the timing at which a specific notice effect is performed) in a manner in which the brightness setting value is reflected, the “sword part 5010” is caused by miscellaneous handling. The pachinko machine 1 as a whole can appropriately appeal that it intends to continue the game and the production while warning that it is possible to recognize that the production restriction is imposed. It made. In this sense, for the effect lamp on the game board 5 where the game ball flows down or wins, the effect light emission is executed in a manner that reflects the changed luminance setting value as usual. Is desirable. As a result, it is possible to perform a warning for handling the operation unit in a rough manner while preferably avoiding “the player's willingness to start the game or prompting the end of the game”. become.

  Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the restriction condition for the process related to the sound volume setting and the restriction for the process related to the brightness setting are made different from each other. . In particular, the “process related to volume setting” on the side that imposed a relatively strict limit at the beginning was strongly encouraged to continue the game by improving it to a normal state relatively early. On the other hand, while the “processing related to brightness setting” on the side that initially imposed relatively sweet restrictions showed an improvement trend, the overall improvement speed was slowed down, In other words, it is expected to keep the sense of tension moderately over a long period of time and prevent the mishandling again.

[Help image that encourages understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such an effect pattern determination or a notice effect determination is performed, by performing control to display the effect content according to the determination results on the effect display device 1600, the variation due to the decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination The effect is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (actual effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background depiction (background notice), it basically has a directivity such as “how much numerical value should be set for the rate of appearance of highly expected images”. It can only be done. Therefore, the fundamental problem such as “it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with high expectation (expected production) appears” has not yet been solved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction It is possible to execute processing for displaying the background image used in the image in a special mode different from the original image data. When displayed in the special mode, the expectation ( It is suggested that the ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols is high.

Here, as the “processing to display in a special mode”, for example,
A process for displaying original image data as rotation processing data that is rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation centered on any of the x, y, and z axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area);
It is possible to exemplify processing such as processing for displaying original image data as mosaic processing data with a predetermined degree of “blurring”.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the original image data is subjected to a slight processing (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.). A special effect for displaying this (displayed in a special form) is intentionally performed. According to such a configuration, even if a special effect in which only a slight processing is performed on the original image data is performed, it is difficult for the player side to detect and recognize the fact definitely. However, in exchange for this, even if the special performance is not performed, it seems to be able to remember the sensation and illusion that “there may be the special performance being executed” Therefore, even if a state in which an image with a high degree of expectation (special effect) does not appear continues, it is expected that the sense of expectation for the big hit is suitably maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status related to such “processing to display in a special mode”, it is difficult to even recognize the possibility of a high-expected situation. In the end, the meaning of this special performance can be lost.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a help image is displayed as to whether the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed in response to an operation by the player. The processing to be executed is made executable. According to such a configuration, the help image can be displayed in response to an operation by the player, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is expected that the decrease in the above will be suppressed, and as a result, the expectation will be suitably maintained.

  However, the “help image” according to this explanation example does not clearly indicate whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed, but it includes the recognition difficulty. ing. Because it is intended to have such recognition difficulty, even if it does not appear to be in the state where “processing to display in a special mode” is executed, it can not be convinced. Will be left behind and will be able to maintain their expectation.

  FIG. 199 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when a state transition is made between a non-game state where a game is not executed (such as in a demo screen) and a game execution state where a game is executed. .

  FIG. 199 (a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the game is in a non-game state (such as in a demo screen). As shown in FIG. 199 (a), in the effect display device 1600 when in the non-game state, a character image PG (here, which is useful for checking whether the special effect is being executed) A guide image AG suggesting that a character dressed as a penguin can be made to appear by an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is displayed. In this example, an explanatory note and a character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

  When the start winning is generated in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a) and the game (change of special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started, the effect display device 1600 first displays FIG. 199 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the changing effect by the decorative design SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. In this way, by causing the guide image AG to be automatically hidden when the game is started, while avoiding adverse effects on the stage performance when in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, the character dressed as a penguin) can be suitably appealed.

  FIG. 199 (c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the changing effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is ended (stopped display).

  In the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), when the hold information remains, the change image by the decoration symbol SZ is newly started by digesting the hold information, so that the guide image AG is not displayed. The production situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) appears again in the state where it has been made. On the other hand, if no hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), the state is again shifted to a non-game state (such as in the demo screen). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the state in which the game is not newly started for a predetermined time has been continued after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is ended (stop display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

  The “processing to display in a special manner” according to this effect example is a state in which the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the “specific effect pattern” (when a predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination). In addition, it can be executed when it is within a period in which a specific effect image appears (a predetermined timing within a specific effect pattern).

  FIG. 200 shows a state in which the variation effect by the decorative design SZ is being executed in a “specific effect pattern”, and an expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image is performed. The example of a display in the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 when it exists in the state is shown.

  That is, in this production example, when at least “expected production where a princess character (specific production image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed, on condition that a predetermined production condition is satisfied, A process of displaying only the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) after performing a slight rotation process (a process of displaying in a special manner) can be executed. Yes. When the princess character (specific effect image) for which “processing to display in a special manner” is executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed. The rate at which jackpot symbols appear is higher than when they are displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), the “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed, and the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) are included in each original image data. It is displayed as it is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (b), the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) is rotated three times to the left and then displayed. Processing (processing to display in a special mode) is executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. 200C, the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) is 6 degrees to the left. In this state, the process of displaying these (the process of displaying in a special mode) is executed after the rotational processing is performed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c), each original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) even when “processing to display in a special manner” is performed. In contrast, only a small amount of rotational machining is applied. In particular, in the figure, it can be seen by comparing between FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c), but in the actual performance, FIG. 200 (a) corresponding to the result of the performance determination. Only one of () to (c) is displayed, and no comparison can be made between them. Therefore, even if FIGS. 200 (b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the state is displayed in the special mode, but the state is displayed in the special mode. It is expected that the player is aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 200 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. It is difficult to be convinced, and it is expected that the degree of leaving a hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as “may be displayed in a special state” is expected.

  In addition, a process of displaying the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displaying them (a process of displaying them in a special manner) ) May be executed as a process in which each original image data is rotated and displayed separately, and each original image data is converted into one image after being converted into one image. The image may be executed as a process of rotating and displaying the image.

  200 (b) and 200 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 200 (c) is displayed, the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. It may be possible to have a relationship that increases Or, when “processing to display in a special mode” is executed, after displaying FIG. 200 (a) once, it is displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes in the order of FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c). You may make it make it. Alternatively, it is not always necessary to prepare both of FIGS. 200B and 200C, and only one of FIGS. 200B and 200C may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to determine the implementation status related to such “processing to be displayed in a special manner”, the special meaning of performing such a special effect is lost. There is no doubt. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is at least when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed. It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether or not the “process to display in a special mode” is being executed by an operation on a predetermined operation means such as.

  FIG. 201 shows that a help image is displayed based on the fact that an operation by the player is accepted in a state where “expected effect where a princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. The example of a display in the effect display apparatus 1600 is shown.

  That is, in this production example, at least in the state (see FIG. 200) in which an “expected production where a princess character (specific production image) is displayed as a background image” is performed (operation button) 410) is performed, a character image PG (here, a character dressed as a penguin) useful for examining “whether a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed” is used as a help image. It is displayed.

  More specifically, when an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player is performed in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 201 (a) appears, and FIG. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 201 (b) will appear, and in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (c). When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410), the situation shown in FIG. 201 (c) appears.

  However, as is clear from FIGS. 201A to 201C, when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be useful for whether the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is not explicitly stated whether or not the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. Because it is intended to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems to be in the state where "processing to display in a special mode" is executed, it will become possible to be strongly aware of the possibility, Even if it appears that the “process to display in a special mode” is not in a state of being executed, it is not possible to be convinced, and hope for the feasibility of the process can be left and the expectation can be maintained. Become possible.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 201A to 201C, the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state where “processing to display in a special manner” is being executed. Regardless of the mode of execution, display is possible only in one mode that has a predetermined position and that has a ruler in the horizontal direction. In this way, by causing an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” and that extends in the horizontal direction to appear by an operation by the player, the image is displayed. (Here, the ruler) can be made to function as a reference image (help image) as to whether or not it is in the “state where the special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed”.

  In particular, in this production example, the horizontal direction is not affected by the “processing to display in a special mode” at a position overlapping with the image (princess character) that is the execution target of the “processing to display in a special mode”. A guide image (in this case, a ruler) displayed so as to extend is displayed. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) that is the execution target of the special processing, it can be further used to determine whether the special processing is being performed. become.

  That is, in such an effect example, the special effect that has been “processed to display in a special manner” is an effect that is slightly tilted, and when the tilted effect is performed, the tilted effect is Expectation is higher than if not done. For this reason, the player operates predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) in order to determine whether or not the tilting effect is being performed. It has a recognition difficulty that does not definitely report whether the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. As a result, the player is expected to be aware of the possibility of high expectation when it appears that a tilting performance is being executed, and even if it does not appear to be performing a tilting effect, It is expected to leave a hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as “the tilting performance may be in a state of being executed”.

  Furthermore, a target image (here, a ruler) indicating whether or not the “special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed” is set as a target of “processing to display in a special manner”. The image (decorative symbol SZ, background image) is displayed in a way that at least part of it is displayed in a superimposed manner, and a standard image (here, a ruler) is a single effect (expectation) ), And it can be provided as an effect that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is already in the display state.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to develop the presentation without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) depending on the selection by the player (depending on the operation). To be able to enjoy various ways of playing, such as avoiding the player's operation when he / she is not confident that he / she is in a state where the performance (in this case, the tilt performance) is being executed Become.

  In this production example, the “processing to display in a special mode” is executed as “processing to display after rotating the original image data”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be executed as a process to be displayed after being rotated. Further, the image data is not subjected to rotation processing, but may be subjected to another processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process that is converted into an image having a mode different from the normal mode and to display it, and when the special process can be performed, the special process is performed by an operation by the player. If it is possible to display a guide image that does not become necessary, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects.

  By the way, in the above-described effect example, the “process to display in a special mode” can be executed when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed. As described above, depending on the result of the production determination, the decoration symbol SZ may be executable a plurality of times within a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. At this time, when the number of times that the “process to display in a special mode” is executed is large, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is higher than when the number of times is small.

  In addition, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is not only in a state where the “expected effect where a princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a background image” is being performed, The display may be enabled by the player's operation over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, the decorative symbol SZ may be displayed by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, even if any background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, in view of the fact that the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is a “comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image”, the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image for each case. It is clear that it differs depending on the type of. However, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (especially the ruler here) is changed in accordance with the type of the background image in each case, the character image PG is compared with the comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may deteriorate due to the suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an absolute image that is invariant regardless of the production situation.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed between a plurality of predetermined display positions in accordance with an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player. . However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

  FIG. 202 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

  FIG. 202 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player has a suspicion that “a process to display in a special mode has been executed” and performs an operation to display a comparison reference image (reference image). Assuming that the character image PG is displayed as a comparison reference image (reference image) at any of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)) determined in advance according to the mode of operation. Processing is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the left position (FIG. 202B) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the center position (FIG. 202 (c)) in the display area. When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 202 (d)) in the display area. ) As a character image PG is displayed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 202 (b) to (d), the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) has the same form regardless of the display position. Since the positional relationship between the background image (or decoration pattern) and the character image PG (especially a ruler in this case) that can be the target of “processing to display in a special mode” is different, “display in a special mode” The ease of determining whether or not the “processing to be performed” is being executed is naturally different.

  For example, when a character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 202 (c) (the center position in the display area), the character image PG (especially, a ruler here) is to be compared. When the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 202 (d) (the right side position in the display area). The character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (signature) although it overlaps the background image to be compared. It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether the “processing to be performed” is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, a character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is played in a “display position suitable for comparison” that differs depending on the type of background image in each case. Since it can be displayed by the user's operation, it is possible to suitably provide a determination material as to whether or not the “process for displaying in a special mode” is being executed.

  In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) is made variable in accordance with the number of operations for the operation button 410 within a predetermined time. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time for the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 are provided, and any of these operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operating means. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (acceptance period). Can be made possible.

  In addition, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (standard image) cannot function as an effect (expected degree) by itself, and is therefore required for comparison and determination with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, it becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the expected effect (background image). Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from when it is displayed by an operation by the player, it is desirable that the operation is automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position at which the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed as the comparison reference image (standard image) and the type of the background image, the “processing to display in a special mode” is executed. There may be a case where a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is not enough to compare and judge whether the user is in the current state. Therefore, in the above-described effect example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to make the character image PG appear again is operated again. If so, the time during which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, every time a predetermined operation means is re-operated, if the display is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) with reference to the operated timing, it is intermittent until the player is satisfied. By performing various operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and comparison and determination can be made carefully.

  However, if such an unlimited continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be very easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. . That is, the player may always obtain a confident conclusion that "the special process is being executed" or "the special process is not being executed". It does not clearly indicate whether or not the processing to be displayed is being executed, but the above-mentioned meaning of “having recognition difficulty” is lost.

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced, such as by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler possessed by the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). Thus, it is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time a predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. Since the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole gradually decreases (here, the ruler gradually decreases), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It is possible to suitably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the ruler length is displayed too short), it cannot be used for comparison with the background image, which reduces the game fun. It can be connected. Accordingly, with respect to the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the ruler with the shortest limit) is set in advance, and the minimum level is set. The time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is not extended even when the predetermined operation means is re-operated in this state. It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

  Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed. . That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed as a whole. Will gradually become smaller (here, the ruler will become shorter) and will not even appear at all, so when you really want to know if the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed It becomes possible to prompt the user to operate only, and other than that, it is expected to concentrate on the original performance content.

  Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over after the variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is started. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable presentation opportunity. It is possible to provide an effect (see FIG. 200) for predicting whether or not the “processing to display with” is being executed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 is in a state when it is displayed for the first time by an operation on a predetermined operation means after the power is turned on (or RAM is cleared). Thereafter, each time an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually decreases (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), and finally does not even appear. . However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (when appearing at a plurality of positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of the positions) Processing for displaying the display area as a whole (in this case, the ruler is long) may be prepared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by an operation on a predetermined operation means.

  In addition, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means set so that the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are different from each other, the operation is performed depending on which of these operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated means. In this case, for each operation means (display position), the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) is set, and the specific operation means is set. When the operation is performed, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the production example described with reference to FIG. 202, when the first operating means is operated in the production situation shown in FIG. 202 (a), the production situation shown in FIG. 202 (b) appears. It becomes. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the first operating means is operated again, this is in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state. As described above, the display is made smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, after this, even if the second operation means is operated, only the production situation shown in FIG. 202 (c) appears, and the comparison standard accompanying the re-operation of the first operation means. The reduced display as the image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operation means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) associated with the first operation means being operated again. Is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 202 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (center position). When another operation means (for example, the first operation means) that is not operated is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is already displayed at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the display state. Therefore, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

  That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position that is difficult to compare in relation to the background image by an operation on the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating the operating means, it becomes possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. This makes it possible to add interest for performing a search as to where the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the ease of comparison.

  In addition, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is triggered by this. The display state is not maintained and the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are arranged) And the horizontal length becomes substantially longer), so that a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but the “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. It is possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when it is absolutely necessary to know whether or not there is. However, this simultaneously consumes two “remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (number of operations until reaching the minimum unit)” set for each of the plurality of operation means. Therefore, it can be said that there is a great price for greatly improving the ease of comparison.

  Further, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the operation by the player, so that a plurality of comparison reference images (character images) are displayed. In order to lengthen the time during which PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether or not the comparison reference image (character image PG) appearing by the operation with respect to the first operation means is in the “special processing is being executed” state, or the price is increased. In this case, a quick decision on whether or not to further improve the ease of comparison by further operating the second operation means will be required. Since it will be enlarged, a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, the timing at which these comparison reference images (character images PG) are not displayed is different. In addition, the size (the length of the ruler) as each comparison reference image (character image PG) also differs depending on the operation situation. Further, depending on the operation state (remaining number of times) in each operation means, “the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if a specific operation means is operated, but if another operation means is operated, the comparison reference image is displayed. Since an effect situation such as “Character image PG is displayed” can also appear, which operation means should be operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear? Even in the determination, it is possible to provide more interestingness by adding a determination element other than the type of the background image to be compared.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the player's operation, but the predetermined time elapses. When the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is lost before it is stopped, it is desirable to hide the symbol variation as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, in the state where the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, the effect content in the display area is difficult to visually recognize, and by comparison with the background image or the like. It will be difficult to concentrate on the contents of the performance. As a result, if there is a case where it is not noticed that the player has stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG for use in the production will be lost. When this occurs, it is desirable to hide the character image PG as an opportunity.

  However, the character image PG may not be hidden when the game is stopped due to the big hit, but may be continued in the display state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the game is stopped due to the big hit, the big hit game is started even if it is not noticed. Therefore, when the character image PG is not displayed after a predetermined time, it is a surprise. It is expected to function as a production.

  In addition, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even when the user is gazing, it can be easily recognized that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed. It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the entertainment interest.

  That is, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set separately for each operation means (display position). If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, the effect content in the display area is difficult to visually recognize, and the original effect is concentrated. It becomes difficult. Thus, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) can be output, while the specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is “process to display in a special manner”. The sound output can be allowed only when it is not executed. In this way, regarding the execution of the “processing to display in a special mode”, a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is not used as a confirmation suggestion on the positive side, but a specific sound (for example, a confirmation sound on the negative side) In this situation, the player who hates the specific sound concentrates on the original performance and is highly likely to execute the “processing to display in a special manner”. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears only at certain times.

  However, for a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry), a comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by an operation by the player when the “processing to display in a special mode” is not executed. Even in this case, it is desirable that the sound output is not necessarily allowed. That is, in this case, a comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or changed in comparison with the size of the comparison reference image already in the display state (the length of the ruler is short)) by the player's operation. Sometimes when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output, it is definitely recognized that the “processing to display in a special manner” is not executed, but the specific sound ( For example, when the sound of a penguin cry) is not output, it may be either a state in which “processing to display in a special mode” is executed or a state in which “processing to display in a special mode” is not executed. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is not output.

  Note that a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition regardless of which of a plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, only when a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means is operated, if a specific sound can be output under the predetermined condition described above, a specific sound may be output. A comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the “processing to display in a special mode” is being performed appears or a specific sound is not output. It becomes possible for the player to select whether or not a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the “processing to be displayed in” state is being executed.

  Moreover, in the said production example, it displays by making it small (a ruler is short) and displaying it in a special mode in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state. The difficulty of recognizing whether the process is being executed is suitably maintained. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin cry) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large). For example, if the volume is made lower than when a penguin cry is output, the difficulty of recognition when the display time of the comparative reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended to some extent. It is expected to be maintained.

  Also, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position are arranged so that they do not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 202). It is desirable to set each of them. The comparison material with the background image can be increased by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as a transparent image. According to such a configuration, even if a large part of the background image overlaps the comparison reference image (character image PG), the comparison is made with the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). It becomes possible to perform suitably.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, each time the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed with a small size (the ruler is shortened). However, the present invention is not limited to this. What is necessary is just an aspect which raises the difficulty of recognition about whether it is in the state where the process displayed in a mode is performed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the comparative reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same in shape and size, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is “displayed with a specific transparency”, the portion displayed with the specific transparency in the comparison reference image (character image PG) is made small (specified on the ruler). It is important to display the image with the transparency being shortened), and the portion that is not displayed with the specific transparency may be hidden or displayed with a transparency higher than the specific transparency. You may make it raise visual difficulty so that it may display.

  In addition, as described above, the “processing to display in a special mode” refers to, for example, the display state illustrated in FIG. 200A through the display state illustrated in FIG. 200B and illustrated in FIG. 200C. It may be a dynamic drawing process for changing to a display state. When the “process to display in a special mode” is realized as such a dynamic drawing process, when the “process to display in a special mode” is terminated, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. The display state shown in FIG. 200 (b) is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a).

  In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed. It is desirable to perform the “process for displaying in a special mode” in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the “reference display process” as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by the player's operation, While the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. Since a movement such as “return to the display state shown in 200 (a)” always appears, it is possible to facilitate comparison / determination as to whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

  However, the “process for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic drawing process may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be caused to appear by the player's operation when the “process for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic drawing process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained in the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c). After that, the movement “returned to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a)” does not necessarily appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether the processing for displaying in a special mode is being executed. It becomes possible to make it. In addition, a strategy is also added because the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended.

  In addition, the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or from a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the production determination. May be performed in a long time. Further, within the period from when the decorative design SZ starts to change until it stops changing, “processing to display in a special manner” as a dynamic drawing process that is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds); “Processing for displaying in a special manner” as dynamic drawing processing performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at different predetermined timings.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For specific sounds that can be output (for example, penguin calls), the sound output should be interrupted in a time significantly shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed, the specific sound is not recorded until after the “processing to display in the special mode” is executed. Since the output of (for example, penguin squeak) is suppressed, the specific sound (for example, the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the production situation to appear as if it was denied by the penguin's cry.

  In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) in a form spanning from before the “processing to display in a special mode” to after it is executed. Become. Therefore, when the “process to display in a special mode” as the dynamic rendering process is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. The state changes from the state to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c) through the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a character with a penguin trick and a ruler, only the character with a penguin trick and a ruler may be displayed. In short, any reference image (character image PG) that is not a target of “processing to be displayed in a special manner” can be displayed as long as it can appear by an operation by the player. However, if a reference image (ruler) showing the length unit in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to facilitate the determination of whether or not “processing to display in a special mode” is being executed. Is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in FIG. 199 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, The confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are assigned to the channels, but this can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment interest may be reduced. Because.

[Prevents mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The process to be changed is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operation means (operation button 410, sword part 5010, effect selection left button 331) are operated by the player. , An effect selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button not shown in the figure, and the like. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variation effect is performed by the decorative design. To maintain.

  However, if such a large number of operation means are provided, the presence of these operation means becomes conspicuous, and the player is likely to be a target of mischief by the player. As a result of mishandling, if any one of these operating means is abnormal or malfunctioned, the operability and performance will be significantly reduced, and a decline in the game entertainment will be inevitable.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-game state (a state in which the above-described operation effect cannot be generated) in which the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is not executed. When there is a high possibility of being mischievous due to the occurrence of operation detection in multiple operation means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, thereby suppressing the handling of the operation means in a rough manner. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, in a state where the game is not started (non-game state), among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operation means that should not be operated ( Here, when an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state of displaying (reproducing) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed,
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound are not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. (Period) is generated over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). Note that when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) has occurred, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the volume-related operation reception is permitted and the sound volume is permitted. An adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal operation as a non-gaming state in which an operation reception relating to luminance is allowed and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output is returned.

  It should be noted that in the production restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, “change in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound is not accepted even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, and the current volume "The setting value is not displayed" and "The change of the luminance setting value related to the luminance of the effect lamp is not accepted even if there is an operation on the luminance adjustment button, and the current luminance setting value is not displayed" However, only one of the process related to volume adjustment and the process related to brightness adjustment may be limited.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that are triggered by such a production restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the conditions for generating the production restriction period are complicated, and that a tension is felt such that “the prank action is actually monitored by the hall side”.

  FIG. 203 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when an effect restriction period is generated based on the fact that a predetermined effect restriction condition is satisfied in a non-game state (such as in a demonstration screen). is there.

  Now, the state where the game is not started (non-game state) is controlled and the standby display is performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in the stopped state, the demonstration screen, etc. , Etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when a volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, processing for adjusting the volume (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if a predetermined effect lamp is in a light emitting state at the time of the operation, a process of adjusting the brightness (the brightness setting value is used as the light amount). Process to be reflected). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output.

  As described above, in the non-game state, when the player starts the game, the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated so that the volume and the luminance can be set according to his / her preference. Reception is allowed. When the operation is accepted, the player is expected to prompt the player to start the game by changing the sound volume setting value or the luminance setting value according to the operation.

  However, as described above, in a non-gaming state, a mischievous operation may be performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a luminance adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs in any one of these operation means, the operability and performance will be remarkably deteriorated, and a decrease in game entertainment is inevitable.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischievous detection are prepared. Based on the fact that it has been detected that there has been an operation, it is possible to execute a process of generating an effect restriction period (function restriction period) for which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-game state, the fact that the conditions related to the production restriction are satisfied is certified. It is said.
a. The timing of the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started when the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is triggered, and the operation detection for the operation button 410 newly occurs until the first timer time is measured, In addition, when the operation of the newly generated operation button 410 is detected, the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is detected until the second timer time is measured. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set
b. A new operation detection for the sword portion 5010 occurs between the time when the third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started with the operation detection for the operation button 410 and the time until the third timer time is measured, In addition, when the operation of the newly generated sword portion 5010 is detected, the timing of the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation detection of the operation button 410 is performed until the time measurement of the fourth timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurring are set

  Note that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and an effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when detection conditions relating to other operation patterns are satisfied, or may be detected. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Further, the first to fourth timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or may be measured using a different timer.

  Here, “long press with respect to the operation button 410”, “continuous hitting operation with respect to the operation button 410 (multiple operations)” and the like are also not obtained in a state where the game is not started (non-game state). It can be said. However, these modes are modes in which an operation instruction can be given in the operation effect in the game execution state, so that even in the non-game state, the player has a certain purpose (for example, application or pre-exercise practice). It is assumed that these operations can be performed, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, “operation combinations for a plurality of operation means (for example, operations in the order of“ sword unit 5010 → operation button 410 → sword unit 5010 ”), which is a detection target for the purpose of mischief, is in the game execution state. It can be said that it is important in order to avoid erroneous detection to be set so that no operation instruction is given as an operation effect at a certain time. Thereby, it is avoided that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before and after the operation with respect to the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation with respect to another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) is performed. The detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, a player who only touches one time at a time because of his rarity, not the intention of mischief, can be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the pachinko machine 1 As a result, it is possible to more suitably avoid that the operating rate is greatly reduced.

  In this way, the detection conditions are tightened so that the production limitation period is relatively frequently generated and the operation rate as the pachinko machine 1 is largely reduced, and the mischief is disturbed by mischief. This is because there is a high possibility that the detection condition will be satisfied even if the detection condition is tightened, because it is assumed that the operation is performed in various combinations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 203, first, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected at timing tq1 when the player is in the non-game state. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied until the first timer time is consumed. It will be in the state (1st step state) which judges.

  That is, as described above, in “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the production restriction period. Each time is fulfilled one by one, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are raised one step at a time.

  At timing tq1, the first staircase among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated is raised. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is consumed, and the detection condition of the second stage (in this case, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been consumed, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down one step).

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 203, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time has not been consumed (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern (Detection pattern) Among the three conditions of a, the “second-stage detection condition” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and the third detection condition (here, last time) until the second timer time is consumed. The detection condition) is determined (second stage state).

  In other words, at timing tq2, the second staircase is raised among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is consumed, and the detection condition of the third stage (in this case, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has been consumed, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions are satisfied (the state of the 0th stage after going down two stairs).

  In the example shown in FIG. 203, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time has not been consumed (second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. Of the three conditions of the pattern a, the “third-stage detection condition (last detection condition)” is satisfied. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays (reproduces) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed in the effect display device 1600 based on the detection. Let it begin. At the same time, even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and of course the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , Producing production restrictions. And the production | presentation limitation period (function limitation period) in which such a penalty is imposed will be continued over predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) from timing tq3.

  According to such a configuration, if a plurality of operations are operated so as to be disturbed, an effect restriction period occurs, so that operations due to mischief can be suppressed.

  Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (up the stairs), but when time runs out on the middle of the road, All state levels are canceled to return to the original state. Thereby, even when the game is ended in a state where the state level is raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

  In the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs) in this way, the “volume adjustment button” or “brightness” that is the operation means to be restricted when the production restriction period occurs It may be assumed that the “adjustment button” is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) can be operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his / her preference when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable to prevent the level from changing or affecting the first timer time or the second timer time.

  That is, in this case, no matter how mischievous the buttons for adjusting the volume and the buttons for adjusting the brightness are subjected to the operation by the mischief, it is not possible to generate the production restriction period. However, at least the already raised state level will not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period occurs, the production restriction targets are “volume adjustment button” and “brightness adjustment button”. This means that operations for these functions will be disabled at all, so it is also preferable to suppress mischief for “volume adjustment buttons” and “brightness adjustment buttons” that are not subject to detection of operations by mischief. To be expected to do.

  Further, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for detecting mischief, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is sandwiched between “two operations for another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 203)”. As for the “operation with respect to the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 203)” to be shaped, it is assumed that the operation is performed not only once but a predetermined number of times. Is more desirable.

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within a fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection. When an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the detection condition relating to the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied and the production restriction period is generated. Further, the fifth to seventh timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or may be measured using a different timer.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. In addition, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation on the operation button 410, not the operation on the sword 5010, is detected again (specific number of times (here, 2 times) more than the number of times of detection (here 2 times)) In the third detection), the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset, and the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. It is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, an operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) at a timing during which the sword unit 5010 is operated twice. The detection condition is satisfied and the production restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated once (> n times) between the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the production limitation period is set. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the generation conditions of the production restriction period will be complicated, and it will be expected to have a tension such as `` Is the prank action actually being monitored by the hall side ''? Become.

  In order to increase the complexity, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the sword portion 5010 is operated again within the timer time, the operation button 410 is turned on. When operating within each timer time over a number of times (> n times), it is desirable to control each state to be different from the original state (may be different between m times and l times). . Therefore, even if an operation is performed according to the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” in a state controlled in these different states, the production restriction period does not occur.

  Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the production limitation period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times). If the production restriction period can be generated (same as when operated n times), the production condition of the production restriction period is further complicated, and “the prank action is not actually monitored by the hall side. It will be expected to have a more favorable tension such as Also in this case, it goes without saying that each time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time is generated and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of “predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))” that are triggered by the production restriction period are prepared.

  However, such mischievous acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and making too strict measures can lead to a disadvantage on the hall side. Therefore, for specific videos appearing in the production restriction period, rather than displaying strong warning content, the content should be of a level that explains appropriate handling methods for games and productions, etc. It is desirable.

  Note that, as described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) has occurred, the specific moving image is not displayed, and “accepting volume-related operations is allowed. Thus, a sound volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and an operation relating to luminance is allowed and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output, "and the normal state as a non-game state is returned.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, at a timing tq4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the player starts the game. It can be assumed that the game is shifted to a game execution state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner by generating a start winning. In such a case, the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischief act and starting the game has been achieved, so in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed. A certain production restriction period (function restriction period) is ended.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility that the reflection will be insufficient. Until the display is finished, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output and the brightness Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control it as a partial restriction period such as “the current brightness setting value is displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output”.

  As shown in FIG. 204, when transitioning to the game execution state in this way, the detection for the “operation pattern (detection pattern)” described above is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if an operation on the sword portion 5010 or an operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the first timer time or the second timer time is not counted as a trigger, and the production restriction period occurs. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when a transition is made to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration time as the production restriction period, the game is left in the form of a part of the restriction contents when it is in the production restriction period. Since the state is shifted to the execution state, reflection on the mischievous action can be promoted without hindering the progress of the game effect.

  In addition, about the partial restriction period, not only until the change display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the production restriction period is ended, but also the decorative symbol is put in a stopped state with the number of holdings being zero. It may be possible to continue at least until (until a non-game state).

  In addition, at a timing at which the game execution state ends and shifts to the non-game state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 204), a predetermined safe time is set and the predetermined safe time has elapsed. It is desirable to continue the state in which detection for the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated even though the state is a non-game state. That is, in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, it is assumed that the excitement of the player is not cooled, and the operation on a plurality of operation means is excessively performed. This is because imposing a penalty may lead to an immediate cancellation of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-game state.

  In addition, when a transition is made to a non-gaming state while being controlled as the partial restriction period described above, there is a possibility that reflection on the mischievous action may still be insufficient, so partial restriction until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, detection of the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again when the safe time has elapsed.

  The safe time is set as a time value that is longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from when the decorative symbol variation display is started to when it is stopped. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even when the decorative symbol variation display is immediately ended, the detection of the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is performed at least until the safe time is ended. It becomes possible to continue the invalidated state or continue the partial restriction period.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol variation display is started in the form of the production limitation period (function limitation period), the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. According to such a configuration, the partial restriction period described above can be continued for a relatively long time.

  In the example described above, even if detection close to the production limit period is detected within the detection period for the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (in FIG. 203, the portion where fine dots are applied). The behavior of is not appearing. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs for generating a penalty are raised), thereby prompting the user to stop the operation due to mischief. You may do it. The specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of operation means that is a detection target. Similarly, every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs for generating a penalty are climbed), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. Also good.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, The confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are assigned to the channels, but this can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment interest may be reduced. Because.

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The process to be changed is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  By the way, since there are only new customers who want to start a game for a while after the hall opens, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be frequently made to start the game with a set value that suits their preference. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound will reverberate in the hall and the atmosphere will be spoiled. It is an amusement.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to accept operations relating to volume adjustment and brightness adjustment until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the volume setting value and the luminance setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, and the change of the volume setting value and the luminance setting value can be accepted. I am going to make it.

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the setting value (volume setting value) and the luminance setting value relating to the output volume of the effect sound are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, the “specific value” that is automatically set is adopted as the volume setting value that many players tend to prefer, so that many games can be played in the time zone soon after the hall opens. It can be expected that a situation in which a person adjusts to a sound volume setting value and a luminance setting value according to his / her preference is less likely to occur. The establishment of the predetermined condition may be that a certain time has elapsed after the power is turned on, may receive a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a, or may be in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The specific process may end.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the like are determined based on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or based on a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Acceptance of changes in brightness setting values is allowed, but a special period (opening-only period) during which a sound volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if such a change in the setting values is accepted over a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) First, generate it. And after such a special period (opening-only period) is over, if changes in those setting values are accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. Yes. As a result, for a while after opening the hall (until the time required for completing various adjustments by a new customer), various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output. Thus, it is possible to give an opportunity to perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment to start a game with a set value that suits one's preference.

  FIG. 205 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to a special period (opening-dedicated period).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 205, if the power is turned on at the timing tr0, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment has a sound volume by the player until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Control is performed such that an operation related to the adjustment and an operation reception related to the luminance adjustment are not permitted. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to a game such as a start winning is not permitted, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power recovery appears or no display output is performed, and a standby screen (design stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still not available. Do not show.

  Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is reached, detection related to a game such as a start winning is permitted, and a game start waiting state ( It is controlled as a state of waiting for a start prize. Also in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, so that it is possible to recognize that it is in the symbol variation waiting state.

  At this time, the volume setting value and the luminance setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, and “change of the volume setting value and the luminance setting value is permitted. Even if the change of the setting value is accepted, a special period (opening-only period) during which no volume adjustment confirmation sound or luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output is generated. Such a store opening dedicated period can be continued until a timing tr2 at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has passed since the occurrence of the period, and when the period ends at the time tr2, When the change of the setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the variation of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and behind it. Various background images displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) (images with lower priority in the layer than the decorative design) are displayed when the period from the store opening period is shifted to the normal business period There will be no change.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state where the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and enters the game start waiting state, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening-only period ends) Since the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period (b), it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound reverberating immediately after opening the store. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), it is automatically shifted to a state in which an adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When various adjustments by new customers are settled, finer adjustments can be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. In addition, while maintaining the state that the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), the system automatically shifts to the normal business period during which the adjustment confirmation sound can be output. Until this time, the player can hardly notice that the control is performed during the opening-only period in which the adjustment sound is not output.

  After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game starts waiting state (after timing tr1), when the change of the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted, the setting according to the changed setting value in the effect display device 1600 is accepted. Parameter display (volume side parameter display, luminance side parameter display) is performed. Therefore, by confirming such parameter display, it is possible to adjust the setting value according to one's preference.

  However, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (opening-only period), even if the output related to the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way, the change in the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is reflected as the volume or the light amount. Eventually, there is a concern that the atmosphere in the hall may be dyed in a single color, and that the atmosphere will be spoiled and become a mess. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the volume setting value is received before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable not to have. Similarly, regarding the luminance, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the luminance setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed luminance setting value is used as the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (opening-dedicated period), each player adjusts the setting value according to his / her preference while confirming the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. In other words, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the set value according to his / her preference, there is no influence of sound or light around the pachinko machine 1, so the atmosphere in the hall is It can be suitably maintained.

  Note that only the luminance of the volume and the luminance may be maintained such that the changed luminance setting value is not reflected as the amount of light after the timing tr2 has arrived. That is, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption increases due to the operation by the mischief while the game is not started, and the brightness with the higher power consumption compared to the volume is not changed while the game is not started. It is desirable to prevent adjustments from being reflected. Also, the brightness adjustment sound is not necessarily output because the degree of adjustment cannot be confirmed unlike the volume adjustment sound.

  However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (when the time for opening the store has not been consumed), the symbol variation (variable display by the decorative symbol) starts based on the start prize. Thereafter, the player completes volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, and the frequency of those adjustments is expected to be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is ended based on the detection. It is possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

  However, during the decorative symbol variation display period due to the start winning that ended the store opening period early, changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value are accepted, and an adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output If this happens, it is assumed that many players will perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment after the opening-only period ends early, which may result in a fall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is ended early and the normal business period However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the variation state of the decorative symbol generated thereby is terminated (in-fluctuation suppression process).

  FIG. 206 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started when the store opening dedicated period (special period) is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 206, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at timing tr3 when the time as the special period has not yet been consumed. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the processing related to the store opening dedicated period is terminated and shifted to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. This variation suppression processing is performed while the variation display on the decorative design is being performed. “Allowing to accept the change of the volume setting value and the luminance setting value and changing the setting value to the effect sound in the output state” Can be performed to reflect the volume of the lamp or the amount of light from the production lamp in the lighting state, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. The difference from “processing for the opening-only period” is whether or not the decorative display is in a state where the variable display is being performed, and the change in the setting value is reflected as the volume and the amount of light. The suppression content for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, such a during-fluctuation suppression process is changed to a non-game state (a state in which the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). As long as it is not migrated, it will continue to run.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and at the timing tr4, the non-game state When it is immediately returned to (the state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed) (for example, 1 hour has not passed since the occurrence of the opening-only period ended early) Even in the state immediately after opening, the special period (opening-dedicated period) is not generated again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-game state after the timing tr4, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output when a change in the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted. Will be controlled. In the normal business period when fluctuation suppression processing is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed luminance setting value is also the light amount of the effect lamp in the light emitting state. It has come to be reflected as. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it is possible to recognize that the symbol is waiting for the symbol variation.

  A player who creates a situation such as “the game execution state will be ended immediately after the opening-only period (special period) ends early” cannot be convinced with the adjustments made while the adjustment sound was not output, and once started Because it is assumed that the person who has a desire to adjust more finely until the game is interrupted, a special period (open-only period) ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  In the example described above, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) during which the opening dedicated period (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the opening dedicated period (special period) occurs. The time until the specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is terminated may be used.

  The timing for setting the volume setting value and the luminance setting value to each “predetermined specific value” may be the timing tr1, or may be a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

  In addition, in the above-described example, there is a technical feature in the configuration related to the store opening dedicated period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the processing in the period before timing tr1 is the above-described content. You may make it implement | achieve as a different process.

  In the example described above, at the timing tr2, the decoration design and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed. However, the display change is such that an image different from the decoration design and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be performed.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, The confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are assigned to the channels, but this can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment interest may be reduced. Because.

  In the example described above, only one of the set values of volume and brightness may be changed.

[Control on volume adjustment confirmation sound according to production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”. The expected effect relating to the body movement or the like is provided as an effect having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a setting value (volume setting value) for the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The process to be changed is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is determined. A process for changing a setting value (luminance setting value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” when the player setting value (brightness setting value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

  It should be noted that with regard to the change acceptance for such setting values (volume setting value, luminance setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting value, the design has changed and the design has changed. In any of the states, the player can execute the game by an operation by the player.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first hit determination is made according to the game ball being received in the first start port 2002, and in the second start port 2004. Regardless of whether or not the second hit determination is made according to the fact that the game ball has been accepted, the symbol variation (the first symbol variation, the second symbol variation) according to the hit determination is performed. After that, a privilege (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be given. However, the expected value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

  In the above-described example, a maximum of about 1 game ball is paid out by repeating the opening / closing pattern that opens the winning prize opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum for the big hit related to the first special symbol 8 times. On the other hand, in the big hits related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the open / close pattern that opens the winning prize opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) for a maximum of 16 times. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the change of the sound volume setting value is accepted as “a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed”, “ The first side execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed, and “the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed. In any of the “second-side execution states”, the numerical value range in which the change of the sound volume setting value is allowed to be the same in any of these states.

  According to such a configuration, regardless of the state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state), the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment through sound adjustments tailored to each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume of the effect sound is changed in the above-described “game start waiting state” and “first side execution state”. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. However, in the above-described “second side execution state”, control is performed so as not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even when the volume setting value is changed.

  In other words, in the “waiting for game start” state, there is no production sound because the game is not being executed, and if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change is made. The volume of the later volume cannot be confirmed as an audible sound. For this reason, when in the “game start waiting state”, it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

  In the “first side execution state”, although there is a situation in which a production sound according to the first hit determination is output, this situation is a low-probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low It is often controlled to the state (low-probability non-short game state), and there is not much expectation for the production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that when in such a low-expected gaming state, a player plays a game while paying attention to a mobile device such as a smartphone. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is surely notified to the player about the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output.

  On the other hand, in the “second side execution state”, there is a situation in which an effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and a high-probability gaming state (high-probability short-time gaming state) in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively high ) Is often controlled. In such a situation, since the degree of expectation for the production is high, there is a tendency that the volume adjustment for enjoying the production tends to be performed. Therefore, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, Amusement interest may be lowered by making it difficult to hear the production sound and BGM according to the two-hit determination. Therefore, in the “second-side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound or BGM according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to favorably maintain the game entertainment by providing an opportunity for volume adjustment in an environment where listening is possible.

  However, in the “second side execution state”, the expectation level for the performance is increasing, and after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the loss mode, the player may be able to change the jackpot mode again. It can be said that it is important to secure a time (reverberation) for making the player aware of the game, in order to maintain the game entertainment interest. In this regard, if the normal process in the “game start waiting state” is performed immediately after the transition to the “game start wait state”, the process in the “second side execution state” may be performed. It is possible for the player side to easily detect that the game has been finished in a lost state and has been shifted to the “game start waiting state”, and there is a concern that the game interest will be lowered.

  Therefore, when the process related to the “second side execution state” is finished and the process shifts to the “game start wait state”, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the “game start wait state” Over time, control is performed so that normal processing (processing that allows changing the volume setting value and outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) when in the “game start waiting state” is not performed. It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the “second-side execution state” to the “game start waiting state”, the “volume setting value is allowed to change, but the volume setting value has been changed. However, it is desirable to perform a process that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and a process that does not allow the change of the volume setting value itself. However, the possibility that the “second side execution state” is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the “second side execution state” to the “game start waiting state” is more aggressive. As in the case of the “second side execution state”, “a process that does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed” is allowed. It is more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the “first side execution state”, the degree of expectation for the performance is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. Therefore, when the processing relating to the “first side execution state” is completed and the process shifts to the “game start waiting state”, the “first side execution state” is different from the case of the “second side execution state” described above. The above-described normal process (a process for allowing a change in the volume setting value and outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed), which is performed even when in the “state”, is continuously performed as it is. It is desirable to make it.

  By the way, in the situation controlled to the “first side execution state”, a mischievous operation is performed in which operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed and performed within a relatively short time due to stress that is not easily won by big hit. There are concerns. In other words, as a result of miscellaneous handling, if an abnormality or failure occurs in any one of these operation means, the operability and performance will be remarkably lowered, and a further decline in game entertainment is inevitable.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection has occurred in a plurality of operation means and not only in the case of being controlled to the “first side execution state” but also when being controlled to the “game start waiting state” If the situation becomes high, an effect restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-described example of “preventing mischief for a plurality of operation means (see FIGS. 203 and 204)” may be generated.

In other words, in this case, some predetermined operations among a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 in either of the “game start waiting state (non-game state)” and the “first side execution state” are provided. When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword unit 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time,
In the effect display device 1600, in a state of displaying (reproducing) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed,
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound are not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. (Period) is generated over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 is displayed even if an image related to the “first side execution state” has appeared before that. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) has occurred, the specific moving image is hidden, and operation reception relating to the volume is permitted and the volume is permitted. Normal state as a “game start waiting state” or “first side execution state” such that the adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation reception regarding the brightness is allowed and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. It will be returned to.

  As for the detailed contents and other examples regarding such an effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt the contents in the explanation example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operation means”. However, in this case, even if the “game start waiting state” is shifted to the “first side execution state” during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early, Various processes related to the production restriction period are continued as they are under the same conditions as in the “game start waiting state”. As a result, it is expected to suppress the mischief operation when being controlled to the “first side execution state” with low expectation.

  On the other hand, when the “game start waiting state” is shifted to the “second side execution state” during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the “production restriction period ( The processing relating to the early termination of the function restriction period) and its modified examples are appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the “second-side execution state” having a high degree of expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the above example, as a method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, The confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are assigned to the channels, but this can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, there is a concern that the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may occur, and the entertainment interest may be reduced. Because.

  In the example described above, only one of the set values of volume and brightness may be changed.

[Period of operation acceptance period (valid period) itself]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notification effects) prepared for the selected variation pattern type. Etc.), it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) regarding which expected effect (s) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern type may be sequentially executed. Any of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may not be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is performed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. The variation effect by the corresponding decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected production related to is provided as a production having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is displayed regardless of the result of the notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (an “internal reception effect” described later) that is permitted to be received when the base symbol effect has progressed to a specific timing. Further, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when the special result is obtained in the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect”, which will be described later) that is permitted to be received when the design effect based on the second variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice effect determination, an operation reception effect (effective) in which the effect reception is permitted even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing. Period) does not occur. A plurality of first fluctuation patterns that generate “internal reception effects” and second fluctuation patterns that can generate “additional reception effects” may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that an “internal reception effect” and an “additional reception effect” can be sequentially generated.

  However, an operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is a change (effect) that is predetermined for an effect member that is to be produced as long as an operation is detected within the valid period. Since the post-operation effect that generates a display change in the display device 1600, a change in the effect sound in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, the operation reception effect (effective) (Period) The performance itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation effect is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
A first operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern arrives when an operation by the player is detected;
A second operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in such a manner that when an operation by the player is detected, the elapsed time from the detected timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached; We are going to prepare.

  According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (effective period) itself when the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and when the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved until the post-operation effect is executed.

  That is, the post-operation effect is executed until the predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is operated early or late within the effective period. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the effective period occurs is advantageous in enjoying the performance while the execution state as the post-operation effect is maintained for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, no matter which timing is operated within the effective period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. A post-operation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the overall performance time from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect by operating at a later time rather than operating for a while after the effective period occurs. It can be said that it is advantageous to enjoy the production.

  In this case, the effect generation conditions of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. The operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, and the notice effect determination corresponding to the second change pattern is selected. A special result is obtained, and it can be realized that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern is generated up to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing. In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. You may make it implement | achieve as what generate | occur | produces when progressing to timing.

  FIG. 207 shows a first example in which a post-operation effect is executed in a manner that continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the effective period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows the example about operation reception production.

  Now, suppose that the design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1 while the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the “first operation reception effect that is allowed to receive the effect” is satisfied. A first operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (valid period) ends without performing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 when a predetermined set time elapses without receiving the effect. During the execution period of the first operation reception effect that is allowed to be received, an image display showing the operation means to be operated and a gauge display of how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion effect is performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptable reception sound indicating that the production reception is permitted (or that the production reception is permitted) is output. . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptance allowable sound over the predetermined set time, and is in the middle stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, a non-output state is set so that it cannot be audible.

  Here, “acceptable sound is output” means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing tr1 and is already allocated to the channel. This is also a concept including the arrival of the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr1. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr1 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr1. In addition, “to set to a non-output state” here means that the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data including the acceptable sound to be accepted. However, the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is a concept that includes a transition to a period in which the subsequent sound (including silence data) is reproduced after the end.

  As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, the “operation-induced processing using the first effect member” is performed as a post-operation effect based on the fact that the player's operation has been detected and the effect has been received. The post-operation effect thus started (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is based on the variation pattern even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period. When a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) arrives, the process is ended. The “operation-causing process using the first effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the first decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 207, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is: It is executed over a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, if an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), an after-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) Is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation reception effect, it is possible to perform an operation immediately after the effective period occurs, as an execution state as a post-operation effect (execution state of operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Is maintained for a long time, which is advantageous in enjoying the production.

  As will be described later, in the first operation acceptance effect, the effect is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-caused process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect acceptance. Even if it is done, the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 208 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detection timing reaches a predetermined time value.

  Now, suppose that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr11 while the second effect condition required for the generation of the “second operation reception effect allowing the effect reception” is satisfied. A second operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (valid period) is also executed without performing the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 when a predetermined set time elapses without receiving the effect. It is supposed to end. A time value different from a predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and a predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception effect that is allowed to receive the performance, an image display showing the operation means to be operated and a gauge display of how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion effect is performed.

  When the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect acceptance is permitted (or that the effect acceptance is permitted) is output. The However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a timing tr12, a non-output state is set so that it cannot be audible.

  Note that “acceptable sound is output” is not only newly allocated to the channel at time tr11 but also already assigned to the channel. This is a concept that also includes the arrival of the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the received sound data in accordance with the timing tr11. Alternatively, a “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr11 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr11. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which a subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

  As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” is performed as a post-operation effect based on the fact that the player's operation has been detected and the effect has been received. For the post-operation effect thus started (operation-caused processing using the second effect member), the effect reception is performed even if the effect is received at any timing within the effective period. The elapsed time from when it was made is continued until a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period) is reached. The “operation-causing process using the second effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 208, if an effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-caused process using the second effect member) is: The process is executed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 at which a predetermined time value elapses. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208, if an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timing tr11 to tr13), an effect after operation (operation-caused processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing arrived after the timing tr14) when a predetermined time value elapses.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs until the post-operation effect ends after the effective period starts. It is possible to provide a performance such that it is advantageous in enjoying the performance while maintaining the production time as a whole.

  As will be described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) have different effects on themselves, and the operation reception effects (effective period) are different from each other. Since it is generated based on the establishment of the condition, it is expected that the game entertainment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (valid period) to the post-operation effect is suitably maintained.

  However, the following problem remains only by adopting the configuration relating to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period). That is, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating early in the effective period, or it is advantageous to enjoy the effect when operating late in the effective period. For example, there is still a poor aspect of performance within the effective period, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will deteriorate. Therefore, it is more desirable to execute the operation reception effect as a special operation reception effect having a mode described below.

FIG. 209 is a time chart illustrating an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, the special effect is based on the progress to the timing tr21. An operation reception effect (valid period) is generated. As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the case of the first and second operation reception effects, and the timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time has passed without effect reception. Even if there is no operation, the reception of the production always occurs within the effective period, and the post-operation production described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined setting time in the special operation reception effect is set to a time value longer than the predetermined setting time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined setting time in the second operation reception effect.

  In addition, when the special operation reception effect (valid period) is started, an acceptable reception sound indicating that the production reception is permitted (or that the production reception is permitted) is output. Is done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment uses the permissible reception sound (FIG. 209) in response to the first and second operation reception effects (FIGS. 207 and 208). The output state is continued for a longer time. In this example, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 209 is also made non-audible at timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage where the predetermined set time has not yet passed, so that it cannot be audible. However, the acceptable reception sound shown in FIG. 209 may be one in which the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

  Note that “acceptable sound is output” here also means that “sound data including acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing tr21, and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept that also includes the arrival of the “acceptable sound reproduction period” within the sound data in accordance with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr21 to after that so as to straddle the timing tr21. In addition to “removing the sound data including the acceptable sound”, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained in addition to releasing the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which a subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when an operation by the player is detected within the effective period and the effect is received, the “first movable” shown in FIG. The operation-based process using the decorative body (first effect member) and the “operation-based process using the second movable decorative body (second effect member)” shown in FIG. 208 are started in parallel. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is started, but the “operation-based process using the first effect member” thus started is at any timing within the effective period. Even when an effect is accepted, the event is terminated when a predetermined timing tr24 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, and “operation using the second effect member” The “cause process” is started. However, the “operation-caused process using the second effect member” started in this way can be accepted regardless of the timing of the effect received within the valid period. The elapsed time from the time when the event was made can be continued until a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period) is reached. To become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 209, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), “operation-caused processing using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects. Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24. Among the post-operation effects, the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. The process ends at the elapsed time tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209, if an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timing tr21 to tr23), the “posted operation using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects. The “process” is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24. Of the post-operation effects, the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” is determined in advance from the timing tr22a. It is executed until the timing tr26 (timing arrived after the timing tr25) when the time value has elapsed.

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), “the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is used. “Operation-based processing” and “operation-based processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the production reaches a predetermined time value” are executed.

  According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the effective period is generated, the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a price to become, the end timing of the “operation-induced processing using the second effect member” of the post-operation effects comes at a relatively early stage. However, if the operation is performed at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs, the end timing of the “operation-caused processing using the second effect member” of the post-operation effects is set as follows. Although it becomes possible to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a disadvantage that the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” among the post-operation effects cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting production,
・ Enjoying this by lengthening the execution state of the “operation-caused process using the first effect member” in exchange for shortening the time until the “operation-caused process using the second effect member” is completed. (Operating at an early stage within the validity period), or
· Do you enjoy this by extending the time until the “operation-caused processing using the second effect member” is completed in exchange for shortening the execution state of the “operation-caused processing using the first effect member”? (Do you operate at a late stage within the validity period), or
・ Slightly sacrifices the time during which the “operation-based processing using the first performance member” is maintained as an execution state and the time until the “operation-based processing using the second performance member” is completed, As a balance (operating at a timing that is not early or late within the validity period)
The special operation reception effect itself can be given to the strategic operation effect such as this, so that it is possible to select the operation timing according to the player's mood and to provide an operation reception effect that is hard to get tired of Will be able to.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, when an effect is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (the operation-induced process using the first effect member, The operation-induced process using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the permissible reception sound is canceled at this point.

  Here, in the example described above, when an effect is received in the special operation reception effect (FIG. 209), “the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives”. “Operation-based processing used” and “operation-based processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the production reaches a predetermined time value” are executed. . However, even when a special operation acceptance effect is generated, when a predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, when the player is defeated in the jackpot determination or when the player is defeated in the predetermined effect determination) Even if an effect is received within the special operation reception effect, the “operation-causing process using the first effect member” is not performed, as compared with the case where a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 209). It is more preferable that the “operation-based processing using the second effect member” in which the “predetermined time value” is set relatively short is performed in different effect modes.

  According to such a configuration, even when a special operation reception effect occurs, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, “the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” “Operation-based processing using the first performance member” and “Operation-based processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of the rendering reaches a predetermined time value” Since the content of the performance is equivalent to the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) that is executed only in one of these, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such a production risk A feeling can be maintained suitably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, “operation-caused processing using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the timing at which the effect is received” When the post-operation effect is executed in parallel with the “operation-caused process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value”, the first operation reception effect and the second operation are performed. It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the post-operation effect appears in the reception effect.

  However, this may not be detected well (detection error) in spite of the operation within the special operation reception effect, and the effect reception may not be performed. As a result, the effective period ends without receiving the effect. In such a case, the player who saw the state where the “operation-based processing using the first effect member” was not performed, but was mistakenly recognized as having become an operation reception effect that is executed only on one side. Therefore, there is a concern that the gaming interest will decline. Therefore, for special operation reception effects, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the effective period, The operation-induced process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until the given timing has arrived, and “the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted” continues until a predetermined time value is reached. It is desirable that the “operation-based process using the two effect members” is executed. As a method for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) and a production mode related thereto, any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, and further, the contents described in writing can be used. .

  In the above-described explanation example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect are generated, an acceptable reception sound suggesting that the effect reception is permitted is output. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the reception allowable sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated is displayed as the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception. It is used as a production sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound output at the time of production.

  According to such a configuration, when the acceptance of production is allowed (when an image display showing the operation means to be operated is displayed, or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains) By confirming how long the permissible reception sound that is set to the output state is continued, the operation acceptance effect is “the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-induced processing using a production member” and “operation-caused processing using a second production member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the production is received reaches a predetermined time value” are executed. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time during which the “operation-based processing using the first effect member” can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect is accepted). Thus, when it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is a “special operation reception effect”, there is a demerit that the strategic strategy that can be selected by the player is narrowed.

  However, even when it is recognized whether or not the operation is a special operation reception effect, it is important that the staging strategy remains to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time of the acceptable reception sound (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) that is output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated, the “predetermined operation as the special operation reception effect (effective period)” is set. It is desirable to execute it as a non-output state when a specific time that is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of elapses. According to such a configuration, the allowable reception sound is not output when a specific time less than half of the predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (effective period) has elapsed. As long as the output state is maintained, it is possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Therefore, the “predetermined set time as the special operation reception effect (valid period) ( It is possible to provide staging strategy in a state in which more than half of the timings tr21 to tr23) ”are left.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception acceptance sound that is output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated is accepted when in the output state. Even though the output state is maintained, the acceptance sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated is forcibly terminated when the effect is received in the output state. I have to. That is, in this case, when an effect is received in a situation in which it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect (a situation where the specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound is output), the operation reception effect Is a “special operation reception effect” and whether a more highly anticipated aspect appears as a post-operation effect is an important concern, but one of them (the operation reception effect is “special operation reception effect” It can be easily recognized just by confirming whether or not the output state of the acceptable sound for acceptance has been terminated with the reception of the production. For example, even if it recognizes that the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not ended and the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the feeling is switched and “more expected as post-operation effect” It is expected to concentrate on “whether a high-level aspect has appeared”. In this case, the design is made so that there is a relationship that, when a mode with a higher expectation appears as a post-operation effect, the rate at which a special operation reception effect is newly generated is increased until the symbol is stopped. It is desirable.

  In addition, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, how much the effective time is displayed and the image display indicating the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception effect An indication of whether or not there is a remaining gauge is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display remains (displayed) and “the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. “Operation-induced processing using a production member” and “operation-caused processing using a second production member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the production is received reaches a predetermined time value” are started. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period is the timing at which the production is accepted based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the production is accepted. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the execution state related to the operation-induced process using the first effect member will be finished immediately. In addition, as a method of starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any of the examples described above or later, or an appropriate combination can be used.

  In special operation reception effects, if an operation-related display (prediction effect) that suggests the occurrence is performed before the reception of the effect is permitted, it is possible to operate immediately after the occurrence of the special operation reception effect. It is desirable to tighten. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player preferably enjoys the staging strategy over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation related display (prediction effect) that suggests the occurrence before the reception of the effect is permitted. As for the operation-related display, it is assumed that this is executed as “a short sign effect that is inferior to the timing suggestion function”. It is desirable to prevent it from being held.

  Here, as the operation-related display (a short-time indication effect lacking in the timing suggestion function) performed in the effect display device 1600 before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs, For example, it can be realized as an image or the like displayed in a fade-in state (such as a white image) when “image display with an operation means tricky” appears in a fade-in manner.

  FIG. 210 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to operation-related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and processing related to channel assignment of sound data including acceptable sound for reception. is there.

  In other words, ergonomically, the suggestion image (operation-related display) is only displayed for several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the effective period is generated. It is known that an operation can be performed so that an effect is received at an unexpected timing. However, even though it is for several frames, if the "image display with the manipulation means deceived" is displayed in the normal mode even though the valid period has not occurred, the "operation means There is a possibility that there will be a situation in which the presentation is not accepted even though the operation is performed in a state in which “displaying the image” is displayed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 210, the timing trA several frames before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started on the basis of the above, but in a situation where the effective period has not occurred, the “image display with the operation means hidden” is not displayed in the normal mode.

  More specifically, at the timing trA, a “allowable” that can be realized as a fade-in image in which the “image display with the operation means turned off” is displayed in a fade-in manner, a predetermined effect image, or the like. “Pre-operation related display” is started. Then, when the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11) arrives in a state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed, the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed and the “image showing the operation means” is displayed. The “display” is shifted to the state displayed in the normal mode.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, an acceptable reception sound is output that suggests that the production reception is permitted when the effective period occurs. As shown in FIG. 210, the acceptance allowable sound does not start its output at timing trA, but starts its output at timing tr1 (or timing tr11).

  In other words, in order to make it possible to perform operations so that presentations can be received at the timing immediately after the effective period occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is also output several frames before the effective period occurs. It seems that it may be desirable to make it. However, if the permissible reception sound is output several frames before the effective period occurs, the output timing will deviate from the appearance timing of “image display with manipulation means”. As a result, there may be a sense of incongruity as if a sound misalignment has occurred, and there is a concern about a decline in the entertainment interest of the game. On the other hand, during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is possible to output a pre-permission operation related sound different from the permissible reception sound. However, if the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period, the pre-permissible operation-related sound may not be an independent production sound, but may be heard as an integrated reception acceptable sound, Eventually, there is a concern that it may cause a sense of incongruity as if sound deviation has occurred.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowable operation-related display) is performed for several frames. While starting from the front, the operation-related sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound) is not executed intentionally, and only the acceptable sound is output when the valid period occurs. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 210, based on the arrival of the timing tr1, “acceptable sound including acceptable sound” is assigned to the channel to output the acceptable sound.

  In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable reception sound” to the channel is terminated, so that the acceptable reception sound is set to the non-output state. Yes. However, the “sound data including the acceptable sound to be accepted” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 210, when an effect is accepted between timings tr1 and tr2 (timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect is accepted is terminated and “image display tricking operation means” is displayed. "Is hidden. On the other hand, with respect to “sound data including acceptable reception sound”, the assignment state to the channel is maintained, and as described above, the acceptable reception sound is not forcibly terminated.

  FIG. 211 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing related to operation-related display when a special operation reception effect is performed and processing related to channel assignment of sound data including reception-acceptable sound.

  As shown in FIG. 211, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation related display (pre-allowable operation related display) is performed when the timing trB before the timing tr21 when the effective period occurs. However, the “period of timing trB to tr21” has a length exceeding twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the pre-permissible operation-related display displayed within, the “expectation degree about whether the post-operation presentation performed when the presentation is accepted is performed in a highly expected manner” or “expectation degree at which the jackpot symbol appears” As suggested, one of a plurality of performance modes can be selectively displayed. It should be noted that, in the situation where the effective period has not occurred, “image display with the manipulation means hidden” is not displayed in the normal mode, as in the example shown in FIG.

  For example, the “pre-permission operation-related display” started at timing trB is different in content from the “pre-permission operation-related display” shown in FIG. A plurality of effect images are repeatedly moved and displayed toward the location displayed at timing tr21), and a slight narrative effect having a story characteristic such as non-display at the location (explained with reference to FIGS. 166 to 184) Any aspect of “specific operation-related effects” may be applied). At this time, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as an effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives in a state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed in this way, the “image display with the operating means” in the normal mode from the state where the “pre-permission operation-related display” is displayed. It will move to the state displayed.

  In this regard, also in the special operation reception effect, as described above, when the effective period occurs, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 211, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data assigned to the channel at the timing trB.

  That is, as described above, the special operation reception effect is much larger than the “minimum time required for ergonomics to enable the operation immediately after the effective period occurs” before the effective period occurs. The “pre-allowance operation display” with high performance is performed using a long time (timing trB to tr21). Therefore, in order to further improve the performance in such an effect period (timing trB to tr21), an effect sound (pre-allowable operation related sound) corresponding to the “pre-permissible operation related display” displayed within the same period is output. It is desirable to make it. In addition, since the production period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the production, even if the production sound (pre-permission operation-related sound) is output within the period, acceptance is permitted. There can be no inconvenience that the sound can be heard as an integrated sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the pre-permissible operation related display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the pre-permissible operation related sound is output, and these output states are set to the timing tr21. To continue. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the state where the “pre-permissible operation related display” is displayed is shifted to the state where the “image display with the operating means is displayed” in the normal mode, and the “pre-permissible operation related display” is displayed. The state is shifted from the state where “sound” is output to the state where “acceptable sound” is output.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 211, one sound data including a reproduction section of “pre-permission operation related sound” and a reproduction section of “acceptance acceptable sound” based on the arrival of timing trB is used as a channel. By assigning them, the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, with respect to the reception allowable sound that is output when the effective period is generated, a part of the sound data that is assigned to the channel in a form extending from the predation effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a production sound played back during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the occurrence of the special operation reception effect (eg, when the precursor effect is generated), and the first half is an effect corresponding to the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display). The sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound) can flow to indicate when the special operation reception effect occurs, and after the effective period occurs, the channel assignment is based on the reception of the effect. Since it can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made aware that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect has been accepted. As an output method for “one sound data” including the playback section of “pre-allowance-related sound” and the playback section of “acceptable sound”, first, the expectation level (when symbol variation is stopped) After preparing multiple sound data with different ratios of jackpot symbols), any one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of the jackpot determination (or performance determination (notice determination etc.)) It is desirable to realize the above-described production sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating to the channel based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the playback section of “pre-allowable operation-related sound (prediction effect)”, but different in the playback section of “acceptable sound (operation reception effect)”. It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

  That is, in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect is accepted between the timings tr21 to tr22, the state in which the effect acceptance is permitted is terminated and “image display with an operation means trickled” is not displayed. In addition to this, the assignment state for the channel is also terminated for “sound data including acceptable sound”, and the output related to the acceptable sound is forcibly terminated midway. As described above. Therefore, the player can confirm that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect is accepted by confirming whether the acceptable sound is forcibly set to the non-output state when the effect is accepted. Can be recognized.

  Even if there is only one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the effect sound (pre-permissible operation related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-permissible operation related display) is in the playback state. In this situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation by the player is performed, this is not forcibly terminated. Only in the situation (timing tr21 to tr22) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the valid period is the playback state (timing tr21 to tr22), the assignment state to the channel is released. It becomes.

  The one sound data (sound data including the permissible operation-related sound and the permissible acceptance sound) is assigned before the timing trB and is already assigned at the timing trB. Also good. Further, as described above, the channel assignment state may be continued after timing tr22. For example, the channel assignment state may be continued until timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data ends at timing tr22.

  In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable reception sound” to the channel is terminated, so that the acceptable reception sound is set to the non-output state. Yes. However, the “sound data including the acceptable sound to be accepted” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2, for example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  In the configuration shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, “acceptance sound having a plurality of output states maintained in different lengths” is prepared as an acceptable reception sound accompanying the occurrence of an operation reception effect. Different permissible reception sounds are generated between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or second operation reception effect) with different post-operation effects. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the permissible reception sound is continued, the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) (or the first operation reception effect) are provided although there is a demerit that the staging strategy described above is reduced. It is possible to recognize which of the two operation reception effects is occurring.

  In addition, the plurality of acceptable reception sounds continue to be the first acceptable reception sound (special operation reception effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation by the player is accepted, and the output state continues. The second permissible reception sound (first and second operation reception effects) is included. Therefore, when the operation is performed so that the production is accepted while the acceptable sound is in the output state, the special operation acceptance is confirmed by confirming whether the output state of the acceptable sound is finished when the production is accepted. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptable reception sound is supposed to be in a non-output state when the valid period ends, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started. Doing so can interfere with the production. In this regard, in the example described above, the reception effect sound whose output state is ended when the effect is received is the first reception permission sound (the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( Special operation reception effect).

  In other words, in this case, when an effect is received in the output state of the “second reception permission sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively short”, the output state is maintained. However, since the time set value for maintaining the output state of the second acceptable sound is short in the first place, it will soon become a non-output state, and it can be said that it is unlikely that the production will be disturbed. On the other hand, when the presentation is accepted in the output state of the “first reception allowed sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively long”, the original time setting in which the output state is maintained. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so that the production is not disturbed.

  In addition, by confirming how long the reception allowable sound output state continues, it is recognized whether the special operation reception effect or the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player to be used, if the output state of the acceptable reception sound is maintained after the time set value for the second acceptable sound has passed, the first acceptable sound is not the second acceptable sound. It is possible to predict that is in a situation where is output. In this regard, without confirming that the output state of the first acceptable sound is terminated, by confirming that the first acceptable sound is set to the non-output state when the production reception is generated, It becomes possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception effect has occurred is correct.

  In the configuration shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, when the valid period of the operation reception effect is generated, the pre-permissible operation related display indicating that the valid period will soon occur is performed. The operation related display includes a first pre-permissible operation related display with a short display time (see FIG. 210) and a second pre-permissible operation related display with a long display time (see FIG. 211). In this regard, when the first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible reception sound” is unassigned to the channel, and “ By assigning “sound data including acceptable reception sound” to a channel, the acceptable reception sound is set in an output state. That is, in this case, the production sound corresponding to the first pre-permissible operation related display is not output, but the operation from the occurrence of the effective period is urged without causing a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-permissible operation related display having a long display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible reception sound” is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second pre-permissible operation related display is performed. In the allocation state, the acceptable sound is set to the output state by allowing the reproduction period of the acceptable sound to arrive in accordance with the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the occurrence of the special operation reception effect (eg, when the precursor effect is generated), and the first half is the precursor effect (display related to allowable pre-operation). In addition to being able to suggest the timing at which the special operation reception effect occurs due to the production sound (pre-allowable operation related sound) flowing according to the Since the channel assignment can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made aware that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect has been accepted.

  That is, in the pre-permissible operation related display shown in FIG. 211, the pre-permissible operation related sound corresponding to the pre-permissible operation related output is output and the acceptance allowable sound is further output when the effective period occurs. In the display, the permissible pre-permission operation related sound is not output and the permissible reception sound is output when the valid period occurs.

  In the above-described explanation example shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, as the “effect member”, an effect display device 1600, a speaker, an effect lamp, a movable decorative body, and the like can be used. In addition, as the “first effect member”, any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted. As the “second effect member”, Of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, any one different from the “first effect member” can be employed.

  In the example described above, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same or different between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). When the operation means to be operated are different, the haze images displayed in each effective period are different.

  In the first operation reception effect, “the operation-induced process using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” is executed as the post-operation effect. "The operation-induced process using the first effect member that is executed until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "The execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" The operation-induced process using the second effect member ”may be executed as the post-operation effect. Still further, an operation-induced process using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation effect according to the first operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The cause process is also executed on the assumption that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

  In the second operation reception effect, “the operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value” is executed as the post-operation effect. However, “the operation-caused process using the first effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the reception timing of the effect reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing in the effect pattern has arrived. The operation-induced process using the second effect member whose execution state is continued until it is performed ”may be executed as the post-operation effect. Still further, an operation-induced process using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation effect according to the second operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The cause processing is also executed as being continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the presentation is received reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception effect, “the operation-caused process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received” The operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the predetermined time value is reached "is executed as the post-operation effect, but an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. The operation-caused process used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, an operation-induced process that is executed as if the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received is a predetermined time What is necessary is just to be mixed with the operation-induced process executed as being continued until the value is reached.

  Further, in the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 207 to 211, the effective period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the effective period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I try to do it. By setting such a long time, it becomes possible to enjoy the effective period having the staging strategy described above.

  In the first pre-permissible operation related display with a short display time (see FIG. 210), “expectation as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is performed in a highly expected manner” or “big hit” Although the “expected degree of appearance of the symbol” is not suggested, in the second pre-permission operation-related display (see FIG. 211) having a long display time, the “post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is the expected value” It is desirable to be able to suggest the “expectation as to whether it is performed in a high manner” or “expectation as to which a jackpot symbol appears”.

  In the “valid period of special operation reception effect” set as a relatively long time value, by causing one of a plurality of display modes having different expectations to appear, “after the operation performed when the effect is received” It is desirable to be able to suggest the “expectation degree regarding whether or not the performance is performed in a highly expected manner” or “expectation degree at which the jackpot symbol appears”.

  In addition, in the special operation reception effect, even if the effect is received at any timing within the valid period, “the effect by the first effect member generated due to the effect reception” is “because of the effect reception” In order to make the player recognize that the execution content is the same as the post-operation effect, so that the execution state is terminated earlier than the “production by the second effect member that occurs”. desirable.

  In the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 207 to 211, as the pachinko machine 1, the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect can be generated based on establishment of different production conditions. However, the first operation reception effect is not generated as being not installed, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be generated as being not mounted, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are not mounted, and they do not occur, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of a predetermined effect condition. .

  The special operation reception effects shown in the above-described explanation examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211 output specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to the channel in a suppression manner or silence. In particular, a state in which the reception of the production is permitted may be generated.

[More detailed performance for acceptable sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Among them, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination or the like) regarding which expected effect (notice effect or the like) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is made, the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display the contents of the effect according to the result of the effect determination, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected production related to is provided as a production having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the identification of the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination. When any variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the pattern effect based on the specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance Is allowed to generate an operation reception effect (valid period). However, as will be described later, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the operation reception effect is generated has a different aspect depending on the result of the effect determination, and thus the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is suggested to indicate the ratio of being played and the ratio of jackpot symbols being stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) that are not formed even in the reach state as a result of the variation pattern determination. Even if there is a special result in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the operation is permitted to receive the effect when the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern has progressed to the predetermined timing. The reception effect (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, an operation reception effect (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. . In addition, the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs with a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern has advanced to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of the above-mentioned “specific variation pattern”, the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, an operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is determined in advance for an effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Only the post-operation effect that causes a change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. The presentation effect (valid period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation effect is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” corresponding to the change pattern (effect pattern) is not suppressed. During the execution period of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the high expectation change pattern (specific change pattern), the change pattern (effect pattern) The corresponding “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence, or is not output (the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has expired, the channel assignment In other words, it is possible to generate at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity.

  In such a configuration, when the operation opportunity is given, the output in the non-suppression mode of “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is maintained (low expected non-suppression reception effect), and “BGM playback” “(Specific type of production sound)” may be output in a suppression mode or silence, or may be in a non-output state (suppression operation reception effect), and modes related to these operation reception effects (low expectation non-suppression reception) The ratio of winning the jackpot (expectation) varies depending on the production and the high expectation suppression reception production), so the performance when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given “ Amusement entertainment can be improved by the effect of whether or not “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is suppressed.

  However, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, since “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppression mode or in silence when an operation opportunity is given, compared to the low expectation non-suppression reception effect There is concern that the performance will be poor.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when a low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is an acceptable sound. Can be output as. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in performance when a high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated is greater than the acceptable reception sound that is output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. This is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time, and this also favorably suppresses that the staging performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs is poor.

  On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state when an operation opportunity is given. There is also an aspect that it becomes possible to make the production sound according to this when the post-production occurs, and in this respect, it can be said that it is useful for improving the game entertainment. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, with regard to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, the production is accepted when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state. Then, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the presentation is accepted. As a result, the production sound according to the post-operation production can be made to stand out without being disturbed by the acceptable reception sound.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is “when the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is permitted, the post-operation effect is not generated and the set time ends. "Non-automatic reception mode that can be generated", as well as "automatic reception mode that can generate a post-operation effect even if no operation is detected within a set time for which the reception of the effect is allowed" Can also be generated.

  That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which no operation is performed by the player, and as a result, the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. However, as will be described later, more precisely, the output time for the production sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the operation detects the output time for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect. It is designed to be shorter than when it was done.

  Moreover, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when no operation is detected, the production reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (the automatic button function is enabled). The post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. That is, in this case, since the reception of the production always occurs before the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the production may be received within the set time within the time after the specific timing. As a result, the length of the valid period during which the production reception is allowed is substantially reduced. Thus, unlike the case where the post-operation production is started after the set time has expired, the automatic button function is activated in such a way that the production tempo is accelerated rather than causing a production delay. Can be realized.

  In addition, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity will be substantially lost even though the set time has not passed. The player side is also afraid of this, and is expected to actively operate at an earlier stage within the set time, or to play with a sense of tension with respect to the performance.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the “gauge display of how much effective time remains” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed until a specific timing at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable not to indicate the remaining time, but to be displayed as indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed at a time point before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes “0”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, An acceptable reception sound suggesting that the stage reception is allowed or the stage reception is allowed can be output. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a situation in which the production reception is automatically generated when the user forgets to operate, and the production reception cannot be generated by his own operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated, the specification is not output when the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Since the sound can be output as the above-mentioned acceptable reception sound, the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated instead of the non-automatic reception mode by checking the type of the allowable reception sound. You will be able to recognize that

  On the other hand, in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a mode with low expectation. Therefore, it is not always necessary to improve the game entertainment effect so that the post-operation effect is performed. There is also an aspect that is not limited. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception allowable sound is output for a sufficient time to suggest that the production reception is permitted, the reception allowable sound in the output state is displayed. By completing the process relatively early, “a time during which it is possible to think about whether or not to produce a production reception” is created while no acceptable sound is output.

  However, even in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, if the allowable reception sound is ended early, there is a concern that it may cause a misunderstanding that “the reception of the production is no longer allowed due to the automatic button functioning”. Arise. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, the output state of the acceptable sound for acceptance is maintained for a relatively long time, so that the automatic button is not yet functioning and the production reception is permitted. This suggests that the player is in a state, and as a result, the player can be prompted to perform an operation with a sense of security that “the automatic button has not yet functioned”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect, “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state. An operation opportunity is given while a suppression reception effect (here, a high expectation suppression reception effect) or “BGM playback (a specific type of production sound)” is output in a non-suppression mode. The non-suppression reception effect (here, the low expectation non-suppression reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, or the production reception is permitted, or the production reception The technical feature is that each of the acceptable reception sounds suggesting that the sound is allowed is generated in a manner that further enhances its original performance.

  In the following, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, the “acceptable sound” will be described again. It suggests that the output has started within the set time and the reception of the production is allowed, or the output is started before the set time when the reception of the production is allowed and the production is accepted. For example, it is output as a production sound such as “Pikine”. However, in the case where the output state is set before the set time for which the production reception is permitted occurs, the output state of the “acceptable sound” is maintained in a manner that crosses the timing at which the set time occurs ( Within the set time (within the period during which production reception is permitted)) is required, and the time from when the “acceptable sound” is set to the output state until the set time occurs, It is desirable to set so that the time from when the set time occurs until the output state of the “acceptable sound” ends is longer. In this sense, “acceptable sound” is output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that the output sound is within the set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by the player or with the lapse of the output time.

  Further, the “acceptable sound” may be output as a single effect sound data assigned to a channel (see FIG. 210) or other effect sounds (for example, set time (valid period) ) Which is assigned to a channel and output as a single effect sound data combined with a prelude effect executed before the occurrence of), a production sound output in accordance with the above-mentioned “specific operation-related production”, etc. (Refer to FIG. 211), and a method for realizing it may be adopted as appropriate.

  FIG. 212 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short time), the start condition is established (holding digestion), and the change pattern determination is performed. If “pattern” is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. After that, a decorative effect variation effect (such as an effect depiction according to a predetermined variation pattern or a sound output of BGM playback according to a predetermined variation pattern) is started, and a notice effect is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed on the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected “predetermined variation pattern”. In addition, including each effect example described below, the effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination (main control side), and the notice determination (sub) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. When the control side) is performed, regarding the process related to the notice effect, “fluctuation pattern determination” may be replaced with “effect pattern determination”, and “variation pattern” may be replaced with “effect pattern”.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined change pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the change effect of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 212 (b). An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated when a timing tr32 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start is reached. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern)
-Set a set time during which the reception of the production is allowed while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the variation pattern (the production pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. 212 (a) and (b)) ”and when no operation is detected within a set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the reception of the production is permitted, the post-operation production does not occur and “Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 212 (j))” where the set time is ended
It is generated as a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” executed by.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expectation variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), the operation reception effect is generated by the “BGM playback sound” being in the suppression mode. Because the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed without suddenly appearing, such as suggesting, is suddenly set (non-suppression reception production), it is surprising from the player's side As a result, a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when attempting to operate. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time ends without any post-operation effects (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity for the production after the operation, it is preferable to feel tension when the production (production pattern) for the low-expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is being executed. Can be maintained.

  However, although it is executed as such a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without generating a post-operation effect against the player's intention. If such a thing occurs frequently, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 212 (b), (c), and (g), a set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs. However, when the timing tr31 comes a little before, the output of the “acceptable sound” is started, and the output state is maintained in a manner straddling the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production acceptance is permitted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. It is expected that it is difficult to frequently generate that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without producing an effect. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is generated. For example, the “acceptable sound” is matched to the generation timing tr32 of the set time. May be generated.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the “acceptable sound”, the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as “Pickin!” And “Press!” And a second allowable sound that is output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 212 (d) and (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), The second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. A delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate.

  By the way, during the execution period of the production (production pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time (valid period) or execution as a non-automatic reception mode, A player who tries to not miss the opportunity to produce post-operation effects by repeatedly hitting the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) from when the stage reception is not permitted may appear. It is done. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect is started immediately after the acceptance of the effect, the started effect is “what is performed in response to the effect reception (post-operation effect)”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is “automatically generated as a mere notice effect that is not related to the reception of the effect”, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212 (particularly, FIG. 212 (c)), in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (effective period) occurs. When the production is accepted at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself ends, while the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not terminated halfway. The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output is completed as one permissible sound (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 212 (g)). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is “what is being performed (post-operation effect)” or “automatically generated as a notice effect that is not related to the effect reception” Kill as to become.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 212, when the production is accepted within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the production display device 1600 (the first display) is used as the post-operation production according to the production reception. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in one effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated at least. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, in any state where the stage is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are obtained when the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 212, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (valid period) is set has arrived, the operation means that is the operation target in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is displayed in the effect display device 1600. A hazy habit image is displayed, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is performed. For example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted as the display method for the heel image or gauge display, and the display image (the heel image or gauge display) is that the production acceptance has occurred. Based on this, they are hidden (both are not displayed at the same timing).

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a “special effect mode (automatic button effect state)” that enables the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. The player may be allowed to set and cancel the “special effect mode” by operation of the player. That is, in this case, even in the operation reception effect that occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), in the state that is set to “special effect mode” "Non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" only when it is "non-suppression reception effect" and is executed in the above-described "automatic reception mode" and is not set to "special effect mode". Will occur. However, in the description (especially, “more detailed rendering characteristics regarding acceptable reception sound” and related descriptions), unless otherwise noted, the “special rendering mode” is not set. In some cases, the pachinko machine 1 is described as an example of production when the “special production mode” is not installed.

  FIG. 213 and FIG. 214 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), the start condition is established (holding digestion), and as a result of the change pattern judgment, “high reach expected to develop into SP reach (reach production with background change etc.) Assuming that a “specific variation pattern” is selected from among the “variation patterns”, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After that, the decorative design variation effect (such as the rendering of the effect according to the specific variation pattern and the sound output of the BGM playback according to the specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect corresponding to the result (notice effect) is additionally executed on the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected “specific variation pattern”.

  However, as described above, in the production (production pattern) relating to the “specific variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), no matter which result is obtained as the production determination (notice determination). In addition, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated when a timing tr42 (a timing in the SP reach state) when a specific time has elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation effect is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 in the specific variation pattern is as follows.
-“Suppression acceptance effect (FIG. 213 (a))” is set for a set time during which the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is output in the suppression mode or in silence. , (See (b)) ”, and even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the reception of the production is permitted, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the production reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation production is started based on the reception of the production "automatic reception" Aspect (see FIG. 213 (j)) ”
It is generated as a “suppression / automatic reception effect” executed by. In addition, as a technique for outputting the “BGM playback sound” in a suppression manner or silence, a method of setting a silent section (suppression section) in advance in the data of the “BGM playback sound” itself, A method of changing the volume value for a channel to which “BGM playback sound” is assigned to a suppression value (for example, “0”), a combination thereof, or the like may be employed. As will be described later, this “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also referred to as “second suppression operation reception effect”, and the suppression mode here is also referred to as “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, “BGM playback sound” is suppressed during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the highly expected variation pattern (the SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific variation pattern). Since a set time (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted is set with a production such as suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception production by outputting in a mode or silence (suppression reception) Production) From the player's side, it becomes easy to perform an operation immediately after the operation acceptance production occurs. In addition, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. (Automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that does not miss the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” as well, as in the above-mentioned “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 4, when the timing tr41 slightly before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the production reception is permitted occurs, the output of the “acceptable sound” is started, and the timing tr42 is straddled. In this way, the output state is maintained. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the “BGM playback sound” is being output in a suppressed manner or in silence, a state in which the stage reception is allowed at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be difficult to make frequent appearances that "there will be acceptance by the activation of the automatic button function, not the player's own operation, contrary to the player's will" Become so. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs. For example, the “acceptable sound” is generated in accordance with the set time generation timing tr42. You may do it.

  However, the timing tr40 at which the “BGM playback sound” is shifted from the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode to the state of being output in the suppressed mode or silence (or the non-output state) is described above. In order to obtain the effect (suppression acceptance effect) suitably, as shown in FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c), the relationship "the length of timings tr40 to tr41> the length of timings tr41 to tr42". Therefore, it can be said that it is important to set it so that it arrives much earlier than “the above-described reception start timing tr41 of the permissible reception sound that precedes the set time”.

  In the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (c), (d), (g), and (h), the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above. Unlike the case of “,” as the “acceptable sound”, not only the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as “Pickin!” But also the second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as “Press!” Also, the output is started when the timing tr41 arrives, and the output state is maintained in a manner straddling the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, in the effect display device 1600, which one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 1 is to be operated is determined. Since there is a possibility that it can be recognized when the eyelid image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), the operation reception effect is generated immediately. It becomes easy to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is set as the operation target, a message sound such as “Press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as “Say me!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  In the production example shown in FIG. 213, the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are started to be output at the same time. The output state may be sequentially set. In this case, output of only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started from a state where the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and 213 (h), the “first allowable sound” is adopted as the effect sound that is output for a relatively short time, and the “second allowable sound” is used. Is used as a production sound output over a relatively long time, but the length relationship between these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, for the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound”, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and (h), the output states are maintained over different times and the outputs are maintained. It is desirable that the time when the state is ended (the time when the state is made inaudible) is made to arrive at different timings before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated depends on whether the “acceptable sound” is in the following situation. As a result, it is expected that it will be difficult to frequently produce “acceptance of production by the activation of the automatic button function, not the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention”.
The first situation where both the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” maintain the output state. • The output state of one of the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” is maintained. However, the other has finished the output state (the state has been made inaudible) The second situation ・ "First permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" both have finished the output state Third situation (being inaudible)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. 212 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, “Pikkin!”) Is output as the “first allowable sound”. In other words, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output as the effect sound that is not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, but the sound effect ( The first permissible sound) can be output as an output sound that is also output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, so that the “BGM playback sound” is in a state of being suppressed. While maintaining the performance (preferably the second permissible sound), it is possible to more easily recognize that the performance acceptance is permitted (first permissible sound).

  In addition, the timing tr41-tr42 (or timing tr31-tr32) in the case where the reception allowable sound (the first allowable sound, the second allowable sound) is output prior to the set time (effective period) or the haze image display. This time may be a minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be a time of two frames or more. That is, if the player can output the set time (valid period) or the spear image display as much as possible, the player is in a state where the stage reception is permitted, or the operation means that is the operation target. Is likely to be recognized earlier by the amount of time that precedes it, so the time until the set time ends or when the automatic button function is activated It is expected to suppress forgetting to perform an operation within a period until it arrives.

  By the way, as described above, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity can be lost by enabling the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (effective period). It is. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 213 (c) and 213 (d), unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 212 (c), an acceptable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound). When an effect is received when the device is in the output state, the output state is terminated based on the reception of the effect. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is performed, the output of the allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and the state where the performance reception is permitted ( It is possible to recognize that the (valid period) has ended, so “the reception of the stage has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be activated (the state where the operation opportunity can be lost)” It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is in In addition, in the set time (valid period), when an operation is performed at a timing before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated and an effect is received, the effect is received at the time when the effect is received. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tr42A arrives, since the state where the acceptance is permitted ends.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, when an effect is received within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr42a), an effect display device 1600 ( The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated at least. More specifically, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), at a specific timing that comes after the timing tr43. In contrast to the non-display (not visible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) maintains the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is accepted. ing.

  However, as shown in FIG. 213, the effect sound output after the operation (effect sound) is “BGM playback sound” even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 at which “is returned from the suppressed state (silent state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode has arrived. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the output state is terminated at timing tr44 when the “BGM playback sound” is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both “BGM playback sound” is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the contents related to the display effect are switched. It is expected to be greatly changed and improve the game entertainment. The “BGM playback sound” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be terminated not at the timing tr44 but at a specific timing after the timing tr44.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the operation means that is the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. A hazy habit image is displayed, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is performed. In this regard, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, “Press!”) Is output as the second allowable sound, the display device 1600 also has a non-automatic reception mode. A message display (for example, “Press!”) That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in the above is displayed. Note that, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted as the display method for the bag image, gauge display, and message display, and these display images (the bag image, gauge display, and message display). Is hidden (they are not displayed at the same timing) at a stage where the set time has not yet elapsed based on the fact that the production acceptance has occurred. The message display may not necessarily completely match the content of the message sound, and may be anything that prompts the operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to (i), the timing before the time tr42A when the automatic button function within the set time (valid period) is activated. In contrast, the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible), while the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, After the automatic button function is activated, it is not hidden (not visible) until at least the timing tr43 when the set time ends is reached. After that, the display state may be maintained. Since the set time (valid period) ends when the production is accepted, the set time (valid period) actually ends at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, strictly speaking, the “timing tr43 when the set time ends” means the timing that is ended when the set time continues, and the time set at the timing tr42. This is the timing that comes when the time tr42 has elapsed.

  According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display is not hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target prompted by the message display. It will be possible to suggest to the player that the situation is not in place. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it may indicate that no production reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception effect (FIG. 212) that is not executed in the automatic button mode and the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) that is executed in the automatic button mode. Within the set time (valid period), the remaining time display (gauge display) that suggests the remaining time until the state where the acceptance of the production is permitted is completed can be performed. In the operation reception effect (FIG. 212) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses, and when this time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that it becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without detecting the operation, the automatic button function is activated and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, even if the set time has not yet elapsed after the specific timing tr42A has arrived, the stage reception is not allowed. Therefore, if the “remaining time display (gauge display) that suggests the remaining time until the state where the effect reception is permitted” is performed within the set time of the operation reception effect (FIG. 213), it is normal. It is conceivable that the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed on the basis of the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode is permitted after the specific timing tr42A has arrived. Despite the disappearance, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. It is made to display. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that it becomes “0”. However, here, since the stage is always shifted to the state where the stage reception is not allowed before the set time becomes “0”, the stage reception is not allowed with the gauge amount remaining. It will be transferred to the state.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is accepted when the automatic button function is enabled, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is left unintentionally. On the other hand, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of “losing the operation opportunity”, which makes it possible to operate at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount in the set time (valid period) from the next time. Can be encouraged to do.

  Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is generated by the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time has elapsed ( Gauge display) can be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the production reception is generated by the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in the state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is performed. Until the time has elapsed, the "dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

  According to such a configuration, when the presentation is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamic until at least the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is no situation in which the production is accepted by detecting the operation on the operation target that is prompted by the message sound or the message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it may indicate that no production reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target based on the result of the notice effect determination. There are cases. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion depending on which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the reception of presentation is permitted occurs, the set time is 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr32 in FIG. 212, there is no “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated may be set after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation where opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operating means is operated, it is desirable to receive the presentation and execute the post-operation presentation. In other words, the player may be confused if there is a situation in which the production is not accepted despite operating the operating means. Since it is harsh to seek further operations on the operating means on the side, even if the wrong operating state is maintained, the production is accepted when the operating means on the operating side is operated It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the matters described in the “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 142)” described above and other examples thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 213 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. Become.

  However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, so that the performance is poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect. Is concerned. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the allowable reception sound that is output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is greater than the allowable reception sound that is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. The sound can be output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained are different. A plurality of modes are selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 212 (c) and (g) and FIGS. 213 (c) and (g). "Is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound.

  It should be noted that “which one of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound” and “which one of a plurality of operation means is used as the operation target” are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained within the notice effect determination as one determination result. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible case is either the case where the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the case where the “sword decorative body 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound can be selected. In addition, the second mode and the third mode can be selected regardless of whether the “operation button 410” is an operation target or the “sword decorative body 5001” is an operation target. You may do it.

  FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the second aspect is used as the first acceptable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  As shown in FIG. 214, this effect example is basically the same as the case of the effect example described above with reference to FIG. Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect determination, at the timing tr41, the first allowable sound is output not in the first mode but in a second mode longer than the first mode. Here, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained for a longer time than the second allowable sound.

  According to such a configuration, the output allowable sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output over a longer time than the reception allowable sound (first mode) output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it is possible to output as a maintained sound, the performance is suitably maintained even in a situation where “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence when an operation opportunity is given Will be able to.

  Further, in order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, for the first allowable sound output in the second mode, a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is used. It is desirable to do.

  In contrast, in FIGS. 213 and 214, there are “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target. Therefore, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner (for example, “Press!”) As in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 214 (c) and 214 (g), the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. However, the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated (non-audible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activated timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the acceptable sound to be accepted.

  In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the “second allowable sound” output in the effect example shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to estimate in detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated is reached, compared to the case of the production example in FIG. become. In addition, since only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output in a longer different mode (second mode), the player side first uses the first permissible sound in common. 2 Estimate the “remaining time until the arrival of timing tr42A” with reference to the timing when the output state of the allowable sound is terminated, and in this way, the first allowable sound is Since it becomes possible to make a more detailed guess as a challenge, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 214, the other matters are the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. 213. The point that the state is terminated halfway is the same as in the case of the production example shown in FIG.

  When the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) occurs in the state set to the “special effect mode”, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be activated by the player's intention, the message display is possible even when the production is accepted by the automatic button function being activated. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and is not displayed before the timing tr43 (the timing when the presentation is accepted or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). At this time, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive in the output state when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. It is desirable to function so that the first allowable sound that arrives in the output state and is output in the second mode is terminated halfway.

  Further, when the first permissible sound (sound effect as a permissible reception sound) is output in the first aspect and when the first permissible sound (sound effect as the permissible reception sound) is output in the second aspect In addition to the different times during which the output state is maintained, different production sounds may be used. For example, when outputting the first allowable sound (sound effect as an acceptable reception sound) in the first mode, an effect sound such as “Pikine” is output, and the first allowable sound (sound effect as an acceptable reception sound) is the second. When outputting in a mode, it is possible to output a production sound such as “Gaogao”.

  In the example described above, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as “a fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed”. The effect example shown in FIG. 212 may be performed when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the variation patterns.

  In addition, it is desirable that the “suppression / automatic reception effect” exemplified in the above explanation example cannot appear in the low expectation variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) when in the normal gaming state. The “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in the explanation example can also appear in a highly expected variation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) including the above-mentioned “specific variation pattern” in the normal gaming state. . That is, even in the case of a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the production pattern), the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (basically) before the production progress to the SP reach state such as a non-reach state. Since the effect that appears also in the effect pattern) is executed, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 212 can also appear during the period. Even in such a configuration, when “suppression / automatic reception effect” appears (high expectation variation pattern), when “non-suppression / nonautomatic acceptance effect” appears (low expectation variation pattern or high expectation variation pattern) It can be said that the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbol appearing higher when the symbol variation is stopped than the pattern).

  In addition, in the low expectation variation pattern (corresponding production pattern) that occurs in the normal gaming state, “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence when an operation opportunity is given. It is desirable that the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. This is a state where the “special effect mode” is not set, or when the “special effect mode” is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, regarding the length of time from “timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated” to “timing tr43 when the set time elapses after the reception of the presentation is permitted”, the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be 1 frame) or may be a time of 2 frames or more. For example, the message display can be visually recognized at “timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated”, and such a visible state is at least “timing tr43 at which the set time has elapsed since the acceptance of the production is permitted”. If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (valid period), and there is a possibility of recognizing that no operation by the player was performed To be able to In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception effect, a message sound (second allowable sound) and a message display are displayed for “timing when the automatic button function is activated” within the set time. It is desirable to output in the relationship described above (see FIGS. 213 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 214 (h) and (i)).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIG. 213 (i) and FIG. 214 (i), “the amount of time that the message display remains after the presentation is accepted (in the example in the figure, timing tr42A to tr43 ”) Is also shown when an effect is received at another timing (FIG. 212 (e), FIG. 213 (e), etc.) due to the common use of the program. This program may be used only when the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 212 (e), the operation related display is hidden at timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 213 (e), the operation related display is hidden at timing tr42a. Become.

  In the example described above (FIGS. 212 to 214), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect) by the speaker (second effect member). Sound) are started at the same time, but post-operation effects may be performed so as to shift the start time of these effects. For example, in a situation where a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by a speaker (second effect member) is started at timing tr42, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) has a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed in accordance with the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 212 to 214 is not displayed yet (or the timing when the fade-out process is started). If it is started, the display effects can be switched smoothly.

  As described in the above “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 142)”, also in the effect examples shown in FIGS. An effect (for example, the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect”) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectation levels where the jackpot symbol appears as the sign effect, and perform the sign effect in any of these modes. Also, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the warning effect sound output during the period in which the warning effect is performed, and whether to output the warning effect sound in a plurality of modes depends on the execution mode of the warning effect. It is desirable to select them. On the other hand, for the first permissible sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed while the hail image to be operated, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display of “Press!” It is output in any one of a plurality of modes including a mode.

  212 to 214, when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213 or 214 is generated, a specific sound (second sound) that is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is generated. Since the first permissible sound or the second permissible sound of the aspect can be output as the permissible reception sound, it is preferable to suitably suppress the presentation performance when the suppression operation reception effect is generated. Will be able to. In addition, by confirming the type of acceptable reception sound, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode.

  In addition, regarding the acceptable sound for the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 212), a first allowable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a sound effect and a second allowable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a message sound. Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output, while the acceptance permissible sound of the suppression operation acceptance effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) is the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound. Both two allowable sounds are output. This makes it possible to favorably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception effect is being performed.

  Further, in the above effect example, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 212) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) (FIGS. 212 and 213). ) And a case where different effect sounds are output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 212 and 214).

  In other words, if an acceptable reception sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the production reception is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Accordingly, the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is normally output. It is desirable. Then, while the acceptance allowable sound is output in such a manner, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a production sound (second aspect) that is not normally output with a predetermined probability. If the ratio (expectation) in which the jackpot symbol appears higher than when it was output in the first mode, the “BGM playback (specific It is possible to favorably maintain the performance when the “type of effect sound)” is in the state of being output in the suppression mode or silence. In obtaining such an operation effect, when a suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first acceptable sound in an effect determination such as a notice effect determination. It is desirable that the ratio for determining the effect is higher than the ratio for determining the output of the second mode.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, not only the operation reception effect (FIG. 212) executed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) executed in the automatic reception mode. In the event of the occurrence, the reception acceptance sound that suggests that the reception of the production is permitted or that the reception of the production is permitted can be output. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one's own operation opportunity is lost.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within the set time (valid period). It is determined that the reception of the effect is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without receiving the effect according to the operation detection. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be started within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not there is an operation. It becomes possible to make it an automatic button without making the flow of the subsequent production different from the case where there is no, or causing the production delay.

  Further, in the above-described production example, “message sound that prompts to be operated (second allowable sound)” may be output as the allowable sound, and the message sound (second allowable sound) must be operated. It is not output in the “operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode” that is not received, but can be output only in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode” that is received without operation. Yes.

  That is, it is possible to output a message sound (second allowable sound) that directly expresses that the operation should be performed, or to allow many types of allowable reception sounds (first allowable sound, It is considered that the second permissible sound) should be output. However, in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a mode with low expectation, so that the post-operation effect is performed. It is not always good to operate it in order to improve the game entertainment. In this regard, the “operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode” is an effect that allows selection such as “do not generate a post-operation effect”. “Automatic reception” that does not output the message sound (second permissible sound) directly and does not output the message sound (second permissible sound) and does not have the right to generate a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second allowable sound) only at the “operation reception effect executed in the mode” or to output more types of allowable reception sound. In addition, in the “operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode”, if the set time ends without receiving the effect, the post-operation effect and the related effect will not be performed. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In the non-moving reception effect, no message sound is output in any operation reception effect, but in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode”, a message sound is not output. An operation reception effect may be included.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of modes (“press!” And “put your sword!”) As the message sound (second allowable sound), and the effects shown in FIGS. 213 and 214. In the example, depending on which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is the object to which the operation opportunity is given (based on the result of the notice effect determination), any one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected. I am trying to output. In this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and a message sound corresponding to the operation button 410 (“Press!”) Is output, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. Compared to when the message sound corresponding to the message (“Say me!”) Is output, it suggests that “the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped” in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception The ratio (expectation) in which the production mode appears is set low. The ratio (expected degree) at which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  On the other hand, in the example of production shown in FIG. 212, the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not a sword ornament 5001, the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. In addition, at least in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that a post-operation effect that is executed when an effect is received with an operation reception effect that does not output a message sound, "a jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped" The ratio (expected degree) of the effect mode to be played is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect is received in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. “A big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped” It is set to be lower than the ratio (expected degree) in which the production mode suggesting “ In addition, 0% may be sufficient as the ratio (expectation degree) where the said production | presentation aspect appears, and 100% may be sufficient as it.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, “whether the message sound (second allowable sound) is output” becomes a branch point for knowing the level of expectation, and the message sound ( When the second allowable sound) is output, it is possible to know the level of expectation according to the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as an operation target, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is output, the post-operation effect can be enjoyed with relatively high expectation. become. Therefore, when a message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the expectation level is relatively low, and “sword ornament 5001” that is used only when the expectation level is high is an operation target. Will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the right to select whether to generate the post-operation effect by performing the post-operation effect in a non-automatic reception mode.

  In the operation reception effect executed in FIGS. 213 and 214, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed when a set time (valid period) occurs. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to (i) and FIGS. 214 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period). The output state is ended (inaudible) before tr42A, while the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, Furthermore, after the automatic button function is activated, it is not hidden (not visible) until at least the timing tr43 when the set time ends. In other words, in this case, when an effect is received by an operation by the player within the set time, the message display may be hidden when the set time has not elapsed in accordance with the effect received. When the automatic button function is activated, the message display (“Press!” Or “Say me!”) Is continuously displayed at least until the set time is over.

  According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display is not hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target prompted by the message display. It will be possible to suggest to the player that the situation is not in place. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it may indicate that no production reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is enabled, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) when the effect is received by the automatic button function being enabled at the timing tr42A. Since the amount of gauge in the game will be left unintentionally, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of “losing the opportunity to operate” against the intention of the player. In the set time (valid period), it is possible to prompt the user to perform an operation at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is enabled, when the automatic button function is enabled and the effect is received, the remaining time display (gauge display) is set at least. The dynamic display is continued until the time has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is no situation in which an effect has been received by detecting an operation on an operation target whose operation is prompted by a message sound or a message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it may indicate that no production reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

  In addition, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213 output the same effect sound (first allowable sound of the first mode) as the reception allowable sound. Even when the operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to appropriately convey to the player that the operation opportunity is being given. In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213, since the second allowable sound that is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is also output, which of these operation reception effects occurs? Can also be recognized. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in the specific variation pattern (corresponding production pattern), the ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 213 is relatively high. The rate executed in the mode shown is relatively low, and when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 214, the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol is relatively high. That is, in this case, the first permissible sound is not the “first mode” and the “second mode” that is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. Since it will be output in this way, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, an effect sound in which the output state is maintained for a long time as compared with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 214), it is possible to suitably maintain the performance when “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is in a suppression mode or in a situation where it is output in silence. become able to.

  Moreover, in the effect example (suppression operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. The same acceptable sound for reception (first acceptable sound of the first aspect) as that when the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 212) is generated can be generated. In addition, when the first permissible sound is output with the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the effect sound (first output is maintained for only a short time). In the aspect), a new performance is added by making the ratio of symbol stoppage with a big hit symbol higher than when the first permissible sound is output (FIG. 213). This makes it possible to recognize that the reception of the production is permitted, while providing the performance when “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is being output in a suppression mode or in silence. It can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the first allowable sound is output with the production sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the first allowable sound is output. If the presentation is accepted during the period in which the sound is being output, it is set to a non-output (non-audible) state even during the output stage (see FIG. 214 (c)). . On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (first mode) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 212 and 213), the first permissible sound is “suppressing operation acceptance effect”. ”Or“ operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode ”(FIG. 213), and when an effect is received during the output, this is not output (non-audible) at that time (See FIGS. 212 (c) and 213 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 212, even if the effect is accepted when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Note that the first permissible sound is in the output state even during the period from the timing tr41 to tr42. However, during the period, the presentation is not received even if the operation is detected, so the first permissible sound is not received. Needless to say, the output state is not interrupted.

  That is, as described above, in the non-suppression operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)”. The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, the post-operation effect may not be generated unlike when the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, there is a concern that it may be difficult to understand whether the effect is a post-operation effect or a notice effect unrelated to the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such a concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduction data (FIG. 212). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need for repeated hits. Therefore, in order to suppress a game due to such repeated hits, the first allowable sound is the first and second modes. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the data was output (intermediate output stop).

  Note that even if the presentation is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display will be within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. It may be displayed continuously until the timing of ending, or the dynamic display may be continued until the timing when the remaining time display (gauge display) ends within the set time (described above). Shared programs).

  In addition, as described above, in the post-operation effects, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a low-expected aspect, so that the operation so that the post-operation effects are performed is performed in order to improve game entertainment. It is not always good. In this regard, in the effect example (non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. 212, it is relatively early if the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output for a time sufficient to suggest that the production acceptance is permitted. By using the mode (first mode) that is terminated at the same time, “time for determining whether or not to generate an effect is generated” is created while no acceptable sound is output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), since it is not necessary to create such a time, the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same aspect (first aspect). In addition, there is a case where the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a longer mode (second mode) than this, and it is suggested that the degree of expectation varies depending on the mode. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptable sound for a relatively long time, it is possible to suggest that the automatic button function has not been activated yet, and there is a sense of security. In particular, the player can be prompted to perform an operation.

  In the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), the automatic button function is activated even when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 214). The reception permission sound (first permission sound) is made inaudible before the arrival timing tr42A, and the two reception permission sounds (first permission sound and second permission sound) are set at different timings. I try to end it.

  As a result, it is possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive until the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) becomes inaudible. In the non-audible state, it becomes possible to indicate that the automatic button function can be activated soon if not operated quickly. At this time, at least the long side mode (second mode) and the second permissible sound whose output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound of the first mode, the volume and pitch of the sound as time passes. It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to easily recognize how much time has progressed.

  In addition, in the operation reception effects shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, when an operation opportunity is given, “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence, thereby generating a post-operation effect. When it is done, it is decided to make a stunning design so that the production sound corresponding to this is noticeable. In this regard, regarding the acceptable reception sound that is output when such a suppression operation reception effect is generated, if the reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the reception of the effect is performed. Since the output state is terminated, it is possible to make the production sound according to the post-operation production stand out without being disturbed by the acceptable reception sound.

  In the above production example, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” occurs, even if the production acceptance is made when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. It was. However, instead of this, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is generated in the SP reach state in the high-expectation variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern), for example, the expectation is relatively high. Only when it is in the situation, in order to urge the concentration to the production, the production is performed when the acceptable reception sound (even if the same production sound (first aspect) is output as the first allowable sound) is in the output state. You may make it interrupt this, if reception is made.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, the case where the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs has been explained, but “non-suppression / automatic reception effect”, “suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, etc. also occur. In other words, it is also possible to make the production progress in the same manner when a “non-suppression / automatic reception effect” or a “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs.

  Further, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 213) or the second mode (FIG. 214) can be output as the first allowable sound. When the third mode is output, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the first mode or the second mode is output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the expectation level by paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound lasts, and the set time (effective) It is possible to maintain the game entertainment within the (period) more suitably.

  At this time, as for the third mode, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound lasts, it is necessary to confirm that the output is in the third mode instead of the first mode or the second mode. The longer the time it takes, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated, so it is possible to favorably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (valid period) during which production reception is permitted. It becomes like this. Other matters when the third mode is output are the same as those described in FIGS. 213 and 214, such as the fact that the reception of the production is interrupted when the third mode is in the output state. is there.

  The automatic button function may be always activated when the timing tr42A within a specific variation pattern (corresponding production pattern) arrives, or when a big hit is obtained, a specific variation It is validated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (the corresponding production pattern) arrives, but when the big hit is not obtained, the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (the corresponding production pattern) arrives It may not be activated.

  A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (valid period), and in some of these effects, an acceptable sound (first) is generated when the set time (valid period) occurs. (Allowable sound, second allowable sound) may not be output. In other words, in this case, when the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is permitted occurs, there are “0” reception allowable sounds and “1” reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound). ) And the case where there are “2” permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound), suggesting how much the pachinko machine 1 is “prompt for operation” Will be able to.

  As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the non-display timing comes may be adopted.

  In the production examples shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppression manner or silence during the period of timing tr40 to tr44. You may make it the state of an output (The reproduction period in which the audible sound is recorded among sound data is complete | finished, or channel assignment is complete | finished). That is, in this case, “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” as new data is assigned to the channel at the timing tr44, and an output state is set.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, as described above, as a result of the change pattern determination, a high expectation change pattern (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.). When a specific variation pattern is selected, regardless of which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the effect of the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance The operation reception effect (valid period) that is allowed
-“Suppression reception effect (FIGS. 213 (a) and (b)”) is set to a set time during which the acceptance of the effect is permitted while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the variation pattern is output in a suppression mode or silence. Or (see FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (b)), and no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the reception of the production is permitted. Even when the timing tr42A within the set time has arrived, the production reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation production is performed based on the production reception. "Automatic reception mode (see Fig. 213 (j) and Fig. 214 (j))"
It is generated as a “suppression / automatic reception effect” executed by.

  Also, at this time, based on the result of the effect determination (notice effect determination), whether the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the allowable reception sounds is output in a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode. Then, it is determined whether the message sound (second allowable sound) among the allowable reception sounds is to be output as “press!” Or “save the sword!”, And the allowable reception sound (first 1 As described above, the allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output (FIGS. 213 and 214). As described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output. Is output, the expectation is higher than when “Press!” Is output. At this time, as the order of high expectation, “second mode & sword!”, “Second mode & sword!”, “First mode & sword!”, “First mode & sword!” It is desirable to maintain the game fun when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

  Also, as described above, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the above-described effect example, the first permissible sound is in the output state even when any one of a plurality of modes is output as the first permissible sound. When the production is accepted, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 213 and 214). In addition, for the second permissible sound, whether it is output with either “Press!” Or “Shoot the sword!”, If an effect is received when the second permissible sound is in an output state, Was decided to be interrupted.

  However, instead of this, when an effect is received when the first permissible sound is in an output state in a mode different from the first mode among a plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the reception of the effect. However, when an effect is accepted when the first permissible sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without ending. That is, in this case, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, even if the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted in the middle and the expectation level cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest expectation degree among the plurality of aspects. It can be recognized that this is not the case, so that it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, even if an aspect with a low expectation appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first allowable sound with the lowest expectation is maintained among the plurality of aspects, the post-operation effect is displayed. In the first place, re-recognizing that the production state is difficult to expect, it becomes easier to accept the result appearing as the post-operation production, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced.

  Even in the case of adopting such a modified example, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs within the predetermined variation pattern, as described with reference to FIG. Of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” within the specific variation pattern, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, it is as described with reference to FIG. 214. In other words, among the above-described example effects, the “effect mode shown in FIG. 213” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that appears in a specific variation pattern is shown in FIG. It will be executed instead of the “effect mode shown in 215”.

  As shown in FIG. 215, the “production mode shown in FIG. 215” is basically the same as the content described in “The production mode shown in FIG. 213” and the contents described in the other examples. is there. However, in “the production mode shown in FIG. 215”, even if the production acceptance is made at timing tr <b> 42 a in which the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted by the production acceptance. In other words, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example, As described above, when the output is received in the second mode (for example, FIG. 214 (c)), when the effect is received at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the reception of the effect.

  According to such a configuration, when a “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs within a specific variation pattern, an effect is received at an early timing that makes it difficult to confirm which aspect is the first allowable sound. Even if it is made, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by confirming whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated with this as an opportunity. In particular, in this production example (FIG. 213, FIG. 215, etc.), the first permissible sound is output from the timing tr41 before the set time (valid period) occurs to the timing tr42 where the set time is set. Since the first permissible sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the time when the output state is reached at the timing tr41 until the time tr42 arrives, the first permissible sound is It becomes possible to function as a time for “discriminating” which mode is.

  In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as the output state being maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. It is said. As a result, even if the post-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound It becomes possible to shorten the time during which each output state overlaps, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can also be output in the effect example shown in FIG. 212 (see FIG. 212 (c)). In the production example, since the reception of the production is not interrupted and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first acceptable sound, the first allowable sound is Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the production reception appears, it can be provided as a production without a sense of incongruity.

  However, regarding the second permissible sound, if an effect is received when it is in the output state, it is based on the fact that the effect is received regardless of which aspect is output as the first allowable sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 214 (d) and 215 (d)). That is, in this case, for the first permissible sound, a function suggesting the expectation level when the stage reception is made early is performed, whereas for the second permissible sound, the stage reception is performed by detecting the operation ( When an operation reception effect is generated by providing a function that suggests whether or not there is a situation where the operation opportunity can be lost by the automatic button function) It is possible to suitably maintain the game interest of the game.

  On the other hand, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is generated may be output in the first mode or may be output in the special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output without ending the output state even if the presentation is accepted when the output is in a special mode. In addition, when outputting in a special mode, it is desirable to make the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing higher when symbols are stopped than when outputting in a first mode. This percentage may be 100%. The output may be performed in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

  That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is maintained in an output state in a non-suppressed manner, and there are problems such as lack of performance. Therefore, it can be said that it is more desirable to be able to confirm the aspect as the first allowable sound and recognize the degree of expectation even in the situation where the post-operation effect is started.

  In addition, in the “suppression operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of production sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state”, the specific type of production sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressed manner even in a non-audible state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, “suppression that provides an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state” In the “operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 to 215)”, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the set time (effective period) is generated is any one of “a plurality of modes in which the length of time that is maintained as an output state is different”. In the non-suppression mode, output is possible, and the degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) varies depending on the output mode. In this regard, even in the “non-suppression operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in an unsuppressed manner”, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is used. In addition to the case where the first mode is output in the non-suppressed mode (FIG. 212), the reception allowable sound (the first allowable sound) is different from the first mode (the length is different, the production sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output in a non-suppressed manner, and the degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) may differ depending on the outputted manner. According to such a configuration, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the “non-suppression operation reception effect” occurs and the acceptable reception sound that is output when the “suppression operation reception effect” occurs are both “output state” Since the output can be performed in any one of “a plurality of modes with different lengths of time to be maintained”, and further, the degree of expectation varies depending on the output modes, so “non-suppression operation reception effect” And the “suppression operation reception effect”, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the effect is received.

  FIG. 216 is a time chart illustrating an effect example in which the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner when the “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 216, even in this effect example, the portions that are not particularly described are basically the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. However, in the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when it occurs, effect determination as to which of the plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound (for example, at the start of symbol variation) As shown in FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (g), as shown in FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (g), the “prediction effect determination” is performed instead of the “first aspect”. When the symbol variation is stopped, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing is higher than when the symbol is output in the “first mode”. The specific mode is output over a longer time than the first mode.

  Here, in both of the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the first allowable sound can be output by the first mode when the operation reception effects are generated. This is described above (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)). That is, in this case, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time when the operation reception effect is generated. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is generated (FIG. 216), the first allowable sound is generated when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated. In the case of being output in two modes (FIG. 214), different effect sounds are output over different times as the first allowable sound. In this effect example, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode, it is output over a longer time than when the first permissible sound is output in the specific mode.

  However, on the other hand, when the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound for the same time (see the first mode (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)), the expected degree (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) The “first mode” is output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs, or “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)” ”. In this case, when the “first mode” appears when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs, the reception of the effect is performed. As for the degree of expectation (proportion) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the post-operation effect according to the “first mode” when the “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215))” occurs Directing reception in case The big hit symbol appears in effect after corresponding operation is lower than the expected level suggested (percentage). The expectation (percentage) may be 0% and 100%.

  On the other hand, the expectation level (when the “second mode (FIG. 214)” or “specific mode (FIG. 216)” appears) when different production sounds are output as the first permissible sound for different times ( The ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) is the same as the predetermined value regardless of whether the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “suppression / automatic reception effect” is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound for the same time, either “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs. The expectation level does not necessarily become the same depending on whether or not. Further, even when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first allowable sound, the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the case where the second mode is output as the first allowable sound. The same expectation level as the “automatic reception effect” is suggested.

  That is, in this case, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” are set to have different expectations even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it becomes possible to make it appear that there is no production relationship with each other. . However, in reality, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expectation level is set to be the same regardless of the different output sound and different output time. It becomes possible to have a secret relationship. For example, when “BGM playback” is suppressed and “BGM playback” is not suppressed at the occurrence of a set time (valid period) during which production reception is permitted, normal (acceptable sound is the first mode). When the production is accepted, by starting a different post-operation production (different expectation), the productions appear to have no production relationship. However, when the acceptance allowable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the stage is accepted while the stage is displayed as if the stage is different depending on whether or not “BGM playback” is suppressed. As a post-production, the same content (the same degree of expectation) can be made to appear, and it is expected to provide a surprise-like production by secretly having a production relationship.

  In this case, in both of the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, a plurality of modes are prepared as the first permissible sound. "Is preferably set as a mode with the shortest output time among a plurality of modes for any operation reception effect. In addition, the “second mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs, and The “specific mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the multiple modes that can be output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs. It is desirable that the output times are different from each other (for example, “the output time of the specific mode” <“the output time of the second mode”) so that there is no production relationship with each other.

  In addition, in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the output is not finished midway regardless of whether or not the effect is received, regardless of whether the first allowable sound is output in the first mode or the specific mode. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first allowable sound can be left even after the post-operation effect is started, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” with a relatively low expectation is executed. Even if the first allowable sound is output in the “specific mode” that pushes it up to the same expected level as the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that has a relatively high expectation, It becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of end. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when the production is accepted by the “suppression / automatic reception production” is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215.

  In the above-described effect example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” (FIG. 214), and as the first allowable sound in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. The expected degree is the same as when the specific mode is output (FIG. 216). However, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output time is maintained as a first allowable sound over a longer time than the “first mode (FIG. 213)” and the “second mode (FIG. 214)”. When the “third mode” is output, the “third mode” is output instead of the “second mode” as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”. In the case of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, “expectation” is set to be the same as when “specific mode” is output as the first allowable sound. The “third aspect” is as described above.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 216, when the effect is received within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the effect display device 1600 (the first display) is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated at least. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, in any state where the stage is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are obtained when the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the length of the “time when the acceptable sound is output” is not the length of the “time when the sound data of the acceptable sound is allocated to the channel”. It means the length of time required for “time output as audible sound”.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in order to show that there is no production relationship between the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” and the “suppression / automatic reception production”, the “second mode” or “third” As for “Aspect”, “Suppression / automatic reception effect” and “Non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” can be output only by “Suppression / automatic reception effect”. It is desirable that output is possible only with “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” among “automatic reception effect” and “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. In addition, when the “second mode” and the “third mode” are prepared as output candidates in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, respectively, the “acceptance / automatic reception effect” specific acceptance allowable sound (second Even if the mode, the third mode) is output, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” will not necessarily have the same degree of expectation as when this specific acceptable sound (specific mode) is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the performance as an acceptable reception sound that is output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated.

  In addition, the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to be generated as an effect related to the low expectation variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). As described above, it may occur within an effect period before the SP reach state is developed among effects related to an expected variation pattern (for example, a specific variation pattern).

  By the way, in the above-mentioned effect example, for the “suppression operation reception effect” in which the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM playback) can be suppressed, the “weak suppression mode (first And a plurality of modes including at least a “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or is in a non-output state. Also good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) in which production reception is allowed occurs, it is possible to provide production performance as to how much the specific type of production sound is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-described effects, the degree of expectation depends on which of the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” has occurred. It is desirable that the (ratio where the jackpot symbol appears) be different. Here, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the expectation degree (ratio) that suggests that a big hit symbol appears in the “post-operation effect according to the effect reception” is “ When the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, it is lower than the expectation (ratio) that suggests that a big hit symbol appears in the “post-operation effect according to the effect reception”. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, with respect to the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”, an effect corresponding to a highly anticipated variation pattern that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) and a reach state are not formed (or While the reach state can be formed, it can appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (which does not develop into SP reach), whereas “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) ")" May not be generated in the low expectation effect pattern, but may be generated as an effect corresponding to the high expectation variation pattern. Even in such a configuration, the expectation when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs is the expectation when the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

  Further, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, it is possible to generate a “special effect state” that can be shifted based on the fact that the special effect condition is satisfied, and in the “special effect state”, the player Each time an effect is received during a set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (such as a bag image or gauge display) that prompts an operation is displayed, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound for BGM playback) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a “special effect state”, each time a set time (effective period) during which an effect is allowed is generated, how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed. In addition to the degree of expectation suggested by post-operation presentation, the degree of expectation is also suggested by such degree of presentation (how much it is suppressed). As a result, it is expected to further improve the game entertainment when the reception of the production is permitted.

  In addition, an effect pattern (for example, high expectation fluctuation) in which “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be executed in sequence within the pattern variation. An effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern among the patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation on the side with a relatively high level of expectation). Since the possibility that "acceptance effect)" will occur will be left, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest in the case where the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode) Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more suitably suppress the decrease in the gaming interest when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”
-When a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly anticipated variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach performance with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the performance determination Regardless of which result is obtained (e.g., notice determination), the effect of the specific variation pattern occurs when it reaches a specific timing during SP reach, whereas “weak suppression mode (first suppression) About the “Operation Reception Direction”)
Even if the specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production determination (notice determination, etc.), it does not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs in the production according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception production) in the production according to the specific fluctuation pattern” occurs. Compared to the time when "" did not occur, the proportion of the post-operation effect being executed in a highly expected manner when the effect is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" It is desirable to make it.

  In such a configuration, in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” always occurs, whereas the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”. "Does not necessarily occur, and when the" weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect) "occurs, the post-operation effect with high expectation in the" strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) " Since the rate at which “I” is executed becomes high, attention can be paid to whether or not the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, and the “weak suppression mode ( It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the “first suppression operation reception effect” ”occurs.

  FIGS. 217 to 219 show “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) in the production according to the high expectation fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). It is a time chart which shows the example of production in the case where " FIG. 217 shows an effect example when an operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (effective period) occurs. FIG. 218 shows a comparison after the set time (effective period) occurs. FIG. 219 shows an effect example in the case where no operation is detected within a set time (effective period).

  As a result of the establishment of the start condition (digestion on hold) and the determination of the variation pattern, “specific variation pattern” among “highly expected variation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)” Is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After that, the decorative design variation effect (such as the rendering of the effect according to the specific variation pattern and the sound output of the BGM playback according to the specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect, etc.) corresponding to the result of the (notice determination, etc.) is additionally executed on the selected “specific variation pattern” itself (effect pattern).

  However, in the “specific variation pattern”, the content of the effect that appears after the timing tr40 (the timing in the SP reach state) has arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative design variation effect. Is the same as in the case of the production example described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. That is, first, when the timing tr40 arrives, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, “a state where a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppression manner or silence” Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a “strong suppression mode”, and the timing tr42 (decorative pattern of the decorative design is displayed while the “strong suppression mode” appears in this way. When a specific time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect, the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the operation reception that is permitted to receive the effect A production (effective period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs while the “strong suppression mode” appears is referred to as a “second suppression operation reception effect”.

  On the other hand, in the “specific variation pattern”, when the timing tr51 (timing before the development of the SP reach state) arrives after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation design of the decorative symbols, On the condition that the special result is obtained, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed is additionally generated with respect to the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than the “production (strong suppression mode)”, a process of suppressing the volume of the “specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound)” can be performed under a predetermined condition.

  According to such a configuration, even if there is a situation in which an effect corresponding to the “specific variation pattern” is being executed, when a special result is not obtained as an effect determination (notice determination or the like), FIG. The production example shown in FIG. 214 appears, that is, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception production)” does not occur in the production according to the variation pattern, and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression)” occurs. Operation reception effect) ”only occurs. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation) is performed within the effect according to the variation pattern”. Reception effect) ”first occurs, and then the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 further occurs.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the effect contents after the timing tr40 arrives are the same as described with reference to FIG. 213, so the description is omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first allowable sound is not the first mode shown in FIG. 213 or FIGS. 214, the contents related to the effects shown in FIG. 213, such as being output in the second mode shown in FIG. 214, and other contents described above for the modified examples, are shown in FIGS. Needless to say, the present invention is appropriately applied to the contents of the effects after the time tr40 (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)).

  Then, as described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the timing tr51 (development into the SP reach state) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative effect change effect (the effect corresponding to the specific change pattern) is started. When the timing (before timing) arrives, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is allowed is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” that is generated at the timing tr51 in the change effect according to the specific change pattern is as follows.
A set time (valid period) during which production acceptance is allowed while “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner is set, but within the set time (valid period) When an effect is accepted, the “conditional suppression acceptance effect (FIG. 217) changes the“ BGM playback sound ”from a non-suppressed mode to a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low). (See (a), (b)) ”, and when no operation is detected with respect to the operating means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the reception of the production is permitted, As a result, each process (the process of changing the “BGM playback sound” from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode or the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, Sound) The setting time without the (time) has finished elapsed "non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 219 (a), (b), see (f))"
Is generated as “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”. As a method of outputting “BGM playback sound” in a weakly suppressed manner, the volume value for the channel to which the “BGM playback sound” is assigned is set to a volume value (audible volume, for example). ) Is lower than “0”), and a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) can be employed.

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (first suppression operation reception effect)”, unless an effect is received by an operation by the player, “specific effect sound ( BGM playback sound) is not shifted to a state where it is output in a suppression mode, so that it can appear as if the “non-suppression reception effect” shown in FIGS. 212 and 216 has occurred. It becomes like this. That is, in this case, when the player operates, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a “suppression acceptance effect” by changing to “a state where a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppression mode”. As a result, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment through a surprise effect.

  In order to obtain such effects, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” can be generated depending on the result of the performance determination (notice determination, etc.). The variation pattern is selected only when it is in a special performance state (for example, a pre-reading performance zone), and when it is in the special performance state, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( FIG. 212, FIG. 216) ”is a jackpot symbol when the symbol variation is stopped rather than when the normal variation state in which the variation pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) is selected. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 212, 216)” appears. As a result, the above-mentioned surprise effect elements can be combined to improve the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be generated in either “normal effect state” or “special effect state”. In the “normal production state”, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production (figure)” is created within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired at the time). 212, FIG. 216) ”and“ suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213, FIG. 214) ”can be generated sequentially. In the production according to the one fluctuation pattern paired in), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception” Production (FIGS. 213 and 214) ”will occur sequentially. It is desirable that way.

  In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) has elapsed without receiving the effect, “specific effect sound (BGM playback sound) ) Is not shifted to “a state of being output in a weakly suppressed manner” and progresses to the subsequent production (FIG. 219). That is, in this case, whether “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurred, and in turn, “normal effect state” and “special effect state” Since it is difficult to recognize which situation is in progress, the subsequent production will progress, so the expectation level is relatively low. Even when the “operation reception effect (effective period)” occurs, it is possible to more actively promote the player's operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” occurs, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( In the case where “FIG. 212)” occurs, the same effect sound (first aspect) is output over the same time as the above-described acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound). Suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219) ”and“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212) ”are made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs,
The output of the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is started when the timing tr50 slightly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr51. point,
・ The second allowable sound (for example, message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (for example, sound effect) is output. ・ Set time (valid period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a habit image deceiving the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. Each configuration such as the point where the gauge display is performed is also adopted, and this also causes “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” and “non-suppression / It is difficult to recognize which of the “non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” is occurring. Therefore, as the display method for the haze image or gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) is adopted as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs. It is desirable that the same aspect as that of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 212 may be adopted for the timing at which these display images (the haze image and the gauge display) are hidden based on the fact that the effect is received. desirable.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” according to this embodiment, this is also set time (valid) as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. If the production is accepted at the timing tr51a, tr52a (FIG. 217 (c), FIG. 218 (c)) in which the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is in the output state after the (period) occurs, the setting is made. While the time (effective period) itself ends, the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” does not end abruptly, but finishes outputting as the first allowable sound (the same as when there was no operation) The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 219 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even after the presentation is accepted by the player's operation, simply listening to the acceptable sound (first acceptable sound), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception” It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the “production (FIGS. 217 to 219)” and “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production (FIG. 212)” is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptable reception sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the state is changed to “a state where a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weak suppression mode”. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that a feeling of tension is suitably maintained every time a performance is accepted.

  Also, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, if the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timings tr51a and 51b). ), Post-operation display effects (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) And at least occur. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, in any state where the stage is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in a state where the timing tr52 has not elapsed. It is required to set so as to maintain the output state.

  In addition, for the acceptable reception sound and operation-related display that appear in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, another example or modification to the effect example shown in FIG. 212 should be adopted as appropriate. It is desirable to use the same method.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern is the effect. A process of outputting “BGM playback sound” in a weak suppression mode (a mode in which the suppression degree is relatively low) is performed for a predetermined time from the reception timing.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 217), the “BGM playback sound” is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is The timing tr53a returned from the relatively low mode) to the non-suppressed mode also arrives relatively early, and as a result, the period during which the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weakly suppressed mode and the “BGM playback sound” A relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) is provided between the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. On the other hand, when an effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 218), the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late. As a result, there is a comparison between the period when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weak suppression mode and the period when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the strong suppression mode. Only a short interval (timing tr53b to tr40).

  In other words, in this case, the later the timing when the operation by the player is performed in the first suppression operation reception effect (the closer to the timing tr52), the “BGM playback sound” becomes the weak suppression mode after the end of the period. The time until the period in which the “BGM playback sound” is in the strong suppression mode is started is shortened. As a result, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears is relatively early after the weak suppression mode ends depending on whether the timing at which the player performed the operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late. The suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) can be shown as if it is being executed, or the timing of the strong suppression mode comes relatively late after the weak suppression mode is terminated. It will be possible to improve the amusement of the game because it will be able to make students feel uneasy, such as “may not appear.”

  In this production example, the length of time (a predetermined time) during which the “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner is set as the post-operation production (liquid crystal display, production sound). Although it is set to be the same as the execution time, it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time for which “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner is set to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is desirable to make the post-operation effect stand out when the effect is accepted. Furthermore, even when the presentation is accepted at the latest timing tr52 in the set time (effective period) of the “first suppression operation acceptance presentation (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception presentation)”, the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time for which the “BGM playback sound” is output in the weak suppression mode so that the timing to end comes before the timing tr40 for starting the strong suppression mode. In this effect example, the times tr51a to 53a are the same as the times tr51b to 53b.

As shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the production according to one variation pattern,
A first suppression operation reception effect (a period from the timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) ), And a second suppression operation reception effect (the post-operation effect is ended from timing tr40) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively high suppression degree (strong suppression mode). Period)
Can be generated sequentially. As described above, the second suppression operation acceptance effect is “a variation pattern that is not executed even if the effect mode (the type of allowable sound to be accepted, the operation target, etc.) changes depending on the result of the effect determination. The first suppression operation acceptance effect can be generated on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). ing.

  In addition, as described above, the first suppression operation reception effect is also determined by the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) even in the effect according to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception effect. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol variation, when only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, the first suppression operation reception effect and the first 2 In some cases, the suppression operation reception effects are sequentially generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the stage reception from the “timing at which the weak suppression mode is ended” to the “timing at which the strong suppression mode is started” is received at the first suppression operation reception effect. Since the variable period is set to be variable according to the timing made, after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is completed, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further increased. It becomes possible to provide a performance for whether or not it occurs, and thereby it is possible to improve game entertainment. In addition, when the 1st suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression aspect) and the 2nd suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression aspect) generate | occur | produce sequentially, this 2nd suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression aspect) does not generate | occur | produce. The degree of expectation (the ratio of being stopped with a big hit symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. Further, in the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) precedes the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation than the case where the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode). Etc.) is executed at a higher rate.

  By the way, when the operation reception effect which can suppress a specific type effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) generate | occur | produces, the suppression degree is high (2nd suppression operation reception effect of a strong suppression aspect) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect of the aspect). However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, an attempt is made to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode). Actually, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without comparison. This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed is not so large between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this makes the sense of tension when an operation acceptance effect occurs. Is suitably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the performance.

  In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed is generated. The first permissible sound is output as the same production sound for the same time (output in the “first mode” in the figure). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it is possible to remain difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) As a result, it is possible to more appropriately maintain a sense of tension with respect to the performance, and to attract more and more players to the performance.

  However, in actuality, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced if it is impossible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production elements that are useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are included in the period from when the operation reception effect is started until it is ended. The following preparations are made in a time-sequential manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-described situation appears in which the first permissible sound can be output as the same production sound for the same time (in the figure, output in the “first mode”). Even if it exists, it can be estimated now whether it is a strong suppression aspect or a weak suppression aspect based on this 1st permissible sound.

  That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a predetermined time without ending the output halfway even if the effect is received in the output state. On the other hand, the first permissible sound that is output when the second suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, when the effect is accepted when in the output state, based on the effect acceptance, The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 217 and 218). In such a configuration, the same aspect can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, which is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. The first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, while making it difficult to estimate such a situation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest without being able to make the guess.

  In addition to the first mode, the first allowable sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (such as the second mode and the third mode). ) Output is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode when the first permissible sound is output, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode without receiving the presentation when the first permissible sound is in the output state. Thus, it is possible to easily estimate whether or not it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment. However, in maintaining a sense of tension with respect to the production, the output in a mode (such as the second mode or the third mode) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception production is generated is more than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to make the execution rate low.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. By checking whether or not an allowable sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the sound is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression are also performed for the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is allowed. Since there is a difference between the operation reception effect and the operation-related display, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to appearing late with respect to the acceptable reception sound, there is only a difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. As a result, some difficulty remains in estimating whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, and a sense of tension with respect to the performance is maintained.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is assumed that the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode has not been estimated when the acceptance allowable sound and the operation-related display are output. In addition, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it can be estimated whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both “the effect by the liquid crystal display” and “the effect by the effect sound” are “performed for a certain period of time from when the effect is received”. On the other hand, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the second suppression operation reception effect, “the effect by the effect sound” is “a thing that is performed for a certain period of time from when the effect is received”. "Production by" is "finished when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the “effect by the liquid crystal display” is ended to the “effect by the effect sound” is ended at the timing when the effect is received. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming such a shift. .

  However, even if stage elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are strong suppression modes or weak suppression modes. If there is something that can't be guessed, the game entertainment will eventually decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM playback is based on the reception of the effect within the set time (valid period). Is in a weakly suppressed manner. In contrast, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the BGM playback effect sound is changed to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. A set time (valid period) is generated and the reception of the production can be made. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timing to be changed becomes different, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

  Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period). When the event occurs, the set time ends without the automatic reception of the production (see FIG. 219). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the effect reception for the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM playback) is also performed. Since there is a price that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, it is possible to recognize that it is not a strong suppression mode but a weak suppression mode.

  Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM playback effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is finished is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as the timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the processing for changing the “BGM playback effect sound” to the weak suppression mode is ended after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing when the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  As described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above-described effect example, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) in the effect display device 1600 regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 217 and 218). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depending on at which timing the effect is received within the set time (valid period). And the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

  According to such a configuration, production performance is generated in “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  Further, in the above configuration, the first permissible value is set so that it is difficult to distinguish between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect that are different in the execution mode of the post-operation effect. Sounds are output as the same production sound over the same time, or production elements useful for distinguishing them are arranged in time series. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest while maintaining a sense of tension with respect to the performance.

  Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect that have different execution modes of the post-operation effect can be mixed within the effect according to one variation pattern. Thus, every time an operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension about “when to perform an operation reception (operation)”. In order to obtain such an effect, in addition to an aspect in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect according to the one variation pattern, the effect according to the one variation pattern. It is desirable that an aspect in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears within a plurality of times is executable.

  In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the effect by the effect of “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, a specific type of production in the first suppression operation reception production and the second suppression operation reception production. You may make it maintain the output in a non-suppression mode, without suppressing a sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction).

  In addition, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. ) For the operation reception effect where the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel is made constant, a special result is obtained in the effect determination (eg, notice determination) It is desirable that it cannot appear as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern.

  That is, in this case, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it can be estimated that the special result is obtained in the notice effect determination (the expectation is relatively high). Unlike the fluctuation pattern itself (design effect) that always occurs regardless of the result of the notice effect determination, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when recognizing that it was additionally performed. It becomes like this. It should be noted that, depending on at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) The second suppression operation acceptance effect in which the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel may be generated only as an effect (symbol effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. Alternatively, there may be both a case where the variation pattern itself is generated as an effect (symbol effect) and a case where the change pattern is generated under a condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.).

  It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the “BGM playback effect sound” is output with a lower suppression level than the strong suppression mode may appear even when an operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). It may be. That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. And the ratio (in which the suppression degree is further increased until the symbol variation is stopped) as the number of times that the weak suppression mode appears including the first suppression operation reception effect in the effect according to the one variation pattern ( If the second suppression operation reception effect is further executed), the performance can be further improved through the suppression status with respect to the “BGM playback effect sound”. Further, when an effect is accepted within a set time (valid period) that occurs while the “BGM playback effect sound” is not in the suppression mode, “whether or not the number of occurrences of the weak suppression mode increases (FIG. It is possible to add more fun to the performance of “the mode shown in 212 or the mode shown in FIG. 217”).

  Further, the strong suppression mode for the “BGM playback effect sound” may also appear when an operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-inhibition mode without being provided with an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a presentation as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

  Moreover, in the example of production shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) was used. However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated before the set time is generated, similarly to the case where the second suppression operation reception effect is generated. May be set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (valid period) during which production reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated when a predetermined timing comes depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of performance can be widened. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-inhibition mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to make it come.

  Moreover, in the production examples shown in FIG. 213 to FIG. 215 and FIG. 217 to FIG. 219, in the second suppression operation acceptance production (strong suppression mode), the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode (suppression mode or The process of making the output silent or non-output) ends at the same timing as or before the end timing of the post-operation effect, but the end timing of the post-operation effect has arrived You may make it complete | finish later. Also, in this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decoration symbol) is changing (unless the symbol change is stopped), the “bGM playback effect sound” may not be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-inhibition mode. Good.

  As described above, the acceptable reception sound may not be generated slightly before the set time (valid period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

  In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and FIGS. 217 to 219, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the production according to the variation pattern, while the production of the post-operation production sound output (production sound) by the speaker (second production member) has been accepted. It was supposed to be terminated when a certain amount of time passed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) vary. It is good also as what each ends at the predetermined timing in the production | presentation according to a pattern, the display display after operation (liquid crystal display) in the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 (1st production member), and a speaker (2nd production member). Both the post-operation production sound output (production sound) according to the above may be terminated when a certain time has elapsed since the production was accepted.

  It should be noted that a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) to be suppressed is the timing at which the effect is switched at the start of symbol variation or within the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (for example, the SP reach effect is started). It is output when the timing etc. arrives. On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started at an indefinite timing (ming to be operated) within the set time.

  The specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 and the specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219 may be different or the same. It may be a variation pattern. Further, the special effect state may be an effect state when the jackpot probability for determining the big hit is relatively high, not the pre-reading effect zone.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the “specific type effect sound” non-audible (silent (audible volume is 0) or non-output (channel assignment is terminated)). Good.

  Moreover, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is set as an operation target and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the “first suppression operation reception effect”, only the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the “second suppression operation reception effect”, refer to FIGS. 213 and 214. However, as described above, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode) based on the result of the notice effect determination. ) ”. Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the presentation has been received for “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”. The corresponding post-operation effects have the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion touched when the player operates) when the set time (effective period) is generated, and the operation receiving portion by the driving force when the set time (effective period) is generated An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode to be moved to a specific position. Here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is “thing that can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state where it has been moved to a specific position”. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given according to any of these modes.

And as this was also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
A non-suppressed operation reception effect in which a set time (valid period) is generated and a post-operation effect is executed while a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM playback) is output in an uninhibited manner; and・ We have prepared a suppression operation reception effect that allows a specific type of production sound (BGM playback production sound) to be output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, or a non-output state.
A first suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-described “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode). )) And a second suppression operation reception effect (for example, “suppression / automatic reception” described above) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM playback effect sound) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode). Direction ")
Is prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception effect,
-While the specific type of production sound is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (in the suppression mode, being output in silence or in the non-output state), the first operation mode with respect to the operating means (Here, the operation button 410) is given a non-moving reception effect with suppression and an effect sound of a specific type is suppressed in a strong suppression mode (output in suppression mode or silence) Or in a non-output state), the controlled movement acceptance effect is provided in which the operation means is given an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword ornament 5001 is extracted). By preparing, the presentation performance when the operation opportunity is given is further improved.

  FIG. 220 shows an effect example (moving reception effect under suppression) that appears in “when sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect). It is a time chart which shows. In addition, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), for the effect example (suppressed non-moving reception effect) that appears in “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)”, This is as described with reference to FIG. 213 and FIG. 217 (period from the timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

  As shown in FIG. 220, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” is also received. In the production (suppression / automatic reception production), “the case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” is basically the same as the portion not particularly described (FIGS. 213 and 214). 217 to 219), the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples can be employed as appropriate.

  However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving portion to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs. Although it is required to be performed, there is a problem as to when the process is performed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (h), at least in a specific gaming state (a normal gaming state or a probability-changing short gaming state), As long as the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode does not arrive, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM playback) is in a non-suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, an operation opportunity in the second operation mode even if a set time in which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Is not given, and the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is only given. That is, in this case, unless the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in the strong suppression mode, even if the operation opportunity is given, this will not be the second operation mode. However, it is possible to suppress the operation in the operation mode on the wrong side.

  On the other hand, when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both the case where the operation opportunity is given and the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player is given the opportunity to give an operation opportunity in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) has become a strong suppression aspect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an operation error between them.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, from the timing tr40 by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is granted until immediately before the operation opportunity is given. The tension and the game entertainment are suitably maintained until the production is accepted after the production is accepted. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (h), when the timing tr42 when the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. I am going to let you. Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the expectation level (the ratio that the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The notice effect determination is performed so as to be.

  However, in this case, the production reception itself is allowed for a short time after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed). Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length of the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced, and the game entertainment may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (d), regarding the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position, the acceptance allowable sound It is set as a time shorter than the time until the first mode with the shortest output time out of the (first permissible sound) is output. As a result, even if any aspect (in addition to the first aspect, the above-described second aspect, third aspect, etc.) is output as the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound), an effect is received in the middle of the output state. It is possible to perform the operation (the output can be terminated in the middle), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is difficult for the production inconvenience to occur.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, with respect to the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force, there is no operation on the operation receiving portion, and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. Is moved at a higher speed so as to have a shorter time than the time required for moving from the original position to the original position (see FIG. 220 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it is possible to appeal a state where efforts are made to reduce the time that is substantially reduced as the set time (valid period), and a game caused by the reduction of the time. It is expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of the person.

  In order to more appropriately suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression shown in FIG. 212 is set as the set time (effective period). The operation reception effect of the aspect (from the timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) and the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect of the weak suppression mode (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) shown in FIG. It is desirable to set a time value having a length longer than the sum of the time required to move the part from the original position to the specific position. According to such a configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that is more than compensated for the time to be substantially trimmed is obtained. Since the set time (valid period) is generated, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. In this case, in order to make the program common, a set time having the same length may be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

  However, as described above, the presentation time is not substantially received during the times tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated, and the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced. In view of this, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression mode operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) shown in FIG. ) Or the setting time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) in the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 217 "required when the operation receiving unit is moved from the original position to the specific position. A time value having a length longer than the sum of “time” and “time at timings tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated” is set. Rukoto can be said to be more desirable. In this case as well, in order to make the program common, a setting time having the same length is set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

  As described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, As shown in 220 (a), (h) to (l), an effect reception is automatically generated at timing tr42A, and the post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is based on the effect reception. (Liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed at least as post-operation effects, respectively. However, in this case, as is apparent when compared with FIGS. 220 (g) and 220 (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation to the operation receiving part within the set time, the "speed when the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is moved from the original position to the specific position. It is slower than the “speed of time”, so that the moving state is maintained for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, the operation receiving unit can move the movable effect (post-operation effect) in exchange for a shorter execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Since it can be expected to function as a part of the game), the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 220 (h), the “movement effect from the specific position to the original position” by the operation receiving unit is after the operation corresponding to the fact that the effect reception is automatically generated (automatic button function). Although it is started when a predetermined timing arrives in the middle of the execution of the effect, it may be started at the timing tr42A when the reception of the effect is automatically generated, as in the post-operation effect.

  However, no matter how slow the “movement from the specific position to the original position” is, it is not possible to earn enough time as a movable effect by this alone, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the game entertainment. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 220 (h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position), the vibration effect for vibrating the operation receiving portion is performed. Thus, the period from the start of the movement from the specific position to the original position (or a position in the vicinity thereof) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving portion is determined by the “operation receiving portion not operated by the player”. It is made to function as a movable production period. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably realize a movable effect using the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player”, and the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) as a result of the effect reception being automatically generated. It is expected that the rendering performance when the execution time of the post-operation display rendering (liquid crystal display) is shortened is suitably maintained. In this case, if the operation receiving portion is caused to emit light in a state where the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect. It is possible to appeal to.

  Here, regarding the movable effect period (movement time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player”, is the timing tr44 when the strong suppression mode ends? It is desirable that the timing be terminated before the timing tr44. As a result, the specific type of effect sound is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-inhibition mode, and progress in the content of the production corresponding to this (switching of the production) can be smoothly promoted.

  In addition, a difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as “Say me!” Is used as the second allowable sound (message sound). A message display such as “push-in” and a spear image based on the “sword decoration image SYG” may be displayed as output and operation-related display, respectively, so that an operation error is less likely to occur. become.

  In addition, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), an operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the “specific type effect sound” is set to the weak suppression mode. If the operation opportunity is originally given, an operation error may be promoted when the user recognizes which of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode is wrong. In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception production (weak suppression mode) occurs, an operation opportunity is set with the “specific type of production sound” set to the low suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode appears based on the fact that the production was accepted without giving it, the useless tension and expectation that “the operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be granted” is given. The production can be provided without having it.

  Note that in the above-described effect example (second operation mode), even when there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, as in the case where there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, a vibration effect that vibrates the operation receiving portion is performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of at which timing the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will soon be terminated and a new production progress will appear.

  However, when there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation, so that the post-operation effect is being performed. You may make it aim at the further improvement of game entertainment. That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, unless the specific type effect sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. However, instead of this, when the stage reception is permitted when the specific type of production sound (BGM playback production sound) is in the strong suppression mode, the specific type of production sound (BGM playback production sound) is not suppressed. The rate at which an operation opportunity in the second operation mode is granted (0) than when the reception of the production is permitted when the production sound of the specific type (the production sound of BGM playback) is in the weak suppression mode. Or may be 100).

  It should be noted that, in each of the above-described effects examples (FIGS. 146 to 220), in the operation reception effects in which the automatic button function can be activated, the operation reception effects in which the automatic button function is not activated as the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the sum of the time from when the automatic button function is activated until the set time has elapsed to the set time (valid period). . According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value that more than compensates for the time that is substantially cut off as a period during which the production reception is allowed is generated. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state,
・ The operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) executed as an effect (symbol effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination An operation reception effect (additional reception effect) executed as an effect performed in addition to the effect (effect pattern) of the fluctuation pattern itself as a condition
At least.

  That is, the “internal reception effect” is obtained when a special result is obtained in the variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination (determination as to which variation pattern is used to execute the symbol effect) (a special variation pattern is selected). In this case, it is determined to be executed within the production according to the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, the “additional reception effect” is obtained even if the “predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect” is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected). This is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that an “additional reception effect” is generated is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, after the production according to the fluctuation pattern is once started, the production judgment is made rather than the occurrence of the “internal reception production” that is linked to the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) and the occurrence is confirmed. It can be said that the occurrence of “additional reception effect” that is allowed to occur depending on the result of (preliminary judgment, etc.) is more beneficial to the player and more important in enhancing the game entertainment. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern, if an “additional reception effect” occurs in the effect, the “additional reception effect” The percentage (expected degree) in which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than the case where “” does not occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the inherent reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state, a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of “BGM playback”) is suppressed or The case where production reception is allowed while being output in silence or in a non-output state, and the case where a specific type of production sound (the production sound of “BGM playback”) is being output in a non-suppressing manner In some cases, production reception is allowed. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, the reception of the effect is not allowed while being output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state, Production reception is allowed while a specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the acceptance of the production is permitted, it is possible to add additional attention by paying attention to whether the specific type of the production sound is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the reception effect will occur, and it is expected to maintain the game entertainment interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the internal reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. When it is executed in an automatic reception mode capable of generating a post-production, and when an operation is not detected within a set time in which the production reception is allowed, the post-operation production is not generated and the set time is ended There are cases where it is executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effects that can occur when in the normal gaming state are not executed in the automatic reception mode, but are executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that an additional reception effect has occurred by paying attention to whether or not the effect reception is automatically (automatic button function) within the set time. As a result, it is expected to maintain the game entertainment until the stage reception is made.

  FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 221, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (such as the notification determination according to the variation pattern 1) performed at the start of symbol variation, the notification effect It is at least determined whether or not A is executed. If it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, the notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. If it is not determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 within the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect are the variation pattern 1 itself (design) It is executed in addition to (production). Note that “additionally executed” can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, the notice effect A may be displayed in such a manner that all of the symbol effects based on the variation pattern 1 are covered and made invisible, or only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 is covered. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the “ramp effect according to the occurrence of the notice effect A” is preferentially output over the “lamp effect based on the variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. Further, in the case of a production sound, by assigning a “production sound according to the notice effect A” to a channel different from the “production sound based on the variation pattern 1”, it is based on the “variation pattern 1 (production pattern)”. In addition to the “effect sound”, the “effect sound corresponding to the notice effect A” is additionally output.

  FIG. 222 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 222, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the performance determination (such as the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 2) performed at the start of the symbol variation, “addition” It is at least determined whether or not to execute “reception reception effect”. Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this effect example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212”. Therefore, if it is determined that the “additional reception effect” is to be executed as a result of this effect determination, the “additional reception effect” is determined based on the variation pattern 2 (the predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212). When the internal timing tr31 arrives, the symbol effect (effect pattern) is additionally executed (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect ends), and the "additional reception effect" is executed. If the determination is not made, the “additional reception effect” does not appear even when the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

  Here, with respect to the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the fluctuation pattern 2 (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is maintained in the output state in the non-suppressed mode. The first allowable sound is output at timing tr31, the set time (valid period) is generated at timing tr32, and the set time ends without the automatic button function being enabled at timing tr33. Since these are as described above with reference to FIG. 212 and the like, description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222 is not particularly remarked as “the contents of the effect when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” shown in FIG. The portions are basically the same, and the related effects described above, other examples, and modifications can be employed as appropriate.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 222, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed in the above-described example in FIG. It is described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, if the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the effect is received. Then, “post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)” and “post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” are used as post-operation effects. At least for the post-operation effects,
The “post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)” is terminated at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is accepted. ,
“Post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by speaker (second effect member)” is executed in such a manner that it ends when a predetermined time elapses from the timing when the effect is accepted. It will be.

  FIG. 223 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 223, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, any result is obtained in the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 3) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether or not it has been performed, at the timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3, the effect sound of “BGM playback” is changed to the “strong suppression mode” described above, and the “strong suppression mode” At the timing tr41 when the symbol appears, an “internal reception effect” is generated as a symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 until the post-operation effect ends).

  Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the “specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 213 to FIG. 215 or FIG. 217 to FIG. 220”. Therefore, for the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) shown in FIG. 223, the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (specific fluctuation pattern) is strongly suppressed (for example, silence (volume 0)). In the output state or the non-audible state such as the non-output state), when the timing tr41 arrives, the first allowable sound is output, and the set time (effective period) is generated at the timing tr42. When the “timing tr42A” before the timing tr43 at which the lapse of time arrives without receiving the production, the above-described automatic button function is activated. For these, “FIGS. 213 to 215 or FIG. The description is omitted because it is as described above with reference to FIG. In other words, the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) shown in FIG. 223 is the same as the content of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” shown in FIG. 213, and the related effects described above, other examples, and modifications ( 215, FIGS. 217 to 220, etc.) can be adopted as appropriate.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in a strong suppression mode, Although “effects” may occur, “additional reception effects” that are executed in addition to the symbol effects based on the variation pattern are not generated, whereas “BGM playback” During the period in which the production sound is in a non-suppressing manner, an “internal reception effect” that is a design effect based on the variation pattern may occur, or in addition to the design effect based on the variation pattern An “additional reception effect” to be executed may occur.

  That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the variation pattern is in a strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is an “additional reception effect” is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to generate a set time (valid period) in which the presentation reception is allowed in an environment in which the operation reception presentation is concentrated in which form is executed. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is output in a non-suppressed manner, it can be recognized that an additional reception effect may have occurred. As a result, it is expected to maintain the amusement interest.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in addition to the case where the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” appear in separate variation patterns 2, 3, etc., one variation pattern (for example, In addition, it is desirable that the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” can be made to appear sequentially even within the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3). The “additional reception effect” is preferably generated at a timing before the “internal reception effect”.

  More preferably, within the effect according to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in a non-suppressing manner. ”Are allowed to appear in sequence, and the“ internal reception effect ”is further allowed to appear while the effect sound of“ BGM playback ”is in a strong suppression mode. According to such a configuration, when it is possible to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” is generated according to the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode) When it is difficult to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “internal reception effect” is occurring (non-suppression mode), the suppression mode for the “BGM playback” effect sound appears. Through this, you will be able to improve your game entertainment.

  Furthermore, if an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) occurs in the design effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern, the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in a strong suppression mode, It is desirable to prevent the “additional reception effect” from occurring within the period from the end of the reception effect until the symbol variation is stopped. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is an “additional reception effect” at the time when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode. In addition to being excluded, even the possibility of an “additional reception effect” appearing before the symbol variation is stopped is excluded, so that “additional reception effect” occurs. On the other hand, the generated “internal reception effect” is executed in any manner (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, aspect of post-operation effect, etc.) without giving a sense of expectation to the user. You will be able to concentrate.

  In addition, when the “additional reception effect” occurs, the “internal reception effect (both non-suppression mode and strong suppression mode)” occurs after the “additional reception effect” does not occur. As described above, it is desirable to increase the proportion of which is executed in a mode with a high expectation level (acceptable sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

  In addition, as described above, when the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is always generated during the period of the strong suppression mode. May be. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns which are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, “the strong suppression mode is selected, but the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is performed during the strong suppression mode”. "Change pattern not to be generated" is not included, and "Change pattern that generates an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) during the strong suppression mode when included in the strong suppression mode" is included. . Or, even if the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the period of the strong suppression mode may be ended without generating the operation reception effect (internal reception effect). It may be. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns which are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, “the strong suppression mode is selected, but the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) is performed during the strong suppression mode”. “A variation pattern that does not occur” and “a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (internal reception effect) during the strong suppression mode” when included in the strong suppression mode. .

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect (internal reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong Even if the player does not notice that it is in the “suppression mode”, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is excluded based on the following effect elements.

  That is, when the “internal reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, first, even when the first allowable sound is the “additional reception effect” Even if the effect sound that can be output is output for the same time (in the figure, output in the “first mode”), instead of the “additional reception effect” based on the first allowable sound, It is possible to recognize that the "internal reception effect" has occurred. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 222) that is output upon occurrence of the “additional reception effect” ends the output halfway even if the effect is received in the output state. The output sound is output for a predetermined period of time, while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode” and is output when the “internal reception effect” is generated. The first permissible sound (see FIG. 223), when an effect is accepted when in the output state, ends the output halfway based on the effect acceptance.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “internal reception effect” is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, by confirming whether or not the second permissible sound is output, the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is eliminated. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second permissible sound need not necessarily be prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the operation related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the production reception is allowed is also provided. , “Internal reception effect” occurs when “BGM playback” effect sound is in “strong suppression mode” (message display), and “additional reception effect” occurs It is possible to recognize that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is also excluded.

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” that occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, the automatic button function described above can be enabled, In the “additional reception effect”, the automatic button function described above is not activated, and this also excludes the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred. It is possible to recognize.

  As described above, when the “internal reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, in addition to the effect elements related to the “suppression mode”, various effects The fact that the “additional reception effect” is occurring in the element is different from the case where the “additional reception effect” is occurring, it is relatively excluded that the possibility of the “additional reception effect” has occurred. It is possible to easily recognize and to concentrate on the “internal reception effect”.

  On the other hand, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppressed mode”, the “additional reception effect” and the various effect elements have common points. By making it difficult to recognize whether “internal reception effect” or “additional reception effect” is occurring, “additional reception effect” has occurred. We are trying to provide a performance that makes people aware of the possibility of being.

  FIG. 224 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when the “internal reception effect” as the symbol effect based on the variation pattern occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”. It is. It should be noted that the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 224 corresponds to the change pattern when a change pattern different from “the change pattern that can generate the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223” is selected. It may be generated as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 222 and FIG. 223 is selected, a symbol effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern occurs. .

  As shown in FIG. 224, the “internal reception effect” that occurs in the “non-suppression mode” is also the “internal reception effect” that occurs in the “strong suppression mode”. Similar to “Regular reception effect”, even if any result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination), it always occurs when a predetermined timing in the symbol effect (here, timing tr71) arrives. It has become a thing.

  However, the first permissible sound (first mode) output when the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 224 is generated is the first permissible sound output when the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222 is generated. Similar to the sound (first mode), even if an effect is received when in the output state, the output is not terminated midway, but is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). . Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish between “internal reception effect” and “additional reception effect” based on this. .

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, the second permissible sound is not output together with the output of the first permissible sound (first aspect). It is the same as “Additional reception effect”.

  Further, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, the operation means to be operated is displayed as an operation related display (display for prompting an operation) that appears within a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed. Only the habit image and the gauge display suggesting the remaining time are displayed, and the message display is not displayed. In this respect as well, it is the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. It has become.

  Further, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, the object to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the “operation button 410”, and the “sword ornament 5001” is not set as the operation object. This is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, when the operation is not detected within the set time (effective period), the above-described automatic button function is not activated, and the post-operation effect is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) ends without occurring has arrived, and this is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  Thus, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”, the “BGM playback” effect sound becomes the “strong suppression mode”. Unlike the case where an “internal reception effect” occurs, various effect elements are common with the occurrence of an “additional reception effect”, and an “additional reception effect” may occur. You can be conscious of sex.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the production sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, “internal reception production (internal reception production in which the automatic button function is not activated)” ”Occurs, there is a case where an allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output and a case where a set time is generated without outputting the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) itself. . On the other hand, when the “additional reception effect” occurs while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”, the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) itself is not output. A set time is not generated, and an acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is always output.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, when the reception permission sound is output, the “internal reception effect” And “additional reception effect”, it is difficult to recognize whether the “acceptance reception sound” is output. It becomes possible to recognize that it is occurring. Whether or not an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output when the “internal reception effect” is generated while the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “non-suppression mode”. It is desirable that it is determined according to the type of the variation pattern, not the production determination. “Internal reception effect” in a non-suppression mode in which an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, and “Internal reception effect” in a non-inhibition mode in which an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not output May be sequentially executed within the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

  Also, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, when an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, an “internal reception effect” and an “additional reception effect” It is difficult to recognize which one of the above has occurred, but when the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not output, it can be recognized that the operation reception effect is an “internal reception effect” It becomes like this.

  As described above, in the “additional reception effect”, the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the performance determination (notice determination). When the “internal reception effect” is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, it may not be output (for example, “specific” shown in FIG. 216). Embodiment "). However, with respect to the different modes, it is desirable that the generation rate of the first permissible sound is lower than that in the first mode.

  With respect to the “internal reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, other examples and modifications related to the operation reception effect shown in FIG.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, for the convenience of explanation, the illustration is shown as if the production judgment is performed while the design production is being performed. Is performed at the start of symbol variation.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in FIG. 212 to FIG. 224, with respect to the aspect of the post-operation production according to the production acceptance, when the big hit is obtained by the big hit determination and when the big hit is lost by the big hit judgment And may be different. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, the production examples are as shown in FIG. 212 to FIG. 224. On the other hand, when the big hit is lost in the big hit determination, FIG. The post-operation effect may be performed in a manner different from the effect example shown in 224.

  As described above, the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has conventionally been realized by executing a program that individually controls various effect devices or a program that links a plurality of effect devices. These programs are described by program codes representing operation contents and control procedures of the rendering device for each notice content in addition to commands related to the variation pattern, and are created by highly skilled programmers. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in the frame where the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to perform a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complex effect control. As a result, a high level of skill is required for each programmer and the development man-hours increase, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, since the total amount of the program code of the production control program is increased, the man-hours required for the test for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality are also increased.

  Therefore, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of this embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) is not realized by the program code. In addition, the program data for the gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal rendering effect, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality. Like to do.

  More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of the effect. Each block is provided with a flag (usability information) indicating whether or not an effect based on the block can be executed. This flag (usability information) is, for example, stored as rewritable information on the RAM.

  In the scenario data, for example, as many blocks as the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination are combined in time series. That is, when the start condition for starting the symbol variation is established, first, an effect determination as to which type of effect is generated among the effects is performed, and when the result is obtained, Based on the obtained result, the flag (usability information) is set to the ON state for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the judgment result indicating that the execution should be performed, and the determination result indicating that the execution should be performed is obtained. For the block corresponding to the production type that has not been made, the flag (usability information) is kept off. Thus, after the symbol fluctuation (fluctuation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (every unit time (one frame)), thereby corresponding to the block set to the ON state. Only the type of production is selectively executed.

  Here, as the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of variation pattern, or may be prepared without depending on the variation pattern. When prepared as different data for each type of variation pattern, it will be configured as scenario data in which only the blocks corresponding to the production type that may occur separately for each variation pattern are combined in time series, Of these blocks, only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as the execution target is turned on. On the other hand, when prepared as data prepared in common for each variation pattern, the blocks corresponding to all the production types (numbers corresponding to the blocks) are configured as scenario data stored by a table structure or the like. Thus, it may be realized by operating only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as an execution target among these blocks. The scenario data prepared without depending on the variation pattern may be prepared in correspondence with the type of processing read out while processing (analyzing) the block (described later in “ In this case, scenario data that corresponds to the variation pattern type and scenario data that does not correspond to the variation pattern type are prepared separately, and this corresponds to the variation pattern type. The scenario data that is not to be used can be commonly used in a plurality of types of variation patterns, so that the processing load and the storage capacity can be suitably suppressed.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, the display or non-display of the effects related to the lottery, the replacement of the effects and symbols, the interactive effects in response to the external input by the player, etc., so that each block operated in the ON state is executed It is impossible to achieve all the productions with just that.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, process identification information (effect SW) for calling a program for executing an effect at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control is included in the block or block. Can be set (incorporated) in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with. Here, the process identification information (effect SW) is prepared for the types of programs to be called, and each type is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, process identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an on state may be prepared. As a result, when processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, according to the type of the acquired processing identification information The process with the specified content is called, and the called process is executed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. It may be.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) the embedded process identification information while executing analysis of scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc., the program function corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information Is called dynamically (callback). Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute an effect other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lamp lighting, accessory operation, etc.) It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent production control, such as setting and updating of data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling the program function with the process identification information, it is possible to realize display or non-display of rendering by a plurality of blocks, rendering and symbol replacement, and interactive rendering for external input by the player.

  The program function called by the callback is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created for each model of the gaming machine. Therefore, even designers and project creators who do not have advanced program knowledge need only design the production of various productions, and otherwise set process identification information that calls predefined program functions. This makes it possible to easily realize even a complicated performance specification. Furthermore, using the production creation tool, production blocks (liquid crystal production scheduler data) can be created in production units, and the development period can be greatly reduced. In addition, production contents can be created based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the flag (usability information) and the processing identification information without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be greatly reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game control means (main control) that performs the determination on the big hit and can grant a privilege based on the fact that the predetermined determination result (winning win) is obtained. Board 1310), an effect control means (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processing related to various effects based on the variation pattern according to the determination, and image data in the display area based on the processing performed by the effect control means. Image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for output, and the effect control means reads time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data and block, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and the time-series image information. And an image information processing means capable of executing a process for displaying an image based on the above.

  In addition, in the time-series image information (such as the scenario data and block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data described above) according to this embodiment, at least part of the time-series image information may include processing identification information. The information processing means can acquire the process identification information from the time-series image information and call a process according to the type of the acquired process identification information. As a result, while processing related to an image is performed every unit time (for example, one frame), processing related to an effect element (lamp, sound, movable body, etc.) different from the image is performed based on the schedule for image display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the production elements when realizing the production in cooperation with different production elements. Become.

  In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, processing identification information is acquired for each unit time as time-series image information read when a specific variation pattern is executed as a variation pattern. Sections can be included. In such a configuration, when the time-series image information, which is data for designating “processing for displaying an image” in time series, includes process identification information, which is data for designating reading of the process. Since the time-series image information read out when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern can include a section in which the processing identification information is acquired every unit time, fine timing Even in the case where it is necessary to perform the rendering process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation from the rendering by the display image.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state. Allowed special operation reception effects can be executed. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-permission operation-related display that is performed when such a special operation reception effect is generated and the special operation reception effect are permitted to be received. The permissible operation related display that is performed when the camera is in the active state is displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data or block, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, the operation reception is allowed because the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, or in a non-output state. It is expected to focus on. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the rendering performance becomes poor as much as the specific type of rendering sound is suppressed. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the pre-permission operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the permissible operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is in a state where the reception of the effect is permitted Since the display is based on different time-series image information, a variety of effects can be realized with respect to the display effects, and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when no operation is detected within a period during which the reception of an effect is allowed, a special operation reception effect that can generate a post-operation effect is executed. It is possible. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-permission operation-related display that is performed when such a special operation reception effect is generated and the special operation reception effect are permitted to be received. The permissible operation related display that is performed when the camera is in the active state is displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data or block, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, a post-operation effect can be generated even if no operation is detected within a period in which the effect reception is allowed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which no operation is performed by the player and, as a result, the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. Moreover, in the above configuration, regarding the pre-permission operation-related display performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the permissible operation-related display performed when the special operation reception effect is in a state where the reception of the effect is permitted, Since the display is made based on different time-series image information, a variety of effects can be realized with respect to the display effects, and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment reads information corresponding to image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the block, and performs liquid crystal display control on the read information. It is possible to output to the unit 1512. In this regard, as will be described later, as a block, the first type block that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing arrives, and the block is read without passing the wait time (wait processing period). A second type block is prepared.

  More specifically, the first type block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the timing for starting the production is reached when the availability information is set to the on state at the start of the variation pattern. It can be configured to be read after that. For the second type block, for example, within the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the first type block, the availability information corresponding to the second type block It is possible to configure such that data is read without passing through a wait time (wait processing period) by setting the ON state.

  That is, in this case, the second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared between a plurality of timings and a plurality of variation patterns. Therefore, not only is it expected to reduce the processing load and the memory capacity, but also it becomes possible to facilitate production design and production change.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect) among the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). The second time-series image information (second block or second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read out while the processing based on the scheduler data is in an execution state, and the second time-series image information is read out. Then, the processing based on the second time-series image information is changed to the execution state in place of the processing based on the first time-series image information in the middle of execution. That is, in this case, it is possible to save time and effort for ending the processing based on the first time-series image information, and a reduction in processing load and memory capacity can be expected.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “block” according to this embodiment will be described again. The “block” is the effect display device 1600. When an image displayed on the screen is composed of “a plurality of image elements (a plurality of layers)”, the image elements (layers) are prepared separately to display the image elements. The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is subjected to processing for reading information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

  Here, the process for reading the information (image number) corresponding to the image data (process in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95)” activated for each frame. For each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on “block”, and if there is such information, it is read out, A drawing list is created based on the information read for each frame and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). Thus, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out the image data based on the drawing list and creates a display image, and then outputs the display image to the display area, thereby displaying on the effect display device 1600. Production will be realized.

  Here, the “block” itself may be configured as a data structure that designates “information corresponding to image data (image number)” for each unit time. Since it has the function as “production scheduler data”, it is not necessary to prepare “liquid crystal production scheduler data” separately from “block”, and this can be omitted.

  However, the “block” according to this example specifies the type of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” and is currently displayed based on the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” associated with the “block”. It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be processed. If there is such information, it is read out and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be associated with one “block”. In this case, these “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” are executed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, one of these “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is selectively executed.

  Further, in the “block” according to this illustrative example, a “liquid crystal effect” in which a schedule for each frame regarding information (image number) corresponding to “image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)” is described. In addition to the “scheduler data”, information on what is executed as “processing related to lamp emission”, information on which is executed as “processing related to movable body operation”, and “processing related to sound output” It also includes information about what to do. That is, in this case, if a “block” for realizing a specific notice effect is read, “image processing in the effect display device 1600” related to the specific notice effect based on the “block”, and “ Since “processing related to lamp emission”, “processing related to movable body operation”, and “processing related to sound output” are read out and executed, different rendering elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound) ), It is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between these effect elements when one effect (specific notice effect) is realized.

  As described above, the “block” constitutes one scenario data together with another block or as a single unit, and among the scenario data, the “block” in which the availability information is on. Only is selectively executed (analyzed) so that an effect in an aspect corresponding to the result of the effect determination is executed.

  However, as far as scenario data and blocks are concerned, it is only necessary to have a relationship such as “scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of the production”. The detailed implementation method including the provision of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is not limited.

  FIG. 225 conceptually shows an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects using “scenario data” or “block” when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is a time chart. In FIG. 225, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is described as “animation list”, but these are synonymous.

  As shown in FIG. 225, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanation example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. The blocks (the symbol block A, the symbol block B, the symbol block C, and the symbol block D) are combined in time series. However, in this embodiment, scenario data, such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data, in which only one block indicating the content of the production is prepared, is also included.

  In addition, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this illustrative example includes “configured so that any one of a plurality of associated blocks can be selectively executed”. In this case, only the unusable information corresponding to the selected block among the plurality of blocks is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to the other blocks is left in the off state. Any one of them can be selectively executed. Or, the block according to this example includes “a configuration that can selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, In this case, only the unusable information corresponding to the selected liquid crystal effect scheduler data among the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to the other liquid crystal effect scheduler data remains in the off state. By doing so, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data may be selectively executed.

  Now, assuming that the start condition for symbol variation (holding digestion) is established, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information related to various determination results from the main control board 1310. The information acquired in this way also includes information on the variation pattern. The peripheral control unit 1511 reads out scenario data corresponding to the information (variation pattern) and associates it with the scenario data as a candidate for execution. An effect is determined as to which block (effect) to execute among a plurality of blocks (blocks corresponding to the notice effect, etc.). Then, among the plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for the block (effect) for which the effect is determined to be executed, the availability information is operated (set) in the ON state and executed. For the block (effect) for which the effect determination to effect is not made, the availability information is left in the off state.

  Note that the availability information associated with each block (effect) is operated (set) in an off state when starting a symbol effect (variable effect by a decorative symbol) such as when scenario data is read out. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read out in this way, the above-described processing as to which block availability information is operated (set) in the ON state is performed.

  Here, regarding the “block” in which the availability information is operated (set) in the on state when starting the symbol production, it is executed (analyzed) immediately after the symbol presentation starts based on the scenario data, or the scenario It is executed (analyzed) in the form following another block (production) started based on the data, or executed at a timing after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for the scenario data or block ( Analysis). However, the blocks (effects) include “things that may be executed at a plurality of timings within one fluctuation pattern”, “things that may be executed at a plurality of fluctuation patterns”, and the like. In other words, when a design effect is started, if a mechanism that operates (sets) the availability information of all the blocks to be executed within the variation is turned on (set), “even if it is an effect mode in which the same content appears. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) each having a different wait time (wait processing period) only by different execution timings ”. In other words, in this case, since different data is prepared and the performance is executed based on the data even though the content is the same, the processing load and the memory capacity may be adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always an execution target, but when executing a symbol effect, the specific block (specific effect) ) Use availability information is not operated (set) in the on state, and the symbol effect can be started in the off state. As such specific blocks (specific effects), in FIG. 225, “appearance EF block E”, “operation waiting block E”, “post-operation block E”, and the like correspond to these blocks. Will be described later. Of these, the “post-operation block E” is executed as an effect that clearly indicates whether the jackpot is won or lost (the effect in which the contents of the effect dedicated to the jackpot are prepared).

  Further, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even if it is a block (effect) that is obtained as a result of effect determination, it is executed at another variation pattern or at another timing. When the symbol effect is executed, the use / prohibition information is not operated (set) in the on state, and the symbol effect can be started in the off state. In FIG. 225, such blocks are “operation waiting block A”, “appearance EF & operation waiting block D”, etc., and these blocks will be described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied at timing ts1. Therefore, at timing ts1, scenario data predetermined for each layer is read in a manner corresponding to the type of variation pattern. Next, an effect determination is made as to which of the blocks associated with the scenario data read out in this way and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is operated (set). The operation (setting) for the availability information is performed based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is executed (analyzed) separately for each layer while the operation (setting) is performed on the availability information in this way, so that the production progresses in a manner corresponding to the result of the production determination.

  However, instead of this, the presentation determination according to the type of the variation pattern may be performed before the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a manner corresponding to the type of the variation pattern. Good. That is, in this case, the result of the effect determination executed before the scenario data is read out with respect to the blocks associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Will be operated based on the above.

  Here, in the “layer 1” of the plurality of layers, regarding the “background image” displayed when the symbol effect is not executed (the symbol is stopped and the game is not executed). This corresponds to the scenario data block (normal background block). Therefore, in “Layer 1”, a new block is not read when the timing ts1 arrives, and a block that is already in execution (normal background block) is continuously executed ( Analysis).

  More specifically, in the normal background block, “which image data” should be output at “when” the “background image image data” stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Is associated with “normal background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background” every unit time (one frame), and as a result, “image data for background images (moving image or Each time information corresponding to “still image)” is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (drawing list) may be created together with information obtained from other frames and transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 as the drawing list. As a result, the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. For the block and scenario data associated with this “normal background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, the timing at which the power-on processing is completed, the corresponding effect state (normal effect state, high-definition effect state, special effect mode, etc.) It is desirable to read out at the timing of entering (), and to set the background image (background moving image) with the same content as the time-series image information displayed in a loop every predetermined time. In addition, information corresponding to “image data for a background image (moving image or still image)” is not created together with information obtained from other frames, but the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. May be transmitted. In short, the information corresponding to “image data for a background image (moving image or still image)” may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any manner.

  The normal background image displayed on “Layer 1” based on the normal background block is SP on “Layer 3” based on “SP reach background block” and “SP end background block” described later. When the background image at the time of reach is displayed, the background image on “Layer 3” is displayed preferentially and is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, as the internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on “Layer 3”, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background” is displayed on “Layer 1”. The processing related to the normal background image based on the image is continuously executed, and is not set to the non-executed state according to the processing status of the SP background image on “Layer 3”. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach is completed, the normal background is displayed again, and thus the normal background is displayed. Originally, a “design block D” for displaying a stopped design is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize in which effect state the winning symbol is displayed when the big hit symbol appears, and it is possible to suitably promote understanding of the game.

  On the other hand, “layer 2” corresponds to a scenario data block (symbol block) for “effect symbol (symbol displayed on effect display device 1600)”. Since the specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 225 extends to the SP reach effect, the “layer 2” scenario data is associated with “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for change before reach”. The “symbol block B”, which associates “symbol block A for liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal reach variation”, and “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach variation”, which is associated It is determined that “block C” and “symbol block D” associated with “stop design liquid crystal effect scheduler data” are sequentially executed (analyzed).

  However, in recent years, during the period in which the SP reach background is displayed, the “effect design” is often displayed small in the effect display device 1600. Further, after the SP reach background is displayed, There is a case where the presentation progresses such as “returned and then the SP reach background is displayed again”. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that a shift may occur when there is some abnormality just by executing (analyzing) the display schedule for the “design symbol” and the display schedule for the “SP reach background” for each layer. Therefore, “symbol block C” associated with “SP reach variation liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be executed based on the display schedule related to “SP reach background”. In this case, the process related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of effect symbols.

  For example, for calling “a process for turning on the availability information of the design block C” at a predetermined timing in “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” corresponding to “SP reach background block” described later. By adding the process identification information, the “symbol block C” and the “symbol block D” can be executed based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, regarding the “symbol block C” and the “symbol block D”, the availability information is not changed when the symbol effect is started. ”And“ symbol block B ”are not included in the scenario data and are configured as different scenario data.

  “Layer 3” corresponds to a scenario data block (SP reach background block, SP end background block) regarding “background image after the start of SP reach production”. In this respect, the “background image after the start of the SP reach effect” should not be displayed at the time when the design effect is started, but should be started from the middle of the design effect. Therefore, in the “layer 3” scenario data, a wait time (wait processing period) is set so that the “background image after the start of SP reach production” is not executed until the corresponding timing arrives. Yes. As a result, after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has elapsed since the start of the design effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” are sequentially executed (analyzed), and accordingly Since the information can be read for each frame, the background image of the SP reach effect appears in the effect display device 1600.

  In other words, in this case, the block includes a first type block (a block corresponding to the layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 225, etc.) read after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives, A second type block (such as a block corresponding to layer 1, layer 2, and layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 225) that is read without waiting time (wait processing period) is included. The second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data that is shared at all performance timings, and therefore promotes reduction in processing load and memory capacity. In addition to being expected, it is possible to facilitate production design and production change.

  In this regard, in the SP reach production, regardless of whether or not the big hit is successful, after the display production of the same content is started, the production content for the big hit (for example, the production content that the character wins) It is often configured to suggest a determination result of a big hit by branching to any one of the production contents (for example, the production contents that the character loses). At this time, although the display effect of the same contents is executed regardless of the winning of the big hit until the middle stage of the SP reach production, they are different blocks (a block for big hit, a block for loser) ) Or image data, there is a concern that the processing load and memory capacity may be adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the scenario data related to the SP reach effect is a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between the big hit and the lost, and the big hit. The blocks are divided into blocks (SP end background blocks) corresponding to different image data at the time of loss, and these are sequentially executed. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

  By the way, in the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect, “SP reach background block” is read after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” is read out. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background”, there is a section in which the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). Thus, the production reception period (effective period) is generated not by time management by a timer or the like but by frame management of the liquid crystal production scheduler data.

For example, in the “liquid reach effect scheduler data for SP reach background” shown in FIG. 225, the “liquid reach effect scheduler data for SP reach background” is executed (analyzed) separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. ), The process identification information “X1” is arranged for each frame from the timing ts31 immediately after. Each time the process identification information “X1” is read, the following “process X1” is read and executed.
Process X1. A process in which an effect determination is made as to whether or not an effect after operation corresponding to the “post-operation block C” is generated based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a section in which such process identification information (here, “X1”) is attached every unit time is “a stage reception period during which stage reception can be performed by an operation ( In the “process X1”, the availability information of the “block C for post-operation” associated with “layer 6” is turned on when the production determination is made. The operation (setting) is performed. As a result, the “post-operation block C” is read every unit time for the time corresponding to this, and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler” associated with the “post-operation block C”. “Data C” is executed (analyzed) every unit time, and “process related to lamp emission” and “process related to movable body operation” associated with “post-operation block C” When the “processing related to sound output” is started, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” can be generated.

  Note that the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” also in the next frame in which the processing associated with the “post operation block C” is started. Data "is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect reception period) in which the process identification information (here “X1”) is attached for each unit time, even in the next frame, “SP reach background use” The process identification information (here, “X1”) is read from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, and the “process X1” corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X1” includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the “post-operation block C” has been started. When it is determined that the execution has been started, the “process X1” is terminated without further processing based on the operation detection information.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 225, four pieces of the same process identification information (here, “X1”) are arranged from the timing ts31, but are read out from the second process identification information (here, “X1”). In “Process X1”, an effect is received, and “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data C” associated with “post-operation block C” is executed (analyzed) in “layer 6”. Assume the case. In this case, although the necessity to read out the third and fourth processing identification information (here, “X1”) filled in the figure is no longer lost, the “LCD reach scheduler for the SP reach background” The data is automatically read out while executing “data” every unit time. However, each time the information is read in this way, a process such as “End the process X1 because the post-operation effect has been executed” is executed in the “process X1” corresponding to the process identification information (here, “X1”). As a result, the processing related to the production determination is substantially invalidated (the production reception is not allowed).

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in “Process X1” (when it is determined that the post-operation effect is not executed), the “post-operation block C” associated with “Layer 6” is used. The process X1 is terminated while the availability information is kept off. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, “X1”) is acquired every unit time (one frame) is ended, “the liquid crystal effect scheduler for the SP reach background” every unit time (one frame). Processing identification information (here, “X1”) is read from “data”, and the above “processing X1” corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the section ends with the fourth process identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth process identification information is read out and responded accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” is not executed, and the subsequent effects progress.

  According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), the “SP reach background use effect” is performed. The same process identification information (X1) for reading “process X1 capable of generating post-operation effect” from “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is acquired. However, since it becomes possible to substantially function as an effect reception period (effective period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to favorably simplify and share the effect design. Become.

  Note that FIG. 225 merely illustrates such a process as a concept, and actually, the process identification information is not acquired over only four frames. If it is made to function as an effect reception period, it is usually set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the effect reception period that occurs at other timings. Further, as described above, such process identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

In addition, in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information (here, “1”) related to the operation effect is added even at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of “1” does not read “a process in which an effect determination is made as to whether an effect after operation is performed”, but is read and executed by the following “process 1”. It has become.
Process 1. For a player who is in a state where an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) suggesting that an “effect reception period (effective period) during which an operation can be received by an operation” will soon occur, and an effect reception period has occurred. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” for performing the operation waiting effects (such as the above-described spear image and gauge display) for prompting the operation.

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” separately from “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. However, the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) determined by “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become. That is, in this case, the execution of the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” is started at any timing or a plurality of timings in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal It is easy to start execution of “Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D” from “Liquid Crystal Production Scheduler Data” within a variation pattern different from “Production Scheduler Data”. Can be suitably achieved.

  When “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” is executed (analyzed), “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” corresponding to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D” is read out. . Although these processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, in the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, first, while the acceptance of the production is not permitted, A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an “acceptance period (valid period) that can be performed” will occur soon is acquired.

  However, in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, an operation-waiting effect (the above-described 操作 image or gauge described above) is in the state where an effect reception period has occurred and the player is prompted to perform an operation. A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to display etc. is acquired appears, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). It has become.

That is, in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data” executed (analyzed) from timing ts41, “Y3” is displayed for each frame from timing ts42 separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. The process identification information is attached in a line. Each time the process identification information “Y3” is read, the following “process Y3” is read and executed.
Process Y3. Processing in which effect determination is performed as to whether or not an effect after operation corresponding to “post-operation block D” is generated based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a section in which such process identification information (here, “Y3”) is attached every unit time is “an effect reception period during which an effect can be received by an operation (effective period) ) ". In addition, in the “process Y3”, when an effect determination is made, “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” that is a basis for reading the “process Y3”. The availability information of the “post-operation block D” associated with the same “Layer 6” is operated (set) to the ON state.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block D” is read, various processes including “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block D” is generated. In addition to this, the newly read “post-operation block D (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for post-operation)” is the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & waiting for operation) that was in the middle of execution. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) ”is changed to the execution state at“ Layer 6 ”.

  According to such a configuration, the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal), which is no longer necessary to be read because the production determination has been made simply by reading the“ post-operation block D ”. It is possible to substantially invalidate the processing identification information of “Y3” for reading out the “production scheduler data D)” and “process Y3” (to make the reception of the production unacceptable). Thus, it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for ending these, and it becomes possible to favorably simplify and share the production design. In the example shown in FIG. 225, reading is performed from the second process identification information (here, “Y3”) in the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)”. In the “process Y3”, the presentation is accepted, and the “post-operation liquid crystal presentation scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” in the same “layer 6” is thereby executed (analyzed). The case is assumed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “ray part” in the “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is erased by overwriting (substantially) This corresponds to the invalidated section).

  That is, the processing identification information of “Y3” can be attached to the “LCD reachable scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)” side as in the effect receiving period generated from timing ts31. Therefore, “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation-waiting block D) associated with the same layer as“ post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) ”. ) ”On the side, it can be said that it is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data ( In addition to the processing identification information of “Y3” included in “Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D)”,
The process identification information “Y2” included in “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)” is prepared.

  That is, as described above, “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” is the same as “layer 6 after operation (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation)” When the processing identification information “Y3” is added to this, the “post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is executed. This is useful in that it is automatically deleted (invalidated). However, “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” is included in “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)”. ”Is executed (analyzed) by operating the availability information on the basis of the process identification information. Therefore, if the frame process with the process identification information “1” is skipped when the processing load is high, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation The waiting block D) ”itself is not executed, and as a result, the production reception period (valid period) based on the process identification information“ Y3 ”may not occur.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect (the process in which the effect determination regarding whether to generate the post-operation effect based on the operation detection information) is performed. “Y2” process identification information and “Y3” process identification information are prepared, and “Y2” process identification information is provided on the “LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)” side. In addition, the process identification information “Y3” is attached to the “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation waiting block D)” side. As described above, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern, and a predetermined wait time (wait process) until the timing at which the effect should be started has arrived. A wait time (wait process) by setting the correspondence with the first type block read after a period of time and the availability information in the process executed based on the first type block. By reducing the risk that the production reception period (valid period) will not occur by preparing both the block corresponding to the second type block that is read without passing through the period) Will be able to.

  Here, in the “process Y3” executed based on the process identification information of “Y3”, when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the “post-operation block D” is operated to the on state. The display effect after operation in the effect display device 1600 (post-operation effect) is executed. On the other hand, in the “process Y2” executed based on the process identification information of “Y2”, when the effect determination is made, the “process related to lamp emission”, the “process related to movable body operation”, and the “related to sound output” Each process is started to be executed. Therefore, even if the process identification information “Y3” is not read, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output by the process identification information “Y2”. Has been. “Process Y2” and “Process Y3” may be any processes that can generate different post-operation effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, three pieces of the same process identification information (here “Y2”) are arranged from the timing ts42, but are read out from the second process identification information (here “Y2”). Further, it is assumed that an effect is received in “Process Y2”, and thereby an after-effect effect by lamp light emission, movable body operation, and sound output is executed. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read out the third process identification information (here, “Y2”) that is filled in the figure, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” Is automatically read out during execution of unit time per unit time. However, each time the information is read in this way, a process such as “End the process Y2 because the post-operation effect has been executed” is executed in the “process Y2” corresponding to the process identification information (here, “Y2”). As a result, the processing related to the production determination is substantially invalidated (the production reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
The first special operation that allows the reception of an effect based on the operation detection information that occurs when a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner, silence, or in a non-output state "Reception production (production reception period)"
-The second special operation reception effect (effect reception period) that can generate a post-operation effect even if no operation is detected regardless of the effect state (effect mode)
As described above, for example, see FIG. 142 and FIGS. 212 to 224.

  In the first special operation acceptance effect, the effect acceptance is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode, silence, or in a non-output state, and thus the operation effect is concentrated. Is expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the rendering performance becomes poor as much as the specific type of rendering sound (BGM playback) is suppressed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state reception is permitted by the pre-permission operation-related display (prediction effect) performed when the first special operation reception effect is generated and the first special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-described spear image and gauge display) that is performed during the (valid period) is displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, a variety of performances can be realized with respect to the display effect, and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state reception is permitted by the pre-permission operation-related display (prediction effect) performed when the second special operation reception effect is generated and the second special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-described bag image and gauge display) performed during the (valid period) is also displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, a variety of performances can be realized with respect to the display effect, and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

More specifically, in “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” shown in FIG. 225, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the suppression mode, Even if no operation is detected, it is possible to generate a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that generates a post-operation effect, and at timing ts51, The process identification information “2” is read out in order to start the process related to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information of “2” does not read “a process in which an effect determination is made as to whether an effect after operation is generated”, but reads and executes the following “process 2”. .
Process 2. Availability of use for “appearance EF block E” for performing a warning effect (appearance effect display, etc.) suggesting that an “accuracy reception period (effective period) during which an operation can be received by an operation” will soon occur. Processing to set (set) information on

  According to such a configuration, apart from the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, the pre-permissible operation related display (prediction effect) dedicated block (block E for appearance EF) And the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF) must be prepared, but for the “appearance EF block E”, “the liquid crystal effect for the SP reach background” Execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) determined by the “scheduler data”. That is, in this case, the execution of the “appearance EF block E” is started at every timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler”. Since it is easy to start the “appearance EF block E” from “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from “data”, it is preferable to facilitate and share the effect design. Will be able to.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation (expectations in which jackpot symbols appear) are separately prepared for the pre-permissible operation related display (prediction effect) and the permissible operation related display, Since it will be possible to combine them appropriately as to which combination they will be executed, it will be possible to make a variety of production variations, so that the decline of the game entertainment can be suppressed Become. Further, even when employed in other variation patterns, the permissible operation-related display (prediction effect) is a common aspect, but the permissible operation-related display is executed in a unique aspect that is not shared. It will be possible.

  When the “appearing EF block E” is executed (analyzed), the “appearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” corresponding to the “appearing EF block E” is read and executed (analyzed). Is done. When this “appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” is executed (analyzed), an effect (pre-permissible operation-related display) based on a predetermined effect display is sent from “the section where the effect reception is not permitted” to “effect reception”. Image information (moving image or still image) to be executed in such a manner as to straddle the “interval that allows” is acquired.

  However, for “appearing EF block E” and “appearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E”, “a process in which an effect can be determined to generate an effect after operation based on operation detection information” is executed. Since the process identification information is not attached, the production reception period does not occur based on the block or scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the timing ts52 is reached within the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, “3” is generated in order to generate the effect reception period. The process identification information is read out. The process identification information “3” does not correspond to “a process in which an effect can be determined to generate a post-operation effect based on the operation detection information”, but is data that associates the following “process 3”. .
Process 3. “Usage information of“ operation waiting block E ”for performing an operation waiting effect (such as the above-described spear image or gauge display) that prompts the player to perform an operation in the state where the effect reception period has occurred. Process to operate (set) to ON state

  According to such a configuration, apart from “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)” and “appearance EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)”, Permissible operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned bag image and gauge display) This dedicated block (operation waiting block E) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E waiting for operation) Although it is necessary to prepare the “waiting operation block E”, the execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) determined by “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP reach background”. become able to. In other words, in this case, the “operation waiting block E” is started to be executed at every timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler”. Since it is easy to start execution of the “operation waiting block E” from “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from “data”, it is preferable to facilitate and share the effect design. Will be able to.

  Here, the effect reception period generated at timing ts52 is also attached so that the same process identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is arranged for each frame, similarly to the effect reception period in which the effect reception is allowed at timings ts31 and ts42. It may be configured as an effect section. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, this is realized by a method different from the production reception period that occurs at timings ts31 and ts42, and the other production reception periods are also configured by the method described below. It may be.

  That is, for the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts52, a state in which the effect reception is not permitted (off state) and a state in which the effect reception is allowed (on state) due to the state operation (off state, on state) of the operation state flag. ) And create a method. When this method is adopted, not the process called based on the process identification information but the effect based on the operation detection information for each unit time (for each frame) in the “peripheral control unit steady process” shown in FIG. It is desirable to make the determination.

  For example, each time the “peripheral control unit steady process” is performed, the operation state flag is checked, and the operation detection information is set on the condition that the operation state flag is on (provided that it is in the production reception period). Based on the above, it is possible to make an effect determination for generating the post-operation effect. When the performance determination is made, the availability information of the block (here, “post-operation block E”) corresponding to the type of post-operation effect according to the operation state flag that is in the on state is operated to the on state ( Setting).

  That is, in this case, the operation state flags are prepared for the types of post-operation effects, and after determining the type of the operation state flag that is in the on state, the post-operation effects corresponding thereto are determined. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) to the on state. The process for setting the operation state flag to the off state may be executed in the process for operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect in the on state, or the availability information is turned on. You may make it perform within the process called based on the process identification information attached | subjected to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) operated to the state.

  The processing procedure when such a method is adopted will be described again from the point where the processing identification information “3” is read out at the timing ts52 and the above “processing 3” is executed. Block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E waiting for operation) ”is read out and executed (analyzed).

The processing for setting the operation state flag to the on state may be performed in the “Process 3”. However, in the example shown in FIG. The process identification information of “Z1” associated with the following “process Z1” is read out at the first frame (process timing) when “data E)” is executed (analyzed).
Process Z1. Processing for turning on the operation state flag of the type associated with “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is operated (set) at the timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above. By performing the processing, the period during which the operation state flag is maintained in the on state can be made to function as the “production reception period”. In addition, while the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state in this way, the permissible operation related display (described above) based on the execution (analysis) of the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)”.摸 Image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-permission operation-related display associated with layer 7 (appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) and permissibility associated with layer 6 The middle operation-related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is executed so that the display periods partially overlap each other.

  Here, the pre-permissible operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed in front of the permissible operation related display associated with the layer 6 and is displayed preferentially. It has become so. Accordingly, the acceptance of the production is permitted from the time when at least a part of the permissible operation related display is difficult to be visually recognized by the pre-permissible operation related display. It is possible to provide a performance such that it is possible to receive a production while it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not an aspect with a mark appears.

  In this regard, when an effect is received at timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which such an effect reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” associated with 6 in the ON state is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above. As a result, each process (lamp, movable object, sound, etc.) including “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with “post-operation block E” is executed. . At this time, in the layer 6, “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with “post-operation block E” is associated with “operation waiting block E”. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the “operation waiting block E” halfway. At this time, process identification information of “Z3” described later included in “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” can be deleted (invalidated) by itself. Become.

As for the process of setting the operation state flag to the OFF state, the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” in the ON state in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the first frame when the “post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is executed (analyzed) is executed. The processing identification information of “Z2” is read out at the processing timing) and the following “processing Z2” corresponding thereto is executed to execute the processing based on “post-operation block E” after the effect reception period has ended. Like to do.
Process Z2. Processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-permissible operation related display (appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) remains in the screen (displayed state). As described above, there may be a case where an effect is received. Therefore, in the “process Z2”, it is determined whether or not the appearance EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF) is in an execution state, and when it is in the execution state, a process of ending this process is also performed. Is desirable. However, after the “appearing EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for the appearing EF)” is continued without being interrupted, the image display based on the “post-operation block E” is displayed as “for the appearing EF. Preferential execution (display on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the block EF for appearance EF) is performed in a range (for example, the entire screen) including at least all the “range where image display based on the block E is performed”. Thus, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

  In addition, in the “waiting operation block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E waiting for operation)”, when the processing at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), the “processing Z3” is supported to end the effect receiving period. The attached process identification information of “Z3” is read out. Here, when the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” is executed (analyzed) at the timing ts54, the “post-operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6 is used. Means that the “waiting operation block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” is not overwritten by the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, that is, the timing ts54 arrives. It means that there is no directing reception until. However, even if the production reception is not performed between the timing ts52 and the timing ts54 during the production reception period generated from the timing ts52, the “post-operation block E” is the same as when the production reception is performed. It functions as the above-mentioned “second special operation reception effect” for operating (setting) the availability information (the “automatic button function” described above).

Therefore, in “processing Z3” executed based on the processing identification information “Z3” read at timing ts54 in “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)”, the following processing is executed. It has come to be.
Process Z3. Among the operation state flags, processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with “post-operation block E” is performed, and the availability information of “post-operation block E” is turned on. Processing to operate (set) is performed

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period that occurs from the timing ts52, even if the effect is not received within the period, the same block as that when the effect is received is read, and the block Since the post-operation effect associated with is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the player forgets to operate. In addition, the post-operation effect is not executed after the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52) is ended, but “effect” is performed within the final frame (processing at timing ts52) of the process related to the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52). Since the processing for reading the same block as when the reception was made is performed, smooth production progress can be realized without causing a gap between when there is an operation and when there is no operation. become able to.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, a display image based on the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” (an image or a gauge display) can be received by the player. In both of the case where the production is accepted and the case where the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, a process (in this case, “operation” is performed based on the fact that the production is accepted. Since the later block E ”) is executed, even if the player forgets to perform the operation, the production can be advanced in the same manner, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed. Expected.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 225, the above-described “first” is executed during the production reception period generated from the timing ts52 while a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed manner at the time of the production reception period. It also functions as a “special operation reception effect”. Also in the “first special operation acceptance effect” shown in FIG. 225, at the time when the effect is accepted, the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppression mode and continues to be output in the suppression mode. Then, within a period during which the post-operation effect is being executed, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is set to be returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

  Note that “specific type effect sound” means a sound of “BGM playback” (normal background or SP background BGM playback), but here, in particular, it corresponds to “SP reach background block” This corresponds to the sound (SP reach BGM playback sound) that is output by executing the attached “processing related to sound output”. About the suppression aspect and method, it is possible to employ | adopt the aspect and method mentioned above suitably.

  In the above configuration, when the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is suppressed (or even when the effect is not received) When an operation acceptance effect is executed in which the same post-operation effect is performed as when the operation is performed), a pre-permissible operation related display (appearance EF block E) and a permissible operation related display (operation waiting block) For E), they are executed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, a variety of performances can be realized with respect to the display effect, and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, in such operation reception effects (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at timings ts52 to ts54, images (pre-allowance operation related display) displayed by different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). , Display of permissible operation related display) so that there is a period overlapping in time. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a presentation effect (such as the above-mentioned difficulty of visual recognition) entangled with the “pre-permission operation-related display” and the “permitted operation-related display”, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest. become.

  On the other hand, an operation reception effect that occurs when the “specific type of effect sound” is not in a suppressed state, such as an operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts41 (or a post-operation effect that occurs when the effect is not received). In the non-operation accepting effect), the pre-permissible operation related display and the permitted operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, such an operation reception effect is generated according to the result of the effect determination (notice determination), unlike the operation reception effect (operation reception effect that suggests a big hit by the post-operation effect) at the timing ts52 to ts54. In this case, the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and handling according to the determination result is facilitated. It can be said that it is more beneficial.

  However, even when the pre-permissible operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data), the pre-permissible operation related display is displayed on one layer. So that the display and the permissible operation-related display appear to overlap in time (both the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed. It is desirable to perform those effects (as the part is difficult to visually recognize).

  About the block of permissible operation related display (operation waiting block E), the process identification information read based on the block of pre-permissible operation related display (appearing EF block E (appearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) The availability information may be operated in an on state within the process according to the.

  The operation reception effects that are permitted to be received at the timings ts52 to ts54 may be executed as at least one of the first special operation reception effects described above and the second special operation reception effects described above. The operation reception effect (operation reception effect under BGM suppression) described above with reference to FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 215, 217 to 220, and 223 is executed. Also good. In this case, for the other operation reception effects shown in FIG. 225, for example, the operation reception effects described above with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, FIG. It may be executed as one of the effects). Moreover, you may make it employ | adopt suitably about each other example of these operation reception effects mentioned later.

  For example, different blocks are used for the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at timing ts42. In the reception effect, the same acceptable sound may be output when the production is accepted (first allowable sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224).

  In addition, in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52, if the effect is received during the output of the acceptable sound, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation reception effect (at the time ts42) ( In the operation waiting block E), various configurations are appropriately set such that the output state is maintained even when the presentation is accepted during the output of the acceptable sound (first acceptable sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224). It is possible to adopt.

  By the way, for scenario data related to SP reach production, a block corresponding to image data that can be shared between a big hit and a loss (a block for SP reach background), and a block corresponding to image data different between a big hit and a loss As described above, the blocks are divided into (SP ending background block) and are executed sequentially. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 at which the “SP reach background block” is shifted to the “SP end background block” is within the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed. It is set to be sure to arrive.

  In other words, in the operation reception effect in which the reception of the production is permitted at the timing ts52, the production reception (including the above-described automatic button function) is performed at any timing within the production reception period (timing ts52 to ts54). However, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as a period during which the post-operation effect is always executed (time setting required for execution of the post-operation effect). In the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, the display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (the display effect after the operation in the effect display device 1600 (after the operation) Effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is prioritized over the display based on the SP ending liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the “SP ending background block”. (Displayed on the near side of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP end background block). In this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set as a time longer than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E, and the long time The minute functions as a “period in which the post-operation effect is always executed”.

  The transition from the “SP reach background block” to the “SP end background block” is performed within the period in which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is being executed. By doing so, the “SP reach background block display (blocks shared in the win)” and the “SP end background block display (blocks used only in either of the wins)” atmosphere is completely different Even if it is a case where the production is designed so that it does not cause a sense of incongruity, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in gaming.

  Further, the scenario data of “Layer 4” and “Layer 5” are not associated with any image, and simply function as time-series data for calling processing at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and is not involved in any image display. Data) (empty time-series image information). Even if such a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed on the layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  There are two types of data calling blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for calling data). First, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 4”, the timing ts21 at which the processing is called at the start of symbol variation. A wait time (wait processing period) is set so that the data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call) is not executed until. Then, when the timing ts21 comes after such a wait time (wait processing period), the “data call block B” is executed (analyzed), and as a result, the “data call block B” corresponding to the “data call block B”. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call is executed (analyzed).

Here, “data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B” corresponding to “data calling block B” or “data calling block B” is given processing identification information “X2” for each unit time. Each time the process identification information “X2” is read, the following “process X2” is executed.
Process X2. A process in which an effect determination is made as to whether or not an after-effect effect corresponding to “post-operation block B” is generated based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  In this “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)”, a section in which the processing identification information “X2” is attached for each unit time is used as “the effect reception that can be effected by an operation”. "Processing period (effective period)", and in "Processing X2", when the effect determination is made, the availability information of "Block B for operation" associated with "Layer 6" is turned on. An operation (setting) is made to the state. As a result, the “post-operation block B” is executed (analyzed), and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B” associated with the “post-operation block B” is executed every unit time ( Analysis), “processing related to lamp emission”, “processing related to movable body operation”, “processing related to sound output” and the like associated with the “post-operation block B”. By starting the execution, a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” can be generated.

  Even in the next frame in which execution of the processes associated with the “post-operation block B” is started, the “data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” Executed (parsed). Accordingly, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect reception period) in which the process identification information (here “X2”) is attached every unit time, the “data call block B The process identification information (here, “X2”) is read from “(data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)”, and the “process X2” corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X2” includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the “post-operation block B” has been started. By determining that it is in a state in which execution has been started, the “process X2” is terminated without performing any further processing based on the operation detection information, and this is described in the “process X1” above That's right.

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in “Process X2” (when it is determined that the post-operation effect is not executed), the “post-operation block B” associated with “Layer 6” is used. The process X2 is terminated while the availability information is kept off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (here, “X2”) is acquired every unit time (one frame) is ended, “data call block B (data call block B The process identification information (here, “X2”) is read out from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” and the “process X2” corresponding thereto is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the section ends with the sixth process identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth process identification information is read out and responded accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the process X2, the after-effects corresponding to the “post-operation block B” are not executed and the subsequent effects are advanced.

  According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the “data calling block B The same process identification information (X2) for reading “process X2 capable of generating post-operation effect” from “(data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” is acquired. However, since it becomes possible to substantially function as an effect reception period (effective period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to favorably simplify and share the effect design. Become.

  Here, in the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) corresponding to “Layer 4”, the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed is not included, and “Process X2” read from the process identification information “X2”. The “operation waiting block” is not read out by the above. Therefore, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts21, the reception of the effect is allowed in a state where no habit image or gauge display is performed. Is realized by "."

  According to such a configuration, the “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data with different set values of wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make them appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 5”, the data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing through the wait time (wait processing period). In the calling block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling), a substantial wait function works. That is, in the data calling block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling), no image information or processing identification information is read until the timing ts11 arrives, and “4” is reached when the timing ts11 arrives. The process identification information is read out. However, the process identification information of “4” does not read “process for effect determination on whether to generate post-operation effect”, but reads and executes “process 4” below. It has become.
Process 4. For a player who is in a state where an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) suggesting that an “effect reception period (effective period) during which an operation can be received by an operation” will soon occur, and an effect reception period has occurred. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” for performing the operation waiting effects (such as the above-described spear image and gauge display) for prompting the operation.

  According to such a configuration, in addition to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A”, it is necessary to prepare the data calling block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling). With respect to “waiting block A”, process identification information “4” is attached also from a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A) that is different from “data call block A (data call effect liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately call up the design, and it is possible to favorably simplify and share the production design.

  When “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is executed (analyzed), “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” corresponding to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is read out. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time. However, in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A”, first, while the acceptance of the effect is not permitted, A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an “acceptance period (valid period) that can be accepted” will occur soon is acquired.

  However, in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A”, an operation-waiting effect (the above-described 操作 image or A section where image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a gauge display or the like is acquired appears, and the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame) in the section. It has become.

That is, in the “appearance EF & operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” executed (analyzed) from timing ts11, “Y1” is displayed for each frame from timing ts12 separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. "Are arranged so that the process identification information of" Each time the process identification information “Y1” is read, the following “process Y1” is read and executed.
Process Y1. A process in which an effect determination is made as to whether or not an effect after operation corresponding to “post-operation block A” is generated based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “Y1”) is attached every unit time is “the stage for receiving the stage for receiving the stage by the operation (effective period) ) ". In addition, in the “process Y1”, when an effect determination is made, “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”, which is the basis for reading the “process Y1”. The availability information of the “post-operation block A” associated with the same “layer 6” is operated (set) to the on state.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block A” is read, various processes including “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with the “post-operation block A” are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block A” is generated. In addition to this, the newly read “post-operation block A (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is in the “execution EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting block) that was in the middle of execution. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data A) for use is changed to the execution state at “Layer 6”.

  According to such a configuration, the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal), which is no longer necessary to be read because the production determination has been made simply by reading the“ post-operation block A ”. It is possible to substantially invalidate the production identification data “Y1” for reading “production scheduler data A)” and “process Y1” (to make the production acceptance unacceptable). Thus, it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for ending these, and it becomes possible to favorably simplify and share the production design. In the example shown in FIG. 225, reading is performed from the second processing identification information (here, “Y1”) in “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. In the “process Y1”, an effect is received, and “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with “post-operation block A” is executed (analyzed) in the same “layer 6”. The case is assumed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “ray part” in “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is erased by overwriting (substantially). This corresponds to the invalidated section).

  In “Layer 4”, an effect section in which process identification information is attached for each frame is set on the “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read from “data call block” such as “layer 5”. In “Layer 4”, as shown in “Layer 5”, this is realized by using a substantial wait function in the data call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). Also good.

  In “Layer 5”, an effect section in which process identification information is attached to each block is set on the block side read from “data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. did. However, the effect section may be set in “data calling block A (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” as in “layer 4”. Also, in “Layer 5”, as shown in “Layer 4”, this is realized by setting a weight for waiting for the data calling block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data calling) itself. Also good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when the process identification information “1” or “4” is acquired, it is suggested that “the production reception period (effective period) in which the production can be accepted by the operation” will soon occur. For performing a prelude effect (such as an appearance effect display) and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-described spear image or gauge display) that prompts the player to perform an operation in the state where the effect acceptance period has occurred A process for operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block” in the ON state is executed. However, the warning effect (such as the appearance effect display) does not necessarily have to be executed, and there is an effect waiting period for the operation waiting period (the above-described spear image or gauge) that prompts the player to perform an operation. For example, a process for operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “operation waiting block” for performing display (such as display) may be executed. That is, in this case, as soon as the “operation waiting block” is read, the process identification information associated with the “process that can be determined for presentation” is acquired.

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period that occurs at timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42, as in the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts51, it may be realized by setting the operation state flag.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information “Y2” and the process identification information “Y3” are set to be read at the same timing, but are read at different timings. You may make it set.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the block and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block are separately provided. However, these may be configured as a single data.

  In addition, regarding the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) for which information corresponding to the image data is acquired every unit time (every frame), at the first processing timing (frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) is obtained. It may be configured such that information corresponding to moving image data over a period can be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and thereafter, the information corresponding to the image data is analyzed every unit time (every frame). It is not acquired, and processing corresponding to that is executed only when processing identification information is attached.

  The block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) in which the availability information is set to the on state may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing in which the availability information is set to the on state, or the availability information may be turned on. It may be executed (analyzed) at a processing timing one after the processing timing set in (1).

  Further, “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” and “appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” Although different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as “information corresponding to image data”. Further, the length as the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as the effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same haze image and gauge display are displayed over the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result) ) Is obtained and when it is not obtained, the production section (SP reach background block) where the display data is shared, and the big hit (predetermined determination result) are obtained and not obtained It is executed in such a way that it is divided into effect sections (SP ending background blocks) in which different display data is used. In such a configuration, when performing a background display effect for a specific reach, different display data is not used over the entire period depending on whether a predetermined determination result is obtained or not obtained, but in the middle Since the display data is shared until the section (timing ts55) and the winning (determination result) is indicated by using different display data only in the remaining period, the processing load and the memory capacity are expected to be reduced. Become.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the post-operation effect (inclusive) includes (including) the timing ts55 in “Layer 6” different from “Layer 3” in which the background display effect for specific reach is executed. The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is prioritized over the background display effect (layer 3) for specific reach (SP). By displaying the image on the front side of the image based on the reach background block or the SP end background block), the “big hit (predetermined determination result) in layer 3 is obtained and obtained. ”Switching from production section where display data is shared to the presentation section where display data is different depending on whether or not the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained” is not displayed (Or make it difficult to see). As a result, “the stage where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is not obtained” and “the big hit (predetermined judgment result) are obtained Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design a stunning connection well with a staging section in which different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained, it can be hidden (deceived) by a post-operation staging. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the production design. In this sense, in the post-operation effect, it is desirable that a process of moving the movable body forward of the display screen is also executed.

  In addition, with regard to the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) executed so as to straddle (include) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, it is automatically performed regardless of the effect mode. Since it is configured to be executed automatically, “the stage where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and the case where it is not obtained” and “the big hit (predetermined It is possible to reliably conceal the connection to the “effect zone in which different display data is used when the determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the timing ts55 at which the switching of the effect section occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. The period before the timing (if the end timing of the post-operation effect deviates depending on the operation timing, the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed when the effect is received at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts52. It is required to set within a period prior to the timing of non-display. In such a configuration, display processing (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed in “Layer 3”, but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

  However, “the effect section where the display data is shared between when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (Layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to “the effect section in which different display data is used depending on whether it is not obtained”, it should be executable when the jackpot is won. And may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for losing) is executed even when the jackpot is not won, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and a partial effect display, etc. As a result, it is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3).

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 225, “post-operation block E, which is read based on the fact that the presentation is accepted within the period from timing ts52 to ts54 as one of a plurality of blocks corresponding to a specific variation pattern. "To prepare. With regard to the “post-operation block E”, when the operation is not detected within the period of the timing ts52 to ts54, the production reception is automatically performed (the same program as that when the operation is detected is automatically generated). Since it is generated (by execution), it is possible to provide an entertaining performance that is not present in the past.

  In this respect, although illustration is omitted, the “post-operation block E” can be executed even when the first fluctuation pattern or the second fluctuation pattern different from the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. Also good.

  For example, in the first variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” of the effect contents corresponding to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed, as shown in FIG. Similarly to the specific variation pattern, the process identification information “2” and the process identification information “3” are read based on the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”. That is, in the first variation pattern, although the effect content of the SP reach background (“information relating to image data” acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is different, the same permissible operation related display (predictive effect) as the specific variation pattern. ) And permissible operation-related display (such as 摸 image, gauge display, etc.) are executed, and the same as the post-operation effect when the effect is received in the operation reception effect generated in this way. Block E "is executed.

  Further, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected in the operation reception effect, the effect reception is automatically performed, and “SP reach background block” and “SP end background block” The background effect switching is hidden by executing the post-operation effect so as to straddle (include) the switching timing with “”.

  In addition, “the stage where the display data is shared between when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (Layer 3) is not displayed at the switching timing with “the effect section in which different display data is used when it is not obtained”, also in the first variation pattern, the same as the specific variation pattern It may be possible to execute when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, even when a different background effect (SP reach effect) is executed between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern, the different background effect is not displayed when the big hit is won. In this way, the same production (post-operation production) will always appear, and it will be possible to recognize that the winner has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, the player recognizes that the jackpot has been won at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) that differs between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to. In other words, in this case, when winning the big hit, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won by hiding the “background effect” that varies depending on the variation pattern and making sure that one effect content appears. On the other hand, when you lose a big hit, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that you have lost the big hit by displaying the “background effect” with different effects depending on the variation pattern. Will be able to do so, and will be able to maintain a sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, also in the second variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” having the effect contents corresponding to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” in the second variation pattern may have “1” processing identification information, but “2” processing identification information and “3” processing identification information. Processing identification information is not included, and an operation reception effect that can generate a post-operation effect across the transition timing does not occur immediately before the transition to the “SP ending background block”. .

  In this regard, in the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” relating to the second variation pattern, process identification information of “5” (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing while the acceptance of the effect is not allowed. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of “5”, “the process of operating the availability information of the post-operation block E to the ON state (process 5) is executed. It is like that.

  As a result of the availability information of “post-operation block E” being turned on in this way, the second operation pattern is similar to the “specific variation pattern” and “first variation pattern” described above. The same post-operation effect based on “rear block E (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” straddles (includes) the switching timing between the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block”. Will be executed on another layer.

  In such a configuration, when the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, the period during which the production acceptance is permitted is the place where the production design should be performed as a display related to the background production. Since the “post-operation block E” is intentionally executed as a block different from the background image block at a predetermined timing in the production section where it does not occur, no 摸 image or gauge display is displayed In spite of the fact that the reception of the production is not allowed and the reception of the production is not allowed, the post-operation production (post-operation block E) when the production is accepted with another variation pattern suddenly appears. Therefore, it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  According to such a configuration, even in the second variation pattern, “the stage where the display data is shared when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “the big hit Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design a stunning connection with a “rendering section in which different display data is used depending on whether (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not” Can be concealed, and design of production can be facilitated.

  In addition, “the stage where the display data is shared between when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “when the big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (Layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to the “effect section in which different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained”, even in the second change pattern, As in the case of one variation pattern, it can be executed when a big win is won and may not be executed when a big win is not won. According to such a configuration, although a background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern is being executed, a different background effect is not displayed when the big hit is won. In this way, the same production (post-operation production) will always appear, and it will be possible to recognize that the winner has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, the player recognizes that the jackpot has been won at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) that differs from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to. In other words, in this case, when winning the big hit, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won by hiding the “background effect” that varies depending on the variation pattern and making sure that one effect content appears. On the other hand, when you lose a big hit, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that you have lost the big hit by displaying the “background effect” with different effects depending on the variation pattern. Will be able to do so, and will be able to maintain a sense of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example thereof, the operation reception effect is executed based on various process identification information attached to the SP reach background block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). These processing identification information may not be attached to the SP reach background block (SP reach liquid crystal effect scheduler data). For example, the design block (design liquid crystal effect scheduler data) ) Or a calling block (calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data), or other blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example thereof, the processing is performed in the process read based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”. In the effect determination, the effect determination based on the operation detection information for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operation means is not limited to the operation button 410, and may be other operation means. In addition, a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, 410, etc.) are used in all or part of the above-described effect determination based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”. It is determined to which of the sword effect operation unit 5000 or the like) the operation opportunity is given, and whether or not the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given has been operated (effect determination) May be determined). According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side according to the determination. In order to realize an operation reception effect where only the operation opportunity is given, regardless of the operation means given to any operation means, the process identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, the block, etc. are shared To be able to. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both of the different operation means, and the post-operation effect based on the processing identification information may be executed based on the fact that one of the previously operated operation means has been accepted. .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example thereof, a plurality of pre-permissible operation related displays in the appearance EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 that does not involve movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a special appearance EF block E2 that involves movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410. And executing (analyzing) one of them according to the variation pattern. In this case, if the block following the appearance EF block E1 and the appearance EF block E2 (both or one of the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E) are used in common, the blocks can be saved. It becomes like this.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example thereof, based on the processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. By executing the processing to be read, it is possible to accept an operation for a specific operation means. However, in addition to this, a predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means is included in a process (for example, peripheral control unit steady process) that has nothing to do with the process identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The operation may be accepted at, and a change corresponding to the acceptance may be generated for the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the progress of the production due to the block, the liquid crystal production scheduler data, etc., the operation for the predetermined operation means can be properly accepted, It can be suitably maintained.

  Further, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player operation different from the process of performing the performance determination based on the process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”. Then, all the effect elements (display, sound, movable) related to the target block may be invalidated. With such a configuration, it is possible to save layers.

  In addition, the period of effect determination is such that a part of each processing identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3” is converted into other processing identification information by player operation. Or you may make it change an opportunity.

  The specific layer may be used before the start of the target change, and may be used across a plurality of changes.

  You may make it use a block not only during a fluctuation | variation but during a hit game. Further, a block extending from a change to a hit game or a block extending from a win game to a probability change may be provided. Processing identification information is also included in these blocks and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block. You may make it attach.

  Further, “Y3” may be attached only to a block (or liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the probability changing state, and the type of processing identification information read out may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Also, during error notification (abnormality notification) or the like, an error image is displayed or an error sound is output, but it is desirable not to delete any block or process identification information that is being executed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately restore the effect after the error is released.

  In addition, among the inventions inherent in the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, the described effects can be obtained without necessarily using a technique such as block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) or processing identification information. What can be done may be realized by other methods.

[Production judgment based on operation detection information before valid period]
In general, when an effect reception period (effective period) in which an effect reception is allowed occurs, the above-described “摸 image”, “gauge display (bar display)”, and the like are displayed in accordance with the generation timing. In this regard, when a game is played for a long time or a game is played many times, it becomes possible to predict at which timing in the variation pattern the “摸 image” or “gauge display” is displayed. In this case, some players cannot wait for the operation and operate with the timing in anticipation that the “摸 image” or “gauge display” will be displayed. At this time, if an operation is performed immediately before the “摸 image” or “gauge display” is displayed (immediately before the production reception period occurs), the “摸 image” or “gauge display” is displayed. Will be misunderstood as if it was operated in a state where the production reception period is occurring, and as a result, the re-execution of the operation within the production reception period (effective period) will be delayed, and the production will be accepted. In some cases, the production reception period (valid period) ends.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment (for example, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225), the effect reception period (effective period) from the predetermined timing in the mth frame after the start of fluctuation. As described above, it is possible to generate the post-operation effect by determining the effect by the automatic button function even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed even if the re-execution of the operation within the effect reception period (effective period) is delayed in the above-described situation. become able to.

  However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, it is not possible to remember the actual feeling that caused the post-operation effect due to the operation by the player, so there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the effect determination for generating the post-operation effect is allowed only within the effect reception period (valid period), but the operation state is detected. Even if it is made within a period (immediately before) before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, this is intentionally used as a target (determination material) for the production determination. According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed immediately in anticipation of the production reception period (valid period) occurring, the operation is performed within the production reception period (valid period). The post-operation effect will be executed as if it were a sword. That is, in this case, the player side can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the gaming interest can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, although this will also be described later, even if the operation state is detected within the period (immediately before) before the production reception period (effective period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specific time. When the production reception period (valid period) occurs while the image is maintained, it is determined that the production reception is not performed within the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to impart the effect reception conditions to the player fairly, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Also, as will be described later, at least for a predetermined operation reception effect, when an effect reception period (effective period) occurs from a predetermined timing in the mth frame after the start of fluctuation, at the time when the mth frame starts. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, “a habit image (or a gauge display that suggests the remaining time) with an operating means” is not yet displayed. That is, in this case, since a period in which the acceptance of the production is allowed will occur internally from when the samurai image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player will run ahead, As a result, even if the operation is performed immediately before the spear image (or gauge display) is displayed, an effect is accepted, and there is a situation where the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “production reception period (valid period)” according to this embodiment will be described again. “Effective period” means “a period from the start of a process that generates a state in which the reception of an effect is permitted to the end of the process”. Here, the details of the “process for generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted” differ depending on the technique for realizing the “effect reception period (valid period)”. Corresponds to “a process for turning on”, “a process for setting a timer”, “a process for calling a process for determining production acceptance based on process identification information (see FIG. 225)”, and the like. In other words, the “production reception period (valid period)” corresponds to “a production section (period) from when a process for generating a production reception is permitted until a predetermined time elapses”, The predetermined time is “time until the operation state flag is turned off” or “time until the timer is timed up”, “the end of the effect section in which the same process identification information is attached every frame” It corresponds to “time until”. Then, within such an “effect reception period (valid period)”, determination processing regarding whether or not an effect is received is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every frame) based on the detection of the operation state. However, in the “determination process regarding whether or not the production reception is performed” according to this embodiment, not only the “operation state detection” performed within the “production reception period (effective period)” but also the A feature is that “operation state detection” performed before the “production reception period (valid period)” occurs is also targeted. As such “production reception period (effective period)”, for example, it is common to create a period of about 100 frames.

  FIG. 226 to FIG. 231 are flowcharts illustrating an example of a procedure for processing performed before and after the production reception period (effective period) occurs. Each example described below shows a case where image display is performed using “block” or “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” described with reference to FIG. 225, but the display method is not limited to this. Any realization method may be used as long as it is a general one that performs image control in units of frames. In addition, the “process for generating a state in which the production acceptance is allowed” is also exemplified as the “process for turning on the operation state flag”, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Other techniques such as “a process for determining the effect reception determination based on the process identification information” may be used.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (effective period).

  Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, an effect reception period that occurs at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) occurs in a specific variation pattern, the “effect” within the “m” th frame after the start of symbol variation. It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to an on state as “a process for generating a state where acceptance is permitted”. Note that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state at “timing t1 (m)” halfway in the “m” -th frame because “the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state”. Even if the “process” itself is executed based on the arrival of the “m” th frame, more strictly, the start timing of the “m” th frame is related to the execution of other processes. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including the above process, and the various processes are executed in a predetermined order with a delay from the “frame start timing”. Because it is always.

  When the operation state flag is operated in the ON state in this way, an effect section (effect reception period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, and within the effect reception period, based on the operation detection information at every predetermined time. “Determining whether to generate post-operation effects” is performed.

  The effect reception period according to this example is described as “special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” is performed regardless of whether the effect acceptance period has occurred (the operation state flag is in the on state) or not. “Processing” is executed as “production determination based on operation detection information” for each unit time (for each frame). And by continuing this after the production reception period, even during the production reception period, “determination processing for generating post-operation production” is performed based on the operation detection information every predetermined time. (In the figure, they are executed at "timing t2 (m)", "timing t2 (m + 1)", "timing t2 (m + 2)", and "timing t2 (m + 3)"). That is, in this case, the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” is executed also in the frame before the “m” -th frame, etc., but the operation state flag is in the OFF state. In the situation, it is as described above that this is substantially invalidated, so this is omitted in the figure.

  Also, in this example, the order of various processes performed when a new frame arrives is greater than the order in which “the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state” is executed. The order in which the “determination process for generating an effect” is executed is set later, and thereby the effect is generated in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set). Reception (determination to generate a post-operation effect) can be made. However, with regard to the order, “the operation for setting (setting) the operation state flag to the on state” does not necessarily have to be executed first. On the contrary, “whether the post-operation effect is generated” The order in which the “determination process” is executed may be set first. In this case, in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) in the ON state, the “determination processing for generating the post-operation effect” itself is not performed. No reception (determination to generate post-operation effects) is made.

  Conventionally, at a timing t1 (m) in the “m” th frame, “a process for generating a state where the acceptance of an effect is permitted (here,“ a process for operating the operation state flag to the on state ”)” is executed. Assuming that the post-operation effect is generated based on the operation detection information acquired within a period after the process is executed (here, “period in which the operation state flag is on”). The “determination process” is executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, at timing t2 (m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not there has been an operation within the period from timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). When it is determined that there is an operation, the post-operation effect is executed. When it is not determined that the operation has occurred (or the operation state is detected, the length of time that the operation state has been maintained is inadequate) When it is determined that the operation is sufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame, whether or not there is an operation within the period from timing t2 (m) to t2 (m + 1) The process of determining again based on the detection information is executed for each frame.

  However, in this case, if there is a person who can not wait for the operation and operates in anticipation that the production reception period will occur, the production reception period without the production reception As described above, there is a concern that (the validity period) may end. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, the “effect determination to generate the post-operation effect” is allowed only within the effect reception period (effective period). As for “detection of state” itself, even if it was made within the period (immediately before) before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, this is used as the object (determination material) of the operation detection determination I dare to use it.

  For example, in such an operation detection determination, “the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or longer” is usually used as a determination condition in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like. Made. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment uses the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives, and within the period from the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). “Even if the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) has not been maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or longer, the predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or longer from the timing t1 (m). If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state over the period of time, it is determined that the operation has been performed, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed immediately in anticipation of the production reception period (valid period) occurring, the operation is performed within the production reception period (valid period). The post-operation effect will be executed as if it were a sword. That is, in this case, the player side can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the gaming interest can be suitably maintained.

  Which is used as a more specific configuration regarding such operation detection information is not particularly limited. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether or not the operation state has been maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more for each frame. For frames in which the operation state is maintained (continued) for a time (for example, 3 ms) or longer, a history as an “ON frame” is left, and a frame without a history as an “ON frame” is handled as an “OFF frame” I have to. The history may be left at the end of the frame or at the start of the next frame, or may be left as an “ON frame” when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). It may be.

  As will be described later, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effects” according to this embodiment, the three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When operation detection information is obtained in a form in which the operations are arranged, an effect is received (determination that there has been an operation) and an effect after the operation is made executable.

  Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an “ON frame” or an “OFF frame” at the end of the frame, and leaves a history thereof. In the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. 2, the “m” th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−3” frame, the “m−2” frame, and the “m−1” frame are used as determination materials, and these are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON”. It is determined whether or not a history is left as “frame”. On the other hand, when the history as the “ON frame” is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the “operation” performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. In the “determination process regarding whether to generate the post-effect”, the “m” -th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−2” frame, the “m−1” frame, and the “m” frame are used as determination materials, and these are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”. It is determined whether or not a history is left.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 226 shows a case where no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (effective period). Therefore, at the determination timing (timing t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3) in the figure) in each frame after the production reception period (effective period) occurs, It is determined that the history as “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “OFF frame” is left, and there is no presentation reception (determination that there has been an operation), and the post-operation presentation is performed. Not executed.

  By the way, for an image displayed on the effect display device 1600, there is a delay of two frames (or one frame) from when processing related to display in the peripheral control unit 1511 starts until it appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing for determining which to use as an image according to various determinations or creating a drawing list in response to the determination) Processing in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that has received the processing result (information related to an image such as a drawing list) on the peripheral control unit 1511 side (preparation buffer (buffer in non-display state) of so-called double buffering) This also occurs because one frame is required for the drawing process on the () side.

  Therefore, conventionally, with regard to the processing related to the “effect during the effective period (operation waiting block E)” by the peripheral control unit 1511, the frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. ("M-2" -th frame) ", so that the effect display device 1600 appears on the effect display device 1600 from the" m "-th frame.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the time when the m-th frame is started, “effective period production (operation waiting block)” is still displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600. One of the features is that the period up to the “m−1” th frame immediately before the production reception period (valid period) occurs is the “period before the valid period (such as effect production). “Processing period for“ appearance EF block E ”)” and the period from the “m” th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs “ A processing period for the operation waiting block E ")" is set. As shown in FIG. 225, the processing period for the effect before the effective period (the “appearance EF block E” such as the effect effect) is continued after the “m” th frame. You may make it overlap with the processing period for presentation during period ("operation waiting block E", such as a spear image and a gauge display).

  More specifically, in a predetermined period until the “m” th frame arrives (or after that), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to “pre-valid period effect (effect effect etc.)”. It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, the predetermined period after the arrival of the “m” th frame (the period during which the effect during the effective period is performed) is drawn based on the information corresponding to the “effect during the effective period (such as 摸 image and gauge display)” A list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226, the peripheral control unit 1511 “up to the“ m−1 ”-th frame (or after that)“ effect before the effective period (block E for appearance EF) ” The process related to “effect during the effective period (operation waiting block E)” is executed after the “m” -th frame, but in the effect display device 1600, the “m” -th frame “Pre-effective period effect (display based on EF block E for appearance)” is still in the process of being executed, and “effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)” has finally started in the “m + 2” th frame. Will come to be. That is, in this case, the reception of the effect is internally performed from the time when “the effect during the effective period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is not yet displayed (the “m” th frame and the “m + 1” th frame). Will occur, and the player will run ahead, and as a result, the player will operate immediately before the “effective period production (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is displayed. Even in such a case, the presentation is accepted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the post-operation presentation cannot be confirmed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 226, the processing related to the “pre-valid period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E)” and the “effective period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E)” For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that each frame is executed in the peripheral control unit 1511. However, when these effects are displayed as moving image data, it is only necessary to create a drawing list in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on “information corresponding to moving images” at the start frame of those processes. That is, in this case, in each subsequent frame, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) side automatically performs a process of reading and displaying the image data. The unit 1511 may not necessarily perform every frame.

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226.

  As described above, in the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When operation detection information in a lined-up mode is obtained, an effect is received (determination that there has been an operation) so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 227, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” -th frame (timing before the determination timing of the effect reception). The “m + 1” -th frame itself also leaves a history as an “ON frame” at the end of the frame. However, at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the frame, all of the three frames (the “m−2” frame, the “m−1” frame, and the “m” frame) to be determined are included. Since it is an “OFF frame”, there is no effect reception (determination that there has been an operation).

  Also at the timing t2 (m + 2) in the “m + 2” th frame, which is the next frame, the three frames (“m−1” th frame, “m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame) to be determined are Since the history as “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “ON frame” remains, respectively, the production reception (determination that there has been an operation) is not made.

  Further, at the timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” th frame, which is the next frame, the three frames (“m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame, “m + 2” th frame) to be determined are The history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” is left, respectively, and thereby the production is accepted (determination that there has been an operation).

  According to such a configuration, since the “m + 1” -th frame and the “m + 2” -th frame are “ON frames”, the operation state is longer than a predetermined time over two frames within the production reception period (effective period). It can be determined that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). In addition, since the “m” -th frame is an “OFF frame”, it is possible to determine that the operation has been started within the production reception period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is properly performed within the period in which the production reception is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. ) (Here, at timing t2 (m + 3)), an effect is accepted, and an effect after operation (here, “block E for operation”) corresponding to this is executed (started). In this example, the process of turning off the operation state flag is executed at the time when the presentation is accepted, but the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of the frame. Any operation determination process may be performed so that the operation determination process is not (substantially) performed in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the reception of the effect.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when an effect is received at the timing t2 (m + 3), the “post-operation effect (operation) The processing related to the rear block E) ”is performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the “m + 5” -th frame (not shown) after two frames.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 226.

  As described above, in the “determination process for generating the post-operation effect” according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When operation detection information in a lined-up mode is obtained, an effect is received (determination that there has been an operation) so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

  In addition, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows “effect determination to generate a post-operation effect” only within the effect reception period (effective period). As for “detection of state” itself, even if it was made within the period before the production reception period (valid period) occurred (several immediately preceding frames), this is the object of the operation detection determination (determination I am trying to use it as a material.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation is started in the “m−2” th frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the production reception period (effective period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such a timing is not used in the determination related to the production reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an effect reception period (effective period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the “m” frame, the timing t2 in the “m” frame. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the previous three frames (the “m−3” frame, the “m−2” frame, and the “m−1” frame) is used as an effect reception. This determination is used. In this example, these frames ("m-3" frame, "m-2" frame, "m-1" frame) are respectively "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". As a result, an acceptance of production (determination that there has been an operation) is made.

  According to such a configuration, the “m−3” frame is an “OFF frame”, and the “m−2” frame and the “m−1” frame are “ON frames”. Thus, it can be determined that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 3 ms) over two frames immediately before the production reception period (effective period) occurs. That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the “m−2” th frame two frames before the “m” th frame in which the production reception period (effective period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 228, an effect is received within the effect reception period (effective period) (here, timing t2 (m)), and an after-effect effect (here, “post-operation block E”). ) Is executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 228, the production reception period (valid period) itself ends in an extremely short time that does not continue even one frame, but the production reception period (valid period) Even if the operation is started immediately before anticipating that the (period) will occur, it will be treated as if the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect will be generated To be able to. That is, in this case, the player side can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the gaming interest can be suitably maintained.

  However, if there is a frequent reception of performances in such a manner, the significance of the production reception period (valid period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, the effect reception is performed based on the operation detection information acquired before the generation of the effect reception period (effective period). When is performed, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the heel image or gauge display. In other words, in this case, since the “post-operation presentation” can have a lot of doubt as to whether it has occurred due to being given an operation opportunity, It can be expected that the operation is started before the period) occurs.

  Note that there is no particular limitation on a technique for realizing that “post-operation effects are executed without displaying a habit image or gauge display”. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing related to “the effect during the effective period (operation waiting block E)” is performed from the “m” th frame without considering the delay of two frames. Then, when an effect is accepted at timing t2 (m), processing related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed from the frame (“m” th frame) where the effect is accepted. I am doing so. As a result, as shown in FIG. 228, the process related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is executed without executing the process related to “effective period effect (operation waiting block E)”. As a result, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying a spear image or gauge display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. Therefore, what kind of determination is made under the assumption and an effect corresponding to the determination is executed will be described. However, as shown in FIG. 229, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is not maintained in a manner straddling the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, and “m” Even if it ends within the (-1) th frame, if the (m-2) th frame and the (m-1) th frame each have a history as an "ON frame" (respectively, If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing described with reference to FIG. 228, and the same effect is executed in accordance with the determination.

  In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 228, the player's operation is not detected at all after the production reception period occurs, and is performed only within the period before the production reception period occurs. Although there are not, determination conditions (“m-3” -th frame, “m-2” -th frame, and “m-1” -th frame for the effect reception at timing t2 (m) are “OFF frames”, respectively. , “ON frame”, and “ON frame” as long as the history is satisfied), the presentation is accepted even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m). The post production will be executed.

  The same applies to such a configuration when an operation is performed within the production reception period (valid period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), and the timing is before the timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” -th frame, or “m + 2”. Even if the operation state is finished in the th frame, the judgment conditions (“m” frame, “m + 1” frame, and “m + 2” frame for the effect reception at the timing t2 (m + 3) are “ As long as the history of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” is satisfied), even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), FIG. The production is accepted as shown, and the post-operation production is executed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the “determination for production reception” is performed, and the timing when the “determination for production reception” is performed. When the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more within a period before (in this embodiment, when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of two frames), The production is accepted as if the operation was properly performed on the means, and the post-operation production is executed.

  Here, the operation detection information obtained before the production reception period (valid period) occurs is stored in the “determination process for production reception” performed after the production reception period (valid period) occurs. If it is simply used as a judgment material, for example, even when a sign production (appearance effect) is not executed, there is no sign that a production reception period (valid period) will occur. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that a person who will be able to accept the production will appear. In other words, if the operation in such a mode is allowed, the significance of the production reception period (valid period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered.

  Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects whether “OFF frame” and “ON frame” exist instead of only “ON frame” as a determination target. As a result, the above-mentioned concerns are resolved. In this embodiment, ON / OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, “determining the timing at which an operation is started by detecting the rising or falling of a sensor signal, A technique may be adopted in which a presentation is accepted on condition that the operation state is maintained over a predetermined time or more from the timing. Even in such a case, it is possible to determine how long the sensor signal rise or fall timing occurs before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, or to maintain the operation state. It is possible to solve the above problem by determining how long it has continued.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started from the “m−3” frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in this example, the operation started in the “m−3” frame, which is 3 frames before the “m” frame in which the production reception period (effective period) occurs, A case is assumed in which the process is continued up to the “m + 2” th frame within the reception period (valid period). Also in this example, when the production reception period occurs, first, “determination for production reception” is performed at timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, and in this determination, the production reception period occurs. Previously obtained operation detection information (here, operation detection information acquired in the “m−3” frame, the “m−2” frame, and the “m−1” frame) is used as the determination material. It is supposed to be.

  However, in this example, the “m−3” frame, the “m−2” frame, and the “m−1” frame have a history of “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, respectively. As a result of the “determination for effect reception” at the timing t2 (m), the effect reception (determination that there has been an operation) is not made. In addition, in the “determination for production reception” performed after the next frame such as timing t2 (m + 1), the “ON frame”, “ON frame”, “ON” Since only a history as “frame” is left, as long as the operation state from the “m-3” -th frame is maintained, production is performed as a result of “determination for production reception” performed within each frame. There is no reception (determination that there has been an operation).

  That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the “m−3” th frame is once ended and a frame in which the history as “OFF frame” is left is created, the operation is not accepted again, so that the presentation is accepted. It is possible to prevent (determination that there has been an operation) from being performed. Even if the operation state is maintained even when there is no indication that the precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed and the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, it is based on this. It is possible to suitably avoid receiving an effect.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 227 to 230, when an effect is received at timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, a post-operation effect is displayed without displaying a habit image or gauge display. (See, in particular, FIG. 228). However, in this case, it is not possible to remember the actual feeling that the post-operation production occurred due to the operation, and there is a concern about the decline in the game entertainment interest, so it was the case that the production was accepted at any timing within the production reception period. However, the progress of the presentation may be performed so that the habit image and the gauge display are always displayed. In this case, for a feature such as “at the time when the m-th frame is started, the“ display during operation period (block for operation) ”is not yet displayed” in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is not always necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

  The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited. For example, the timing at which “a process for operating (setting) the operation state flag to an on state” in the frame is performed and “determination for production reception” This can be realized by setting the timing at which “processing” is performed to be opposite to that in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 231 shows an effect reception period (valid) when the timing at which “operation (setting) the operation state flag is turned on” in the frame is performed after “determination process for effect reception”. It is a flowchart which shows the example about (period).

  As shown in FIG. 231, if the “m” -th frame has now arrived, first, at timing t12 (m) in the frame, the process in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state is performed. Done. As a result, an effect reception period (effective period) occurs. In the “m” th frame, after the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, “determination processing for effect reception” is performed. There is nothing.

  That is, although omitted in the drawing, in the “m” th frame, the timing at which the “determination processing for effect reception” is performed before the timing t12 (m). At this time, the “determination process for the production reception” itself is not performed, or the “determination process for the production reception” is performed, but the production reception period (effective period) is not generated. As a result, it is determined that the production is not accepted.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an effect from being received in a frame (here, “m” th frame) in which an effect reception period (effective period) occurs. Therefore, in a frame (here, the “m” th frame) in which an effect reception period (effective period) occurs, regardless of the operation status, “permission during operation period (operation waiting block E) within the peripheral control unit 1511. ) ”Is always performed, and the display image (effect during the effective period) corresponding to the processing can appear on the effect display device 1600 in the“ m + 2 ”-th frame after two frames. become.

  In other words, in this case, the “m−2” frame, the “m−1” frame, and the “m” frame are “OFF frames” at the shortest. , “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and the timing t11 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” -th frame has arrived. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs processing related to “post-operation presentation (post-operation block E)” based on the reception of the presentation. At this time, in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512), the preparation buffer (of the double buffering) based on the processing result related to the “effective period effect” processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m” th frame. The drawing processing on the non-display state buffer side has already been performed (see “in-image control means processing” in FIG. 231).

  Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 231, even when the production reception is performed in the shortest time after the production reception period occurs, the production display device 1600 displays “the production during the effective period” at the “m + 2” -th frame. ”And the“ m + 3 ”frame, the“ post-operation effect ”is displayed. Therefore, the post-operation effect can be started after the heel image or gauge display is displayed. become.

  However, the method of starting the post-operation effect after displaying the heel image or gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 226, in the frame where the effect reception period (effective period) occurs (here, the “m” th frame), the effect can be received at timing t2 (m). Thus, even when the presentation is accepted at the timing t2 (m), at the timing t2 (m), the processing related to the “production during the valid period (operation waiting block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. It may be performed.

  That is, in this case, a frame for performing processing related to “post-operation presentation (post-operation block E)” in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the reception of the presentation is equivalent to one frame with respect to the frame for which the presentation has been received. Will be delayed only. Therefore, even if the presentation is accepted at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, the “m” -th frame has the “effective period production (waiting for operation) in the peripheral control unit 1511. The processing related to “block E)” is performed, and the processing related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m + 1” -th frame, which is the next frame. . Such a “delay” is not limited to the frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs (here, the “m” th frame), but occurs even when production reception is made in any frame. . Even with this method, even after the production reception period has occurred, even if the production reception is made in the shortest time, the post-operation production can be started after displaying the spear image or gauge display. Become.

  As described above, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, in the “determination process for effect reception” performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the m-th frame is started. “Detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the previous “m−1” -th frame is also used as a determination material for receiving the effect. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, the “from the operation detection means obtained in the“ m−1 ”th frame before the start of the“ mth ”frame” is used. Both “detection information” and “detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the “m−2” -th frame are used as determination materials for receiving the effect. In other words, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before (in the extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the generation of the effective period) in anticipation of the generation reception period (the effective period), this is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed assuming that the operation was performed within the reception period (valid period), the player can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation. Come to remember.

  Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the “determination process for effect reception” in the m-th frame is performed, the “operation detection unit” acquired in the frame before the m-th frame Production reception can be made based on “detection information from”. In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only in anticipation of the production reception period (valid period) occurring (just within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the valid period). Since the post-operation effect is executed as if the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period), the post-operation effect is also caused by the operation on the part of the player. You will feel the actual feeling that occurred.

  However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to the “ON frame” at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the “ON frame” when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed in the frame. Operation (setting) may be performed. In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detecting means) acquired from the start of the mth frame until the production reception period (valid period) occurs is also used as a determination material for the reception of the production. Will be used. That is, in this case, an operation is performed in each of the “m−1” th frame and the “m” th frame (for example, maintaining the operation state in 3 ms or more), and the operation is performed in the “m-2” th frame. When it is determined that it has not been performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms), an effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, since the time until the player's operation is used as the determination material is shortened, it is possible to provide a post-operation effect with high immediate reactivity.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 230 and the other examples, when the production reception period (valid period) occurs, the bag image and gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. When an effect is received within the m-th frame, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying (creating) the button image or gauge display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only in anticipation of the production reception period (valid period) occurring (just within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the valid period). While this is regarded as an operation performed within the production reception period (valid period) and the post-operation production is executed, “If the post-operation production is generated in this manner, It is possible to give a dramatic demerit such as “no button image or gauge display is displayed”, and it is possible to prompt an appropriate operation within the production reception period (effective period). For example, when a button image or a gauge display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, it is impossible to visually recognize which of the modes is displayed, which is suggested by the mode. There will be a dramatic demerit such as the inability to grasp the expected level of the event.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples, when the production reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time, the production reception is not performed. It becomes possible to prompt an operation in an appropriate manner for the production reception period.

  However, on the other hand, when the production reception period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than a specific time, not for a long time, the production reception is accepted. Even if an operation is performed immediately in anticipation of the occurrence of a period (valid period), it is assumed that the operation has been performed within the production acceptance period (valid period) and the post-operation effect As a result, the player side will feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

  Moreover, in order to receive a presentation, it is not necessary to maintain the operation state in a time shorter than the specific time, and it is also required to maintain the operation state for a time longer than a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 231 or another example thereof, in the process in the “m-th” frame in which the effect reception period starts, even if any operation detection information is obtained, the process related to the effect after operation ( Among the display processing in the effect display device 1600, the processing related to lamp light emission, the processing related to sound output, and the processing related to the movable body operation), at least the display processing in the effect display device 1600 is “information corresponding to image data of post-operation effects. , “Processing for reading out in peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and processing when no effect is accepted (processing for reading out information corresponding to operation-waiting image data in peripheral control unit 1511). I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained in the mth frame in which the production reception period starts, the processing (production of the production is not performed in the mth frame). At least some of the display processing in the display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to movable body operation (display processing in the effect display device 1600) are necessarily performed. In other words, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, processing (processing for reading the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) corresponding to the reception of the effect is started with a delay. Before that, the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the presentation is not accepted is surely executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to recognize that the “post-operation effect” is an effect started due to the operation by the player.

  In addition, although described above as another example of the example illustrated in FIG. 231, even in the “mth” frame in which the effect reception period starts, the effect can be determined based on the operation detection information. In the frame in which the determination is made, the “process for reading out the information corresponding to the post-operation effect image data in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and in the next frame, “the information corresponding to the post-operation effect image data is displayed. , A process of reading in the peripheral control unit 1511 ”may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processes related to the post-operation effects (display processing in the effect display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to the movable body operation), at least the display processing in the effect display device 1600 is effect determination. In the frame in which the production is not performed, the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the production is not accepted is executed. However, at this time, among the processes related to the post-operation effect (display process in the effect display device 1600, process related to lamp emission, process related to sound output, process related to movable body operation), for example, “process related to lamp emission” and “process related to sound output” With regard to “processing”, processing for reading “information about the light emission mode after operation” and “information about sound output after operation” may be performed in the frame where the performance determination has been made. That is, in this case, the output of the lamp and the sound is started in the form after the operation based on the read information in the frame in which the effect determination is made or in the next frame.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 225, when the method of displaying the effect image by the block is adopted, and when the effect is accepted by the operation, the “post-operation block” for executing the effect after the operation is performed. In addition, an “annihilation EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for annihilation EF)” for displaying an annihilation effect image until the operation promotion image such as the cocoon image or gauge display that has been displayed is hidden is displayed. You may make it perform. According to such a “disappearing EF block (disappearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”, for example, an image that fades out when a spear image or gauge display is received as an effect reception (an image that is gradually hidden) Can be displayed. Further, such “disappearing EF block (disappearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” may be executed when the effect reception period ends without performing the post-operation effect. The “disappearing EF block (disappearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is also added to a background block (background liquid crystal effect scheduler data), an operation waiting block (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and the like. It can be configured to be executed by operating the availability information in the process read based on the process identification information.

  Note that the “process for generating a state in which the reception of an effect is allowed (a process for operating (setting) the operation state flag to be on)” described with reference to FIGS. (Elapsed time) or the like may be executed, and may not necessarily be executed with a frame as a trigger.

  In addition, the “摸 image” or “gauge display” may be displayed as an effect before the effective period (display based on the block EF for appearance EF). However, the display mode when the effect before the effective period (display based on the block EF for appearance EF) is performed may be displayed in a translucent manner or displayed in a dull manner with another effect display. For example, it is required to display the “摸 image” or the “gauge display” in a different manner from when the “effect during the effective period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is performed. At this time, in the effect before the effective period (display based on the block E for the appearance EF), one of “摸 image” and “gauge display” may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without displaying one of them. .

[Further stunning performance for image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Among them, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination or the like) regarding which expected effect (notice effect or the like) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is made, the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display the contents of the effect according to the result of the effect determination, so as to correspond to the result of the jackpot determination. The variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, such as background depiction or movable body operation The expected production related to is provided as a production having “a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the identification of the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination. When any variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the pattern effect based on the specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance Is allowed to generate an operation reception effect (valid period). However, as will be described later, the acceptable reception sound that is output when the operation reception effect is generated has a different aspect depending on the result of the effect determination, and thus the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is suggested to indicate the ratio of being played and the ratio of jackpot symbols being stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) that are not formed even in the reach state as a result of the variation pattern determination. Even if there is a special result in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the operation is permitted to receive the effect when the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern has progressed to the predetermined timing. The reception effect (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, an operation reception effect (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. . In addition, the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs with a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern has advanced to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of the above-mentioned “specific variation pattern”, the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, an operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is determined in advance for an effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Only the post-operation effect that causes a change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. The presentation effect (valid period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation effect is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), “BGM playback (specific type effect sound)” corresponding to the change pattern (effect pattern) is not suppressed. During the execution period of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the high expectation change pattern (specific change pattern), the change pattern (effect pattern) The corresponding “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or silence, or is not output (the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has expired, the channel assignment To make it possible to generate at least a high-expected suppression reception effect that gives an opportunity to operate while And that it is as described above (FIG 144～ view 195, FIG 207～ Figure 231).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the haze image displayed in the operation reception effect is further displayed as an integrated haze image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the haze image. Thus, the game entertainment is improved when the operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. For such an integrated habit image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. In addition, the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and 207 to 231) are also realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated haze image with any of the integrated haze images described below. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

Hereinafter, a case where the bag image is displayed as an “integrated bag image” will be described.
First, “摸 image” will be described anew. The operation means to which an operation opportunity is given in the operation reception effect include an “operation receiving portion” that receives an operation by the player, and a periphery of the operation receiving portion. A “periphery decorative portion” to be decorated is provided. In this respect, the “摸 image” means an image in which the “operation receiving unit” is selected among such operation means. The “operation receiving portion” is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by a player, and the “periphery decorative portion” is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (production operation unit 400) illustrated in FIG. 39, FIG. 40, etc., the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the “rim decoration portion” is the frame unit 415. It corresponds to. In the case of the operating means (sword decorative body 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 161, the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the “periphery decorative portion” corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

  FIG. 232 shows an “integrated bag image” displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) is generated for an operation means provided with an “operation receiving portion” that receives a “pressing operation” by a player. It is a figure which shows the example.

  In this explanatory example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an “operation receiving portion” on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001. In other words, the pattern button 5014 is pushed into the pattern portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means) when a “pressing operation” is performed by the player, and the detected information is an effect (such as an execution opportunity of the post-operation effect). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation unit has a “pattern button 5014” that can be moved (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012 and a movement (up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving parts with possible "pattern part 5012" will be provided.

  In FIG. 232, “integrated bag image” when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 occurs when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing will be described. I decided to. However, in the example described below, starting with FIG. 232, for the “integrated bag image” when an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014, the operation button 410 is operated instead of the handle button 5014. You may make it apply as an "integrated haze image" when the operation reception effect (valid period) to which an opportunity is provided generate | occur | produces. In other words, in this case, the “摸 image with the operation button 410 tricked” illustrated in each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. In this case, the handle button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

  As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). In the case where an effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button bag image BMG with the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. It is displayed as integrated haze images IGa to IGd. In the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are not individually prepared as image data, but are integrated into one piece of image data (integrated). It is displayed only as fake images IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated bag images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as “press” and “down arrow” are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “first effect mode with relatively low expectation” and “relative” are performed as post-operation effects that are executed when an operation is received with a specific operation reception effect (valid period). A plurality of production modes including “a second production mode with high expectation” are prepared, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination). . In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d),
-The mode (integrated bag image IGb) shown in FIG. 232 (b) rather than when the mode (integrated bag image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) appears in a specific operation reception effect (effective period). When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second direction aspect with relatively high expectation” as the post-operation effect is higher,
-The mode (integrated 摸 image IGc) shown in Fig. 232 (c) rather than the case (integrated 摸 image IGb) shown in Fig. 232 (b) appears in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second direction aspect with relatively high expectation” as the post-operation effect is higher,
-The mode (integrated 摸 image IGd) shown in Fig. 232 (d) rather than the case (integrated 摸 image IGc) shown in Fig. 232 (c) appears in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). Based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination) so that the relationship that the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with relatively high expectation” appears as a post-operation effect is higher when Any one of the fossil images IGa to IGd is displayed.

  All of the four aspects shown as the integrated haze images IGa to IGd are not necessarily prepared. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the effective period simply by preparing at least two aspects. Further, an aspect different from the above four aspects (integrated bag images IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any one of the prepared aspects may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operation means (sword decorative body 5001, having an operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by an operation by the player and a peripheral decoration portion (pattern portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400),
An integrated haze image display means for displaying a haze image of the operation receiving unit as integrated haze images IGa to IGd integrated with a peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the periphery of the haze image;
-An operation reception execution means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion when the player performs an operation when the integrated heel image is displayed, The integrated haze image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated haze images IGa to IGd).

  Details of the “integrated bag image” shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d) will be described separately for those modes (integrated bag images IGa to IGd).

  First, the “integrated bag image IGa” shown in FIG. 232 (a) is configured to include a normal button bag image BMGa and a normal edge decoration image SSGa that decorates the periphery. However, in the “integrated spear image IGa”, the normal button spear image BMGa is displayed as “an image in which the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given” is displayed. On the other hand, the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa is “the peripheral decorative portion (the pattern portion 5012 or the frame actually provided on the peripheral edge of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not hesitated and the periphery of the normal button bag image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

  According to such a configuration, first, even when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is determined whether the operation opportunity is given to any of the operation means (the operation means (the operation target)) ( Can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button bag image BMGa. In addition, the normal button bag image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration part, but a luxurious and large image (integrated bag image IGa) integrated with a preferable peripheral decoration image in order to improve decoration and performance. ) Will be displayed, the dramatic impact when the normal button bag image BMGa is displayed will increase, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration part gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom that is not constrained by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration part. become.

  In the “integrated bag image IGa” shown in FIG. 232 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button bag image BMGa). A predetermined decoration is given to warn that the button has a high degree of danger. As described above, these “pedestal” and “predetermined decoration” are different in shape from the actual peripheral decoration part and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this regard, in the “integrated bag image IGa” according to this embodiment, a display target region for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target region as time elapses. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the effective period. It is displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time until the display area becomes. That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only bears the function of suggesting the operation means that is the operation target, but also indicates the remaining time until the state where the operation reception is allowed (valid period) is ended. It will also be responsible for the remaining time suggestion function.

  In the normal edge decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 232 (a), a partition image KG is provided that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal edge decoration image SSGa. . An area surrounded by the partition image KG functions as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target region”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, “white and black stripes”) is applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image (here, “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed and can be visually recognized. Therefore, the gauge image GG is fully filled. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained over the entire period until it becomes empty.

  When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the display method, a display method may be employed in which the color of the display target area itself provided with a predetermined decoration is changed between a portion with a gauge and a portion without a gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist alone as image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by a predetermined decoration color change in the display target area.

  In the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, “white and black stripes”) applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is used as the normal peripheral decoration. Since the image SSGa is applied to other areas in the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decoration of the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is expected more suitably that the game entertainment is improved when the “integrated bag image IGa” is displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 232 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which “integrated bag image IGa” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, a pattern button that is an operation target 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button 摸 image BMGa in the “integrated 摸 image IGa”. That is, as will be described later, the button bag image BMG has a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, and the normal button bag image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. Is used, it is possible to recognize the mode (expected degree) as the button bag image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target without visually recognizing the normal button bag image BMGa.

  The “button habit image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))” does not necessarily have to be an exact habit of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. What is necessary is just to be displayed with a replication level (deformation etc.) that can recognize which operation means.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGb” shown in FIG. 232 (b) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGa” described above, The peripheral edge decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated bag image IGb”, the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the “normal edge decoration image SSGa” described above, but the button button image BMG is described above. Instead of “BMGa”, it is displayed as “special button bag image BMGb” having a different shape.

  More specifically, in the “integrated bag image IGb” shown in FIG. 232 (b), the special button bag image BMGb moves the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. The “button 摸 image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))” with the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) being displayed is displayed as an image having a different shape. However, when such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it is difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operation means is the operation target when the “integrated bag image IGb” is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the “integrated bag image IGa”, the “button bag image BMGa” with the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) being operated is displayed in an integrated manner with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Therefore, the “ordinary peripheral decorative image SSGa” itself has a function that suggests that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is an operation target. In this regard, in the “integrated bag image IGb”, the “special button bag image BMGb” is displayed so as to be integrated with the “normal edge decorative image SSGa”. Even if “BMGb” does not appropriately hesitate the operation target, the entire “integrated bag image IGb” may suggest that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to suitably obtain such an action effect (a function for suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa), the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” is different from the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display (such as the handle portion 5012) when it is an operation target.

  According to such a configuration, the button bag image BMG with the operation receiving unit displayed thereon and the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are displayed as an integrated single image. The button 摸 image BMG, which is only a part of the ghost image, can be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily captured by the shape of the operation means that is the operation target. It is expected to improve the amusement of the game by the nature and decoration.

  In addition, in the “special button bag image BMGb” illustrated in FIG. 232 (b), a button having a streamlined shape is depicted with a more stylish design than the “button button image BMGa”, and at the top thereof. The words “DANGER” are applied. The appearance of “special button 摸 image BMGb” that does not actually exist as a part of such a pachinko machine 1 makes it easy for a player to remember a premium, and “button 摸 image BMGa” appears. It is expected to make you feel instinctively higher than expected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 232 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which “integrated bag image IGb” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also set as an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button 摸 image BMGb in the “integrated 摸 image IGb”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button 摸 image BMG in the “integrated 摸 image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expected degree) as the button bag image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGc” shown in FIG. 232 (c) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGa” described above. The peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated bag image IGc”, the button bag image BMG is displayed as the same as the “normal button bag image BMGa” described above. Instead of “image SSGa”, it is displayed as “special edge decoration image SSGb” having a different shape.

However, the “special edge decoration image SSGb” is the same as the “normal edge decoration image SSGa” in the following points.
-“It does not hesitate the peripheral decorative portion (the pattern portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given, and the effect display The periphery of the button bag image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the device 1600.
A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

  According to such an “integrated bag image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))”, it is possible to operate any of the operation means with reference to the “integrated bag image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. It is possible to greatly change the shape of the “integrated bag image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))” as a whole without causing a shape change in the “button bag image BMG” that suggests whether an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in decoration and performance by causing a shape change without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

  Further, in the “special edge decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))” according to this embodiment, at least a part of the image has the same decoration as the “normal edge decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. Is displayed. Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted for the case where the “integrated haze image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” appears and the case where the “integrated haze image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))” appears. It can be suggested that this is a specific operation reception effect (valid period).

  In particular, in the “special edge decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))” according to this embodiment, another member having a special decoration is added to the “normal edge decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. In the expanded form, the entire image is displayed as an enlarged image. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the “special edge decoration image SSGb” is displayed as an extension of the “normal edge decoration image SSGa”, and the degree of expectation is higher than when the “button bag image BMGa” appears. It is expected to make you feel instinctively high.

  The “special edge decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))” has a shape and decoration different from the “normal edge decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))”, but a gauge image (predetermined image). No change occurs in the display target area of the GG itself.

  That is, when a part of such an integrated bag image IG is used as a display target area of the gauge image GG, whether the display target area or the gauge image is only “a part of decoration” or “remaining” It is difficult for the player side to distinguish whether it is a “part having a function that suggests time”. In this respect, the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))” and the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))” are gauges that have important functions such as “indicating the remaining time”. Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, and the shape is changed in other portions, the shape change can be performed without sacrificing the remaining time suggestion function. This makes it possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decoration and performance.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 232 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the “integrated bag image IGc” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also set as an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button bag image BMGa in the “integrated bag image IGc”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button 摸 image BMG in the “integrated 摸 image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expected degree) as the button bag image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the normal button 摸 image BMGa when the “integrated 摸 image IGc” is displayed is displayed in a color (for example, “green”) different from that when the “integrated 摸 image IGa” is displayed. It may be. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGd” shown in FIG. 232 (d) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGa” described above. The peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated bag image IGd”, the button bag image BMG is not displayed as the “normal button bag image BMGa” described above, but as a “special button bag image BMGb” having a different shape. The peripheral decorative image SSG is also displayed as “special peripheral decorative image SSGb” having a shape different from “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” described above.

  That is, in the “integrated bag image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))”, the “special button bag image BMGb” used in the “integrated bag image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” and the “integrated bag image IGc”. The “special edge decoration image SSGb” used in (FIG. 232 (c)) ”is displayed as an integrated image. According to such a configuration, the effects achieved by the “special button bag image BMGb” described above with respect to the “integrated bag image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” and the “integrated bag image IGc” (FIG. 232 ( c)) ”and the above-mentioned“ special edge decorative image SSGb ”, the above-described effects are obtained, and when“ integrated cocoon image IGa (FIG. 232 (a)) ”is used as a reference, Since both aspects of the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the high expectation level is instinctively felt.

  On the other hand, since both the button bag image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change their modes, the same decoration and shape appear in some areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG. The identification for the same post-operation effect in the case where the “integrated bag image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” and the “integrated bag image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” appear It is possible to suggest that this is an operation reception effect (effective period).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 232 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which “integrated bag image IGd” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also set as an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button 摸 image BMGb in the “integrated 摸 image IGd”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button 摸 image BMG in the “integrated 摸 image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expected degree) as the button bag image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the special button 摸 image BMGb when the “integrated 摸 image IGd” is displayed is displayed in a color (for example, “rainbow color”) different from that when the “integrated 例 え ば image IGb” is displayed. You may do it. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in a rainbow color.

  As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing and the predetermined operation reception effect (effective period). Is generated, the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are integrated to display the integrated bag image IG, but one side of the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. The other side can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button bag image BMG is displayed as “normal button bag image BMGa”, the edge decoration image SSG can be displayed as either “normal edge decoration image SSGa” or “special edge decoration image SSGb” ( FIG. 232 (a), (c)). Further, when the button bag image BMG is displayed as “special button bag image BMGb”, the edge decoration image SSG can be displayed as either “normal edge decoration image SSGa” or “special edge decoration image SSGb” ( FIG. 232 (b), (d)). Further, when the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed as “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa”, the button 摸 image BMG can be displayed as either “normal button Ｂ image BMGa” or “special button 摸 image BMGb” ( FIG. 232 (a), (b)). Further, when the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as “special edge decoration image SSGb”, the button bag image BMG can be displayed as either “normal button bag image BMGa” or “special button bag image BMGb” ( FIG. 232 (a), (b)).

  According to such a configuration, although the button bag image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, only one side is displayed when the aspect changes. Therefore, if you look at one side where the aspect has not changed, it is easy to recognize that a predetermined operation reception effect (valid period) is occurring, regardless of which aspect is displayed on the other side. In addition, the expectation can be suitably recognized by looking at the other side where the aspect is changed. Note that the aspect of one side of the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG may be changed without changing the aspect.

  Further, in the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated bag image IG is displayed during the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to decrease the display area in the display target area as time elapses. It is possible. That is, in this case, the “peripheral decoration image SSG” bears a remaining time suggesting function that suggests the remaining time until the state in which the operation reception is permitted is terminated, and indicates which operation means the operation target is. By recognizing the remaining time and the operation target by recognizing the remaining time and the operation target by recognizing the remaining time and the operation target by being displayed as an integrated 摸 image IG integrated with the “button 摸 image BMG” that bears the suggested function Thus, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained when the operation reception effect (valid period) is generated.

  Further, in the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (There are both a part having a remaining time suggestion function and a part having no remaining time suggestion function). That is, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended only to suggest the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), and in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the “decoration of the button bag image BMG” It is possible to positively adopt a display mode for the purpose of `` enhancing the performance '', so that the performance when the operation reception effect that is an important performance occurs is generated while suggesting the remaining time It can be improved significantly. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more preferable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said.

  Further, in the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the button bag image BMG can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, when the “pattern portion 5012” that is the peripheral decoration portion is in one mode, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of modes (a plurality of emission colors). ) To change to either. Therefore, when the button bag image BMG changes, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the replication target.

  In the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the edge decoration image SSG can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes when the button bag image BMG is displayed in one mode. However, as a substance, the “pattern portion 5012” that is the peripheral decoration portion does not change to any of a plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button bag image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decorative image SSG does not need to be matched with the aspect of the “pattern portion 5012” that is the peripheral decorative portion, and can be rendered in a variety of ways that are preferable for enhancing the production. In addition, about the "pattern part 5012" which is a periphery decoration part, it may be provided as what cannot be changed into a some form originally, such as not light-emitting.

  In addition, in the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), there are cases where both the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG change (FIG. 232 (d)). However, as an entity, it is desirable that both the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG change when the “pattern part 5012” that is the edge decoration part is in one aspect.

  Different modes appear in the “pattern portion 5012” that is the peripheral decorative portion between the case where the peripheral decorative image SSG is the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” and the case where the peripheral decorative image SSG is the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb”. You may do it. However, while the peripheral decorative image SSG is “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” and the peripheral decorative image SSG is “special peripheral decorative image SSGb”, at least the shape has changed, while the peripheral decorative portion In the “pattern portion 5012”, it is desirable that the mode change (for example, the change in the light emission mode, etc.) not accompanied by the shape change is caused. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration portion so that the shape cannot be changed in the first place in order to make the virtual rendering function based on the peripheral decoration image SSG stand out.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the bag image, the button bag image BMG with the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) being touched, and the handle bag image with the handle portion 5012 trapped. TMGs are prepared, and the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG is made different depending on which of the haze images is displayed. That is, in this case, the edge decoration image SSGa, b that decorates the periphery of the button bag image BMG cannot be displayed when a bag image different from the button bag image BMG is displayed. The decoration image SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a “function that suggests which operation means the operation target is”.

  In addition, when the form as the edge decoration image SSG differs according to the form of the eyelid image (the button eyelid image BMG, the pattern eyelid image TMG), the form (thickness) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the edge decoration image It is desirable to have different lengths. For the operation reception effect in which the button bag image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern bag image TMG is displayed, an effect that occurs at the same timing within the same variation pattern (select which one occurs depending on the effect determination) May be an effect produced at a different variation pattern or at a different timing. The edge decoration image SSG that appears when the button bag image BMG is not the image of the edge decoration part, and the edge decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern bag image TMG is the image of the edge decoration part. May be. However, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (effective period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

  Further, in the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other areas in the peripheral decorative image SSG are those areas. A predetermined decoration (in this case, “striped pattern”) is applied, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the predetermined decoration that has been exposed increases, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment. become able to.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in a superimposed manner on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed and can be visually recognized. Therefore, the gauge image GG is fully filled. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained over the entire period until it becomes empty.

  However, the predetermined decoration may not necessarily be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration, and in this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Accordingly, the player who dislikes the decrease of the predetermined decoration is encouraged to perform an operation at an early stage.

  Further, in the integrated heel image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (the pattern button 5014 or the operation button 410) to be operated. This is an image representing an intangible object as a gaming machine part without glaring the peripheral decorative portion (the pattern portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more flexible decoration / rendering performance that is not confined to the entity as a gaming machine part.

  In the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), at least the edge decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes among the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG. That is, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decorative image SSG representing an intangible object without changing the shape of the button bag image BMG. It is possible to realize a display with higher performance and decoration by changing the shape of the integrated bag image IG while appropriately suggesting whether or not it is.

  Regarding the edge decoration image SSG, the shape may not be changed when the button bag image BMG is in one mode, and only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the edge decoration image SSG represents an intangible object, and the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button bag image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that there is great technical value in changing the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG.

  In addition, in the integrated haze image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG is changed in a form of increasing its size. As will be described later, as a method for changing the form, any one of a method for increasing the number of objects represented as an image (the number of decorations, etc.) and a plurality of modes having different outline shapes (a rectangular parallelepiped, a sphere, etc.) It is possible to adopt a method in which a display range is expanded or a display target range of a predetermined object represented as an image is expanded. In addition, as will be described later, as to the change in form of the peripheral decorative image SSG, an effect that changes in stages from a low-expectation form to a high-expectation form is executed as a precursor effect, and finally, The operation reception in the operation reception effect may be allowed while the changed form is maintained.

  Further, in the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the gauge image (included in the peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed regardless of the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG. The display target area of the GG is not changed (at least the shape is changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if a change occurs in the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG, it is possible to suitably maintain the suggestion function as to how much remaining time remains. , The degree of expectation can also be suggested by the shape change in another area different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  Depending on which of the above-described effects is intended, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily represent an intangible object, and the peripheral decoration provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion. It may be displayed as an image with a part of it.

  Further, the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during an “effective period during which operation reception is allowed” such as a predetermined operation reception effect. Thus, the player is prompted to perform an operation.

  However, in the integrated bag image IG according to this embodiment, the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, although the button bag image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are integrated and displayed. Only one side is dynamically displayed and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, while displaying on the one side contributes to improving the performance when the button effect which is an important effect is generated by dynamic expression, the other side is displayed so as to stay on the spot. As a result, when the integrated haze image IG is viewed as a whole, it is not moved and displayed, and thus visibility can be suitably ensured.

  In the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the button bag image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving unit to which an operation opportunity is given is depicted in a movable range. The peripheral decorative image SSG is not displayed dynamically. When the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the non-dynamically displayed side (periphery decorative image SSG), and the integrated heel image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The display area can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area decreases with time.

  As described above, the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side where the favorable visibility is secured (the peripheral decorative image SSG which is not dynamically displayed) in the integrated bag image IG. Thus, with respect to the performance when the operation reception effect, which is an important performance, is generated, how much time remains to allow the performance reception while improving this by dynamic display using the button 摸 image BMG Can be easily recognized.

  Further, on the side of the integrated bag image IG that secures favorable visibility (the peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( An area in which the (predetermined image) GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when performing an effect that suggests the degree of expectation on the side of securing the favorable visibility in the integrated bag image IG, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. As a result, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be prevented from being adversely affected.

  Of the peripheral decorative image SSG, a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG itself, and the button bag image BMG have a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. Any one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), but the degree of expectation differs depending on the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself. A plurality of modes may be provided, and any of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the button bag image BMG is displayed as an integrated bag image IG integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button bag image BMG. When the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the peripheral decoration image SSG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG just a decoration or pattern in the peripheral decoration image SSG? There is a concern that it may be difficult to grasp whether the device has a function that suggests the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it is difficult to grasp the position where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced by mixing with the decoration and pattern applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. .

  Accordingly, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the effective period), the gauge image ( In the display target area where the (predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed.

  More specifically, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is referred to as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In the display target area, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed at the end or in the vicinity thereof. Then, according to the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, a “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is also displayed so as to be displaced in the same manner.

  According to such a configuration, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the effective period ends, even if the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely a decoration or suggests the remaining time, the position of the “specific image” By confirming, the remaining time can be recognized. In this sense, when such a “specific image” is displayed, it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the integrated hail image IG from the start to the end of the effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 233, if it is assumed that the timing A0 at which an effective period during which operation reception is permitted (predetermined operation reception effect) has started within a predetermined variation pattern, the effect display device 1600 Then, an integrated hail image IG and operation promotion images such as “Press!” And “Down Arrow” are displayed.

  In this example, the form (integrated bag image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed as the integrated bag image IG. However, based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. ) May be displayed in any of the modes shown in FIG. Even when the integrated bag image IG is displayed in any manner, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed within the effective period, or a “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” causes a change in the aspect described below as time elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a), first, in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A0 (effective period start timing), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Will be. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it is possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 233 (a), at the timing A0 that is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The “specific image whose aspect has been partially changed” is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, whether or not “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed. By simply confirming, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the acceptance of the operation (the situation in which the remaining crotch is reduced).

  However, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” starts from the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period). A gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a manner that “the display area increases by the amount of time that has elapsed” until a predetermined time (the time required for the entire appearance of the specific image to appear) elapses. Is displayed in the display target area.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A1 when a little time has elapsed from the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG "Specific image TG" as a specific image different from the above or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed appears until about half of the image is visible It can be seen that the display area is in the stage of increasing with time.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 (c) and (d), in the integrated bag image IG at the timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has elapsed, a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The “specific image TG” as the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” has already appeared in its entirety, and the gauge image is not increased without increasing the display area. It can be seen that (predetermined image) is in a state of being displaced within the display target area of GG.

  That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is the gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Image) Displayed at or near the end of the GG, and gauge image (predetermined image) displayed to displace the display position in accordance with the displacement of the end of the GG (following) It has become.

  The “specific image TG” according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image in which a star-shaped mark is given in a white square space. It has become a thing. However, the “specific image TG” may not be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. For example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG For example, the image may be displayed in a manner in which the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the same image gradually becomes thin over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  In any case, the “specific image TG” originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time has disappeared due to the display area becoming the minimum value (here, “0”). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (at the end of the effective period), at least a part (or all) may not be hidden and the display state is maintained.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 233 (e), in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period, the gauge The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is “0”, and about half of the display area of the “specific image TG” is left. When the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period during which the operation is accepted is terminated in this state, and the integrated haze image IG is hidden.

  However, as described above, the “specific image TG” does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display so that the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period. You may make it do.

  However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is just “0” at the end of the effective period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display position of the “specific image TG” is adjusted according to the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (following). Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, the image up to where the image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image ( The predetermined image) GG can be made ambiguous.

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the validity period ends, and the display area of most (half or more) remains, but the player side When viewed, it appears to be a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (not displayed here) when the effective period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than the actual one, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than the actual one. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Even if the period does not end immediately, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. In other words, in this case, the “specific image TG” can be expected to serve as a buffer unit that can absorb such a temporal shift.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 233, at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The “specified image” is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” You may make it display within the display object area | region of the image (predetermined image) GG.

  According to such a configuration, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed as a part of the gauge image GG. Since it will be able to appear positively as if it is, it will appear as if the period of time longer than the appearance is set as the validity period, and the entertainment of the game when the validity period occurs It is expected to improve.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating another display example of the integrated haze image IG from the start to the end of the effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted.

  Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which an effective period during which operation reception is permitted (predetermined operation reception effect) has arrived within a predetermined variation pattern, the effect display device 1600 also has the example shown in FIG. Then, an integrated hail image IG and operation promotion images such as “Press!” And “Down Arrow” are displayed.

  In this example as well, the aspect (integrated bag image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed as the integrated bag image IG. However, based on the result of the production determination, FIGS. You may make it display in either of the aspects shown to d). Even when the integrated bag image IG is displayed in any manner, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed within the effective period, or a “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” causes a change in the aspect shown in FIGS. 234 (a) to (d) over time. .

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 234 (a), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the entire display target area in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period). The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” are respectively displayed without being displayed. At the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period), only a part of the “specific image TG” may be displayed, but the whole is displayed here. According to such a configuration, since the “specific image TG” can appear to function as a part of the “gauge image GG”, it seems that a longer time is left than it looks. Is possible.

  The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image representing “eraser” and does not fit within the area surrounded by the partition image KG (display target area of the gauge image GG), and other areas (of the peripheral decorative image SSG). In other words, it is displayed with a size that spans an area in which the aspect can change according to the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, the “specific image TG” can be made more conspicuous than the “gauge image GG”, and the occurrence of a situation where the remaining time cannot be recognized can be suppressed. Be expected.

  Further, in this example, when time elapses from timing A0 to become timings A2 and A3, and the "specific image TG" is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 234 (b) and (c), the "specific image TG" "Is changed to a" white area "as if the part where" According to such a configuration, the display area of the “gauge image GG” expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expressions) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the “specific image TG”. Occasionally, the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so that the contrast with the “specific image TG” as a boundary becomes prominent, suggesting how much time is left. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that this is a depiction to be performed. The color appearing in the reduced area is desirably a color that is not used in the “gauge image GG”.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 234, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge images (predetermined images) GG that suggests that the remaining time has disappeared due to the display area becoming the minimum value (here, “0”). Since it does not function as a part, at least a part (or all of them) may not be hidden even when the remaining time runs out (at the end of the effective period), and the display state is maintained. Become.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 234 (d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is “0” in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period. Thus, the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left. When the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period during which the operation is accepted is terminated in this state, and the integrated haze image IG is hidden.

  However, also in this example, a part of the display area of the “specific image TG” is not displayed and part is left in the integrated bag image IG at the timing A4 that is the end timing of the effective period. You may make it display as follows.

  Even in this example, the “specific image TG” is displayed so as to displace the display position in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (following form). When viewed from the player side, it is possible to make it ambiguous to what extent the image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It becomes like this.

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the validity period ends, and the display area of most (half or more) remains, but the player side When viewed, it appears to be a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (not displayed here) when the effective period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than the actual one, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than the actual one. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Even if the period does not end immediately, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. In other words, in this case, the “specific image TG” can be expected to serve as a buffer unit that can absorb such a temporal shift.

  In the example shown in FIG. 234, the images of “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are made different from those in the example shown in FIG. 233, but the same image may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 233, the same image as that in the example shown in FIG. 234 may be used. Further, the effective period during which the images of “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, and the images of “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” in the mode shown in FIG. The valid period for displaying may be generated under different conditions. In this case, in the effective period in which the mode shown in FIG. 233 appears and the effective period in which the mode shown in FIG. 234 appears, the shape of the integrated bag image IG itself or at least the display target area of the gauge image GG is mutually different. It is desirable to make them different.

  As described above, the integrated haze image IG is dynamic during a predetermined operation reception effect period as shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to (e) and FIGS. 234 (a) to (d). Thus, the player can be prompted to perform an operation. However, as also described above, the button bag image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range, whereas the edge decoration image SSG is displayed. Does not display this dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decorative image SSG on the side where such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( (Predetermined image) Since GG is changed, it is possible to easily recognize how much time remains until the effective period ends even in the dynamically displayed integrated bag image IG. Will be able to.

  The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” may be displayed as one image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

  According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the “specific image TG” has a display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” within the display target region of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. Displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when reduced, and the display position is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" Is displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, it is ambiguous to what extent the image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to.

  In addition, the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 233 is not displayed when the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is the maximum value, and a predetermined period of time after the acceptance of the operation is permitted. Until the time elapses (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the “specific image TG” is compensated for by the decrease in the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. Is trying to increase. According to such a configuration, it is as if the remaining time suggested by the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” does not decrease at the beginning of the predetermined period after the effective period starts. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the amusement interest.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the integrated haze image IG is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). The display shape of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be the same regardless of the display mode. It is desirable to make it. Each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but a function that suggests the remaining time is provided. In order to maintain it suitably, it is desirable that even if one of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” is changed, the other is not changed. For example, if the mark attached to the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 233 is not a star but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. Since the degree of expectation (double circle) becomes gradually visible while the “image” GG ”is decreased, it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the “specific image TG” is not at least partially (or all) even when the operation is not performed by the player and the validity period ends. The display state is maintained instead of being displayed. However, with respect to the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 233 and FIG. 234, when the timing A4 arrives without any operation by the player, the operation is received internally, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, the operation It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned “automatic reception effect” in which only sound is output in response to reception). In this case, the timing A4 may be a timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is the time after the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is not displayed (the timing at which the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is not displayed, or the timing after that) and the “specific image TG”. It is desirable to set the timing to arrive in a state where at least a part is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even when a situation in which an operation by the player is performed immediately after the acceptance of the operation is not allowed, even immediately before the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed, Since the “specific image TG” is displayed, it may appear as if post-operation display or post-operation sound output has started in response to an operation received by the player in time and an operation reception accompanying this. become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed even when the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is started (for example, fade-out after the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is started). Etc. that gradually disappear.)

  When the effective period during which such automatic acceptance is made is the first effective period generated by the establishment of the first condition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a second different from the first condition. When the condition is satisfied, a second effective period during which automatic acceptance is not possible can be generated. Even in the second effective period, the button bag image BMG is displayed as an integrated bag image IG integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery, and the edge decoration image SSG includes a gauge image (predetermined image). ) The display target area of GG is included. However, the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the second effective period generated by the establishment of the second condition, but the “specific image TG”. Is not displayed. The integrated haze image IG displayed within the first effective period and the integrated haze image IG displayed within the second effective period are displayed as the same image except that the “specific image TG” is not displayed. Can be done.

  That is, in the second effective period generated by the establishment of the second condition, unlike the first effective period generated by the establishment of the first condition, when the set time elapses without being operated by the player, The automatic acceptance does not function, and the second valid period ends in such a manner that no post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both) is generated. Therefore, if the display of “specific image TG” is left at the time when the acceptance of the operation by the player is no longer allowed, the effective period ends even though the remaining time has not been consumed This may cause misunderstanding as if it had been done, which in turn could lead to a decline in the entertainment interest. Therefore, it is desirable that the “specific image TG” is not displayed over the entire period from the start to the end in the second effective period.

  In this case, it is desirable that the first effective period and the second effective period have different lengths of the set time (the time from when the operation reception is permitted until the operation is ended). In addition, it is desirable that the display changes (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted have different contents.

  In addition to the first effective period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, a third effective period that is automatically accepted may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is satisfied), In addition to the second effective period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth effective period that is not automatically accepted may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). In short, the effective period for which automatic reception is performed (the effective period with different generation conditions) includes at least the first effective period in which processing relating to display and sound is performed in the above-described manner, and automatic reception is performed. It is only necessary that at least the second effective period in which the display or sound processing is performed in the above-described manner is included in the effective period in which the process is not performed (the effective period having different generation conditions).

In addition, the “first effective period” here is
-It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set, regardless of whether there is an operation within the valid period.
-It means what outputs a post-operation display or post-operation sound output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the effective period regardless of the production state. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare “special effect state (automatic reception mode)” or “plural effect states” as the effect state. It should be noted that if “the second valid period” occurs when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set, any may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is activated. (For example, “automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the production state” may be used), which is irrelevant to the configuration relating to the technical features described here.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a non-linear specific shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated haze image IG (edge decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas that form the integrated haze image IG (edge decoration image SSG). In the non-linear region of the part, display is performed to reduce the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as time passes. According to such a configuration, the decoration itself appears in the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG with the passage of time, so the remaining time as the effective period is digested. It is possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (periphery control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a gauge pattern (predetermined image) gauge image having a predetermined transmittance with a specific pattern applied to the display target area of the GG. The (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a superimposed manner, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is provided with a specific pattern. It is possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) as time elapses. It is possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display target area having the non-linear specific shape shown in FIGS. 233 and 234 is set as the “first display target area”. A second display target region having a different shape (non-similar shape) from the non-linear specific shape and having a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to decrease the display area until it ends. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without being operated by the player, and by the player An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed while at least the case where the second set time elapses without any operation being performed. May end when the first set time elapses without operation by the player, but when the second set time elapses without operation by the player There is no case to be terminated.

  In this respect, an operation target to which an operation opportunity is given by an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed If the (operation receiving unit) is different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the setting time is the same when the operation target is different, and the operation target is different. This makes it possible to encourage the user to enjoy the operation reception effect with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed are different from each other. The bag image is displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. Also for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations for the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed However, in any case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part of the display. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

  In addition, in order to obtain the above-described effects, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of “non-linear specific shape” and “different shape (non-similar shape)”. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target region, even if the same time (first set time) is set, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are “big hits”. It is desirable that the ratio of “a mode that suggests” appears to be different. The ratio may be “0%” or “100%”.

  The operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed have the same set time (first set time). In some cases, it is desirable to give the same opportunity for accepting operations related to post-operation display and post-operation sound output. It is desirable to give an opportunity to accept an operation regarding different post-operation display and post-operation sound output at different set times.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, an operation-related display such as “Press!” Or “Down arrow” is displayed on the integrated bag image IG so as to match the integrated bag image IG. When you see them, you are more strongly expressing that you are in a situation to operate. However, here, an operation-related display such as “Press!” Or “Down arrow” is displayed overlapping the button 摸 image BMG (in any dynamic display timing) that suggests an object to be operated. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG suggesting the remaining time and the specific image TG are not overlapped and displayed.

  In such a configuration, an operation such as “press!” Or “down arrow” is performed in such a manner as to avoid important information such as the button 摸 image BMG, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the specific image TG, etc. in the integrated 摸 image IG. Since the related display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the integrated bag image IG, it is possible to strongly urge the player while appropriately transmitting important information to the player. Needless to say, this is because the button bag image BMG is displayed as an integrated bag image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation is accepted within the valid period as the valid period in which the operation is accepted. There are multiple (types) of valid periods with different sound output after operation. The conditions for generating these effective periods are different from each other, and when one of the generation conditions is satisfied, the type of effective period corresponding to that is generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the “specific image TG” is displayed within the effective period during the plurality of effective periods (first effective period). And at least the “specific image TG” that is not displayed within the effective period (second effective period) is included. Hereinafter, in this example, these “first effective period” and “second effective period” are referred to as the “first effective period” in which automatic reception is performed and the “second effective period” in which automatic reception is not performed. However, it may be applied as a different effective period.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, when performing a warning effect (specific display) that suggests that the operation reception is permitted, the warning effect (specific display) Is executed before and after the generation timing of the allowable valid period. According to such a precursor effect (specific display), the effective period is generated while the flashy effect is being performed, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the effective period occurs. become able to.

  However, when the precursor effect (specific display) is executed in such a manner, the precursor effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated ＩＧ image IG, so that it is integrated when the effective period starts. Even if the fake image IG is displayed (internal layer display), a portion overlapping the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (not visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the sign effect (specific display), it is difficult to visually recognize a portion of the integrated bag image IG that overlaps the sign effect (specific display). In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area under such circumstances where visibility is difficult.

  That is, in this case, the indication effect (specific display) is not displayed, or the overlapping portion with the indication effect (specific display) disappears and the entire integrated bag image IG (or gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target When the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already been reduced, so when viewed from the player side, the effective period (set time) May feel like it is substantially shorter.

  On the other hand, the above-mentioned “specific image TG” can be expected to function as a “pseudo gauge” that appears to be part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, “a precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or a precursor effect (specific display) is executed among a plurality of types of effective periods. In the “second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is ended”, until the end after the second effective period occurs. The “specific image TG” is not displayed at all. On the other hand, among the plural (types) of valid periods, the gauge image is generated when “the precursor effect (specific display) occurs in the middle of execution and the entire integrated bag image IG is visible (or easily visible)”. In the “first effective period in which the display area of the GG is decreasing”, the “specific image TG” is displayed within the first effective period.

  According to such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed in the first effective period when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the indication effect (specific display) is not displayed. Since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed when the entire integrated bag image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of the GG has not decreased so much, and a decrease in the game entertainment is suppressed.

  On the other hand, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second effective period during which the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed. When the “specific image TG” is displayed, for example, in the case of the display mode of FIG. 233, when the effective period occurs, the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the effective period occurs. When the appearance of the “specific image TG” gradually appears with the passage of time from the time point out, it may be detected that this does not function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In other words, in this case, since it is feared that the game entertainment will be reduced for the exaggerated expression of the remaining time, the “specific image TG” is displayed in such a second effective period. It is desirable to prevent this from happening in order to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition to the second effective period, in addition to the second effective period, “a precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or a precursor effect (specific display) is executed, but the precursor effect (specific display) is included. ) May be prepared under different generation conditions for the display period of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) is not reduced. In addition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the entire pre-production image IG is visible (or easy to see) and is generated during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display). “Effective period (sixth effective period)” may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned “specific image TG” is displayed at this time is appropriately set. Good. In short, the plurality of (types) effective periods include at least the second effective period in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the first effective period in which the “specific image TG” is displayed. If this is the case, at least when these effective periods occur, the above-described operational effects are exhibited in relation to the warning effect (specific display).

  In the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233. However, at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the manner shown in FIG. You may make it perform.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect progress when the first effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period.

  FIG. 235 (a) shows an effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination in the normal gaming state where the number of holds is 0 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol). It shows the production status being performed at.

  FIG. 235 (b) shows an effect situation in which a precursor effect (specific display TH) is started in the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 235 (a).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 235 (b), it can be seen that at least the effect display device 1600 is in a situation where the integrated haze image IG has not yet appeared. However, when the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated 摸 image IG is internally displayed, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed so that the integration is performed. The entire haze image IG may not be visible (or may be difficult to view due to a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation reception is permitted (the effective period is started) from when the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

  In FIG. 235 (c), as a result of the progress of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b) and the area where the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed, A part that does not overlap with the sign effect (specific display) appears, and the part is displayed in a state of good visual recognition.

  That is, the integrated haze image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 235 (b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 235 (b) appears, and is shown in FIG. 235 (c). When “specific timing (timing when the effective period starts)” arrives, which is the timing that arrives before the situation appears, at least internal display (display on the layer processing) is executed It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 235 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) because it overlaps the preferential display (specific display TH). However, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the sign effect (specific display TH).

  According to such a configuration, the warning effect (specific display TH) is performed in a manner straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the effective period is generated is the warning effect. (Specific display TH) makes at least a part of the integrated haze image IG invisible or difficult to visually recognize. That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated bag image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the mode of the integrated bag image IG (the mode of the peripheral decorative image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button 摸 image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the effective period is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), it is difficult for the user to visually recognize the button bag image that is the target of the operation. However, in the “special edge decoration image SSGb”, the edge decoration image that decorates the edge is displayed. In other words, it is in a state in which it is possible to recognize that it is a “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa”. In the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), since the “specific image TG” is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize, the type (specific image TG) is originally displayed when the effective period starts ( It is difficult to distinguish whether it is a type (see FIG. 233) that does not display the “specific image TG” when the effective period starts (see FIG. 234) or that gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 233). Yes. In other words, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, the type shown in FIG. When it is adopted, it can be said that it is particularly effective to execute the precursor effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In FIG. 235 (d), as a result of further advancement of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b), there is no portion overlapping with the integrated bag image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). (In this case, the indication effect has been hidden).

  As shown in FIG. 235 (d), when the whole of the integrated bag image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a favorable visual state, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has already appeared). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to make it appear as if the display area has not been reduced so much. As a result, it is possible to expect a reduction in the gaming interests due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already been reduced when the precursor effect (specific display TH) ends.

  FIG. 235 (e) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (in this case, “0”), and the effective period ends (or the effective period ends). An example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 immediately before the display is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (e), at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the effective period ends. In this regard, in the first effective period, as described above, even if no operation is performed by the player within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as those performed are performed (FIG. 235). (See (f)).

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which an operation by the player is performed immediately after the validity period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the post-operation display Since the “specific image TG” is displayed immediately before the sound output after the operation is performed, the post-operation display and the operation are performed in response to the operation received by the player in time. It becomes possible to appear as if the aftertone output has started. In particular, when the sign effect (previous display) is performed in such a manner, the gauge image (predetermined when the entire image of the integrated bag image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is viewed well. Image) The display area of GG has already decreased, and the displacement of “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, since it is considered that there is a high possibility that a situation in which the operation by the player will not be in time will occur, the post-operation display with the “specific image TG” displayed even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period It can be said that it is particularly effective to perform the sound output after the operation or to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  In addition, with respect to the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 235, the case where “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and the case where “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. It may be applied to any of the above.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 235, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated haze image IG are displayed in different layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, thereby appearing in FIG. 235. It was decided to realize the production progress in the aspect. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to store the effect development in the form appearing in FIG. 235 as one moving image data and reproduce the moving image data to realize this. This method can also be applied to each example described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 235, the aspect (integrated haze image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is caused to appear as the integrated haze image IG. However, as described above, the integrated haze image IG may be caused to appear in any of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). . And when employ | adopting such a method, it is more desirable to aim at the improvement of game entertainment to perform a precursor effect in the aspect shown by FIGS. 236-238.

  FIG. 236 to FIG. 238 are diagrams showing a modification example of the effect progress when the first effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  FIG. 236 (a) shows an effect display device with a first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination in the normal gaming state, in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is in a state where the number of holds is zero. The production status at 1600 is shown.

  FIG. 236 (b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 236 (a). Indicates the situation.

  This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) has advanced to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect will be performed. It functions as an effect.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), Either “the image shown in FIG. 237 (c)” or “the image shown in FIG. 238 (j)” is displayed, and as this, “normal button 摸 image BMGa” and “special” are displayed as the button 摸 image BMG. It is suggested which of the “button 摸 image BMGb” is likely to appear.

  Here, when “the image shown in FIG. 237 (c)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that the “normal button 摸 image BMGa” is displayed as the button 摸 image BMG (here, “100%”). It will be suggested.

  The “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)” according to this example is a mode (here, translucent) different from the “integrated bag image IGa” in the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGa ′. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)”, the “integrated bag image IGa” may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 232 (a). Alternatively, the “normal button bag image BMGa” may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the “normal edge decoration image SSGa”. Even when the “normal button bag image BMGa” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) or in the normal state (FIG. 232 (a)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a different mode (translucent here).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 237 (c), the “normal button bag image BMGa” itself shown in FIG. At least an image BMGa ′ having a (hazy) outer shape is displayed. Thus, the “normal button bag image BMGa” is displayed as an “integrated bag image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” integrated with the “normal edge decoration image SSGa” or “special edge decoration”. It can be suggested that an effective period displayed as “integrated bag image IGc (FIG. 232 (a))” integrated with “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) shown in FIG. 237 (c) is displayed, the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) is not “integrated bag image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. , An effect suggesting (recalling) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated haze image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 237 (d), the “special edge decoration image SSGb” is expressed with respect to the “image IGa ′ expressing the integrated bag image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button image BGMa)”. The image SSGb ′ ”is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of such an effect, the “special edge decoration image SSGb” is expressed with respect to the “image IGa ′ expressing the integrated bag image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button bag image BMGa)”. When the images SSGb ′ ”are added and integrated, an effective period in which the“ integrated bag image IGc (FIG. 232 (c)) ”appears is generated. On the other hand, “image SSGb ′ representing special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to “image IGa ′ representing integrated bag image IGa (or image BMGa ′ representing normal button bag image BMGa)”. If they are not integrated, an effective period in which the “integrated haze image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” appears is generated.

  FIG. 237 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started in the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 237 (d) is performed. Yes.

  This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) has advanced to the second timing, and suggests that operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production. The second indication effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “image IGa ′ representing the integrated bag image IGa (or image BMGa ′ representing the normal button bag image BMGa)”. The “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, “the image IGa ′ representing the integrated bag image IGa ′ ( Alternatively, it is unknown whether or not the image BMGa ′) representing the normal button bag image BMGa ”and the image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e) progresses, any one of “image shown in FIG. 237 (f)” and “image shown in FIG. 237 (h)” is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situation and image contents shown in FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (h) are basically the same as the “situation and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)” described above, and FIG. 237 (e). As a result of the development of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. 5B and the reduction of the area where the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed, A portion that does not overlap with the sign effect (specific display) appears, and shows the state and image content in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

  That is, the integrated haze image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 237 (e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 237 (e) appears, and FIG. 237 (f) or FIG. When the “specific timing (timing when the effective period starts)” arrives before the situation shown in 237 (h) appears, it is displayed at least internally (display on the layer processing) ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 237 (f) and FIG. 237 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible due to overlapping (or difficult to see), the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed in a manner straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and after the effective period has occurred For the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated haze image IG cannot be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated bag image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the mode of the integrated bag image IG (the mode of the peripheral decorative image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button 摸 image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the effective period is started.

  In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (f) appears, the peripheral decorative image SSG included in the integrated bag image IG is not the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and (e), “the image IGa ′ representing the integrated 摸 image IGa ′ (or the normal button 摸 image BMGa is represented). It can be recognized that the image “BMGa ′)” has failed to be combined with the “image SSGb ′ representing the special edge decoration image SSGb”. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 237 (g), the integrated haze image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)). The whole picture will appear. Since the progress of the subsequent production is as described above with reference to FIGS. 235 (d) to (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (h) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decorative image SSG included in the integrated bag image IG is the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb”. As a result of the production shown in FIG. 237 (d), “the image IGa ′ representing the integrated bag image IGa (or the image BMGa representing the normal button bag image BMGa)” is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb. It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully combined with the image SSGb ′ ”representing“. That is, in this case, when the second warning effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 237 (i), the integrated haze image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)). The whole picture will appear. In the subsequent stage of production, the integrated bag image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is simply replaced with the integrated bag image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when “the image shown in FIG. 238 (j)” is displayed, it is highly likely that the “special button Ｂ image BMGb” is displayed as the button 摸 image BMG (here, “100%”). Will be suggested.

  The “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)” according to this example is different from the “integrated bag image IGb” in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)) (here, translucent). It is displayed as the expressed image IGb ′. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)”, the “integrated bag image IGb” may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 232 (b). Alternatively, the “special button bag image BMGb” may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the “normal edge decoration image SSGa”. Even when the “special button bag image BMGb” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)) or in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (b)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a different mode (translucent here).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 238 (j), the “special button 摸 image BMGb” shown in FIG. 232 (b) itself or “special button 摸 image BMGb” is approximated. At least an image BMGb ′ having an outline is displayed. Thereby, the “special button 摸 image BMGb” is displayed as an “integrated 摸 image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” integrated with the “normal rim decoration image SSGa” or “special rim decoration”. It can be suggested that an effective period displayed as “integrated bag image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” integrated with “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) shown in FIG. 238 (j) is displayed, the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) is not “integrated bag image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))”. , An effect that suggests (recalls) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated bag image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 237 (k), the “special edge decoration image SSGb” is expressed with respect to the “image IGb ′ expressing the integrated bag image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button image BMGb)”. The image SSGb ′ ”is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of such an effect, “special edge decoration image SSGb” is expressed with respect to “image IGb ′ expressing integrated bag image IGb (or image BMGb ′ expressing special button bag image BMGb)”. When the image SSGb ′ ”is added and integrated, an effective period in which the“ integrated bag image IGd (FIG. 232 (d)) ”appears is generated. On the other hand, “image SSGb ′ representing special peripheral decorative image SSGb” is added to “image IGb ′ representing integrated 摸 image IGb (or image BMGb ′ representing special button 摸 image BMGb)”. If it is not integrated, the effective period in which the “integrated haze image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” appears is generated.

  FIG. 238 (l) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started in the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k) is performed. Yes. It may be executed as a third precursor effect (third specific display) different from the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

  As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) has advanced to the second timing, and operation acceptance is allowed. It is executed as an effect suggesting that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “image IGb ′ representing integrated bag image IGb (or image BMGb ′ representing special button bag image BMGb)”. The “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is started while gradually approaching. Alternatively, it is unknown whether or not the image BMGb ′) ”representing the special button bag image BMGb” and the “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 238 (l) progresses, any of “image shown in FIG. 238 (m)” and “image shown in FIG. 238 (o)” is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situation and image contents shown in FIG. 238 (m) and FIG. 238 (o) are basically the same as the “situation and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)” described above, and FIG. As a result of the development of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. 6B and the reduction of the area where the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed, A portion that does not overlap with the sign effect (specific display) appears, and shows the state and image content in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

  That is, the integrated haze image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 238 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 238 (l) appears, and FIG. 238 (m) or FIG. When the “specific timing (timing when the effective period starts)” arrives before the situation shown in 238 (o) appears, at least the internal processing is displayed (display on the layer processing) ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 238 (m) and FIG. 238 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible due to overlapping (or difficult to see), the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed in a manner straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and after the effective period has occurred For the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated haze image IG cannot be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the entire image of the integrated bag image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the mode of the integrated bag image IG (the mode of the peripheral decorative image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button 摸 image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the effective period is started.

  In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (m) appears, the peripheral decorative image SSG included in the integrated bag image IG is not the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (k) and (l), “the image IGb ′ representing the integrated 摸 image IGb (or the special button 摸 image BMGb is represented). It can be recognized that the “image BMGb ′)” has failed to be combined with the “image SSGb ′ representing the special edge decoration image SSGb”. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 238 (n), the integrated haze image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)). The whole picture will appear. The progress of the production after that is only that the integrated bag image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is replaced with the integrated bag image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (o) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decorative image SSG included in the integrated bag image IG is the “special peripheral decorative image SSGb”. As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k), “the image IGb ′ representing the integrated bag image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ representing the special button bag image BMGb)” becomes the “special edge decoration image SSGb. It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully combined with the image SSGb ′ ”expressing“. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is not displayed, the integrated haze image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)) as shown in FIG. 238 (p). The whole picture will appear. The progress of the production after that is that the integrated bag image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is simply replaced with the integrated bag image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, when FIG. 237 (c) appears, the probability that the “special button 摸 image BMGb” appears as the button 摸 image BMG is set to “0%”. You may make it have a slight probability that "the special button bag image BMGb" will appear. That is, in this case, after the performance shown in FIG. 237 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 237 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 238 (m) → (n), ( There is a possibility that the production progress will be executed in the form of o) → (p).

  According to such a configuration, at which point the edge decorative image SSG is displayed at the time when FIGS. 237 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 238 (m) and (o) appear. Although it can be recognized, it is impossible to recognize in which aspect the button bag image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested step by step in accordance with the situation relating to the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and it is possible to improve the gaming interest. . In particular, when the button bag image BMG can indicate one of a plurality of operation means having different operation objects depending on the display mode, the effective period has started and the operation-related expectation level is also suggested. In spite of being in the situation, the state in which the operation target is not recognized is generated, so that the degree of attention to the effect can be remarkably improved.

  However, even in the situation where FIGS. 237 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 238 (m) and (o) appear, the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target by the player has no button. It is desirable to emit light in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the haze image BMG (for example, light emission from the occurrence of an effective period). According to such a configuration, a highly motivated person who tends to look directly at the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the “type displayed as the button bag image BMG”. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to motivate operation.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is not necessarily executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 236 (a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 237 (c) or 238 (j).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) may not necessarily be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (g) and (i) and FIGS. 238 (n) and (p). Good. That is, in this case, the effects shown in FIG. 237 (d) and FIG. 238 (k) function as a precursor effect. At the time of transfer, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may have already decreased, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have decreased. When the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, the gauge image is displayed in the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k). (Predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area.

  Moreover, about the production | presentation of FIGS. 236-238, you may make it omit the part according to the aspect prepared as the integrated haze image IG. For example, when the aspect shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and (d) is not prepared as the integrated haze image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 238. At this time, this may be omitted for FIG. 237 (c).

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the image BMG ′ representing the button 摸 image BMG (or the button 摸 image BMG itself itself before the operation acceptance is permitted (before the occurrence of the effective period). Is displayed (FIG. 237 (d), FIG. 238 (k)), but in this situation (before the occurrence of the effective period), the image BMG ′ (or the button 摸 image BMG) representing the button 摸 image BMG Is not dynamically displayed so that a state in which the position is displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving portion is depicted. According to such a configuration, even if the button bag image BMG and the image BMG ′ representing the button bag image BMG are displayed prior to the generation of the effective period, the effective period has not yet occurred. Can be implied, so that the player can concentrate on the performance without worrying about the remaining effective period. In addition, since the acceptance of the effect is permitted when the second sign effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, it is difficult to see or difficult to see with the second sign effect (second specific display TH2). In such a case, the dynamic display of the button bag image BMG is performed.

  FIG. 239 to FIG. 243 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect progress when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  That is, in FIGS. 235 to 238, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is generated. In the case, an example of the production progress was described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 239 to 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not decreased or the precursor effect (specific display) is performed when the precursor effect (specific display) is not displayed. In the case where the effective period (second effective period) occurs without being described, an example of the production progress will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, when a valid period during which operation reception is permitted occurs, a predetermined sign effect (prediction display) is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG” within the effective period can be executed. In order to make the feature stand out when performing an effect, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be used even if a predetermined precursor effect (predictor display) itself is not performed when a valid period is generated, or a predetermined precursor effect (predecessor display) is performed. The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not yet reduced at the time when the entire display target area is made to be well-viewed.

  Here, as the “display mode that characterizes the movement of the gauge image GG”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238 and the like), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the effective period. When the effective period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (in this case, “0”), “the operation is not performed within the effective period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. In spite of this, when the effective period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area. The first display mode "can be mentioned. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that a lot of time remains until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Becomes aware of the possibility that the effective period is abruptly terminated, so that the tension during the effective period can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as a “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238), the gauge image GG decreases the display area for each unit time within the effective period. However, “the second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the effective period” can be cited. According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is little time remaining until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player can It becomes conscious of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

  That is, in the example described below, using at least one of such “first display mode” and “second display mode”, “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”. The example of a display about the case of performing is shown.

  First, in FIG. 239 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decoration display SZ (special symbol) is displayed with the second display pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The effect situation currently performed in the display apparatus 1600 is shown.

  In FIG. 239 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. This shows the production situation in which the integrated bag image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 239 (b), when the integrated heel image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced. .

  In addition, when executing the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG” within the effective period, the time (set time) set for the effective period (second effective period) is “ The display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG is made longer than the time (set time) set for the effective period (first effective period) in which it is not executed. This is nothing but the time required to execute the display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized within the effective period. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the “first display period during which the“ display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG ”is not executed” and “the movement of the gauge image GG”. Although the setting time until the effective period ends is different from the second effective period in which the `` display mode characterized by '' is executed, the integrated bag image IG itself is the same, The images are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated bag image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) is the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the “first display period during which the“ display mode that characterizes the motion of the gauge image GG ”is not executed” and “the motion of the gauge image GG is characterized. Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed, when a situation where the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease appears, the amount of time when the display area does not decrease Is added, it can be estimated that the set time is longer than it looks.

  In addition, when the production situation shown in FIG. 239 (b) occurs, a precursor production that suggests the occurrence may be performed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed at the time when the entire integrated haze image IG (at least “the display target area of the gauge image GG” included in the integrated haze image IG) is displayed without overlapping the precursor effect. Is the maximum value, and it is required to be in a situation where it has not been reduced yet.

  That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state where the operation acceptance regarding the predetermined post-operation display and the predetermined post-operation sound output is allowed (within the effective period). When the production situation shown in FIG. 239 (c) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the production situation shown in FIG. 239 (b) appears, the gauge image GG The display area is maintained in a state where the display area corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) is reduced, and the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is started.

  Such a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is continued for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the period, as shown in FIGS. 239 (c) and (d). It has become. However, even in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the operation reception is maintained in an allowable state, and when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is operated, the effective period As a result, the integrated haze image IG is not displayed, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 239 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, “a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” appears within the effective period, so that the display area of the gauge image GG is continuously reduced at a constant speed. Thus, it can be suggested that there is a margin in the remaining time until the effective period ends.

  In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an allowable state, so that an image as if the effective period has been extended can be provided. Therefore, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the effective period is generated.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 239 (c) and 239 (d), the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed until then is not displayed or difficult to view in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. In this way, attention to the “display mode that characterizes the movement of the gauge image GG” is promoted.

  However, if a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that a so-called “freeze effect” has occurred, in which the image in the display screen suddenly becomes stationary. In other words, the “freeze effect” is generally known as a display mode that does not show any reaction over a predetermined time and cannot cancel the state, so that it is misrecognized that operation acceptance is no longer allowed. There is a concern that the player's willingness to operate may be lost and the gaming interest will be reduced. In particular, in this example, the decorative symbol SZ is set in a non-displayed state or in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, and this may also cause an erroneous recognition that operation acceptance is no longer allowed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated bag image IG itself is not brought into a stationary state in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated bag image While the gauge image GG included in the IG is set to a static state, the button 摸 image BMG included in the integrated 摸 image IG is dynamically displayed (the state of displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving portion is depicted. Display) is continued.

  According to such a configuration, a state where the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease appears while the dynamic display of the button bag image BMG is continued, so that the operation acceptance is not allowed ( The possibility of misrecognizing that a freeze effect has occurred) can be suppressed, and it is expected that the player's willingness to operate will be suitably maintained.

  Here, the dynamic display using the button bag image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined operation (such as an operation that reciprocates within the movable range of the operation receiving unit). In this respect, in the effective period (the first effective period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is not displayed, the setting is made. While the predetermined operation by the button 摸 image BMG is repeated n times before the time ends, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed In the effective period (the second effective period shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of being set, “the display area of the gauge image GG decreases in the set time” It is desirable that the predetermined operation by the button bag image BMG can be executed as a display that is repeated m (> n) times only within the “not-performed period”.

  According to such a configuration, when the state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG decreases over a longer time than the first effective period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the like. As a result, the state that is not performed will continue, so even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and take time to grasp the situation, you have enough time to operate. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. In addition, as an effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the indication effect (specific display) is not displayed, an effective period different from the first effective period illustrated in FIGS. If there is a period (that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output), than the longest time (set time) set for each effective period, Of the second effective period shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 and the like, it is desirable that the number of predetermined operations by the button bag image BMG is larger in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. .

  As described above, at the time when such a second effective period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where the visibility is ensured well, and the display area is set to a predetermined maximum value. It is displayed (FIG. 239 (b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 234, if the specific image TG is displayed in a state of good visibility in the display target area of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. However, it may seem that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 233, when the specific image TG appears in a state of good visibility as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG is displayed. It becomes clear that the image does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by exaggerating the length of the remaining time as the effective period.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the reduction of the display area of the gauge image GG is started from the situation shown in FIG. 239 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed without the specific image TG being displayed. Is reduced to a predetermined value, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 239 (c) and (d)).

  In this example, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends without the operation being accepted by the player's operation, the gauge image GG is reduced in its display area again. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is easily visible. Thereafter, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 239 (e)), the time set for the second effective period (set time) is up. As the second effective period ends, the operation-related images including the integrated bag image IG are hidden (FIG. 239 (f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is “0”, that is, when the gauge image GG is not displayed (FIG. 239 (e)), the time set for the second effective period (set time) is up. Then, as the second effective period ends, the operation-related images including the integrated bag image IG are hidden (FIG. 239 (f)).

  Thus, in the second effective period, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 239 (f)), the same operation as when the operation is received within the second effective period. The post-display and post-operation sound output are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions), and this point is also different from the first effective period. However, instead, in the second effective period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first effective period, and operation reception is permitted even in the display period in the stopped state. Since it is as described above, it can be said that a situation in which an operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) is not in time is difficult to occur. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 239, the gauge image GG is usually set within a valid period as the “display mode that characterizes the movement of the gauge image GG” (see FIGS. 233 to 238). When the display area is reduced at a constant speed, the case where the “second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the effective period” has been described. However, as described above, as the “display mode that gives a characteristic to the movement of the gauge image GG”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238), the gauge image GG is displayed when the operation is not performed within the effective period. When the effective period ends when the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), “the operation is not performed within the effective period, and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are performed. In spite of this, when the effective period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area. The first display mode "may be further applied. When such a method is adopted, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing in either the mode shown in FIGS. 240 and 241 or the mode shown in FIGS. 242 and 243. More desirable.

  240 and 241 are diagrams showing an example of the effect progress when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  The situations shown in FIGS. 240A to 240D are the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 239A to 239D and other examples thereof. Accordingly, also in this example, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs in the middle of the second effective period, and includes the period within the second effective period. When an operation is accepted at, post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)).

  However, in this example, even if the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is ended without the operation being accepted by the player's operation, the gauge image GG decreases the display area again. It is never displayed. In this example, the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is continued until the time (set time) set for the second effective period elapses. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 240 (d) and 241 (e). In this state, the operation-related image including the integrated bag image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is easily visible.

  As described above, also in the second effective period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 241 (e)), the operation is accepted within the second effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (the automatic reception effect is functioned). However, in the second effective period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first effective period, and the operation is performed during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, reception is permitted.

  However, in this example, the second effective period is not reduced until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (in this case, “0”), and the display area for the predetermined value remains. Since it is made to end, the player side may not be able to operate despite the intention to operate, and the situation where the second valid period ends may occur, and the gaming interest will be reduced. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, symbol stop or not 10 seconds before the symbol stop) is satisfied. The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the second effective period. When the operation is accepted, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second effective period ends without any operation by the player, a special effective period for regenerating the second effective period is generated from the end point. It can be said that.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second valid period ends as a result of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the player can perform an operation shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (e), when the player performs an operation on the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second is based on the reception of the operation. The effective period is started from the initial state (FIG. 241 (f)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 240 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 241 (e) and (g). Therefore, even when an operation is accepted within the second valid period thus regenerated, post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)). ).

  When an operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 241 (e), an image shown in FIG. 241 (f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 240 (b)) appears as the post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is an image display that is different from the post-operation display that is executed based on the reception of the operation during the second effective period (FIGS. 240B to 240D, FIG. 241F, etc.). Is different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation during the special effective period shown in FIG. 241 (e) is also the second effective period (FIGS. 240 (b) to (d) and FIG. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation in 241 (f) or the like.

  FIG. 242 and FIG. 243 are diagrams showing variations of the effect progress when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  The situation shown in FIG. 242 (a) is the same as the contents described above with reference to FIG. 239 (a) and FIG. 240 (a) and other examples. However, in this example, when the second effective period occurs during the execution of the variable display of the decorative design SZ shown in FIG. 242 (a) and the integrated display image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the A “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is generated over a predetermined time from the time when the integrated heel image IG is displayed (FIGS. 242 (b) and (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is in a predetermined maximum value at the time when the integrated bag image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG has the display area at the maximum value. It will be maintained as it is.

  It should be noted that operation acceptance is permitted even when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG or the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress within the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, such as the execution of the post-sound output, is the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 239 to 241 and other examples thereof. .

  Also in this example, as in the example shown in FIGS. 240 and 241, “the display area of the gauge image GG decreases until the time (set time) set for the second effective period has elapsed. The period that is not done "continues. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (maximum value) as shown in FIGS. 242 (c) and 243 (d). In this state, the operation related image including the integrated bag image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is easily visible.

  As described above, in the second effective period according to this example, when the set time elapses without accepting the operation (FIG. 243 (d)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, in the second effective period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first effective period, and the operation is performed during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, reception is permitted.

  However, also in this example, the second effective period is not reduced until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the display area corresponding to the maximum value remains. Since the game is ended, the player side may not be able to operate despite the intention to operate, and the second validity period may end, and the gaming interest is reduced. There are concerns. Therefore, also in this example, after the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, symbol stop or not 10 seconds before the symbol stop) is satisfied. While not being performed, the operation means is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the second effective period. Based on this, the second valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated.

  According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, even if the second effective period ends, the operation by the player can be performed as shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 243 (d), when the player performs an operation on the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the reception of the operation. The effective period is started from the initial state (FIG. 243 (e)). Thereafter, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 242 (b), (c), 243 (d), and (f). Therefore, even when the operation is accepted within the second valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 243 (f)). ).

  However, in this example, even when the second effective period reoccurs, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs from the time when the second effective period reappears. In the situation shown in Fig. 2, the decorative symbol SZ is not displayed or is hardly visible.

  That is, the “image shown in FIG. 243 (e)” that appears as the post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 243 (d) is “the image shown in FIG. 242 (b)”. Is the same. Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 243 (f) shown in FIG. 243) when the operation is accepted in the second effective period (FIGS. )) Is different from the image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation during the special effective period shown in FIG. 243 (d) is also the second effective period (FIGS. 242 (b) and (c) and FIG. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 243 (f)) that is executed based on the reception of the operation at 243 (d) or the like.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the entire period from the start to the end of the second effective period functions as a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. In any situation, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced.

  Note that, in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIGS. 241 (e) and 243 (d), the integrated haze image IG may be displayed as in the second effective period. However, the second effective period and the special effective period are made easy to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation are different effective periods (second effective period, special effective period). It is desirable that at least one of the display position and the size of the integrated haze image IG be different from the effective period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second effective period, the integrated bag image IG having a mode corresponding to the second effective period is not displayed, and the integrated bag image IG having a mode corresponding to the special effective period is newly displayed. Will be displayed. When displaying the integrated 摸 image IG in the special effective period, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced” may be generated within the effective period, or the “period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced” ”May not be generated.

  The “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG” shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 can be executed when the integrated bag image IGa is displayed among the integrated bag images IGa to IGd. It is desirable that the integrated haze images IGb to IGd out of the integrated haze images IGa to IGd should not be executed. In other words, the integrated haze image IGa is displayed as the aspect with the lowest expectation, but when the integrated haze image IGa is displayed, the movement of the gauge image GG shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 is displayed. Since there is a possibility that the “display mode having characteristics” may appear, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 240 to 243, when an operation-related image (such as an integrated bag image IG) is displayed in a “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”, Even if a situation occurs in which the operation-related image is not displayed as a result of the elapse of a predetermined setting period (second effective period) without any operation being performed, an operation acceptance occurs and the display changes (or , A sound output after operation) can be generated. More specifically, even when the predetermined setting period (second effective period) ends, when the operation receiving portion (operation means) that has been urged by the integrated tile image IG is operated, A predetermined set period (second effective period) can be regenerated, and operation acceptance is allowed in the regenerated predetermined set period (second effective period) (FIG. 241 (e), (f) and FIGS. 243 (d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined set period (second effective period) ends without understanding the “display mode that gives the motion of the gauge image GG” Since the predetermined set period (second effective period) can be re-generated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  On the other hand, in a predetermined setting period (first effective period) in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated bag image IG) is not displayed in the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”, the operation reception is not performed. After the predetermined set period (first effective period) ends without being performed, even if the operation receiving unit (operation means) that has been urged to operate by the integrated bag image IG is operated, the predetermined set period The (second effective period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 235 to 238).

  It should be noted that the predetermined set period (second effective period) in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated bag image IG) is displayed in the “display mode that characterizes the movement of the gauge image GG” is not necessarily the symbol variation. It does not have to occur during the execution period. For example, it may be a period generated using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol variation, or may be a period in which symbol variation is not executed, such as during a big hit game execution period or before a big hit game is started. May occur.

  Moreover, according to the example shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243) is set longer than the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, the integrated 摸 image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship in the first effective period and the second effective period (in the above example, integrated) The fossil image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated bag image IG is displayed in a similar relationship, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button bag image is the same, so the set time (set time) Is expected to appear to be the same length. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the “first display period during which the“ display mode that characterizes the motion of the gauge image GG ”is not executed” and “the motion of the gauge image GG is characterized. Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed, when a situation where the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease appears, the amount of time when the display area does not decrease Is added, it can be estimated that the set time is longer than it looks.

  When displaying the integrated bag image IG in a similar relationship between the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238) and the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the “gauge image” In the second effective period in which the “display mode characterized by the movement of GG” appears, it is desirable to display an integrated soot image IG smaller than the first effective period.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, during the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238), if no operation is accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, “ 0 ”), but in the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243), if no operation is accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It ends in the state. That is, if the time set for the effective period (set time) is long, the tension during the effective period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, “ By giving the possibility that the effective period can end even if it does not become “0”), it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described example, when the integrated bag image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the precursor effect is being performed (first effective period), the precursor When the integrated bag image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursor effect is performed but at least the precursor effect is performed (second effective Period), the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG are different. In this case, the gauge images GG themselves may have different aspects. “The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced while the precursor effect is performed but at least the precursor effect is performed” means that the gauge image is displayed over the entire effective period as illustrated in FIGS. 242 and 243. This means that the display area of GG is not reduced.

  In this regard, according to the above-described example, in the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238), the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without being operated. In the second valid period (FIGS. 240 to 243), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. The target area is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first effective period, it becomes possible to make the effective period appear longer as long as the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the effective period. In the second effective period, By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the effective period, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it appear that the effective period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in the second effective period, at the end of the effective period, the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) remains large (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value). It is desirable to do so.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced every unit time in the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, the display area is not reduced in the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243). Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the button bag image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced in both the first effective period and the second effective period. However, while the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first effective period, the first mode is different from the first mode. The display is performed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the example described above, the button bag image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated bag image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG). When the button bag image BMG of the integrated bag image IG is dynamically displayed, the gauge image GG is in a decreasing state and the gauge image GG is not in a decreasing state. Like to have. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not decreased, it is preferable that the button bag image BMG is in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted by the dynamic display as the integrated bag image IG. To be able to suggest.

  Further, according to the above-described example, only when the normal button 摸 image BMGb is displayed as the normal button 摸 image BMGb, the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized by the movement. It is possible to display the “display mode provided”. In addition, when the normal button bag image BMGa is displayed, “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” (predetermined image) may be displayed. ) Display mode with characteristics of GG movement "is not displayed, and gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a mode (normal mode) that appears even when special button bag image BMGb is displayed. I made it. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the normal button bag image BMGa having a lower expectation than the special button bag image BMGb is displayed.

  In particular, in the second effective period shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the mode (color, etc.) in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. However, only one aspect is displayed. That is, in this case, the remaining time suggestion function and the expectation suggestion function based on the gauge image GG itself are lost, and no information is obtained from the gauge image GG, but the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The integrated haze image IG formed with is displayed and the gauge image GG is displayed statically (in an area-invariant manner) in the integrated haze image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second effective period is not an image suggesting the remaining time or expectation, but functions only as a decorative image in the integrated bag image IG. Therefore, the function of the gauge image GG displayed within the first effective period can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG, and the game entertainment is improved by the diversity of expression as the gauge image GG. That is expected.

  In addition, about the 1st effective period and the 2nd effective period, those generation conditions should just be mutually different. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. In addition, the first effective period means a period during which operation reception regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is allowed, and the second effective period is the first effective period. It means a period during which operation reception is allowed for a second post-operation display different from the post-operation display and a second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output. The response (display change, sound output) that appears when an operation is accepted is different from each other.

In addition, for the integrated bag image IG,
・ After the indication effect (specific display TH) is started, the display area of the gauge image GG is changed every unit time from when the indication effect in the display state and the “integrated bag image IG” overlap. Reduced mode (FIGS. 235-238);
-Even if the indication effect is not displayed or the indication effect is started, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least when the indication effect in the display state and the "integrated bag image IG" overlap. Aspect (FIGS. 239 to 243)
And there was. According to such a configuration, as a result of the precursor effect, whether or not the display area has already been reduced when the visibility of the gauge image GG is ensured and whether or not the precursor effect has been performed. When the entire gauge image GG can be visually recognized, the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced, which provides the fun of the rendering using the visibility of the gauge image GG. Will be able to.

  In particular, when a mode (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is visible regardless of whether or not the precursor effect has been performed is employed. As long as the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can appear even though it is within the effective period, the gaze on the gauge image GG can be further enhanced.

  Note that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the indication effect is not displayed or even when the indication effect is at least overlapped with the “integrated bag image IG” even if the indication effect is started. In the case of adopting the mode that is not performed (FIGS. 239 to 243), the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced within the effective period appears (FIGS. 239 to 243), and the gauge image GG A display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears is the second condition, the display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The generation condition of the specific effective period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

  In the above-described example, during the period when the button bag image BMG is displayed, there are cases where display is performed to reduce the display area of the gauge image GG as time passes, and cases where the display is not performed. did. When the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed within the effective period and may be hidden. Nevertheless, the display area of the gauge image GG is not limited to the first effective period in which the display area is reduced according to the passage of time, but the display area is not reduced over time. Since it is displayed even during the effective period, it can be expected to suitably suggest that the stage reception is permitted.

  In the above-described example, the time (set time) set for the effective period (second effective period) has elapsed without displaying by the gauge image GG to reduce the display area as time passes. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function is not activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is sometimes activated, the tension due to the fact that the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image GG may be completely lost. ), It is desirable not to activate the automatic reception function (in any production mode). On the other hand, regarding the first valid period described above, it is desirable that the automatic reception function is validated (in any production mode).

  In addition, when the display method that displays only the gage function (remaining time suggestion function) is adopted, the method that does not reduce the display area of the gage image GG is adopted. Then, although it is a gauge image GG, a feeling of strangeness will be felt that the remaining time suggestion function is not exhibited. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button bag image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG, or the gauge image GG itself can have a plurality of colors. Since this itself has a decorative property in the integrated bag image IG, it seems to be expected to suppress a sense of incongruity when a situation in which the remaining time suggestion function by the gauge image GG is not exhibited appears. become.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, prior to the occurrence of the first effective period, the “button 摸 image BMG” has a low expectation mode (normal button 摸 image BMGa) and a high expectation mode. As for the effect of which (special button 摸 image BMGb) appears, and the “periphery decorative image SSG”, a mode with a low degree of expectation (normal peripheral decorative image SSGa) and a mode with a high degree of expectation (special peripheral decorative image) It was made to make it appear in stages about which of SSGb) appears. However, such performance can also be caused to appear by the method described below.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the integrated haze image IG in a stepwise manner.

  First, FIG. 244 (a) shows the first effect pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination when the display number of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is 0 in the normal gaming state and the number of holds is zero. The effect situation currently performed in the display apparatus 1600 is shown.

  In FIG. 244 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The effect state in which the button bag image BMG is displayed is shown.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button bag image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the “peripheral decoration image SGG”, and remains in a state of being displayed alone. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button 摸 image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (normal button 摸 image BMGa) or a mode with a high expectation (special button 摸 image BMGb). In the figure, a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button bag image BMGb) appears is illustrated. Which of these modes is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  FIG. 244 (c) shows an effect situation in which the special button bag image BMGb shown in FIG. 244 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  However, the progress of the production from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the button 摸 image BMG (the normal button 摸 image BMGa, the special button 摸 image BMGb) shown in FIG. 244 (b) is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG (the first effective period). ) Occurs, it is effective after the presentation progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. Does the period (first effective period) occur, or the effective period (first effective period) occurs without producing the integrated 摸 image IG without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c)? You will be able to provide fun about what to do. When the effective period (first effective period) occurs without becoming the integrated bag image IG, the gauge image GG is displayed as an image different from the button bag image BMG. ) In which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

  In addition, when a valid period occurs after the button bag image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, it is expected to be stopped with a big hit symbol than when the effective period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (ratio). In addition, when the special button 摸 image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), the case shown in FIG. 244 (c) is more than when the normal button 摸 image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b). It is desirable that the ratio of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. The ratio may include “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (c), the button bag image BMG includes a peripheral decoration image with a low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image with a high expectation (special peripheral decoration). The image BMGb) is provided with a presentation as to whether it is integrated with the image BMGb), and the figure shows a case where a highly expected aspect (special peripheral decorative image BMGb) appears. . Which of these modes is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  It should be noted that the peripheral decorative image BMG (normal peripheral decorative image BMGa, special peripheral decorative image BMGb) according to this example is different from those shown in the above-described examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) for the convenience of explanation. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decorative image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button bag image BMG, and the normal peripheral decorative image BMGa is provided with a heart pattern (not shown). On the other hand, in the special peripheral decorative image BMGb, a check pattern is applied. Then, “regions from the upper right to the lower left” of the regions provided with these patterns are displayed as display target regions of the gauge image GG.

  The image shown in FIG. 244 (c) functions as an image (integrated bag image) IGd in which the special button bag image BMGb and the special peripheral edge decorative image BMGb are integrated. It is the same as 232 (d).

  FIG. 244 (d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated bag image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (c).

  However, the progress of the presentation from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated bag image IG (integrated bag images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244 (c). If an aspect is generated, it is effective after the production progress has been made from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Does the period (first effective period) occur, or the effective period (first effective period) without adding the first additional decoration HS1 without producing the effect in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d)? Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

  In addition, when the effective period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated bag image IG, the effective period occurs without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated bag image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) to stop at the big hit symbol is higher than the case. In addition, when the special button bag image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) or when the special edge decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c), FIG. When the normal button bag image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 24, or when the normal edge decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of the first additional decoration HS1 to be added is increased. The ratio may include “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 provides staging that indicates whether it is added in a mode with a low expectation or a mode with a high expectation. You may make it do.

  FIG. 244 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated bag image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (d).

  However, the progress of the production from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated bag image IG (integrated bag images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. If an aspect in which the phenomenon occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progress is made from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Does the period (first effective period) occur, or the effective period (first effective period) without adding the second additional decoration HS2 without the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e)? Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

  In addition, when a valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated bag image IG, the effective period occurs without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated bag image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) to stop at the big hit symbol is higher than the case. In addition, when the special button bag image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) or when the special edge decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c), FIG. When the normal button bag image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 24 and the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) is progressed compared to the case where the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of the second additional decoration HS2 is increased. The ratio may include “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (e), the second additional decoration HS2 provides a stunning effect as to whether it is added in a mode with a low expectation or a mode with a high expectation. You may make it do.

  FIG. 244 (f) shows an effect situation in which an effective period (first effective period) has occurred in a state where the integrated bag image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (e) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (f), when the effective period (first effective period) occurs, operation instruction images such as “press” and “down arrow” are displayed. In addition to this, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the operation acceptance is also permitted by confirming the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. Note that the specific image TG according to this example is different in image type from the above-described examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) for convenience of explanation, but basically the same. It is displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the “end portion of the gauge image GG” that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases. Will be.

  It should be noted that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 233 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the effective period but is gradually displayed as time elapses). Alternatively, it may be displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 234 (a method in which the whole is displayed when the effective period starts).

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation mode (snail character) or a high-expectation mode (frog character) that is not shown. In the figure, a case where an aspect with high expectation appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed with a higher expectation when the effective period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) than when the effective period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). The ratio is higher, and the case where the effective period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) is more highly expected than the case where the effective period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d). It is desirable to increase the rate at which the specific image TG is displayed. The ratio may include “100%” or “0%”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a stage performance as to how much the operation-related image can be advanced to a mode with high expectation before the effective period occurs. For this reason, it is possible to improve the game entertainment related to the operation in a state where the effective period has not yet occurred. Further, while the operation-related images (the button bag image BMG, the peripheral decoration image SGG, and the additional decoration HS1, 2) indicate the expectation level until the effective period occurs, after the effective period occurs, Since the degree of expectation is further suggested by a different image (specific image TG), it is possible to favorably improve the interest over a period from before the occurrence of the effective period to after it occurs. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 244, the timing of whether or not the presentation progresses from FIG. 244 (b) to FIG. 244 (c), and the presentation progress from FIG. 244 (c) to FIG. 244 (d). In the timing of whether or not, the timing of whether or not the presentation progresses from FIG. 244 (d) to FIG. 244 (e), etc., the operation-related images (button hazel image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) You may make it hide once. In other words, in this case, when the operation-related image (button 摸 image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is provided whether the presentation has progressed or the validity period has occurred. Will be able to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 244, the button bag image, the edge decoration image, the additional decoration, and the like are displayed in the same manner as in the valid period before the valid period occurs. It may be displayed in a blinking or semi-transparent manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 244, it is desirable that the time required for suggesting the degree of expectation stepwise by the operation-related image before the effective period occurs is longer than the set time for the effective period. .

  By the way, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to this embodiment, a “pattern portion 5012” that can be moved (moved up and down) relative to the sheath portion 5020 and a “pattern that can be moved (moved up and down) relative to the handle portion 5012”. As described above, two operation receiving portions for the button 5014 "are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when generating an effective period (operation reception effect) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the effective period (operation In the reception effect), both the “pattern bag image TMG” with the handle part 5012 and the “button bag image BMG” with the handle button 5014 displayed are displayed. In an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, operation reception to the pattern button 5014 is not allowed, and an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014. ), The operation reception for the handle 5012 is not allowed.

  In such a configuration, when an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 occurs, whether or not an operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted, or an operation reception for the handle button 5014 is accepted. It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not is allowed. In other words, when an operation is accepted during an effective period in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, after an operation is made, compared to when an operation is accepted into the handle button 5014 during an effective period in which an operation opportunity is given. There is a high rate of occurrence of a mode that suggests that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a display (or a mode that suggests that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a post-operation sound output). The percentage may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance for the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the operation acceptance for the handle button 5014 is permitted, and the operation acceptance for the handle portion 5012 is allowed. Is recognized by the player, an operation for the handle portion 5012 is performed in a sense of uplifting, and the game entertainment can be remarkably improved.

  In order to obtain such an effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether operation acceptance for the handle portion 5012 is permitted or whether operation acceptance for the handle button 5014 is allowed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the handle portion 5012 (the light emitting portion of the handle portion 5012) is allowed to emit light. The handle button 5014 on the side to which no operation opportunity is given is made to emit light. That is, in this case, during the effective period (operation reception effect) in which both the “pattern bag image TMG” with the handle part 5012 and the “button bag image BMG” with the handle button 5014 displayed are displayed, the pattern part 5012. Even if the handle button 5014 is directly observed, it remains difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 has an operation opportunity. In such a situation, when the player recognizes that the operation reception with respect to the handle 5012 is permitted, the player will perform an operation with respect to the handle 5012 in an uplifting feeling. Can be significantly improved.

  That is, in an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012, the pattern portion can be obtained simply by directly viewing the pattern portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014 or slightly looking at the effect display device 1600. It is difficult to recognize whether an operation opportunity is given to 5012 or an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. At least for those who have played the pachinko 1 for the first time (beginners) and those who are not familiar with the complicated performance specifications (such as elderly people), an opportunity to operate is given to either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after generating the “effective period in which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given an operation opportunity” in this way, An aspect in which it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given an operation opportunity within the effective period, but can be recognized if a certain amount of time is required. Thus, the button bag image BMG and the pattern bag image TMG are respectively displayed.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, in the effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, a “pattern handle image TMG” that looks like the handle portion 5012 and a handle button 5014. Both of the “button 摸 image BMG” with the are displayed, but among these 摸 images, the “pattern 摸 image TMG” on the side where the operation reception is allowed is dynamically displayed. The “button 摸 image BMG” on the side where the “.” Is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. Here, “dynamic display” refers to, for example, a display depicting a state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced within the movable range (if the handle portion 5012 is operated (vertically moved) with respect to the sheath portion 5020). The pattern button 5014 corresponds to the depicted display, and corresponds to the display depicting the operation (moving up and down) with respect to the pattern unit 5012).

  Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the operation opportunity within the effective period. However, when a predetermined time that can be recognized as a dynamic display (moving image) has elapsed, the behavior at the time of operation appears in the pattern bag image TMG as a dynamic display, but the behavior at the time of operation in the button bag image BMG. Can be recognized that the operation opportunity is given to which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014. Then, when the player recognizes that operation reception is permitted for the operation receiving unit (pattern unit 5012) on the side with high expectation, the player performs an operation on the pattern unit 5012 with a sense of elevation. Thus, it is possible to remarkably improve the game entertainment interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “pattern bag image TMG” and the “button bag image BMG” are displayed in an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern unit 5012. In addition, by displaying these spear images as “integrated spear images” integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates their peripheral edges, an improvement of the game entertainment when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs I try to plan. The functions and modifications of such an integrated haze image are basically as described above. For example, the integrated bag image IG shown in FIGS. 232 to 244 may be displayed so as to further display (include) the “pattern bag image TMG” in addition to the “button bag image BMG”. Good.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “button bag image BMG” and the “pattern bag image TMG” are displayed as a “composite bag image HMG” in which at least a part of the sword decorative body 5001 is masked. Thus, the “composite haze image HMG” is displayed as an “integrated haze image IG” integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of the “integrated bag image IG” displayed when an operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the handle 5012.

  As shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 is generated. In the effect display device 1600, the “pattern 摸 image TMG” with the pattern portion 5012 is changed to the “composite 摸 image HMG” integrated with the “button 摸 image BMG”, and then the “composite 摸 image HMG”. "Image HMG" is displayed as an integrated haze image IGe to IGh integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. In the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the “pattern bag image TMG”, the “button bag image BMG”, and the “rim decoration image SSG” are not individually prepared as image data. It is displayed as one piece of integrated image data (integrated bag images IGe to IGh). Further, when the integrated haze images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation promotion displays such as “push-in” and “lower left arrow” are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “relatively as a post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. A plurality of production modes including “first production mode with low expectation” and “second production mode with relatively high expectation” are prepared, and these productions are performed based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination). Any one of the aspects is to be executed. In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d),
-The mode (integrated bag image IGf) shown in FIG. 245 (b) rather than the mode (integrated bag image IGe) shown in FIG. 245 (a) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second direction aspect with relatively high expectation” as the post-operation effect is higher,
-The mode (integrated bag image IGg) shown in FIG. 245 (c) rather than when the mode (integrated bag image IGf) shown in FIG. 245 (b) appears in a specific operation reception effect (effective period). When the appears, the appearance ratio of the “second direction aspect with relatively high expectation” as the post-operation effect is higher,
-A mode (integrated 摸 image IGh) shown in Fig. 245 (d) rather than a case (integrated 摸 image IGg) shown in Fig. 245 (c) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period) Based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination) so that the relationship that the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with relatively high expectation” appears as a post-operation effect is higher when Any one of the chemical images IGe to IGf is displayed.

  All of the four aspects shown as the integrated soot images IGe to IGh are not necessarily prepared. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the effective period simply by preparing at least two aspects. Further, an aspect different from the above four aspects (integrated bag images IGe to IGh) may be further prepared, and any of these prepared aspects may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-Operation means (sword decorative body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by an operation by a player, and a peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020 or the like) provided on the periphery thereof;
・ Integration for displaying the cocoon image (pattern cocoon image TMG) with the operation receiving unit (pattern unit 5012) as an integrated cocoon image IGe to IGh integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the cocoon image摸 image display means,
An operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) when the player performs an operation while the integrated bag image is displayed; The integrated haze image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated haze images IGe to IGh).

  Details of the “integrated bag image” shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d) will be described separately for those modes (integrated bag images IGe to IGh).

  First, the “integrated cocoon image IGe” shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a pattern cocoon image TMGe, a button cocoon image BMGe (composite cocoon image HMGe), and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe that decorates the periphery. Configured. However, in the “integrated cocoon image IGe”, the pattern cocoon image TMGe and the button cocoon image BMGe (composite cocoon image HMGe) are “images in which the pattern portion 5012 that is a target to which an operation opportunity is given” and “ Whereas an image with a pattern button 5014 that is not subject to an operation opportunity is displayed as an integrated image, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is an object to which an operation opportunity is given. A peripheral decorative portion (sheath portion 5020 or the like) that is actually provided at the periphery of the handle portion 5012 is not curled. Many portions of the image SSGe are used as virtual decorations on the display effect on the effect display device 1600 as a pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe). It has become a thing to decorate the edge.

  In the “integrated cocoon image IGe” shown in FIG. 245 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a treasure box in which several treasures including the handle cocoon image TMGe (composite cocoon image HMGe) are stored. As described above, these “treasure” and “treasure box” have shapes different from those of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this regard, in the “integrated bag image IGe” according to this embodiment, a display target region for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so that the display area in the display target region decreases with the passage of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the effective period. It is displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time until the display area becomes.

  In the normal edge decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 245 (a), a partition image KG is provided that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal edge decoration image SSGe. . An area surrounded by the partition image KG functions as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. In this example, a necklace that is one of the treasures is displayed as a section image KG, and a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is displayed in the necklace. However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target region”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the “integrated bag image IGe” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern portion to be operated. 5012 is made to emit light in the first mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the handle cocoon image TMGe in the “integrated cocoon image IGe” (for example, “blue” in FIG. 245 (a)). Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not an operation target also emits light in the fifth mode (for example, “blue” in FIG. 245 (a), for example, the same color as the button 摸 image BMGe in the “integrated 摸 image IGe”). )). Here, the same color is used, but the first mode and the fifth mode may be different colors.

  In contrast, the “integrated bag image IGf” shown in FIG. 245 (b) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGe” described above, and the handle bag image TMGf and the button bag image BMGf ( The composite haze image HMGf) and the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated bag image IGf”, the pattern bag image TMGf and the button bag image BMGf (composite bag image HMGf) are not changed in shape. However, the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-described “normal edge decoration image SSGe”, but the treasure box itself is the same, but the amount and type of the treasure that is the contents of the “first special edge” is increasing. It is displayed as “decorative image SSGf”. The amount and type of treasure are increasing, and the necklace, the treasure sword, and the cup are also displayed in the case of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and are common.

  In addition, in the “integrated spear image IGf” shown in FIG. 245 (b), the “necklace (partition image KG)”, which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, increases with the amount and type of treasure. The shape is changed, and the display mode of the gauge image GG is made different. According to such a configuration, the display area of the gauge image GG is different (not similar) depending on which of the plurality of aspects with different expectation levels is displayed. It can be made difficult to recognize how much remaining time is remaining as it is reduced, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which “integrated bag image IGf” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated. The portion 5012 emits light in the second mode (for example, emits light in the same color as the handle pattern image TMGf in the “integrated bag image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 245 (b)). Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not an operation target also emits light in the sixth mode (for example, “green” in FIG. 245 (b), for example, the same color as the button 摸 image BMGf in the “integrated 摸 image IGf”). )). Here, the same color is used, but the second mode and the sixth mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGg” shown in FIG. 245 (c) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGe” described above, and the handle bag image TMGg and the button bag image BMGg (composite bag image IMG). The image HMGg) and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the image HMGg) are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated bag image IGg”, there is no shape change in the pattern bag image TMGg and the button bag image BMGg (composite bag image HMGg). However, as for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the treasure itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe”, but the (second) special peripheral decoration is different from the treasure box for storing them. It is displayed as “Image SSGg”.

However, the “second special peripheral decorative image SSGg” is the same as the “normal special decorative image SSGe” and the “first special peripheral decorative image SSGf” in the following points.
“A virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600 is not observed, since the peripheral decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) actually provided at the periphery of the handle part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not obscured. As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the handle bag image TMGg (composite bag image HMGg) is decorated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated bag image IGg” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated. The portion 5012 emits light in the third mode (in FIG. 245 (c), for example, emits light with the same color (for example, “red”) as the pattern cocoon image TMGg in the “integrated cocoon image IGg”). Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not an operation target also emits light in the seventh mode (for example, “red” in FIG. 245 (c), for example, the same color as the button 摸 image BMGg in the “integrated 摸 image IGg”). )). Although the same color is used here, the third mode and the seventh mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated bag image IGh” shown in FIG. 245 (d) is basically the same as the “integrated bag image IGe” described above, and the handle bag image TMGh and the button bag image BMGh (composite bag image IMG). The image HMGh) and an edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the image HMGh) are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated bag image IGh”, there is no shape change in the pattern bag image TMGh and the button bag image BMGh (composite bag image HMGh). However, with respect to the peripheral decoration image SSG, compared with the above-mentioned “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe”, the amount and type of treasure are increased, and the treasure box (the shape) for storing them is also different from “third”. It is displayed as “special edge decoration image SSGh”.

  In addition, in the “integrated bag image IGh” according to this example, the shape of the “necklace (partition image KG)” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes with the increase in the amount and type of treasure. Accordingly, the display mode of the gauge image GG is made different.

However, the “third special peripheral decorative image SSGh” is the same as the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGe” in the following points.
“A virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600 is not observed, since the peripheral decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) actually provided on the periphery of the handle part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not obscured. As a decoration, the peripheral edge of the handle bag image TMGh (composite bag image HMGh) is decorated.

  That is, in the “integrated bag image IGh (FIG. 245 (d))”, a part (the treasure) in the “first special peripheral decorative image SSGg” used in the “integrated bag image IGf (FIG. 245 (b))”. ) And a part (treasure chest) in the “second special peripheral decorative image SSGg” used in the “integrated bag image IGg (FIG. 245 (c))”. Yes.

  On the other hand, since the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the “integrated bag image IGe (FIG. 245 (a))” appears and “integrated” It can be suggested that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period) for the same post-operation effect when the “haze image IGh (FIG. 245 (d))” appears.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 245 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated bag image IGh” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated. The portion 5012 emits light in the fourth mode (for example, emits light in the same color as the handle pattern image TMGh in the “integrated bag image IGh” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 245 (d)). . Further, the pattern button 5014 that is not an operation target also emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button 摸 image BMGh in the “integrated 摸 image IGh” (in FIG. 245 (d), for example, “rainbow color”). )). Although the same color is used here, the fourth and eighth aspects may be different colors.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the pattern cocoon image TMG and the button cocoon image BMG (composite cocoon image HMG) are displayed in the same shape regardless of the mode. However, as the amount and type of treasure changes (FIGS. 245 (b) and (d)), or as the treasure box changes (FIGS. 245 (c) and (d)), the pattern image The shapes of TMG and button bag image BMG (composite bag image HMG) may be made different.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the pattern cocoon image TMG and the button cocoon image BMG (composite cocoon image HMG) are displayed in different colors in each aspect. May be displayed.

  When the button bag image BMG with the handle button 5014 displayed is displayed, in the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the edge decoration image SSGa, b is integrated with the button bag image BMG and displayed. I tried to do it. In this regard, also in the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d), the button bag image BMG with the handle button 5014 displayed is displayed, but the edge decoration image SSGa, b is not displayed. . In other words, the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. This is because the example shown in FIGS. It is possible to display images as completely different images from the examples shown in a) to (d), thereby providing a variety of effects.

  In addition, about the part which has the same function as the example shown to FIG.232 (a)-(d) among the structures concerning the example shown to FIG.245 (a)-(d), FIG.232 (a)-( It goes without saying that the same effects as the various effects described above with reference to d) are achieved. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d), the above-described modifications and production examples with respect to the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d) can be appropriately adopted.

  Also, in the effective period in which the integrated haze image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245, the effective period in which the integrated haze image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. The “specific image TG” is displayed.

  However, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated bag image IG is displayed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 232, the type of the effective period (the type as the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, or the indication effect) Depending on the type, the “specific image TG” may be displayed and the “specific image TG” may not be displayed. In the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the IG is displayed, the “specific image TG” is displayed regardless of the type of the effective period (the type as the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, the type of the indication effect, etc.). It is always displayed.

  That is, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated bag image IG is displayed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 245, the “state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” illustrated in FIGS. The effective period to be generated as a production is not included. Therefore, it is desirable to display the “specific image TG” in order to clarify how much remaining time is left. When the “specific image TG” is displayed, the gauge image GG is not necessarily displayed.

  The “specific image TG” when the integrated bag image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245 may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 or in the mode shown in FIG. You may make it do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 245, an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, thereby moving from the specific position to the original position. Operation (sword operation) is allowed. However, in the case where an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the handle portion 5012 is not necessarily moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is at the original position, thereby allowing a movement operation (extracting operation) from the original position to a specific position.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect (operation reception effect) when the integrated bag image IG is displayed in the manner illustrated in FIG. 245.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows an effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is variable. In the effect situation performed at, the effect display apparatus 1600 shows the effect situation in which the display related to the sign effect (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238. When the production pattern is the same, the valid period (operation acceptance production) shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the valid period shown in FIG. 246 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the production pattern, respectively. Alternatively, only one of the valid periods (operation reception effects) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination.

  The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed before and after the generation timing of the valid period in which the operation reception is permitted. At this time, the operation reception ( (Reception reception) is not allowed and no valid period has occurred.

  In this regard, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by displaying the integrated bag image IG itself (dynamic display by a treasure chest cover). At the time shown in FIG. 236 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decorative image SSG of the integrated cocoon image IG is displayed as a “closed mode”. Some treasures including are not displayed as an image (by the specific display TH3 which is the lid portion of the treasure box), and are in a state of being invisible (or in a state of being difficult to see).

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decorative image SSG of the integrated bag image IG has a relatively low expectation shown in FIGS. 245 (a) and 245 (b). , And a presentation with respect to which of the relatively high expectations shown in FIGS. 245 (c) and 245 (d) is provided. The case where it displays in the low aspect (FIG. 245 (a), (b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). In addition, the explanation of the case where the treasure box is displayed in a mode with high expectation will be omitted, but the progress of the subsequent production in the same manner as the “case where the treasure box is displayed in a mode with low expectation” described below. Will be performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows the time when the indication effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) progresses (the treasure box lid portion (specific display TH3) is opened and the region displayed overlapping “treasure” is time). In the case of “Treasure”, the portion that does not overlap the treasure box lid (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility. Is shown.

  That is, when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) progresses, a specific timing comes and a valid period for the handle 5012 occurs. When the effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the handle 5012 as the operation target starts to move to the “specific position” by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the “pattern portion 5012” that is the operation target and the “pattern button 5014” that is not the operation target start to emit light in a predetermined manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

  However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), in the integrated bag image IG, the treasure box lid portion (specific display TH3) is opened from “closed mode (fully closed)” to “opened mode”. (Fully open) "is in a state of depicting the state of changing. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 246 (b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is “a precursor effect (specific display TH3) drawn (represented) to be on the front side thereof”. ”Cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to visually recognize), but the reduction of the display area of“ gauge image (predetermined image) GG ”has already started (progressed), and the displacement of“ specific image TG ”has already started (progressed). ) Is in the situation. In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps the sign effect (specific display TH), and is not displayed as an image.

  According to such a configuration, the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed in a manner straddling the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the effective period is generated is In addition, at least a part of the integrated haze image IG cannot be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize by the precursor effect (specific display TH3). In other words, in this case, the entire image of the integrated bag image IG (pattern bag image TMG and button bag image BMG (composite bag image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the effective period. Since it will come to go, the expectation (the aspect of the peripheral decorative image) and the interestingness about which the operation target (the aspect of the handle pattern image) is suggested by the aspect of the integrated heel image IG, It becomes possible to maintain it for a predetermined time after the effective period starts.

  That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (b), the “treasure” that is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a small amount and type (a mode with a relatively low expectation shown in FIG. 245 (a)). There are at least cases where the amount and type are displayed (an aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation shown in FIG. 245 (b)). It provides a presentation as to whether it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), it is possible to recognize that “treasure”, which is the contents of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode with a large amount and type (a mode with high expectation). ing. In the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), since the “specific image TG” is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize, the type (“specific image TG”) is originally displayed when the effective period starts ( It is difficult to distinguish whether it is a type (see FIG. 233) that does not display the “specific image TG” when the effective period starts (see FIG. 234) or that gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 233). Yes. In other words, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, the type shown in FIG. When it is adopted, it can be said that it is particularly effective to execute the precursor effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. Note that the description of “Treasure” displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation will be omitted, but this is the same as the case where “Treasure” is displayed in a mode with a high level of expectation described below. Subsequent production progress will be made.

  FIG. 246 (c) overlaps with the integrated bag image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of further advancement of the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (b). This shows a situation where the portion (portion depicted so that the specific display TH3 is in front of “treasure”) has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated haze image IG is displayed, which is a time point before the effective period starts. It is possible to provide a single stage of performance from the time until the end of the game, and to improve the game entertainment.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the entire treasure of the integrated bag image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state of good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Is already reduced, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has already appeared). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to make it appear as if the display area has not been reduced so much. Thereby, when the sign effect (the effect that brings the lid portion that is the specific display TH into the open state) is finished, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced is suppressed. It can be expected. The “specific image TG” according to this example is displayed as an image representing “light” displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), the handle pattern image TMG in the integrated pattern image IG is dynamically displayed (display depicting the pattern part 5012 being displaced within the movable range). However, as described above, the button bag image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display depicting how the pattern button 5014 is displaced within the movable range).

  FIG. 246 (d) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period (set time) ends (or An example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 immediately before the effective period ends) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 246 (d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely allowed in terms of time, but the operation reception has already been performed in the state where the screen appears. It may be allowed to become unacceptable. However, in this case, the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 are already in a state in which each light emission has already ended. In this case, images such as “push in!” And “lower left arrow” may be hidden. In any case, at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the valid period ends.

  When the effective period ends, the light emission of the handle portion 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are both ended. In this regard, in the effective period in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed even if no operation is performed by the player within the period. Is performed (see FIG. 246 (e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (FIGS. 235 (e), (f), etc.) functioning within the first effective period described above.

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which an operation by the player is performed immediately after the validity period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the post-operation display Since the “specific image TG” is displayed immediately before the sound output after the operation is performed, the post-operation display and the operation are performed in response to the operation received by the player in time. It becomes possible to appear as if the aftertone output has started. In particular, when the sign effect (previous display) is performed in such a manner, the gauge image (predetermined when the entire image of the integrated bag image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is viewed well. Image) The display area of GG has already decreased, and the displacement of “specific image TG” has already started. In other words, in this case, it is considered that there is a high possibility that a situation where the player's operation is not in time will occur, so even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the “specific image TG” is displayed after the operation is displayed. It can be said that outputting the sound after the operation or the operation is effective in suppressing the decrease in the entertainment interest. Further, in this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side where the operation opportunity is not given is put into a light emitting state in accordance with the occurrence of the effective period, and the operation opportunity is given to either the pattern portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014. I try to make it difficult to recognize. That is, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation within the effective period will not be in time, so it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment when the operation is not in time.

  In addition, with respect to the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 246, the case where “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and the case where “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. It may be applied to any of the above.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 246, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated habit image IG are displayed in different layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, so that it appears in FIG. It was decided to realize the production progress in the aspect. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, it may be possible to store the effect progress in the form appearing in FIG. 246 as one moving image data and reproduce the moving image data.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, the mode (integrated haze image IGa) shown in FIG. 245 (b) appears as the integrated haze image IG. However, as described above, the integrated hail image IG may be caused to appear in any of a plurality of modes (the modes illustrated in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). .

  According to the example shown in FIG. 246, first, when a treasure box that is a part of the integrated bag image IG is displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period, the treasure box is displayed as “a mode with high expectation” and “ The first performance is provided as to whether the display is “a mode with low expectation”. In addition, after the validity period has occurred, the treasure box of the integrated bag image IG is gradually opened and the “treasure” is either “highly expected” or “lowly expected”. The second performance is provided as to whether or not it is displayed. That is, in this case, the expected period is suggested by the staged effects (first effect and second effect) performed in a manner that spans the generation of the effective period, so that the effective period occurs. It will be expected that the game entertainment in the period from before to after occurrence will be suitably improved.

  In addition, since such a staged effect is realized by the depiction of the integrated bag image IG itself (the depiction on the lid portion of the treasure chest), another image (the specific display TH shown in FIG. 235). Etc.), it is less likely to feel stress than in the case where the visibility of the integrated bag image IG is taken away, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. However, also in the example shown in FIG. 246, the precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 237, the precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG.

  In FIG. 246, when the first effect condition is satisfied, integration is performed in which the heel image that is the target of the operation is integrated with the “rim decoration image (first decoration image)” including the display target area of the gauge image. In the case of displaying as a bag image, an example (first operation reception allowable period) related to the progress of the presentation has been described. On the other hand, in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248, when the second effect condition is satisfied, a habit image deceiving an operation target is displayed as “a peripheral decorative image including a display target area of a gauge image (first decorative image). An example (second operation acceptance allowable period) relating to the progress of the presentation will be described with respect to the case of displaying as “image not integrated with”. The example shown in FIG. 246 and the example shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 do not necessarily give an operation opportunity to the same operation object, but give an operation opportunity to the same operation object. If there is, it is desirable to display the same image (including a similar shape) as the same image as the operation target.

  Here, as a mode in which a habit image that tricks the operation target is displayed as “an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image”, for example, A mode that is displayed as a single image that is not integrated with a decoration image in the first place, or a cocoon image that looks like an operation target is displayed as an image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image It is possible to adopt a mode to be used. According to such a configuration, when a valid period occurs, when a gutter image that looks at the operation target is displayed as a single image, a gauge image is displayed in the image, and when a glance image is manipulated When the heel image is displayed as one image, the gauge image may not be displayed in the image, so that the tension during the effective period can be suitably maintained.

  In the example described below, a display example is shown for a case where a wrinkle image on which an operation target is displayed is displayed as “an image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include a display target area of a gauge image”.

  First, in FIG. 247 (a), in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the decoration display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is an effect display with a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation performed by the device 1600, the production situation in which the display related to the precursor production (specific display TH3) is started in the production display device 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and FIG. 246. If they are the same production pattern, they may be generated respectively at the first timing and the second timing in one production pattern, and any of the valid periods (operation reception production) based on the result of production determination Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern.

  In this example, the situation shown in FIGS. 247 (a) and (b) is basically the same as the situation shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and (b), and the description of the same configuration is omitted. However, “Treasure (second decoration image)” that is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 247 (b) is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 246 (b). The contents are different from the “treasure (first decorative image)”. In other words, as described above, the “摸 image with the operation target deceived” according to this example is displayed as “an image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image”. With respect to the “rim decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image”, there are a part displayed as a different image from a part displayed as the same image as the “rim decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image” described above. There is something.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), “Treasure (second decorative image)” of the peripheral decorative image SSG according to this example includes “Holy Grail” in FIG. 246. This is the same as the “treasure (first decorative image)” shown. However, in the “treasure” of the peripheral decorative image SSG according to this example, the “gold bar” and the “necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)” shown in FIG. 246 are not displayed. An image filled with gold coins is displayed. The treasure chest shown in FIG. 247 (c) is the same as the treasure chest shown in FIG. 246 (c), and the treasure chest is displayed in any of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 245.

  According to such a configuration, even if the portion (FIG. 247 (c)) in which the specific display TH3 is depicted to be ahead of the “treasure (periphery decorative image SSG)” disappears (FIG. 247 (c)) The gauge image GG is no longer displayed in the “treasure (rim decoration image SSG)”. That is, in this case, as the “treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)” is gradually becoming better visually recognized by the specific display TH3, it is impossible to find the gauge image GG even if trying to find it. It is possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension as to whether or not only time is left.

  In particular, in the peripheral decorative image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The same image as the case (FIG. 245 (c)) (such as the Holy Grail) is intentionally displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to make the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG appear to be displayed somewhere, and thereby the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. At the time of recognizing that this is not displayed anywhere, it seems that a certain amount of time has already passed since the validity period has occurred, so there is tension during the validity period. It can be suitably maintained.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (b) to (d), a gill image is added to the integrated heel image IG itself in which the handle heel image TMG on which the operation target is glazed is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. The display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated bag image IG. That is, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, and it is difficult to recognize how much time remains in the effective period, so that the tension during the effective period can be suitably maintained. Note that the display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image different from the integrated bag image IG, and the display area is reduced with time. You may do it.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the effective period has elapsed and the effective period is about to end. As described above, in this example, the gauge image is not displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), there is no suggestion that the validity period is about to end, and the player side will not be in that situation even if the image is viewed. I can't recognize it.

  However, even in the effective period according to this example, in the handle TMG image TMG that is an operation target, a display depicting the pattern portion 5012 reciprocating within its movable range (reciprocating from the original position to a specific position). (Dynamic display) is performed. In this respect, since the effective period according to this example is to be terminated when the reciprocation is repeated N times (N may not be an integer) after the occurrence of the period, If the dynamic display by the handle image TMG is continuously watched, it is possible to recognize how much remaining time (how many reciprocating motions) remains as the effective period.

  Even during the effective period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (c) and 247 (d), in the button bag image BMG, a display (moving state) depicting the pattern button 5014 reciprocating within its movable range. Display) is not performed. In this regard, when the operation receiving section (here, the pattern button 5014) corresponding to the heel image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated during the effective period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed. However, post-operation display or post-operation sound output may be performed according to the operation reception.

  In other words, in the effective period according to this example, the player is in a hurry to operate because the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, and as a result, the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side not dynamically displayed is operated, unlike the case shown in FIG. 246, the display and operation after the operation are performed. It is desirable to output the after-sound in order to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. Examples of the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output in this case include a display and sound output such as “Push the pattern part instead of the pattern button!”. Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side not dynamically displayed is operated and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed accordingly, the valid period is ended or the set time is exceeded. It is desirable not to be reset and to continue the pattern display image TMG without stopping the dynamic display. When the handle 5012 is operated within the effective period thus continued, post-operation display and post-operation sound output corresponding to this are performed (see FIG. 248 (h)). The post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the non-dynamic display side operation receiving section is operated (for example, “ Needless to say, the content is different from the content such as “Push in!”. However, “within the effective period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the button bag image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, and the pattern card image TMG that is displayed dynamically is displayed. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, “Congratulations!”, Etc.) when the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) is operated, and “button 摸 image not dynamically displayed within the valid period After the operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014) corresponding to BMG is operated, the post-operation display when the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern collar image TMG is further operated It is desirable for the post-operation sound output (for example, “Congratulations!

  FIG. 248 (e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when no operation is accepted within the time (set time) set for the effective period according to this example.

  That is, in the effective period according to this example, when the set time elapses without accepting the operation (FIGS. 247 (d) and (e)), the operation is accepted to the handle 5012 within the valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when they were made are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions).

  However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed in the integrated bag image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as a separate image. Although there was an intention to operate, there is a possibility that the operation may not be performed and the effective period may end, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced. Therefore, in this example, after the validity period ends without any operation by the player, the specific condition (for example, symbol stop or not 10 seconds before the symbol stop) is not satisfied. The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (in this case, the handle portion 5012) to which the operation opportunity is given within the valid period, and when an operation on the operation means is accepted, Based on the above, the valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the effective period ends without any operation by the player, a special effective period for regenerating the effective period is generated from the end of the effective period.

  According to such a configuration, even when the valid period ends as a result of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player is shown in FIG. 248 (h). It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 248 (e), when an operation is performed on the handle 5012 by the player, the effective period starts from the reception of the operation. (5 (f), (g) in FIG. 248). Thereafter, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 248 (e) and (g). Accordingly, even when an operation is accepted within the valid period thus regenerated, post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed in the above-described manner (see FIG. 248 (h)). reference).

  When an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 248 (e) (special effective period), the images shown in FIGS. 248 (f) and (g) (FIGS. 247 (b) and (g) are displayed as post-operation displays. The same image as shown in c)) appears sequentially. Such an image is a post-operation display that is executed based on an operation received in the effective period (FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 247 (f), (g), etc.). Are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 248 (e) is also the effective period (FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIG. 248 (f), (g), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation.

  In the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, since the specific image TG is not displayed, the sign effect (dynamic display by the specific display TH3) is not necessarily performed in generating the effective period. Also good. For example, when a predetermined condition for accepting an operation regarding a predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing comes), the situation shown in FIG. 247 (c) appears. Thereafter, the display may be advanced in the same manner as in the above-described example.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the pattern bag image TMG and the button bag image BMG are displayed as one image (composite bag image HMG). You may make it display. In the example shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the “button bag image BMG” and the “pattern bag image TMG” are displayed as one image (composite bag image HMG) including both of these bag images, The “composite haze image HMG” is displayed as an “integrated haze image IG” integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. However, the “button bag image BMG” and the “pattern bag image TMG” are displayed as separate images, respectively, and at least one of the bag images is integrated with a peripheral decorative image that decorates the peripheral edge. It may be displayed as an image. For example, if the “pattern bag image TMG” is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the “button bag image BMG” is displayed as a separate image, the “pattern bag image TMG” is displayed. Although both “TMG” and “button 摸 image BMG” are displayed simultaneously, “pattern「 image TMG ”can be made more conspicuous, and operations corresponding to“ pattern 摸 image TMG ” It becomes possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) should be operated. At this time, the “pattern bag image TMG” in the integrated bag image IG is dynamically displayed, whereas the “button bag image BMG” displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. The configuration and other examples can be similarly applied.

  In addition, in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246, both the button bag image BMG and the pattern bag image TMG are displayed. Only the heel image TMG) may be displayed.

  Further, it is desirable that the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 is generated with a set time longer than the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. In this case, the manner in which the heel image (here, the heel image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246, and the speed of reciprocation are shown in FIGS. 247 and 248. It is desirable that the manner (such as the speed of reciprocation) in which the heel image (here, the heel image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the effective period (operation reception effect) shown is the same. According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to make a sufficient check by confirming “the state of the dynamic display of the bag image” with reference to the case where the gauge image GG is displayed. You will be prompted to operate.

  In the example illustrated in FIGS. 246 to 248, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be a “treasure” image, and the treasure chest may not necessarily be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving unit corresponding to the wrinkle image that is not dynamically displayed is the “first operation receiving unit”, in the example shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. The operation receiving unit corresponding to the image may be the “first operation receiving unit”. In this case, however, in the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving portion that is dynamically displayed is the “second operation receiving portion”, the habit image that is not dynamically displayed in the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 It is desirable that the operation receiving unit corresponding to the above is a “third operation receiving unit” different from the “second operation receiving unit”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate two types of operation reception effects that are configured such that the display relationship relating to the three operation objects (operation receiving units) slides. , It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  The effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not necessarily occur during the symbol variation execution period. For example, it may be a period generated using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol variation, or may be a period in which symbol variation is not executed, such as during a big hit game execution period or before a big hit game is started. May occur.

  Further, in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed so far is not displayed as in the effective period in the examples shown in FIGS. 240 to 243. Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it easier to notice that the gauge image is not displayed.

  A plurality of effective periods with different generation conditions may be prepared as effective periods for displaying the image shown in FIG. 246 (c). In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 246 may not be made in all of the effective periods, and the display progress shown in FIG. 246 may be made in at least one effective period.

  A plurality of effective periods with different generation conditions may be prepared as the effective periods for displaying the image shown in FIG. 247 (c). In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not have to be made in all of the effective periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 may be made in at least one effective period.

  In the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248, unlike the effective period shown in FIG. It may be possible to display only in the mode.

  The effective period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is not displayed can be generated only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014, and an operation opportunity is provided to the other. When given, the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is displayed may be generated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effective period (the effective period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241) in which the integrated bag image in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, or the gauge image is displayed. An effective period (an effective period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) for displaying an integrated bag image in which a display target area of GG is not originally provided can be generated as one of a plurality of types of effective periods. Yes. In this regard, in these effective periods (FIGS. 239 to 241, FIG. 247, and FIG. 248), when an operation by the player is not accepted, or when the operation is accepted, in order to properly maintain a sense of tension. In the effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238, 246) in which the display after the operation is not performed (no automatic button function) and the gauge image GG is reduced as time elapses (FIGS. 235 to 238, 246), In order to maintain it appropriately, it is desirable that when the operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted (with an automatic button function) is performed.

  In this regard, an integrated period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not provided, or an effective period in which an integrated cocoon image is displayed (effective period shown in FIGS. When an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an operation opportunity has been given in the effective period (the effective period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) during which the 摸 image is displayed, a change corresponding to the operation reception (display It is desirable that the integrated haze image be displayed instead of being hidden when execution of at least one of changes and at least one change caused by post-operation effects such as lamp emission is started. It is also desirable to continue the dynamic display of the integrated haze image. As a result, while the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is possible to feel anxiety about whether or not the production has been properly accepted, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained more appropriately. Become so.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color or color) before and after the occurrence of a change (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is generated. (Transmissivity, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image with other images, and the operation means that was the operation target is the operation reception. It is only necessary to be able to recognize even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or lamp light emission) has occurred. On the other hand, within the effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238, 246) in which the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced as time elapses, a change (display change or If at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as lamp emission occurs, the integrated 摸 image (both 摸 image and gauge image) in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) has occurred ) May be hidden, and as in the case described above, a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) according to the operation reception is performed in a state in which the integrated bag image is not hidden and is displayed. It may be generated.

  However, in this way, even during the effective period of “no display in which the display area of the specific image is reduced with the passage of time” is performed, the 摸 image showing the operation means to be operated is displayed. The image is desirably displayed as a moving image that is developed at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the heel image has advanced. It is possible, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

[Integrated 摸 image, pre-validation effect, 摸 image disappearance effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Among them, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination or the like) regarding which expected effect (notice effect or the like) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control for displaying the effect content according to the result of the effect determination on the effect display device 1600 is performed, thereby determining the big hit determination. The variation effect by the decorative design according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (actual effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when the bonus display is stopped and displayed, the bonus game as a bonus is executed for the player. Become possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, the background depiction, the movable body operation, etc. The expected effect relating to is provided as an effect having “a degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a function that suggests a ratio (including 0% and 100%)”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the identification of the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops to SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination. No matter which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the design effect based on the specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance It is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that is acceptable.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) that are not formed even in the reach state as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even if a special result is obtained in the effect determination (eg, notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the acceptance of the effect is permitted when the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. The permitted acceptance state (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the effect determination, even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) does not occur. . In addition, the acceptance allowable state (effective period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptable acceptance state (effective period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of the above-mentioned “specific variation pattern”, the variation pattern that generates an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for an effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since the post-operation effect that generates the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, The performance of the permissible state (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced until the post-operation effect is executed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when an acceptance allowable state (valid period) to which an operation opportunity is given occurs, an operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is set. By displaying the habit image as an integrated habit image (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with a fringe decoration image that decorates the fringe of the habit image, it is possible for the game to be enjoyed until the post-operation effect is executed. The reduction is suppressed. For such an integrated habit image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. In addition, the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and 207 to 231) are also realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated haze image with any of the integrated haze images described below. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the “integrated bag image” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248 or as another example or a modification thereof. A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as “integrated haze images”, and the same is true for the display in any of these modes.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance permission state occurs, the acceptance permission sound that indicates that the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted is generated. It is made to output, and this makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, “acceptable sound” means that when a sound starts to be output, an acceptable state of acceptance (valid period) always occurs while this sound is output (while sound data is assigned). The sound that is in a state in which the acceptance allowable state (valid period) has already occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of reception permission states including a first reception permission state and a second reception permission state are prepared as the reception permission state (valid period). Yes. Here, the first acceptance allowable state can be generated when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), but the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Of these, a valid period that cannot occur with a predetermined fluctuation pattern (or any of the low expected fluctuation patterns) (based on the fact that the first condition is established in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination) Generated validity period). In addition, the second acceptance allowable state is selected when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). The effective period that can be generated in any case (or at least one of those fluctuation patterns) (the second condition different from the first condition in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination is (Effective period generated on the basis of establishment).

  The “integrated haze image” according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state. Here, it is assumed that the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state both occur as reception permission states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410). The “integrated bag image” displayed in the first reception permission state or the second reception permission state is an image in which the same operation means (operation button 410) is tricked.

  However, a special aspect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the aspect shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated bag image” is the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state. Of these, display is possible only in the first reception-permitted state, and in the second reception-permitted state, display is possible only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). ing. In the first acceptance-permitted state, the determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) is to display the “integrated bag image” based on the result of the jackpot determination. The “integrated haze image” is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of this determination. Even in the second acceptance-permitted state, whether to display the “integrated bag image” in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) that do not include a special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination The determination may be performed, and the “integrated bag image” may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the determination.

  In such a configuration, in the first reception permission state, two types of reception permission sounds (first permission sound and second permission sound) are output. In the second reception permission state, One type of allowable reception sound (third allowable reception sound) is output. Here, the first permissible sound and the third permissible reception sound are output as sound effects such as “Pikkin!”, For example, and may be output as the same sound or different from each other. It may be output as sound. On the other hand, the second allowable sound is output as a message sound such as “Press!”, For example. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound. If the second permissible sound is different from the first permissible sound and is output over different output times, two types of permissible reception are possible. The player can preferably recognize that the sound (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is being output.

  Here, as described above, in the first acceptance-permitted state, the “integrated bag image” can be displayed even in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with relatively low expectation). Even in such a case, two types of permissible reception sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are output. In other words, in this case, when an acceptance permission state occurs (displays an integrated bag image), if only one type of reception permission sound is output, a special mode is not displayed as an “integrated bag image”. Different modes will be displayed, but when two types of acceptable reception sounds are output, a special mode is displayed as an “integrated bag image”, and a mode different from the special mode is displayed And come to be.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the “integrated bag image” is displayed in a special mode based on which mode the allowable sound is output in, and It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the state occurs.

  In addition, when the “integrated bag image” is displayed in the first reception permission state or the second reception permission state, the previous effect (prediction effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated image is displayed. In such a state where the previous effect is being executed, the image is displayed (displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize) at least partially overlapping the “image related to the previous effect”. Then, in the integrated haze image, the “image related to the previous effect” is gradually reduced by gradually reducing the “image related to the previous effect”, or the transmittance of the “image related to the previous effect” is gradually reduced. Since the height is increased and finally hidden, the mode (the whole) is dewed (displayed in a state where it is easy to visually recognize) with a delay from the occurrence of the acceptance-permitted state. Such a pre-production (prediction production) is, for example, the production shown in FIGS. 235 (b) and (c), FIGS. 237 (c) to (f), and the like, and is executed in the same manner. You may make it do.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start output at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts to output in a delayed manner. ing. However, at the time when the first permissible sound starts to be output in advance, the “integrated bag image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize the mode”. Of course, at the time when the second allowable sound is delayed and started to be output, at least a part of the integrated bag image is in a state where the image related to the previous effect (prediction effect) is displayed in the form of overlapping from the front side, This makes it difficult to view. Note that the reception-permitted state (valid period) is generated when the previous production (prediction production) is started or during the execution period, and at least when the output of the second allowable sound is started. It has already occurred, or occurs when the output starts.

  According to such a configuration, at least “the first permissible sound is output and the second permissible sound is not output”, there are two types of permissible reception sounds (the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound). The first admission permission state in which the second admissible sound is output occurs (or is occurring), or the second admission permission state in which only one type of admission permission sound (first admission sound) is output occurs ( It is difficult to recognize whether it has occurred. However, when a situation such as “the second allowable sound starts to be output after the first allowable sound is output” appears, two types of acceptable reception sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance-permitted state that has been generated has occurred, and that the integrated bag image may be displayed in a special manner.

In other words, in this case, in a state where it is difficult to recognize in which form the integrated haze image is displayed (or is displayed)
When shifting from “a state where only the first permissible sound is output out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound” to “a state where at least the second permissible sound is output” (first acceptance permissible state) When,
When the state does not shift from “a state where only the first permissible sound is output among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound” to “a state where at least the second permissible sound is output” (second acceptance permissible state) Thus, it is possible to suggest the “possibility that the integrated bag image is displayed in a special mode” by the mode of “transition concerning the output of the acceptable sound for acceptance”. Therefore, while in the “state where only the first permissible sound is output among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound”, before the image related to the previous effect (prediction effect) is hidden, It becomes possible to be interested in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound is started, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. As a result, if the second permissible sound is output while an image related to the previous effect (prediction effect) is displayed, an integrated image having a special aspect is displayed (displayed). It is possible to provide a performance such as that the integrated habit image is gradually exposed in such a sense of expectation.

  Note that, as described above, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a part of the integrated haze image is difficult to be visually recognized by the “image related to the previous effect”. Therefore, although it can be recognized that there is a possibility that the integrated haze image may be displayed in a special mode, it is in a situation where it cannot be easily recognized at least until the integrated haze image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, when the second allowable sound starts to be output, the first allowable sound may remain in the output state, or the first allowable sound may have ended the output state. .

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance permission state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance permission state) and the second condition (second acceptance permission state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated heel image is displayed without outputting any acceptable sound (first allowable sound or second allowable sound), and the operation means (here, the integrated heel image is displayed). When the operation is accepted for the operation button 410), a display change, a post-operation output sound, and the like may be generated as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptable state or the second acceptable state. Good. In this case, the content of the display change and the post-operation output sound may be different depending on the type of the reception permission state (first reception permission state, second reception permission state, third reception permission state).

  In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp when the operation reception has been allowed since it is possible to display the integrated bag image without outputting any acceptable sound for reception. It will be possible to improve the fun of gaming. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after the integrated haze image is displayed, the gauge image GG included in the integrated haze image is displayed in any of the modes shown in FIGS. 239 to 243. It is desirable to make it. According to such a configuration, a “gauge stop period” in which the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined value (0) and remains integrated. Since the images are hidden, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the acceptance-permitted state occurs, and to improve the game entertainment related to the operation more suitably It becomes possible to plan.

  Or, when displaying an integrated bag image without outputting any acceptable reception sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated bag image, and the display target area is not provided. Also good. Such a display method is different as described above with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248, although the operation target is different. For example, “the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the display of the gauge image GG is not displayed. The display area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image that is intentionally included in the same image (peripheral decoration image) as that when the target area is displayed, or as an image different from the integrated bag image. The technical idea such as “to do so” is equally applicable. Even with such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to more suitably improve the game entertainment related to the operation. become able to.

  Even in the reception-permitted state according to this example, when the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in an unsuppressed manner, the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) ) Is output in a suppressed manner, or there are cases in which operation acceptance is permitted while it is in a non-output state. The phrase “outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) in a suppressed manner” according to this example includes a case where a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output at a volume “0” (silent output). is there. “Non-output state” means, for example, a case where even channel allocation is not performed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception permission state in which the operation reception is permitted and the specific type of production while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed manner. There are a plurality of acceptable reception states in which operation reception is permitted while sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state. “Permitted state” and “third acceptable reception state” indicate that the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is not allowed to be accepted in the non-output state. It is included as one of the states, and the “second reception permission state” described above is an operation reception in a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) being output in a non-suppressed manner. Out of acceptable acceptance status It has become what is included as one.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound) is suppressed or not output, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the integrated habit image is displayed in a special mode. Because it is possible to do so, while avoiding the situation where the performance is poor, while the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or in a non-output state, it is possible to enjoy the performance with more concentration You can do it.

  The “acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppression manner or in a non-output state” is output in a non-suppression manner. A specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) may be generated after being output in a suppression mode, or after being set to a non-output state, and an acceptance allowable state may be generated. (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed manner, and an acceptance-permitted state is generated, and while the acceptance-permitted state is occurring (or at the same time) a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is suppressed in a suppressed manner. Or may be in a non-output state. The point is that any operation sound can be received while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state.

  Further, even in the acceptance-permitted state according to this example, when an operation is not detected within a set time in which the operation acceptance is permitted, the automatic acceptance mode that causes the same display change as that when the operation is detected is executed. In some cases, and in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, the reception permission state in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed among the reception permission states is as described above.
-It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set, regardless of whether there is an operation within the valid period.
-This means that a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the effective period, regardless of the production state (production setting state). In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare “special effect state (automatic reception mode)” or “plural effect states” as the effect state. Whether the automatic reception is enabled when the reception permission state in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed among the reception permission states occurs when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set. Any may be adopted (for example, “automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the production state”) or “when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set” The automatic reception may be enabled only in the case of "there is no relation to the configuration relating to the technical features described here."

  More specifically, in the demonstration screen (period in which the symbol variation is not executed), if settings relating to the game are possible, even if any of these settings is selected, “ In the acceptance acceptance state in which the “automatic acceptance mode” is executed, automatic acceptance is always enabled. Among these settings, when there is at least a specific setting condition, the acceptance condition in which the “automatic acceptance mode” is executed and the acceptance condition in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed are different from each other. It can be generated originally. The settings relating to the game include not only a special production state (automatic reception mode) but also settings such as volume, brightness, production appearance probability, etc. Settings related to the special production state (automatic reception mode) are not necessarily installed. It does not have to be a thing. When the setting related to the special production state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the “specific setting condition” is not set to the special production state (automatic reception mode).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, an acceptance permission state in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed and a “non-automatic reception mode” are executed at least when a specific setting condition is satisfied. There are a plurality of acceptable reception states, but the “first acceptable reception state” described above is included as one of the acceptable reception states in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed. The above-mentioned “second reception permission state” and “third reception permission state” are included as one of the reception permission states in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the first admission allowance that there is a possibility that the integrated bag image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment will be remarkably reduced when forgetting to operate). In the state, the “automatic reception mode” is executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate when the integrated heel image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the ratio of being stopped with a big hit symbol is higher than other modes) (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) can be generated, and the deterioration of the game entertainment is suppressed. Will be able to. On the other hand, there is no possibility that the integrated bag image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment will be remarkably lowered when the user forgets to operate) or the third reception permission state or the third Since the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed in the reception-permitted state, this is suitable for a sense of tension when the operation reception is permitted while suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation is forgotten. To be able to maintain.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptable reception sound is output overlaps with the acceptable reception state, and the operation is accepted when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state. Then, based on the reception of the operation, the output state of the acceptance allowable sound can be terminated halfway (can be made inaudible).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation accepted). Anxiety is restrained by “whether it is being accepted or not yet being accepted.”

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptable reception sound is output overlaps with the acceptable reception state, but the acceptable reception sound is in the output state. Even if an operation is accepted, there is a case where the output state of the acceptable sound of acceptance is not terminated in the middle based on the acceptance of the operation, and may be maintained without being made inaudible. I have to. As will be described later, there are a plurality of acceptable reception states in which the acceptable reception sound is terminated midway and acceptable reception states in which the acceptable reception sound is not terminated midway. Is included as one of the acceptable reception states in which the acceptable reception sound is terminated halfway, and the above-described “second acceptable reception state” is the acceptable state in which the acceptable reception sound is not terminated in the middle. It is included as one of these.

  According to such a configuration, the first admission allowance that there is a possibility that the integrated bag image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment will be remarkably reduced when forgetting to operate). In the state, if an operation is accepted when an acceptable reception sound is being output, this is terminated halfway. Therefore, when the integrated cocoon image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the ratio of being stopped with a big hit symbol is higher than the other modes), “Whether the operation has been accepted or the operation has been accepted. It is possible to concentrate on post-operation effects such as post-operation display, post-operation output sound, light emission change by lamp, and effect operation by movable decorative body. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state where there is no possibility that the integrated spear image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility that the game entertainment will be remarkably reduced when forgetting to operate) Even if the operation is accepted when the permissible sound is being output, this is not terminated in the middle. It can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or when operation acceptance is allowed in a non-output state, When the integrated haze image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), the integrated haze image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). There are times when

  More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the reception permission state in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state. In addition to the first acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied, at least a fourth acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied is included. When the coffin image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) and when the integrated coffin image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) However, in the fourth acceptance allowable state, the integrated bag image is not displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), and is different from the special mode (FIGS. 232 (a) to ( (See c)). In the first acceptable state, if the operation is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the acceptable sound output state is terminated halfway based on the accepted operation (non-audible). On the other hand, in the fourth reception permission state, if an operation is accepted when the reception permission sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permission sound is changed based on the reception of the operation. Do not end (do not make it inaudible).

  According to such a configuration, a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state occurs and the reception is performed. When the integrated haze image is displayed in a special mode in the allowable state, the reception allowable sound is ended halfway based on the operation reception. On the other hand, there is a reception permission state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or an operation reception is permitted in a non-output state, and the reception permission state is integrated. When the fossil image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there is a case where the acceptable sound is terminated halfway based on the operation reception and the acceptable sound is maintained without being terminated midway. It becomes like this.

  In other words, in this case, in a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state, the integrated haze image is a special mode. Is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which it is unlikely that the gaming interest will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to operate it) Since the tolerable sound may be maintained without being terminated halfway, it may be because the operation has not been accepted when the acceptable sound has not been terminated midway. Although it has been made, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the reason is that the fourth acceptance permission state has occurred, and the tension is suitably maintained while suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment interest. It is possible So as to.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first acceptance permission state occurs, a wide area using at least a half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) prior to this. When the second reception permission state occurs, the narrow-area pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started prior to this. It has come to be. Then, the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) that looks at the operation receiving unit is displayed both in the period in which the wide-area type front effect is being executed and in the period in which the first reception permission state is occurring. However, they are displayed in a different manner from each other in the period in which the wide-area type front effect is being executed and the period in which the first acceptance-permitted state is occurring.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the display is performed during the period in which the integrated heel image (ie, heel image) is displayed during the period in which the wide-area type front effect is being executed, and the first reception permission state is occurring. In the integrated cocoon image (contained image), although the same operation receiving unit (operation button 410) is displayed, it is displayed based on different image data, As a result, not only the color scheme but also the contour shape itself is displayed differently.

  According to such a configuration, when performing the wide-area type pre-production, the degree of freedom is increased without being caught by the form (image data) of the integrated cocoon image (） image) displayed in the first reception permitted state. Since it becomes possible to display an integrated 摸 image (摸 image) with high independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing a pre-production (wide-area type pre-production) in a wider range. It becomes like this. Obviously, such an effect cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on single image data.

  In addition, in the permissible reception state in which the wide-area type front effect is executed, the effect at the big hit that appears only when the big hit is obtained as the post-operation effect than in the permissible reception state in which the narrow-area type front effect is executed. The proportion of appearance is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of reception permission states are prepared as reception permission states corresponding to the wide area type front effects (where the wide area type front effect is executed). As one, a first acceptance permission state and a third acceptance permission state are prepared. In addition, a plurality of reception permission states are prepared as reception permission states corresponding to the narrow-area type front performance (where the narrow-area type front performance is executed), and the second reception permission state is provided as one of the reception permission states. A state and a fourth acceptance permissible state are prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception permission state, the operation is performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state. As described above, the second reception permission state is such that the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is in the non-suppressed mode. That's right. That is, when a narrow-area type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, an operation is accepted while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is in the non-suppression mode without being in the suppression mode. Since it can be made (2nd reception permission state), the fall of the game entertainment attraction by not having performed the wide area type | formula front production relatively excellent in performance can be suppressed now. On the other hand, when a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or can be accepted in a non-output state, a wide-area type that is relatively superior in performance Because the previous performance is performed (first reception permission state), the game due to the fact that the operation reception was not performed while the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) was output in a non-suppressed manner Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when there is at least a specific setting condition (one production state), the operation is not detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted in the first reception permission state. Is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second reception permission state, the operation is detected within a set time in which the operation reception is permitted. As described above, it is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception permission state in which the wide-area type pre-stage effect is performed, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered when the operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation is forgotten. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state where the narrow-area type pre-production is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that the operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the production is firmly Only those who have noticed that they will be able to accept operations will be able to entertain post-operation effects such as post-operation display and output sound after operation. Will be able to maintain.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppression mode, or in a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted in a non-output state. Includes at least the first acceptance permission state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. As described above. In this regard, in the fourth acceptance-permitted state, an operation can be accepted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the state, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while being in a non-output state. I have to. In addition, when the fourth acceptance permission state occurs, execution of a narrow-area type pre-production that uses only less than half of the predetermined display area is started prior to this. That is, when a narrow-area type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, even if a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is set to a suppression mode, the degree of suppression is reduced. (4th reception acceptance | permission state), The fall of the game entertainment attraction by not having performed the wide area type front production which is relatively excellent in performance can be suppressed. On the other hand, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while the non-output state is set. In the case (first reception allowance state), since the wide-area type front effect that is relatively superior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is not low. A decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player accepts an operation when the first acceptance permission state occurs and the spear image (integrated spear image) is displayed, the operation is accepted. The corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) starts to be executed, and the 摸 image (integrated 摸When the image is not displayed, a wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance effect) using at least half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed. When the player accepts an operation while the second acceptance permission state occurs and the spear image (integrated spear image) is displayed, the operation is performed after the operation is accepted. Output (at least one of display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and effect operation by the movable decorative body) starts to be executed, and the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) is not displayed. A narrow area-type extinction effect (narrow area-type extinction effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) when displayed is executed.

  Here, annihilation effect (wide-area annihilation effect, narrow-area annihilation effect) is a form that makes it difficult or impossible to see part or all of the 摸 image in the display state (integrated 表示 image) These are “an image different from the cocoon image” and “display effect on the cocoon image”. As such an annihilation effect (an annihilation effect), for example, it may be executed as an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed. , The 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) and the image (annihilation effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and a part or the whole of the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) in the moving image It is possible to express a situation where it becomes difficult to visually recognize by an effect), or a 摸 image (integrated 表示 image) that is executed by changing its own display mode (display effect) It may be. However, in order to suggest the degree of expectation or to improve the game entertainment as such an annihilation effect, when hiding the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image), Needless to say, it is more desirable to display the image as a separate image.

  In addition, “When the haze image (integrated haze image) is hidden ... The annihilation effect is executed” means that “the haze image (integrated haze image) is hidden.・ ・ Annihilation effect is executed ”, or“ The 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) is disappearing (摸 image (integrated 摸 image) itself has high transmittance. ” It may be “an annihilation effect is executed” or “an annihilation effect is executed after hiding the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image)”. , And any of these aspects. In addition, in the process of hiding the haze image (integrated haze image), the fact that the transmissivity of the haze image itself becomes higher is “when hiding the haze image (integrated haze image) ... Disappearance effect is executed ”.

  According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance by the player is started and the haze image is hidden, the wide-area disappearance effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. In some cases, the narrow-area annihilation effect is executed, so that it is possible to improve the rendering performance until the habit image (integrated habit image) disappears.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such an annihilation effect (image at the time of annihilation) is executed, the narrow area-type annihilation effect (narrow image at the time of annihilation) The background image that was displayed prior to the display of the image at the time of annihilation of the area type) is displayed until the narrow area-type annihilation effect (image at the time of the annihilation of the narrow area type) is hidden or after the operation. While the (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed, it is displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) was displayed before the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) was displayed based on the operation acceptance by the player. The background image is different until the wide area type disappearance effect (image when the wide area type disappears) is hidden, or while the post-operation effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is executed. It is supposed to change to an image.

  That is, when the wide area type annihilation effect (wide area type annihilation image) is executed, not only the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) but also at least a part of the background image includes the wide area type annihilation effect (when the wide area type annihilation image is displayed). The background image is changed (replaced) to a different background image at the timing when such a wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) is executed. Thus, it is possible to realize smooth production transition (transition to a new production phase) using button production. For example, the wide area type disappearance effect (the wide area type disappearance image) is an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the habit image (integrated habit image) is displayed and the layer on which the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and one of the 摸 images (integrated 摸 image) is included in the moving image. A part or the whole or a part or the whole of the background image may be expressed by the image (disappearing effect).

  On the other hand, when the narrow area type disappearance effect (image when the narrow area type disappears) is executed, the narrow area type disappearance effect (image when the narrow area type disappears) is hidden or after the operation. Since the background image is not changed while the effect (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed, the effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, as a player, in addition to the post-operation effect, the player is interested in whether a wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) or a narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type disappearance image) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment related to the cocoon image from when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed until it is hidden.

  In addition, when the wide area type disappearance effect (image when the wide area type disappears) is displayed, the big hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than when the narrow area type disappearance effect (the image when the narrow area type disappears) is displayed. The ratio of appearances at the time of a big hit that appears only when the player is playing is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of reception permission states are prepared as reception permission states corresponding to the wide area type disappearance effect (wide area type disappearance image) (where the wide area type disappearance effect is executed). As one of these acceptable reception states, a first acceptable reception state and a third acceptable reception state are prepared. In addition, a plurality of acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to the narrow region disappearance effects (images when the narrow region disappears) (the narrow region extinction effect is executed). As one of these, a second acceptance permission state and a fourth acceptance permission state are prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception allowed state, a game in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state The second reception permission state is such that the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is in the non-suppressed mode. As described above. That is, when a narrow-type annihilation effect that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) by a player in a non-suppression mode without being in a suppression mode Since the operation can be accepted (second acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the wide-area disappearance effect that is relatively superior in performance is not performed. On the other hand, when a player can accept an operation while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state, the effect is relatively Since a superior wide-area extinction effect is performed (first reception allowance state), an operation reception by the player while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed manner It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the fact that nothing was done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least in a specific setting condition (one production state), in the first reception permission state, an operation is detected within a set time in which operation acceptance by the player is permitted. When the operation is not performed, it is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second reception permission state, the operation reception by the player is permitted within a set time. As described above, when the operation is not detected in the above, the non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as that when the operation is detected is performed. That is, in the first reception permission state in which the wide area type disappearance effect is performed, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered when the operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when the operation is forgotten. That is, in this case, even when the operation is not accepted by the player and the automatic acceptance functions, the wide area type disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the operation is accepted by the player. On the other hand, in the second reception allowance state in which the narrow area-type disappearance effect is performed, since it is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, the set time elapses without any operation by the player (second reception permission is allowed). When the state is finished), the post-operation effect (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is not performed. It will be hidden. In this respect, in the second acceptance allowable state, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed even when the haze image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, which causes forgetting to operate. As a result, it is intended to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the post-operation effect is not executed. In this case, the narrow area type disappearance effect may be executed in the same mode (the same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception permission state according to this example, a narrow-type disappearance effect that appears when an operation is accepted and a post-operation effect is executed, and a post-operation effect is not executed because no operation is accepted A mode (image) that is different from the narrow area disappearance effect appearing in FIG.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a reception that allows a player to accept an operation while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. The permissible state includes at least the first permissible acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth permissible acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. As described above. In the fourth reception permission state, the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the reception-permitted state, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than in the fourth suppression mode, or is operated by the player while in the non-output state As described above, the reception can be made. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player accepts an operation in the fourth reception permitted state, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed instead of the wide area type disappearance effect. . That is, when a narrow-type annihilation effect that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is set in a suppression mode prior to that effect, but the suppression degree is lowered. For this reason (fourth reception permission state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the absence of the wide-area disappearance effect that is relatively superior in performance. On the other hand, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while the non-output state is set. In the case (first reception permission state), since the wide-area disappearance effect that is relatively superior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is not low. A decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  FIG. 249 is a time chart illustrating an example of the contents of effects when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception permission state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in a variation pattern in which the second acceptance permission state occurs.

  Now, assuming that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the “variation pattern determination” is made and the “second variation pattern” is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (effect description according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “FIG. 251 (a)”). ), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “second variation pattern” itself. It will be.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is as shown in FIG. 249 (b). In addition, the second reception permission state (valid period) in which the operation reception regarding the second post-operation effect is permitted when the timing tB3 when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is reached. (Corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second acceptance permission state (valid period) is as follows.
-"BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)" corresponding to the second variation pattern, for example, operation reception while the normal variation BGM playback sound maintains the output state in a non-suppressed manner The operation is not permitted within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which the “non-suppression acceptance permissible state (see FIGS. 249 (a) and (b)”) is permitted and the operation acceptance is permitted. In such a case, a “non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 249 (h))” that does not generate a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) corresponding to the second acceptance permission state.
It is generated as a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” executed by.

  According to such a configuration, the set time (validity period) during which operation reception is permitted without accompanying stage performance such as “acceptance of an acceptance-permitted state is indicated by“ BGM playback sound ”becoming a suppression mode. ) Is suddenly set (non-suppressed reception effect), the player side will be surprised, and a delay is likely to occur at the start of movement when attempting to operate. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time ends without any post-operation effects (non-automatic reception). Aspect) By making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect), the tension can be suitably maintained.

  However, such a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is a post-operation effect (in this case, a second post-operation effect) in a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit than the “suppression / automatic reception effect” described later. Although the percentage (which may be 0% or 100%) is low, the game interest may be reduced if there are frequent occurrences of post-operation effects contrary to the player's intentions. Concerned. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b), (e), and (i), a set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which operation acceptance is allowed occurs. When the timing tB2 just before has arrived, the output of the “acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” is started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)”), and the timing within the set time Even if the operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained in such a manner as to straddle this. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the setting time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set. It may be difficult for the player to notice that the reception is permitted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. Expected. However, the “acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) occurs. You may make it generate according to the generation timing of tB3.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the “acceptable sound”, the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as “Pickin!” And “Press!” And a second allowable sound that is output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (f) and (j), in the second acceptable state, the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. Is output, and a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when the player tries to operate even by such output limitation on the “acceptable sound”.

  By the way, in the said 2nd reception permission state, as a countermeasure with respect to the setting time being suddenly set or being executed as a non-automatic reception mode, the operation means (in this case, the operation is not permitted). It is considered that a player who tries to not miss the opportunity to generate post-operation effects can appear by repeatedly hitting the button 410). However, in this case, since the post-operation effect is started immediately after the operation reception is permitted, the started effect is “what is performed in response to the operation reception (post-operation effect)”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is “automatically generated as a notice effect that has nothing to do with operation reception”, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 249 (particularly, FIG. 249 (e)), in the second acceptable state, the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is generated after a set time (valid period) occurs. When the production is accepted at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is terminated, but the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is not terminated halfway and is used as the first acceptable sound. The output state is maintained until the output finishes (the same timing tB3c (FIGS. 249 (e), (i) as when there was no operation). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the event is “what is being performed (post-operation effect)” or “automatically generated as an effect unrelated to operation reception”. Yo To become.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 249, when an effect is received within the set time of the second reception permission state (in the figure, timing tB3a), an effect display device is used as an effect after operation corresponding to the operation reception. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated at least (FIG. 249 (d)). See). In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tB4, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing of reception of the effect. However, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output if the timing tB4 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the state.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB2 before the timing tB3 at which the set time of the second acceptance-permitted state is set arrives, the operation means that is the operation target in the effect display device 1600. In addition to displaying a wrinkle image with a glance, a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time has elapsed (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)”). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the setting time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set. It may be difficult for the player to notice that the reception is permitted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. Expected. In this example, the timing at which the haze image is displayed is set to be the same as the timing at which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) starts to be output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of them is started earlier. It may be. Or you may make it start only any one of a haze image and a reception permissible sound (for example, only a haze image) before timing tB3.

  Further, as described above, the heel image displayed when the second acceptance-permitted state occurs (an image in which an operation receiving unit that is an object to which an operation opportunity is given) is a peripheral that decorates the periphery of the heel image It is displayed as an integrated bag image IG integrated with a decorative image. The “integrated bag image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image (predetermined in the peripheral decoration image) An image) GG display target region (partition image KG) is provided. In addition, as the “integrated bag image IG”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and the same applies to selectively displaying any of these modes. However, a special aspect with high expectation (for example, the aspect shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated bag image” in the second acceptance-permitted state is selected (selected). ) Is not included, and only a mode different from the special mode (for example, a normal mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, an integrated haze image IGa having the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated haze image IG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 249 (c) to (f), it is assumed that the operation t has been received at the timing tB3a while such an integrated bag image is displayed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change due to the lamp, and due to the movable ornament. As at least one effect operation), an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the effect sound are each started (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 251 (f)”).

  However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (c), (d) and 251 (f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated haze image IG is not displayed when the post-operation effect is started. The display state is maintained without being changed. More specifically, even when an operation is accepted, at that point in time (timing tB3a), no change resulting from that occurs with respect to the integrated haze image IG (specific layer), and a little time ( Until the timing tB3b when the predetermined time has elapsed, the “display on the integrated 摸 image IG” in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued, The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 251, a conversation notice (maybe a chance) by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output relating to the liquid crystal display).

  Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (an extinction effect) displayed in such a manner that a part or the whole of the integrated bag image in the display state is difficult to view or is invisible is displayed (see “FIG. 251”). Equivalent to the situation shown in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer on which the integrated haze image IG is displayed, or the integrated haze image IG and the image (the disappearance effect). ) Is displayed as a single prepared moving image, and in the moving image, a part or the whole of the integrated bag image IG is represented as being difficult to visually recognize by the image KSE (annihilation effect). It may be as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated bag image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearing effect) starts to be displayed. The display state is maintained without being changed. More specifically, even in a situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated 摸 image IG is displayed, a change resulting from the integrated 摸 image IG is caused. In addition, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on the layer on the front side, the haze image and the gauge image GG are difficult to view or are not visible.

  That is, in this case, the annihilation effect image KSE (also in the case of the wide-area annihilation effect image HSE described later) is used for the purpose of making it difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) or making it invisible. Despite being in a state of being displayed on the predetermined layer, the haze image (integrated haze image IG) displayed on the specific layer (the back side (the lower priority side) than the predetermined layer) itself The display as it is when the operation reception is permitted is maintained, and no change occurs. In addition, for the gauge image GG, the display that continues to decrease the display area is continued across the operation reception. This makes it possible to visually recognize the mode (at least a part thereof) when the operation reception is permitted even in the process of making it difficult to visually recognize the haze image (integrated haze image IG) or making it invisible. As a result, the time to be maintained as the state shown in FIG. 251 (f) can be shortened.

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated haze image IG ends within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) during which the image KSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (shown in FIG. 251 (i)). After this, the annihilation effect (in this case, a narrow area type annihilation that uses less than half of the predetermined display area under the condition that the integrated 摸 image IG is not displayed on the layer as well) Effect) image KSE is displayed. Such an extinction effect image KSE is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) after the display thereof is started (timing tB3b) (see FIG. 251). equivalent to the situation shown in j)). In this regard, with regard to this non-display timing tB3d, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is particularly significant. It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image KSE and the integrated haze image IG are displayed in a layer on the front side of the image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character). It is displayed in an overlapping form. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 251 (g) to (i), while the image KSE of the disappearance effect is displayed, the image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character) is visually recognized. It has become difficult. The same applies to the wide area type disappearance effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, first, the post-operation effect is started, and at the time when the operation is accepted, the integrated bag image IG is displayed in any manner. (Which figure in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), how much remaining time suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) is maintained in a state where it can be grasped ("Figure Equivalent to the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f)). After this, among the post-operation effects, display of the disappearance effect image KSE in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize the “image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600” and the integrated haze image IG is started. (Corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 251 (g)”). As described above, the annihilation effect includes a narrow-type annihilation effect with low performance and a wide-area annihilation effect with low performance. Here, the annihilation effect is executed as a narrow-type annihilation effect. While such an annihilation effect image KSE is displayed, the integrated haze image IG is hidden (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 251 (i)”). When the image KSE is hidden, the “image relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character)” of the post-operation effect is finally made visible in a clear state (“ Corresponding to the situation shown in FIG. 251 (j)).

  That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what aspect of the integrated bag image IG was, and then, what aspect appears as an extinction effect, and then Since it becomes possible to enjoy what aspect (in this case, which of a plurality of conversation notice modes with different degrees of expectation) appears as post-operation effects, when operation is accepted with such a variety of effects It will be possible to improve the game entertainment of.

  In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing for starting the display of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tB3a but the timing tB3b or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) being executed. In this case, however, the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tB3a. Therefore, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains at the timing tB3a.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 249 (g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has passed without the player's operation being detected (the second acceptance permission state ends). As described above, since the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, the post-operation effect is not performed. The haze image (here, the integrated haze image IGa) is not displayed.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the state where the operation reception is permitted (second reception permission state) is ended, The haze image on the specific layer (here, the integrated haze image IGa) is not hidden, and maintains the display state that appeared when it was in the acceptance-permitted state. More specifically, even when the operation acceptance is no longer permitted, at that time (timing tB4), no change resulting from it occurs with respect to the bag image (here, the integrated bag image IGa). Until the timing tB4a when a little time (predetermined time) has passed, the “display on the bag image” in the same manner as when the operation reception is allowed is continued. Yes. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG is left with a slight display area even when the state where the operation reception is permitted (second reception permission state) is ended, and the display area after the timing tB4. The display area is reduced in the form of “0”.

  According to such a configuration, even when the effective period (second acceptance permission state) is terminated without being operated, the cocoon image is displayed in any aspect (any one of a plurality of aspects having different expectations). It will be possible to check if it was. In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to “0” after the effective period has expired, it is possible to urge the user to think that he / she was “bright” when the operation reception is not in time at the last minute timing. As a result, it is expected to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In this example, the valid period (second reception permission state) is ended without receiving an operation, compared to the time from when the operation is received until the eyelid image is hidden (not visible) from the timing tB3a. The time from the timing tB4 until the haze image is hidden (not visible) is shortened.

  Further, as described above, in the second acceptance-permitted state, the post-operation effect is not executed when the set time has passed without detecting the operation by the player. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 249 (g), when the haze image (here, the integrated haze image IGa) is hidden, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed. While the narrow area type disappearance effect is being executed, the haze image (here, the integrated haze image IGa) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as for the narrow area type disappearance effect when the post operation operation is not executed (FIG. 249 (g)), the narrow area type disappearance effect when the post operation effect is executed. This is executed in a mode (image) different from that in (FIG. 249 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether or not it is in time), it is possible to properly understand it by confirming the mode of the narrow area type disappearance effect As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the gaming interests due to the inability to grasp whether the post-operation effect is being performed. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 249 (g) in FIG. 249 (g) with respect to the mode of the narrow-area disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed. It is desirable not to appear in)). However, for example, the narrow area-type disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is defined as “A (for example, a change in the haze image itself)” and “B (for example, a haze image). If the two modes of “different image display” ”are executed in combination, the narrow area type disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed is executed by“ A ”. May be. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation was not accepted when the “B” mode does not appear in the narrow area type disappearance effect, and the post-operation effect is being performed. A decline in the entertainment interest due to the inability to grasp whether or not there is a game is avoided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB1 before the timing tB3 at which the second acceptance-permitted state occurs arrives, a narrow-area type front effect that uses only less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. This is started (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 251 (b)”). Then, within the period in which the image KTH related to such a narrow-area type pre-production is displayed, first, the display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image IGa) with the operation receiving unit displayed, and the first tolerance Sound output starts (timing tB2 and corresponds to “situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)”). At the time when display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated 摸 image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect. It has become difficult. That is, with the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the narrow-area type pre-production is reduced or the transmittance is increased, so that “摸 image (integrated 摸A performance such as gradually increasing the visibility of the image IG) is provided (FIGS. 251 (b) to (d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the narrow-area type pre-production is executed, and the second image is displayed while the heel image (here, the integrated heel image IGa) is displayed. The timing tB3 at which the acceptance-permitted state occurs arrives, and the operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)”). In other words, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed at a stage where the visibility of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is improved, Confirm the mode (expectation) as the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) so that the operation is accepted (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation). After that, it is possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether an operation is accepted (post-operation effect) or not.

  Here, as the image KTH used for such a narrow-area type pre-production, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed. Alternatively, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) and the image (narrow region type pre-production) are displayed as a single moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed in the moving image. It is also possible to express a state where is gradually increased.

  Note that, in the narrow-area type pre-production, not only the image display in the production display device 1600 but also production sound related to this may be output. However, in view of the fact that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to operation, It can be said that it is desirable to increase the concentration of the production effect without performing the output of the production sound related to this, and executing it as the image display in the production display device 1600.

  Further, as the narrow-area type pre-production, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation may be prepared, and any of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination. . However, in view of the fact that the second acceptance-permitted state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and the post-operation effect is not executed if forgetting to operate is performed, It is desirable to prepare only one aspect and display only by the one aspect, in order to suppress a decrease in amusement interest when the operation is forgotten.

  FIG. 250 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of effects when the first condition is satisfied and the first acceptance-allowed state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state occurs.

  Now, assuming that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), and the “first change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, a variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (effect description according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “FIG. 252 (a)”). ), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “first variation pattern” itself. It will be.

As described above, in the effect related to the “first variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 250 (b), the decorative symbol is displayed regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). The first reception in which the operation reception regarding the first post-operation effect is allowed when the timing tC4 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) has arrived after the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of SZ. An allowable state (valid period) is generated (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (g)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptance permission state (valid period) is as follows.
-"Acceptance of BGM playback" corresponding to the first variation pattern is output in a suppression mode or operation reception is permitted in a non-output state "Suppression reception allowable state (FIG. 250 (a), (See (b)) ”, and even when no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which the operation reception is permitted. When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started “automatic reception mode (see FIG. 250 (h))”
It is generated as a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as a “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, since “BGM playback sound” is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state, operation reception is allowed (inhibition reception effect). From the viewpoint of the user, it becomes easy to perform the operation immediately after the set time (effective period) occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the post-first operation effect) has the timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you can enjoy operating with a sense of security without missing any highly anticipated post-operation effects. . That is, in such a “suppression / automatic reception effect”, a ratio (0% or 100%) where the post-operation effect is performed in a mode that only appears at the time of a big hit than the above-mentioned “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. As described above.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, as in the above-described “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, FIGS. 250 (b), (e), and (i) As shown in FIG. 6, when the timing tC3 slightly before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) at which the production reception is permitted occurs, the “acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” is displayed. The output is started and the output state is maintained so as to cross the timing tC4 (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the “BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)” is output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, the operation is performed at timing tC3. It will be possible to recognize that the state where acceptance is allowed will soon occur, and "there will be an acceptance of the production by the activation of the automatic button function, not the player's intention, contrary to the player's intention" It is expected to make it difficult to frequently However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) occurs. For example, the “acceptable sound” is generated in accordance with the set timing generation timing tC4. You may do it.

  In order to obtain the above-described effect (suppression reception effect) more preferably, the “BGM playback sound” is output from the “state in which the sound is output in the non-suppressed manner” to the “state in which the sound is output in the suppressed manner or not. The timing tC2a to be shifted to the “output state” is different from that shown in the figure, but “the length of the timings tC2a to tC3> the length of the timings tC3 to tC4”. It can be said that it is desirable to set it considerably before the above-described admission allowable sound output start timing tC4 that precedes the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide-area type front effect is started.

  Further, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 250 (f) and (j), unlike the above-described “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, “ As the “acceptable sound”, not only the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as “Pickin!” But also the second allowable sound that is a message sound such as “Press!” Is output. In addition, in this example, the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the output of the first permissible sound is started, and the operation reception is already permitted (valid period). The output is started at the timing tC4a that arrives at.

  In other words, in this case, in the second acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the integrated bag image IG (hammer image) cannot be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is set time (valid period). The output is started without delay, and the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the 1st reception permissible state (valid period) in which integrated haze image IG (hammer image) can be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the 1st permissible sound is set time (effective period). The output is started without being delayed, and the second allowable sound is started after the set time (effective period) is generated.

  According to such a configuration, the output of the first permissible sound (sound effect) is started when the state of the integrated 摸 image IG (摸 image) is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized by the previous effect. After that, when the first acceptance allowable state (valid period) occurs, the state can be shifted to a state where both the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated 摸 image IG (摸 image) is displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. Will be able to. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, an integrated bag image having a specific high expectation aspect (special aspect) It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that IG (ＩＧ image) will be displayed, and in that situation, the integrated 摸 image IG (摸 image) will gradually be exposed (clear) Sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (f), among the wide area type previous effects, the “second wide area type previous effect” is being executed (the image of the previous effect). Is displayed), the second allowable sound is started to be output.

  As will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target are selected based on the result of the notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is set as the operation target, a message sound such as “Press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decorative body 5001 is set as the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as “Say me!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  Further, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the “second allowable sound” is adopted as a production sound that is output for a relatively short time. Although the “first permissible sound” is adopted as the effect sound output over a relatively long time, the length relationship between the permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, the output states of the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” are maintained for different times as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j). In addition, the timing when the output states are ended (the timing when the non-audible state is set) is made to arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to make it. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated depends on whether the “acceptable sound” is in the following situation. As a result, it is expected that it will be difficult to frequently produce “acceptance of production by the activation of the automatic button function, not the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention”.
The first situation in which only the “first permissible sound” of the “first permissible sound” and “second permissible sound” maintains the output state. ・ Both “first permissible sound” and “second permissible sound” The second situation where the output state is maintained. The "first permissible sound" maintains the output state, but the "second permissible sound" has ended the output state (the state is made inaudible) 3) Situation 3 ・ The 4th situation in which both “first permissible sound” and “second permissible sound” have finished their output state (become inaudible)

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, “Pikkin!”) Is output as the “first allowable sound”. In other words, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output as the effect sound that is not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, but the sound effect ( Since the first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the “BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)” is suppressed. It is possible to more easily recognize that the reception of the performance is allowed while maintaining the performance in the situation where it is present (second acceptable sound) (first). Sound tolerance). However, different acceptable reception sounds are used as the first allowable sound in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. You may make it output.

  Note that the time length between arbitrary timings shown in each of the above-described drawings and each of the drawings described later may be a minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or two frames. The above time may be sufficient. For example, if the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) can be output even a little before the set time (valid period), the player will be in a state where the operation reception is permitted (or During the period until the set time ends, or until the timing when the automatic button function is activated is reached. It is expected to suppress the user from forgetting to operate.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 250, unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 249, the operation is performed when the acceptable reception sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is in the output state. When the acceptance is made, the output state is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation. In other words, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and the operation reception is permitted ( It is possible to recognize that the validity period has ended. As a result, it is difficult to misrecognize that the operation is accepted even though the operation is not accepted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the automatic acceptance function is activated against the intention of the player. become able to. If the operation is accepted at the timing before the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is validated within the set time (valid period), the operation is performed at the time when the operation is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tC4f arrives, since the acceptance-permitted state ends.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e) and 250 (f), the first allowable sound starts to be output without delay of the set time (valid period), and the second allowable sound is set to the set time (valid). The output starts after the occurrence of (period). According to such a configuration, the first permissible sound starts to be output no matter how soon the player's operation is accepted, but the second permissible sound depends on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When an operation is accepted between timings tC3 and tC4a) The state in which the operation is accepted without being output is ended, and as a result, the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ) Will be executed. Note that when the operation is performed between timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated in response to the operation. In addition, when the operation is received before the timing tC4a arrives, the output of the second allowable sound is not started.

  According to such a configuration, after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that it is in the first permissible acceptance state), the post-operation effect is started, or the first (2) A game whether or not to start the post-operation effect without confirming that the permissible sound is output (without recognizing whether the permissible first acceptance state or the second permissible acceptance state) Since it can be left to the choice of the player side, the range of games will be widened, and it will be expected to improve the game entertainment.

  Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and (f), at least the images (in this case, the wide-area type front effect) in the period of timing tC3 to tC4a Some of them are not hidden and are kept in display. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound has not yet been output (timing tC3 to tC4a), the aspect (expected degree) of the integrated 摸 image (摸 image) also cannot be clearly seen by the previous effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the above-described game play such as “entrusting selection to the player side” more interesting.

  Also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 250 (d), when an operation is accepted within a set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tC4b), an after-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. (Here, the first post-operation effect) As the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) At least occurs (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)”). Here, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 249, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is the timing even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast to the non-display (not visible) at a specific timing (same timing) that comes after tC5, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is determined in advance from the timing when the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for a certain amount of time (fixed time). In the example shown in FIG. 252, a background notice by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output relating to the liquid crystal display).

  However, as shown in FIG. 250, even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is “BGM playback sound ( It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the timing tC6 when the specific type of effect sound) is output in the non-suppressed mode from the suppressed state (non-output state).

  On the other hand, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is terminated at timing tC6 when the “BGM playback sound” is output in the non-suppressed manner. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, “BGM playback sound” is output in a non-suppressed manner and the content related to the display effect is switched. It is expected that the game will be improved after being changed. However, instead of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may be maintained when the timing tC6 arrives. The “BGM playback sound” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC3 before the timing tC4 at which the set time of the first acceptable state is set arrives, the operation that is the operation target in the effect display device 1600. A habit image showing the means is displayed, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tC3 slightly before the timing tC4 when the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) of the first reception permission state is set. It may be difficult for the player to notice that the reception is permitted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (in this case, the post-first operation effect will end without being generated). Expected. In this example, the timing at which the haze image is displayed is set to be the same as the timing at which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) starts to be output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of them is started earlier. It may be. Or you may make it start only any one of a haze image and a reception permissible sound (for example, only a haze image) before timing tC4.

  In addition, as described above, the heel image displayed when the first acceptance-permitted state occurs (an image that looks like an operation receiving portion to which an operation opportunity is given) is also a rim that decorates the rim of the heel image. It is displayed as an integrated bag image IG integrated with a decorative image. The “integrated bag image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248 or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image, a gauge image GG ( The display target area (partition area KG) of the predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, as the “integrated bag image IG”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and the same applies to selectively displaying any of these modes. However, unlike the second acceptance permission state, in the first acceptance permission state, a special aspect with high expectation (for example, FIG. 232) among a plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated bag image IG”. As described above, the mode (integrated bag image IGd) shown in (d) is included as a target of lottery (selection) and can be displayed.

  By the way, in the first reception permission state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time is displayed with reference to the time until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated when there is no operation (reference). It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first acceptance-permitted state (FIG. 250) according to this embodiment, the remaining time is displayed on the basis of the time until the timing tC5 when the set time elapses instead of the time until the timing tc4f arrives ( The gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that it becomes “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect is started due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is left behind. It becomes possible to suggest that there is a risk of “losing the operation opportunity” against the intention of the player, and this makes it possible for the set time (valid period) from the next time regardless of the gauge remaining It is possible to prompt the user to perform an operation at an early stage.

  However, in the first reception permission state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received does not necessarily start within the set time. It may be started when ending or after ending.

  Also, the integrated haze image IG (haze image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 250 is not necessarily the same as the integrated haze image IG (haze image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. Good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 250, the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target. May be described realistically.

  In the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target, and the operation button 410 is displayed as an integrated 摸 image IG (摸 image) with the operation button being displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 250, the handle 5012 (sword decorative body 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target, and is displayed as an integrated cocoon image IG (摸 image) in which the handle portion is ridden (FIG. 245 (a) to (d)). The “integrated bag image IGe to IGh” is as described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 248 or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, a gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. (Predetermined image) A display target area (partition image KG) of GG is provided. In addition, as the “integrated bag image IG”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and the same applies to selectively displaying any of these modes.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at timing tC4 in FIG. 250, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target, based on the result of the notice effect determination. " That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion depending on which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the reception of presentation is permitted occurs, the set time is 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at timing tB3 in FIG. 249, there is no “case where the sword decorative body 5001 is selected as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated may be set after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation where opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect generated at timing tC4 in FIG. 250, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operating means is operated, it is desirable to receive the presentation and execute the post-operation presentation. In other words, the player may be confused if there is a situation in which the production is not accepted despite operating the operating means. Since it is harsh to seek further operations on the operating means on the side, even if the wrong operating state is maintained, the production is accepted when the operating means on the operating side is operated It is desirable to do.

  Note that, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, the specific type of production sound is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, and thus compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect. There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. The sound can be output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained are different. A plurality of modes are selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIG. 250 (e), and the “time for maintaining the output state” is set as the shortest mode among the above-mentioned multiple modes. It is what. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) in which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the plurality of modes is used to output the first allowable sound.

  It should be noted that “which one of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound” and “which one of a plurality of operation means is used as the operation target” are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained within the notice effect determination as one determination result. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible case is either the case where the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the case where the “sword decorative body 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound can be selected. In addition, the second mode and the third mode can be selected regardless of whether the “operation button 410” is an operation target or the “sword decorative body 5001” is an operation target. However, it is desirable to prepare an aspect in which output is possible only when the “sword ornament 5001” is an operation target. And even if it is a case where a 1st permissible sound is output by any of these aspects, an output state will be maintained with the length more than the time value which the aspect shown in FIG. 249 requires.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 250C to 250F, it is assumed that the operation t is accepted while the timing tC4 arrives while the integrated bag image IG (here, the integrated image IGd) is displayed. doing. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change due to the lamp, and due to the movable ornament. As at least one effect operation), an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the effect sound are started.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (d), also in this example, the integrated haze image IG on the specific layer is not hidden when the post-operation effect is started. The display state from when it was in the reception-permitted state is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at the time (timing tC4b, corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)”), the integrated haze image IG is attributed to it. No change occurs, and until the timing tC4c when a little time (predetermined time) has passed, the “integrated 摸 image IG is applied in the same manner as when the operation reception is allowed” “Display” is continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (an extinction effect) that is displayed in such a manner that a part or the whole of the integrated bag image IG that is in the display state is difficult to view or is invisible is displayed (see FIG. 252 (j) ”. Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer (predetermined layer) before the specific layer on which the integrated bag image IG is displayed, An image (disappearing effect) is displayed as a pre-prepared moving image, and a state in which a part or the whole of the integrated bag image becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image (disappearing effect) in the moving image is expressed. As described above, it may also be possible.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated bag image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and an image HSE ( Even when the display of the “disappearing effect” is started, it is not hidden, and the display state is maintained as it is in the acceptance allowable state. More specifically, even in a situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated haze image IG is displayed, a change resulting from the integrated haze image IG occurs. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, the disappearance effect is displayed in a predetermined layer on the front side, so that the eyelid image and the gauge image GG are difficult to see or gradually become invisible.

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated haze image IG is ended within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) in which the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed. An image HSE of an annihilation effect (here, a wide-area annihilation effect that uses more than half of a predetermined display area) is displayed under a situation where the IG is not displayed on a specific layer. The disappearance effect image HSE is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) after the display thereof is started (timing tC4c). In this regard, with regard to this non-display timing tC4g, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, the display change (in this case, the liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the effects after the operation is performed. It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image HSE and the haze image (integrated haze image) are displayed on a predetermined layer in front of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps this. Therefore, while the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (FIGS. 252 (j) and (k)), it is difficult to visually recognize the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. Yes.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, first, the post-operation effect is started, and at the time when the operation is accepted, the integrated bag image IG is displayed in any manner. (Which mode of FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), how much remaining time suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) is maintained in a state where it can be grasped. After this, the image HSE of the disappearance effect in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)” and the integrated habit image IG among the post-operation effects. The display by is started. As described above, the annihilation effect includes a narrow-area annihilation effect with low performance and a wide-area annihilation effect with low performance. Here, the annihilation effect is executed as a wide-area annihilation effect. The integrated haze image IG is hidden while the annihilation effect image HSE is displayed. After that, when the annihilation effect image HSE is hidden, The “image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)” is finally visible in a clear state (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l)”).

  That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what aspect of the integrated bag image IG was, and then, what aspect appears as an extinction effect, and then Since it becomes possible to enjoy what modes appear as post-operation effects, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the operation is accepted by such various effects.

  In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing for starting the display of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tC4b but the timing tC4c or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) being executed. However, also in this case, the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tC4b, so the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains at the timing tC4b.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 250 (g) to 250 (j), it is assumed that the set time has passed without the player's operation being detected (the first acceptance permission state has ended). As described above, since the first reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, the post-operation effect is performed even when the set time has elapsed without any operation by the player. The haze image (here, the integrated haze image IG) is not displayed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 250 (b) and 250 (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is activated, it is the same as when the operation by the player is accepted. The haze image (here, the integrated haze image) is not hidden and maintains the display state. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time point (timing tC4f), no change resulting from it occurs with respect to the heel image (here, the integrated heel image). Until the timing tC4fa at which a little time (predetermined time) has passed, the “display on the bag image” in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. Yes. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG is left with a slight display area even when the operation acceptance is permitted (second acceptance allowance state), and the display area after the timing tC4f. The display area is reduced in the form of “0”.

  According to such a configuration, even when the post-operation effect is started by enabling the automatic button function, the cocoon image is displayed in any aspect (any one of a plurality of aspects having different degrees of expectation). It will be possible to check if it was.

  Further, in this example, the time from the timing tC4c when the operation is accepted until the haze image is hidden (not visible), and the time tC4f when the automatic button function is activated are hidden (not visible). ) To be the same as the time until

  In this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), as shown in FIG. 250 (g), the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image IG) is not displayed. When the image is to be displayed, the wide area type disappearance effect is executed. While the wide area type disappearance effect is being executed, the haze image (here, the integrated haze image) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, an image related to the wide area type disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (c)) when the operation by the player is accepted, and when the automatic button function is activated. The image is executed in the same manner as the image according to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (g)) (all images are “image HSE”). This is a different part from the example shown in FIG. 249 (the narrow area type disappearance effect when the haze image is hidden in the non-automatic acceptance mode is different from the operation mode).

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation reception is not in time at the last minute, the same mode appears as when the operation reception is in time. Can be encouraged to think that “the execution has started”, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the gaming interests.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC1 before the timing tC3 at which the first acceptance permission state occurs, the execution of the wide area type front effect using more than half of the predetermined display area is started. (Corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)”). Then, during the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being executed, display of the heel image (here, the integrated heel image IG) that looks at the operation receiving unit and the output of the first allowable sound are started ( Timing tC3, corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”. At the point in time when display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated 摸 image IG) is started, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part or the whole of the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) by the image related to the wide area type front effect. ing. That is, with the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the wide area type front effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the “摸 image (integrated 摸 image) ”Will gradually increase the visibility”) (FIGS. 252 (f) to (h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the first reception is performed while the wide-area type front production is performed and the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image IG) is displayed. The timing tC4 when the allowable state occurs arrives and the operation reception is permitted. In other words, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed at a stage where the visibility of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is improved, Confirm the mode (expectation) as the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) so that the operation is accepted (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation). After that, it is possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether an operation is accepted (post-operation effect) or not.

  Here, the image used for such a wide-area front effect may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed. The haze image (integrated haze image) and the image (wide area type pre-production) are displayed as a single moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the haze image (integrated haze image) is gradually improved in the moving image. It may be one that expresses how it goes.

  In view of the fact that the wide-area type front effect suggests the occurrence of the first acceptable reception state with a relatively high expectation, unlike the second acceptable reception state, in the effect display device 1600 It is desirable not only to display an image but also to output a production sound related to this. And it is good also as performing so that a part of effect sound concerning such a wide area type front effect may function as the 1st permissible sound.

  In addition, as a wide-area type pre-production, preparing a plurality of aspects with different degrees of expectation, and selectively displaying one of those aspects based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination, It is desirable to improve the fun of gaming.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), the wide-area type pre-production according to this example is started when the timing tC1 within the “first variation pattern” arrives, and the first acceptance permission state occurs. It is executed in a manner straddling the timing tC4, and is finished within the set time of the first acceptance allowable state. However, during the period from the start to the end of such a wide area type pre-production, the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production are sequentially executed as the wide area type pre-production. It is like that. About these two wide area type before productions, it may be displayed as one video data, and may be displayed as mutually different video data.

  Here, the first wide-area type front effect starts when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)”), and the second wide-area type front effect is the timing. When tC2 arrives, the display is started in the form of replacing the first wide-area type previous effect (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (e)”), but any of these previous effects is displayed. Even during the period, during the period in which the previous effect is displayed, “a habit image that looks like the operation means to be operated” is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250 (c), when the timing tC1a within the period in which the first wide-area type pre-effect is being executed has arrived, the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which of a plurality of operation means is given an operation opportunity (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (c)”). In FIG. 252 (c), the image HTH1 resulting from the first wide-area type pre-production is depicted to produce an “image in which the entire cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) is outlined”. It is only a white state, and it is at a stage that cannot be said to be an image with an effect button as an operation target. After this, “the image A1 in which the entire cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) is outlined” has “at least one of the decoration and the pattern to display at least the outline of the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image)”. It is displayed as “shaped image A2” (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (d)”), which suggests that the operation target is a production button. From this, it can be said that such an “image A2” is a habit image in which an operation means that is an operation target is deceived. That is, such an image A2 is executed as an effect that makes it appear as if the “image HTH1 by the first wide-area type previous effect” was created. The “outline of the heel image (here, the integrated heel image)” means the outline of the operation receiving portion (here, the outline of the operation receiving portion and the outline of the peripheral decorative image).

  However, when the timing tC2 comes, whether or not the “image A2 as the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image)” and the “image HTH1 related to the first wide-area type front effect” that were in the display state until that time are not displayed respectively. The execution of the “second wide-area type front effect” is started in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (e)”). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period in which the second wide-area type front effect is being executed, the heel image (integrated heel image IG) is displayed again (in the “situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). The timing tC4 at which the first acceptance permission state occurs in the displayed state is reached (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 252 (g)”). That is, the second haze image (FIGS. 252 (f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from when the operation acceptance is permitted until it is at least not permitted. The operation is accepted while the image is displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started to be executed.

  That is, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state, the previous presentation is executed twice, and among these previous presentations, “not displayed before operation acceptance is permitted”. The first haze image (FIGS. 252 (c) and (d)) ”and“ the second haze image (FIGS. 252 (f) to (k) ”that continue the display state even after the operation acceptance is permitted). According to such a configuration, the degree of freedom is higher without taking into consideration the mode (result of the performance determination, etc.) to be displayed when the acceptance-permitted state occurs. Since it is possible to display a cocoon image (a cocoon image (first time) that is hidden before operation acceptance is permitted) under the production design, the range of production can be expanded. In this sense, “operation acceptance is allowed. The “haze image (first time) that is not displayed before” is displayed as a mode (a mode different from any of the modes illustrated in FIG. 232) that cannot be displayed when the operation reception is permitted. It is desirable to do so.

  Here, the heel image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type front effect is performed is similar to the 摸 image displayed while the narrow-area type pre-effect is performed as described above. Since the display state is continued even after the state where the operation acceptance is permitted, the display is continued as one of a plurality of modes shown in FIG. 232 (in the example shown in FIG. 250). , An integrated bag image IGd) which is a special embodiment. On the other hand, for the bag image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type front effect is being performed, at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image (here, image A2). For example, the shape is expressed by deforming the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target, such as rounding the outline part of the eyelid image or using many curves without using a lot of straight lines. A technique of displaying as an image can be employed. Note that in the above-described narrow-area type pre-production, an image having at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from the acceptance-permitted state does not appear.

  Further, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, the habit image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-production is performed is a plurality of images shown in FIG. Regardless of which mode is displayed, the habit image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-production is being performed can be displayed in one mode (the same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide-area type pre-production can be used only for “indicating which type of operation means will soon be provided with an operation opportunity”. According to such a first wide-area type previous production, the player can be made to recognize the operation object without deteriorating the gaming interest, and thus the operation object can be recognized by the player. Therefore, the stage shifts to the second wide-area type preproduction where the degree of expectation is suggested.

  In order to suitably obtain such effects, the first wide-area type front effect is the operation means (sword decoration) on the side with higher expectation among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). It can be said that it is more desirable to execute it only when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). In other words, in this case, either a case where an acceptance-permitted state where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs, or a case where an acceptance-permitted state where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. However, prior to this, a wide area type front effect can be executed. However, for the first wide area type front effect, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 have an operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001. It can only be executed when it is granted. In this case, the first reception permission state may be generated as a reception permission state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword ornament 5001. On the other hand, the second wide-area type front effect is executed either when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It is possible. At this time, the second wide-area type front effect is executed in the same manner when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Alternatively, it may be executed in a different manner.

  Further, when the heel image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type front effect is performed is displayed as the integrated heel image IG, the display area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. In such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed for the bag image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-production is performed. You may make it display as an image which does not contain. In this case, it is needless to say that the shape as a haze image (integrated haze image) is different. At this time, the heel image may be displayed as an integrated heel image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. May be displayed.

  According to the above-described effect example, in the second acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 249, the spear image (integrated spear image IG) is not displayed in a special manner, and the first permissible sound is output as a permissible reception sound. However, the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the 1st reception permission state shown in Drawing 250, a haze image (integrated haze image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the 1st permissible sound and the 2nd permissible sound are received as permissible reception sound, respectively. Output is possible. However, even in the first acceptance-permitted state shown in FIG. 250, even when a mode (a low-expected mode used in FIG. 249) different from the special mode is displayed as the bag image (integrated bag image IG). Of course, the acceptable reception sound is processed as described with reference to FIG. 250, and it is needless to say that the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can be output as the acceptable reception sound.

  At the start of the output of the second permissible sound (message sound), an image relating to the wide-area type front effect remains, and it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the haze image (integrated haze image IG). In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG), the state shifts from a state where only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output to a state where the second permissible sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, the possibility that the haze image (integrated haze image IG) is displayed in a special mode can be suggested by the acceptable reception sound. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that a spider image (integrated spear image IGd) having a special aspect will be exposed. Inside, the haze image (integrated haze image IG) is gradually exposed.

  The integrated bag image IG includes the display target region (partition image KG) of the gauge image GG, but the integrated bag image IG is displayed in either the low expectation mode (IGa) or the high expectation mode (IGd). Even in such a case, the display target region of the gauge image GG (the target portion on which the gauge image GG is displayed and the portion that increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, the remaining time is easily recognized regardless of the manner of the haze image.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 232, the low-expected aspect (IGa) and the high-expected aspect (IGd) are configured such that not only the heel image but also the peripheral decorative image is different. In addition, although the operation means (such as a production button) that is a target of operation by the player can emit light in the same manner as the heel image, the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  According to the production example described above, when in a predetermined gaming state, the reception-permitted state when the operation reception is permitted while the specific performance sound is suppressed, and the specific performance sound are suppressed. Although there are a plurality of non-suppressed acceptance acceptance states in which operation acceptance is permitted, there is a special aspect of the integrated bag image IG in the first acceptance permissible state among the acceptance acceptance states during suppression. Unlike the special mode, the integrated haze image IG is not displayable in the special mode (IGd) in the second reception mode when the non-suppression mode is allowed. Can be displayed. In the second acceptance allowable state, the integrated bag image IG is not selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) having different expectations except for the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). May be displayed only. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect sound is suppressed, it can be suppressed that the performance is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance permission state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance permission state) and the second condition (second acceptance permission state) is satisfied. In this case, after displaying the integrated bag image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated bag image is one of the modes illustrated in FIGS. 239 to 243 (for example, the modes illustrated in FIGS. 242 and 243). ) Is used for display as described above. However, in the case where such a third acceptance permission state (a valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease) is generated, prior to this, “BGM playback sound (specific type) Display sound) is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display that does not appear in other acceptable reception states including the first acceptable reception state and the second acceptable reception state ( It is desirable that post-operation effects) and post-operation output sound be executed. In other words, when the “accepted BGM playback” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state) when the acceptance permission state occurs, it is expected that a highly expected aspect (special aspect) is displayed as the integrated haze image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, only the “BGM playback sound” is inferior to the case where the sound is output in a non-suppressed manner. There is concern about a decline in interest. In this regard, in the third acceptance-permitted state, after allowing the appearance in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the post-operation display that appears only when this aspect appears is executed. Even if a special aspect does not appear as the integrated bag image IG, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  However, “BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)” in the suppression state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation reception in either the first reception permission state or the third reception permission state. It is desirable that the output is not resumed in a non-suppressed manner, and that the display change or post-operation output sound is executed while the suppressed state (or non-output state) is maintained.

  In addition, even if the “BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)” is in the reception-permitted state that occurs after the suppression state (or the non-output state) is set, Unlike the case of the one reception permission state, the integrated bag image IG is not displayed in a special mode, and can be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the “BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound)” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state), any of the first reception allowable state and the third reception allowable state is determined. It is possible to add interest about what occurs.

  Further, in the third acceptance-permitted state, it is assumed that it is executed as an effective period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. Instead, an aspect that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG (FIGS. 247 and 247). The aspect shown in FIG. 248 may be executed as an effective period during which a haze image (either an integrated haze image or an integrated haze image) may be displayed. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that similar effects can be achieved. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types having different generation conditions are prepared as the reception permission state, but this is a case where a reception permission state different from the first reception permission state occurs. However, when this is a specific type of acceptance-permitted state, it is desirable that the integrated haze image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, it is possible to execute the automatic acceptance mode for the reception permission state in which the integrated bag image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd), in order to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when a forgetful operation occurs. Is desirable.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 250, the automatic button function is activated at a predetermined timing within the set time (valid period), but automatically when the set time (valid period) ends or after it ends. The button function may be activated, and the execution of “the same post-operation effect as when an operation by the player is accepted within the valid period” may be started. In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the “processing from timing tC4f” shown in FIGS. 250 (g) and 250 (h).

  For the image related to the annihilation effect shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, a predetermined transmittance is set for the image itself so that the image behind the image can be visually recognized although it is difficult. Good.

  According to the production examples shown in FIGS. 249 to 252, when the player's operation is accepted or the automatic button function is activated and the post-operation production starts to be executed, Both the form of the fossilized image IG) and the form of the gauge image GG are displayed in a state of good visibility without being made difficult to visually recognize by the disappearance effect (FIG. 251 (f), (See FIG. 252 (i)). Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-operation effect while recognizing how the haze image (integrated haze image IG) is displayed and how much time remains. It will be possible to improve the fun of gaming.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 251, even if the operation is accepted in the second reception permitted state and the post-operation effect (second effect after operation) is executed, the background image is displayed before and after the post-operation effect is started. This is maintained without switching. On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 252, when an operation is accepted in the first reception permission state and a post-operation effect (first effect after operation) is executed, before and after the post-operation effect is started. The background image is switched (the space background after the operation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if the user forgets to perform the operation, the background image can be appropriately switched. Can progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the acceptance acceptance state where the automatic acceptance function is not activated, the background image is not changed, so that when the user forgets to operate, the background image is not switched or only the background image is displayed. It becomes possible to avoid an unfavorable event such as a sudden change.

  Further, in the second reception permitted state, after the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is validated), many parts of the display area are not visible because they overlap with the image HSE related to the wide area disappearance effect. However, as described above, since the background image itself is changed, if there is a small part that does not overlap with the image HSE related to the wide area type disappearance effect, the image after the operation can be confirmed by checking the image in that part. Can be recognized, and the disadvantages caused by the execution of the wide area type disappearance effect can be eliminated. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, when the operation is accepted in the second acceptance-permitted state (or the automatic button function is activated), after the operation in a mode in which the ratio of the big hit symbol appears is relatively high The background image when the post-operation effect is executed is made different between when the effect is executed and when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing is relatively low Is more desirable. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of jackpot symbols appears relatively high, the background image itself is changed, whereas the post-operation effect in a mode in which the ratio of jackpot symbols appears is relatively low When this is executed, the background image may be maintained without being changed.

  In the production example described above, when the operation opportunity is given, when the specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppression mode (second reception permission state), the state where the specific type of production sound is output in a suppression mode Or a non-output state (first acceptance allowance state), and the ratio (expectation) in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that it appears only at the time of winning the jackpot according to the type As a result, it is possible to improve performance when an operation opportunity is given. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the first acceptance-permitted state, when the operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is set in a state of being output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state, and thereby when a post-operation effect is generated In order to make the production sound corresponding to this stand out, a production device is made. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the acceptable reception sound that is output when the first acceptable reception state is generated, if the production is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the production acceptance is performed. Since the output state is terminated based on this, it is possible to make the effect sound according to the post-operation effect stand out without being disturbed by the acceptable reception sound.

  There are multiple types of acceptable reception states in which the integrated bag image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). In any of these acceptable reception states, an operation is accepted when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state. Then, it is desirable that the acceptable reception sound is terminated halfway. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared as acceptable reception states in which the integrated bag image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd). In these acceptable reception states, when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state, Acceptable state in which the acceptable sound is terminated when the operation is accepted, and acceptable state in which the acceptable sound is not terminated when the operation is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both of them (the second reception permission state and the like) (can be generated under different conditions).

  As described above, the acceptable reception sound includes a sound effect and a message sound. In this regard, the message sound is always interrupted when the production is accepted even when the integrated habit image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), whereas the sound effect is When the integrated haze image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), it is not interrupted when it is interrupted when the production is received when in the output state (first reception allowable state). It is desirable that there is a time (second acceptance permission state). It is desirable that a plurality of types of acceptable reception states including the first acceptable reception state are prepared as acceptable reception states in which the message sound is output.

  In the wide area type front effect shown in FIGS. 250 and 252, the first wide area type previous effect and the second wide area type previous effect are sequentially executed. In this regard, in both the first wide-area type pre-production and the second wide-area type pre-production, a cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) in which the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the operation target is displayed is displayed in both of the previous productions. However, the cocoon image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide-area type pre-production is the cocoon image (integrated ＩＧ image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state (first acceptance-permitted state). Is different from the image and does not gradually change to the haze image (integrated haze image IG).

  That is, the haze image A2 (FIG. 252 (d)) displayed in the first wide-area type front effect is not displayed when the second wide-area type front effect is executed prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance permission state. The display state is set (a state where it cannot be visually recognized). Then, after a predetermined time when no habit image deceiving the operation target is displayed (maintained as an invisible state) (FIG. 252 (e)), as an eaves image within the execution period of the second wide-area type pre-effect. An image different from the cocoon image A2 displayed in the first wide area type previous effect is displayed (FIG. 252 (f)). And this “「 image within the execution period of the second wide-area type pre-production ”is the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) itself that is displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state (first acceptance-permitted state). The image HSE (integrated bag image IG) is displayed by displaying the image HSE related to the second wide-area type front effect in a form that crosses over the generation of the reception-permitted state (first reception-permitted state). In this way, the operation reception is allowed. The haze image (integrated haze image IG) is displayed even when the operation is accepted and the execution of the post-operation effect is started (FIG. 252 (i)). It is displayed over a period from before the acceptance-permitted state occurs to after it ends.

  Here, when the bag image A2 is displayed in the wide area type previous effect (first wide area type previous effect), the operation means (operation receiving unit) on which the bag image A2 is displayed is soon (other effects). An operation opportunity will always be given. That is, in the above-described effect example, it is only necessary to generate the acceptance-allowed state while maintaining the display state of the haze image A2. In the above-described production example, the haze image A2 is hidden, and “ First, a state in which no habit image is displayed is displayed, and then an image with an image different from the first (A2) is displayed ( It is displayed as an integrated image IG).

  According to such a configuration, in order to suggest that a reception allowance state with a high degree of expectation occurs, operation reception is permitted even when a habit image is displayed for a long time as a previous effect. It is expected to prompt the operation without being delayed. In other words, if a habit image is displayed over a long period of time as a pre-production, and an accepting acceptance state is generated while the ivy image is displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance is allowed suddenly arrives. In other words, operation delays may occur frequently even though the previous performance is being executed. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state, a cocoon image having a description different from that displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is preceded. In addition to the display, after a period of time during which no haze image is displayed, a haze image that is displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is displayed. In other words, the player can be made aware that the first acceptance-permitted state can occur only within the period after the heel image displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for an operation delay to occur while displaying a habit image for a long time as a previous effect.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the first time after the execution of the second wide-area type front effect is executed, rather than the “time required for the first wide-area type previous effect” and the “time when the bag image A2 is displayed”. It is more preferable to set so that “time until 1 reception permission state occurs” and “time from when the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed until the first reception permission state occurs” are shorter. The desirability is clear. The bag image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area type front effect.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type front effect is “operation in the movable region” as the operation means (operation receiving unit). ”Or“ behavior when operated ”is displayed dynamically (see FIG. 233, etc.), while the image A2 displayed in the first wide-area type front effect is like this It is more desirable to display without performing dynamic display. It should be noted that the haze image (integrated haze image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type front effect continues its dynamic display state even after the first acceptance permission state occurs. In addition, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) displayed in the narrow-area type front effect also expresses the “movement in the movable area” and “behavior when operated” as the operation means (operation receiving part). This is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display state is continued even after the second acceptance permission state occurs.

  The bag image (integrated bag image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252 (f) and the bag image (integrated bag image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252 (g) are images. Although they are the same, the transmittance may be varied.

  With respect to the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect shown in FIG. 251, it is more desirable to display the entire haze image (integrated haze image IG) as an image that can be covered from the front side. . Then, by performing at least one of the reduction of the display area of the image KTH or the increase of the transmittance thereof, the ＴＨ image (integrated 摸 image IG) is displayed from the position where the image KTH is displayed. ) Is desirably displayed in such a manner that it gradually appears over time.

  Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 related to the wide-area type front effect shown in FIG. 252, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the haze image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the haze image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the haze image (integrated haze image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the haze image (integrated haze image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image having a size that can cover the entire haze image (integrated haze image IG) from the front side, like the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect (FIG. 252 ( e)) By reducing the display area or increasing the transmittance, the image HTH2 is displayed from the position where the image HTH2 is displayed (integrated image IG). Is a mode that is gradually exposed as time elapses. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to make the depiction of the eyelid image A2 stand out, it is disadvantageous to make it difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image when giving an operation opportunity (any operation It becomes difficult to recognize whether an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs).

  The wide-area type pre-production is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area type pre-production and the second wide-area type pre-production. It is desirable that it be output by playing back two sound effects / music.

  In addition, in the narrow area type front effect shown in FIG. 251, the background image displayed before this is maintained without being changed in the narrow area type front effect, but the wide area type shown in FIG. In the pre-production, the background image displayed before this is changed in the wide-area type pre-production (here, changed at the start of the wide-area type pre-production). In such a configuration, since the background change can be executed as a part of the wide-area type pre-production, it is more effective when compared with the narrow-area type pre-production that remains in the partial production change. It will be executed as a production. Note that the background image (FIG. 251 (a)) displayed before the narrow-area type pre-production is performed and the background image (FIG. 252 (FIG. 252 ()) displayed before the wide-area type pre-production is performed. It may be a background image different from a)).

  In the second wide-area type front effect shown in FIG. 252 (f), an integrated bag image integrated with “a peripheral decorative image in which a section image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)”. Although the heel image is displayed as IG, in the first wide-area type front effect shown in FIG. 252 (d), the heel image in which such a partitioned image KG is not decorated (depicted) is displayed. As a result, in the first wide-area type pre-production, it is possible to entertain the pre-production without causing the player to worry about at least the remaining time. Note that the cocoon image on which the section image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be any image that does not display the section image KG that is decorated (depicted) in the integrated cocoon image IG. In addition to the mode in which the decoration (gauge area) is not displayed, a mode in which the shape itself is different from the integrated bag image IG may be used.

  As described above, “accepting operation is permitted in a state where a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state and is performed in an automatic reception mode” Are provided in different forms (variation patterns and the like), and a “first reception permission state” is prepared as one of these reception permission states. However, in these acceptance permission states, “the first wide-area type front effect (FIGS. 252 (c) to (e)) in which the haze image is displayed and hidden” and the timing of the acceptance permission state occur. In addition to the “first reception permission state in which the second wide-area type pre-production (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) in which the cocoon image is displayed” is performed, the “摸 image is displayed and hidden. The specific reception allowance in which the second wide-area type pre-production (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) in which the spear image is displayed in a manner straddling the generation timing of the reception-permitted state is not performed. It is desirable to include a state. That is, in this case, in the first reception permission state, the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a mode that appears only at the big hit than the specific reception permission state is higher than the timing at which the operation reception is permitted. Amusement entertainment can be enhanced from the time when the previous timing (the timing at which the first wide-area type front effect appears) has arrived. In this case, the second wide-area type pre-production that is performed when the first acceptance-permitted state occurs and the second wide-area type pre-production that is performed when the specific reception-permitted state occurs are not necessarily the same. It may be executed as different contents (images). In addition, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state.

  As described above, “accepted operation is permitted in a non-automatic reception mode while operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed mode” is an occurrence condition (variation A plurality of patterns and the like are prepared, and a “second reception permission state” is prepared as one of these reception permission states.

  The wide-area type pre-production that is performed in the first acceptance-permitted state is executed in a situation where “specific type of production sound (BGM playback)” is suppressed or not output. (BGM playback) "is executed for a longer time than the narrow-area type pre-production (second acceptance-allowed state) that is executed in the non-suppressed state, so that this is suitably maintained for the game entertainment Will be able to. In particular, the first wide-area type pre-production only among the wide-area type pre-productions is executed over a longer period of time than the narrow-area type pre-production, so that it is suitable for amusement entertainment from a long time before the admission allowed state occurs. To be able to increase. The timing at which the “specific type of effect sound (BGM playback)” is suppressed or not output may arrive while the first wide-area type pre-production is being executed or before the first wide-area type sound. You may make it come before the production starts.

  According to the above-mentioned effect example, when the wide-area type front effect (FIG. 252) is performed when the first acceptance permission state is generated, the effect change including the background image is generated, whereas when the second acceptance permission state is generated. When the narrow-area type pre-production (FIG. 251) is performed, the background image is not changed and the production is changed while maintaining the background image. In addition, in the first acceptance-permitted state that occurs while such a wide-area type pre-production is performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation production (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether or not the operation is performed. On the other hand, in the second reception allowed state that occurred while the narrow-area type pre-production was performed, the production was developed while maintaining the background image without changing the background image by the post-operation production. Yes. According to such a configuration, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence of the occurrence in the first reception permission state, so that the effect is compared with the second reception permission state. It becomes possible to greatly improve the performance, and to concentrate more on the operation-related effects.

  In the wide area type disappearance effect according to the above-described effect example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 252 (j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide area disappearance effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 252 (i), execution of the post-operation effect (background notice by the princess character) is started while the background image is not changed. Then, after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the wide area type disappearance effect first makes the background image displayed when it is in the reception-permitted state difficult to see or invisible (FIG. 252 (j) And the background image is changed by displaying another background image thereafter (the situation shown in FIG. 252 (k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l)). Other background images may be displayed in a manner that is gradually exposed while the wide area type disappearing effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide area type disappearing effect is completed. May be.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252, as a post-operation effect, first, the display change in the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed. As the post-operation effect, the execution may be started first, and the display change in the liquid crystal display may be started later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

  As described above, a plurality of “acceptance acceptance states that are executed in the automatic acceptance mode and the wide area type disappearance effect is executed” are prepared in different generation conditions (variation patterns and the like). As an example, a “first reception permission state” is prepared. However, in these acceptance-permitted states, in addition to the “first acceptance-permitted state”, “post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) in the same manner as the first acceptance-permitted state can be performed, It is desirable to include a “special reception permission state” that is executed as a different image (the display timing may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-stage effect is performed, the disappearance effect will be different, so that it is possible to improve the performance and to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment interest. become. The special reception permission state may be the above-described specific reception permission state. The specific reception permission state and the special reception permission state are executed in the same manner as the first reception permission state with respect to the display timing of the haze image, the processing related to the output of the reception permission sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, and the like. .

  As described above, a plurality of “acceptance acceptance states in which the narrow-area annihilation effect is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode” are prepared in different generation conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one of them, a “second reception permission state” is prepared. However, in these acceptance-permitted states, in addition to the “second acceptance-permitted state”, “post-operation effects of a type different from the second acceptance-permitted state (for example, conversation advance notice, movable body operation, etc.) However, it is desirable to include a special acceptance allowable state in which the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed as the same image (the display timing may be the same). That is, in this case, even if different post-operation effects are performed, the disappearance effect itself will be displayed as the same image, so it is easy to accept the operation regardless of the type of post-operation effects. To be able to recognize. The special reception permission state is executed in the same manner as the second reception permission state with respect to the display timing of the haze image, the processing related to the output of the reception allowable sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, and the like.

  In the narrow area type disappearance effect, the image KSE related to the narrow area type disappearance effect is not displayed even when the haze image (integrated haze image IG) is hidden after the start of the post-operation effect. Instead, the display state is maintained (see FIG. 251 (i)). In this regard, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is longer than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation effect is started) until the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) is hidden. It is desirable to set the time until the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is not displayed after it is hidden. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be confirmed while maintaining the display state of the heel image (integrated 摸 image IG) after the start of the post-operation effect. The reason why the image is not clearly exposed is not caused by the “an image with the display state maintained”, but is caused by the rendering performance of the “image KSE related to the narrow-area annihilation effect”. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow area type disappearance effect is performed not by a fade-out that ends relatively early, but by dynamic display using an image different from the haze image. For such “dynamic display by different images” as a narrow area type disappearance effect, multiple types with different expectations are prepared, and they appear selectively according to the types of acceptable reception states with different generation conditions It is more desirable to do so.

  According to the wide area type disappearance effect according to the above-described production example, it is possible to expect a function that suggests that the first reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state, since the operation is accepted only by the player's operation and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect is executed without affecting the entire screen. In addition, it can be said that it is advantageous to execute the post-operation effect immediately in a state of good visual recognition by executing the image applied to the annihilation effect with a small narrow-type annihilation effect. According to such a configuration, in the case of a wide area type annihilation effect, it is required to change the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of a narrow type annihilation effect, the background image is not changed. It is possible to ensure visibility even by performing post-operation effects while maintaining the above.

  As described above, in the second acceptance-permitted state, a plurality of modes (first mode) in which the ratio (0% or 100%) at which the jackpot symbol is stopped is different based on the result of the performance determination according to the result of the jackpot determination In addition, the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed in any of (including the second mode). In this regard, when a first mode (a mode with a relatively high ratio) appears as a post-operation effect (second post-effects) and a second mode (a mode with a relatively low rate) appear, In either case, the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance-permitted state, a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the ratio (0% or 100%) at which the jackpot symbol is stopped is different based on the result of the performance determination according to the result of the jackpot determination. In addition, the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed in any one of the fourth mode. In this regard, when a third mode (a mode with a relatively high ratio) appears as a post-operation effect (first post-effects) and a fourth mode (a mode with a relatively low rate) appear, When the wide area type annihilation effect is executed in different modes (images) or when the third mode (a mode with a relatively high ratio) appears, the wide type annihilation effect is executed, and the fourth mode (relatively It is desirable that the narrow-type extinction effect be executed when a mode with a low ratio appears. In this case, the narrow area type disappearance effect may be the same as or different from the narrow area type disappearance effect performed in correspondence with the second acceptance permission state.

  According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance permission state in which the wide area type disappearance effect may occur in the first acceptance permission state and the second acceptance permission state, the disappearance effect itself has a degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest by reducing the visibility of the post-operation effect by the wide area type disappearance effect. It should be noted that, in addition to the first acceptance permissible state and the second acceptance permissible state, the fourth acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state, which will be described later, are both in the variation pattern lost in the jackpot and the variation pattern won in the jackpot. The first variation pattern and the second variation pattern described above, and the fourth variation pattern and the fifth variation pattern described later are “a variation pattern at the time of big hit and a variation pattern at the time of loss (at the time of loss)”. Needless to say, they are prepared in pairs.

  Further, the second acceptance permission state may be generated not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptable state is generated at a relatively early timing in the first variation pattern, and then the first acceptable state is generated at a relatively late timing.

  Timing when display output (display on the layer) related to the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image IG) ends within the period in which the image of the extinction effect is displayed (timing from when the operation is accepted until it is hidden) May be different between the first allowable reception state and the second allowable reception state.

  When an operation is accepted in the “situation where the image KTH related to the narrow-area type pre-production is displayed” shown in FIG. 251 (d), the image KTH is not hidden as a trigger. It is desirable that the post-operation effect starts to be executed while the display of the image KTH is continued. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f). After that, when the execution of the narrow area type disappearance effect is started, the “image KTH related to the narrow area type disappearance effect” makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the “image KTH related to the narrow area type previous effect”. It is desirable to develop the production as is done.

  In addition, even when an operation is accepted in the “situation in which the image HTH2 related to the wide area type front effect is displayed” shown in FIG. 252 (g), the image HTH2 is not displayed. First, it is desirable to start the post-operation effect while the display of the image HTH2 is continued. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i). After this, when the execution of the wide area type disappearance effect is started, the “image HTH2 related to the wide area type previous effect” is made difficult or invisible due to the “image HSE related to the wide area type disappearance effect”. It is desirable to improve the production.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, when the operation reception is permitted while the “specific type effect sound (BGM playback)” is in a non-output state, the “specific type effect sound ( "BGM playback)" does not necessarily have to be output again until the symbol is stopped. For example, at timing tC6, any one of “specific effect sound (BGM playback)” that is already in a non-output state and “effect sound related to post-operation effect” that is started when the operation is accepted Alternatively, a new special effect sound may be started to be output. The special effect sound is not started when the operation is accepted, but is output when a predetermined timing in the variation pattern arrives.

  The image related to the wide-area type pre-production and the image related to the narrow-type pre-production are displayed until the set time of the acceptance allowable state is completed (or until the automatic reception button is functioned). Also good. Further, the output state of the first permissible sound may be maintained until the set time of the permissible acceptance state is ended (or until the automatic acceptance button is functioned).

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the cocoon image that looks like the operation receiving unit is displayed as both the wide area type front effect and the narrow area type front effect, but in the wide area type front effect (first wide area type front effect). The display is performed in a mode (image data) different from the mode (image data) that appears in the period during which operation reception is permitted (first reception permitted state). As a result, in the wide-area type front effect (first wide-area type pre-production), even when the bag image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, the operation reception is permitted. While making it difficult for erroneous recognition to occur, it is possible to appeal to the occurrence of an operation reception effect (acceptance acceptance state), thereby enabling a large-scale front effect that requires a relatively long time to be performed. become. In the second wide-area type front effect and the narrow-area type pre-effect, the 摸 image (integrated 摸 image) is displayed in the form (image data) that appears in the period during which operation reception is allowed (acceptance acceptance state). As the previous effects are hidden (display area is reduced), this is gradually exposed. In other words, in this case, the display state of the haze image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptance-permitted state occurs continues from before the occurrence of the acceptance-permitted state to after it occurs. This is the same in the fourth acceptance permission state described later.

  Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 (FIG. 251) and the effect example shown in FIG. 250 (FIG. 252), the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (post-operation effect) Yes, at the time when execution starts (at least one of the changes caused by post-operation effects such as display changes and lamp lighting), the heel image (gauge image) is not displayed but displayed (and dynamically displayed) (See FIGS. 251 (f), 252 (i), etc.). After that, an annihilation effect (a narrow area type annihilation effect or a wide area type annihilation effect) is started (see FIGS. 251 (g), 252 (j), etc.). However, in the wide area type disappearance effect that is executed in a relatively large range, it becomes difficult to visually recognize most of the changes that appear once clearly (post-operation effects), and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, when the narrow area type extinction effect is executed, before the narrow area type extinction effect is executed, a change corresponding to the operation reception (a change caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or a lamp light emission). At least one of them) is started, and at this point, the eyelid image (gauge image) is not hidden and appears to be displayed without being difficult to visually recognize by the narrow area type disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area type extinction effect is executed, prior to the execution of the wide area type extinction effect, a change in accordance with the operation reception (display change, lamp operation, etc. At least one of the changes that occur may be prevented from starting execution. That is, in this case, when a change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects, such as the post-operation effects, the display change, the lamp emission, etc.) is started to be executed (gauge image) Is not displayed but is displayed, but it is difficult to view due to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 252 (j)).

  In other words, when a narrow-type extinction effect is executed, at the point in time when the change according to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as display change and lamp emission) is started, The display state of the eyelid image (gauge image) is maintained in the form that was displayed before the reception. In this case, when the post-operation effect starts to be executed, the haze image (gauge image) is not made difficult to visually recognize by the narrow area type disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area type disappearance effect is executed, FIG. 250 (j) may appear after passing through FIG. 250 (i), or the post-operation effect without passing through FIG. 250 (i). FIG. 250 (j) may appear at the time when the execution of is started.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the reception permission state executed in the “suppression operation reception effect” in which a specific type of effect sound can be suppressed is a state in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or non-output In addition to the first acceptance allowance state executed in the “strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 250)”, the “weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 249) is relatively low. As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance-permitted state executed in “)” is prepared. In this case, the specific type of effect sound to be suppressed may be a different effect sound, for example, an effect sound having the same function, such as a BGM playback effect sound. That's fine.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) in which operation reception is allowed occurs, it is possible to provide a rendering property as to how much the specific type of the effect sound is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-described effects, the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on which one of the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permitted state)” and the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” has occurred. It is desirable that the ratio of the appearance of the symbols is different. Here, when the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” occurs, the ratio (expectation) executed in a mode in which the “post-operation effect according to the operation reception” appears only at the time of winning the big hit is When the “strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)” occurs, the “post-operation effect according to the operation reception” is lower than the ratio (expectation) executed in a mode that appears only when the big win is won. ing. The percentage may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, with respect to the “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)”, an effect corresponding to a highly expected variation pattern that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) and a reach state are not formed (or reach). Although the state can be formed, it does not develop into SP reach), whereas it can appear in any of the productions according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, whereas “strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state))” "May not occur in the low expectation effect pattern but may occur as an effect corresponding to the high expectation variation pattern. Even in such a configuration, the big hit expectation degree when the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” occurs is lower than when the “strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)” occurs. It can be said.

  Further, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, it is possible to generate a “special effect state” that can be shifted based on the fact that the special effect condition is satisfied, and in the “special effect state”, the player Each time an operation is accepted during a set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (such as a bag image or gauge display) that prompts an operation is displayed, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is executed (started). According to such a “special effect state”, each time a set time (valid period) during which operation reception is allowed occurs, how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed. (Which of multiple modes including weak suppression mode and strong suppression mode appears) can be provided, and such performance can be provided separately from the degree of expectation suggested by post-operation effects. Since the degree of expectation is also suggested by (how much it is suppressed), it is expected that the game entertainment will be further improved when the reception of the performance is permitted. In this case, the above-described second reception permission state does not occur in the “special effect state”, but can be generated in an effect state (normal effect state) different from this.

  In addition, a variation pattern (for example, a high expectation variation pattern) in which a “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permitted state)” and a “strong suppression mode (first reception permitted state)” can be executed in sequence within the symbol variation. Of these, an effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the “weak suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)” on the side with relatively low expectation occurs, the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state) on the relatively high expectation side” occurs. ) "May remain, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound is small (weak suppression mode). It becomes like this.

Further, in order to more suitably suppress the decline in the gaming interest when the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” occurs, the “strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)”
-When a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly anticipated variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach performance with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the performance determination Regardless of which result is obtained (e.g., notice determination), the effect of the specific variation pattern occurs when it reaches a specific timing during SP reach, whereas “weak suppression mode (first suppression) About the “Operation Reception Direction”)
Even if the specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production determination (notice determination, etc.), it does not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” occurs in the performance according to the specific variation pattern, the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” in the performance according to the specific variation pattern. Compared to the case where it did not occur, the proportion that the post-operation effect is executed in a higher expectation mode when the effect is accepted in the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowed state)” (a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit It is desirable to increase the rate of execution at

  In such a configuration, in the production according to the specific variation pattern, the “strong suppression mode (first reception permitted state)” always occurs, whereas the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permitted state)” When the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” occurs, the post-operation effect with high expectation is executed in the “strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)”. Since the ratio becomes higher, it becomes possible to focus attention on whether or not the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)” occurs, and the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)”. ) "Can be improved when the game occurs.

  However, the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permitted state)” does not necessarily occur in the same variation pattern as the “strong suppression mode (first reception permitted state)”. “(First Acceptance Acceptable State)” occurs within the first variation pattern, and “Weak Suppression Mode (Fourth Acceptance Acceptable State)” may occur within the fourth variation pattern.

  FIG. 253 is a time chart illustrating an example of the contents of effects when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception permission state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the variation pattern in which the fourth acceptance permission state occurs.

  Now, for example, if the start condition is established (holding digestion) in the “special effect state” and the “fourth variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, a variation effect of the decorative design SZ (such as an effect description according to the fourth variation pattern and a sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “fourth variation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is as shown in FIG. 253 (b). In addition, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative design SZ is reached, the fourth reception permission state (valid period) in which the operation reception regarding the fourth post-operation effect is permitted. Is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance permission state (valid period),
A set time (valid period) in which operation reception is allowed while “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner is set, but within the set time (valid period) When the operation is accepted in the above-described manner, the “accepted BGM playback” is changed from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode in which the suppression degree is relatively low). 253 (a) and (b)) ”and when the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) in which the operation reception is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth reception permitted state “Non-automatic reception mode (refer to FIG. 253 (h))” that does not generate a post-production (post- fourth operation production)
Is generated as “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”. As a method of outputting “BGM playback sound” in a weakly suppressed manner, a volume value (maximum “100”) for a channel to which the “BGM playback sound” is assigned is used in the case of a strongly suppressed mode (for example, A method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) whose degree of suppression is lower than the volume value (audible volume) is “0”) can be employed.

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (fourth reception permission state)”, unless an operation is accepted by an operation by the player, a “specific type effect sound (BGM) (Sound of reproduction) is not shifted to “a state in which the sound is output in a suppression mode”, so that the “non-suppression reception effect (first reception permission state)” shown in FIG. 249 appears to occur. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the player operates, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a “suppression acceptance effect” by changing to “a state where a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppression mode”. As a result, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment through a surprise effect.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the fourth variation that allows “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)” to be generated depending on the result of the performance determination (notice determination, etc.). The pattern is selected only when it is in a special production state (for example, a pre-reading production zone), and when it is in the special production state, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production (FIG. 249) "is a ratio (expectation degree) when the symbol variation is stopped more than when the symbol variation is stopped, compared to the case where the variation pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) is selected. ) Should be high. According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” appears. Therefore, the above-mentioned surprise effect elements can be combined to improve the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-described effects more suitably, the “strong suppression mode (first reception permitted state)” can be generated in both “normal production state” and “special production state”. In the “normal production state”, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production (FIG. 249)” is performed within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired in the present). ) ”And“ suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 250) ”can be generated in sequence, and in“ special effect state ”, one fluctuation pattern (one pair that is paired at the moment) “Constrained suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)” and “Suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 250)” It is desirable to be able to generate it.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) has passed without receiving the operation, the “specific sound effect (BGM playback sound) ) Will be advanced to subsequent productions without being shifted to “a state of being output in a weakly suppressed manner”. That is, in this case, whether “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” or “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurred, and in turn, “normal effect state” and “special effect state” Since it is difficult to recognize which situation is in progress, the subsequent production will progress, so the expectation level is relatively low. Even when the “operation reception effect (effective period)” occurs, it is possible to more actively promote the player's operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)” occurs, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)”. ”Occurs, the same effect sound is output as the above-mentioned acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) over the same time, and this also causes“ conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect ” (FIG. 253) ”and“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249) ”are made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)”, similarly to the case where “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” occurs,
a. Prior to accepting the operation, a narrow-area type front effect is performed at timing tD1,
b. When the timing tD2 slightly before the set time has arrived, the output of the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2. point,
c. The second allowable sound (for example, message sound) is not output, and the first allowable sound (for example, sound effect) is output.
d. When the timing tD2 slightly before the set time has arrived, the effect display device 1600 displays an image (integrated image) that tricks the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect. And a gauge image showing the remaining time until the set time has elapsed,
e. Even if the operation is accepted while the acceptable sound is being output, the acceptable sound that is in the output state will not be aborted.
f. When the operation is accepted, the haze image (integrated haze image) and the gauge image are not hidden and the display state is continued g. A narrow-type annihilation effect is executed in the display of a spider image (integrated spear image) and a gauge image; and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow area disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow area disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted. Each configuration is also adopted, and this also causes either “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)” or “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)”. I try to make it difficult to recognize what they are doing. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptable reception sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, “a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weak suppression mode. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the state has been changed to “a state in which it is performed”, it is expected that a sense of tension is suitably maintained every time an effect is received.

  Accordingly, the display method of the habit image, the gauge image, the narrow area type pre-production, and the narrow area type disappearance effect is similar to the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” occurs, for example, in FIG. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is desirable to adopt the same mode as the effect example shown in FIG. 249 for the timing at which these images are not displayed. However, the same mode is not necessarily employed.

  In addition, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)”, if an operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation is accepted. As a post-operation effect in response, at least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated. It has become. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tD4 even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (effective period). In contrast, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the operation is accepted. However, in any state where the stage is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output when the timing tD4 has not elapsed. It is required to set to maintain the state.

  In addition, regarding the acceptable reception sound, the operation related display, the previous effect, the disappearance effect, and the post-operation effect that appear in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)”, another example of the effect example shown in FIG. 249 or FIG. Examples and modifications can be adopted as appropriate, and it is desirable to use the same method.

  In this production example, regarding the length of time for which “BGM playback sound” is output in a weakly suppressed manner (a predetermined period of time), “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (first Even when the operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 in the set time (valid period) of “4 acceptance permissible state)”, the timing for ending the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound related to the post-operation effect. It is set to be the same or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode for the “BGM playback sound” ends may be set to be always the same as the timing at which the post-operation effect effect sound ends. In any of such configurations, the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted can be highlighted.

  By the way, when the operation reception effect which can suppress a specific type effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) generate | occur | produces, the suppression degree is high (strong reception mode or the non-output 1st reception acceptance state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the weak acceptance mode is the fourth acceptance allowable state. However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether strong suppression mode, non-output, or weak suppression mode). Even if it is going to be, it is difficult to estimate without being compared whether it exists in a state (strong suppression mode or non-output) or a state (weak suppression mode) with a high suppression degree actually. This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed is not so large between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this makes the sense of tension when an operation acceptance effect occurs. Is suitably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the performance.

  However, in actuality, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced if it is impossible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production elements that are useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are included in the period from when the operation reception effect is started until it is ended. The following preparations are made in a time-sequential manner.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound that is output when the fourth permissible reception state is generated is output midway even if the presentation is accepted when in the output state. The first permissible sound that is output when the first permissible acceptance state is generated is accepted when it is in the output state, whereas it is output for a predetermined time without being terminated. Based on the reception of the production, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, since the first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, it is impossible to perform the estimation. It can be suppressed that interest is lowered.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptable state is generated, the second permissible sound is output in addition to the first permissible sound. By confirming whether or not sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the sound is in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound need not necessarily be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first acceptance permissible state and the fourth acceptance permissible state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted includes a special mode in the first reception permitted state. Display in any one of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)), while in the fourth reception allowed state, any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode. Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is assumed that the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode has not been estimated when the acceptance allowable sound and the operation-related display are output. In addition, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it can be estimated whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. In other words, in the post-operation effect (the fourth post-operation effect) according to the fourth reception permission state, both “the effect by the liquid crystal display” and “the effect by the effect sound” are “fixed from when the effect was received. In the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) corresponding to the first reception permission state, “the effect by the effect sound” is “a certain time from when the effect is received”. However, the “effect by liquid crystal display” is “finished when a predetermined timing arrives”. In other words, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the first reception permission state, the time from the “effect by the liquid crystal display” is ended to the time when the “effect by the effect sound” is ended at the timing when the operation is accepted. Since the shift becomes variable and a large shift occurs, it is possible to estimate whether the shift is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming such a shift.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is estimated whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the execution mode of the previous effect or the disappearance effect with respect to the acceptance allowable state. You can also. In other words, in the previous effect or disappearance effect corresponding to the fourth acceptance permission state, an image related to the previous effect or an image related to the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively narrow area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, with the previous effect and disappearance effect according to the first acceptance permission state, the image for the previous effect and the image for the disappearance effect are displayed in a relatively wide area, and the background image is changed at that time. It is supposed to be accompanied. By confirming such an aspect, it can be estimated whether it is a strong suppression aspect or a weak suppression aspect.

  However, even if stage elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are strong suppression modes or weak suppression modes. If there is something that can't be guessed, the game entertainment will eventually decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception permitted state (weak suppression mode), the BGM playback effect sound is generated based on the fact that the effect is received within the set time (valid period). A weak suppression mode is adopted. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output), when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, the BGM playback effect sound is switched to the strong suppression mode and the strong suppression is performed. In the manner, a set time (valid period) is generated and the production can be accepted. According to such a structure, the timing which suppresses a specific type effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a 4th reception permission state (weak suppression mode) and a 1st reception permission state (strong suppression mode). Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

  Moreover, in the fourth acceptance allowable state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the operation detection is performed within the set time (effective period). When there is not, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 253 (h)). That is, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the operation reception for the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM playback) is also performed. Since there is a price that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, it is possible to recognize that it is not a strong suppression mode but a weak suppression mode.

  Moreover, in the 1st reception acceptance | permission state (strong suppression aspect or non-output) concerning this embodiment, the timing which the process which makes the "BGM reproduction effect sound" the strong suppression aspect is complete | finished is the completion | finish timing of post-operation production. The timing is set to be the same as or before that. Therefore, in the fourth acceptance-permitted state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the processing for changing the “BGM playback effect sound” to the weak suppression mode is finished so that it can come after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by checking the timing when the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  In addition, as described above, in the fourth reception permission state according to the above-described effect example, the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is performed regardless of which timing is received within the set time (effective period). The length of the period in which the post-display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged. On the other hand, in the first reception permission state, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. The length of the period in which the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed.

  According to such a configuration, production performance is generated in “when to perform the production reception (operation)”, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which “the effect sound of BGM playback” is output at a level of suppression lower than the strong suppression mode can appear even when an operation opportunity is not given (when the fourth acceptance permission state does not occur). May be. That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, the proportion of the degree of suppression further increased until the symbol variation is stopped as the number of occurrences of the weak suppression mode including the fourth acceptance allowable state increases within the performance corresponding to the one variation pattern (the first). If the rate at which the one reception permission state is further executed) is increased, it is possible to further improve the stage performance through the suppression state with respect to the “BGM playback stage sound”.

  Further, the strong suppression mode for the “BGM playback effect sound” may also appear even when an operation opportunity is not given (when the first acceptance permission state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-inhibition mode without being provided with an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a presentation as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 253, when the fourth acceptance permission state occurs, the “BGM playback effect sound” is suppressed based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (weak). Suppression mode). However, instead of this, even when the fourth acceptance permission state occurs, the “BGM playback effect sound” is suppressed before the set time occurs, similarly to the case where the first acceptance permission state occurs. A mode (weak suppression mode) may be used, and a set time (valid period) during which production reception is allowed may be generated while being in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like), the “BGM playback effect sound” is set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing arrives. Since it will not be made into the suppression aspect (weak suppression aspect), the range of performance property can be expanded now. In the fourth acceptance-permitted state, the timing at which the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to do so.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the “specific type effect sound” non-audible (silent (audible volume is 0) or non-output (channel assignment is terminated)). Good.

  In the above-described production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is an operation target and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the “fourth reception permission state”, the operation button 410 can only be used as the operation target (first operation mode). However, in the “first reception permission state”, as described above, as a result of the notice effect determination, "When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the presentation has been received for “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”. The corresponding post-operation effects have the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion touched when the player operates) when the set time (effective period) is generated, and the operation receiving portion by the driving force when the set time (effective period) is generated An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode to be moved to a specific position. Here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is “thing that can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state where it has been moved to a specific position”. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given according to any of these modes. Further, as described above, an operation opportunity may be necessarily given to the sword decorative body 5001 in the first reception permission state.

  According to the above-described effect example, the reception allowed state (suppression) set so that the post-operation effect is executed while the “effect sound of BGM playback” is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In the case of the reception effect), when the bag image (integrated bag image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), the reception permission state is “first reception permission state (strong suppression mode)”. In other words, the special image is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)) and the reception permission state is “first reception permission state”. (Strong suppression mode or non-output) "or" fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode) ".

  In other words, in this case, when the spear image (integrated spear image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), if the operation is accepted under the situation where the acceptance allowable sound is being output, this is terminated halfway. (First reception permission state). On the other hand, when the haze image (integrated haze image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), when the operation is accepted under the situation where the acceptance allowable sound is being outputted, In some cases, the process is not terminated halfway (first reception permission state, fourth reception permission state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the bag image (integrated bag image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)).

  In addition, when the haze image (integrated haze image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), the reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode (first reception permission state). On the other hand, when the haze image (integrated haze image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the case where the acceptance-permitted state is executed in the automatic reception mode and the non-automatic reception mode. Will occur (first reception permission state, fourth reception permission state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain the tension when the haze image (integrated haze image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)).

  In this regard, when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the display is performed when the first acceptance permission state occurs and when the fourth acceptance permission state occurs. You may make it vary the magnitude | size concerning. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the acceptance allowable sound is terminated in the middle, or whether it is executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

  Also, according to the above-described effect example, by confirming whether the previous effect is executed as the “wide-area-type previous effect” or the “narrow-area-type previous effect”, a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) When the sound) is in the suppression mode, it can be easily confirmed whether this is the “weak suppression mode” or the “strong suppression mode or non-output”. After that, by confirming whether or not this operation is terminated halfway when the operation is performed while the acceptable sound is being output, it is possible to determine whether this is a “weak suppression mode (not terminated halfway)” or “strong suppression” The reconfirmation as to whether it is “mode or non-output (finished halfway)” can be performed while the post-operation effect is performed.

  In addition, according to the above-described production example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is in the strong suppression mode or non-output, and the wide area type When the weak suppression mode is adopted while the production is executed, the narrow-area type pre-production is executed while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is not in the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance when the narrow-area type pre-production is performed.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception permission state, the ratio that the mode that appears only at the big hit as the post-operation effect is higher than in the second reception permission state (expectation is high). It is as described above. This percentage may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each production example described above, when the first reception permission state (special reception permission state) occurs from when the operation is received, the second reception permission state (predetermined reception permission) Since the production contents (acceptance acceptable sound, habit image, previous production, etc.) appear different from when the (status) occurs, the second acceptance-allowed state occurs due to such production contents (or If the player knows in advance that this is happening), there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of a plurality of reception permission states, a fifth reception permission state (specification generated based on the fact that the fifth condition is established in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination (Acceptable Acceptance Status) is further prepared, and the fifth acceptable status is accepted while it is difficult to distinguish it from the second acceptable status until the operation is accepted. After that, by realizing the production progress reminiscent of the first acceptance permission state, it is made difficult for the game entertainment to be lowered at least until the operation is accepted. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, when the fifth acceptance permission state occurs, the first acceptance permission state is not reduced until the symbol is stopped after the second acceptance permission state occurs. It is desirable to set the rate of occurrence to be high. In addition, it is desirable to set the ratio of the big hit symbols to be different when the second acceptance permission state occurs and when the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. These percentages may be 0% or 100%.

  While making it difficult to discriminate between the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, after the operation is accepted in the fifth reception permission state, the progress of presentation that reminds the first reception permission state is realized. As a technique to do this, for example, the same mode is output as the acceptable reception sound when the second acceptable reception state occurs and when the fifth acceptable reception state occurs, but the first acceptable reception state occurs. In such a case, an aspect that cannot be output as the acceptable sound in either the second acceptable sound state or the fifth acceptable sound state (for example, different types of sound as the first acceptable sound, Further, a mode of output) is output. Then, when an operation is accepted in the second acceptance-permitted state, a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while continuously outputting the sound that was in the output state at the time when the operation was accepted. In contrast, when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance permissible state or the fifth acceptance permissible state, all (all) sounds that were in the output state when the operation was accepted are output in a suppressed manner. The state or the non-output state is set, and the post-operation effect (the post-first operation effect or the fifth post-effect effect) is executed in this state. In this regard, if the specific effect movable body is used as a target for causing a change in both the first post-operation effect and the fifth post-operation effect, the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state are distinguished. However, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, it is possible to realize a performance development that reminds the first acceptance-permitted state. As a result, the possibility that the first acceptance permission state has occurred (possibility that the acceptance permission sound has been mistakenly heard) comes to be conscious, and it is expected to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment interest. .

  That is, in this case, in the first acceptance-permitted state, at least an effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect). Performing a movable effect (effects shown in FIGS. 162 (C) and (D), FIGS. 163 (CC1) to (CC3), etc.) for moving the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is possible.

  On the other hand, even in the fifth acceptance permission state, at least an effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect). It is desirable to execute the post-production with the content of the production greatly different. In other words, the fifth reception permission state is merely “even if an operation reception is possible even if a situation in which the appearance of the previous presentation or the reception permission sound suggests the possibility of the second reception permission state having low expectation appears. Until it is made, it is prepared for the purpose of making it possible to maintain the gaming interests, and gives the misrecognition that the first acceptance-permitted state has occurred at the time when the post-operation effect is executed. If this happens, it will be inevitable that the game will be less enjoyable when a misrecognition is noticed.

  Therefore, as such post-operation effect (post-fifth operation effect), it is desirable to perform an effect that has a tendency to be suppressed as compared to the case of the first post-operation effect. For example, an operation is accepted. The effect change that does not operate the specific effect movable body that is in the light emission state at the point of time (no driving force is generated), reduces the light emission range, or makes it non-light emission state It is possible to perform as an effect that causes It should be noted that in the post-second operation effect, there is no effect change that tends to be suppressed such that the light emission range of the specific effect movable body is reduced or the non-light emission state is set. In this case, the specific movable decorative body has a predetermined light emitting portion.

  According to such a configuration, an effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to evoke the first acceptance permission state (the first post-operation effect), thereby the second acceptance permission state (second While it is made to recognize that it is not a post-operation effect), it is determined calmly that it is not in the first reception allowed state (first post-operation effect) as the suppressed content of the production is gradually revealed. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In order to more suitably execute the fifth post-operation effect as an effect having a tendency to be suppressed compared to the case of the first post-operation effect, the post-first operation effect is an operation target. The operating means (operation receiving portion such as a production button) emits light (or causes a change in light emission) when the operation is accepted, and driving means (motor or the like) provided corresponding to the operating means ) Is caused to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), while in the post-fifth stage effect, the operation means (operation receiving part such as an effect button) that is the operation target is operated. When the reception is made, the light is turned off (may be a mode of gradually turning off), and a predetermined movement is performed without driving a driving means (such as a motor) provided corresponding to the operation means. ( It is desirable to ensure that does not cause the dynamic, etc.). As described above, while the post-operation effects (the first post-operation effect and the fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative body are executed in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, The effects described above can be favorably achieved by causing the effects after the first operation and the fifth post-operation effects to appear so that the contents of the effects are exactly opposite.

  FIG. 254 is a time chart illustrating an example of the contents of effects when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptance-permitted state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the variation pattern in which the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. The fluctuation pattern will be described as the fifth fluctuation pattern, but may be the first fluctuation pattern as described above.

  Now, assuming that the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), and “fifth change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. After that, a variation effect of the decorative design SZ (such as a depiction of the effect according to the fifth variation pattern and a sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “fifth variation pattern” itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), the fifth operation is performed when the timing tE3 when the fifth predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative design SZ is started. The fifth reception permission state (valid period) in which the operation reception regarding the post-production is permitted is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for the fifth acceptance permission state (valid period),
-“Unsuppressed acceptance allowed state (allowed to accept operation while“ BGM playback sound (specific type effect sound) ”corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is maintained in the output state in the unsuppressed mode. 254 (see FIGS. 254 (a) and (b)) ”, and when no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation reception is permitted. Even so, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started “automatic reception mode (see FIG. 254 (i))”
It is generated as a “non-suppression / automatic reception effect” executed by. The timing tE3c does not necessarily arrive within the set time, and may arrive at or after the set time ends.

  According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second acceptance-permitted state has occurred until the post-operation effect starts to be executed, whereas the post-operation effect starts to execute according to the automatic reception mode. If it is done, the progress of the performance as if reminiscent of the first acceptance permission state is realized, so that it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the post-operation effect starts to be executed. .

  Also, in the fifth reception permission state, as in the second reception permission state, as shown in FIGS. 254 (b), (e), and (j), a set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation reception is permitted. ) Occurs at a timing tE2 slightly before the occurrence of the “acceptance acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)”, and the output state is changed in a manner that crosses the timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. I try to keep it. The length of time from when the first permissible sound starts to be accepted until the operation is accepted is also the same. In addition to the fact that the sound itself output as the first allowable sound is the same, the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output as in the second reception allowable state. As a result, the same aspect appears in the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state with respect to the acceptable reception sound until the operation is accepted, so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. Be expected.

  However, as described above, in the second allowable reception state, the operation is performed at timing tB3a (FIG. 249 (e)) in which the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is in the output state after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the reception is made, the set time itself is ended, while the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not interrupted, and the timing at which the first allowable sound is output (no operation is performed). The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (FIG. 249 (e)) as in the case of the first reception allowance. When the operation is accepted at the timing tE3a (FIG. 254 (e)) in which the “acceptable sound” is in the output state, the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not only terminated but the set time itself is ended. Also That is, with respect to the “acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)”, such behavior (intermediate termination) appears when an operation is accepted in the first acceptable state. Because there is (FIG. 250 (e)), although there is a situation in which the fifth acceptance permission state is occurring, the production progress as if recalling the first acceptance permission state is realized, It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance-permitted state (in the figure, timing tE3a), an effect display device is provided as a post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. A post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and an output sound (effect sound) after operation by a speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 254 (d)). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is maintained in an execution state until timing tE5 regardless of the timing when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is executed only for a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not necessarily executed.

  Although illustration is omitted, in this effect example, a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) corresponding to the fifth reception-permitted state and a post-operation effect (first operation corresponding to the first reception-permitted state). In any of the “post-operation effects”, at least an “effect using a specific effect movable body” is executed. As described above, the production contents of the “production using the specific production movable body” corresponding to the first acceptable reception state and the “production using the specific production movable body” corresponding to the fifth reception acceptable state are as described above. It is. For example, as the post-first operation effects, the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 162 (C), (D), FIGS. 163 (CC1) to (CC3). Etc.) can be performed. In addition, as the post-fifth operation effect, an effect change such as reducing the light emission range of the specific effect movable body that was in the light emission state at the time when the operation was accepted or making it non-light emission state is generated. It can be performed as a production.

  According to such a configuration, an effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to evoke the first acceptance permission state (the first post-operation effect), thereby the second acceptance permission state (second While it is made to recognize that it is not a post-operation effect), it is determined calmly that it is not in the first reception allowed state (first post-operation effect) as the suppressed content of the production is gradually revealed. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  Also, in the effect example (fifth reception permission state) shown in FIG. 254, similarly to the effect example (second reception permission state) shown in FIG. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a habit image deceiving the operation means that is the operation target, and displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. Each is done. Further, the display mode of the haze image and the gauge image is the same as that in the second reception allowable state, and is displayed as an integrated haze image IG, for example. The same is true in that the special image shown in FIG. 232 (d) is not displayed as the integrated haze image IG. Thereby, until the operation is accepted, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state with respect to the bag image and the gauge image, so that the game entertainment is suitably maintained. It is expected.

  In this example as well, the timing at which the haze image is displayed is the same as the timing when the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) starts to be output, but this is not restrictive, and either one starts earlier You may be made to do. Or you may make it start only any one of a haze image and a reception permissible sound (for example, only a haze image) before timing tE3. However, even when these other examples and the other examples described above are adopted, the configuration until the operation is accepted should be matched between the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 254 (c) to 254 (f), when the operation t is received when the timing tE3a arrives while such an integrated haze image (haze image, gauge image) is displayed. Is assumed. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example has a fifth post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change due to the lamp, and movable decoration). The pachinko machine 1 according to this example starts at least one of the production operations by the body. At the time when the production after the fifth operation is started, the integrated cocoon image (摸 image, gauge image) Is not hidden and remains displayed. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tE3a), the change resulting from the integrated haze image (specific layer) does not occur, and a little time (predetermined time) Until the timing tE3b has passed, the “display on the integrated 摸 image (摸 image, gauge image)” in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. Thus, the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tE3b arrives, an image (an extinction effect) that is displayed in a state where it is difficult to see or make a part or the whole of the integrated coffin image (the coffin image, gauge image) in the display state invisible or invisible. Make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated 摸 image (摸 image, gauge image) is not hidden and displayed even when such an image (disappearing effect) starts to be displayed. Maintain state. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated cocoon image (摸 image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated 摸 image (摸 image, gauge) No change caused by the image) is caused, and the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, when the disappearance effect is displayed on the layer on the front side, the haze image and the gauge image are difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized.

  That is, in this case, although it is difficult to visually recognize the habit image and the gauge image (integrated habit image) or to display the annihilation effect image on the predetermined layer for the purpose of making it invisible,摸 image or gauge image (integrated 摸 image) displayed on a specific layer (behind a predetermined layer (a lower priority side)) itself remains as it was when operation acceptance was allowed The display is maintained so that no change occurs. In addition, for the gauge image, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced is continued across the operation reception. As a result, the aspect (at least a part) when the operation acceptance is permitted even in the process of making it difficult to visually recognize the gutter image or the gauge image (integrated gutter image) or making it invisible. It becomes possible to visually recognize.

  Also, the display output (display on the layer) related to the integrated 摸 image (摸 image, gauge image) is completed within the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) during which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed. The image of the disappearance effect is displayed in a situation where the habit image (habit image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer.

  Since the display method after the operation is accepted with respect to the samurai image and the gauge image is common to the first acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state, this may reduce the game entertainment interest. There is no.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 254, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 at which the fifth acceptance permission state occurs, less than half of the predetermined display area The execution of a narrow-area type pre-production that uses only this area is started. Then, within the period in which the image related to such a narrow-area type pre-production is displayed, first, the display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) with the operation receiving unit displayed, and the first allowable sound Output is started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the cocoon image (here, the integrated cocoon image) is started, it becomes difficult for a part or the whole of the cocoon image (integrated 摸 image) to be visually recognized by the image related to the narrow-area type pre-production. Yes. That is, as the time lapses, the display range of the image related to the narrow area type pre-production is reduced or the transmittance is increased, so that “摸 image (integrated 摸A performance such as “increasing the visibility of (image) gradually” is provided. In this regard, even in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, when the narrow-area type front effect is being executed and the heel image (here, the integrated heel image) is being displayed, the fifth acceptance-permitted state The timing tE3 at which the occurrence of the occurrence of the operation is received and the operation reception is permitted, and the narrow-area type pre-production is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs.

  Here, as an image used for such a narrow-area type pre-production, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed may be used. Then, the haze image (integrated haze image) and the image (narrow region type pre-production) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the haze image (integrated haze image IG) gradually increases in the moving image. It may be designed to express how it is being raised. However, it is desirable to use the same image of the narrow-area type pre-production that corresponds to the fifth reception-permitted state as the narrow-area type pre-production image that corresponds to the second reception-permitted state.

  Note that, in the narrow-area type pre-production, not only the image display in the production display device 1600 but also production sound related to this may be output. However, in view of the fact that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to operation, It can be said that it is desirable to increase the concentration of the production effect without performing the output of the production sound related to this, and executing it as the image display in the production display device 1600.

  As described above, the same mode appears in the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state with respect to the narrow-area type front effect that occurs before the operation reception is permitted. It is expected to be maintained favorably.

  According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the effect is developed in the same manner as the effect contents shown in FIGS. 251 (a) to (e). Even if the player knows in advance that the first acceptance permission state with high expectation has not occurred, it has an interest in whether the second acceptance permission state or the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. It will be possible to control the decline in the entertainment interest of the game.

  However, as described above, after the player's operation is detected in the fifth reception permission state and the execution of the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) is started, the first reception permission state is not the second reception permission state. The production will be developed in such a manner as to recall.

  In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation by the player is detected (operation accepted) in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, the sound that is in the output state in an unsuppressed manner at the time when the operation is accepted ( All of the above are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or to the non-output state, and this is terminated halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 250 (first reception permissible state), when an operation is accepted, the “first permissible sound” and “second permissible sound” that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are displayed in the strongly suppressed mode. In this example (fifth reception permission state) shown in FIG. 254, when the operation is accepted, the output state is not suppressed. The “BGM playback sound” and the “first permissible sound” that are in the output state in the mode are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or in the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. As a result, regarding the sounds (all of them) that were in the output state in a non-suppressed manner before the operation is accepted, the operation acceptance is triggered in both the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state. As a result, the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state is set, so that the first acceptance allowable state can be recalled at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In this case, either the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state may be set in response to the operation reception, but the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state It is desirable to perform the same processing in For example, in the second reception permission state, if the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then is set to the non-output state in response to the operation reception, the operation reception is also triggered in the fifth reception permission state. The sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then will be in the non-output state.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (g) to (k), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptance-permitted state ends) without detecting any operation by the player. As described above, since the fifth reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, when a predetermined timing tE3c arrives without any operation by the player, and when the operation is received. The same process is executed.

  Therefore, at the timing tE3c, the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) is not only started to be executed, but also the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (the sound of BGM playback here) is strongly suppressed. Either the output state in the mode or the non-output state is set, and these are terminated halfway. Also in the first reception permission state (FIG. 250), a predetermined sound (for example, the first allowable sound) is output in a non-suppressed manner until the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, and the timing tC4f In FIG. 5, the output state may be set in the strong suppression mode or may be in the non-output state, and this may be terminated halfway.

  Further, at the timing tE3d, while the post-fifth operation effect is already in the execution state, the execution of the “wide area disappearance effect” is started as the above-described disappearance effect. The “wide area disappearance effect” may not necessarily be the same as that in the case of the first reception permission state, but it disappears with a change from the background image displayed until the operation is accepted. It is desirable to be executed as an effect. In other words, in this case, it goes without saying that it is executed using at least half of the display area. Thereby, also regarding the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed), the same mode (the wide area-type disappearance effect) is the same in both the second acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state. Therefore, after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed, the first acceptance permission state can be recalled, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. The manner of the disappearance effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is activated (timing tE3c). This is the same as in the first reception permission state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 254, the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) ends at the timing when the “BGM playback sound” is output again in a non-suppressed manner in the fifth acceptance-permitted state. However, it may be the timing when the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or the post-operation effect (the fifth post-operation effect) may be set. It may be the timing that comes after the end.

  Also, in the first acceptance-permitted state, similarly to the fifth acceptance-permitted state, the timing at which the “BGM playback sound” is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set when the operation is accepted. Also good.

  In the first reception permission state or the fifth reception permission state, a process of setting the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppression mode until then to “output in the suppression mode” or “non-output state”; The process to be output does not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, and any process may be started as long as the operation is accepted.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance permission state, the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emission state until that time is turned off for a predetermined time (the fifth operation). When the operation is received in the first reception permitted state, the driving force is applied to the specific effect movable body so that a predetermined effect operation appears (after the first operation). Production) is desirable. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, a driving force is generated for the driving unit corresponding to the operation unit that is the operation target so that a predetermined movement (vibration or the like) appears in the operation unit. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such processing in the fifth post-operation effect. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, the light emission mode of the operation means that is the operation target is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the light emission in the operation means that is the operation target is turned off. It is desirable to make it. It is desirable that these processes in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state be an aspect that can appear when the same result (for example, a big hit win) is obtained as a result of the big hit determination.

  In addition, when a movable effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the post-first operation effect, it is desirable that light can be emitted in a manner that does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

  In addition, in the post-first operation effect, an effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is output after the start of output, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is performed. Is output for a predetermined period of time, it is desirable that a state in which no effect sound is output in a non-suppressed manner (a state that is output in a strongly suppressed manner or a non-output state) appears. According to such a configuration, the effect after the fifth operation has a tendency to be suppressed as compared with the case of the effect after the first operation while appropriately performing the effect sound according to the operation reception. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound output when the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state are generated be different. That is, as described above, the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output in the first reception allowable state, whereas the second reception allowable state is the second allowable sound (message sound). The allowable sound (message sound) is not output and the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself be output as a different sound.

  Moreover, as above-mentioned, it is shown by the same aspect (FIG. 232 (a)-(c)) as a haze image (integrated haze image) in the 1st reception permission state and the 5th reception permission state (2nd reception permission state). Mode) can be displayed. However, even when the same mode is displayed as the heel image (integrated heel image) in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state (second reception permission state), the size of the display is large. It is desirable to make them different (similar shapes), and to display in a mode that is smaller than that in the first reception-permitted state in the fifth reception-permitted state (second reception-permitted state). However, the size is displayed in the same manner in the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state. It should be noted that in the first acceptable state, a special mode can be displayed as a coffin image (integrated coffin image), but in the fifth acceptable state (second acceptable state), the coffin image (integrated coffin image) As described above, the special mode is not displayed as).

  In addition, in the first post-operation effect according to the first reception permission state, the effect sound (variation pattern) that does not trigger the operation reception while the post-operation output sound according to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner. It is desirable that the production sound output at a predetermined timing is started to be output in a non-suppressing manner (for example, BGM is restored). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect according to the fifth acceptance permission state, the effect sound that does not trigger the operation acceptance while the post-operation output sound according to the operation acceptance is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner ( It is desirable that the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the variation pattern is not started to be output in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is set to the non-output state, the effect sound that is not triggered by the operation reception (the effect sound output at a predetermined timing in the variation pattern) is not generated. Since the output is started in the suppression mode, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first acceptance allowable state.

  In addition, as described above, the second acceptance permission state can be generated by both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state does not occur. When the state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance permission state may occur within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. In addition, the fifth acceptance permission state is generated by allowing the fifth acceptance permission state to occur in both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permission state does not occur. In such a case, there is a possibility that the first reception permission state may occur within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the fifth acceptance permission state occurs, the rate at which the first acceptance permission state occurs during the period until the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the second acceptance permission state occurs. It is desirable to set to. This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player detects in advance that the first acceptance permission state has not occurred before the time when the operation is accepted, the fifth acceptance permission state has occurred. Since the possibility can be expected, a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  According to the production example described above, as a result of the operation being accepted when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), the operation is accepted. If the acceptable reception sound is not terminated on the basis of reception, not only the acceptable reception sound but also other sounds that are in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (such as “BGM playback sound”) The output state is maintained (see FIG. 249). On the other hand, as a result of the operation being accepted when the cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), based on the operation reception When the acceptable reception sound is terminated midway, not only the acceptable reception sound but also other sounds that are in the output state in the non-suppression mode (such as “BGM playback sound”) are output or non-output in the strong suppression mode. (See FIG. 254).

  According to the above-described production example, in a situation where a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, an operation is accepted when the haze image (integrated haze image) is displayed, and as a result, the operation is accepted based on the operation acceptance. When the permissible sound is terminated halfway, “when the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)” and “it was in the light emission state” There is a case where the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or turned off and no effect operation is caused (FIG. 254). Therefore, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment in a situation where the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway. In the case where “the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner and the specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)”, the “light emission area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or turned off” is not emitted. It is desirable to make the lighted portion also emit light.

  In each effect example mentioned above and each effect example described later, the integrated haze image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. In addition, when the heel image and the gauge image are displayed separately as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

  In each example described above and each example described later, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output so that there is a time when the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output. The output of the second allowable sound may be started.

  In addition, in the acceptance allowable state according to each of the above-described examples and each example described later, the heel image is displayed as an integrated heel image IG including the gauge image GG, but is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. It does not have to be.

  Acceptable states according to each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described later can occur in both the variation pattern at the time of big hit and the variation pattern at the time of loss.

  In each of the above-described acceptance permissible states and each acceptance permissible state described later, when the post-operation effect is executed, the annihilation effect is executed as an image different from the spear image, but this is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode. As a result, it is desirable that the disappearance effect be executed by fading out the haze image itself only when the post-operation effect is not executed, in order to prevent the expectation from being recognized. In this case, the process in which the haze image itself displayed on the specific layer is changed from the mode in which the acceptance is permitted is executed.

  In each of the above-described reception permission states and each of the following reception permission states, even if the same reception permission state, even when winning a big hit, when winning a big hit, The type of extinction effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such an aspect.

  The wide area type disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type extinction effect is set to less than half of the display screen. It does not have to satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half. As for the previous production, the wide-area type production is set to be more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-type production type is less than half of the display screen. ", It is not always necessary to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half.

  The post-operation effect may be executed by any one of liquid crystal display, sound output, and light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5. In short, anything that causes some change in display, sound, light emission, etc., triggered by the acceptance of the operation.

  Further, the “specific type of effect sound” may be a BGM playback sound output during normal fluctuations, or may be a BGM playback sound output across a plurality of fluctuations.

  Moreover, the 4th reception permission state does not necessarily need to be performed by the non-automatic reception mode, and may be performed by the automatic reception mode.

  Also, a post-operation effect when the operation is accepted in the first reception-permitted state (first post-operation effect), and a post-operation effect when the operation is accepted in the fourth reception-permitted state (fourth post-operation effect) Therefore, it is desirable to make the contents of each production different.

  In each of the above examples and each of the examples described later, when an annihilation effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, a process of reducing the visibility of the integrated haze image IG (specific layer) itself (for example, increasing the transmittance) May also be performed.

  In each of the above examples and each of the examples described later, an image related to the annihilation effect (wide area annihilation effect, narrow area annihilation effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance. Even if the image is displayed so as to overlap the entire haze image (integrated haze image), the mode of the haze image (integrated haze image) can be confirmed.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each of the effect examples described later, the “narrow-area type effect” is “background change (a background image that has been displayed until then cannot be seen and a new background image is displayed. It is good also as a "pre-production without the production | generation which makes a production perform in a state". In this case, the “wide-area type front effect” means “background change (the effect that makes the background image displayed so far invisible and the effect is performed with the new background image displayed)” It means "pre-production with". The background image may be a black or white image.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each of the effect examples described later, the aspect shown in FIG. 232 (d) may be omitted as the aspect of the integrated haze image. In this case, the “special mode” is a mode (mode shown in FIG. 232 (c)) in which the shape of the heel image itself with the operation receiving portion is the same and the shape of the peripheral decorative image is different. Will be used.

  In each of the above-described effects examples and each of the effects examples described later, when a cocoon image (integrated cocoon image) is displayed, the cocoon image is displayed as “operation in a movable region” or “operation” as an operation means (operation receiving unit). As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of “behavior when performed”. In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display be continued on a specific layer until the display is made non-display even after the operation is accepted.

  In each production example described above and each production example that will be described later, the display method for the cocoon image is appropriately changed to the contents described in FIGS. 232 to 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these drawings, and other examples. Or may be added. In addition, regarding the bag image, gauge image, reception allowable sound, and post-operation effect when the first reception allowable state occurs, “BGM” in FIGS. 212 to 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these drawings, and other examples The description may be changed or added as appropriate to the description applied to the description and the other examples described with respect to the “effective period generated while the sound of reproduction is in the strong suppression mode”. . In addition, regarding the bag image, gauge image, acceptable sound, and post-operation effect when the second acceptable state of occurrence occurs, “BGM” in FIGS. 212 to 248 and the explanatory texts and other examples corresponding to these drawings The description may be changed or added as appropriate to the explanation applied to the description and the other examples described with respect to the “effective period generated while the sound of reproduction is in a non-suppressed manner”. .

[More detailed presentations of 摸 image extinguishing effects]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern determination can be executed. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Among them, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination or the like) regarding which expected effect (notice effect or the like) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) will be executed.

  As described above, when such an effect determination (fluctuation pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display the content of the effect according to the result of the effect determination. The variation effect by the decorative design according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice), the movable body operation (function effect effect), and the like. As a result, when the variation effect by the decorative design is executed together with the expected effect on the background depiction and the movable body operation, etc., when it is stopped and displayed on the big hit symbol, the bonus hit game as a privilege or high The transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be executed.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design is provided as an effect having “a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination”, the background depiction, the movable body operation, etc. The expected effect relating to is provided as an effect having “a degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a function that suggests a ratio (including 0% and 100%)”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the identification of the highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops to SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination. No matter which result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), if the design effect based on the specific change pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the effect acceptance It is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that is acceptable.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) that are not formed even in the reach state as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even if a special result is obtained in the effect determination (eg, notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the acceptance of the effect is permitted when the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. The permitted acceptance state (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the effect determination, even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) does not occur. . In addition, the acceptance allowable state (effective period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptable acceptance state (effective period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of the above-mentioned “specific variation pattern”, the variation pattern that generates an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to avoid this or to lower the selection ratio.

  By the way, the acceptance allowable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is that for an effect member to be rendered as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). A post-reception effect (post-operation effect) that generates a predetermined change (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and an effect operation by a movable decorative body) is executed. Therefore, the performance of the reception acceptance state (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game entertainment related to the reception period will be lowered.

  In addition, including the above-described examples and examples described later, the “operation by the player” to be detected is a direct operation by the player, such as the “operation button 410” or the “sword ornament 5001”. It is not limited to those that are pressed (pushing or slashing), but “contact action by a player on a specific part” to be detected by a touch sensor, or “player in a specific space” to be detected by a non-contact sensor. This also includes “operation by”. In short, what is provided is one or a plurality of receiving means (operating means) for receiving an action (pressing action, sword action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) by a player so as to be used for production. That's fine.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effects are provided. In addition, about each rendering property (each structure) demonstrated below, you may not necessarily provide all of those structures, and may only be provided with arbitrary structures. Furthermore, each rendering property (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration that can suppress a decrease in the game entertainment related to the reception period.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, for a spear image display displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), an operation by the player is accepted. After the production has progressed (after the production change based on acceptance has been started), it is possible to display it, and even after the production has proceeded based on the acceptance, the 摸 image display is accepted The player can grasp which mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) is displayed within the period.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the content of the progress that is progressed when received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc. as a post-reception effect, A plurality of reception periods (effective periods) having different types) are prepared, and a reception period (effective period) of a type corresponding to the result of the determination (production determination) can be generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, when an operation by the player is received within the specific reception period, a specific post-reception effect image is displayed as an “effect display device 1600” based on the reception. In addition to the specific post-reception effect image, a specific mode can appear, and when the specific mode appears, it is difficult to visually recognize the haze image display. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has been displayed as the haze image display even after the acceptance, and the specific mode before the haze image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility, it is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally moved from “摸 image display” to “specific post-reception effect image”. .

  However, since the trapezoidal image display is intended to be displayed within the acceptance period when it has not been accepted yet, if the trapped image display is displayed after acceptance, it will be accepted depending on the acceptance. In addition, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the specific post-reception effect image is in a displayed state, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the spear image display is hidden (not visible) while the specific form appears, while the specific post-reception effect The image is displayed while the specific mode appears. That is, in this case, after the player accepts the action, the display effect is changed from the pre-reception display (摸 image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception effect image) while the specific mode appears. Since the transition will be realized, just confirm whether it is in the situation before the specific aspect appears or the specific aspect has already appeared. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the display effect to the post-reception display (specific post-reception effect image) has been completed.

  Moreover, although it mentions later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the specific aspect and the specific post-reception effect image appear based on acceptance, but the specific aspect is the specific reception. It appears in a situation where the specific post-reception effect image is not yet displayed before the post-effect image is displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the specific post-reception effect image has not yet been displayed, the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize according to the specific mode. After the reception, the production image is likely to appear soon, and it is possible to prompt the player to prepare in advance to change the gaze destination by the player from “the image display made difficult to see”. .

[Configuration 2]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the first reception period (valid period) among the plurality of reception periods (valid period), A mode in which the first post-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize separately from the first post-reception effect image (first effect mode) Can appear. In addition, when an action by the player is received within the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods (valid periods), the first post-reception effect image is different based on the reception. In addition to the second post-reception effect image, the second post-reception effect image can be displayed, and a mode (second effect) that is different from the case of the first reception period as a mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize. Aspect) can appear. The “specific aspect” may correspond to either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect, or may not correspond to either.

  According to such a configuration, the haze image display is visually recognized without confirming which of the “first post-reception effect image” and the “second post-reception effect image” is displayed as the post-reception effect image. The type of the post-reception effect image (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) can be inferred simply by confirming what aspect is difficult. That is, the aspect (first effect aspect, second effect aspect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display is a predetermined area and at least part of the habit image display in the “display screen of the effect display device 1600”. It is realized as an image displayed in the overlapping specific area (if it overlaps all from the beginning of appearance, a predetermined transmittance will be set) It goes without saying that this is realized as an effect (for example, a movable object effect) using a predetermined effect body at the overlapping position. Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change the gaze destination from the spear image display even after the acceptance, the type of mode that appears at the gaze destination (so as to overlap with the spear image display) (first effect mode, second effect mode) ) So that the type of the post-reception effect (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) can be estimated without changing the gaze destination. Become

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the third reception period (valid period) among the plurality of reception periods (valid period), A third post-reception effect image that is different from both the first post-reception effect image and the second post-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, but the third post-reception effect image Separately from the above, the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception period can appear as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display.

  According to such a configuration, when the first effect mode appears as an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display, it is unclear which of the first and third post-acceptance effect images appears. As a mode of making it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display, it is possible to guess that the second post-acceptance effect image appears when the second effect mode appears. That is, in this case, for example, when the first effect mode appears, it can be recognized that the possibility that the second after-effects effect image is output is denied. When it appears that it is unclear which one will appear, and the player will be interested in which one will appear. This makes it possible to favorably promote the shift of the gaze destination to the place where the post-acceptance production is being executed while maintaining the performance and tension.

  Here, “post-reception effect image” has been described as an example of the post-reception effect, but for example, “lamp light emission”, “movable body operation”, and the like as the post-reception effect include the first reception period and the second reception period. If it is executed in a different manner (or executed when there is an acceptance within one reception period, but is not executed when there is an acceptance within the other reception period), It is also possible to replace the “post-effect image” with “lamp light emission” or “movable body operation”. In any case, in view of the above-mentioned effect such as “being able to infer the type of the post-reception effect without changing the gaze destination”, the haze image display is displayed for the post-reception effect. The position is shifted from the front view and is implemented as a position that does not overlap (a position that the player cannot confirm unless the gaze destination is changed from the position where the saddle image display is displayed). In addition, when a plurality of post-acceptance effects such as “post-acceptance effect image”, “lamp light emission”, and “movable body operation” are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-acceptance effects is the above If it corresponds to the “post-reception effect”, it can be said that the above-described effects are achieved.

  When a plurality of post-reception effects (a plurality of post-reception modes) such as “post-reception effect image”, “lamp light emission”, and “movable body operation” are performed in parallel, the post-reception effects ( The point that at least one of the “post-reception mode” can be regarded as the “post-reception effect” can be applied to each effect example described later in addition to the effect examples described above.

[Configuration 3]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation by the player is received within the reception period (specific reception period), the post-reception effect ( The special effect mode can be executed as one mode), and during the period of execution of the special effect mode, there are a state where the haze image display is relatively easy to see and a state where the haze image display is relatively hard to see I have to.

  In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a spear image display even after the execution of the special effect mode (post-acceptance effect) is started based on the acceptance. . In addition, during the execution period of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), it is made difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image display, so that the “special effect mode (post-reception effect)” It is expected to prompt the player to move the gaze target by the player naturally.

  In the pachinko machine 1, the special effect mode (post-acceptance effect) does not affect the visibility of the haze image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily viewable state) before being accepted. The execution is started as follows. More specifically, the haze image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, the special effect mode (post-reception effect) includes at least a part of the predetermined area. It is not an image display that is used and is not an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined region in front view. Thus, during the period of execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the special image mode (post-reception effect) is changed from the “摸 image display” to the state in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize the bag image display. ) "Is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when acceptance is made within a specific reception period, a state in which at least a special effect mode and a predetermined effect mode appear in parallel appears based on the acceptance. It has become. However, after the special effect mode is started (after the special effect mode), the predetermined effect mode starts executing so as to adversely affect the visibility of the haze image display (makes it difficult to view the haze image display). It is supposed to be. Thus, during the period of execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), the special image mode (post-reception effect) is changed from the “摸 image display” to the state in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize the bag image display. ) "Is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

  The process of causing the predetermined effect mode to appear is also started to be executed based on the acceptance. Therefore, the post-reception effect is realized as a plurality of post-reception effects (a plurality of post-reception aspects) including at least a special effect aspect and a predetermined effect aspect, and the predetermined effect aspect is realized as one aspect of the post-reception effect. You may do it. In any case, the predetermined rendering mode described in this configuration example is an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area where the 摸 image display is displayed, or at least a part of the predetermined area. It will be realized as an effect that is executed using an effect body that is in a position overlapping in front view.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when an operation by the player is received within the reception period (specific reception period), the spear image display is displayed. A specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area, which is a display target area of the haze image display, can be used to display a “specific annihilation effect display” as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display. The image display is made non-displayed while the specific disappearance effect display is displayed after the display of the specific disappearance effect display is started.

  That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the haze image display even after the acceptance. In addition, the visibility of the haze image display is lowered by the specific disappearance effect display until the haze image display is hidden, and the haze image display is hidden while the visibility is lowered. As a result, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the 表示 image display is hidden is reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment when the 摸 image display is hidden is suppressed. Become moist.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific disappearance effect display can be displayed even in a period after the haze image display is hidden, and at least the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. In the middle of being done, the production starts after the reception. The post-acceptance effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area, which is the display target area of the specific disappearance effect display, or the specific disappearance effect display (at least one of the specific disappearance effect displays). Part)) and are executed by using a director in a position overlapping with the front view.

  According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position overlapping the specific disappearance effect display in front view is watched from the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. It becomes possible to recognize without moving the destination. That is, in this case, when a specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the aspect of the specific post-reception effect. Amusement entertainment can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 5]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific mode is within the period from when the player's operation is received during the reception period (specific reception period) until the bag image display is hidden. It may appear, and when the specific mode appears, the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the sign effect display is executed in a specific sign form based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit). And when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific mode is within the period from the acceptance to the non-display state of the bag image display. It is made possible to appear in.

  In other words, in this case, at the time when the sign effect display is executed in the specific sign mode, it can be recognized that the specific mode appears until the haze image display is hidden and the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the user to pay attention to the manner in which the spear image display appears before the player performs an action. The “specific mode” according to configuration 5 and the “specific mode” according to configuration 1 may be the same mode, different modes, or generated corresponding to different reception periods. It may be.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific indication mode based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit). When an action by the player is received within the reception period corresponding to the indication effect display (a reception period different from the specific reception period), the specific mode is the state in which the spear image display is not displayed from the time of the reception. There are cases in which it appears within a period until it is set, and cases where it does not appear in that period.

  According to such a configuration, when the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific sign mode, the specific mode is received from the time it is received until the haze image display is hidden. Since it will be unclear whether or not it will appear within the period of, after being accepted, the stage performance until the 摸 image display is made in a non-display state will be improved, A feeling of tension can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, about the said structure 5, you may make it implement | achieve by replacing with the following structure, and you may make it prepare as a structure (reception period) different from the said structure 5. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, after the player's operation is accepted during the reception period (a specific reception period or a reception period different from the specific reception period), the heel image display is not displayed. The specific mode may appear within the period until it is done. When the specific mode appears, the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the sign indication display is the same as the specific sign mode (the same as the specific sign mode) based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit). The specific image is displayed in a non-displayed state from the time of acceptance when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the indication effect display. It should not be allowed to appear within the period until In other words, in this case, when the sign effect display is executed in a special sign mode, the specific mode does not appear until the haze image display is hidden, and it is difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will not be lost.

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, the warning effect display is executed in a mode different from the special warning mode based on the result of the winning determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit). When an action by the player is accepted within a reception period corresponding to the effect display (a reception period different from the reception period), the specific mode is such that the spear image display is not displayed after the reception. There may be a case where it appears within a period until a certain time and a case where it does not appear within this period. Even in such a configuration, when the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the special indication mode, the spear image display is not displayed since the specific mode is received. Since it will be unknown whether or not it will appear within the period until, the performance will be improved after it is accepted until the bag image display is hidden. The tension can be suitably maintained.

  About the structure concerning these modifications (replacement example), it is possible to apply suitably each above-mentioned or below-mentioned structure applicable with respect to the said structure 5. FIG.

[Configuration 6]
Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect that suggests that a reception period in which an operation by the player is a reception target will soon occur. And among a plurality of types of precursor effect display, a specific precursor effect display can be executed in a manner straddling the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. In this way, an action by a player can be accepted.

  That is, in this case, since the player can receive an operation while allowing confirmation of which type (mode) is displayed as the sign effect display, the type (mode) of the sign effect display is changed. Decrease in game entertainment due to forgetting confirmation can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received while a specific sign effect display is displayed, a post-reception effect (for example, a special post-reception effect) corresponding to the received operation is received. Although the execution is started, the specific precursor effect display is displayed without being hidden even when the execution of the post-reception effect is started.

  That is, in this case, the player's operation is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is displayed as the indication effect display, and further, the post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the indication effect display.

[Configuration 7]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) occurs, reception by the reception unit is permitted, or reception by the reception unit is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making an acceptable sound for acceptance that suggests that it will be in a state (coming soon), it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

  Even if the acceptable sound is realized as a sound that is audible before the occurrence of the corresponding reception period (implying that the reception period will occur soon), It is made audible in a straddling form, and can be made audible at least partway during the reception period. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 in which the tone setting value can be set to “0”, the acceptable sound is output under the condition that the volume setting value is set to “0”, but in the audible state, Will not be.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowable sound is audible (output state) within the reception period (for example, the specific reception period), the above-mentioned “摸 image display is performed”. Prior to the appearance of a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (an extinction effect display or the like), the “acceptance acceptance sound” is displayed in a state where the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (an extinction effect display or the like)” has not yet appeared. Execution of a process for making it inaudible is started.

  That is, in this case, even after the acceptance, even if the “aspect that makes it difficult to view the bag image display” has not yet appeared, the fact that the acceptance period has already expired is indicated to the player. It is possible to suggest it. As a result, since it is difficult for inconvenience to occur even if the timing at which the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze” appears after the acceptance is received, it is possible to display the haze image display in a well-recognized manner. become

[Configuration 8]
In the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of reception periods (a plurality of reception periods with different post-reception effects) including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In addition, there is a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display after the player's operation is accepted while the cocoon image display is displayed until the cocoon image display is set to a non-display state. It has come to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player's operation is received while the heel image display is displayed during the first reception period, the heel image display is displayed during the second reception period. In any case, when the player's action is accepted, a “mode that makes it difficult to view the 摸 image display” appears before the 摸 image display is hidden. ing.

  In other words, in this case, the acceptance period has ended, while it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as a spear image display after acceptance, in either the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period. You will be able to suggest that you are in a state. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configuration 8 may be the same type of reception periods as the “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configuration 2. However, different types of reception periods may be used.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as “modes in which the cocoon image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and the first mode appears in the first reception period. Since the second mode appears in the second reception period, it is possible to provide a performance related to the type of the reception period in the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display”.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a third mode is further prepared as “a mode in which the cocoon image display is difficult to visually recognize”. In the first reception period, it is determined whether or not it is received within the period. The first mode may appear, but in the second reception period, the second mode appears when it is received within the period, and the third mode appears when it is not received within the period.

  According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player has been received within the reception period based on the appearance of “an aspect that makes it difficult to view the bag image display”. However, in the first reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not an action by the player has been received within the reception period based on the appearance of the appearance that makes it difficult to view the bag image display. As a result, it is expected to improve the game entertainment through such performance.

  In each of the above-mentioned effect examples or each of the effect examples described later, “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” means an extinction effect display in a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area in which the habit image display is displayed. In addition to the mode in which the effect is displayed, the mode in which the effect using the effect body in the position overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined area in which the image display is displayed is executed, and the image display itself is visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to perform (for example, the display is reduced, blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed).

[Configuration 9]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, when a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) occurs, reception by the reception unit is permitted, or reception by the reception unit is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the reception allowable sound audible suggesting that it will be (coming soon), it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for reception.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types are prepared as a sign display effect that suggests that a reception period for receiving an operation by the player will soon occur. And among a plurality of types of precursor effect display, a specific precursor effect display can be executed in a manner straddling the timing when a corresponding reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. In this way, an action by the player can be accepted. In other words, in this case, since the player can accept the operation while it is possible to confirm which mode is displayed as the indication effect display, the game by forgetting to confirm the indication effect display mode Decline in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that the “specific indication effect display” according to the configuration 9 may be the same as the “specific indication effect display” according to the configuration 6, or may be a different type (mode) indication effect display. .

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific precursor effect display is displayed after an effect (post-reception effect) according to the acceptance of the operation by the player is performed. By doing so, it is possible for the player side to confirm which mode has appeared as the indication effect display after the acceptance.

  However, since the sign display effect is originally displayed in a state where acceptance is not permitted (before the reception period occurs), an operation by the player is performed while the sign display effect is displayed. Even if it is performed, the player side may feel uneasy about whether or not the motion is accepted. Nevertheless, even after the acceptance has been made, if there is a simple indication of the indication effect, there is a concern that it may be difficult to recognize whether the acceptance has been made or not, resulting in a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. The

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when an action by the player is received while the specific sign effect display is displayed, the specific sign effect after the acceptance is made. Although the display is displayed, an aspect in which the specific precursor effect display becomes difficult to visually recognize while the specific precursor effect display is displayed. Then, after the appearance, the specific precursor effect display is hidden while the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize.

  In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display even after the acceptance, and to reduce the visibility until the precursor effect display is hidden. As a result, it can be suitably suggested that the acceptance has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600) can be used for both symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. ), A predetermined image display can be displayed, and the spear image display can be displayed even after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the player's action has been accepted. Yes. Then, when an action by the player is accepted within the reception period, a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the spear image display appears while the spear image display is displayed. The “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize” is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that can be displayed even in the case of symbol variation in which the reception period does not occur.

  That is, in this case, a specific disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of a predetermined image display that is not related to the reception period. The game can be advanced without adversely affecting the performance.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first image display (predetermined image display) as an image display that is not remarkably related to the reception period (the reception period that is occurring). The second image display can be displayed within the reception period, and the specific disappearance effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display ( It is assumed that it is displayed so as to affect the visibility of (hold).

  According to such a configuration, although it is an image display that is not directly related to the reception period, depending on the type, when the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” appears, the visibility is affected. And the case where the visibility is not affected, when the player performs an action, whether or not the image display that is not directly related to the reception period should be confirmed. It will be possible to provide a directing performance.

  However, in this case, the first image display is displayed as an image (a plurality of modes) related to (improves) the winning (expectation) of the symbol variation, and the second image display is the variation of the symbol variation. By making the display as a display that does not relate to (does not imply) the success (expectation), it is possible to avoid a decline in the entertainment interest when the visibility of the second image display is affected. This is desirable.

  In addition, when the “specific disappearance effect display” displayed on the display screen (the effect display device 1600) is used as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display”, the operation by the player is accepted within the reception period. In such a case, the display is performed using the specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), which is the display target area of the wrinkle image display, while the wrinkle image display is displayed. Will be displayed.

[Configuration 11]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) displays both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. Inside, a predetermined image display can be displayed, and the spear image display can be displayed even after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. . The “predetermined image display” in the configuration 11 may be the same as the “predetermined image display” in the configuration 10 or may be a different image display. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a mode in which, when an operation by the player is received within the reception period, the 摸 image display is difficult to visually recognize while the 摸 image display is displayed. A plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as modes that can appear and are difficult to visually recognize the haze image display.

  That is, in this case, since any one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode appears as “a mode in which the spider image display is difficult to visually recognize”, It is expected to improve this.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “first aspect” is executed as “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image display”, the “first aspect” is the However, when the “second mode” is executed as the “mode in which the heel image display is difficult to view”, the “second mode” is the It is executed to make it difficult to visually recognize only the haze image display.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to produce a performance as to which of the “first mode” and the “second mode” appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display”. It is expected to improve the interest.

  In addition, in the state where either the reception period of the type corresponding to the “first aspect” or the reception period of the type corresponding to the “second aspect” is generated in the heel image display and the predetermined image display It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

[Configuration 12]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1,
A first acceptance period in which acceptance by the accepting means (for example, the operation button 410) is allowed can be generated, and if an operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period, the acceptance is made. Based on the first reception effect execution means capable of executing the first post-reception effect display in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped), and a reception means (for example, the operation button 410) Or a second sword decoration body 5001 that is different from the operation button 410), and a second reception period in which the reception by the player is permitted can be generated. When accepted, the second reception performance capable of executing the second post-reception presentation display in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) based on the acceptance. It has an execution means. Note that the degree of expectation (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%. In addition, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as different displays as the notice effect. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configuration 12 are the same types of reception periods as the “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the above-described configurations 2 and 8. Alternatively, reception periods of different types may be used.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, either when the player's operation is accepted during the first reception period or when the player's operation is accepted during the second reception period. In this case, after the acceptance, a mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize while the haze image display is being displayed is allowed to appear.

  That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has been displayed as the haze image display even after the acceptance is made regardless of the type of the acceptance period. Further, since the visibility of the haze image display is reduced before the haze image display is hidden, it may be suggested that the remaining time until the haze image display is hidden is short. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when the bag image display is not displayed.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, the first mode is executed as the first post-reception effect display, and the first post-reception effect display is the first. In any case where the second mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first mode is executed, the same mode appears as the “mode in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”. On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the second mode having a higher expectation level than the first mode (or the first mode having a lower level of expectation than the second mode) is executed as the second post-reception effect display. The specific mode appears as “a mode in which the vaginal image display is difficult to visually recognize”, but when the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the second post-reception effect display, The specific mode does not appear as “a mode that becomes difficult”, and a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display” itself does not appear. As described above, the degree of expectation (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, according to the type of the reception period, it is possible to estimate the expectation as the post-reception effect display only by confirming “a mode in which the 摸 image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and the expectation Since it may occur that the degree cannot be estimated, it is expected that improvement of the game entertainment will be expected by the staging performance according to such “a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the bag image display”. .

  In addition, as the “specific mode” that can occur corresponding to the second reception period as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the spider image display”, the “mode that makes it difficult to view the spider image display corresponding to the first reception period” If it is assumed that it cannot appear as "", it will be possible to infer the type of reception period based on "a mode that makes it difficult to view the bag image display", and to improve the game entertainment Will be able to. In order to obtain such an effect, the “mode” that can occur corresponding to the first reception period as the “mode that makes it difficult to view the vaginal image display” is the “moderate image corresponding to the second reception period”. It is more desirable to make it impossible to appear as “a mode in which the display is difficult to visually recognize”.

  However, the “mode” that can occur corresponding to the first reception period and the “mode” that can occur corresponding to the second reception period are the same as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display”. It may be possible to appear.

[Configuration 13]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (such as a bag image display or a gauge image) at least within the reception period in association with the occurrence of the reception period. In relation to occurrence, reception-related production sounds (such as reception-permitted sound) can be output at least within the reception period. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received within the reception period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect based on the acceptance (an aspect of the post-reception effect) If the player's action is accepted while the above reception-related effect display is displayed within the reception period, it is based on the reception. To hide the reception-related effect display. Similarly, if an operation by the player is accepted when the reception-related production sound is in an audible state within the reception period, the reception-related production sound is set to a non-audible state based on the acceptance. Like to do.

  In the above configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is received during the reception period, the post-reception stage sound related to the post-reception stage is output, the reception-related stage display is hidden, and the reception-related stage sound is hidden. Since the audible state is set, it is possible to easily recognize that it is in the accepted state.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related effect display is not finished at the time when the specific post-reception effect according to the reception is started. Although it is displayed, the reception-related effect sound is terminated at the time when the specific post-acceptance effect sound corresponding to acceptance is started to be made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display that is displayed within the reception period is displayed until after the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed, The reception-related effect sound that is audible (output) is not audible when the output sound after reception is started. Thereby, even after the execution of the specific post-reception effect, the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible while the aspect as the reception-related effect display displayed within the reception period can be confirmed. This makes it possible to preferably indicate that the reception period has already ended.

  The non-audible state may be a state in which the reception-related effect sound output process itself is finished in each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described later, or the reception-related effect sound output process itself. May be in a state where it is not made audible by adjusting the volume to “0” although it is continued. In addition, the specific post-reception effect is a composite using a plurality of effect bodies (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable bodies, etc.) in the above-described examples and the examples described later. When executed as a special effect, it may correspond to an “effect using a specific effect body” among the effect bodies.

[Configuration 14]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared as the warning effect display, and a specific warning effect display can be displayed prior to the occurrence of the reception period. An audible output of (acceptable sound, etc.) can be started. The specific precursor effect display and the reception-related effect sound can be executed in a manner straddling the timing at which the reception period occurs, the specific precursor effect display is displayed, and the reception-related effect sound is audible (output) In this way, an action by a player can be accepted. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received while a specific sign effect display is displayed within the reception period, the specific operation is performed based on the reception. Hide the sign effect display. In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound is in an audible state within the reception period, the reception-related production sound is made inaudible based on the acceptance. ing.

  In the above configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is accepted within the reception period, the specific precursor effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even if the action by the player is accepted while the specific warning effect display and the reception-related effect sound in the execution state are being executed before the reception period occurs, It is possible to easily recognize that the state has been set. In addition, the “specific indication effect display” according to the configuration 14 may be the same as the “specific indication effect display” according to the configurations 6 and 9, or may be a different type (mode) indication effect display. Also good. In addition, the “reception related effect sound” according to the configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the “reception related effect sound” according to the configuration 13.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific precursor effect display is started to execute a specific post-reception effect corresponding to being received within the corresponding reception period. At this point, it is not finished and is displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound is terminated at the time when the specific post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the reception is started and is made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, the specific precursor effect display displayed before the occurrence of the reception period is displayed until the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started. The reception-related effect sound that is audible (output) before the period occurs is not audible when the output sound after reception starts. Thereby, after execution of a specific post-reception effect, the reception-related effect output from before the occurrence of the reception period is made possible while confirming the mode as the indication effect display displayed before the reception period occurs. By making the sound inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the reception period has already ended. The “specific post-reception effect” and the “specific post-reception output sound” according to the configuration 14 are the same as the “specific post-reception effect” and the “specific post-reception output sound” according to the configuration 13, respectively. It may be different or different.

[Configuration 15]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of reception periods in which “the contents of the effect (the type of effect after the reception) that is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is received” are different. In addition, the bag image display can be displayed even after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation by a player is received within a specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, a plurality of operations are performed based on the reception. Although any of the effects appears, the specific mode can appear even if any of the effects appears.

  In the above configuration, the type of effect mode that appears based on the acceptance of the action by the player ("conversation notice" about which conversation appears, "movable body" A plurality of reception periods with different types of notice effects such as “operation notice” are prepared. In this regard, when an action by a player is received within a specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, one of a plurality of effects is caused to appear based on the reception, but any of these effects appears. Even in such a case, the specific mode can appear. In other words, in this case, since any of the plurality of effects appears, a specific aspect also appears along with it, so that they are “because the action by the player is accepted within the specific reception period” It is possible to suggest that this is a common performance.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by the player is received within a special reception period that is different from the specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, a special condition (a big hit winning condition or a probable change) Any of a plurality of modes including a special mode having different appearance ratios (may be 0% or 100%) depending on whether or not the entry condition is satisfied, and the special mode is When it appears, the habit image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, a special mode in which expectation is suggested before the haze image display is hidden is displayed, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the haze image display by the special mode. The player can enjoy the effect of progressing from the bag image display to the post-acceptance effect (special aspect) without changing the gaze destination.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “specific mode” appears based on the fact that the player's action is received within the specific reception period, It is made difficult to visually recognize by a “specific aspect”. According to such a configuration, when the haze image display is made difficult to visually recognize by the above-described special mode in which the degree of expectation for the provision of the privilege is suggested (special reception period), the above-described specific mode in which the degree of expectation for the provision of the privilege is not suggested As a result, it may be difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display (specific reception period), so that the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display (specific mode, special mode)” is provided with performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  The “specific reception period” according to the configuration 15 may be the same as the “specific reception period” according to the configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to a different reception period.

[Configuration 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestion display that reduces the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) with the passage of time within the reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the production has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced even during the performance, it is difficult to recognize “whether it has been accepted” after the acceptance has been made. It is expected to be maintained favorably.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the remaining time suggestion display, a specific partition area is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600), and a specific image is displayed in the specific partition area. It is assumed that the display area (such as a gauge image) is reduced. Then, after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, not only the specific image (gauge image or the like) but also the specific partition region is continuously displayed. According to such a configuration, since the specific section area is displayed even after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced. It becomes possible to easily determine whether or not the number has decreased.

  Note that “the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the player's action has been accepted” means that the action by the player has been accepted. In other words, when the presentation is performed based on the above, it means that the display area that is left as a gauge image is set to 0 (non-display) at a later time. is there. However, in this case, when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, it is required that the specific partition area is still displayed, and the display area of the gauge image is set to 0 in the specific partition area. It will be hidden after the timing.

  For example, in the configuration 16, when an action by a player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (a specific image, a specific partition area, etc.) is hidden based on the accepted operation. Prior to disabling the time suggestion display, the display area within the specific section area is a specific value (predetermined value) regardless of how much of the display area of the specific image is left at the time of acceptance. ) Or a specific image of the specific image area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). Is possible.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the time when an action by the player is accepted (when the progress of the production according to the acceptance is started), the execution is performed before the acceptance. The “description in which the display area of the specific image is reduced” is continued without being ended. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image whose display area is set to a specific value in the specific partition area is displayed, or only a specific partition area of the specific partition area and the specific image is displayed. The display is performed (the display area is reduced to 0).

  That is, in this case, since the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is not significantly reduced at the timing when the progress of the production according to the reception is started, the drawing until then is continued. It is expected that it will be difficult to recognize “whether it has been accepted” or not, and the tension will be suitably maintained even after it has been made. In addition, since the drawing that greatly reduces the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is performed at a timing later than the timing at which the progress of the production in response to the acceptance is started, the acceptance is valid ( It is possible to make it appear as if it was in time within the reception period), and it is expected to improve the game entertainment interest.

[Configuration 17]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of precursor effect displays as a precursor effect display that suggests that a reception period will occur. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific precursor effect display is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays, a reception period is generated for the spear image display related to the reception target. Are displayed both in the preceding sign period and in the reception period. The haze image display that is displayed in the precursor period is different from the haze image display that is displayed in the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs. Therefore, it is expected to improve the performance related to the operation from the time before the reception period occurs.

  Further, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is received within the reception period, the pachinko machine image is not displayed on the basis of the received image, but the habit image display is not displayed. The “specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display” can appear before it is turned on. However, as will be described later, the “specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display” is not displayed when the haze image display that is displayed within the precursor period (a specific indication effect display) is hidden. It doesn't appear until it is done.

  According to such a configuration, in the precursor period (a specific precursor effect display), the display of the trap image does not appear without the appearance of the “specific aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the trap display” corresponding to the reception period. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the bag image display is displayed within the precursor period (specific indication effect display), even if it is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player does not know The misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended can be made difficult to occur.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of “modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display” including the above “specific modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display” In any of the aspects, it is desirable to prevent the soot image display that is displayed within the precursor period from appearing as it is hidden. However, if it is an aspect different from any of the plurality of aspects prepared as “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display” according to acceptance, it is not until the cocoon image display is hidden within the precursor period. You may make it make "the aspect which makes it difficult to visually recognize a haze image display" appear. That is, in this case, since it will be recognized as a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display”, even if a “mode that makes it difficult to view the haze image display” appears within the aforesaid period The misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended without the player's knowledge can be made difficult to occur.

  The “specific precursor effect display” according to the configuration 17 may be the same as the “specific precursor effect display” according to the configurations 6, 9, and 14, or corresponds to a different precursor effect display. May be.

[Configuration 18]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first performance condition is satisfied, the first reception period can be generated as the reception period during the symbol variation execution period, and the second performance condition is satisfied. The second reception period can be generated as the reception period during the symbol variation execution period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period can be continued after the symbol variation that has occurred in the first reception period is terminated and the next symbol variation is started to be executed. However, the second reception period is not continued until after the symbol variation in which the second reception period has occurred, and is ended before the symbol variation is terminated. It has become a thing. Still further, the bag image display related to the reception object is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and when the operation by the player is received within the first reception period, In any case where an operation by the player is accepted within the period, an extinguishing effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the saddle image display appears based on the acceptance.

  In other words, in this case, it is possible to indicate that the reception period has ended, while it is possible to confirm which aspect has been displayed as the bag image display even after acceptance has been made. Even if it is in any of the first reception period and the second reception period, it can be suitably obtained.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearing effect mode in which the cocoon image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is when it is received during the first reception period and when it is received during the second reception period. It is executed as a different mode. In other words, in this case, based on the type of “annihilation effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display”, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period is ended within the symbol variation being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

  The “first reception period and the second reception period” according to the configuration 18 may be the same as the “first reception period and the second reception period” according to the configurations 2, 8, and 12, or different reception periods. It may correspond to a period.

[Configuration 19]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (first game state) having different game conditions (e.g., ease of obtaining a prize ball when a game ball is launched into the game area). And the second gaming state) can be generated, and the reception period can be generated in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation by the player is received within the reception period, the “摸” is displayed while the 摸 image display is displayed based on the reception. A mode (display effect mode) in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is allowed to appear, and then the haze image display is hidden.

  In other words, in this case, there is an effect such as “it is possible to indicate that the acceptance period has ended, while it is possible to confirm which aspect has been displayed as the bag image display after acceptance”. Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, it can be obtained.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods is only in the first gaming state among the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The second reception period of the plurality of reception periods can be generated only in the second gaming state (big hit game) of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, the haze image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first reception period), a specific “摸 image display is visually recognized that cannot appear in the second gaming state (when accepted in the second reception period). A mode that makes it difficult (an extinction effect mode) can appear.

  According to such a configuration, the first game can be obtained simply by confirming which mode appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display (disappearance mode)” without confirming the post-acceptance performance. It becomes possible to grasp which state is being controlled to be in the state or the second gaming state, and it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

  In addition, even in the second gaming state (when accepted in the second reception period), the “摸 image display is difficult to visually recognize” which is different from the specific “a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display (disappearance effect mode)”. May be made to appear (an extinction effect mode).

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permission state (acceptance period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a spider image (such as a spear image in which an operation receiving unit is viewed) related to a reception target is displayed. By displaying as an integrated bag image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, a decrease in the game entertainment until the post-reception effect (post-operation effect) is executed. I try to suppress it. Such an integrated bag image display is generated as a result of a notice determination with an operation reception effect (acceptance period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach and a variation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to be displayed in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be displayed, and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect. . In addition, the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231) are also realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated haze image with any of the integrated haze images described below. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, the “integrated haze image display” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248 or as another example or a modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image Is provided with a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In addition, as the “integrated bag image display”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared, and the same is true for displaying in any of these modes.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted when the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) occurs. An acceptable reception sound is output, which makes it difficult to forget to operate. Here, “acceptable sound” means that when an output of a sound starts, an acceptable state of acceptance (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is output (while sound data is assigned). A sound that is in a state in which a reception acceptance state (reception period) has already occurred. That is, the “acceptable sound” can be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where an effect unrelated to the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is performed.

  In addition, each reception permission state (each reception period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance allowable state classified into the first type can be generated when a high expectation variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) is selected, but a low expectation variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). Is an effective period that cannot occur (effective period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (specific high-expected variation pattern selection) in the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination). In addition, the second type acceptance allowable state is an effective period that can be generated in either the high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or the low expectation fluctuation pattern (occurs as a result of the notice determination). Validity period, etc.).

  The “integrated bag image display” according to this embodiment can be displayed in any of the first type and second type acceptable reception states (acceptance periods). Here, both of the first type acceptance permissible state (acceptance period) and the second type acceptance permissible state (acceptance period) are accepted in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that it occurs as an allowable state (acceptance period), the “integrated habit image display” displayed in the accepting period is an image in which the same operation means (operation button 410) is deceived.

  However, the special mode with high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated bag image display” is the first type acceptable reception state (acceptance period). In the second type acceptable reception state (acceptance period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). ing. In the first type acceptable reception state (acceptance period), the “integrated bag image display” is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) including a special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether to display, and “integrated bag image display” is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptable reception state (acceptance period), the “integrated bag image” in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) that do not include a special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. May be determined, and “integrated bag image display” may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the determination.

  Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above configurations 1 to 19 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has the contents of the effects that are advanced when received (conversation notices, cut-in notices, movable object notices, etc. as post-acceptance effects, and the types of notice effects (expectation suggesting effects). A plurality of reception periods (reception effects) are prepared, and the types of reception periods (reception effects) can be generated according to the results of the determination (such as jackpot determination or effect determination). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first reception period (reception effect) to a seventh reception period (reception effect) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects).

  Here, “conversation notice” as a post-reception effect suggests the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a jackpot symbol appears) depending on which conversation content appears among a plurality of conversation content. “Cut-in notice” indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) depending on which cut-in image appears among multiple cut-in images. The “notice” indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

  With reference to FIGS. 255 to 266, each feature will be described for each reception period (reception effect). Each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 254 may be prepared as a reception period different from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, or the first reception period to It may be realized as one of the seventh reception periods.

  FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of effects when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs. FIG. 262 and FIG. 263 are diagrams illustrating an effect example in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in the specific gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state with non-probability change / non-short time), the start condition is established (holding digestion), and the “first variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the first variation pattern. After that, a variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (effect description according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “FIG. 262 (a)”). "), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed on the selected" first variation pattern "itself. Become. In the effect example shown in FIG. 262 (a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, a first effect display TE (indicating a big hit expectation degree (the ratio at which the big win symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ stops in the variation effect)) Here, it is assumed that the “timer effect” described above) and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the change, not at the start of the change, or may be displayed at different timings. The second effect display FE itself may indicate the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ stops in the variation effect, or may not indicate the ratio.

  In other words, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the decoration as shown in FIG. 255 (a). The first reception period (valid period) in which “acceptance for the first post-acceptance effect” is allowed when the timing tF3 when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the symbol SZ is generated. ("Situation shown in FIG. 262 (d)"). Thus, when an operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception period (valid period) in relation to the occurrence of such a first reception period. ) Is a sign effect display that suggests that it will soon occur, 摸 image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and disappearance that makes it difficult to see the 摸 image display A related display (an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display) and a post-reception presentation display that suggests an expectation (a ratio at which a jackpot symbol appears) are performed in accordance with the reception. As described above, the heel image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an “integrated heel image display” integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a gauge image display. It is not restricted and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

  More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 before the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (b), the display screen (effect display device) 1600), “first sign effect display ZEH1” is started to be executed as the sign effect display. The “first precursor effect display ZEH1” according to the example shown in FIG. 255 (b) is allowed to be received at the timing (first reception period) corresponding to the reception period (first reception period) corresponding thereto. The timing is hidden as tF3 arrives, but may be hidden before timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), during the first reception period according to this example, the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is displayed in a state where the player is allowed to accept the operation. It has never been.

  However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 262 (c), the timing tF2 before the first reception period is generated. When it arrives, “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while “first sign effect display ZEH1” is displayed. At least a part of the area in which “display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area in which “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), “ At least a part of the “integrated bag image display IG” is made difficult to visually recognize by the “first sign indication display ZEH1”. Thereby, in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) prior to the occurrence of the first reception period, it is strongly interested in which target (operation receiving unit) the operation by the player is permitted. As a result, it is expected that it becomes difficult to forget to operate or to make an operation error after the first reception period occurs.

  Note that, during the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “first sign indication display ZEH1” are displayed, the “integrated bag image display IG” is easily visible. It is more desirable to display the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” so that a tendency to gradually improve toward the reception period appears in order to improve the game entertainment. For example, it can be realized by gradually reducing the display range of “first sign effect display ZEH1” (the range overlapping with the integrated 摸 image display IG) or gradually increasing the transmittance. is there.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (c), (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “integrated haze image display IG” is The first reception period is displayed so as to straddle the timing tF3. The “integrated bag image display IG” is not displayed when the reception is made within the first reception period or when the first reception period is ended without the reception. Note that the first reception period according to this example is ended when the timing tF4 arrives when the player does not receive the motion (see FIG. 255 (b)).

  In this respect, the example shown in FIG. 255 and FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” or “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” are produced. In the example of progress, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (a), the first acceptance period is ended and the first acceptance period is accommodated based on the fact that the player's action is accepted at timing tF3a. The post-reception effect (first post-reception effect) to be executed is started.

  In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” has relatively low expectation as the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, and the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” is the reception corresponding to the first reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect having a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-production.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 263 (e1), or (e2), when the player's motion is accepted (in the acceptance Accordingly, at the timing tF3a, which is the time when the first post-reception effect is started), the integrated haze image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize. Like that.

  That is, the first post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes the “first post-reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal, movable The first specific post-acceptance effect using a body, an effect lamp, etc.) and the first post-acceptance output sound using a third effect device (speaker) are realized as an at least combined effect. However, among these effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) on which the integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) is displayed, the first effect as the effect after the first reception. 1 The time when the performance display is started after reception is delayed compared to other performance devices, and the visibility of the “integrated 摸 image display IG” is maintained even after the reception has been received. Has become

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), even after acceptance is made, the integrated haze image display IG has a plurality of forms (FIG. Since it is possible for the player to easily recognize which one of (a) to (d)) is displayed, it is expected to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest. become.

  Here, after the acceptance period is over, in order to facilitate recognition of which of the plurality of forms (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated bag image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer “time during which the integrated bag image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner” after the acceptance is made. However, when the integrated bag image display IG is during the reception period even though the reception has been made and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed. If it is displayed continuously in the same mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 263 (e1) and (e2)), it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted. As a result, there is a concern that “it will be late to notice the post-reception performance in the execution state”.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 263 (f1), or (f2), the first acceptance period ends when the action by the player is accepted. When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tF3a (when the timing tF3b arrives), the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first reception period) is set as “an aspect in which the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. The display according to the first mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the “first disappearance related display SK1-” is displayed while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. 1 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where“ first disappearance related display SK1-1 ”is displayed is“ integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance, even if the integrated haze image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, and thus after the acceptance. It can be suggested that the effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination is automatically shifted from the integrated bag image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tF3b). Thereby, even in the situation where the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated haze image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the integrated bag image display IG is not displayed in any manner within the reception period. Further, even after the first post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (timing tF3a to tF3b). Since the aspect of the integrated bag image display IG can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, in the first reception period, a mode with low expectations (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1)) and a mode with high expectations (FIGS. 263 (e2) to (i2)) as post-reception effects corresponding to this. Since the same mode (first annihilation related display SK1-1) appears as the first annihilation related display SK1, the post-reception effect (second effect device) Even in a situation where the execution of the third effect device) is started, the expectation can be kept secret in the first effect device (effect display device 1600).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 263 (g1), or (g2), the display (integrated haze image display) according to the first disappearance related display SK1-1. When the timing tf3c within the period in which the IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) has arrived, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the first acceptance period The “post-reception effect display UG1” as the post-reception effect is started to be executed. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception performance), FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period. From FIG. 262 (d), “A2 In the example where the production progresses to (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 263 (g2), the first reception A second mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, among the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-1” being displayed, the “post-first reception effect display UG1 (the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or The first post-reception effect display UG1-2) ”will be started. Thereby, even if it is a case where it continues to display integrated haze image display IG for a comparatively long time after having received within the 1st reception period, in the 1st production device (production display device 1600). It becomes possible to start the post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) without significantly delaying compared to other effect devices, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. In addition, since the display after the first reception is started while it is difficult to visually recognize the integrated bag image display IG, it is suggested by the player that the first reception period has already ended. The gaze destination may be automatically shifted from “integrated bag image display IG” to “post-first reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)”. Expected (after timing tF3c).

  And in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this example, when the display concerning "the first post-reception effect display UG1 (the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first post-reception effect display UG1-2)" is started in this way. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (h1) or (h2), as shown in the “first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1”. -2) "is displayed, first, of the" integrated bag image display IG "and the" first disappearance related display SK1-1 ", the" integrated bag image display IG "is hidden. Then, after the “integrated haze image display IG” is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 263 (i1) or (i2), the “first disappearance related display SK-1” is displayed. "Is not displayed, and under this condition, the first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed. "Is displayed.

  In this respect, “first post-reception effect display UG1” is a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation (here, first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first display UG1). It is displayed in any of after-reception effect display UG1-2). Therefore, the “first post-display effect display UG1” is displayed after the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK-1” are hidden as shown in FIG. 255 (b). Will be executed for a relatively long time.

  Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 255) as the first reception period occurs, and Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (production display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tF3c) of the first post-acceptance effect (first after-acceptance effect display) according to acceptance is greater than the accepted timing tF3a. There is a fact that it must be delayed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second effect device is prepared separately from the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and an operation by the player is performed within the first reception period. When received, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and (c), based on the reception, the first post-receipt effect using the second effect device (specification after the first reception) The effect is started prior to the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) using the first effect device.

  According to such a configuration, the start of execution is delayed from the timing tF3a that was accepted in the first reception period, but only a part of the first post-reception effect (the first post-reception effect display), The post-first reception effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tF3a.

  As such a second effect device, for example, an effect display device 1600 (first effect device) may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the main liquid crystal is used, Further, it may be provided as an effect lamp capable of effect light emission. In any case, it will be provided that can produce effects (display effects, movable effects, light emission effects, etc.) in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 263, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. In the example where the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception performance), FIG. 263 (e1) As shown in the above, the mode in which “Sueyoshi” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the first post-reception specific rendering UGT1 (first post-reception identifying) corresponding to the first reception period. As a first post-reception specific effect UGT1-1) that is a mode of low expectation of the effect UGT1, the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device is used. Execution starts. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception performance), FIG. As shown in e2), the aspect in which “good” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UGT1 after the first reception corresponding to the first reception period (first reception). As the first post-acceptance specific effect UGT1-2), which is a mode of high expectation of the post-specific effect UGT1, precedes the first post-acceptance effect (first post-acceptance effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device. Then the execution is started.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 262, in addition to the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the first reception period. The sign effect (first sign specific effect) is performed (FIGS. 262 (b) to (d)). The first sign specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first sign effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs is It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed in a manner straddling the timing tF3.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared. At the time tF2 shown in FIG. The acceptance allowable sound is started to be output (corresponding to “situation where ♪ starts output in FIG. 262 (c)”). That is, the acceptable sound for reception corresponding to the first reception period is audibly output in a manner straddling the timing tF3 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 262 (d)”) at which the first reception period occurs. Thus, an operation by the player can be accepted while the permissible reception sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), FIGS. 263 (e1) to (g1), and FIGS. 263 (e2) to (g2), the reception allowable sound is audibly output. Even if the player accepts the motion, the acceptable sound is not terminated halfway and is output only for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, during the plurality of reception periods, when an operation is accepted by the player while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound based on the reception Includes a reception period that is terminated halfway. Therefore, if the acceptance allowable sound is audiblely output within the first reception period and, as a result, an aspect in which the audible output of the acceptable reception sound continues appears, whether or not the acceptance allowable sound is in an accepted state. It becomes difficult to recognize this, and it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

  However, in the first reception period, even if the player accepts an operation while the acceptable reception sound is being audibly output, the acceptable sound is terminated halfway (intermediate termination of the audible output state). However, when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to “♪♪” output in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2)) is started based on the acceptance. It has become a thing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), “acceptable sound” that is sound audibly output within the first reception period and audible as a result of reception within the first reception period. Since both the “output sound after the first reception” that is the sound to be output can be audibly output, it is more recognized whether it is within the reception period or the reception period has ended. It becomes possible to make it harder to recognize.

  Such first post-acceptance output sound is similar to “first post-approval effect display UG1”, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), “integrated haze image display IG” or “first disappearance related display SK”. Even after “−1” is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time (“♪♪ is output in FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)”). Equivalent to "Situation"). In addition, as for the output sound after the first reception, an example in which the production progresses from “A1” (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1)) from FIG. ) And an example where the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception performance). It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 255, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A3 (FIG. 263 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the first reception period. It is assumed that the action by the person is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the first acceptance period occurs, the timing tF4 arrives without accepting an action by the player. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF4 (at the time when the first acceptance period ends and the player is no longer permitted to accept the motion), the timing tF3a (first effect) As shown in FIG. 263 (e3), as in the case of the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player accepts the action within the reception period, the integrated 摸 image display IG In addition to not hiding the image, the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, even if the first acceptance period ends without accepting the motion by the player in time, the integrated reception within the first acceptance period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG is displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  After this, even when the player does not accept the action, as shown in FIG. 263 (f3), the first disappearance-related display SK1 is set as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. -2 (the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the “first disappearance related display SK1-” is displayed while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. 2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where“ first disappearance related display SK1-2 ”is displayed is“ integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps the displayed area.

  According to such a structure, even if it is a case where it continues displaying the integrated haze image display IG after the 1st reception period is complete | finished without accepting, this integrated haze image display IG is By making it difficult to visually recognize, it can be suggested that the first reception period has ended. In addition, even in the situation where the first reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated haze image display IG for a relatively long time although it is difficult to view. From this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the integrated bag image display IG is displayed in any manner within the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” that appears when the player does not accept an action within the first acceptance period is the first acceptance. It is configured to be executed as a mode different from the “first disappearance related display SK1-1” that appears based on the fact that the player's action is accepted within the period. As a result, when the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” appears, it can be suggested that the player's action has not been accepted, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed. .

  After this, as shown in FIG. 263 (g3), first of the “integrated bag image display IG” and “first disappearance related display SK1-2”, the “integrated bag image display IG” is set to the non-display state. Display. Then, after the “integrated bag image display IG” is hidden, the “first disappearance related display SK-2” is hidden as shown in FIG. 263 (h3).

  FIG. 256 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of effects when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs. 264 and 265 are diagrams illustrating an effect example in a variation pattern in which the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs.

  Now, it is assumed that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with non-probability change / non-short time), and the “second change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the second variation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (effect description according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “FIG. 264 (a)”). “), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed on the selected“ second variation pattern ”itself. Become. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed.

  However, in the production related to the “second variation pattern”, the variation of the decoration symbol SZ is shown as shown in FIG. 256 (a) regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (notice determination). The second reception period in which “accepting for the post-second operation effect” is allowed when a timing tG3 (for example, a timing in the SP reach state) when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect has arrived. (Validity period) is generated ("situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)"). Thus, when an action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, a second post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance.

  In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, the above-described first reception period occurs (FIG. 255). Similar to this, in connection with this, a prelude effect display that suggests that the reception period (valid period) will soon occur, a spear image display that indicates the reception target (operation reception part, etc.), and the remaining time of the reception period Gage image display to be displayed, disappearance-related display to make it difficult to view the 摸 image display (an aspect in which the 摸 image display is difficult to see), and post-reception effects that suggest the expectation (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) depending on the acceptance Each display is done. The degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) may include “0%” or “100%”. As described above, the heel image display is displayed as an “integrated heel image display IG” integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It may be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

  More specifically, also in this example, when the timing tG1 before the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. As the display, “second sign indication display ZEH2” starts to be executed. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 255, “integrated haze image display IG (haze image display, gauge image display)” has a corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period). When the timing tG2 before the occurrence occurs, the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” is displayed (FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 264 (c). )). As shown in FIG. 264 (c), at least a part of the area where the “integrated bag image display IG” is displayed overlaps the area where the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” is displayed, Also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 262 (c), the “integrated bag image display IG” is difficult to visually recognize by the “second precursor display ZEH2” (the precursor display corresponding to the first reception period). It is the same.

  Further, the “integrated bag image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. Or when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) or when the second acceptance period is terminated without the acceptance. This is also the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 255 (first reception period). It should be noted that the second reception period according to this example is ended when the timing tG4 arrives when the player does not accept the movement.

  However, in the example (second reception period) shown in FIG. 256 (b), the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” is related to the example (first reception period) shown in FIG. 255 (b). The timing (second post-reception stage) when the reception period corresponding to this (the second reception period in this case) occurs, as well as the mode (image display) different from the case of the “first sign presentation display ZEH1”. The timing at which acceptance is accepted) is not hidden as tG3 arrives, and is displayed in a manner straddling the timing tG3.

  That is, in this case, in the second reception period, not only “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” but also “second omen” that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “integrated 摸 image display IG”. The player can accept the operation while the “effect display ZEH2” is displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period occurs, at least a part of the “integrated bag image display IG” is difficult to visually recognize by the “second precursor effect display ZEH2”. A feeling of tension when it is within the period can be suitably maintained.

  Here, the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” may be displayed until the timing tG4 at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends, or the reception period. You may make it non-display at the predetermined timing in (here 2nd reception period). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, for the indication effect display (second indication effect display ZEH2), within the reception period (here, the second reception period) corresponding thereto, The display range is gradually reduced so that the area overlapping with the image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) tends to be gradually reduced. It is desirable for the ease of visual recognition of the “image display IG” to be gradually improved within the reception period. Further, the area where the second precursor effect display is displayed and at least a part of the area where the “integrated 摸 image display” is displayed do not necessarily overlap each other in the entire period during which the second precursor effect display is displayed. For example, after the predetermined timing within the reception period of the entire period has arrived, the second sign indication display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area where the “integrated bag image display IG” is displayed. You may make it do.

  In addition, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 according to this example is received during the reception period corresponding thereto (here, the second reception period) or the reception period (here, the second reception). When the player's motion is not accepted until a predetermined timing within (period), it is hidden.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 256 and the production from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” or “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” In the example of progress, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the second acceptance period ends and the second acceptance period is accommodated based on the fact that the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a. The post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) to be executed is started.

  In addition, the example where the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” is relatively low in expectation as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” is the reception corresponding to the second reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect having a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-production. The degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 256, at the timing tG3a that is the time point when the action by the player is accepted (the time point when the second post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance), the “integrated bag image display IG” In addition to not hiding the image, the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 256, not only the integrated heel image display IG but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is received when an action by the player is accepted (the time when the second post-reception effect is started). ) At a timing tG3a, which is not hidden or made difficult to visually recognize.

  That is, the second post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a “second post-reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or a movable liquid crystal display). Body, an effect lamp, etc.) and an output sound after the second reception using the third effect device (speaker) are at least combined and realized as an effect. However, among these effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) on which the integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) is displayed, the second effect as the effect after the second reception. 2 The time when the presentation display after the reception is started is delayed as compared with other presentation apparatuses, and after the acceptance, the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “second precursor indication display” ZEH2 " It has become a thing to maintain the 認性.

  According to such a configuration, as in the case of the first reception period described above, as shown in FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2), even after the reception is made, it is integrated within the ended reception period. Whether the fake image display IG is displayed in a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)), or which mode is a precursor effect display (first precursor effect display ZEH1, second precursor effect) Since the player can easily recognize whether it is displayed on the display ZEH2 or the like), it is expected to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Here, after the acceptance period is over, in order to facilitate the recognition of how the integrated bag image display IG and the warning effect display ZEH were displayed within the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer “time during which the integrated haze image display IG and the sign indication display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible manner”. However, although the acceptance has been made and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated bag image display IG and the sign effect display ZEH are being accepted. If it continues to be displayed in the same form as when it was in the player, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is in a situation where it was accepted, and as a result, `` post-reception performance in the running state '' There is a concern that “it will be late to notice”.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 256 (b), FIG. 263 (f1), or (f2), a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tG3a at which the second acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the action by the player. Then (when the timing tG3b arrives), the display related to the “second disappearance related display SK2” different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is started as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”. I have to.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “second disappearance related display SK2” is displayed while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. "Is displayed, and" integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) "is displayed in at least a part of the area where" second disappearance related display SK2 "is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance, even if the integrated haze image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, and thus after the acceptance. It can be suggested that the effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed. Accordingly, it is expected that the player's gaze destination is automatically shifted from the integrated bag image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tG3b). Thereby, even in the situation where the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated haze image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the integrated bag image display IG is not displayed in any manner within the reception period. Further, even after the second post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed (timing tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second sign effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility, and the integrated haze image display IG is not easily made visible only by the second sign effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. In addition, when the acceptance is made after the second indication effect display ZEH2 is hidden during the second reception period, the second indication effect display ZEH2 is displayed before the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed. It goes without saying that the mode of the integrated haze image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility.

  Further, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “second disappearance related display SK2” is displayed while the “prediction effect display (here, the second sign effect display ZEH2)” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the “second disappearance related display SK2” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed by making it difficult to visually recognize the second sign effect display ZEH2. As a result, it is expected that the player's gaze destination is automatically shifted from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 to the post-reception effect (after timing tG3b). This makes it possible to continue displaying the second precursor effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation in which the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed. In this manner, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the indication effect display is displayed in any manner within the reception period. In addition, even after the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the sign effect display becomes difficult to visually recognize (timing tG3a to tG3b), Since the mode (here, the second precursor effect display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  In the second reception period, a mode with low expectation (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a post-acceptance effect corresponding to this, and a mode with high expectation (FIG. 265 (e2) to A different mode (second disappearance related display SK2-1, SK2-2) appears as the second disappearance related display SK2 when (i2)) appears. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 265 (f1) and (f2), the “post-second reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-1) and the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-). By confirming which of the two is displayed, it can be estimated whether or not the “post-second reception effect display” is executed in a highly expected manner.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 256 (b), FIG. 265 (g1), or (g2), the display (integrated haze image display IG) related to the second disappearance related display SK2 is performed. When the timing tG3c within a period in which a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize) has arrived, the reception at the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the action received by the player within the second reception period Execution of “second reception post-production display UG2” as the post-production is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception performance), FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period. From FIG. 264 (d), “B2 In the example where the production progresses to (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance production), as shown in FIG. 265 (g2), the second reception The second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, the “integrated haze image display IG”, “second precursor effect display ZEH2”, and “second disappearance related display SK2 (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2)” are displayed. The “second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” starts to be executed while each of them is displayed. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is made to continue displaying the integrated haze image display IG and the 2nd precursor effect display ZEH2 over a comparatively long time after receiving within the 2nd reception period, it is the 1st effect device. The post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2) in the (effect display device 1600) can be started without significantly delaying compared to other effect devices, and the decline in the game entertainment is suppressed. Will be able to. In addition, since the second post-reception effect display UG2 is started while the integrated haze image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are difficult to visually recognize, the second reception period has already ended. In other words, the player's gaze point changes from “integrated bag image display IG” or “second precursor indication display ZEH2” to “post-second reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second). It is expected that the post-reception effect display UG2-2) ”will be automatically shifted to (after timing tG3c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to “the second post-reception effect display UG2 (the second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is started. 256 (b) and FIG. 265 (h1) or (h2), the “second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2). -2) "is displayed, first, among the" integrated 摸 image display IG "," second precursor indication display ZEH2 ", and" second disappearance related display SK2 "," integrated 摸 image display " “IG” and “second sign indication display ZEH2” are not displayed. Then, after the “integrated haze image display IG” and the “second precursor indication display ZEH2” are respectively hidden, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 265 (i1), or (i2). , “Second annihilation related display SK2 (second annihilation related display SK2-1 or second annihilation related display SK2-2)” is not displayed, and “ The display related to “post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is performed.

  In this regard, the “second post-reception effect display UG2” is a plurality of modes (in this case, the second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second post-reception effect display UG2) based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted. It is displayed in any of after-reception effect display UG2-2). Therefore, the “post-reception effect display UG2” is compared even after the “integrated bag image display IG”, “second precursor effect display ZEH2”, and “second disappearance related display SK2” are hidden. It will be executed over a long time.

  Incidentally, in the production example (FIGS. 262 and 263) corresponding to the first reception period described above, even if the reception is made during the first reception period and the “first reception effect display UG1” is executed, The background image is not switched before and after the “post-first reception effect display UG1” is started, and is maintained. On the other hand, in the effect example (FIGS. 264 and 265) corresponding to the second reception period, if the reception is performed within the second reception period and the “second post-reception effect display UG2” is executed, The background image is switched before and after the “post-reception effect display UG2” is started.

  According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 265 (e) and (f) where the background image is not switched (timing tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 256), the effect display device 1600 (the first display) Even if there is an effect change in the 1 effect device), it is possible to indicate that the “post-reception effect display UG2” is not yet started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 265, the post-reception effect is switched to the same background image when a mode with low expectation appears and when a mode with high expectation appears. Different background images may be switched between a case where a low aspect appears and a case where a high expectation aspect appears. Further, the background image is switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second reception period occurs, a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 256) is accompanied accordingly. In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (production display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tG3c) of the second post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect display) corresponding to the acceptance is more than the accepted timing tG3a. There is a fact that it must be delayed.

  Therefore, also in this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 256 (b) and (c), it is based on the acceptance. The second post-reception effect using the second effect device (the second post-reception specific effect) is started prior to the second post-acceptance effect using the first effect device (the second post-reception effect display). I try to let them.

  According to such a configuration, the start of execution is delayed from the timing tG3a that was received in the second reception period, but only a part of the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display), The second post-reception effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tG3a.

  As described above, the second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the main liquid crystal, or an effect operation is possible. It may be provided as an effect movable body or an effect lamp capable of effect light emission. In any case, it will be provided that can produce effects (display effects, movable effects, light emission effects, etc.) in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. In the example where the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception performance), FIG. 265 (e1) As shown in the above, the aspect in which “women's kimono” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the second after-reception specific effect UGT2 (second event) corresponding to the second reception period. As a second post-reception specific effect UGT2-1) which is a mode of low expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT2, the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) using the first effect device is used. The execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception performance), FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which the “male kimono for men” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is that the specific effect UGT2 after the second reception UGT2 corresponding to the second reception period ( As the second post-reception specific effect UGT2-2, which is a high expectation of the second post-reception specific effect UGT2, the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) using the first effect device. ) Is started prior to).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 264, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the second reception period separately from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). The sign effect (second sign specific effect) is performed (FIGS. 264 (b) to (d)). Unlike the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the second sign specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) has a timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed in a manner straddling the timing tG3.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared. When the second reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 256 (d). At tG2, the acceptance allowable sound (corresponding to “♪” output in FIGS. 264 (c) and (d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the second reception period is audibly output in a manner straddling the timing tG3 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)”) at which the second reception period occurs. Thus, an operation by the player can be accepted while the permissible reception sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the second reception period, as the allowable reception sound, a long-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and a short-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, Are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 256 (d), the output of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound is started at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output of the short-time allowable sound may be started at the timing tG3 when the second reception period occurs or after that.

  Then, in the second reception period, when the player accepts an action while the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are being audibly output, the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are Each of the allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound is terminated halfway (in the middle of the audible output state).

  Further, in the second reception period, when the player accepts an operation while the reception allowable sound (long time allowable sound, short time allowable sound) is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, based on this, a second post-acceptance output sound (FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2) or the like outputted from the first post-acceptance output sound) is output. Is equivalent to “)”. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed in the first effect device, the effect (acceptance acceptable sound) performed in the reception period and the acceptance were made. There is no conflict (duplication) with the effect (the output sound after the second reception) performed accordingly.

  Like the “second post-reception effect display UG2”, such a second post-reception output sound is displayed as “integrated haze image display IG” or “second disappearance related display SK2” as shown in FIG. 256 (d). "Is not displayed, it will be executed for a relatively long time (" Situation where ♪♪ is output in Figs. 265 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) "). Equivalent). In addition, the output sound after the second reception is an example in which the production progresses from “B1” (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1)) from FIG. ) And the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception performance). It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  In the second reception period, the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are output as the allowable sound, but these two allowable sounds may not necessarily be output. As with the reception period, only one reception allowable sound may be output.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B3 (FIG. 265 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the second reception period. It is assumed that the action by the person is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the second acceptance period occurs, the timing tG4 arrives without accepting an action by the player. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG4 (at the time when the second acceptance period ends and the player is no longer permitted to accept the motion), the timing tG3a (second effect) As shown in FIG. 265 (e3), as in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player accepts the motion within the reception period of time, as shown in FIG. In addition to not hiding the image, the integrated bag image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize. In this effect example, since the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is not displayed at timing tG4, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is not displayed after timing tG4.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends without accepting the motion by the player in time, the integrated reception within the second reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG is displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  After this, even if the player does not accept the action, as shown in FIG. 265 (f3), the second disappearance-related display SK2 -1 or the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-1) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the “second annihilation related display SK2-” is displayed while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. 1 or the second disappearance related display SK2-2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ second disappearance related display SK2 ”is displayed is“ integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display ”. , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, even if the integrated haze image display IG continues to be displayed after the second reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated haze image display IG is not displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it can be suggested that the second reception period has ended. In addition, even in the situation where the second acceptance period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated haze image display IG for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize. From this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the integrated bag image display IG is displayed in any manner within the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second reception period. In the case, if the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the production has progressed from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))”. (When a post-reception effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, the case where “second disappearance related display SK2-2” is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 when an operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period is the second acceptance period. If the action by the player is accepted in the game, the production has progressed from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (relative expectation) This corresponds to a case where a high post-reception performance is executed).

  That is, in this case, in the second reception period, even if an action by the player is not received, the integrated bag image display IG is not displayed after the second reception period ends. By simply confirming the mode (second annihilation-related display SK2-1, second annihilation-related display SK2-2) as the “second annihilation-related display SK2” appearing, It becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or has been executed in a highly expected manner, so that it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 265 (g3), first, of the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “second disappearance related display SK2”, the “integrated bag image display IG” is hidden. To do. Then, after the “integrated haze image display IG” is hidden, the “second disappearance related display SK2” is hidden as shown in FIG. 265 (h3).

  FIG. 257 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third reception period (third reception effect) occurs.

  Now, it is assumed that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probabilistic and non-short-time), and the “third variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern. Then, after that, a variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (such as an effect depiction according to the third variation pattern and a sound output of BGM playback according to the third variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “third variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect related to the “third variation pattern”, the third predetermined time after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). “Acceptance of post-third operation effect” is allowed when the elapsed timing tH3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived The third reception period (valid period) is generated. Thus, when an operation by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period, a third post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the third reception period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content (in the first effect device) that is executed as the third post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received. FIG. 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) is what “display after third reception”, “third post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “third output sound after reception” in the third effect device). The first post-reception effect described above with reference to “the first post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, the “first post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and the “first reception in the third effect device” This is different from the post-output sound "), but the other components are basically the same.

  For example, the timing tH1 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), execution of the “first sign effect display ZEH1” is started as the sign effect display. It should be noted that the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” according to the example shown in FIG. 257 (b) is also received at the timing when the corresponding reception period (third reception period) occurs (the third post-reception effect is received). (Allowable timing) It is made non-display as tH3 arrives. However, the point that it may be hidden before the timing tH3 is the same as in the case of the first reception period described above. In any case, during the first reception period according to this example, the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is not displayed in a state where the player is allowed to accept the movement.

  The timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while the “first sign indication display ZEH1” is displayed. "Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the" integrated bag image display IG "is displayed overlaps with the area where the" first precursor effect display ZEH1 "is displayed. In addition, about the structure concerning "integrated bag image display IG" displayed in relation to the 3rd reception period, "1st precursor effect display ZEH1", and another example related to them, FIG. 255 and FIG. Since it is as having mentioned above with reference to 262 and FIG. 263, suppose that it omits here.

  The timing tH3 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), the third reception period is set while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. Will occur. The “integrated bag image display IG” is not displayed when it is received within the third reception period or when the third reception period ends without the reception. It is the same. Note that the third reception period according to this example is ended when the timing tH4 arrives when the player does not accept the movement.

  The timing tH3a shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action has been received, and the post-reception effect (after the third reception) corresponding to the third reception period. The production is started. In addition, as the third post-reception effect, at least a case where the first aspect with relatively low expectation is executed and a case where the second aspect with relatively high expectation are executed are prepared, The contents of the effects (display contents after reception, specific effects after reception, and each content as output sound after reception) are different from the first effect after reception, but the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the plurality of aspects is executed. About a point etc., it is the same as that of the case of the said post-first reception production. The degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) may include “0%” or “100%”. In addition, at the timing tH3a, which is the time point when the player's action is accepted (the time point when the third post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated bag image display IG is not hidden, The point of not making it difficult to visually recognize the fossil image display IG is the same as in the case of the first post-reception effect.

  The timing tH3b shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3b has arrived, the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the first corresponding to the first reception period and the third reception period is commonly used as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”). The display according to the first mode of the 1 disappearance related display SK1 is started. Note that the configuration related to the “first disappearance related display SK1” displayed in relation to the third reception period and another example related thereto are as described above with reference to FIGS. 255 and 263. I will omit it here.

  According to such a configuration of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) relating to the “period from when the first sign effect display ZEH1 is displayed until the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed”, the first It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which one of the reception period and the third reception period has occurred (whether it has occurred), whereby the second effect device or the third effect device To increase interest in the game and to enhance the game entertainment by giving a strong interest in which aspect (the first post-reception display and the third post-reproduction display) appears as the post-reception display. Will be able to.

  In the third reception period, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is used regardless of whether the low expectation aspect or the high expectation aspect is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to this. Since the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears, the first effect device even in a situation in which the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) has been started. In (production display device 1600), the degree of expectation can be kept secret. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and different disappearance-related displays may appear depending on the degree of expectation. The degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  The timing tH3c shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, “post-third reception effect display as a post-reception effect in the third effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the action received by the player within the third reception period. (The type as the notice effect is different from the effect display after the first reception) ”. As the “post-third reception effect display”, a plurality of modes having different expectation levels are prepared, and a case where a low expectation mode is executed and a high expectation mode are executed as the third post-reception performance. As described above, different aspects appear as the “post-third reception effect display”.

  That is, in this case, the execution of the “post-third reception effect display” is started while the “integrated haze image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-1” are displayed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation where it is possible to recognize whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred or not. It is expected that the “changeable image display IG” will automatically shift to “post-reception effect display” (after timing tH3c).

  Even in this example, when the display related to the “post-third reception effect display” is started, the “third post-reception effect display” is displayed regardless of the mode. Of the “integrated haze image display IG” and “first disappearance related display SK1-1”, the “integrated haze image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the “integrated haze image display IG” is hidden in this way, the “first disappearance related display SK-1” is hidden, and thus, “visualization is good” The display related to the “post-third effect display” is performed.

  In this regard, as described above, the “post-reception effect display” is also displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the player's operation has been accepted. Therefore, the “third post-reception effect display” is also displayed after the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK-1” are hidden, as shown in FIG. 257 (b). Will be executed for a relatively long time.

  Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 257) and is limited. Various displays are performed on the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tH3c) of the third post-acceptance effect (third-post-acceptance effect display) according to acceptance is greater than the accepted timing tH3a. There is a fact that it must be delayed.

  Therefore, even when an action (operation) by the player is accepted in the third acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and (c), The third post-reception effect using the second effect device (the third post-reception specific effect) is made to start executing prior to the third post-acceptance effect (the third post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. I have to. Regarding the specific effect after the third reception, the content of the effect is different from the specific effect after the first reception, but is basically the same as the specific effect after the first reception.

  For example, as the third post-reception specific effect, a plurality of modes with different expectation levels are prepared, and when the low expectation mode is executed and the high expectation mode is executed as the third post-reception effect. In some cases, in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), a different aspect appears as the specific effect after the third reception. As shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and (c), the third post-acceptance specific effect using the second effect device is changed to the third post-acceptance effect display using the first effect device. The point that the execution is started in advance is the same as in the case of the specific effect after the first reception described above.

  In addition, when the third reception period occurs, as in the case of the first reception period, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) has a common effect for the first reception period (the first reception period and the third reception period). It is desirable to execute the first precursor specific effect). Further, in this case, the sign specific effect (first sign specific effect) in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first sign effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). It is executed even when the timing tH3 when the acceptance period occurs, and it is more desirable to execute it in such a manner as to straddle the timing tH3.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and the timing shown in FIG. 257 (d) is also generated when the third reception period occurs. At tH2, the acceptance allowable sound is started to be output. In other words, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the third reception period is audibly output in a form that crosses the timing tH3 when the third reception period occurs, and the acceptable reception sound is audibly output. Among them, an action by a player can be accepted. The acceptable reception sound is preferably the same sound as the acceptable reception sound that is output when the first reception period occurs.

  However, in the third reception period, when the player accepts an operation while the acceptable sound is being audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptable sound is changed based on the acceptance. I try to end it.

  In addition, in the third reception period, when the player accepts an operation while the acceptable sound is being audibly output, not only the acceptable sound is terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is made, Based on the above, the audible output of the third post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound and the second post-acceptance output sound is started. In other words, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed in the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed in the reception period and acceptance were made. There is no conflict (duplication) with the effect (the output sound after the third reception) performed in response.

  Such output sound after the third reception is similar to the “post-third reception effect display”, as shown in FIG. 257 (d), the “integrated haze image display IG” or the “first disappearance related display SK1-”. Even after “1” is hidden, it is executed for a relatively long time. Also, as the third post-acceptance output sound, a plurality of modes with different expectation levels are prepared, and a mode with a low expectation level and a mode with a high expectation level are performed as the third post-acceptance performance It is desirable to output different output sounds (modes).

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tH3c arrives only by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600). If the third effect device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the earlier timing tH3a arrives. Thereby, it becomes possible to encourage a player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 257, basically, even if the player does not receive an action within the third reception period, the operation by the player is accepted within the first reception period. It is the same as the case where it was not done.

  That is, in this case, after the third acceptance period occurs, the timing tH4 arrives without accepting an action by the player. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH4 (at the time when the third acceptance period ends and the player is no longer permitted to accept motion), the timing tH3a (third effect) As in the case of the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player has accepted the motion within the reception period, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, The fossil image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  After this, even if the player does not accept an action, the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (the first reception period and the third reception period is displayed as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”). The display related to the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1 that commonly corresponds to the reception period is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the “first disappearance related display SK1-” is displayed while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. 2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where“ first disappearance related display SK1-2 ”is displayed is“ integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period, and thus the player is strongly urged to perform an operation. Will be able to. In the third reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, when an action by the player is not received, a different aspect appears depending on the degree of expectation as “first disappearance related display SK1”. In addition, a mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-2) that is different from the mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) that appears when acceptance is made appears.

  After this, among the “integrated haze image display IG” and “first disappearance related display SK1-2”, first, the “integrated haze image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the “integrated bag image display IG” is hidden in this way, the “first disappearance related display SK-2” is hidden.

  FIG. 258 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs. FIG. 266 and FIG. 267 are diagrams illustrating an effect example in a variation pattern in which the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

  Now, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with non-probability change / non-time saving), and the “fourth change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (effect description according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (a)). Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “fourth variation pattern” itself. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 266 (a), for the convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE (hit the ratio of the big hit symbol that appears when the decorative symbol SZ stops in the variation effect) is indicated. Here, it is assumed that the “timer effect” described above) and the second effect display FE drawn as a frog character are displayed at the start of symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the change, not at the start of the change, or may be displayed at different timings.

  However, in the effect related to the “fourth variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 258, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). When the timing tI3 (the timing before the occurrence of the SP reach state or the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived after the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start, The fourth reception period (valid period) in which “acceptance of post-production” is allowed is generated (situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)). Thus, when an operation by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content (in the first effect device) that is executed as the fourth post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received. FIG. 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) shows the “display after the fourth reception”, the “special effect after the fourth reception” in the second effect device, and the “output sound after the fourth reception” in the third effect device. The first post-reception effect described above with reference to “the first post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, the “first post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and the “first reception in the third effect device” This is different from the post-output sound ”). Further, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, a fourth annihilation different from the first annihilation related display SK1 as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”. The point where the related display SK4 appears is also different from the case of the first reception period, but the other configurations are basically the same.

  Hereinafter, although the production performed in relation to the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception production) will be described, the description of what is the same as the case of the first reception period (first reception production) is here I'll omit it. That is, for matters not specifically mentioned, the effect is performed with the contents described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same applies to other examples and modifications.

  For example, the timing tI1 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 266 (b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the first sign effect display ZEH1 is displayed as the sign effect display. Is started.

  The timing tI2 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is displayed. ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where“ integrated haze image display IG ”is displayed overlaps with the area where“ first sign effect display ZEH1 ”is displayed.

  The timing tI3 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266 (d), the fourth reception period is set while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. Will occur.

  The timing tI3a shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. That is, the production progresses from the example shown in FIG. 258 or from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” or “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))”. In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 258 (a), the fourth acceptance period ends and the fourth acceptance period is accommodated based on the fact that the player's action is accepted at timing tI3a. The post-reception effect to be performed (the fourth post-reception effect) is started.

  In addition, the example where the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” has a relatively low expectation as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, and an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” is the reception corresponding to the fourth reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect having a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-production. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of aspects with different expectations as post-acceptance effects corresponding to the fourth reception period, and whenever they are received, a specific aspect (for example, C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (I1))) may appear. In this case, even if the “integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the fourth reception period, a plurality of modes are not prepared depending on the degree of expectation, and it is always the same when there is reception. A mode will be made to appear.

  Similarly, in the fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 258 (b), FIG. 267 (e1), or (e2), when the action by the player is received (the fourth time according to the reception) At the timing tI3a, which is the time point when the post-reception effect is started, the integrated haze image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize. .

  The timing tI3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, the “mode in which the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” appears. However, as described above, when the acceptance is made during the fourth acceptance period, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4 different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is started (timing tI3b).

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the “fourth disappearance-related display SK4” is displayed while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. "Is displayed, and" integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display) "is displayed in at least a part of the area where" fourth disappearance related display SK4 "is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance, even if the integrated haze image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, and thus after the acceptance. It can be suggested that the effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed. Accordingly, it is expected that the player's gaze destination is automatically shifted from the integrated bag image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tI3b). Thereby, even in the situation where the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated haze image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the integrated bag image display IG is not displayed in any manner within the reception period.

  Further, in the fourth reception period, a case with a low expectation degree (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a post-reception effect corresponding to this, and a case with a high expectation degree (FIG. 267 (e2) to A different mode (fourth annihilation related display SK4-1, SK4-2) appears as the fourth annihilation related display SK4 depending on when (i2)) appears. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) and (f2), the “post-reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1) and the second mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-). 2), it can be estimated whether or not the “post-reception effect display” is executed in a highly expected manner.

  The timing tI3c shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3c has arrived, the display of the display related to the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears, and the operation by the player within the fourth reception period “4th post-reception effect display UG4” as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to having been received is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception performance), FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period. From FIG. 266 (d), “C2 In the example in which the production progresses to (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2)) (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 267 (g2), the fourth reception As the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the period, the second mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is displayed.

  That is, in this case, the “integrated haze image display IG” and the “fourth annihilation related display SK4 (fourth annihilation related display SK4-1 or fourth annihilation related display SK4-2)” are displayed. "4 post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)" starts to be executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is a case where it continues displaying the integrated haze image display IG over a comparatively long time after it received within the 4th reception period, in the 1st effect device (effect display device 1600). It becomes possible to start the post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4) without significantly delaying compared to other effect devices, and to suppress a decrease in game entertainment. In addition, since the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 is started while it is difficult to visually recognize the integrated bag image display IG, it is suggested that the fourth reception period has already ended. Is automatically shifted from “integrated bag image display IG” to “post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)”. Is expected (after timing tI3c).

  And in the effects related to the fourth reception period, the display related to “the fourth reception effect display UG4 (the fourth reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth reception effect display UG4-2)” is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 267 (h1) or (h2), the “post-reception effect display UG4 (the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or after the fourth reception). While the “effect display UG4-2)” is displayed, first, the “integrated bag image display IG” out of the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “second disappearance related display SK2” is hidden. . Then, after the “integrated haze image display IG” is not displayed in this manner, as shown in FIG. 258 (b), FIG. 267 (i1) or (i2), the “fourth disappearance related display SK4 (first display)” is displayed. “4 annihilation related display SK4-1 or 4 annihilation related display SK4-2)” is not displayed, and the “post fourth reception effect display UG4 (fourth reception The display related to the post-effect display UG4-1 or the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) ”is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tI3b arrives only by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600). If the third effect device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the earlier timing tI3a arrives. Thereby, it becomes possible to encourage a player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

  Further, even if the player only watches the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth disappearance related display SK4 different from the first disappearance related display SK1 described above is “integrated. The fake image display IG appears as “a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize”. Therefore, by confirming such an aspect, it is possible to recognize at the earlier stage which type has occurred as the reception period before the “fourth post-reception effect display UG4” is performed. become able to.

  In this regard, the “post-reception effect display UG4” is a plurality of modes (in this case, the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth display based on the fact that the player's operation is accepted). It is displayed in any of after-reception effect display UG4-2). Therefore, the “post-reception presentation display UG4” is executed for a relatively long time after the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “fourth disappearance-related display SK4” are not displayed. .

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the fourth reception period occurs, a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 258) is accompanied accordingly. In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (production display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in the amusement of the game. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-acceptance effect (the fourth post-acceptance effect display) according to the acceptance is more than the accepted timing tI3a. There is a fact that it must be delayed.

  Therefore, when an action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 258 (b) and (c), the second presentation is based on the acceptance. The fourth post-reception effect (the fourth post-reception specific effect) using the device is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-reception effect (the fourth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. Yes.

  According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tI3a that was accepted in the fourth reception period, but only a part of the fourth post-reception effect (post-reception effect display), The fourth post-reception effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tI3a.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. In the example where the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception performance), FIG. 267 (e1) As shown in the above, the aspect in which “one sword” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UGT4 after the fourth reception corresponding to the fourth reception period (the fourth effect). As a fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-1), which is a mode of low expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) using the first effect device. The execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception performance), FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which “two swords” are displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the above-mentioned fourth after-reception specific effect UGT4 (corresponding to the fourth reception period) The fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-2, which is a mode of high expectation of the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4, is the fourth post-reception effect (the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) using the first effect device. ) Is started prior to).

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the fourth reception period separately from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). The sign effect (fourth sign specific effect) is performed (FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)). The fourth sign specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first sign effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tI3 at which the first reception period occurs is It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed in such a manner as to straddle the timing tI3.

  In this embodiment, the sign effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as an effect (fourth sign specific effect) different from the first sign specific effect shown in FIG. 262. You may make it perform as the same production as the 1st sign specific production shown. In this case, even when the second rendering device is confirmed, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period occurs.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and the timing shown in FIG. 258 (d) is generated when the fourth reception period occurs. At tI2, the acceptance allowable sound (corresponding to “♪” output in FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the fourth reception period is audibly output in a manner straddling the timing tI3 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)”) at which the fourth reception period occurs. Thus, an operation by the player can be accepted while the permissible reception sound is audibly output.

  In this regard, in the fourth reception period, if the player accepts an operation while the permissible reception sound is being audibly output, the permissible reception sound is terminated halfway (audible) based on the acceptance. The output state is terminated halfway).

  In addition, in the fourth reception period, when the player accepts an operation while the permissible reception sound is being audibly output, not only the acceptance permissible sound is terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is performed. To start audible output of a fourth post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to “♪♪” output in FIG. 267 (e1) or (e2), etc.) different from the first post-acceptance output sound based on It has become. That is, in this case, in the fourth reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed in the first effect device, the effect (acceptance acceptable sound) performed in the reception period and the acceptance were made. Accordingly, there is no conflict (overlap) with the effect (the output sound after the fourth reception) performed accordingly.

  The output sound after the fourth reception is similar to the “post-reception effect display UG4”, as shown in FIG. 258 (d), and “integrated haze image display IG” or “fourth disappearance related display SK4”. "Is not displayed, and is executed for a relatively long time (" Situation where ♪♪ is output in FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) "). Equivalent). In addition, with regard to the output sound after the fourth reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (relatively low expectation as the post-reception performance ) And FIG. 266 (d) are different from each other in the case where the production progresses from “C2” (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2)) ”(when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception performance). It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  Regarding the acceptable reception sound output corresponding to the fourth reception period, in order to make it difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period occurs, It is desirable that the sound is the same as the permissible reception sound output correspondingly. However, it is not necessarily the same.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 258, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C3 (FIG. 267 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the fourth reception period. It is assumed that the action by the person is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the fourth acceptance period occurs, the timing tI4 arrives without accepting an action by the player. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI4 (at the time when the fourth acceptance period ends and the player is no longer permitted to accept the motion), the timing tI3a (the fourth effect) As shown in FIG. 267 (e3), as in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player accepts the motion within the reception period, the integrated 摸 image display IG In addition to not hiding the image, the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, even if the fourth reception period ends without accepting the motion by the player in time, the integrated reception within the fourth reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG is displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  After this, even if the player does not accept the action, as shown in FIG. 267 (f3), the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”. -1 or the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the “fourth disappearance-related display SK4-” is displayed while the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. 1 or the second disappearance related display SK4-2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ fourth disappearance related display SK4 ”is displayed is“ integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

  According to such a structure, even if it is a case where it continues displaying the integrated haze image display IG after the 4th reception period is complete | finished without accepting, this integrated haze image display IG is By making it difficult to visually recognize, it can be suggested that the fourth reception period has ended. In addition, even in the situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated haze image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to view. From this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the fact that the integrated bag image display IG is displayed in any manner within the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the fourth reception period, the “fourth disappearance related display SK4-1” is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. In the case, if the action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the production has progressed from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))”. (When a post-reception effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, the case where “fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2” is displayed as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 when an operation by the player is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period is the fourth acceptance period. If the action by the player is received in the case, the production has progressed from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (relative expectation) This corresponds to a case where a high post-reception performance is executed).

  That is, in this case, in the fourth reception period, even if an action by the player is not received, the integrated bag image display IG is not displayed after the fourth reception period ends. By simply confirming the mode (the 4th annihilation related display SK4-1, the 4th annihilation related display SK4-2) as the “4th annihilation related display SK4” appearing, It becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or has been executed in a highly expected manner, so that it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 267 (g3), first, of the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “fourth disappearance related display SK4”, the “integrated bag image display IG” is hidden. To do. Then, after “integrated haze image display IG” is hidden in this way, “fourth disappearance related display SK4” is hidden as shown in FIG. 267 (h3).

  In the fourth reception period, similarly to the first reception period, a mode with low expectation (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1)) and a mode with high expectation (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2)) may be executed, the same specific mode may appear as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, in this case, even when an action by the player is not accepted in the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the first acceptance period described above, the same specific mode appears as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. Become.

  By the way, as described above, in the first reception period and the fourth reception period, the first effect display TE (in the period from the indication effect display to the effect display after reception is performed in any reception period. Here, the above-mentioned “timer effect” and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed.

  In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 262 (b) and (c), the first effect display TE is displayed in the situation where the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” is displayed. The second effect display FE is not made difficult to visually recognize by the “first sign effect display ZEH1”. In addition, after the first acceptance period ends, as shown in FIGS. 263 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (if accepted) Mode) and the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (mode when not accepted) appear, but the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first disappearance-related display. The SK1 (the first disappearance related display SK1-1 or the first disappearance related display SK1-2) is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  On the other hand, when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 266 (b) and (c), the first effect display is performed in the situation where the “first sign effect display ZEH 1” is displayed. The TE and the second effect display FE are not made difficult to visually recognize by the “first sign effect display ZEH1”. Further, after the fourth acceptance period is over, as shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 (the fourth disappearance related display SK4). -1 or the fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2) appears, but the first effect display TE is not made difficult to visually recognize by the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to visually recognize by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

  According to such a configuration, even if the type as the disappearance related display SK does not store which type of the reception period corresponds to the second effect, By simply confirming whether or not the display FE is difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to infer which type has occurred as the reception period. In addition, the first effect display TE is not made difficult to be visually recognized by the disappearance-related display SK regardless of whether or not the second effect display FE is difficult to visually recognize by the disappearance-related display SK. For this reason, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, “second indication effect display ZEH2” is displayed, and then “second reception effect display UG2” is displayed. In the period until the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, the first effect display TE can be displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed. .

  That is, in this case, the type as the reception period is estimated (at least the first display) simply by confirming whether the “prediction effect display” or the “reception period” has occurred while the second effect display FE is displayed. The second effect display FE itself does not suggest the degree of expectation of the changing symbol effect, since it is possible to guess that it is neither the reception period nor the fourth reception period. Even so, an interesting production using the second production display FE can be provided.

  Even when the second reception period occurs, it is difficult to visually recognize the first effect display TE by the sign effect display and the disappearance related display as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period. It is made so that it will not be lost.

  FIG. 259 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs.

  Now, it is assumed that the start condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not probabilistic and non-time-saving), and “fifth variation pattern” is selected as a result of performing the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern. After that, a variation effect of the decorative design SZ (such as a depiction of the effect according to the fifth variation pattern and a sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “fifth variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect related to the “fifth variation pattern”, the fifth predetermined time after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). “Acceptance of the post-fifth operation effect” is allowed when the elapsed timing tJ3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived. The fifth reception period (valid period) is generated. Thus, when an action by the player is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, a fifth post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fifth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed in the fifth post-reception effect (in the first effect device) based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received. “Fifth post-reception effect display”, “Fifth post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “Fifth post-acceptance output sound” in the third effect device) after each reception corresponding to other reception periods This is different from the effects (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, “output sound after reception” in the third effect device). In addition, the “fifth warning effect display” corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is also different from each warning effect display corresponding to the other reception periods. However, the “display after the fifth reception” and the “fifth indication display” methods related to the display itself (such as the display start time and end time, and other image display before the display is turned off) And the like described in the display effects performed in connection with the first reception period, the display effects performed in connection with the second reception period, and the like (FIGS. 255, 256, 262 to 265), and other configurations are basically the same.

  Hereinafter, effects performed in association with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) will be described. However, the same structure as in the first reception period (first reception effect) or the second reception period (second reception effect) may be referred to as being the same, but more than that. The explanation of is omitted here. That is, for matters not specifically mentioned, the production will be performed with the contents described in the first reception period (first reception production) or the second reception period (second reception production), and other examples and modifications The same applies to the examples.

  For example, the timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the execution of “fifth warning effect display” is started as the warning effect display.

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the “fifth indication effect display” is a type that is displayed in a manner straddling the timing tJ3 at which the fifth reception period occurs. That is, the “fifth warning effect display” is different from the above-mentioned “second warning indication display ZEH2” displayed corresponding to the second reception period, but the effect contents (display image) are different. “End time, how it relates to other image display until it is not displayed”, etc., will be described with reference to FIGS. 256, 264 and 265. The display is performed by the method as described above. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  The timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ2 arrives, the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while the “fifth sign indication display” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the “image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “fifth indication effect display” is displayed.

  The timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ3 has arrived, the fifth reception period occurs while the “fifth precursor effect display” and the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” are displayed. It will be.

  The timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when an action by the player is accepted at timing tI3a, the fifth reception period ends, and the post-reception effect (fifth post-reception effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period starts to be executed. It will be. As with the first post-reception effect (FIG. 263) and the second post-reception effect (FIG. 265), the fifth post-reception effect is also compared with the case where the first aspect with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. In some cases, the second mode with a high expectation is executed.

  The timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ3b arrives, an “a mode in which the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” appears.

  In this regard, when the acceptance is made during the fifth acceptance period, the “first disappearance-related display SK1” corresponding to the first acceptance period is commonly used as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. The display related to is started. As for “first disappearance-related display SK1”, “display start time and end time, how it relates to other image display until it is not displayed”, and the like, FIG. 255 and FIG. As described above. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, regarding the “mode in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the fifth reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, “the relatively expectation degree” Different modes may appear between the case where the “first mode with low” is executed and the case where the “second mode with relatively high expectation” is executed.

  For example, when the “second mode having a relatively high expectation” is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the “first disappearance related display SK1” is set as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated bag image display IG”. (Here, the first mode is the first annihilation-related display SK1-1 (FIG. 263)). In the case where “mode” is executed, if a mode different from “first disappearance related display SK1-1” appears as “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated tile image display IG”, the first reception is performed. When “first disappearance-related display SK1-1” is displayed corresponding to the period, the user is made aware of the possibility that the “second mode with relatively high expectation” will be executed as the fifth post-reception effect. Because it becomes possible to improve, Kill as to become.

  In this case, when the “second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the “second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the post-first reception effect. It is desirable to set so that the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) is higher than the time. The percentage may be 100%.

  Further, when the “first mode with relatively low expectation” is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the “first annihilation related display SK1− When an aspect different from “1” appears, “the first disappearance related display SK1-2 as the second aspect as the first disappearance related display SK1” may appear as the different aspect. That is, in this case, when the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appears as a result of acceptance in the fifth acceptance period, or within the first acceptance period It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the first disappearance related display SK1-2 appears as a result of not being in time for acceptance, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, when the “first disappearance related display SK1-1” is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the “second mode with relatively high expectation” is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the possibility of raising the possibility is more appropriately noticed or when the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, “relatively expected” In order to make the possibility of executing the “second mode with a low degree” more appropriately conscious, the precursor effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period is not the “fifth precursor effect display”, It is desirable to execute the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” similar to the first reception period.

  In addition, as in the case of the first reception period and the second reception period, as shown in FIG. 259, the second reception period is also based on the reception of the second reception period. The fifth post-reception effect (the fifth post-reception specific effect) using the effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is the fifth post-acceptance effect (the fifth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. Start execution in advance. The same is true in that the specific presentation after the fifth reception is executed so that different modes appear according to the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the sign effect (the fifth sign specific effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period. In addition, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. 262 instead of the fifth precursor specific effect. Also good.

  In addition, when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 259 (d), this acceptable sound for acceptance is of a type that is terminated halfway when accepted. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (d), “acceptable sound for a long time” and “acceptable sound for a short time” are output as audible sounds as the acceptable sound for audible output when the second reception period occurs. 256, FIG. 264, and FIG. 26, for example, “starting time and ending time of audible output, how it relates to other effects until audible output is ended”, and the like. The audible output is performed by the method as described for “acceptable sound” with reference to H.265. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, with regard to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the fifth reception period occurs, only one acceptable reception sound is output, similar to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the third reception period or the fourth reception period occurs. May be output as being terminated halfway when received.

  In any case, in the fifth reception period, when the player accepts an operation while the acceptable sound is being audibly output, the acceptance sound is not only terminated halfway but also accepted. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the fifth post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound output in correspondence with another reception period is started. That is, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, an effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed during the reception period and an effect (fifth reception) performed in response to the reception. There is no conflict (overlap) with the rear output sound.

  Note that the output sound after the fifth reception is also relative to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in a first mode with a relatively low expectation, like the output sound after the first reception and the second output sound after the reception. Therefore, the output sound is audibly output as a different output sound when executed in the second mode with high expectation.

  On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 259, if the player does not receive an action within the fifth acceptance period, the player accepts the action after the fifth acceptance period has occurred. The timing tJ4 arrives without any problem.

  In this regard, also in the fifth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tJ4 (when the fifth reception period ends and the player is no longer permitted to accept motion). However, the integrated haze image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  After this, even when the player does not accept an action, the display related to the fifth disappearance related display SK5 is started as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”.

  The “mode in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” when the acceptance is not made in the fifth acceptance period is provisionally accepted in the fifth acceptance period as in the second acceptance period. If it is, the mode that appeared (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) appears. However, as in the first reception period, an aspect that cannot appear when it is received in the fifth reception period may appear.

  FIG. 260 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs.

  Now, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state with non-probability change / non-time saving), and the “sixth variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variation pattern. Then, after that, a variation effect of the decorative design SZ (such as a depiction of the effect according to the sixth variation pattern and a sound output of BGM playback according to the sixth variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed on the selected “sixth variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect related to the “sixth variation pattern”, the sixth predetermined time after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). “Acceptance of the post-6th operation effect” is allowed when the elapsed timing tK3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived The sixth reception period (valid period) is generated. Thus, when an operation by the player is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, a sixth post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth reception period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content (in the first effect device) that is executed as the sixth post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received. “Sixth post-reception effect display”, “Sixth post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “Sixth post-acceptance output sound” in the third effect device) after each reception corresponding to other reception periods This is different from the effects (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, “output sound after reception” in the third effect device). In addition, when an operation (operation) is received by the player during the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect), the 態 様 image display (here, without displaying the “mode that makes it difficult to view the 摸 image display”) Then, the integrated image display is not displayed. However, the “display after 6th reception” and “display image” methods related to the display itself (display start time and end time, and how to display other images before they are hidden) Is related to the display effects (FIGS. 255, 262, and 263) performed in connection with the first reception period, and other configurations are also described. This is basically the same as any of the above-described methods.

  Hereinafter, effects performed in association with the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) will be described. However, the same configuration as in the first reception period (first reception effect) may be referred to as being the same, but further explanation is omitted here. That is, for matters not specifically mentioned, the effect is performed with the contents described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same applies to other examples and modifications.

  For example, the timing tK1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), execution of “first sign effect display” is started as the sign effect display.

  Also, the timing tK2 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK2 arrives, the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while the “first sign indication display” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the “image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “first sign effect display” is displayed.

  Also, the timing tK3 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the “integrated haze image display IG (haze image display, gauge image display)” is displayed.

  Also, the timing tK3a shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when an operation by the player is accepted at timing tK3a, the sixth reception period ends, and the post-reception effect (sixth post-reception effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period starts to be executed. It will be. The sixth post-reception effect is similar to the first post-reception effect (FIG. 263) and the like, when the first aspect with a relatively low expectation is executed and the second aspect with a relatively high expectation. May be executed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 260, the processing related to the effect related to the sixth reception period does not correspond to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255, that is, “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image The display becomes difficult to visually recognize until the display or gauge image display) is not displayed. This is the same regardless of whether the “low-expectation aspect” or “high-expectation aspect” appears as the sixth post-reception effect (the timing tF3b does not exist), The same applies to the case where the sixth acceptance period ends without accepting any action by the player during the sixth acceptance period (the timing tF3b does not exist).

  According to such a configuration, in another reception period, when the reception period ends, the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is visually recognized until it is hidden. In spite of the appearance of difficulty, the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is not displayed in the sixth reception period even if the reception period ends. Since the mode (disappearance-related display SK) that makes it difficult to visually recognize this will not appear in the past, whether the sixth reception period has ended (the situation in which the action by the player has been canceled) It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the tension is in a good state, and it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

  In addition, when received in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 260, based on the reception, the second effect device (here, The sixth post-reception effect (sixth post-reception specific effect) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed prior to the sixth post-reception effect (sixth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. . The same is true in that the sixth post-reception specific performance is executed so that different aspects appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the sign effect (sixth sign specific effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period. In addition, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first precursor specific effect shown in FIG. Also good.

  In addition, when the sixth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 260 (d), this acceptable reception sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when accepted. As to “acceptable sound start time and end time, how it relates to other effects until the audible output is finished” and the like relating to such acceptable reception sound, FIG. 258, FIG. 266 and FIG. The audible output is performed by the method described with reference to 267 for “acceptable sound” corresponding to the fourth reception period. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, with regard to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the sixth reception period is generated, two reception allowable sounds are output and received in the same manner as the acceptable reception sound that is output when the second reception period is generated. May be output as being terminated halfway.

  In any case, in the sixth reception period, when the player accepts an operation while the acceptable sound is being audibly output, the acceptance sound is not only terminated, but also accepted. Sometimes, based on this, an audible output of the sixth post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound output corresponding to another reception period is started. That is, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, an effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed during the reception period and an effect (sixth reception) performed in response to the reception. There is no conflict (overlap) with the rear output sound.

  Note that the output sound after the sixth reception is also relative to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation, similar to the output sound after the first reception and the fourth output sound after the reception. Therefore, the output sound is audibly output as a different output sound when executed in the second mode with high expectation.

  On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 260, if the player does not receive an action within the sixth reception period, the player receives an action after the sixth reception period occurs. The timing tK4 arrives without any problem.

  In this regard, also in the sixth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tK4 (when the sixth reception period ends and the player is no longer permitted to accept motion). However, the integrated haze image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize. However, as described above, in the sixth reception period, after the timing tK4 has arrived without accepting an action by the player, an “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated bag image display IG” does not appear. .

  FIG. 261 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs.

  Now, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state with non-probability change / non-time saving), and “seventh variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (notice determination or the like) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern. After that, a variation effect of the decorative design SZ (such as a depiction of the effect according to the seventh variation pattern and a sound output of BGM playback according to the seventh variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect corresponding to the result of the effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed on the selected “seventh variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect related to the “seventh variation pattern”, the seventh predetermined time after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). "Acceptance of post-seventh operation effect" is allowed when the elapsed timing tL3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived The seventh reception period (valid period) is generated. Thus, when an action by the player is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, a seventh post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the seventh reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed in the seventh post-reception effect (in the first effect device) based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received. “7th post-reception effect display”, “seventh post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, and “seventh post-acceptance output sound” in the third effect device) after each reception corresponding to other reception periods This is different from the effects (“post-reception effect display” in the first effect device, “post-reception specific effect” in the second effect device, “output sound after reception” in the third effect device). Further, the “seventh sign effect display” corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) is also different from each sign effect display corresponding to other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, each annihilation-related display corresponding to another reception period is also used as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. A different “seventh disappearance-related display” appears. However, “display after the seventh reception”, “seventh sign display”, “seventh disappearance related display”, and other methods related to the display itself (the display start time and end time, or until the display is hidden) In the meantime, how it relates to other image display, etc. is the same as that described in any of the display effects performed in relation to each reception period described above, and other configurations Is basically the same.

  Hereinafter, effects performed in relation to the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) will be described. However, the same configuration as in the other reception periods (other reception effects) is referred to as being the same, but further explanation is omitted here. In addition, for matters not specifically mentioned, the production is performed with the same contents as described in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same applies to other examples and modifications.

  For example, the timing tL1 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, execution of the precursor effect display is started on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

  However, as described above, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect), a “seventh warning effect display” that does not correspond to other reception periods is displayed as the corresponding warning effect display. Yes. As shown in FIG. 261 (b), the “seven sign indication display” is a type that is not displayed at the time when the seventh reception period occurs and is hidden before this. . That is, the “seventh sign effect display” is different from the above-mentioned “first sign effect display ZEH1” displayed corresponding to the first reception period, but the contents of the display (display image) are different from each other. As to “end time, how to relate to other image display before being hidden”, etc., as described with reference to FIG. 256 and FIG. 262 “first sign indication display ZEH1” The display is performed by the technique. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  Also, the timing tL2 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL2 arrives, the “integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while the “seventh sign indication display” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the “image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “seventh sign display” is displayed.

  Also, the timing tL3 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the “integrated haze image display IG (haze image display, gauge image display)” is displayed.

  Also, the timing tL3a shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when an operation by the player is accepted at timing tL3a, the seventh reception period ends, and the post-reception effect (seventh post-reception effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period starts to be executed. It will be. As for the post-reception effect, the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed, and the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation, as in the case of the post-reception effect (FIG. 263). May be executed.

  Also, the timing tL3b shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3b arrives, the “mode in which the integrated haze image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize” appears. However, as described above, when received in the seventh reception period, the “seventh disappearance-related display” does not correspond to other reception periods as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”. Is started (timing tL3b).

  Here, the “seventh disappearance-related display” is different from the above-mentioned “first disappearance-related display SK1” displayed corresponding to the first reception period, but the content of the presentation (display image) is different from the “display start time”. "End time, how it relates to other image display until it is not displayed", etc., with reference to FIG. 255, FIG. 256, FIG. 263, FIG. The display is performed by the method described for “display SK1”. The same applies to other examples and modifications. In addition, in the case where the seventh post-reception effect is “executed as a mode with relatively low expectations” and “when executed as a mode with relatively high expectations”, “Display” is the same as that in the first reception period in that it is displayed in the same manner.

  However, unlike the case of the first reception period, the “post-reception effect for the seventh aspect” is different from “the aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (the seventh disappearance-related display)” corresponding to the seventh reception period. As another example, different modes may appear when the “first mode with relatively low expectation” is executed and when the “second mode with relatively high expectation” is executed.

  Also, the timing tL3c shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3c has arrived, the display related to the “seventh disappearance-related display” (the aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears, and the player within the seventh reception period The “seventh post-reception effect display” as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the accepted operation is started to be executed.

  In addition, when received in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 261, based on the reception, the second effect device (here, The execution after the seventh post-reception effect using the sub liquid crystal 1610) (the seventh post-reception specific effect) is started prior to the seventh post-reception effect using the first effect device (the seventh post-reception effect display). . The same is true in that the specific presentation after the seventh reception is executed so that different modes appear according to the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (seventh precursor specific effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period. In addition, the precursor specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first predictor specific effect shown in FIG. 262 instead of the seventh precursor specific effect. Also good.

  Also, when the seventh reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 261 (d), this acceptable reception sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when accepted. As to “acceptable sound start time and end time, how it relates to other effects until the audible output is finished” and the like relating to such acceptable reception sound, FIG. 258, FIG. 266 and FIG. The audible output is performed by the method described with reference to 267 for “acceptable sound” corresponding to the fourth reception period. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, with regard to the acceptable reception sound that is output when the seventh reception period occurs, two acceptable reception sounds are output and received in the same manner as the acceptable reception sound that is output when the second reception period occurs. May be output as being terminated halfway.

  In any case, in the seventh reception period, when the player accepts an operation while the permissible reception sound is being audibly output, the acceptance permissible sound is not only terminated halfway but also accepted. Sometimes, based on this, an audible output of the seventh post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound output corresponding to another reception period is started. That is, in this case, in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, an effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed during the reception period and an effect (seventh reception) performed in response to the reception. There is no conflict (overlap) with the rear output sound.

  Note that the output sound after the seventh reception is also relative to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation, similar to the output sound after the first reception or the fourth output sound after the reception. Therefore, the output sound is audibly output as a different output sound when executed in the second mode with high expectation.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 261, if the player does not receive an action within the seventh reception period, the player receives an action after the seventh reception period occurs. The timing tL4 arrives without any problem.

  In this regard, also in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tL4 (when the seventh reception period ends and the player is no longer permitted to accept motion). However, the integrated haze image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  After that, even when the player does not accept the action, the display related to the seventh disappearance-related display is started as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”.

  As in the case of the first reception period, the “mode in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” when the reception was not performed in the seventh reception period was received in the seventh reception period. A mode that cannot appear sometimes appears. However, as in the second reception period, an aspect that appears if it was accepted in the seventh reception period (an aspect that differs depending on the degree of expectation) may appear.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which the first reception period to the seventh reception period are prepared, the following excellent effects are listed.

  That is, first, regardless of the occurrence of any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the haze image display displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) It is also possible to display after the production has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted (after the production change based on acceptance has been started). Thereby, even after the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance, it is determined in which mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the bag image display is displayed within the acceptance period. Will be able to grasp.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the contents of the effects that are advanced when received (conversation notices, cut-in notices, movable object notices, etc. as effects after acceptance, and notice effects (expectation suggestion effects) ) Types) are available for different reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period), and it is possible to generate reception periods (valid periods) according to the results of determination (production determination). It is supposed to be.

  In this regard, in the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when an operation by the player is received, the post-reception effect display (first post-reception effect display to seventh) is performed based on the reception. The “post-reception effect display” can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Among these, during the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, when an operation by the player is received, a post-reception effect display is displayed based on the reception. In addition to this, a “mode (display related to disappearance) in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” is further made to appear. That is, in this case, after acceptance, it is possible to confirm which mode has been displayed as the 摸 image display, and during the period until the 摸 image display is hidden, By reducing the visibility by “a mode in which image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)”, the player's gaze target naturally moves from “摸 image display” to “post-reception effect display”. To be expected.

  However, since the trapezoidal image display is intended to be displayed within the acceptance period when it has not been accepted yet, if the trapped image display is displayed after acceptance, it will be accepted depending on the acceptance. It is difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception effect display is in a displayed state, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced. In this regard, when acceptance is made in any of the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the 摸 image display is “a mode in which the 摸 image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display). ) "Is hidden (not visible), while the post-reception effect display is displayed while" an image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) "appears. I try to do it. In other words, in this case, after the player accepts the motion, the “mode that makes it difficult to see the 摸 image display (disappearance-related display)” appears, and the display after the reception (the 前 image display) is displayed after the reception. Transition to the display effect to (post-reception effect display) is realized.

  It should be noted that the “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” and the “post-reception effect display” are common in that they are displayed based on acceptance. However, the “mode in which the habit image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” is, for example, as shown in FIG. 263 (f1), FIG. 265 (f1), FIG. 267 (f1), and the like. It appears so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display when the display is being displayed. On the other hand, “post-reception effect display” refers to a situation in which a bag image display is displayed as shown in FIG. 263 (g1), FIG. 265 (g1), FIG. 267 (g1), or the like. Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display. In each of the above-described examples, the “post-reception effect display” is started when the 摸 image display is being displayed. It is not always necessary to start the display when the situation is displayed, and the display may be started after the haze image display is hidden.

  In addition, as a method of “appearing so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” with respect to “a mode in which the habit image display is difficult to be visually recognized (disappearance related display)” In addition to the technique realized by prioritized display (displayed in the front layer) of the image display different from the 摸 image display, a part of the 欠 け image display is lacking due to the image display different from the 摸 image display ( It is possible to adopt a technique that is realized by displaying an image (moving image) that is made visible so that it is not visible. It is also possible to adopt a method of changing numerical values (such as transmittance) relating to the display characteristics of the hail image display itself, rather than an image display different from the hail image display. On the other hand, as a technique of “appearing so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the 摸 image display” with respect to the “post-reception effect display”, the “post-reception effect display” is applied to at least a part of the area where the 摸 image display is displayed. In addition to the method realized by displaying the “post-reception effect display” (displayed on the rear layer) in a manner that the 摸 image display is given priority display, at least while the 摸 image display is displayed It is possible to adopt a technique realized by displaying “post-reception effect display” only in the area excluding the area where the haze image display is displayed.

  In addition, as a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the soot image display (disappearance-related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the soot image display in at least a part of the area in which the soot image display is displayed, Both the image display itself and a method of changing numerical values (such as transmittance) relating to the display characteristics may be employed.

  In addition, “a mode in which the 難 image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” is a situation in which the “post-reception effect display” is not yet displayed before the “post-reception effect display” is displayed. It appears below. That is, in this case, in a situation where the “post-reception effect display” has not yet been displayed, the habit image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the above-described “mode in which the habit image display is difficult to see (disappearance related display)”. Therefore, while making the 摸 image display visible, the “post-reception effect display” is in a state where it can appear soon, and the player's gaze destination is changed from “the 摸 image display made difficult to see”. You can be prompted in advance to be ready.

  In addition, when received in the first reception period to the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, and the like, the “mode in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” is “post-reception effect display”. "Can be displayed after" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, in the period after the “display after-reception display” is displayed, in the period after the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display)” is hidden, the “ Since it is possible to provide the rendering performance related to the “post-reception presentation display”, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by such a change in the rendering performance during the display period.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, FIG. 263 (g1), (h1), FIG. 265 (g1), (h1), FIG. As shown in 267 (g1) and (h1), regarding the “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)”, not only the area where the haze image display is displayed, but also the haze image display It is also displayed in the area where is not displayed. In this area, “post-reception presentation display” is displayed at least in part, but “post-reception presentation display” is displayed according to “a mode in which the 摸 image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)”. At least a part of “display” is displayed (for example, displayed on the rear layer) so as to be difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, the “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” appears as not only the haze image display but also the “post-reception effect display” is difficult to view. As a result, it is expected to improve both the presentation performance until the 摸 image display is hidden and the presentation performance when the “post-reception presentation display” display starts. Become.

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the “post-reception effect display” before the “post-reception effect display” is displayed after the acceptance is made. In a situation where “” is not displayed, apart from “a mode in which the vaginal image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)”, a specific effect after reception that does not make the vaginal image display difficult to view (using the second effect device) (Post-reception presentation) can appear in a manner corresponding to the degree of expectation. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-reception stage prior to this without disturbing the stage performance in the first stage device.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects examples related to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is “摸Appears in a situation where the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” has not yet appeared before the “mode in which the image display becomes invisible (disappearance-related display)” appears. I am doing so. Further, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display (disappearance-related display)” is ended. Yes.

  According to such a configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance in the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance by the second performance device having a simplified performance. It will be possible to improve the gaming interest for various types of players.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the sign effect display is assumed to be executed over the timing at which the haze image display is displayed. In addition, in some of the above-described production examples, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, etc., it is possible to accept in the state where the indication production display is displayed, and when the acceptance is made, The “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” makes it difficult to view both the haze image display and the indication effect display (such as the priority display described above).

  However, on the other hand, at least at the time when “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display)” appears, neither the image display nor the indication effect display overlaps the whole. , At least some of the visibility is not disturbed. In other words, the mode of making it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display (disappearance-related display) is executed in a manner that gradually deteriorates the visibility of the habit image display and the warning effect display (increases the overlapping area). Yes.

  Moreover, also in each production example mentioned above regarding the 1st reception period-the 7th reception period, as described above with reference to FIG. 233, FIG. 234, etc., the habit image display is displayed by dynamic display. It becomes. In this case, after the acceptance, the dynamic display continues without being ended even if the “appearance that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display (disappearance related display)” appears. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display (disappearance related display)” is only the vaginal image display. In addition, the gauge image that suggests the remaining time until the reception period ends is made difficult to visually recognize. Thereby, even if it is a case where a gauge image is displayed after it is received, it is suppressed that it looks as if the remaining time remains.

  Further, in the above-described production example, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods, the first reception is performed based on the reception. An effect display UG1 can be displayed, and an aspect (first disappearance-related display SK1) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display can appear separately from the first post-acceptance effect display UG1. In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, a second different from the first post-reception effect display UG1 based on the acceptance. In addition to the second post-reception effect display UG2, it is possible to display the post-reception effect display UG2, and a mode different from the case of the first reception period as a mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize (second The disappearance related display SK2) can appear.

  According to such a configuration, the haze image display can be performed without confirming which of the “first post-reception effect display UG1” and the “second post-reception effect display UG2” is displayed as the post-reception effect display. It is possible to infer the type of post-acceptance effect display only by confirming which aspect (first disappearance-related display SK1, second disappearance-related display SK2) is difficult to visually recognize.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the acceptance is made. Based on this, it is possible to display a third post-reception effect display different from both the “first post-reception effect display UG1” and the “second post-reception effect display UG2”. In addition, the above aspect (first disappearance-related display SK1) corresponding to the first reception period can appear as an effect aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display.

  According to such a configuration, when the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears as an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display, it is unclear which of the first and third post-acceptance effect displays appears. However, as a mode of making it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display, it can be estimated that the second post-acceptance effect display appears when the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, “disappearance-related display” is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the haze image display is displayed. It was decided to realize as. However, it is also possible to realize an effect using an effect device (movable body or the like) on the front side of the display screen at a position overlapping at least a part of the bag image display in front view.

  Even if the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display”, if the type of the reception period is different, the jackpot symbol due to the variation in the symbol It is desirable to make the ratio (expectation) at which the system stops is different.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the sign effect display is the same (first sign effect display), but “first disappearance-related display SK1” appears as “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” (first display). , The third reception period) and a case different from the “first disappearance related display SK1” (fourth reception period), or the case does not appear (sixth reception period) ) And so on.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the sign effect display (first sign effect display, fourth sign effect display) is different, but the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1) as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” ) Appears (first reception period, fifth reception period).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the type of the reception period until it is grasped which type is executed as the post-reception effect, and the game entertainment is improved. Will be able to.

  In the above-described effect example, the post-acceptance effect using the second effect device (specific effect after reception) can be executed, and the post-acceptance effect using the second effect device (specific effect after reception) is executed. During the period, in the first effect device, there are a state in which the haze image display is relatively easy to visually recognize and a state in which the haze image display is relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  In other words, in this case, after the start of the post-acceptance effect using the second effect device (post-acceptance specific effect) based on the acceptance being made, which aspect appeared as the habit image display. It is possible to confirm. In addition, during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect using the second effect device (specific effect after reception), the bag image display is made relatively difficult to visually recognize. It is expected to prompt the “second effect device” to move the gaze target by the player naturally.

  In the above-described effect example, the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is the visibility of the haze image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily viewable state) before being received. The execution is started so as not to affect the process. More specifically, the haze image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is: It is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area in front view.

  In the above-described effect example, the post-acceptance effect display is started after the appearance timing of the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the habit image display”. Display may be started at the appearance timing of “”.

  Moreover, in each production example described above, the “mode in which the cocoon image display is difficult to visually recognize” is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the “region in which the cocoon image display is displayed”. It was decided. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the “region where the haze image display is displayed” tends to gradually expand with the passage of time.

  Further, as described above, the haze image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation. And according to each production example mentioned above, after being accepted, since the display mode is maintained and continued, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. In addition, it is possible to recognize in what manner the bag image display was displayed during the reception period.

  However, in this case, when it is in the period immediately after being accepted, it is unavoidable to produce an effect after acceptance under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the heel image display). That is, the range of performance is narrow, and only limited performance (post-reception performance using only a performance device different from the first performance device) can be executed. However, when “a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display (disappearance-related display)” appears after a lapse of time, the post-reception effect is performed under the condition that “the visibility of the haze image display may be deteriorated” Therefore, the “post-reception effect display in the first effect device” can be executed under such conditions. By performing the two post-operation effects having different properties (post-reception specific effect in the second effect device, post-acceptance effect display in the first effect device) in stages, the image display mode after being accepted As a result, the role as a post-operation effect can be suitably exhibited.

  Moreover, in each production example described above, when the second warning effect display is displayed as the warning effect display, if the reception is made within the reception period corresponding to the second warning effect display, “the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” The second disappearance related display SK1 (FIG. 265) appears. In addition, when the seventh sign display is displayed as the sign display, the seventh disappearance-related display appears as “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image display” when the reception is performed within the corresponding reception period. It is like that. On the other hand, when a “first sign effect display” different from the “second sign effect display” or the “seventh sign effect display” is displayed as the sign effect display, within the corresponding reception period. When the acceptance is made, a case where the first disappearance-related display appears (the first reception period, the third reception period) and a case where the fourth disappearance-related display appears as “an aspect in which the 摸 image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” ( 4th reception period).

  That is, in this case, when the second sign display or the seventh sign display is displayed as the sign effect display, at that time, it is recognized what kind of aspect appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display”. To be able to.

  Moreover, in each of the above-described effects, “first sign effect display” that is different from the specific mode (here, “second sign effect display” or “seventh sign effect display”) as the sign effect display. Is displayed, even if it is received within the reception period corresponding thereto, there is a case where the “an image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” itself does not appear (sixth reception period). Yes.

  According to such a configuration, the sign effect display is different from a specific form (here, the “second sign effect display” or the “seventh sign effect display”) (here, the first sign effect display). If it is executed, whether or not the above-mentioned “mode in which the haze image display becomes difficult to see” itself appears within the period from when the haze image is received until the haze image display is hidden. Since it becomes unclear, after the reception, the stage performance until the heel image display is made non-displayed is improved, and the tension can be suitably maintained. become able to.

  In addition, about each production example mentioned above, you may make it implement | achieve by changing into the following structure, and it is further provided with the following structures (reception period) as another reception period (another precursor effect display). Also good. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the player's operation is received during the reception period to when the heel image display is not displayed, “the heel image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. “Aspect” can appear. In this regard, in this modified example, when a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display, the seventh precursor effect display, or another precursor effect display not described above) is displayed as the precursor effect display, Even if acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the above-described “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize” itself is prevented from appearing. That is, in this case, when the indication effect display is executed in a specific mode, the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display” does not appear until the vaginal image display is hidden. It becomes possible to recognize that the haze image display is not made difficult to visually recognize in relation to “a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize”.

  In this case, also in this modified example, when the warning effect display is executed in the “first warning effect display” and is received within the reception period corresponding thereto, the reception is performed within the reception period corresponding thereto. When the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display” appears (the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fourth reception period), “There is a case where this does not appear (sixth reception period). Even in such a configuration, the sign effect display is different from a specific form (for example, the second sign effect display, the seventh sign effect display, or another sign effect display not described above) (here, , When it is executed in the first indication effect display), since it becomes unclear whether or not the above-mentioned “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display” appears, The presentation performance until the image display is set to the non-display state is improved, and the tension can be suitably maintained.

  About the structure concerning these modifications (replacement example), it is possible to apply suitably each structure applicable with respect to the said structure before deform | transforming.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when a specific mode (here, “second sign effect display”) is displayed as the precursor effect display, the player performs an operation within the corresponding reception period. Even if it is not received, the “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize” is caused to appear in the same mode as when the reception was temporarily made.

  On the other hand, when an aspect (here, “first indication effect display”) different from the specific aspect (here, “second indication effect display”) is displayed as the indication effect display, this corresponds to this. When a different mode appears as a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display” when the operation by the player is received during the reception period and when the operation is not performed (such as the first reception period), Even if the player does not receive an action during the reception period corresponding to this, the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the spear image display” appears in the same manner as when the acceptance was temporarily made. In some cases (such as the fourth reception period).

  According to such a configuration, using the effect (prediction effect display) executed before the reception period occurs, the effect after the reception period ends or the effect when the reception period is not accepted And so on.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, a specific mode (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc.) appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” In the possible reception period, the audible output state of the acceptable reception sound is terminated halfway, but an aspect (here, the first disappearance related display) that is different from the specific aspect as “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display” In the reception period in which the sound can appear, there are cases where the audible output state of the acceptable reception sound is terminated halfway and where the audible output state of the acceptable reception sound is not terminated halfway. According to such a configuration, by confirming the output status of the acceptable sound when accepted, there may be a situation where it is easy to guess what kind of aspect appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display” Since situations that are difficult to guess will appear, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in each production example described above, the acceptable reception sound that can be used for such a determination material is terminated at a timing (timing within the reception period) before the timing at which the reception period is terminated. Since the sound is audibly output as a sound, the reception is permitted while the acceptable sound is in an audible output state, or is accepted after the audible output state of the acceptable sound is completed. You will be able to select and play games.

  In each production example described above, in the reception period in which the sign presentation display is executed in a specific form (for example, the second sign presentation display), a plurality of forms (for example, FIG. 232 (a) to FIG. 232A) are displayed. In the reception period in which the four modes shown in (d)) are made displayable and the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first precursor effect display), It is desirable that there is an aspect that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three aspects shown in FIGS. 232 (b) to (d) are not displayed and only FIG. 232 (a) is displayed). .

  Further, in each of the above-described effects, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect that suggests that a reception period in which an operation by a player is an object of reception will soon occur in the reception period of a specific type. And among a plurality of types of precursor effect displays, a specific precursor effect display (second predictor effect display, fifth predictor effect display) can be executed in a manner that spans the timing at which the corresponding reception period occurs. The player can receive an action while the specific sign effect display is displayed.

  That is, in this case, since the player can receive an operation while allowing confirmation of which type (mode) is displayed as the sign effect display, the type (mode) of the sign effect display is changed. Decrease in game entertainment due to forgetting confirmation can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received while the specific indication effect display is displayed, the post-reception effect corresponding to the received operation is started. Even when the effect starts to be executed, the specific sign effect display is not hidden but displayed.

  That is, in this case, the player's operation is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is displayed as the indication effect display, and further, the post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the indication effect display.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects, among the effects after reception, with regard to the effects after reception using the second effect device (specific effects after reception), specific sign effects display (second sign effects display, fifth It is assumed that it is executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the warning effect display).

  Further, in each of the above-described effects, among the effects after reception, the effects after the reception using the first effect device (effect display after reception) itself is a specific sign effect display (second sign effect). Display, the fifth precursor indication display) is performed so as not to adversely affect the visibility (a specific precursor indication display is prioritized (front display on the layer) with respect to the post-reception effect display, etc.) ).

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, during the reception period in which the sign effect display is executed in a specific form (for example, the second sign effect display and the fifth sign effect display), the sign effect display is displayed. However, when the player's action is not accepted, the indication effect display can be hidden before the timing when the corresponding acceptance period ends. ing. In other words, in this case, it is possible to play the game by selecting whether to start the post-acceptance presentation while the indication effect display is displayed, or to start the post-acceptance presentation while the indication effect display is hidden. become.

  However, the specific sign indication display does not necessarily have to be completed within the reception period and continues to be displayed until the reception period ends without completing the execution state within the reception period. It may be a thing. In this case, the specific indication effect display is displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area in which the cocoon image display is displayed until the intermediate timing of the reception period corresponding thereto. In a period after the timing, it is desirable to display only the area different from the area, not the area where the haze image display is displayed.

  Moreover, in each production example mentioned above, the acceptance | permission acceptance sound which suggests that it will be in the state in which acceptance is permitted at the generation | occurrence | production of a reception period, or will be in the state in which acceptance is permitted (soon) is made audible. Processing can be executed. This suppresses the player from forgetting to perform the receiving operation.

  In addition, among the above-described production examples, in the examples shown in FIGS. 256 to 259 and FIG. 261, the player's operation is accepted while the acceptable sound is audible (output state) within the reception period. In such a case, the “mode in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” before the “mode in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (such as disappearance-related display)” still appears. In such a state, execution of the process for making the acceptable reception sound inaudible is started.

  In other words, in this case, since the acceptance period has already ended even if the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image (display related to disappearance)” has not yet appeared, Can be suitably suggested to the player. As a result, since it is difficult to cause inconvenience even if the timing at which the “appearance that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance related display)” is delayed after the acceptance, the image display is displayed in a mode that allows good visual recognition. Will be able to

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, even when an operation by the player is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is audible, the acceptable reception sound is not terminated halfway and the acceptable sound is audible. In addition, a reception period (such as a first reception period) for displaying the disappearance effect display is prepared. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is accepted or has not yet been accepted, and the tension can be suitably maintained.

  In this regard, a reception period (FIGS. 256, 258, and 261) in which the reception allowable sound is made inaudible when an operation by the player is received while the reception allowable sound is audible, Even if an operation by the player is accepted while the acceptable sound is audible, the acceptance period (FIG. 255) in which the acceptable sound is not inaudible is generated in response to “摸Since the type as the “image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” is made different, it is possible to estimate the progress of subsequent production by confirming the output status of the acceptable sound to be accepted Become.

  Moreover, in each production example described above, a plurality of types are prepared as acceptable reception sounds. In this regard, it is desirable that the same sound is output as the acceptable reception sound in the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the reception periods has occurred.

  On the other hand, the acceptable reception sound that is audible corresponding to the first reception period is the reception that is audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. The sound is audibly output as a sound different from the allowable sound. According to such a configuration, when the acceptance allowable sound starts to be output, by confirming the sound, candidates for which type is generated as the reception period can be narrowed down to some extent. In addition, when acceptance is made while the acceptable reception sound is audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by confirming whether the acceptable reception sound is terminated halfway. It is possible to provide interesting performance using the.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when the sign effect display is executed in a specific mode (here, the second sign effect display, the fifth sign effect display, and the seventh sign effect display), the reception allowable sound corresponding to this is performed. When the acceptance is made in the middle of being output, the permissible acceptance sound is terminated halfway. However, when the indication effect display is executed in a different form (here, the first indication effect display), When the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to is output and the acceptance permissible sound is terminated halfway (third reception period, fourth reception period, sixth reception period) and halfway There is a case where it does not end (first reception period). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptable reception sound.

  Further, in each production example described above, there are a reception period in which two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the allowable reception sound and a reception period in which only one sound is output as the allowable reception sound. . In the reception period in which two sounds (allowable sound for a long time and allowable sound for a short time) are output as allowable reception sounds, if reception is performed while the allowable reception sound is audible, the reception is permitted. In the reception period in which only one sound is output, there is a case where the reception is permitted and the case where the reception is permitted is audible, the case where the reception is made audible and the case where the sound is not finished are made. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptable reception sound.

  In addition, regarding the reception period in which two sounds having different sound data (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the allowable reception sound, if reception is performed while the allowable reception sound is output, Only one of the acceptable reception sounds (long-time allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) may be terminated midway, and the other may be continued without being terminated midway.

  Moreover, in each production example described above, the same mode appears as “a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display (disappearance-related display)” when the reception is performed and when the reception is not performed within the reception period. The reception period (second reception period, fourth reception period, fifth reception period, seventh reception period, etc.) and when the reception is made within the reception period and when the reception is not made Since there is a reception period (a first reception period, a third reception period, etc.) in which a different aspect appears as an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the 摸 image display (an extinction related display) It is possible to improve the performance when not done.

  Moreover, in each production example described above, when acceptance is made in a specific reception period (such as the first reception period or the third reception period), the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display” This is realized as an extinction-related display different from the 摸 image display. However, when the 消滅 image display is not accepted, the 態 様 image display itself is changed (a numerical value related to display characteristics (transmission) It is desirable to achieve this by changing the rate). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether an acceptance is made when “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display” appears, or whether the acceptance is made or not. become able to.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600) can be used for both symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. ) So that the first effect display TE (which corresponds to the “timer effect” described above) and the second effect display FE, which have no effect on the reception period, can be displayed. It has become. Then, as shown in FIG. 263, when an operation by the player is accepted within the first reception period or the third reception period, the “image display” is displayed while the image display is displayed. A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance-related display SK1) "appears. However, the" mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image display (first disappearance-related display SK1) " The visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that can be displayed is not affected (the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE is set as a priority display, or the first effect display TE is displayed). And the disappearance-related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed.

  That is, in this case, the disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display (the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE) that is not related to the reception period. Therefore, the game can be advanced without adversely affecting the performance that is not directly related to the reception period.

  However, when an operation by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 267, while the 摸 image display is being displayed, “a mode in which the 摸 image display becomes difficult to visually recognize ( The fourth disappearance-related display SK4) ”appears, but the“ mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance-related display SK4) ”does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE. (Do not make it difficult to visually recognize) is displayed so as to affect the visibility of the second effect display FE (make it difficult to visually recognize).

  According to such a configuration, although it is an image display that is not directly related to the reception period, depending on the type, when the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” appears, the visibility is affected. And the case where the visibility is not affected, when the player performs an action, whether or not the image display that is not directly related to the reception period should be confirmed. It will be possible to provide a directing performance.

  However, in this case, the first effect display TE is displayed as an image (a plurality of modes) related to (implying) the winning (expectation) of the symbol variation, and the second effect display FE is related to the symbol. When the visibility of the second effect display FE is affected by the fact that it is displayed as a display that does not relate to (does not imply) the change (expectation) of the change, the game entertainment is reduced. It can be said that it is desirable in avoiding.

  Moreover, in each production example described above, the second reception period can be generated while the first production display TE is displayed, but the second production display FE is displayed. It does not occur and occurs only when the second effect display FE is not displayed. In other words, the second effect display FE can be displayed only when it is in a relatively early stage after the start of symbol variation, and is subsequently hidden. It is used to increase. In this respect, the second reception period can be generated only when it is at a relatively late stage after the start of symbol variation, so that there is no relevance to each other. It becomes possible to create such a relationship.

  As shown in FIG. 267, the second effect display FE is displayed again in a state where it is easy to visually recognize, even if it is difficult to visually recognize with the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. . That is, in this case, it is not displayed when a predetermined timing comes thereafter. When the second effect display FE is not displayed, an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize does not appear unlike the case of the heel image display.

  The first effect display TE is to display a predetermined effect result (expected degree) at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation. When the disappearance-related display is displayed during the execution period of the first effect display TE, The disappearance-related display is hidden before the predetermined timing arrives.

  As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed, and in this area, the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode having a higher priority for display. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set for the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, and the second effect display FE is difficult to visually recognize through the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed, and the first effect display TE is displayed in the area. It is displayed in a mode with a lower priority for display. At this time, it is desirable that the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 behind the first effect display TE is not made visible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 263, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. Has become.

  In the case of the first annihilation effect display SK1 that does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the acceptance allowable sound is continued without being terminated halfway, and the fourth annihilation effect display that affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the acceptance allowable sound can be terminated halfway. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance using the acceptable reception sound.

  The first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are both dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display is continued even in the situation where any disappearance effect display is displayed. It is desirable to do.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects, it is possible to display “an aspect in which the habit image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” while the habit image display is displayed. A plurality of modes are prepared as “a mode (display related to disappearance)”.

  That is, in this case, since any one of a plurality of modes appears as “a mode in which the cicada image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)”, an improvement in the game entertainment when the cicada image display is difficult to view is aimed at That is expected.

  Further, in each effect example described above, when the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)” corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 267), the fourth The disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the haze image display and the second effect display FE, but corresponds to the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display (first disappearance-related display SK1). ) ”Appears (FIG. 263), the first disappearance related display SK1 is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize only the heel image display of the heel image display and the second effect display FE. Yes.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to produce an effect as to which of “first disappearance-related display SK1” and “fourth disappearance-related display SK4” appears as “an aspect in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize”. As a result, it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  In this case, the “摸 image display” and “predetermined image display” displayed in the first reception period and the “表示 image display” and “predetermined image display” displayed in the fourth reception period , It is desirable to be displayed in the same manner.

  摸 The image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, and the disappearance-related display ends. It is desirable to make it non-displayed at a predetermined timing (before the symbol variation stops).

  The fourth disappearance-related display SK4 may not be an image, but may be an effect by an effect body that is performed in front of the front view of the haze image display and the second effect display FE. However, it is desirable that the first disappearance related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

  In each production example described above, the second reception period can be generated even when the second production display FE is in a non-display state, and the second image display is difficult to visually recognize. A special mode (second disappearance related display SK2) that appears only during the reception period is prepared. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. 265, when a special mode appears as a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display (second annihilation related display SK2)” (second annihilation related display SK2-2) and a case where it does not appear (second disappearance-related display SK2-1). When this special mode appears, the expectation (big hit) is greater than when the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed in any manner. It is desirable to increase the ratio of stopping at the symbol. The percentage may be 100%. Further, in this case, it is desirable that in the second reception period, it is possible to execute a special sign precursor (second precursor display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second effect display FE is in the display state.

  In each effect example described above, in the first reception period, the first mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e1)). And (i1)) and a second mode (first post-acceptance effect display UG1-2) having a higher expectation than the first mode is executed as the first after-acceptance effect display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e2)). In any of (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as “a mode in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”.

  On the other hand, in the second reception period, a second mode (second post-reception effect display) having a higher expectation than the first mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) as the second post-reception effect display UG2. When UG2-2) is executed, the specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display”, but the first mode is the second post-reception effect display UG. When the (post-reception effect display UG2-1) is executed, the specific mode does not appear as the “mode that makes it difficult to view the bag image display”, and is different from the specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2- 2) appears.

  According to such a configuration, according to the type of the reception period, it is possible to estimate the expectation as the post-reception effect display only by confirming “a mode in which the 摸 image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and the expectation Since it may occur that the degree cannot be estimated, it is expected that improvement of the game entertainment will be expected by the staging performance according to such “a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the bag image display”. .

  It should be noted that “specific mode (second annihilation related display SK2-1 or second annihilation related display SK2-2)” that may occur in correspondence with the second reception period as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display” Is not allowed to appear as “an aspect in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the first reception period. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to estimate the type of the reception period based on “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the bag image display”, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  However, the same mode may appear in the first reception period and the second reception period as the “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize”.

  As shown in FIG. 263, in the first reception period, when the acceptance is not made, an aspect that cannot appear when the acceptance is made (the first disappearance related display) SK-2) was allowed to appear. However, when the acceptance is not made in the first acceptance period, the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display” itself may not appear.

  In the second reception period, any one of a plurality of modes having different expectation levels (the ratio at which the jackpot symbol is stopped) can be selectively audible output as an acceptable reception sound. In the first reception period, It is desirable that only one aspect is allowed to be audible output as the acceptable reception sound. Also, in this case, any of the acceptable reception sounds (a plurality of modes) that can be audibly output corresponding to the second reception period is different from the acceptable reception sound that is audibly output corresponding to the first reception period. It is desirable to prepare.

  In each production example described above, all of the first reception period to the seventh reception period are generated with different variation patterns. However, the same variation occurs in the first reception period to the seventh reception period. You may make it include the reception period which has the relationship which can generate | occur | produce sequentially within a pattern. That is, in this case, at least some of the reception periods among the first reception period to the seventh reception period can be generated with a plurality of variation patterns.

  For example, for a reception period (such as the second reception period or the fourth reception period) in which “a mode in which the vaginal image display is difficult to view (disappearance-related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, Occurs within the same symbol variation after a reception period (the first reception period, the third reception period, etc.) that does not change according to the degree of expectation. It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, regarding the reception periods (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) that can be received while the precursor effect display is displayed, the reception can be performed while the precursor effect display is displayed. It is desirable that after the occurrence of a non-accepting period (the first accepting period, the third accepting period, the fourth accepting period, etc.), it can be generated within the same symbol variation.

  In the reception period in which “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display (disappearance-related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display (an extinction related display)” When a plurality of allowable reception sounds including a specific allowable reception sound that cannot be audibly output during a reception period that does not change can be selectively output. It is desirable that a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as “a mode (display related to disappearance)”.

  In addition, in the reception period (the second reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) in which the “mode in which the haze image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” changes according to the expectation level, The warning effect display can be executed, but a special notice effect can be executed at a stage further before the sign effect display is executed, and when the special notice effect is executed, It is desirable to make sure that the “mode in which the haze image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” is always executed in a highly expected mode when it is received during the reception period.

  In the acceptance period in which “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the vaginal image display (disappearance-related display)” changes according to the expectation level, a big hit is obtained as an “appearance that makes the vaginal image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” A mode (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 etc.) that can only appear when the user is present may be prepared. Moreover, you may make it prepare the aspect (For example, 2nd disappearance related display SK2-1 etc.) which cannot appear when the big hit is obtained.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effects, the reception-related effect display (such as a bag image display or a gauge image) can be displayed at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Thus, at least within the reception period, reception-related effect sounds (such as reception permission sound) can be output. In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted during the reception period, an output sound after reception related to the post-reception effect can be output based on the reception, and the reception-related effect display is performed during the reception period. When an action by the player is accepted while the (摸 image display, gauge image, etc.) is displayed, the reception-related effect display (摸 image display, gauge image, etc.) based on the acceptance. ) Is hidden. Similarly, when an operation by a player is accepted when reception-related effect sounds (acceptable sound, etc.) are audible during the reception period, the reception-related effect is based on the reception. Sounds (acceptable tones, etc.) may be made inaudible.

  In such a configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is received within the reception period, the output sound after reception related to the post-reception effect is audibly output, and the reception-related effect display (摸 image display or gauge image) Etc.) and the reception-related effect sound is set to a non-audible state (acceptance acceptable sound, etc.), so that it is possible to easily recognize that it is in the received state.

  In this regard, in each of the above-described effect examples, the reception-related effect display (such as a bag image display or a gauge image) is terminated at the time when the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started. The reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound, etc.) is terminated at the time when the reception output sound according to reception is started and may be made inaudible. I have to.

  According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display (such as a bag image display or a gauge image) displayed within the reception period is displayed until the effect is started after the reception is started. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) that are audible (output) during the reception period should not be audible when the output sound is started after reception. It becomes. As a result, the reception-related effect sound can be confirmed while the aspect as the reception-related effect display (摸 image display, gauge image, etc.) displayed within the reception period can be confirmed even after execution of the post-reception effect is started. By making the (acceptable sound, etc.) inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the reception period has already ended.

  As described above, the reception-related effect display (such as a spear image display or a gauge image) is executed as an effect display that suggests the ratio (expected degree) at which a big hit is obtained. In this case, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound) also varies depending on the degree of expectation (the aspect as the reception-related effect display) suggested by the reception-related effect display (such as a habit image display or a gauge image). It is desirable to output

  However, in each production example described above, in the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (acceptance acceptable sound) is continued without being ended even when the output sound after reception is started. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is accepted, and the tension can be suitably maintained.

  Further, in each effect example described above, in the first reception period, only one aspect can be displayed as reception-related effect display (such as a bag image display or a gauge image), and a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as an effect display that suggests a certain ratio (expectation). Also, in the first reception period, only one aspect appears for the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound), so when a different aspect from the aspect appears in another reception period Amusement interest can be improved suitably.

  Moreover, in each production example mentioned above, the several aspect containing a specific aspect is prepared as a warning effect display, and the precursor of a specific aspect is preceded before a specific reception period (for example, 2nd reception period) generate | occur | produces. An effect display (for example, a second sign effect display: FIG. 256) can be displayed, and an audible output of reception-related effect sounds (acceptance acceptable sound, etc.) can be started. And the indication effect display (for example, 2nd indication indication: FIG. 256) of a specific mode and reception related production sound (acceptance allowable sound) can be performed in the form over the timing when a reception period occurs, The player's action can be received while the warning effect display (for example, the second warning effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed and the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is in an audible state (output). ing. In this regard, if an action by the player is accepted while a sign indication display (for example, second sign indication display: FIG. 256) of a specific mode is being displayed within the reception period, it is based on the reception being made. Thus, the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden. In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted while the reception-related production sound (acceptance sound is acceptable) within the reception period, the reception-related production sound (acceptance is permitted) based on the acceptance. Sound) is made inaudible.

  In the above configuration, based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted within the reception period, the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden. Since the reception-related effect sound (acceptable sound) is set in a non-audible state, the sign effect display in a specific mode in the execution state before the reception period occurs (for example, the second sign effect display: FIG. 256) and the reception-related production sound are being executed, even if the player's action is accepted, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in the accepted state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 256 and the like, the indication effect of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is an after-reception effect corresponding to being received within the corresponding reception period. Is not finished at the time of starting execution, and is displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound) is terminated at the time when the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance is started to be made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, for the indication effect display (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) of the specific mode displayed before the reception period occurs, this is performed after the start of the reception effect. The above reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) that is audible (output) before the reception period occurs is audible when the output sound after reception starts. Will be eliminated. Thereby, after execution of a specific post-reception effect, the reception-related effect output from before the occurrence of the reception period is made possible while confirming the mode as the indication effect display displayed before the reception period occurs. By setting the sound (acceptable sound) to a non-audible state, it is possible to preferably indicate that the reception period has already ended.

  About the indication effect display (second indication indication ZEH2) of a specific mode, it is displayed as a different display image according to the degree of expectation, and is executed as an effect display that suggests the ratio (expected degree) that the big hit is obtained. It is desirable to do so. In this case, regarding the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound), a different sound is output according to the degree of expectation (the aspect as the sign effect display of the specific aspect) suggested by the sign effect display of the specific aspect. Is desirable.

  However, in each production example described above, in the reception period in which the first warning effect display is executed, the first warning effect display can be executed by only one aspect, and the ratio of winning the jackpot (expectation) It is not executed as an effect display that suggests (degree).

  In the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which a plurality of allowable reception sounds (long-time allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) are output simultaneously, the allowable reception sound is output and after reception. Although the output sounds do not overlap, in the reception period in which only one reception allowable sound is output, the case where the reception allowable sound and the post-reception effect sound overlap (first reception period), and the reception allowable sound output And the case where the output sound after reception does not overlap (the third reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.).

  The long-time allowable sound is, for example, a sound output as a sound effect (corresponding to the second allowable sound shown in FIG. 213 or the like), and the short-time allowable sound is output as a message sound, for example. A sound (corresponding to the first permissible sound shown in FIG. 213). The case where only one acceptable sound is output is, for example, when the message sound is not output and only the sound effect is output (corresponding to the case where only the first allowable sound is output in FIG. 212 and the like). That is. The short-time allowable sound may be “sound output as a sound effect” and the long-time allowable sound may be “sound output as a message sound”.

  When one of the two acceptable reception sounds is output as a “message sound”, a message image (“press”) corresponding to the message sound while the message sound (for example, a sound “press”) is output audibly. It is desirable to display a reception-related effect display such as “”. In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period in which the post-reception effect (such as the post-reception output sound) is executed, but a message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period overlaps with the period in which the post-reception presentation is performed.

  In each effect example described above, the heel image display is displayed as an integrated heel image display including a gauge image in the peripheral decoration image. The integrated haze image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 232 and the like, and other configurations and the like can be appropriately employed. That is, conventionally, since the heel image display has been displayed separately from the gauge image, it has been difficult to make both of them difficult to visually recognize by the indication effect display or the disappearance related display. The gauge image may change depending on the manner of the haze image display that suggests the degree of expectation, and if it can be seen, the meaning of making it difficult to view the haze image display is lost. In this respect, since it is displayed as an integrated heel image display, it is easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the heel image display and the gauge image.

  In each of the above-described production examples, the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display (disappearance-related display)” is assumed to appear so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the post-reception production display. It may be displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the display (for example, after-reception effect display is preferentially displayed). In addition, among the plurality of reception periods, the reception period in which the post-reception effect display is difficult to visually recognize due to the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display (disappearance-related display)”, and “the habit image display becomes difficult to visually recognize A reception period in which the post-reception presentation display is not made difficult to visually recognize by “mode (disappearance-related display)” may be included.

  Further, it is not always necessary to prepare all of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, and only a part of the reception periods may be prepared in an appropriate combination.

  In the first reception period, when the reception allowable sound is received while being audibly output, it may be terminated halfway.

  The “first sign effect display” and the “seven sign effect display” do not necessarily have to be “a type that is not displayed when the reception period occurs and is hidden before this,” For example, you may make it display as "the type displayed in the form over the timing which a reception period generate | occur | produces." That is, in this case, the “first sign effect display” and the “seven sign effect display” are the same as the above-mentioned “second sign effect display ZEH2” displayed corresponding to the second reception period, and the contents of the effect (display image). Although it is different, refer to FIG. 256, FIG. 264, and FIG. 265 for “start time and end time of display, how it relates to other image display until it is not displayed” and the like. The display is performed by the method as described for the “second sign indication display ZEH2”. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  Needless to say, when “at least a part” is described in the above and the following description, the intention is to include “all”.

  Next, a modified example of each production example described above will be described. In other words, FIG. 268 is a modification of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. 269 shows the “when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. It is a modification concerning "production". In this modified example, the configuration that is not particularly mentioned is as described above in “Examples of effects related to the second reception period (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265)”. The present invention can be similarly applied to another example that can be applied to the “example of performance”.

  As shown in FIG. 268, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a specific decorative member SDY (glare accessory) as a fourth effect device. For convenience of explanation, in each of the above-described production examples, the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) has been omitted. Thing). In other words, in each effect example described above, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not operate in association with the occurrence of the reception period.

  Now, assuming that “second variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, even in the modified example for the second reception period, first, the performance determination corresponding to the second variation pattern (notice determination) Etc.). Then, after this, the variation effect of the decoration symbol SZ (the effect depiction according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “FIG. 268 (a)”). ").

  The subsequent steps are the same as in the case of FIGS. 264 (b) to (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” is executed (timing tG1). Next, as shown in FIG. 268 (c), “integrated bag image display IG” is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the “second sign indication display ZEH2” and the “integrated haze image display IG” are displayed, the second reception period occurs as shown in FIG. 268 (d). (Timing tG3).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted, but also in this modified example, “second reception” using the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The “post-specific effect” and the “predictive effect” are executed in the same manner as in the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Also, effects (acceptable sound, second output sound after reception, etc.) using the third effect device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

  Further, in this modified example, when an operation by the player is received at timing tG3a within the second reception period, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), As the second reception period ends, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period starts to be executed.

  In addition, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1))” is a relative post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to the modification. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with low expectation is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D2 (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2))” is a modification. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect with relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period. The degree of expectation (the ratio at which jackpot symbols appear) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), when the player's action is accepted (the second post-reception effect starts in response to the acceptance) At the timing tG3a, which is the time when the image is displayed, the “integrated haze image display IG” is not hidden, and the integrated haze image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize. Not only the integrated 摸 image display IG but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG3a, which is the time point when the player's action is accepted (the time point after the second reception effect is started). In addition, it is the same as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265) that it is difficult to visually recognize the image.

  Further, when the first aspect with relatively low expectation is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period according to this modification (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)), This is the same as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). That is, first, at the timing tG3b, the display related to the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is started as “an aspect in which the integrated haze image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”. Next, when the timing tG3c arrives, “second post-reception effect display” as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the action received by the player within the second reception period. “UG2-1” starts to be executed.

  After that, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), as shown in FIG. 269 (h1), the “post-reception effect display UG2-1” is displayed. First, among the “integrated haze image display IG”, “second precursor effect display ZEH2”, and “second disappearance-related display SK2-1”, “integrated haze image display IG” and “second predictor effect display ZEH2” "Is hidden. After the “integrated 摸 image display IG” and the “second sign indication display ZEH2” are hidden, as shown in FIG. 269 (i1), the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is not displayed. Thus, the display related to the “post-second reception effect display UG2-1” is performed under the condition that the visual recognition is good.

  However, when the second aspect with relatively high expectation is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period according to this modification (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2)), the timing tG3b , As an “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated tile image display IG”, instead of performing the disappearance-related display in the first presentation device (production display device 1600), the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle accessory) is started. Let In other words, as shown in FIG. 269 (f2), by positioning (operating) the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) so as to overlap at least a part of the integrated scissors image display IG in front view, The integrated haze image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, and this functions as a “mode in which the integrated haze image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the degree of expectation is higher in the case shown in FIG. 269 (f2) than in the case shown in FIG. 269 (f1). , It will be possible to improve the game entertainment. In addition, since the operation itself by the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) suggests the degree of expectation, it can also serve as a post-reception effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the fossil image display IG. In this sense, the fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY) is used as an effect element that suggests the degree of expectation even in an effect (such as a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation) different from the effect after reception. It is desirable to be.

  Next, in this way, “the effect using the fourth rendering device (specific decorative member SDY)” is the front view as at least a part of the integrated tile image display IG as “a mode in which the integral tile image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. When the timing tG3c arrives while being executed in the form of overlapping, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the action received by the player within the second reception period. The “post-reception presentation display UG2-2” is started.

  That is, in this case, “integrated 摸 image display IG” and “second sign indication display ZEH2” are displayed, and “effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” is “integrated 摸 image display IG”. While being executed at a position overlapping at least a part of the “image display IG” when viewed from the front, the “post-reception effect display UG2-2” is started to be executed. According to such a configuration, the integrated haze image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are difficult to visually recognize by the “effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)”. Since the post-reception presentation display UG2-2 is started, the gaze destination by the player is “integrated bag image display IG” or “second precursor”, suggesting that the second reception period has already ended. It is expected that the effect display ZEH2 "will shift to the" post-reception effect display UG2-2) "(after timing tG3c).

  And also when a 2nd aspect with relatively high expectation is performed as a post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)), When the display related to the “post-reception effect display UG2-2” is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (h2), the “second post-reception effect display UG2-2” is displayed. First, “integrated haze image display IG”, “second sign indication display ZEH2”, and “integrated haze image display IG are difficult to visually recognize (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)). "Execution effect used)" and "integrated bag image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden and finished. Then, after the “integrated bag image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” are respectively hidden, the “integrated bag image display IG is visually recognized as shown in FIG. 269 (i2)”. The “fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY)” as “a difficult mode” is ended. That is, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to the original position so that the “effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” does not overlap with the integrated bag image display IG in front view. Thereby, the display concerning “the second post-reception effect display UG2-2” ”is performed under the condition that the visual recognition is good.

  In the case of performing “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” as the “mode in which the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” (the mode with relatively high expectation (FIG. 269 ( e2) to (i2)) is a case where “the effect using the first effect device (display related to disappearance)” is performed as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” (relative expectation) It is desirable to lengthen the time from when the “mode in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize” appears until it is finished, rather than the low mode (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)). In this case, when the “fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY)” is executed as “an aspect in which the integrated tile image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, the “fourth effect device (specific Production using decorative member SDY) ” As a result, it has become difficult to visually recognize the game after the “fourth effect device (specific effect member SDY) effect” has ended. It is expected that the game entertainment will be further improved by exposing the post-second reception effect display UG2-2 ”. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, when a low expectation aspect is executed as a post-reception effect, and when a high expectation aspect is executed as a post-reception effect, The “mode in which the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (such as the first disappearance-related display SK-1)” is executed for the same time.

  On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D3 (FIG. 269 (e3) to (h3))”, the operation by the player is accepted within the second reception period according to the modification. It is assumed that there was not.

  As shown in FIGS. 269 (e3) to (h3), in this modified example, in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIG. 265 ( e3) to (h3)). For example, when an action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 269 (f3), the player determines that the “integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” within the second reception period. If the operation by has been accepted, the mode that appeared will appear.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 269 (e3) to (h3), the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is displayed when an action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period. In the case, if the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the production has progressed from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1))”. (When a post-reception effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, the “fourth effect device (specification) is specified as“ a mode in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize ”when an operation by the player is not accepted within the second reception period. In the case where the “effect using the decorative member SDY)” is executed, if an action by the player is received within the second reception period, the “D2” (FIG. 269 (e2)) is changed from FIG. 268 (d). To (i2)) ”(when a relatively high expectation post-reception effect is being executed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269 (g3), the “integrated haze image display IG” and the “integrated haze image display IG are difficult to visually recognize (the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth display). First, the “integrated bag image display IG” is not displayed in the “production device (production using the specific decorative member SDY)”. Then, after the “integrated haze image display IG” is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 269 (h3), the “integrated haze image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2). -1 or the fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY) ".

  Note that, as described above, in the production examples shown in FIG. 268 and FIG. 269, “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” is performed as “display on the first production device (production display device 1600)”. There are cases (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)) and cases (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)) which are performed as “effects using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)”. In this regard, in the above-described example, the timing at which “display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” is started and the “effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” are executed. The start timing is set to be the same (timing tG3b), but “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” is “the first effect device (effect display device 1600)”. The execution may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) prior to the timing tG3b at which the “display at” is started.

  According to such a configuration, the “integrated bag image display IG is difficult to see” and the expectation (ratio where the jackpot symbol appears) suggested as a post-reception effect is accepted after being accepted. Since the time until the appearance of “a mode in which the fossilized image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” becomes different, an interesting aspect is added, and an improvement in the game entertainment can be achieved. In particular, “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)” functions as the effect after the reception as well as “the specified effect after reception using the second effect device”. Therefore, by performing this at an early timing, it is possible to improve the game entertainment interest.

  However, even in the situation where “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” is being executed as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, FIG. As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least a part of the integrated haze image display IG (haze image display) is visible.

  Also, in the production example shown in FIG. 268 and FIG. 269, when the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D2 (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2))” (relative expectation). In the case where a high post-reception effect is being executed), “the display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” is not performed as “an aspect in which the integrated tile image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” The “production using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” was performed. However, in this case, “the display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” and “fourth effect device (specific You may make it perform both "production using the decoration member SDY)".

  According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the “display (disappearance related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” and the “fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” are displayed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the integrated bag image display IG by both of the “effects used”, and it is possible to preferably indicate that the reception has been made.

  As described above, as “an aspect in which the integrated tile image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, “display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) (disappearance-related display)” and “fourth effect device (specific decoration) In the case of performing both “production using the member SDY)”, the disappearance related display is displayed (priority display or the like) so as to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the integrated bag image display IG. The effect using the effect device (specific decoration member SDY) is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the integrated bag image display IG and at least a part of the disappearance related display.

  In this case as well, execution of “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” that functions as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” starts at timing tG3a, The “display (disappearance related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” that functions as “an aspect in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” may be started at timing tG3b. .

  In addition, as “an aspect in which the integrated haze image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, “display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) (disappearance-related display)” and “fourth effect device (specific decorative member) In the case of performing both “production using SDY)”, for the disappearance-related display, the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1))” (relative When the post-acceptance presentation with a low expectation is executed), it is displayed as an image display different from the “integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display SK2-1)”. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, the fourth effect device does not necessarily have to be provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY). In short, at least a part of the integrated 摸 image display IG (摸 image display) That can execute a predetermined effect at a position that overlaps with the front view (for example, a flying object that can execute an effect by flying on the front side in front of the effect display device 1600 or a front side in front of the effect display device 1600) Etc.). In addition, for the effect using the fourth effect device, in addition to the case where it is executed based on the acceptance during the reception period, when different effect conditions are satisfied (a predetermined timing is reached in the specific symbol variation, etc.) It is also desirable to be able to execute.

  The production example related to “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the presentation progress as shown in FIGS. 268 and 269 is made.

  In addition, the production example related to “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 is applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of these reception periods.

  Moreover, in each production example described above, the post-reception effect display is performed while the integrated hail image display IG (both of the integrated haze image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) is displayed. However, the post-reception effect display is displayed in such a way that it is difficult to visually recognize by the integrated 摸 image display IG (both of the integrated 摸 image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period). This was started (FIGS. 263, 265, and 267).

  However, instead of this, the integrated display image display IG (both integrated display image display IG and precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) is displayed, and the post-reception effect display is started to be executed. However, the post-reception effect display is not made difficult to visually recognize by the integrated haze image display IG (both of the integrated haze image display IG and the warning effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) (priority display, etc.) ) May be displayed.

  Hereinafter, a case where such a configuration is applied to an effect example related to the second reception period will be described. The configurations not particularly mentioned are the same as those in the above-described examples (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265), and other examples can be applied as appropriate.

  For the contents of the production until the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the second reception period according to this modification, the contents of the above-described production (FIGS. 264 (a) to (d), FIG. 265 (e)). ). For example, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 270 (e2), at the timing tG3a, which is the time when an action by the player is accepted, the “integrated spear image display IG” or “second precursor effect display ZEH2” "" Is not hidden, and the integrated haze image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are not made difficult to visually recognize.

  Also in this modification, there are cases where a post-reception effect with a relatively low expectation is executed and cases where a post-reception effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. The case where the low post-acceptance effect is executed is the same as the above-described effect content (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)), and the description here will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, when the “post-reception effect with relatively high expectation” is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period, the above-described effect content (FIG. 265 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 270 (f2) to (i2) appear.

  First, at timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 270 (f2), the “second post-effects display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. In addition, the second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). Next, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2 (a mode in which the integrated bag image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) arrives, the player performs an action within the second reception period. “Second post-reception effect display UG2” as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance is started in the second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2). Is done. It goes without saying that the post-reception effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which benefits are granted to players). The percentage may be 100%.

  However, as shown in FIG. 270 (g2), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modification is an integrated bag image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, a second disappearance related display SK2, and the like. It will not be difficult to see. More specifically, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modification overlaps with the area where the integrated bag image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance related display SK2 are displayed. It is displayed in a form, and is displayed (priority display) in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize these integrated haze image display IG, second precursor effect display ZEH2, and second disappearance related display SK2.

  According to such a configuration, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 itself can be made to function as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, and the improvement of the game entertainment is improved. It becomes possible to plan. Note that even the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this example is not preferentially displayed with respect to the first effect display TE (here, equivalent to the “timer effect” described above), and the first effect is displayed. A portion overlapping the display TE is made difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 270 (h2), first, the integrated haze image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are hidden. Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (i2), the second disappearance related display SK2 is hidden.

  Also in the modified example shown in FIG. 270, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, it is the same as the case of the above-described example (FIG. 265 (e3) to (h3)). . In other words, if an action by the player is not accepted, it will appear as “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated bag image display IG” if the action by the player is accepted within the second reception period. Will appear.

  In the example shown in FIG. 270, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 and the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 are displayed as “an aspect in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. However, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 may be displayed without displaying the second disappearance related display SK2-2.

  The effect example related to “post-reception effect display” described with reference to FIG. 270 can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, when applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progress as shown in FIG. 270 is made.

  In addition, the example of the effect related to “post-reception effect display” described with reference to FIG. 270 is not applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is different from any of the reception periods. It may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect).

  Also in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when an operation by the player is accepted within the reception period (specific reception period), the 摸 image display (here, the integrated 摸 image display) IG) is displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the haze image display is used, and “specific annihilation effect display (for example, 2nd disappearance-related display SK2-2) "can be displayed, and after the display of the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is started, the specific disappearance effect display (For example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is hidden while being displayed.

  That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the haze image display even after the acceptance. In addition, the visibility of the haze image display is lowered by the specific disappearance effect display until the haze image display is hidden, and the haze image display is hidden while the visibility is lowered. As a result, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the 表示 image display is hidden is reduced, and a decrease in the game entertainment when the 摸 image display is hidden is suppressed. Become moist.

  Further, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the “specific annihilation effect display (for example, the second annihilation related display SK2-2)” is displayed as a spider image display (here, integrated)摸 image display IG) can be displayed in a period after the non-display, and at least the specific annihilation effect display (for example, the second annihilation related display SK2-2) is displayed, An after-reception effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY, a second after-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Then, the post-acceptance effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific region that is the display target region of the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) ( The example shown in FIG. 270) or the effect body (the example shown in FIG. 269 or another example thereof) in a position overlapping the specific disappearance effect display (at least a part thereof) in front view. To be realized.

  According to such a configuration, a specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps with a specific annihilation effect display (for example, the second annihilation related display SK2-2) in the front view among the post-reception effects is specified. Can be recognized without shifting the gaze destination from the position where the disappearance effect display is displayed. That is, in this case, when a specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the aspect of the specific post-reception effect. Amusement entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  When a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception effect display UG2-2, or the like) according to the above-described modification appears, the proportion of the bonus given to the player is increased. It may be 100%.

  A specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the modification is executed before the haze image display is hidden. Since it is started and makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display, it can be suitably suggested that the haze image display is accepted even when the haze image display is displayed. . However, for specific post-reception effects (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above-described modification, the haze image display is not displayed. Execution may be started.

  Apart from the reception period during which a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY or a second post-reception effect display UG2-2) according to the modified example can be generated, the specific post-reception effect A specific annihilation effect display (for example, the second annihilation related display SK2-2) is a case where the different post-acceptance effect is executed after preparing a reception period during which a post-reception effect different from that can be generated. May be displayed. The reception period in which different post-reception effects can be generated may be any of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it is desirable not to display the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) in the reception period (first reception period) in which the acceptable reception sound does not end halfway (the second disappearance related display SK2-2). The disappearance effect display may be displayed)

  In addition, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when the reception period occurs, acceptance of the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the reception period is permitted, or A process is made to audibly accept the acceptance sound that suggests that the acceptance is allowed (soon), and the player forgets to perform the acceptance operation. I try to suppress it.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of types of precursor effect display. However, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, a specific precursor effect display (second display) is provided. When an action by the player is accepted while the sign effect display ZEH2) is displayed, a specific sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance is made. While the sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is displayed, a mode in which the specific sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize is caused to appear. Then, after the appearance of the mode, the specific precursor effect display (second predictor effect display ZEH2) is made invisible while the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize.

  In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display even after the acceptance, and to reduce the visibility until the precursor effect display is hidden. As a result, it can be suitably suggested that the acceptance has already been made.

  In the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, a specific sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize. ZEH2) is a different image display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 or the post-reception effect display UG2-2), or is ahead of a specific sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2). It is designed to be an effect in a production performed in

  Further, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)” is a specific precursor effect display (second This is executed so as to straddle not only the warning effect display ZEH2) but also the specific warning effect display and the haze image display in a front view, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. The aspect may be performed in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize the entire effect display device 1600. In that case, a specific sign effect display or a haze image display can be visually recognized through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific precursor effect display (second predictor effect display ZEH2)” is realized by a change (such as a change in transmittance) of the display characteristic of the specific precursor effect display itself. May be

  In the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is not displayed within the reception period. And even if it is a case where acceptance is made in the non-displayed state, “a mode in which a specific precursor effect display becomes difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2-2, post-reception effect display UG2-2, The director, etc.) is executed.

  Further, in the first reception period described above, when an action by the player is accepted, a plurality of effects (effects shown in FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1), FIG. 263) based on the reception. (E2) to any one of the effects shown in (i2) appear, but even if any of these effects appears, the specific mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1 (first reception period) 1) of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to) is allowed to appear. In other words, in this case, since any of the plurality of effects appears, a specific aspect also appears along with it, so that they are “because the action by the player is accepted within the specific reception period” It is possible to suggest that this is a common performance.

  On the other hand, in the second reception period described above, or in the second reception period according to the modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when an action by the player is received, a special condition (a big hit win) A special mode (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 or specific) whose appearance ratio (which may be 0% or 100%) varies depending on whether or not a condition or a probability change entry condition is satisfied. Any one of a plurality of modes including an effect using the decorative member SDY, a post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc. can appear, and when the special mode appears, it is difficult to visually recognize the heel image display. . According to such a configuration, a special mode in which expectation is suggested before the haze image display is hidden is displayed, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the haze image display by the special mode. The player can enjoy the effect of progressing from the bag image display to the post-acceptance effect (special aspect) without changing the gaze destination.

  In this regard, even when the specific mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the first mode of the first disappearance related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, It is made difficult to visually recognize by the “mode”. According to such a configuration, when the haze image display is made difficult to visually recognize by the above-described special mode in which the degree of expectation for the provision of the privilege is suggested (special reception period), the above-described specific mode in which the degree of expectation for the provision of the privilege is not suggested As a result, it may be difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display (specific reception period), so that the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display (specific mode, special mode)” is provided with performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, when the reception period exemplified in each of the above-mentioned production examples and each modification example occurs, the hail image display that suggests an object (such as the type of operation means) that is permitted to be received within the reception period, You may make it display both in the period when the indication effect display before the reception period occurs and in the reception period. However, in this case, the haze image display displayed during the period in which the sign effect display is executed is different from the haze image display displayed during the reception period, and before the reception period occurs. It is desirable to be hidden.

  Hereinafter, a modified example in the case where the method for displaying the haze image in such a manner is applied to the second reception period will be described. That is, FIGS. 271 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 272 (g) and (h) are modified examples of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. (I)-(l) are the modifications concerning the "effect when a 2nd reception period generate | occur | produces" shown in FIG. In this modified example, the configuration that is not particularly mentioned is as described above in “Examples of effects related to the second reception period (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265)”. The present invention can be similarly applied to another example that can be applied to the “example of performance”.

  Assuming that the “second variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the modification example for the second reception period, first, an effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern (notice) Judgment). Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative design SZ (effect description according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in “the state shown in FIG. 271 (a)”). ").

  However, in this modified example, when the timing tG0 before the timing tG1 described above arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the “preceding type indication effect display SZE” is executed. Yes. In the example shown in FIG. 271 (b), as the “preceding precursor effect display SZE”, other effect examples (after displaying the spear image display within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed, this is temporarily hidden. Although the image display used also in the normal effect example that does not do such is performed, other effect examples (the precursor effect display is executed) for the “preceding precursor effect display SZE” It is desirable to execute the display as an image display that cannot appear in a normal production example in which the haze image display is executed within the period and is not temporarily hidden.

  In this modification, the haze image display TMH (in this case, the integrated haze image display) appears while the “preceding precursor effect display SZE” is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), at least a part of the haze image display TMH (here, the integrated haze image display) according to this example is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “preceding type indication effect display SZE”. The display is started in the middle. Further, although the haze image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated haze image display, the gauge image GG and the image (eg, the division image KG that is the display target area of the gauge image GG) are not displayed ( It is displayed as a bag image display in a mode that cannot be displayed within the reception period.

  When the predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the haze image display TMH (here, the integrated haze image display) is displayed in a manner that is not easily viewed by the “preceding precursor effect display SZE”. Become so. In this example, the display relating to the “preceding precursor effect display SZE” has been terminated, and is displayed in a form decorated by another effect display (in the figure, a flame effect).

  However, as shown in FIGS. 271 (c), (d), etc., the haze image display TMH (here, the integrated haze image display) that appears while the “preceding precursor effect display SZE” is displayed. Is displayed in a mode different from any of the modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) as the bag image display that can be displayed within the reception period. As a result, it is possible to indicate that the reception period has not yet occurred while the bag image display TMH is displayed for a relatively long time.

  As will be described later, when the haze image display TMH (in this case, the integrated haze image display) appears, the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) within the reception period corresponding thereto. Among them, the haze image display is displayed in a mode with high expectation (for example, FIG. 232 (d)). As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the “preceding precursor effect display SZE” is displayed. In addition, as an aspect which can be displayed as a haze image display, it does not necessarily need to be the said four aspects (FIG. 232 (a)-(d)), for example, there may be only two aspects.

  In this modified example, when the timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (e), execution of the “normal type indication effect display TZE” is started, and the habit image display is performed by the “normal type indication effect display TZE”. A part of TMH becomes difficult to visually recognize (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (f), the “normal type indication effect display TZE” is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire haze image display TMH. While “TZE” is displayed, the haze image display TMH is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 272 (g), the haze image display (here, the integrated haze image display IG) is performed in the above-described plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)). The display is started with a mode with a high degree of expectation. Thus, at the time when display of the heel image display (in this case, the integrated heel image display IG) that can be displayed within the reception period is started, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part thereof by the “normal type indication effect display TZE”. ing.

  Then, while the “normal type indication effect display TZE” and “摸 image display (in this case, the integrated 摸 image display IG)” are displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. Will occur (timing tG3).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted, but also in this modified example, “second reception” using the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The “post-specific effect” and the “predictive effect” are executed in the same manner as in the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Also, effects (acceptable sound, second output sound after reception, etc.) using the third effect device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

  Further, in this modified example, when an operation by the player is received at timing tG3a within the second reception period, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), As the second reception period ends, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period starts to be executed.

  Also in this modification, there are cases where a post-reception effect with a relatively low expectation is executed and cases where a post-reception effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. The case where the low post-acceptance effect is executed is the same as the above-described effect content (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)), and the description here will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, when the “post-reception effect with relatively high expectation” is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period, the above-described effect content (FIG. 265 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 272 (i) to (l) appear.

  First, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 272 (i), at the timing tG3a, which is the time point when the player's action is accepted, the “normal type indication effect display TZE” or “摸 image display (here, , “Integrated 摸 image display IG)” is not hidden, and “Normal type indication effect display TZE” and “摸 image display (here, integrated 摸 image display IG)” are difficult to visually recognize. Nor.

  However, in this example, the dynamic display as the 摸 image display is performed while the “摸 image display (in this case, the integrated 摸 image display IG)” is displayed at the time when the acceptance is made or after that. To continue. Further, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced as time passes.

  At timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 272 (j), the “post-reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is not yet started. The second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much the gauge image GG has the display area at the time of acceptance (FIG. 272 (i)), when the timing tG3b arrives, the display area becomes “0”. To be. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG that has reduced the display area under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the display area amount that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship). However, the display area was suddenly reduced by ignoring the previous law, and this resulted in “the remaining time was set to“ 0 ”unexpectedly, but we were lucky enough to accept it” It becomes possible to think that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Then, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (a mode in which the integrated bag image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) has arrived, the player within the second reception period “Second post-reception effect display UG2” as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) The execution is started. It goes without saying that the post-reception effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which benefits are granted to players). The percentage may be 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (k), the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example is an integrated bag image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, and a second disappearance related display SK2-. However, it may be displayed in the above-described manner with reference to FIG.

  After this, first, the integrated haze image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are hidden (FIG. 272 (l)). Next, although not shown in the figure, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 is hidden, and the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 is displayed with good visibility. It becomes like this.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as the precursor effect display that suggests that a reception period will occur. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), when a specific precursor effect display (FIGS. 271 (b) to (f) and FIG. 272 (g)) is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays, It is supposed that the haze image display related to the reception object is displayed both in the precursor period (ie, haze image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and in the reception period (ie, haze image display IG).

  In particular, in this modification, after displaying the haze image display (haze image display TMH) in the precursor period, it is not displayed in the precursor period. Since the haze image display TMH displayed (and not displayed) only in the precursor period is different from the haze image display IG that can be displayed in the reception period, the reception period It is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the time before the occurrence of.

  Also in this modified example, when the image is received within the reception period, the haze image display IG is hidden based on the reception (FIG. 272 (l)). Before the haze image display IG is hidden, a “specific mode that makes it difficult to view the haze image display (second disappearance related display SK2-2)” can appear (FIG. 272 (j), ( k)). However, with respect to the “specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)”, the haze image display TMH that is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is not displayed. So that it does not appear before it is hidden.

  According to such a configuration, within the precursor period (specific precursor indication display), “a specific mode that appears corresponding to the reception period” (second annihilation related display SK2-2) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the cocoon image display The haze image display TMH is hidden without appearing. Therefore, even if the spear image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (a specific precursor indication display), even if the player hides it before the acceptance period occurs, It is possible to make it less likely that a misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended before the end of the period.

  Note that, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display” that can appear in response to the acceptance is referred to as the “specific mode that makes it difficult to view the haze image display (second extinction). A plurality of items including the related display SK2-2) are prepared. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), none of these modes appears in accordance with the haze image display TMH displayed within the precursor period being hidden. It has become. In the above-described modification, an aspect different from any of the plurality of aspects prepared as “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image display” (normal type indication effect display TZE) according to acceptance is displayed in the eyelid image display TMH. Is made to function as “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image display” until the image is hidden. That is, in this case, since it will be recognized as a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display”, even if a “mode that makes it difficult to view the haze image display” appears within the aforesaid period The misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended without the player's knowledge can be made difficult to occur.

  Further, in the above-described modified example, “normal type indication effect display TZE” is displayed as “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the haze image display” until the haze image display TMH is not displayed within the precursor period. When it is accepted within the acceptance period, “second annihilation related display SK2-2” is displayed as “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display” until the haze image display IG is hidden. It was decided. In this regard, the period from when the “normal type indication display TZE” is displayed until it is hidden is the period from when the “second disappearance related display SK2-2” is displayed until it is hidden. It is desirable to make it longer than that in order to improve the game entertainment.

  When the cocoon image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period, the reception object of the type suggested by the cocoon image display TMH is received during the reception period corresponding to the non-display of the cocoon image display TMH. Acceptance (accepting for the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for (operation means), and the acceptance object (operation means) is different from the type of acceptance object (operation means) suggested by the bag image display TMH. It is desirable that acceptance (acceptance for post-acceptance effects corresponding to the acceptance period) is not permitted. That is, in the case of the above-described modification (FIGS. 271 and 272), the 摸 image display 摸 image display TMH displayed within the precursor period suggests the operation button 410 as the reception target, and thus corresponds to this. During the reception period, acceptance (acceptance regarding post-reception effects corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for a reception object (sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the “operation button 410” and the “sword decorative body 5001” as reception targets related to the post-reception effect. In this regard, when the effect is executed in a manner such as “display the spear image display and hide the spear image display within the precursor period”, the “operation button 410” and “sword ornament 5001” It is desirable that the side with a high ratio of appearance of the big hit symbol when it is set as the reception target is set as the reception target. That is, in this case, among the “operation button 410” and the “sword ornament 5001”, the reception object on the side where the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing as the reception object is low, the corresponding reception period occurs. Prior to this, an effect is prevented from being executed in such a manner as to “hide the haze image display within the precursor period after displaying the hail image display”.

  Among the modifications described above with reference to FIG. 271 and FIG. 272, for such “production effects relating to the precursor effect”, a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods, or another It can also be applied to examples. In addition, the “effect mode related to the sign effect” is not applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is an eighth reception period (eighth) different from any of the reception periods. It may be prepared as a variation pattern, an eighth post-reception effect).

  In addition, among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such a “presentation aspect related to the sign effect” is illustrated with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270, and other examples thereof. It is applicable to.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestion display (display including a partition image KG and the like) that reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) with the passage of time within the reception period. is there. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed after the performance has been advanced based on the fact that the player has accepted the action. Since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the presentation is progressing, it is recognized that "there is an acceptance state" after the acceptance. Therefore, it is expected that the tension is suitably maintained.

  In the modification described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, as the remaining time suggestion display, a specific section area (partition image KG) is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600), and the specific section is displayed. The drawing is performed in which the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced in the partitioned area (compartment image KG). Then, after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, not only the specific image (gauge image GG) but also the specific partition region (partition image KG) will continue to be displayed. I have to. According to such a configuration, since the specific section area (partition image KG) is displayed even after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed. ) Can be easily determined as to whether or not the display area has decreased.

  In addition, “the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the presentation has progressed based on the fact that the player's action has been accepted” means that the action by the player has been accepted, for example. In other words, when the presentation has progressed based on the above, the meaning that the display area of the gauge image GG that is left as a predetermined display area is set to 0 (non-display) at a later time point. (FIG. 272 (j)). However, in this case, when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, it is required that the specific partition region (partition image KG) is still displayed, and the specific partition region (partition image KG) is The gauge image GG is not displayed after the timing when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to zero.

  Further, in the modification described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, when an operation by the player is accepted, a remaining time suggestion display (gauge image GG, partition image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the accepted operation. Although not displayed, prior to the display of the remaining time suggestion display, regardless of how much the display area of the gauge image GG is left at the time of acceptance, a specific partition region (partition image KG) is displayed. ), A specific image whose display area is a specific value (predetermined value) is displayed, or a specific partition region (partition image) among a specific partition region (partition image KG) and a gauge image GG. Only KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). That is, in this case, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is proportional) The display area is suddenly reduced by ignoring the law of, and this makes it seem that “the remaining time was unexpectedly set to“ 0 ”, but we were lucky enough to accept it”. Will be able to improve the game entertainment.

  In the modification described above with reference to FIG. 271 and FIG. 272, when the action by the player is accepted (when the progress of the production according to the acceptance is started), the execution is performed before the acceptance. The “description in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced” is continued without being finished. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) with a display area having a specific value is displayed in a specific partition region (partition image KG), or a specific partition region (partition) Of the image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG), only a specific section area (partition image KG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

  In other words, in this case, at the timing (for example, timing tG3a) when the progress of the presentation according to the reception is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing so far is continued. Therefore, even after the acceptance is made, it is expected that it is difficult to recognize “whether the acceptance is made” and the tension is suitably maintained. Also, a depiction that significantly reduces the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image GG) at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) later than the timing (for example, timing tG3a) at which the progress of production according to acceptance is started. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the acceptance was just in time within the effective period (acceptance period), and it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the haze image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range in both periods before and after being accepted. . In this regard, when the timing tG3b at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the acceptance is received, even if the heel image display is in any dynamic position at the time of acceptance, after the acceptance, at a specific dynamic position The haze image display is displayed in a still state (in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), when the timing tG3b arrives, the position where the button position is the highest regardless of the previous button position) Portrayed as in). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), the haze image display is not dynamically displayed after the timing tG3b, and is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. As a result, the above-described effects can be obtained more suitably.

  Among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such “description of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))”, “ The “dynamic display and still image display relating to the heel image display” can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. Further, “description of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” is applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of these reception periods.

  In addition, “description of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” and “dynamic display and static display related to haze image display” are accepted as the first reception. In the case of applying to one of the period to the seventh reception period (which may be any reception period), it is desirable not to apply to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after the acceptance, there is a case where a depiction in which the gauge image GG greatly decreases appears (FIG. 272 (j)) and a case where the depiction does not appear. It will be possible to improve.

  Even during the reception period in which “description of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” and “dynamic display and static display related to 摸 image display” are not applied, After the acceptance, it is desirable to perform depiction for reducing the display area of the gauge image GG and dynamic display itself. That is, in this case, the display area of the gauge image GG is different only in that no depiction is made to greatly reduce the display area while ignoring the laws up to that point, and no static display is performed.

  In each of the above-described production examples and other examples, and modifications thereof, a plurality of reception periods (for example, a first reception period to a seventh reception period) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. Yes. In this regard, with respect to a predetermined reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) among the plurality of reception periods, the symbol variation in which the predetermined reception period has occurred ends. It is assumed that it can continue even after the next symbol variation starts to be executed (it can occur across multiple variations), and a specific reception period (for example, the second reception period) among a plurality of reception periods Period, 4th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) will not continue until the end of the symbol variation that occurred for the specific reception period, rather than the end of the symbol variation. You may make it complete | finish before. In other words, in this case, the spear image display related to the reception object is displayed in both the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period, and when the player's action is received within the predetermined reception period, In any of the cases where an action by the player is accepted during the acceptance period, the mode in which the samurai image display is not hidden when the acceptance is made and the samurai image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) Etc.) will appear. As a result, the operational effect such as “it is possible to indicate that the acceptance period has ended, while being able to confirm which aspect appeared as the bag image display even after acceptance has been made”, Even if it is any of a predetermined reception period and a specific reception period, it can obtain suitably.

  Further, the “predetermined reception period” is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the “specific reception period” is, for example, the second reception period, the fourth reception period, When the reception period is the seventh reception period, the aspect (display related to disappearance) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display is received when “predetermined reception period” that can be maintained across multiple variations, It will be executed as a different mode depending on when the acceptance is made in a “specific reception period” that does not span multiple variations. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period is terminated within the symbol variation being executed, based on the type of “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display (such as disappearance related display)”. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in both the “predetermined reception period” that can occur in the form of multiple variations and the “specific reception period” that does not extend over multiple variations, a spear image display indicating the reception target is displayed. The haze image display may be displayed in a different mode (size, position, etc. for display) between the “predetermined reception period” and the “specific reception period”. For example, in a “specific reception period” that does not span multiple variations, when the heel image display is displayed in the manner described above (displayed only at a predetermined position), it occurs in a manner that spans multiple variations. In a possible “predetermined reception period”, it is desirable to display (moving display) so that the display position of the bag image itself changes. According to such a configuration, even when a “predetermined reception period” occurs in a manner that spans multiple variations, it is possible to prompt the player to receive early.

  In addition, in the “acceptance period” that does not span multiple variations, there are cases where the operation button 410 is used as a reception target and cases where the sword decorative body 5001 is used as a reception target. In the possible “reception period”, the operation button 410 may be used as a reception target, but it is desirable not to use the sword ornament 5001 as a reception target.

  Even in the “acceptance period” that can occur in the form of a plurality of variations, it is desirable that the indication effect display can be executed prior to the occurrence of the “acceptance period”. That is, in this case, the symbol variation is ended while the “precursor effect display” is being executed, and the reception period corresponding to the “precursor effect display” may occur after the symbol variation is terminated. For this reason, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment after the symbol variation ends.

  Also in a “reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)” that can occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, as described above, An aspect (such as disappearance-related display) that makes it difficult to view the image display appears. This “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)” is executed for a predetermined time, but it is a case where the symbol variation is stopped while this is being executed. However, it is desirable that the “mode of making it difficult to visually recognize the haze image display (such as disappearance-related display)” is continued without being terminated halfway.

  “Prediction effect display” executed in response to a “reception period (for example, a first reception period, a third reception period, a fifth reception period, etc.)” that can occur in the form of multiple variations, For the “modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the image display (such as disappearance-related display)”, the time from the stop of the symbol change in the execution state to the start of execution of the next symbol change (the symbol in the execution state) The execution period (the time from when the indication effect display is displayed to when it is hidden) is less visible than the time it takes for the hold to be consumed after the change is stopped It is desirable that the time from the appearance of the mode to the end thereof is ended.

  As described above, in the “reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)” that can occur in the form of a plurality of fluctuations, the “prediction effect display” corresponding thereto And “annihilation-related display” can be displayed. In this regard, if the “annihilation-related display” is displayed before the symbol variation where the “prediction effect display” is displayed, the same area as the area where the “prediction effect display” is displayed (overlapping area) ) Display “Disappearance-related display” in the form of using at least a part of it, and after the symbol variation displaying “Sign indication” is completed (the hold is digested and the next symbol variation begins to be executed) When the “annihilation related display” is displayed, the “annihilation related display” may be displayed using only the area different from the area where the “prediction effect display” is displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that this is executed across a plurality of variations while paying attention to the post-acceptance effect.

  Further, as described above, a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the haze image display, and a “reception period (for example, the second reception period, In the fourth reception period and the seventh reception period), the haze image display is displayed as one of these modes. However, in a “reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)” that may occur in a form that spans multiple variations, a specific aspect (for example, FIG. 232) among the plurality of aspects. It is desirable to display only the schematic image display of (a)). However, a “reception period (for example, second reception period, fourth reception period, seventh reception period)” that does not span multiple variations and a “reception period (for example, In any of the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period), it is desirable that the dynamic display of the haze image display is continued after the reception.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of game states (the first game state and the second game state) having different game conditions (e.g., ease of obtaining a prize ball when a game ball is launched into the game area). Game state). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “accepting period” during which the post-acceptance effect can be performed when an action by the player is accepted includes the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It can occur in any gaming state. Furthermore, when an action by a player is accepted within such a “reception period”, it is assumed that the “reception period” occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. In addition, after the acceptance, “an aspect (such as disappearance related display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the eyelid image” appears while the eyelid image display is displayed. While the “mode (disappearance-related display etc.)” appears, the haze image display is hidden.

  In other words, in this case, there is an effect such as “it is possible to indicate that the acceptance period has ended, while it is possible to confirm which aspect has been displayed as the bag image display after acceptance”. Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, it can be obtained.

  The “first gaming state” corresponds to, for example, a normal gaming state (low probability / non-short time), and the “second gaming state” is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination ( This state corresponds to “a game state different from the normal game state” that can be changed to a state. Any game state may be used as long as the game state is different from the normal game state.

  This will be further described using a plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) exemplified in the above-described production examples and other examples, and modifications thereof. Among the periods, a predetermined type of reception period (for example, the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc., but not all of them are necessarily provided. May be generated only in the first gaming state among the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In contrast, it is assumed that the third reception period among the plurality of reception periods is set to be generated only in the second gaming state among the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Even with such a configuration, the bag image display related to the reception target is made up of a predetermined type of reception period (first gaming state) and a third reception period (second gaming state). Both are displayed. However, in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period), in the second gaming state (when accepted in the second acceptance period) as “an aspect that makes it difficult to view the bag image display” Can appear in a specific mode that cannot appear (the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc., but not necessarily all of them).

  According to such a configuration, the first game state and the first game state can be determined by simply checking which mode appears as the “mode that makes it difficult to view the bag image display” without checking the type of the post-reception effect. It becomes possible to grasp which of the two gaming states is being controlled, and to improve the gaming interest.

  It should be noted that the “aspect that makes it difficult to view the bag image display” in the modification examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270 also appears only when the player is in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first reception period). It may be set as an unobtainable “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the habit image display”. In other words, in this case, it is expected that the gaming interests when the player is in the most disadvantageous state (normal gaming state) are suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the above configuration, in the second gaming state (when accepted in the third acceptance period), the first disappearance-related display is executed as “an aspect in which the heel image display is difficult to visually recognize”. However, the first disappearance-related display can appear even in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period). That is, in this case, the possibility of being in the state controlled by the second gaming state is only shown, so that the tension can be suitably maintained. Further, even when the first gaming state is controlled, when the first disappearance-related display appears, the player is conscious of the possibility of being in the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest.

  The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, or the first game It may occur only in the first gaming state among the state and the second gaming state.

  Further, as described above, during the reception period that occurs in the first gaming state, the simulated image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)). In this regard, in the reception period that occurs in the second gaming state, only the schematic image display of a specific aspect (for example, FIG. 232 (a) which is an aspect with low expectation) among a plurality of aspects is displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, even if a low-expected aspect (FIG. 232 (a)) appears as a simulated image display, the possibility of being in the state controlled to the second gaming state Since the person can be made conscious, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In the first gaming state, when an action by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same aspect as the accepted case appears as the “aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display” (for example, the first gaming state) 2 reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) and a case where an aspect different from the case of acceptance (for example, the 1st reception period) occurs. However, in the second gaming state (third reception period), as the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the heel image display”, the same mode as the case where it was accepted must be made to appear, or It is desirable to make sure that an aspect different from the case where it is accepted appears. According to such a configuration, when an operation is not accepted in the first gaming state, according to whether the same aspect as when there is acceptance appears as “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the bag image display” The possibility that the second gaming state has occurred can be made conscious.

  The reception period (third reception period) that occurs in the second gaming state is the same as the case where it is received as “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the bag image display even if it is not received within the period” When it is generated as “a mode that must always appear”, even if “not received” occurs in the first gaming state for the reception period (third reception period), it is difficult to visually recognize the heel image display. It is desirable that the valid time (set time) as the reception period is longer than any of the “acceptance period in which the same aspect as when accepted” always appears.

  In any of the first game state and the second game state, a predecessor effect display corresponding to this is executed before the reception period occurs. In this regard, in the first gaming state, a specific precursor effect display (a second precursor effect display, a fifth precursor effect display, a seventh precursor effect display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second gaming state is executed. It is desirable to make it.

  The present invention has been described with reference to some embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. It is possible to improve and change the design.

  For example, there is a case where a display such as “auto button is being set” is performed in each of the above-described effects related to the automatic effect function, but this display is not necessarily performed. In particular, when it is realized as a pachinko machine 1 that is not in the pachinko machine 1 that is set to the automatic production mode but is always in a state in which the automatic production function can be activated and the processing itself such as “setting to the production state” is not installed, It is desirable not to display such as “auto button is being set”. In the pachinko machine 1 in which the processing itself such as “setting to the production state” is not installed, the effective period in which the automatic production function is played and the automatic production function are provided according to the type of the operation reception production that is allowed to be operated by the player. An effective period that is not played may be generated.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects, the “摸 image” may be an image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and is always an operation target, such as an arrow image that moves up and down while pointing downward. It does not have to be displayed as an image with manipulation means taken.

  In addition, when the automatic production function is adopted in each production example described above, the timing for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) within the operation effective period is set to any timing within the operation effective period. It may be. In order to suitably give an operation opportunity to a player, an operation is performed when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing after the operation effective period has elapsed and more than half the time has elapsed. It is desirable that reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and a post-operation effect is generated based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. Further, in each of the above-described effect examples related to the automatic effect function, when the bar display is not hidden after the effective period ends and is maintained, the operation to be operated according to the timing at which the effective period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is continuously displayed, it is expected to prevent misrecognition by the player such as “Why does the validity period continue?” Become so.

  Note that, in the above-described example of the effect described above with reference to FIG. 209 or the like, the “post-operation effect” is started without maintaining the haze image (or bar display) without being displayed. Time from the timing at which the operation is detected to the timing at which the haze image (or bar display) is not displayed (periods from timing tf2 to tf4, periods from timing tg3 to tg5, periods from timing th3 to th4, etc.) ”May only have time for at least several frames (for example, two frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame time. Even if there is only such time, the period during which the spear image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the start of the post-operation effect, and may be recognized by some players. In some cases.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “help image for prompting understanding of production”, a ruler is exemplified as “a guide image showing a unit of length in the horizontal direction”, but other images are used. May be. In short, it is sufficient if the player operates a display image that is drawn without being affected by the special effect. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but has other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image that suggests the degree of expectation, an image that suggests the current production state, an image that suggests a state related to production settings, etc.) is drawn to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. In addition, such an image does not necessarily need to be drawn by one, but may be drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

  Also, in the example of “Preventing Mischief against Multiple Operating Means”, mischief acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto. It can lead to profit. Therefore, the images that appear based on the detection of the operation by the player (including images that appear in the process until the specific video appears) should be realized as having nothing to do with prank prevention. Also good. In short, when an operation by a player is performed on a plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), a “game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is executed in the effect display device 1600. Display (playback) a specific video that cannot appear in the current state (it may be a video that has nothing to do with prevention of mischief (for example, a transition to a state in which a predetermined movie is played) ) ”,“ Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes in the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed. ” Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. As long as it performs control to generate me. Note that in this case, the player can generate a function restriction period during which the above-mentioned specific moving image is played by his / her own intention by operating a plurality of operation means with a predetermined pattern (procedure). It is.

  In the example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operation means”, in the state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the partial restriction period may be controlled.

  In addition, for the explanation example of “Preventing noise caused by the adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store”, in short, control to a normal state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to the normal state after passing through the restricted state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and if the game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state is terminated early. It is only necessary to be able to be controlled in a normal state, and the length of time that is maintained as a restricted state may be set appropriately (set from a few seconds to a few hours). Good. If the length of time that is maintained as a restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effects in the game period immediately after opening the store will not be achieved, but noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after turning on the power It is possible to suppress this.

  Further, in the example of “control according to the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the production importance level”, an advantageous condition exists when the first special symbol is changing and when the second special symbol is changing. While the change of the second special symbol on the side where the game is allowed is not output, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, but during the change of the first special symbol on the side where the game is allowed to be performed under disadvantageous conditions The case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is exemplified. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology for gaming machines in which the second special symbol is not mounted, for example, preparing a specific symbol that will be drawn in a condition that is less favorable than the first special symbol However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under advantageous conditions, but the side that can be played under disadvantageous conditions The sound volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the change of the specific symbol.

  In addition, in the explanation example of “Performance of Operation Acceptance Period (Effective Period) itself”, Acceptable Sound Accompanied with Generation of Special Operation Reception Effect and Accompanying Generation of First and Second Operation Reception Effects An effect sound different from the acceptable reception sound may be used. In FIG. 210, the acceptable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11). However, as “one sound data” straddling the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. You may make it output.

  It is also possible to prepare separately the image of the operation receiving unit that receives the operation and the periphery decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image as image data, and display them as an integrated image that combines these image data. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 232, when an “opportunity button 摸 image BMGa” is displayed when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (FIGS. 232 (a) and (c)), There are cases where “special button bag image BMGb” having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and (d)). However, when the “normal button 摸 image BMGa” is displayed (FIGS. 232 (a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving portion), and the “special button” In the case where the “butterfly image BMGb” is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and (d)), the second operation means (second operation receiving part) different from the first operating means (first operation receiving part) is used. An operation opportunity may be given.

  In each example described above, as a member (operation means) prepared as an operation target, a member that requires a pressing operation (pressing operation) (such as a button) or a member that requires a plugging operation (plugging / unplugging operation) (sword) In addition to decoration, etc., it may be realized as a thing requiring a player action such as non-contact or touch (proximity sensor or the like).

  Although the peripheral decoration image SSG does not hesitate the peripheral decoration part actually provided at the periphery of the “operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given”, at least a part of the peripheral decoration image It may be anything that is not, and there may be a part that frowns the peripheral decoration part.

  Regarding the second effective period in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated bag image IG) is displayed in the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG” or the effective period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, The predetermined setting time is not limited, but may be infinite as long as a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is not satisfied.

  When the specific image TG is displayed within the effective period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  As for the “automatic reception effect” described in FIG. 232 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods related to the “automatic reception effect” exemplified before that may be adopted. Any of the above-described realization methods may be adopted as to how the bag image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception effect is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect occurs, the type of the effect state when the reception effect occurs, or the type of the reception effect (post-operation effect) itself, or the reception effect Depending on the conditions that occur, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the same post-operation effect is executed (when the “automatic effect function” is activated) If there is no operation by the player within the effective period, there is a case where the post-operation effect is not executed (the “automatic effect function” is not activated). The timing at which the automatic performance function is activated may be a predetermined timing within the valid period, may be a timing at which the valid period ends, or may be a timing at which a little time has elapsed after the valid period ends. It may be.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Even in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reservation number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reservation Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening

In such a conventional gaming machine, Yu Technical interest is concern that a decrease.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination unit;
A reception effect execution means for generating a reception effect in which a 摸 image display indicating an operation target is displayed;
When an operation is accepted in the reception effect, a post-reception effect executing means for executing a post-acceptance effect according to the operation reception;
With
Upon occurrence of the reception effect, a gaming machine capable of audibly outputting a reception allowable sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted,
A message sound that utters words that should be operated to the player as the acceptance allowable sound, and a non-message sound that does not utter any words but is audibly output only when a period of time during which an operation opportunity is given occurs. Is prepared,
In the reception effect,
A message sound-free reception effect in which the message sound is not audibly output as the acceptable reception sound and the non-message sound can be audibly output, and a message sound reception effect in which the message sound is at least audible as the reception permission sound is included And
In the message sound reception reception effect, when the reception allowable sound is audibly output, even if an operation reception corresponding to the message sound reception reception effect is made, the audible output is not terminated halfway with this, When an operation reception corresponding to the reception effect without the message sound is made when the acceptable reception sound is being audibly output, the audible output may be terminated halfway with this as an opportunity.
In the reception effect with message sound, when an operation reception corresponding to the reception effect with message sound is made when the acceptable reception sound is audibly output, the audible output can be surely terminated in the middle of the reception. And
further,
In the reception effect without message sound, the same sound can be audibly output as the acceptable reception sound in the case where the audible output of the acceptable reception sound is not terminated halfway and in the case where the audible output of the acceptable reception sound can be terminated halfway. And
further,
In the case where the reception allowable sound is audibly output in the message sound reception reception effect, even if an operation reception corresponding to the message sound reception reception effect is made, if the audible output is not terminated halfway, this reception An audible output of a production sound corresponding to the operation reception is started while an allowable sound is audibly output .

Claims (1)

A determination means for performing determination;
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means;
An accepting means for accepting an action by a player so as to be used for production;
摸 image display means capable of displaying 摸 image display related to the reception object;
It is possible to generate a specific reception period in which the reception by the reception unit is allowed, and when an operation by the player is received within the specific reception period, a process of causing the presentation to proceed based on the reception is executed. Possible reception production execution means,
Prior to the occurrence of the specific reception period, a sign production execution means capable of displaying a specific sign production display,
The specific precursor effect display can be executed in a manner straddling the timing at which the specific reception period occurs, and an action by the player can be accepted while the specific precursor effect display is displayed. Yes,
The accepting means is
A first reception means for receiving a predetermined action by a player so that it can be used for production, and a second reception that is different from the first reception means for receiving a specific action by a player for use in production. Means at least,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light during the specific reception period in which the player is allowed to accept an operation;
further,
The reception effect execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that a process for advancing an effect can be executed in any of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation based on the determination result of the determining means.